Today’s News 23rd April 2020

  • Unsealed Court Docs Expose Spanish Spy Firm Dirty Tricks: Stealing Assange's Son's Dirty Diaper, Tracking Mom
    Unsealed Court Docs Expose Spanish Spy Firm Dirty Tricks: Stealing Assange’s Son’s Dirty Diaper, Tracking Mom

    Bombshell revelations via court documents this week reveal how a Spanish security firm tracked the mother of Julian Assange’s fiancée, illegally recorded hours of footage of Assange’s son, and also stole his son’s dirty diapersreported RT News.

    Stella Morris, a 37-year old South African-born lawyer, revealed herself as WikiLeaks founder’s fiancée on April 11, several days before a London court was about to lift a non-publication order on her name.

    Morris had two children with Assange in the Ecuadorian embassy in London between 2012 and 2019.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Spanish court documents this week expose how Spanish security firm UC Global’s owner, David Morales, has been accused of privacy violation, bribery, and money laundering.

    The Ecuadorian embassy in London contracted Morales’ company for security work, but it turns out Morales was surveilling Assange for US intelligence agencies.

    The document shows that Morales sent an email to staff on September 21, 2017, requesting “special attention on Stella Morris.”

    He ordered his team to follow Morris’ mother and found she was living in Catalonia.

    “If necessary, I want a person fully dedicated to this activity, so if you have to hire someone to do it, let me know,” Morales wrote in an email. 

    “All this has to be considered top secret so the dissemination will be limited,” the email continued.

    Morales also had staff videotape the child stored on computer hard drives were turned over to the Spanish courts by a former UC Global employee.

    The former staff member gave a sworn statement to the Spanish courts indicating that Morales was overly obsessed in determining if Assange was the father of Morris’ child. The statement also said they were instructed to steal the baby’s dirty diapers to conduct DNA tests.

    El Pais newspaper said earlier this week that DNA on the diaper wouldn’t be sufficient for a paternity test, which led Morales to devise a plan among staff members to steal the baby’s pacifier.

    The former staff member eventually confronted Morris outside of the embassy and spilled the beans about the operation.

    “I went to the child’s mother outside the embassy and asked her please indicate that you will no longer take the child to the embassy because they planned to steal his diapers to prove that he was the son of Julian Assange,” the statement said. 

    Assange’s lawyers indicate that Morales was working for US intelligence agencies at the time.

    And the story gets more strange. At one point, Morales blackmailed Ecuador’s foreign intelligence agency SENAIN with nudes of a diplomat stolen from her computer after he found his contract with the embassy was going to be terminated. 

    “These extremely private photographs were allegedly in the possession of UC GLOBAL, were printed and were part of an extortion report that sought to prevent SENAIN from terminating the contract,” Assange’s lawyers wrote in a criminal complaint. 

    Morales faces 175 years’ imprisonment for the spy crimes he allegedly committed on Assange.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 02:45

  • Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You're Not Being Told, Part 2
    Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You’re Not Being Told, Part 2

    Authored by Iain Davis via Off-Guardian.org,

    In Part 1 we looked at the reasons why questioning the coronavirus lockdown, despite the ever present allegation, does not demonstrate a callous disregard for human life. We are going to expand on why it doesn’t in this article.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I am based in the UK so much of this discussion relates to the decisions of the British State, but this is a global policy agenda and similar policies are found across the developed world. Effectively a small group of policy decision makers have placed an estimated 3.5 billion people under house arrest. It is only possible for them to do so with our consent. Consent is carefully cultivated by controlling the information we are given.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the vast majority their only source of information is the corporate mainstream media (MSM) and the public announcements of the State. This article is written, as ever, in the hope people will do their own research and make up their own minds.

    We are going to look at the evidence which strongly suggests the State and the MSM, adhering to a globalist agenda, have colluded to mislead the public into believing the COVID 19 (C19) threat is far greater than it actually is.

    C19 can be fatal for those with pre-existing comorbidities, and possibly even some without, as can other forms of pneumonia and influenza-like respiratory illness. However, while every C19 death has been reported, none of the far greater number of people who have died in the UK this year from other respiratory infections have even been mentioned.

    Systems have been created to ensure the C19 statistics are as terrifying as possible. Their statistical product is so vague it borders upon meaningless. It seems we have been inculcated with misplaced fear to justify the lockdown regime, to convince us to accept it and prepare us for what is to come.

    I apologise for the article’s length but I hope you will read it in its entirety. There’s a lot of ground to cover, so please grab a coffee before we begin.

    LOCKDOWN ADVISED BY WHO?

    The World Health Organisation (WHO) is financed through a combination of assessed and voluntary contributions.

    Assessed contributions are paid by nation states for WHO membership and figures are released quarterly.

    Voluntary contributions are additional contributions from member states and “other partners.” For some reason these figures haven’t been reported for more than three years.

    About 80% of the WHO’s finances come from voluntary contributions.

    In its most recent 2017 voluntary contribution report the WHO accounted for the $2.1 billion it received from private foundations and global corporations.

    This compared to just over $1 billion voluntarily provided by governments.

    Contributors included GlaxoSmithKline, Bayer AG, Sanofi, Merck and Gilead Sciences whose drug remdesivir is currently being trialled, along side the off patent hydroxychloroquine, as a possible preventative treatment for COVID 19.

    The remdesivir trial is part of the WHO’s SOLIDARITY trials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The third-largest single contributor in 2017 was GAVI. Formerly called the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization, they contributed nearly $134 million. GAVI are partnered with the WHO, UNICEF, the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and the World Bank to sell vaccines globally.

    The World Bank contributed nearly $146 million themselves and the largest individual payment, by some margin, at nearly $325 million came from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation (BMGF). Though like many other foundations and corporations, through their various networks of interlinked partnerships, their overall contribution was much higher.

    Among other beneficiaries of the BMGF’s generosity are the Vaccine Impact Modelling Consortium (VIMC) led by Professor Neil Ferguson.  They are based at Imperial College London and are directly funded by the BMGF and GAVI. Their objective is to provide statistical data analysis for the BMGF and GAVI in order for them to sell more vaccines.

    Prof. Ferguson not only led the team who created the hopelessly inaccurate prediction which the U.S and UK governments based their lockdown regimes upon, he also co-founded the MRC Centre for Outbreak Analysis and Modelling who worked with the WHO in 2009 to create ridiculous computer models predicting the H1N1 pandemic.

    In 2009 the world went crazy after the WHO declared the H1N1 influenza pandemic. This resulted in billions being spent on very expensive H1N1 vaccines and antiviral treatments although it turned out the pandemic was indistinguishable from seasonal flu.

    The only people who benefited from pointless vaccines and unnecessary medication were the manufacturers GlaxoSmithKline, Roche and Novartis. Each of these pharmaceutical corporations were among the largest voluntary contributors to the WHO in 2008/2009 financial year.

    With an $84 million investment, the Swiss pharmaceutical giant Roche were the largest single contributor into the WHO’s coffers that year. Luckily, as it turned out, they could afford it because sales of their unnecessary Tamiflu H1N1 medication rocketed to more than £3 billion following the WHO’s declared H1N1 pandemic. Which was just a coincidence.

    The whole debacle resulted in the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe (PACE) launching an investigation into the WHO to look into the issue of a “falsified pandemic.” During the subsequent hearing the epidemiologist Dr Wolfgang Wodarg said:

    The WHO basically held the trigger for the pandemic preparedness plans, they had a key role to play in deciding on the pandemic. Around 18 billion dollars was spent on this pandemic worldwide. Millions were vaccinated for no good reason. It is not even clear that the vaccine had a positive effect, because it was not clinically tested.”

    At the same hearing Professor Dr Ulrich Keil, Director of the WHO Collaborating Centre for Epidemiology at the University of Munster, said:

    A number of scientists and others are questioning the decision of the WHO to declare an international pandemic. The H1N1 virus is not a new virus, but has been known to us for decades […] In Germany, about 10,000 deaths are attributed to seasonal ‘flu, especially among older and frail people. Only a very small number of deaths, namely 187, can be attributed to the H1N1 virus in Germany – and many of those are dubious.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus

    Of course nothing came of it because PACE were making allegations against the World Health Organisation. The WHO don’t break the rules, they make the rules. Amazingly, probably because no one ever learns anything from history, we all believed the WHO this time.

    To imagine these huge investments made by pharmaceutical corporations and private foundations don’t buy influence is so naive it barely warrants mention. The WHO is essentially a policy lobby group for the powerful globalists who own it. Why an organisation with such significant and clear conflicts of financial interests should be considered a global health authority is anyone’s guess.

    On the 11th March the WHO declared the SARS-CoV-2 global pandemic. On 15th March 2020 UK Health Secretary Matt Hancock stated that vulnerable people would be required to quarantine themselves or self isolate. 

    The State issued a set of guidelines for avoiding the spread of infection. On the 16th March UK Prime Minister Boris Johnson issued a statement advising people to practice social distancing, avoid non essential travel and warned that drastic measures may be needed to protect the NHS and the most vulnerable.

    On the 18th of March the Director General of the BMGF funded WHO Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus gave a virtual press conference. He stated:

    WHO continues to call on all countries to implement a comprehensive approach with the aim of slowing down transmission and flattening the curve. This approach is saving lives and buying time for the development of vaccines and treatments. As you know, the first vaccine trial has begun……This virus is presenting us with an unprecedented threat”

    We are about to discuss why COVID 19 is not an unprecedented threat. On the 20th of March Boris Johnson ordered the closure of all venues for social gathering, such as pubs, cafes and restaurants. On March 23rd the UK State legislated for the Coronavirus Act and placed the UK in lockdown. Just as the WHO and their other partners called on them to do.

    LOCKDOWN TO PROTECT THE NHS

    The NHS was created to protect us, that’s why we pay for it. It is difficult to pinpoint exactly when this relationship flipped on its head.

    After years of chronic underfunding by successive governments of all persuasions, interminable mismanagement, savage ideologically driven austerity cuts, crippling Private Finance Initiative debts and increasing privatisation for corporate profit, there is absolutely no reason to believe the State cares about either our health or the NHS.

    Every single major health policy and legislative decision, made over the last few decades, clearly demonstrates that it doesn’t.

    The basic premise, apparently believed by so many, that the State has now decided to act to keep us safe is tragically comical. For us to swallow this tripe we need to be sufficiently terrified to willingly accept the imagined protection of the State. The MSM has been doing its best to make sure we are and that we do. The 24 hour fear-porn cycle is a wonder to behold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NHS dance routines are a sensation

    Most of this is based upon claims about deaths and stories about desperately overloaded hospitals struggling to cope with the pressure. Meanwhile, as millions of British people remain under house arrest, glued to their TV’s and fondle pads, the data that has been released by official sources doesn’t back up any of the tales we have been spun.

    This inconvenient truth has been reported by very few in the MSM print media and has been met with deafening silence on our TV’s. Rather, the data has been convincingly spun to tell a story that doesn’t stand up to scrutiny.

    Evidence of NHS overload is entirely absent. The State will claim this is thanks to the lockdown regime. Certainly the fact that people with other serious conditions haven’t been treated has alleviated pressure on the NHS. Unfortunately, the evidence also indicates the lockdown regime is probably killing them in increasing numbers. Though it seems unlikely the State will claim responsibility for that.

    The Financial Times reported that close to half of the UK’s hospital beds were empty. With just 60% of acute beds occupied this is 30% less than this time last year.

    In the same period last year the NHS was creaking under the pressure of demand, prompting then Prime Minister Theresa May to suggest scrapping NHS targets. Once again, the State was only concerned with how the figures looked not about people dying on trolleys in corridors. This year it cares, honest!

    During a supposed global pandemic we’ve had the lowest ever national A&E attendance. Manchester hospitals report a 57% bed occupation rate compared to their average of 94%.

    Most concerning is the huge drop in cardiology patients. With Heart disease killing more than 40,000 people under the age of 75 every year in the UK, and with a reported rise in fatalities last year, this prompted Professor John Howarth from North Cumbria Integrated Care NHS Foundation Trust to express grave concern.

    “I am really worried that people are not seeking the help they need for important conditions other than Covid-19.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nightingales – empty!

    Indeed, if your world view is supplied by the MSM, deaths from anything other than C19 seem to have become practically irrelevant in the space of a few weeks. The Health Service journal (HSJ) reports that the NHS has four times as many empty beds as normal. Confirming that more than 40% of acute beds are unoccupied.

    Even in London, the alleged epicentre of the C19 pandemic, that figure is still nearly 29%.

    The much publicised Nightingale temporary hospitals, a mobilisation the MSM were keen to portray as putting the nation on a war footing, which were allegedly required to cope with the surge of C19 patients, aren’t necessary.

    Of the 1,555 Intensive Care Unit (ICU) beds available in London 1,245 are occupied. So questions must be asked why 19 patients, who presumably needed intensive care, were seemingly moved unnecessarily into the 4,000 bed London Nightingale over the Easter weekend.

    Contrary to the claimed justification for the lockdown, as many have repeatedly warned, the health consequences of the lockdown regime could far outweigh the risks presented by C19.

    Excess mortality this year is higher than average but reported coronavirus deaths form a smaller part of that bigger picture.

    The HSJ reported a senior NHS sources who stated:

    There could be some very serious unintended consequences. While there will be a lot of covid-19 fatalities, we could end up losing more ‘years of life’ because of fatalities relating to non-covid-19 health complications.”

    The deputy director of research at the Nuffield Trust Sarah Scobie echoed this concern:

    The PHE [Public Health England] data suggests there could be significant problems already developing for heart disease related conditions patients, for example. Attendances relating to myocardial infarction at emergency departments have dropped right down, whereas ambulance calls in relation to chest pain have gone right up.”

    Not only is there no evidence that the NHS is even close to struggling to cope with a non-existent surge, the likely severe health consequences of the State’s lockdown policy are starting to emerge. When we look at the data on claimed COVID 19 deaths the picture only becomes more alarming.

    LOCKDOWN & REPORTED DEATHS

    Everyday, for weeks, the MSM has reported every single UK death which was supposedly due to COVID 19. This has been central to their effort to convince us of the severity of the pandemic. The reporting always supports the State’s narrative that the lockdown is necessary.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under normal circumstances, when someone dies, a person who knows them well, such as a family member, or someone who was physically close to the person at the time of death, is the qualified informant who can notify the registrar of the circumstances and non medical details of the death.

    That is not true for suspected C19 patients. For them a funeral director, who has almost certainly never met the deceased, can be the qualified informant. This places far more emphasis on the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death (MCCD) as registration can take place without any input from family or anyone else familiar with the circumstances of the death.

    Prior to the Coronavirus Act, the last attending doctor to the deceased had the responsibility to register the death. However, in the case of suspected C19 deaths, that duty can be discharged by a doctor who has never met the patient.

    The UK State guidance for C19 patients states:

    A doctor who attended the deceased during their last illness has a legal responsibility to complete a MCCD….. this duty may be discharged through another doctor who may complete an MCCD in an emergency period….In an emergency period, any doctor can complete the MCCD….For the purposes of the emergency period, the attendance may be in person, via video/visual consultation, but not audio (e.g. via telephone)….Where the certifying doctor has not seen the deceased before death they should delete the words last seen alive by me on.

    When an MCCD is completed the medical causes are listed sequentially with the immediate cause of death at the top and the underlying cause of death at the bottom of the list. For example, heart failure caused by pneumonia stemming from influenza would list the immediate cause of death as a heart attack and the underlying cause as influenza. That underlying cause is usually diagnosed through positive test results.

    It is crucial to understand that for C19 to be recorded on the MCCD, as the underlying cause of death, there does not need to be any test based diagnosis of the syndrome. Diagnosis can simply be from observation of symptoms or CT scans. The guidance to medical practitioners states:

    if before death the patient had symptoms typical of COVID 19 infection, but the test result has not been received, it would be satisfactory to give ‘COVID-19’ as the cause of death, tick Box B and then share the test result when it becomes available. In the circumstances of there being no swab, it is satisfactory to apply clinical judgement.

    Given this seeming lack of clarity, guidance from the Royal College of Pathologists (RCP) is also concerning.

    In circumstances where C19 is merely believed to be a factor they advise that there is no need for a post mortem.

    If a death is believed to be due to confirmed COVID-19 infection, there is unlikely to be any need for a post-mortem examination to be conducted and the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death should be issued.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Karry Mullis

    Post-mortems are not standard procedure and are normally required only where the cause of death is unknown or where the circumstances appear suspicious. However, the recommendation of the RCP is another part of a systemic approach to C19 deaths which is inexplicably opaque.

    Even when a sample test is undertaken to identify C19, questions remain. The RT-PCR test commonly used to test for C19 does not appear to be very reliable, nor is it designed as a diagnostic tool for identifying viruses.

    study from the Department of Microbiology, Queen Mary Hospital, University of Hong Kong found wild variations in RT-PCR accuracy. It was found to be between 22%  – 80% reliable depending on how it was applied. This general unreliability has been confirmed by other studies. Further studies show clear discrepancies between RT-PCR test results and clinical indication from CT scans.

    Most of these studies indicate RT-PCR failure to detect C19 in symptomatic patients, so-called “false negative” tests. When Chinese researchers from the Department of Epidemiology and Biostatistics School of Public Health conducted data analysis of the RT-PCR tests of asymptomatic patients they also found an 80% false positive rate.

    Having passed peer review and publication the paper was subsequently withdrawn for what seem quite bizarre reasons. It was removed from the scientific literature because it “depended on theoretical deduction.” The paper was not testing an experimental hypothesis, it was an epidemiological analysis of the available statistical data. All such statistical analysis relies upon theoretical deduction. The claimed reason for withdrawal suggests that all data analysis is now considered to be completely useless.

    It seems scientific claims that C19 numbers are underestimated are fine, claims they are overestimated are not. Either way, whether false negative or false positive, there is plenty of evidence to question the reliability of the RT-PCR test for diagnosing COVID 19.

    The MSM has suggested that enhanced RT-PCR testing can detect the virus SARS-CoV-2 and, in particular, the amount of it in the patient’s system, the viral load. This is disinformation.

    The Nobel winning scientist who devised PCR, Karry Mullis, speaking about the use of PCR to detect HIV stated:

    Quantitative PCR is an oxymoron. PCR is intended to identify substances qualitatively, but by its very nature is unsuited for estimating numbers [viral load]…These tests cannot detect free, infectious viruses at all…The tests can detect genetic sequences of viruses, but not viruses themselves.”

    Reported C19 deaths can be registered without a test clearly diagnosing any coronavirus, let alone C19. The death can be signed off by a doctor who has never seen the patient and can then be registered by someone who has never met the deceased and was nowhere near them when they died.

    Further provision in the Coronavirus Act then allows for the body to be cremated, potentially against the family’s wishes, ensuring a confirmatory autopsy is impossible, though it is unlikely one will be conducted anyway.

    To say this raises questions about the official reported statistics is an understatement. Questions in no way allege either medical malpractice or negligence. Neither are required for significant confusion to occur because the potential for widespread misreporting of causes of death seems to be a core element of the C19 MCCD process the State has constructed.

    LOCKDOWN THE DATA

    At the time of writing The UK is said to have 93,873 cases with 12,107 deaths attributed to C19. Both the infection and mortality rates are showing a declining trend.

    Given the apparent haphazard reliability of tests, strange reporting procedures and oddly relaxed registration requirements, the claimed attribution is pretty weak.

    Coupled with the data which shows unusually low hospital admissions, with little to no evidence of the widely anticipated “surge,” justification for the State’s lockdown of society and the economy appears painfully thin. The evidence base does not improve when we look at the official data.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ONS Data

    The Office of National Statistics (ONS) have released analysis of the C19 deaths that occurred during March 2020

    In total 3,912 deaths were recorded of which 3,372 (86%) listed C19 as the underlying cause of death. Of these, 38 (1%) were cases where C19 was only suspected as the underlying cause, meaning neither a test nor any clear clinical presentation was observed. The problem is that the RT-PCR test, supposedly confirming C19, doesn’t tell us much either.

    Of the 3,372 deaths recorded with underlying C19, approximately 3,068 had at least one comorbidity with the majority having more than two. Not only does the RT-PCR test fail to provide any reliable proof that these people even had C19 the existence of other comorbidities provides further reason to question if the C19 was a contributory factor.

    Of the 3,912 people who died, 540 of them merely mentioned C19 on the MCCG with no indication that it contributed to the deaths. With at least 91% of patients having comorbidities, there is very little evidence that the people who died with a C19 infection wouldn’t have died without.

    The age profile of the deceased is practically identical to standard all cause mortality in the UK. If C19 is a viral pandemic it is one that behaves like normal mortality.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, despite all this, the MSM reported every one of them to the public as confirmed C19 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another, perhaps even more alarming possibility has arisen. While heart disease accounts for 14% of C19 comorbidities, reported deaths from heart disease have mysteriously dropped by the corresponding amount during the same period. This clearly indicates that patients dying from other causes, such as heart failure, are being recorded, and certainly reported by the MSM, as dying from C19.

    This illustrates a far more complex picture than we have been given to believe. Why have the State and the MSM made so many alarming claims about people dying from C19 when the evidence supporting those claims is, at best, questionable?

    None of this is the fault of medical practitioners or bodies like the Office Of National Statistics (ONS). The ONS system has been both reliable and informative for many years. Yet once again, in the case of C19 deaths, the State felt it was necessary to make some changes.

    On the March 30th the MSM reported that the UK State had instructed the ONS to change the way they record C19 deaths. Explaining the change to recording “mentions” of COVID 19 an unnamed spokesperson for the ONS said:

    It will be based on mentions of Covid-19 on death certificates. It will include suspected cases of Covid-19 where someone has not been tested positive for Covid-19.”

    This habit of states deciding to change the C19 mortality data, by adding in people who are assumed to have died from it, appears to be a global policy. The China CDC did the same and the U.S have just added a significant number to their statistics.

    In every case the revision increases and never decreases the fatality statistics. Why do states around the world feel the need to do this? Is it because they are concerned about statistical rigour or are they more concerned about justifying their lockdown regimes?

    The ONS reported all cause mortality for week 14 ending April 3rd. They recorded 16,387 deaths which was 6,082 higher than the ONS 5 year average. They stated that 21.2% of total deaths “mentioned” Covid 19. The MSM immediately pounced on this claiming this meant COVID 19 had pushed up the death toll to unprecedented levels. This was outrageous disinformation. That is not what the data showed.

    The ONS stated that of the 6,082 excess deaths 3,475 “mentioned” coronavirus. Of those 1,466 also mentioned influenza and pneumonia. Consequently, while registered deaths are 6,082 above the 5 year average, only 2009 of those solely mentioned C19 with 4,073 mentioning other underlying causes. It is worth remembering only C19 deaths can be “mentioned” without a clear positive test result

    Therefore, at least 67% of that excess mortality is being caused by other unknown factors that no one seems to care about. The MSM have absolutely no interests at all in this more severe health crisis. Why not? Once again they have completely misled the public and deny the existence of another, more significant reason for concern. Perhaps anticipating this the ONS stated:

    “Influenza and Pneumonia” has been included for comparison, as a well-understood cause of death involving respiratory infection that is likely to have somewhat similar risk factors to COVID-19.”

    Short of openly stating that C19 is no more deadly than any other pneumonia like illnesses, the ONS appear to be trying to get a message across. Perhaps they can’t say it directly.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ONS data showing mortality in 2020 comparing C19 to other respiratory illness

    As the so called pandemic has progressed more in depth studies have begun to emerge. Initial findings from Chinese scientists indicate that SARS-CoV-2 has an infection fatality rate (IFR) of between 0.04% and 0.12%. which is comparable to flu pandemics with an estimated IFR of 0.1%. None of these have required a lockdown regime.

    Further studies have highlighted the overestimated risk allegedly presented by SARS-CoV-2. [Including a new study released just yesterday – ed.]

    For the year to date, the ONS showed a comparison of the deaths mentioning C19 and deaths mentioning pneumonia and Influenza. Deaths this year from pneumonia and influenza appear to stand at around 30,000.

    Quite clearly, according to the ONS, other respiratory infections, like pneumonia and influenza, currently pose a significantly greater threat to life than COVID 19. Something is certainly pushing up mortality in the UK but, at the very most, only 33% of that increase is vaguely attributable to C19.

    LOCKDOWN TO COVER A MYRIAD OF SINS

    The MSM have recently started floating the idea that the lockdown regime could become the new normal.

    According to the State it may be necessary to go in an out of various levels of the regime from time to time, depending on the State’s threat assessment. This is based on scientific research bought and paid for by pharmaceutical corporations and private foundations including GlaxoSmithKline (Wellcome Trust).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Immunity control citizen

    Seeing as it is increasingly evident that the C19 threat has been massively over-hyped, why would the State and its globalist partners want the economic destruction to continue?

    Firstly it delivers on a number of long held globalist objectives.

    A cashless society, mandatory vaccination, universal basic income, a surveillance state, restricted freedom of movement and a complete restructuring of the global economy have already been touted as necessary following the “pandemic.” All of these ambitions and economic realities existed before the pandemic first emerged in China.

    The State has already moved towards censoring anyone who questions vaccines. It is vital to understand that the canard of the antivaxxer is a meaningless trope.

    It is entirely possible to accept that vaccines can contribute towards effective preventative public health programs while, at the same time, questioning the efficacy and purpose of some vaccines. Vaccines are not all the same.

    The State’s and the MSM’s insistence that anyone who question any vaccines is some sort of whacked out, new age, science Luddite is total nonsense. No one will be permitted to question vaccines, and that fact alone should be sufficient to raise anyone’s suspicion.

    From GAVI to the WHO and from the BMGF to Imperial College the response to the C19 pandemic has been driven by foundations and pharmaceutical corporations with considerable investments in vaccine development. Of course they would like to see global mandatory vaccination.

    To just ignore this, because you’ve been told by the MSM that questioning any vaccine is a “conspiracy theory”, not only evidences a lack of critical thinking it demonstrates a degree of brainwashing.

    Global financial institutions, such as the IMF, have been advocating the cashless society for years. A cashless society will allow central banks to control every aspect of your life.

    Everything you buy can be tracked and your purchases could easily be limited to exclude certain items.

    Although there is very little evidence that handling cash presents any increased threat of infection that hasn’t stopped the MSM from selling the idea.

    The impact of the lockdown regime across the globe has already had a devastating economic impact. All the indicators are that the regime will throw the global economy into a deep depression. The longer it continues the worse it will get.

    The tendency of some to claim this doesn’t matter because saving life is the only concern is hopelessly myopic. The link between poverty and significantly increased mortality is beyond dispute. The cure will definitely be far worse than the disease.

    As millions are forced into unemployment the outlook isn’t good. However, while the State will undoubtedly claim that unemployment has been caused by the C19 crisis, in truth the imminent economic collapse was already driving up unemployment before the crisis began.

    This has led to increasing calls for the State to provide a Universal Basic Income.

    This will create mass dependency upon the State for  huge swathes of the population. Affording the State immeasurable control over people’s lives. In a cashless society, people who don’t behave in accordance with State regulations, could be punished financially. Instant fines will be commonplace.

    We are already seeing how that control can be deployed within a surveillance society as the State and its compliant MSM put the idea of immunity passports into the public imagination.

    The link between this and mandatory vaccination is obvious. This proposed policy comes straight from the heart of the globalist think tanks.

    ID2020 is a globalist initiative which intends to provide everyone on earth with an authorised identity. GAVI, Microsoft, BMGF and the Rockerfeller Foundation are among the happy ID2020 alliance who will decide who you are allowed to be.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Biometric ID controlled by your friendly ID2020 globalists – Because they care!

    Comically they claim that proving who you are to the State is somehow a human right. This is utter bilge. I don’t know about you, but I know who I am and so do the people I care about. I couldn’t care less who the State thinks I am. Like everyone else on Earth you were born with inalienable human rights. The State doesn’t define what they are, they just choose to ignore them.

    ID2020 is in no way objective. Your digital biometric ID can be “good” which means it can also be “bad.” Bill Gates and Rockerfellers are among those who state:

    With a “good” digital identity you can enjoy your rights to privacy, security, and choice.”

    Which means you can’t if its “bad.” As longs as you are a good citizen, do as you are told, get your mandatory vaccinations and don’t step out of line, you can have your rights because megalomaniacs think they are gods who have the power to allow or deny them.

    Your digital ID will control the information you are allowed to access and your immunity passport will almost certainly be part of your State authorised identity as we move towards something indistinguishable from China’s social credit system.

    It will be used to monitor your behaviour.

    Your immunity passport status will depend upon where you go and who with. The State has decided that we all need contact tracing apps to regulate who we meet and limit our freedom of movement.

    If you meet the wrong person or go to the wrong area, or perhaps fail to produce your authorisation Q-code on demand, then you will be locked down.

    Perhaps the biggest deception of all is yet to come as the State manoeuvres to blame the C19 for the economic collapse.

    Firstly, it isn’t C19 but rather the lockdown regime that has sped up destruction of the economy, but that destruction was inevitable anyway. The 2008 credit crunch was a failure of the banks. They speculated in the markets and lost.

    As a result we have endured a decade of austerity to bail them out. Socialism only applies to those who can afford it. Austerity has reduced essential public services to rubble, and now, when we supposedly need them most, we’ve all been placed under house arrest to stop us using them while many of the most vulnerable have been ignored. The irony is laughable.

    While we’ve all suffered austerity, the central banks have been printing funny money, blowing up the debt bubble to unimaginable proportions.

    The result has been increasing consumer debt, staggering levels of corporate borrowing and, though government deficits have reduced, government debt is off the charts, even in comparison to 2010 levels.

    This kind of debt-based economy was never sustainable and global financiers have known it for years.

    What the globalists needed was a reason to reset the economy without losing power. Perhaps it is another coincidence that the C19 lockdown regime just happens to deliver both the mechanism and the excuse to press that global reset button. That it also ushers in all the globalist’s desires is just another in a very long line of remarkable coincidences.

    Now that global terrorism is no longer a daily threat and global warming has been put on the back burner, the new normal of the ever shifting threat from pandemic seems to be the novel war on terrorTraining, funding and equipping terrorist groups has served the State well in the first two decades of the 21st century but now it is ready to move on to the next phase by exploiting a terror closer to the heart of every home. Disease.

    In their totality, for those willing to look, it is transparent that these response measures have coalesced to create the framework for a totalitarian dictatorship. One rolling out at pace in the UK. Similar draconian diktats have sprung up across the globe.

    A coordinated global effort like this doesn’t just happen. It takes years of training and planning. The only people who can’t see it are those who, for whatever reason, choose not to.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 02:00

  • Iran Hails First 'Successful' Military Satellite Launch, But US Intelligence Says 'Failure' To Orbit
    Iran Hails First ‘Successful’ Military Satellite Launch, But US Intelligence Says ‘Failure’ To Orbit

    Amid soaring tensions with the US and on the same day that President Trump issued a provocative tweet ordering the Navy to “shoot down and destroy” Iranian gunboats in the gulf, Iran’s Revolutionary Guards (IRGC) announced the successful launch of the country’s first military satellite on Wednesday.

    Calling the surprise satellite launch (to the West that is) a “great success,” the IRGC statement hailed that “The first satellite of the Islamic Republic of Iran has been successfully launched into orbit by the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps.” State media and the elite guard further called it “a great success and a new development in the field of space for Islamic Iran.”

    However, unnamed American defense sources are pouring cold water on the claim, with Fox News citing that “U.S. intelligence has not detected any new satellites orbiting Earth, indicating Iran’s satellite launch likely a failure, officials say.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The United States has long countered that the Islamic Republic’s satellite and space program is actually cover the further development of banned ballistic missiles. Western leaders as well as Israel have charged that Tehran desires to achieve nuclear warhead delivery capability through the program.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wednesday’s successful launch, via Iranian state media.

    Undeterred by the fact that two recent satellite launch attempts in August of last year and in February of this year were spectacular failures (with a US or Israeli cyberattack allegedly involved in sabotaging the latter), Iran pushed forward with the launch which has apparently caught Washington by surprise

    This also explains in part Trump’s seemingly ‘random’ lashing out at Iran Wednesday morning: “I have instructed the United States Navy to shoot down and destroy any and all Iranian gunboats if they harass our ships at sea,” the president tweeted early morning.

    Iranian state TV covered the launch, further details of which are described by AFP as follows:

    The satellite dubbed the Nour — meaning “light” in Persian — had been launched from the Markazi desert, a vast expanse in Iran’s central plateau.

    The satellite “orbited the Earth at 425 kilometres (264 miles)” above sea level, said Sepahnews.

    The rocket itself was named  Qassed, meaning “messenger”, and contained a Koranic inscription that read: “Glory be to God who made this available to us, otherwise we could not have done it.” 

    The milestone unleashed national celebrations at a moment Iran’s leaders needed to show their population a positive achievement, given the multiple disasters of the past months

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This includes losing Gen. Qassem Soleimani to a US assassination by drone, and the subsequent Ukrainian airline disaster which the IRGC belatedly owned up to, but mostly the more recent coronavirus pandemic which has sent the economy plunging further amid the state of national emergency.

    Meanwhile, the real question remains whether the satellite is actually now orbiting the earth, which early US intelligence statements appear to dispute.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 01:00

  • Human Lab Rats: The US Government's Secret History Of Grisly Experiments
    Human Lab Rats: The US Government’s Secret History Of Grisly Experiments

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “They were monsters with human faces, in crisp uniforms, marching in lockstep, so banal you don’t recognize them for what they are until it’s too late.”

    – Ransom Riggs, Miss Peregrine’s Home for Peculiar Children

    I have never known any government to put the best interests of its people first, and this COVID-19 pandemic is no exception.

    Now this isn’t intended to be a debate over whether COVID-19 is a legitimate health crisis or a manufactured threat. Such crises can—and are—manipulated by governments in order to expand their powers. As such, it is possible for the virus to be both a genuine menace to public health and a menace to freedom.

    Yet we can’t afford to overlook the fact that governments the world over, including the U.S. government, have unleashed untold horrors upon the world in the name of global conquest, the acquisition of greater wealth, scientific experimentation, and technological advances, all packaged in the guise of the greater good.

    While the U.S. government is currently looking into the possibility that the novel coronavirus spread from a Chinese laboratory rather than a market, the virus could just as easily have been created by the U.S. government or one of its allies.

    After all, grisly experiments, barbaric behavior and inhumane conditions have become synonymous with the U.S. government, which has meted out untold horrors against humans and animals alike.

    For instance, did you know that the U.S. government has been buying hundreds of dogs and cats from “Asian meat markets” as part of a gruesome experiment into food-borne illnesses?

    The cannibalistic experiments involve killing cats and dogs purchased from Colombia, Brazil, Vietnam, China and Ethiopia, and then feeding the dead remains to laboratory kittens, bred in government laboratories for the express purpose of being infected with a disease and then killed.

    It gets more gruesome.

    The Department of Veterans Affairs has been removing parts of dogs’ brains to see how it affects their breathing; applying electrodes to dogs’ spinal cords (before and after severing them) to see how it impacts their cough reflexes; and implanting pacemakers in dogs’ hearts and then inducing them to have heart attacks (before draining their blood). All of the laboratory dogs are killed during the course of these experiments.

    It’s not just animals that are being treated like lab rats by government agencies.

    “We the people” have also become the police state’s guinea pigs: to be caged, branded, experimented upon without our knowledge or consent, and then conveniently discarded and left to suffer from the after-effects.

    Back in 2017, FEMA “inadvertently” exposed nearly 10,000 firefighters, paramedics and other responders to a deadly form of ricin during simulated bioterrorism response sessions. In 2015, it was discovered that an Army lab had been “mistakenly” shipping deadly anthrax to labs and defense contractors for a decade.

    While these particular incidents have been dismissed as “accidents,” you don’t have to dig very deep or go very back in the nation’s history to uncover numerous cases in which the government deliberately conducted secret experiments on an unsuspecting populace—citizens and noncitizens alike—making healthy people sick by spraying them with chemicals, injecting them with infectious diseases and exposing them to airborne toxins.

    At the time, the government reasoned that it was legitimate to experiment on people who did not have full rights in society such as prisoners, mental patients, and poor blacks.

    In Alabama, for example, 600 black men with syphilis were allowed to suffer without proper medical treatment in order to study the natural progression of untreated syphilis. In California, older prisoners had testicles from livestock and from recently executed convicts implanted in them to test their virility. In Connecticut, mental patients were injected with hepatitis.

    In Maryland, sleeping prisoners had a pandemic flu virus sprayed up their noses. In Georgia, two dozen “volunteering” prison inmates had gonorrhea bacteria pumped directly into their urinary tracts through the penis. In Michigan, male patients at an insane asylum were exposed to the flu after first being injected with an experimental flu vaccine. In Minnesota, 11 public service employee “volunteers” were injected with malaria, then starved for five days.

    In New York, dying patients had cancer cells introduced into their systems. In Ohio, over 100 inmates were injected with live cancer cells. Also in New York, prisoners at a reformatory prison were also split into two groups to determine how a deadly stomach virus was spread: the first group was made to swallow an unfiltered stool suspension, while the second group merely breathed in germs sprayed into the air. And in Staten Island, children with mental retardation were given hepatitis orally and by injection to see if they could then be cured.

    As the Associated Press reports, “The late 1940s and 1950s saw huge growth in the U.S. pharmaceutical and health care industries, accompanied by a boom in prisoner experiments funded by both the government and corporations. By the 1960s, at least half the states allowed prisoners to be used as medical guinea pigs … because they were cheaper than chimpanzees.”

    Moreover, “Some of these studies, mostly from the 1940s to the ’60s, apparently were never covered by news media. Others were reported at the time, but the focus was on the promise of enduring new cures, while glossing over how test subjects were treated.”

    Media blackouts, propaganda, spin. Sound familiar?

    How many government incursions into our freedoms have been blacked out, buried under “entertainment” news headlines, or spun in such a way as to suggest that anyone voicing a word of caution is paranoid or conspiratorial?

    Unfortunately, these incidents are just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to the atrocities the government has inflicted on an unsuspecting populace in the name of secret experimentation.

    For instance, there was the U.S. military’s secret race-based testing of mustard gas on more than 60,000 enlisted men. As NPR reports, “All of the World War II experiments with mustard gas were done in secret and weren’t recorded on the subjects’ official military records. Most do not have proof of what they went through. They received no follow-up health care or monitoring of any kind. And they were sworn to secrecy about the tests under threat of dishonorable discharge and military prison time, leaving some unable to receive adequate medical treatment for their injuries, because they couldn’t tell doctors what happened to them.”

    And then there was the CIA’s MKULTRA program in which hundreds of unsuspecting American civilians and military personnel were dosed with LSD, some having the hallucinogenic drug slipped into their drinks at the beach, in city bars, at restaurants. As Time reports, “before the documentation and other facts of the program were made public, those who talked of it were frequently dismissed as being psychotic.”

    Now one might argue that this is all ancient history and that the government today is different from the government of yesteryear, but has the U.S. government really changed?

    Has the government become any more humane, any more respectful of the rights of the citizenry?

    Has it become any more transparent or willing to abide by the rule of law? Has it become any more truthful about its activities? Has it become any more cognizant of its appointed role as a guardian of our rights?

    Or has the government simply hunkered down and hidden its nefarious acts and dastardly experiments under layers of secrecy, legalism and obfuscations? Has it not become wilier, more slippery, more difficult to pin down?

    Having mastered the Orwellian art of Doublespeak and followed the Huxleyan blueprint for distraction and diversion, are we not dealing with a government that is simply craftier and more conniving that it used to be?

    Consider this: after revelations about the government’s experiments spanning the 20th century spawned outrage, the government began looking for human guinea pigs in other countries, where “clinical trials could be done more cheaply and with fewer rules.”

    In Guatemala, prisoners and patients at a mental hospital were infected with syphilis, “apparently to test whether penicillin could prevent some sexually transmitted disease.” In Uganda, U.S.-funded doctors “failed to give the AIDS drug AZT to all the HIV-infected pregnant women in a study… even though it would have protected their newborns.” Meanwhile, in Nigeria, children with meningitis were used to test an antibiotic named Trovan. Eleven children died and many others were left disabled.

    The more things change, the more they stay the same.

    Case in point: back in 2016, it was announced that scientists working for the Department of Homeland Security would begin releasing various gases and particles on crowded subway platforms as part of an experiment aimed at testing bioterror airflow in New York subways.

    The government insisted that the gases released into the subways by the DHS were nontoxic and did not pose a health risk. It’s in our best interests, they said, to understand how quickly a chemical or biological terrorist attack might spread. And look how cool the technology is—said the government cheerleaders—that scientists can use something called DNATrax to track the movement of microscopic substances in air and food. (Imagine the kinds of surveillance that could be carried out by the government using trackable airborne microscopic substances you breathe in or ingest.)

    Mind you, this is the same government that in 1949 sprayed bacteria into the Pentagon’s air handling system, then the world’s largest office building. In 1950, special ops forces sprayed bacteria from Navy ships off the coast of Norfolk and San Francisco, in the latter case exposing all of the city’s 800,000 residents.

    In 1953, government operatives staged “mock” anthrax attacks on St. Louis, Minneapolis, and Winnipeg using generators placed on top of cars. Local governments were reportedly told that “‘invisible smokescreen[s]’ were being deployed to mask the city on enemy radar.” Later experiments covered territory as wide-ranging as Ohio to Texas and Michigan to Kansas.

    In 1965, the government’s experiments in bioterror took aim at Washington’s National Airport, followed by a 1966 experiment in which army scientists exposed a million subway NYC passengers to airborne bacteria that causes food poisoning.

    And this is the same government that has taken every bit of technology sold to us as being in our best interests—GPS devices, surveillance, nonlethal weapons, etc.—and used it against us, to track, control and trap us.

    So, no, I don’t think the government’s ethics have changed much over the years. It’s just taken its nefarious programs undercover.

    The question remains: why is the government doing this? The answer is always the same: money, power and total domination.

    It’s the same answer no matter which totalitarian regime is in power.

    The mindset driving these programs has, appropriately, been likened to that of Nazi doctors experimenting on Jews. As the Holocaust Museum recounts, Nazi physicians “conducted painful and often deadly experiments on thousands of concentration camp prisoners without their consent.”

    The Nazi’s unethical experiments ran the gamut from freezing experiments using prisoners to find an effective treatment for hypothermia, tests to determine the maximum altitude for parachuting out of a plane, injecting prisoners with malaria, typhus, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, yellow fever, and infectious hepatitis, exposing prisoners to phosgene and mustard gas, and mass sterilization experiments.

    The horrors being meted out against the American people can be traced back, in a direct line, to the horrors meted out in Nazi laboratories. In fact, following the second World War, the U.S. government recruited many of Hitler’s employees, adopted his protocols, embraced his mindset about law and order and experimentation, and implemented his tactics in incremental steps.

    Sounds far-fetched, you say? Read on. It’s all documented.

    As historian Robert Gellately recounts, the Nazi police state was initially so admired for its efficiency and order by the world powers of the day that J. Edgar Hoover, then-head of the FBI, actually sent one of his right-hand men, Edmund Patrick Coffey, to Berlin in January 1938 at the invitation of Germany’s secret police, the Gestapo.

    The FBI was so impressed with the Nazi regime that, according to the New York Times, in the decades after World War II, the FBI, along with other government agencies, aggressively recruited at least a thousand Nazis, including some of Hitler’s highest henchmen.

    All told, thousands of Nazi collaborators—including the head of a Nazi concentration camp, among others—were given secret visas and brought to America by way of Project Paperclip. Subsequently, they were hired on as spies, informants and scientific advisers, and then camouflaged to ensure that their true identities and ties to Hitler’s holocaust machine would remain unknown. All the while, thousands of Jewish refugees were refused entry visas to the U.S. on the grounds that it could threaten national securi

    Adding further insult to injury, American taxpayers have been paying to keep these ex-Nazis on the U.S. government’s payroll ever since. And in true Gestapo fashion, anyone who has dared to blow the whistle on the FBI’s illicit Nazi ties has found himself spied upon, intimidated, harassed and labeled a threat to national security.

    As if the government’s covert, taxpayer-funded employment of Nazis after World War II wasn’t bad enough, U.S. government agencies—the FBI, CIA and the military—have since fully embraced many of the Nazi’s well-honed policing tactics, and have used them repeatedly against American citizens.

    It’s certainly easy to denounce the full-frontal horrors carried out by the scientific and medical community within a despotic regime such as Nazi Germany, but what do you do when it’s your own government that claims to be a champion of human rights all the while allowing its agents to engage in the foulest, bases and most despicable acts of torture, abuse and experimentation?

    When all is said and done, this is not a government that has our best interests at heart.

    This is not a government that values us.

    Perhaps the answer lies in The Third Man, Carol Reed’s influential 1949 film starring Joseph Cotten and Orson Welles. In the film, set in a post-WW II Vienna, rogue war profiteer Harry Lime has come to view human carnage with a callous indifference, unconcerned that the diluted penicillin he’s been trafficking underground has resulted in the tortured deaths of young children.

    Challenged by his old friend Holly Martins to consider the consequences of his actions, Lime responds, “In these days, old man, nobody thinks in terms of human beings. Governments don’t, so why should we?

    “Have you ever seen any of your victims?” asks Martins.

    “Victims?” responds Limes, as he looks down from the top of a Ferris wheel onto a populace reduced to mere dots on the ground. “Look down there. Tell me. Would you really feel any pity if one of those dots stopped moving forever? If I offered you twenty thousand pounds for every dot that stopped, would you really, old man, tell me to keep my money, or would you calculate how many dots you could afford to spare? Free of income tax, old man. Free of income tax — the only way you can save money nowadays.”

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, this is how the U.S. government sees us, too, when it looks down upon us from its lofty perch.

    To the powers-that-be, the rest of us are insignificant specks, faceless dots on the ground.

    To the architects of the American police state, we are not worthy or vested with inherent rights. This is how the government can justify treating us like economic units to be bought and sold and traded, or caged rats to be experimented upon and discarded when we’ve outgrown our usefulness.

    To those who call the shots in the halls of government, “we the people” are merely the means to an end.

    “We the people”—who think, who reason, who take a stand, who resist, who demand to be treated with dignity and care, who believe in freedom and justice for all—have become obsolete, undervalued citizens of a totalitarian state that, in the words of Rod Serling, “has patterned itself after every dictator who has ever planted the ripping imprint of a boot on the pages of history since the beginning of time. It has refinements, technological advances, and a more sophisticated approach to the destruction of human freedom.”

    In this sense, we are all Romney Wordsworth, the condemned man in Serling’s Twilight Zone episode “The Obsolete Man.”

    The Obsolete Man” speaks to the dangers of a government that views people as expendable once they have outgrown their usefulness to the State. Yet—and here’s the kicker—this is where the government through its monstrous inhumanity also becomes obsolete. As Serling noted in his original script for “The Obsolete Man,” “Any state, any entity, any ideology which fails to recognize the worth, the dignity, the rights of Man…that state is obsolete.

    How do you defeat a monster? You start by recognizing the monster for what it is.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 00:00

  • Visualizing How Oil Prices Went Sub-Zero: Explaining The COVID-19 Oil Crash
    Visualizing How Oil Prices Went Sub-Zero: Explaining The COVID-19 Oil Crash

    The Great Lockdown continues to turn markets on their head.

    Last week, Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins dug into the unprecedented number of initial jobless claims coming out of the United States, which topped 22 million in a period of four weeks.

    It’s just days later, and we already have our next market abnormality: this time, traders were baffled by West Texas Intermediate (WTI) crude — the U.S. benchmark oil price — which somehow flipped negative for the first time in history.

    How is that possible? And how does it tie into the COVID-19 oil price crash in general?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Setting the Geopolitical Stage

    Oil is a geopolitical game, and big price swings always come with a geopolitical undercurrent.

    This particular story picked up steam in February as OPEC+ producers tried to negotiate a production cut, amid concerns that COVID-19 could impact demand. Russia walked out on these meetings, and Saudi Arabia responded by undercutting oil prices by $6-8 per barrel.

    The world went into lockdown, energy demand dissipated, and oil producers continued to pump at will. Then on April 9th, nearly a full month after COVID-19 was declared a pandemic, Russia and Saudi Arabia finally settled their differences.

    However, this truce came too late — prices had already fell about 60% from February highs.

    How Prices Went Subzero

    Up until recently, this was a fairly run-of-the-mill oil price crash — but then prices suddenly sunk below zero, with May futures for WTI oil closing at -$37.63 on April 20th.

    For the first time in history, producers were willing to pay traders to take oil off their hands. This oddity is partially a function of the particularities of futures contracts:

    • Buyers Wanted (At Any Cost!)
      Futures contracts normally rollover to the next month without much happening, but in this case traders saw the May contract as a “hot potato”. No one wanted to be stuck taking delivery of oil when the world is awash in it and the country is in lockdown.

    • A Time and a Place
      Oil futures contracts specify a time and place for delivery. For WTI oil, that specific place is Cushing, Oklahoma. With most storage capacity booked already, taking physical delivery wasn’t even an option for many players.

    In other words, sellers outnumbered buyers by a crazy margin — and because oil is a physical commodity, someone has to ultimately take the contract.

    At time of publishing, the May contract and spot prices have “rebounded” to about $10. The June contract is slightly higher, at $13.

    “Never before has the oil industry come this close to testing its logistics capacity to the limit.”

    – International Energy Agency (IEA), Oil Market Report for April

    Overcoming the Supply Glut

    What do you do when oil is practically free?

    You store as much of it as you can, and hope that at some point you can sell it for more.

    Unfortunately, everyone has the exact same idea, and as a result there is a historic glut that is filling up the world’s storage capacity both on land and at sea:

    • In March, it was estimated that 76% of the world’s available oil storage capacity was already full.

    • A record-setting 160 million barrels of oil is being stored on tankers at sea, according to Reuters.

    • The cost of renting an oil supertanker has gone through the roof. It’s jumped from $20,000 per day to $200,000-$300,000 per day, according to Rystad Energy.

    It remains to be seen how fast the transportation industry will recover in a post-COVID-19 world, but for now the outlook for all oil producers is grim. The continued fallout will not only affect industry, but also the countries that rely on oil exports to balance their budgets.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:40

  • YouTube Sides With World Health Organization On Coronavirus
    YouTube Sides With World Health Organization On Coronavirus

    Submitted by ValueWalk

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    YouTube says it will take down any videos that contradict what the World Health Organization says about the coronavirus. As the WHO finds itself in the middle of controversy over China’s handling of COVID-19, it sounds like any videos even criticizing the agency could be removed.

    Of course, the issue of censorship by the world’s biggest tech firms isn’t new, and it’s unlikely to change anytime soon.

    YouTube backs World Health Organization on coronavirus

    In an interview with CNN, YouTube CEO Susan Wojcicki said they’ve seen a 75% increase in video views for news from “authoritative sources” since the beginning of 2020. She also said they’ve been busy removing “problematic information” like anything that is “medically unsubstantiated.”

    Susan gave examples of videos advising people to take vitamin C or turmeric as content that violates YouTube’s policies. She also said YouTube will remove anything that goes against World Health Organization recommendations.

    Another example of a topic the video platform cracked down on is the conspiracy theory claiming 5G towers cause coronavirus symptoms. She added that even during non-pandemic times, they’ve been removing information that is a violation of their policy. She also said YouTube has made “numerous policy changes” to stay ahead of the rapid changes

    WHO says coronavirus didn’t come from a lab

    One of the most widespread theories about the coronavirus is that it originated in a lab in Wuhan, the original epicenter of the virus. The theory has picked up so much steam that the U.S. has reportedly launched an official investigation into it.

    However, YouTube could theoretically remove videos that talk about this theory because the World Health Organization officially said on Tuesday that COVID-19 did not come from any lab. A spokesperson for the WHO said on Tuesday that the virus is likely of animal origin.

    USA Today and Reuters report that a spokesperson for the agency said it’s unclear how the novel coronavirus made the leap from bats to humans. They believe an intermediate animal served as a bridge.

    This isn’t the first time public health experts have said that COVID-19 wasn’t engineered in a lab. However, that doesn’t seem to be the big issue where theories about the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s possible involvement are concerned.

    Reuters specifically asked the WHO spokesperson to elaborate on whether the coronavirus may have accidentally escaped from a lab, but she declined. The Wuhan Institute of Virology has repeatedly dismissed theories that lax safety protocols allowed the virus to escape accidentally.

    Trump and others take aim at the WHO

    President Donald Trump wants to halt funding for the WHO due to its handling of the coronavirus, but he’s not the only one calling into question the agency’s efforts. The WHO has accepted China’s statements of the number of infections and deaths from COVID-19 without questioning the accuracy of the data. Meanwhile, numerous reports out of China have suggested that Beijing isn’t being totally transparent about the severity of the illness within its borders.

    WHO chief Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus has landed in the crosshairs amid calls for him to step down. Some are calling him a puppet of the Chinese Communist Party. He was Beijing’s choice for the position of WHO director general, Rep. Michael McCaul of the House Foreign Affairs Committee told USA Today. He said Tedros “used the WHO to trumpet their [China’s] lies about the virus.”

    Lawrence Gostin of the O’Neill Institute for National and Global Health Law at Georgetown University, told The New York Times in May 2017 that while Tedros was Ethiopia’s health minister, the government covered up three cholera outbreaks. Tedros denies the claim, and he became director general of the WHO due to his track record of fighting malaria and other serious diseases while serving as Ethiopia’s health minister.

    Lawsuit filed against the World Health Organization

    Trump isn’t the only one taking aim at the World Health Organization. Three Westchester, New York men are suing the agency, alleging that it mishandled the pandemic response. The lawsuit demands that the WHO pay “incalculable” damagers for the “injury, damage and loss” they suffered due to the pandemic.

    According to USA Today, the attorney who represents the plaintiffs in the lawsuit said in the lawsuit that the agency didn’t do enough to make sure the Chinese government was open and honest about the safeguards it was taken to protect against COVID-19.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:20

  • Liquidity Crisis Over? In Drastic Reversal, Companies Issue Bonds To Repay Revolvers
    Liquidity Crisis Over? In Drastic Reversal, Companies Issue Bonds To Repay Revolvers

    Starting one month ago, hit by a dramatic flashback to events from the global financial crisis, US corporations panicked and rushed to obtain as much funding as they possibly could – especially since such key short-term funding markets such as Commercial Paper were effectively frozen – ahead of what would soon become an unprecedented shutdown of the US economy, or as Bank of America puts it, there were fears that the US economy would be hit by a liquidity crisis on top of a deep recession.

    Companies responded by drawing over $300 billion in revolvers…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and from February until about two weeks ago C&I loans on bank balance sheets – which include revolvers and most other secured loans – grew more than $500bn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, in late March, the Fed came to the rescue and announced primary and secondary market corporate credit facilities about a month ago, which was followed by a period where companies both drew credit lines and were able to issue record volumes of IG rated corporate bonds.

    Indeed, as BofA shows, more than 170 US companies have announced over $120bn credit line drawdowns over the past few weeks. That includes 77 IG-rated names, of which 22 issued corporate bonds shortly thereafter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the primary market wide open – and backstopped by the Fed no less – more will follow. In addition, companies have also increased the sizes of their revolver/credit facilities without actually drawing. Revolver utilization ratio for US IG companies was around 12% as of 4Q19 and 30% during the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But now, as BofA’s Hans Mikkelsen writes, in a stark reversal of the liquidity drawdown dynamics of the past month, we are seeing the clearest signs that some companies have confidence they can get to the other side because they are now issuing corporate bonds to pay down credit lines, with roughly $7 billion in IG bonds issued to repay revolvers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, as even Bank of America admits, the main if not only reason behind this striking reversal in liquidity dynamics, is the Fed and the record policy response, now that the US central banks is explicitly backstopping an even bigger corporate bond bubble.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:17

  • China Sends US "Contaminated" COVID Test-Kits 
    China Sends US “Contaminated” COVID Test-Kits 

    It’s bad enough that China has frozen exports of medical equipment to the US during the pandemic. Now a new report sheds light on some COVID-19 test kits from the country that were sent “contaminated.” 

    The South China Morning Post (SCMP) said the University of Washington School of Medicine (UW Medicine) “went to extraordinary lengths to airlift tens of thousands of Covid-19 testing kits” during the start of the US outbreak to only discover last week that some of the tests are tainted. 

    “I’ve just recommended everyone who has these things pause and not use them at all,” said Geoff Baird, the interim chair of the UW Department of Laboratory Medicine, who led the group to secure the tests. “I can’t say I’m not disappointed.”

    Baird told SCMP that a colleague informed him on April 16 that some of the “liquid in vials he had sent appeared to have changed in color.” In shock, he said he stormed out of his office down to the UW Medicine storage facility where the test kits were being held and started to “tear through boxes.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    COVID-19 testing vial.  (Photo: AFP)

    He said many of the vials looked “fine,” but a “small percentage of them had turned to an orange or yellow color, rather than hot pink,” which indicated bacterial growth and, ultimately, contamination. 

    Baird also had scientists add novel coronavirus to the contaminated vials and compared to uncontaminated liquid.

    The conclusions, he said: “There’s absolutely no difference.”

    After that, Baird immediately suspended future orders with the Chinese manufacturer. 

    Anita Nadelson, the Seattle businesswoman who helped the university secure the tests, said the Chinese firm would refund their money. 

    “They’re working diligently to identify and cure the issue,” Nadelson said. “We vetted these as best we could. It’s an unexpected turn on both sides.”

    Baird said the contamination is concentrated in the specimen-preserving liquid, which makes no contact with patients, adding that “we don’t expect there’s any real mechanism of harm to patients.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A scientist runs a clinical test at UW Virology’s lab. (Photo by Karen Ducey/Getty Images)

    He said S. maltophilia was the bacterium found in the contaminated vials: 

    “It lives on surfaces and it lives on factory things and tubing,” he said. “I would think it’s in your home, my home, it’s on everything.” 

    Baird said the university gave 20,000 test kits to Public Health–Seattle & King County and another 15,000 to the state. 

    “I don’t know how many they’ve distributed yet,” he said.

    On Sunday, the state recalled 12,000 kits it handed out to counties.

    “We are working with our partners to have them discard the product and will work to replace them as quickly as we can,” said John Wiesman, the state secretary of health, in a statement.

    “About 5,000 of the 20,000 they gave us had been distributed by us, and approximately 300 had been used,” said James Apa, a Public Health–Seattle & King County spokesman, adding that “the problem with the kit itself shouldn’t present any health risk to patients.”

    Baird said while the contaminated test kits are a setback – there appears to be a national shortage of kits.

    “We should be doing more, but we’ve not seen our volume go up,” Baird said of testing at the UW Medicine facility. “There’s a cap on the amount of testing that can be done globally, and certainly nationally, there aren’t enough kits for swabs and VTM (viral transport media) for testing.” 

    Defective tests from China were not limited to the US. We noted earlier this month Spain received 640,000 tests that were later considered useless. 

    While China attempts to restore its image as a global leader and focus on distributing humanitarian relief to countries in need, the latest snafu of contaminated or defective COVID-19 testing kits is a public relations disaster.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:00

  • Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security State Is Using COVID-19 To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision
    Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security State Is Using COVID-19 To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision

    Authored by Whitney Webb via TheLastAmericanVagabond.com,

    LAST YEAR, A GOVERNMENT COMMISSION CALLED FOR THE US TO ADOPT AN AI-DRIVEN MASS SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM FAR BEYOND THAT USED IN ANY OTHER COUNTRY IN ORDER TO ENSURE AMERICAN HEGEMONY IN ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE. NOW, MANY OF THE “OBSTACLES” THEY HAD CITED AS PREVENTING ITS IMPLEMENTATION ARE RAPIDLY BEING REMOVED UNDER THE GUISE OF COMBATING THE CORONAVIRUS CRISIS.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last year, a U.S. government body dedicated to examining how artificial intelligence can “address the national security and defense needs of the United States” discussed in detail the “structural” changes that the American economy and society must undergo in order to ensure a technological advantage over China, according to a recent document acquired through a FOIA request. This document suggests that the U.S. follow China’s lead and even surpass them in many aspects related to AI-driven technologies, particularly their use of mass surveillance. This perspective clearly clashes with the public rhetoric of prominent U.S. government officials and politicians on China, who have labeled the Chinese government’s technology investments and export of its surveillance systems and other technologies as a major “threat” to Americans’ “way of life.”

    In addition, many of the steps for the implementation of such a program in the U.S., as laid out in this newly available document, are currently being promoted and implemented as part of the government’s response to the current coronavirus (Covid-19) crisis. This likely due to the fact that many members of this same body have considerable overlap with the taskforces and advisors currently guiding the government’s plans to “re-open the economy” and efforts to use technology to respond to the current crisis.

    The FOIA document, obtained by the Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC), was produced by a little-known U.S. government organization called the National Security Commission on Artificial Intelligence (NSCAI). It was created by the 2018 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) and its official purpose is “to consider the methods and means necessary to advance the development of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning, and associated technologies to comprehensively address the national security and defense needs of the United States.”

    The NSCAI is a key part of the government’s response to what is often referred to as the coming “fourth industrial revolution,” which has been described as “a revolution characterized by discontinuous technological development in areas like artificial intelligence (AI), big data, fifth-generation telecommunications networking (5G), nanotechnology and biotechnology, robotics, the Internet of Things (IoT), and quantum computing.”

    However, their main focus is ensuring that “the United States … maintain a technological advantage in artificial intelligence, machine learning, and other associated technologies related to national security and defense.” The vice-chair of NSCAI, Robert Work – former Deputy Secretary of Defense and senior fellow at the hawkish Center for a New American Security (CNAS)described the commission’s purpose as determining “how the U.S. national security apparatus should approach artificial intelligence, including a focus on how the government can work with industry to compete with China’s ‘civil-military fusion’ concept.”

    The recently released NSCAI document is a May 2019 presentation entitled “Chinese Tech Landscape Overview.” Throughout the presentation, the NSCAI promotes the overhaul of the U.S. economy and way of life as necessary for allowing the U.S. to ensure it holds a considerable technological advantage over China, as losing this advantage is currently deemed a major “national security” issue by the U.S. national security apparatus. This concern about maintaining a technological advantage can be seen in several other U.S. military documents and think tank reports, several of which have warned that the U.S.’ technological advantage is quickly eroding.

    The U.S. government and establishment media outlets often blame alleged Chinese espionage or the Chinese government’s more explicit partnerships with private technology companies in support of their claim that the U.S. is losing this advantage over China. For instance, Chris Darby, the current CEO of the CIA’s In-Q-Tel, who is also on the NSCAI, told CBS News last year that China is the U.S.’ main competitor in terms of technology and that U.S. privacy laws were hampering the U.S.’ capacity to counter China in this regard, stating that:

    “[D]ata is the new oil. And China is just awash with data. And they don’t have the same restraints that we do around collecting it and using it, because of the privacy difference between our countries. This notion that they have the largest labeled data set in the world is going to be a huge strength for them.”

    In another example, Michael Dempsey – former acting Director of National Intelligence and currently a government-funded fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations – argued in The Hill that:

    “It’s quite clear, though, that China is determined to erase our technological advantage, and is committing hundreds of billions of dollars to this effort. In particular, China is determined to be a world leader in such areas as artificial intelligence, high performance computing, and synthetic biology. These are the industries that will shape life on the planet and the military balance of power for the next several decades.”

    In fact, the national security apparatus of the United States is so concerned about losing a technological edge over China that the Pentagon recently decided to join forces directly with the U.S. intelligence community in order “to get in front of Chinese advances in artificial intelligence.” This union resulted in the creation of the Joint Artificial Intelligence Center (JAIC), which ties together “the military’s efforts with those of the Intelligence Community, allowing them to combine efforts in a breakneck push to move government’s AI initiatives forward.” It also coordinates with other government agencies, industry, academics, and U.S. allies. Robert Work, who subsequently became the NSCAI vice-chair, said at the time that JAIC’s creation was a “welcome first step in response to Chinese, and to a lesser extent, Russian, plans to dominate these technologies.”

    Similar concerns about “losing” technological advantage to China have also been voiced by the NSCAI chairman, Eric Schmidt, the former head of Alphabet – Google’s parent company, who argued in February in the New York Times that Silicon Valley could soon lose “the technology wars” to China if the U.S. government doesn’t take action. Thus, the three main groups represented within the NSCAI – the intelligence community, the Pentagon and Silicon Valley – all view China’s advancements in AI as a major national security threat (and in Silicon Valley’s case, threat to their bottom lines and market shares) that must be tackled quickly.

    TARGETING CHINA’S “ADOPTION ADVANTAGE”

    In the May 2019 “Chinese Tech Landscape Overview” presentation, the NSCAI discusses that, while the U.S. still leads in the “creation” stage of AI and related technologies, it lags behind China in the “adoption” stage due to “structural factors.” It says that “creation”, followed by “adoption” and “iteration” are the three phases of the “life cycle of new tech” and asserts that failing to dominate in the “adoption” stage will allow China to “leapfrog” the U.S. and dominate AI for the foreseeable future.

    The presentation also argues that, in order to “leapfrog” competitors in emerging markets, what is needed is not “individual brilliance” but instead specific “structural conditions that exist within certain markets.” It cites several case studies where China is considered to be “leapfrogging” the U.S. due to major differences in these “structural factors.” Thus, the insinuation of the document (though not directly stated) is that the U.S. must alter the “structural factors” that are currently responsible for its lagging behind China in the “adoption” phase of AI-driven technologies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chief among the troublesome “structural factors” highlighted in this presentation are so-called “legacy systems” that are common in the U.S. but much less so in China. The NSCAI document states that examples of “legacy systems” include a financial system that still utilizes cash and card payments, individual car ownership and even receiving medical attention from a human doctor. It states that, while these “legacy systems” in the US are “good enough,” too many “good enough” systems “hinder the adoption of new things,” specifically AI-driven systems.

    Another structural factor deemed by the NSCAI to be an obstacle to the U.S.’ ability to maintain a technological advantage over China is the “scale of the consumer market,” arguing that “extreme urban density = on-demand service adoption.” In other words, extreme urbanization results in more people using online or mobile-based “on-demand” services, ranging from ride-sharing to online shopping. It also cites the use of mass surveillance on China’s “huge population base” is an example of how China’s “scale of consumer market” advantage allowing “China to leap ahead” in the fields of related technologies, like facial recognition.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition to the alleged shortcomings of the U.S.’ “legacy systems” and lack of “extreme urban density,” the NSCAI also calls for more “explicit government support and involvement” as a means to speed up the adoption of these systems in the U.S. This includes the government lending its stores of data on civilians to train AI, specifically citing facial recognition databases, and mandating that cities be “re-architected around AVs [autonomous vehicles],” among others. Other examples given include the government investing large amounts of money in AI start-ups and adding tech behemoths to a national, public-private AI taskforce focused on smart city-implementation (among other things).

    With regards to the latter, the document says “this level of public-private cooperation” in China is “outwardly embraced” by the parties involved, with this “serving as a stark contrast to the controversy around Silicon Valley selling to the U.S. government.” Examples of such controversy, from the NSCAI’s perspective, likely include Google employees petitioning to end the Google-Pentagon “Project Maven,” which uses Google’s AI software to analyze footage captured by drones. Google eventually chose not to renew its Maven contract as a result of the controversy, even though top Google executives viewed the project as a “golden opportunity” to collaborate more closely with the military and intelligence communities.

    The document also defines another aspect of government support as the “clearing of regulatory barriers.” This term is used in the document specifically with respect to U.S. privacy laws, despite the fact that the U.S. national security state has long violated these laws with near complete impunity. However, the document seems to suggest that privacy laws in the U.S. should be altered so that what the U.S. government has done “in secret” with private citizen data can be done more openly and more extensively. The NSCAI document also discusses the removal of “regulatory barriers” in order to speed up the adoption of self-driving cars, even though autonomous driving technology has resulted in several deadly and horrific car accidents and presents other safety concerns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Also discussed is how China’s “adoption advantage” will “allow it to leapfrog the U.S.” in several new fields, including “AI medical diagnosis” and “smart cities.” It then asserts that “the future will be decided at the intersection of private enterprise and policy leaders between China and the U.S.” If this coordination over the global AI market does not occur, the document warns that “we [the U.S.] risk being left out of the discussions where norms around AI are set for the rest of our lifetimes.”

    The presentation also dwells considerably on how “the main battleground [in technology] are not the domestic Chinese and US markets,” but what it refers to as the NBU (next billion users) markets, where it states that “Chinese players will aggressively challenge Silicon Valley.” In order to challenge them more successfully, the presentation argues that, “just like we [view] the market of teenagers as a harbinger for new trends, we should look at China.”

    The document also expresses concerns about China exporting AI more extensively and intensively than the U.S., saying that China is “already crossing borders” by helping to build facial databases in Zimbabwe and selling image recognition and smart city systems to Malaysia. If allowed to become “the unambiguous leader in AI,” it says that “China could end up writing much of the rulebook of international norms around the deployment of AI” and that it would “broaden China’s sphere of influence amongst an international community that increasingly looks to the pragmatic authoritarianism of China and Singapore as an alternative to Western liberal democracy.”

    WHAT WILL REPLACE THE US’ “LEGACY SYSTEMS”?

    Given that the document makes it quite clear that “legacy systems” in the U.S. are impeding its ability to prevent China from “leapfrogging” ahead in AI and then dominating it for the foreseeable future, it is also important to examine what the document suggests should replace these “legacy systems” in the U.S.

    As previously mentioned, one “legacy system” cited early on in the presentation is the main means of payment for most Americans, cash and credit/debit cards. The presentation asserts, in contrast to these “legacy systems” that the best and most advanced system is moving entirely to smartphone-based digital wallets.

    It notes specifically the main mobile wallet provider in India, PayTM, is majority owned by Chinese companies. It quotes an article, which states that “a big break came [in 2016] when India canceled 86% of currency in circulation in an effort to cut corruption and bring more people into the tax net by forcing them to use less cash.” At the time, claims that India’s 2016 “currency reform” would be used as a stepping stone towards a cashless society were dismissed by some as “conspiracy theory.” However, last year, a committee convened by India’s central bank (and led by an Indian tech oligarch who also created India’s massive civilian biometric database) resulted in the Indian government’s “Cashless India” program.

    Regarding India’s 2016 “currency reform,” the NSCAI document then asserts that “this would be unfathomable in the West. And unsurprisingly, when 86% of the cash got cancelled and nobody had a credit card, mobile wallets in India exploded, laying the groundwork for a far more advanced payments ecosystem in India than the US.” However, it has become increasingly less unfathomable in light of the current coronavirus crisis, which has seen efforts to reduce the amount of cash used because paper bills may carry the virus as well as efforts to introduce a Federal Reserve-backed “digital dollar.”

    In addition, the NSCAI document from last May calls for the end of in-person shopping and promotes moving towards all shopping being performed online. It argues that “American companies have a lot to gain by adopting ideas from Chinese companies” by shifting towards exclusive e-commerce purchasing options. It states that only shopping online provides a “great experience” and also adds that “when buying online is literally the only way to get what you want, consumers go online.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another “legacy system” that the NSCAI seeks to overhaul is car ownership, as it promotes autonomous, or self-driving vehicles and further asserts that “fleet ownership > individual ownership.” It specifically points to a need for “a centralized ride-sharing network,” which it says “is needed to coordinate cars to achieve near 100% utilization rates.” However, it warns against ride-sharing networks that “need a human operator paired with each vehicle” and also asserts that “fleet ownership makes more sense” than individual car ownership. It also specifically calls for these fleets to not only be composed of self-driving cars, but electric cars and cites reports that China “has the world’s most aggressive electric vehicle goals….and seek[s] the lead in an emerging industry.”

    The document states that China leads in ride-sharing today even though ride-sharing was pioneered first in the U.S. It asserts once again that the U.S. “legacy system” of individual car ownership and lack of “extreme urban density” are responsible for China’s dominance in this area. It also predicts that China will “achieve mass autonomous [vehicle] adoption before the U.S.,” largely because “the lack of mass car ownership [in China] leads to far more consumer receptiveness to AVs [autonomous vehicles].” It then notes that “earlier mass adoption leads to a virtuous cycle that allows Chinese core self-driving tech to accelerate beyond [its] Western counterparts.”

    In addition to their vision for a future financial system and future self-driving transport system, the NSCAI has a similarly dystopian vision for surveillance. The document calls mass surveillance “one of the ‘first-and-best customers’ for AI” and “a killer application for deep learning.” It also states that “having streets carpeted with cameras is good infrastructure.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It then discusses how “an entire generation of AI unicorn” companies are “collecting the bulk of their early revenue from government security contracts” and praises the use of AI in facilitating policing activities. For instance, it lauds reports that “police are making convictions based on phone calls monitored with iFlyTek’s voice-recognition technology” and that “police departments are using [AI] facial recognition tech to assist in everything from catching traffic law violators to resolving murder cases.”

    On the point of facial recognition technology specifically, the NSCAI document asserts that China has “leapt ahead” of the US on facial recognition, even though “breakthroughs in using machine learning for image recognition initially occurred in the US.” It claims that China’s advantage in this instance is because they have government-implemented mass surveillance (“clearing of regulatory barriers”), enormous government-provided stores of data (“explicit government support”) combined with private sector databases on a huge population base (“scale of consumer market”). As a consequence of this, the NSCAI argues, China is also set to leap ahead of the U.S. in both image/facial recognition and biometrics.

    The document also points to another glaring difference between the U.S. and its rival, stating that: “In the press and politics of America and Europe, Al is painted as something to be feared that is eroding privacy and stealing jobs. Conversely, China views it as both a tool for solving major macroeconomic challenges in order to sustain their economic miracle, and an opportunity to take technological leadership on the global stage.”

    The NSCAI document also touches on the area of healthcare, calling for the implementation of a system that seems to be becoming reality thanks to the current coronavirus crisis. In discussing the use of AI in healthcare (almost a year before the current crisis began), it states that “China could lead the world in this sector” and “this could lead to them exporting their tech and setting international norms.” One reason for this is also that China has “far too few doctors for the population” and calls having enough doctors for in-person visits a “legacy system.” It also cited U.S. regulatory measures such as “HIPPA compliance and FDA approval” as obstacles that don’t constrain Chinese authorities.

    More troubling, it argues that “the potential impact of government supplied data is even more significant in biology and healthcare,” and says it is likely that “the Chinese government [will] require every single citizen to have their DNA sequenced and stored in government databases, something nearly impossible to imagine in places as privacy conscious as the U.S. and Europe.” It continues by saying that “the Chinese apparatus is well-equipped to take advantage” and calls these civilian DNA databases a “logical next step.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WHO ARE THE NSCAI?

    Given the sweeping changes to the U.S. that the NSCAI promoted in this presentation last May, it becomes important to examine who makes up the commission and to consider their influence over U.S. policy on these matters, particularly during the current crisis. As previously mentioned, the chairman of the NSCAI is Eric Schmidt, the former head of Alphabet (Google’s parent company) who has also invested heavily in Israeli intelligence-linked tech companies including the controversial start-up “incubator” Team8. In addition, the committee’s vice-chair is Robert Work, is not only a former top Pentagon official, but is currently working with the think tank CNAS, which is run by John McCain’s long-time foreign policy adviser and Joe Biden’s former national security adviser.

    Other members of the NSCAI are as follows:

    • Safra Catz, CEO of Oracle, with close ties to Trump’s top donor Sheldon Adelson

    • Steve Chien, supervisor of the Artificial Intelligence Group at Caltech’s Jet Propulsion Lab

    • Mignon Clyburn, Open Society Foundation fellow and former FCC commissioner

    • Chris Darby, CEO of In-Q-Tel (CIA’s venture capital arm)

    • Ken Ford, CEO of the Florida Institute for Human and Machine Cognition

    • Jose-Marie Griffiths, president of Dakota State University and former National Science Board member

    • Eric Horvitz, director of Microsoft Research Labs

    • Andy Jassy, CEO of Amazon Web Services (CIA contractor)

    • Gilman Louie, partner at Alsop Louie Partners and former CEO of In-Q-Tel

    • William Mark, director of SRI International and former Lockheed Martin director

    • Jason Matheny, director of the Center for Security and Emerging Technology, former Assistant director of National Intelligence and former director of IARPA (Intelligence Advanced Research Project Agency)

    • Katharina McFarland, consultant at Cypress International and former Assistant Secretary of Defense for Acquisition

    • Andrew Moore, head of Google Cloud AI

    As can be seen in the list above, there is a considerable amount of overlap between the NSCAI and the companies currently advising the White House on “re-opening” the economy (Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Lockheed Martin, Oracle) and one NSCAI member, Oracle’s Safra Katz, is on the White House’s “economic revival” taskforce. Also, there is also overlap between the NSCAI and the companies that are intimately involved in the implementation of the “contact tracing” “coronavirus surveillance system,” a mass surveillance system promoted by the Jared Kushner-led, private-sector coronavirus task force. That surveillance system is set to be constructed by companies with deep ties to Google and the U.S. national security state, and both Google and Apple, who create the operating systems for the vast majority of smartphones used in the U.S., have said they will now build that surveillance system directly into their smartphone operating systems.

    Also notable is the fact that In-Q-Tel and the U.S. intelligence community has considerable representation on the NSCAI and that they also boast close ties with Google, Palantir and other Silicon Valley giants, having been early investors in those companies. Both Google and Palantir, as well as Amazon (also on the NSCAI) are also major contractors for U.S. intelligence agencies. In-Q-Tel’s involvement on the NSCAI is also significant because they have been heavily promoting mass surveillance of consumer electronic devices for use in pandemics for the past several years. Much of that push has come from In-Q-Tel’s current Executive Vice President Tara O’Toole, who was previously the director of the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security and also co-authored several controversial biowarfare/pandemic simulations, such as Dark Winter.

    In addition, since at least January, the U.S. intelligence community and the Pentagon have been at the forefront of developing the U.S. government’s still-classified “9/11-style” response plans for the coronavirus crisis, alongside the National Security Council. Few news organizations have noted that these classified response plans, which are set to be triggered if and when the U.S. reaches a certain number of coronavirus cases, has been created largely by elements of the national security state (i.e. the NSC, Pentagon, and intelligence), as opposed to civilian agencies or those focused on public health issues.

    Furthermore, it has been reported that the U.S. intelligence community as well as U.S. military intelligence knew by at least January (though recent reports have said as early as last November) that the coronavirus crisis would reach “pandemic proportions” by March. The American public were not warned, but elite members of the business and political classes were apparently informed, given the record numbers of CEO resignations in January and several high-profile insider trading allegations that preceded the current crisis by a matter of weeks.

    Perhaps even more disconcerting is the added fact that the U.S. government not only participated in the eerily prescient pandemic simulation last October known as Event 201, it also led a series of pandemic response simulations last year. Crimson Contagion was a series of four simulations that involved 19 U.S. federal agencies, including intelligence and the military, as well as 12 different states and a host of private sector companies that simulated a devastating pandemic influenza outbreak that had originated in China. It was led by the current HHS Assistant Secretary for Preparedness and Response, Robert Kadlec, who is a former lobbyist for military and intelligence contractors and a Bush-era homeland security “bioterrorism” advisor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition, both Kadlec and the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security, which was intimately involved in Event 201, have direct ties to the controversial June 2001 biowarfare exercise “Dark Winter,” which predicted the 2001 anthrax attacks that transpired just months later in disturbing ways. Though efforts by media and government were made to blame the anthrax attacks on a foreign source, the anthrax was later found to have originated at a U.S. bioweapons lab and the FBI investigation into the case has been widely regarded as a cover-up, including by the FBI’s once-lead investigator on that case.

    Given the above, it is worth asking if those who share the NSCAI’s vision saw the coronavirus pandemic early on as an opportunity to make the “structural changes” it had deemed essential to countering China’s lead in the mass adoption of AI-driven technologies, especially considering that many of the changes in the May 2019 document are now quickly taking place under the guise of combatting the coronavirus crisis.

    THE NSCAI’S VISION TAKES SHAPE

    Though the May 2019 NSCAI document was authored nearly a year ago, the coronavirus crisis has resulted in the implementation of many of the changes and the removal of many of the “structural” obstacles that the commission argued needed to be drastically altered in order to ensure a technological advantage over China in the field of AI. The aforementioned move away from cash, which is taking place not just in the U.S. but internationally, is just one example of many.

    For instance, earlier this week CNN reported that grocery stores are now considering banning in-person shopping and that the U.S. Department of Labor has recommended that retailers nationwide start “‘using a drive-through window or offering curbside pick-up’ to protect workers for exposure to coronavirus.” In addition, last week, the state of Florida approved an online-purchase plan for low income families using the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP). Other reports have argued that social distancing inside grocery stores is ineffective and endangering people’s lives. As previously mentioned, the May 2019 NSCAI document argues that moving away from in-person shopping is necessary to mitigate China’s “adoption advantage” and also argued that “when buying online is literally the only way to get what you want, consumers go online.”

    Reports have also argued that these changes in shopping will last far beyond coronavirus, such as an article by Business Insider entitled “The coronavirus pandemic is pushing more people online and will forever change how Americans shop for groceries, experts say.” Those cited in the piece argue that this shift away from in-person shopping will be “permanent” and also states that “More people are trying these services than otherwise would have without this catalyst and gives online players a greater chance to acquire and keep a new customer base.” A similar article in Yahoo! News argues that, thanks to the current crisis, “our dependence on online shopping will only rise because no one wants to catch a virus at a shop.”

    In addition, the push towards the mass use of self-driving cars has also gotten a boost thanks to coronavirus, with driverless cars now making on-demand deliveries in California. Two companies, one Chinese-owned and the other backed by Japan’s SoftBank, have since been approved to have their self-driving cars used on California roads and that approval was expedited due to the coronavirus crisis. The CPO of Nuro Inc., the SoftBank-backed company, was quoted in Bloomberg as saying that “The Covid-19 pandemic has expedited the public need for contactless delivery services. Our R2 fleet is custom-designed to change the very nature of driving and the movement of goods by allowing people to remain safely at home while their groceries, medicines, and packages are brought to them.” Notably, the May 2019 NSCAI document references the inter-connected web of SoftBank-backed companies, particularly those backed by its largely Saudi-funded “Vision Fund,” as forming “the connective tissue for a global federation of tech companies” set to dominate AI.

    California isn’t the only state to start using self-driving cars, as the Mayo Clinic of Florida is now also using them. “Using artificial intelligence enables us to protect staff from exposure to this contagious virus by using cutting-edge autonomous vehicle technology and frees up staff time that can be dedicated to direct treatment and care for patients,” Kent Thielen, M.D., CEO of Mayo Clinic in Florida stated in a recent press release cited by Mic.

    Like the changes to in-person shopping in the age of coronavirus, other reports assert that self-driving vehicles are here to stay. One report published by Mashable is entitled “It took a coronavirus outbreak for self-driving cars to become more appealing,” and opens by stating “Suddenly, a future full of self-driving cars isn’t just a sci-fi pipe dream. What used to be considered a scary, uncertain technology for many Americans looks more like an effective tool to protect ourselves from a fast-spreading, infectious disease.” It further argues that this is hardly a “fleeting shift” in driving habits and one tech CEO cited in the piece, Anuja Sonalker of Steer Tech, claims that “There has been a distinct warming up to human-less, contactless technology. Humans are biohazards, machines are not.”

    Another focus of the NSCAI presentation, AI medicine, has also seen its star rise in recent weeks. For instance, several reports have touted how AI-driven drug discovery platforms have been able to identify potential treatments for coronavirus. Microsoft, whose research lab director is on the NSCAI, recently put $20 million into its “AI for health” program to speed up the use of AI in analyzing coronavirus data. In addition, “telemedicine”– a form of remote medical care – has also become widely adopted due to the coronavirus crisis.

    Several other AI-driven technologies have similarly become more widely adopted thanks to coronavirus, including the use of mass surveillance for “contact tracing” as well as facial recognition technology and biometrics. A recent Wall Street Journal report stated that the government is seriously considering both contact tracing via phone geolocation data and facial recognition technology in order to track those who might have coronavirus. In addition, private businesses – like grocery stores and restaurants – are using sensors and facial recognition to see how many people and which people are entering their stores.

    As far as biometrics go, university researchers are now working to determine if “smartphones and biometric wearables already contain the data we need to know if we have become infected with the novel coronavirus.” Those efforts seek to detect coronavirus infections early by analyzing “sleep schedules, oxygen levels, activity levels and heart rate” based on smartphone apps like FitBit and smartwatches. In countries outside the U.S., biometric IDs are being touted as a way to track those who have and lack immunity to coronavirus.

    In addition, one report in The Edge argued that the current crisis is changing what types of biometrics should be used, asserting that a shift towards thermal scanning and facial recognition is necessary:

    “At this critical juncture of the crisis, any integrated facial recognition and thermal scanning solution must be implemented easily, rapidly and in a cost-effective manner. Workers returning to offices or factories must not have to scramble to learn a new process or fumble with declaration forms. They must feel safe and healthy for them to work productively. They just have to look at the camera and smile. Cameras and thermal scanners, supported by a cloud-based solution and the appropriate software protocols, will do the rest.”

    Also benefiting from the coronavirus crisis is the concept of “smart cities,” with Forbes recently writing that “Smart cities can help us combat the coronavirus pandemic.” That article states that “Governments and local authorities are using smart city technology, sensors and data to trace the contacts of people infected with the coronavirus. At the same time, smart cities are also helping in efforts to determine whether social distancing rules are being followed.”

    That article in Forbes also contains the following passage:

    “…[T]he use of masses of connected sensors makes it clear that the coronavirus pandemic is–intentionally or not–being used as a testbed for new surveillance technologies that may threaten privacy and civil liberties. So aside from being a global health crisis, the coronavirus has effectively become an experiment in how to monitor and control people at scale.”

    Another report in The Guardian states that “If one of the government takeaways from coronavirus is that ‘smart cities’ including Songdo or Shenzhen are safer cities from a public health perspective, then we can expect greater efforts to digitally capture and record our behaviour in urban areas – and fiercer debates over the power such surveillance hands to corporations and states.” There have also been reports that assert that typical cities are “woefully unprepared” to face pandemics compared to “smart cities.”

    Yet, beyond many of the NSCAI’s specific concerns regarding mass AI adoption being conveniently resolved by the current crisis, there has also been a concerted effort to change the public’s perception of AI in general. As previously mentioned, the NSCAI had pointed out last year that:

    “In the press and politics of America and Europe, Al is painted as something to be feared that is eroding privacy and stealing jobs. Conversely, China views it as both a tool for solving major macroeconomic challenges in order to sustain their economic miracle, and an opportunity to take technological leadership on the global stage.”

    Now, less than a year later, the coronavirus crisis has helped spawn a slew of headlines in just the last few weeks that paint AI very differently, including “How Artificial Intelligence Can Help Fight Coronavirus,” “How AI May Prevent the Next Coronavirus Outbreak,” “AI Becomes an Ally in the Fight Against COVID-19,” “Coronavirus: AI steps up in battle against COVID-19,” and “Here’s How AI Can Help Africa Fight the Coronavirus,” among numerous others.

    It is indeed striking how the coronavirus crisis has seemingly fulfilled the NSCAI’s entire wishlist and removed many of the obstacles to the mass adoption of AI technologies in the United States. Like major crises of the past, the national security state appears to be using the chaos and fear to promote and implement initiatives that would be normally rejected by Americans and, if history is any indicator, these new changes will remain long after the coronavirus crisis fades from the news cycle. It is essential that these so-called “solutions” be recognized for what they are and that we consider what type of world they will end up creating – an authoritarian technocracy. We ignore the rapid advance of these NSCAI-promoted initiatives and the phasing out of so-called “legacy systems” (and with them, many long-cherished freedoms) at our own peril.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:40

  • Jerusalem's City Hall Complex Goes Up In Flames After Molotov Cocktail Attack
    Jerusalem’s City Hall Complex Goes Up In Flames After Molotov Cocktail Attack

    Police in Jerusalem are investigating a possible terror attack after a massive fire broke out at Jerusalem’s City Hall on Wednesday afternoon. 

    Given multiple building at the sprawling complex were shown in local media reports set ablaze, it appears the result of an arson attack

    Unconfirmed Israeli media reports say a suspect was seen hurling molotov cocktails at the buildings before fleeing on foot

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Jerusalem Post reports that a 40-year-old man from East Jerusalem has been apprehended, even as firefighters at the scene continue battling the blaze. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    JPost reports the following:

    The Jerusalem City Hall spokesperson said that once the fire was detected emergency procedures were activated and police and firefighters were called to the scene. The cause of the fire is still unknown.

    Eight teams of firefighters are currently at work putting out the fire and searching for anyone who might be trapped in the building.

    Police arrested a 40-year-old man for allegedly starting the fire. The man is reportedly a resident of East Jerusalem.

    Staff from Jerusalem Mayor Moshe Lion’s office were seen evacuating, as well as other city hall employees, though it’s as yet unknown if anyone is trapped inside the burning complex.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Any potential casualties or injuries are also unknown, but early reports suggest everyone escaped uninjured.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Multiple reports state that an eyewitness has told police that he witnessed someone throwing a molotov cocktail into the building,” a separate local Israeli media report indicated

    “A spokesperson for City Hall tells the media in a written statement that Police have arrested a suspect,” the report said.

    By the evening hours (local time) the blaze was reportedly subdued, however, damage to the building appeared substantial and far-reaching.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The attacker’s motive is also as yet unclear. It may be related to the ongoing Arab Palestinian-Israeli conflict, which has led to continually tense situations in East Jerusalem. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Or the attack was possibly connected with Israel’s draconian coronavirus lockdown – seen as among the most aggressive police-enforced ‘stay at home’ mandates in the world, itself recently driving local protests and even riots among both Arab residents of Jerusalem and ultra-Orthodox Jews.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:20

  • Watch: John Pilger's "The Coming War On China"
    Watch: John Pilger’s “The Coming War On China”

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone,

    “The aim of this film is to break a silence: the United States and China may well be on the road to war, and nuclear war is no longer unthinkable,” Pilger says in his 2016 documentary The Coming War on China, which you can watch free on Youtube here or on Vimeo here.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “In a few years China has become the world’s second-biggest economic power,” Pilger’s introduction continues.

    “The United States is the world’s biggest military power, with bases and missiles and ships covering every continent and every ocean. China is a threat to this dominance, says Washington. But who is the threat? This film is about shifting power, and great danger.”

    As we’ve been discussing for years now, the relentless quest of the US-centralized empire-like power alliance for total world domination has put it on a collision course with the surging economic powerhouse of China which refuses to be absorbed into the imperial blob. The empire’s continued existence depends upon its ability to undermine China before it grows too powerful or the empire grows too weak to stop its ascent, at which point global hegemony becomes impossible and we are living in a truly multipolar world.

    Watch the full documentary below:

    China has therefore always been the final boss fight in the global campaign of violence and domination by what Pilger calls the “empire which never speaks its name”. And the ramping up of anti-China narrative management by the US government indicates that we are being psychologically primed to accept this world-threatening confrontation, just as Pilger warned in 2016.

    “The danger of confrontation grows by the day,” Pilger says.

    The powerful film breaks down the way the USA has been encircling China with a “noose” of military bases since the Korean War, which all have massive amounts of military firepower, including nuclear firepower, pointed right at China’s cities. Pilger shows the psychopathic toll this has inflicted upon the people who live in the areas where the US war machine has set up shop in the Pacific, including an especially enraging segment on the use of Bikini Atoll natives as human guinea pigs to test the effects of nuclear radiation on people. Also deeply disturbing is the revelation of just how close the US came to launching nuclear warheads at China due to a miscommunication during the Cuban missile crisis.

    The film describes China’s recent history and explains its climb in economic power which led us to this point, and the USA’s generations-long history of provocation and hostility toward its government. It also addresses the silly projection so many westerners harbor that if the US wasn’t bullying and slaughtering the world into compliance, China would take over doing the same.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Back in 2016 it was harder for people to see this escalation on the horizon, but now in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic we’re hearing a frantic, disproportionate amount of anti-China sentiment from the Trump administration and its supporters, in the same way we heard Russia hysteria amplified over the last three years by Trump’s enemies. Trump was politically pressured to dangerously escalate cold war tensions with Russia, and he’s now being politically incentivized to pass the blame for his administration’s spectacular failures in addressing this pandemic on to the Chinese government in a way which manufactures support for escalations on that front as well. Two different narratives, same agenda.

    “The new president, Donald Trump, has a problem with China,” Pilger says at the end of the documentary.

    “The urgent question now is will Trump continue with the provocations revealed in this film and take us all to the edge of war?”

    The answer to that question appears to be coalescing. It’s a good time for us all to watch this film.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypalpurchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:00

  • Lululemon Fires Art Director Over 'Bat Fried Rice' Shirt
    Lululemon Fires Art Director Over ‘Bat Fried Rice’ Shirt

    Lulumemon has issued an apology and fired its art director, Trevor Fleming, after he shared an Instagram link on Sunday to a shirt created by artist Jess Sluder featuring a Chinese take-out box decorated with bat wings and the words “no thank you” on the sleeves and back.

    The shirt, titled “Bat Fried Rice” was listed for sale at $60 until it was taken down. Meanwhile, Fleming’s Instagram account has since been deleted, according to USA Today.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The shirt was criticized as racist, as the coronavirus pandemic originated in Wuhan, China – where researchers at the Wuhan Institute of Virology were studying coronavirus from horseshoe bat samples they had collected in caves 1,000 miles away in Yunnan, which is genetically identical to the original virus that causes COVID-19.

    “At lululemon, our culture and values are core to who we are, and we take matters like this extremely seriously,” said Lululemon spokeswoman Erin Hankinson in a statement to USA Today. “We apologize that an employee was affiliated with promoting an offensive t-shirt… The image and the post were inappropriate and inexcusable and we do not tolerate this behaviour.”

    “We acted immediately, and the person involved is no longer an employee of lululemon,” the statement continues.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:40

  • Cluster Of Coronavirus Cases Reported Aboard Italian Cruise Ship Docked In Nagasaki: Live Updates
    Cluster Of Coronavirus Cases Reported Aboard Italian Cruise Ship Docked In Nagasaki: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • German biotech company begins clinical trials for vaccine
    • Oxford U. begins human testing for vaccine
    • FT says UK coronavirus deaths 2x+ official number
    • NY death toll passes 15k
    • Trump: “Our Country is starting to OPEN FOR BUSINESS”
    • Outbreak reported aboard Italian cruise ship docked in Japan
    • Middle East coronavirus cases continue to climb everywhere except Iran
    • Texas drops controversial temporary abortion ban
    • FDA director “clarifies” WaPo story
    • WHO’s Dr. Tedros asks US to reconsider cutting funding
    • 2 cats become first pets in US to catch the virus
    • Chinese scientist finds deadly new coronavirus mutations
    • Cali officials reveal first US coronavirus death occurred weeks earlier than realized
    • Dominic Raab says at least 69 health-care workers have died in the UK
    • South Korea unveils ‘New Deal’-style stimulus

    *      *      *

    Update (2130ET): Here we go again…

    Outbreaks aboard cruise ships have become a tiresome cliche since the novel coronavirus first left Wuhan back in December, and amazingly, despite the fact that most major cruise operators have had their operations suspended for going on six weeks, shipboard outbreaks are still happening.

    A Japanese television station reported Thursday morning that an outbreak has been reported aboard a ship that has been docked for repairs since January. Apparently, hundreds of crew members were still living aboard the ship, despite the fact that it has been docked all this time.

    NHK reports that 48 crew members on an Italian cruise ship docked in Nagasaki have tested positive for coronavirus, NHK reports, citing an unidentified local official. The Italy-owned Costa Atlantica has been docked at Mitsubishi Heavy’s Koyagi shipyard for repairs since Jan. 29; 623 crew members were apparently still living on board the ship. No passengers have been present during the outbreak.

    Chief Cabinet Secretary Yoshihide Suga said Wednesday that the Health Ministry sent officials and experts to the ship after a request from the Italian government.

    Japan of course was home to the original cruise ship “nightmare at sea” when the “Diamond Princess” docked in Yokohama with thousands of passengers and crew aboard. Hundreds were sickened and nearly 2 dozen died.

    Since then, there have been a handful of outbreaks involving cruise ships, including one aboard the “Ruby Princess” in Sydney that has triggered a criminal investigation down under.

    Given the wave of repatriations and evacuations that have taken place since the outbreak began, once can’t help but wonder: Why are these 600+ sailors still living on this ship in presumably cramped crewmen’s quarters?

    In a rare win for abortion-rights advocates, Texas has reportedly dropped its order banning abortions while the pandemic is ongoing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Finally, some good news for liberals to enjoy.

    *      *      *

    Update (1900ET): We imagine FDA Director Dr. Stephen Hahn found himself on the ass-end of a classic President Trump rage-fueled shitstorm earlier when the Washington Post quoted him in a story warning that the second wave of the virus would be “even more devastating”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump tweeted earlier that the article was “false,” however, in a statement during Wednesday evening’s press conference, Dr. Hahn walked all that back, admitted that his quote was accurate, but accused the Washington Post of omitting some context – namely that he had clarified the reason it would be deadlier is because it would coincide with the entirety of the next flu season.

    *      *      *

    Update (1850ET): Now that President Trump has done pretty much everything possible to convince the public to blame him for the coronavirus fallout, despite having delegated all genuine authority to the states, he is moving to ensure the public understands that, if he had his druthers, the whole country would be reopened by now, by reopening the only pieces of land for which he has retained the authority to reopen: the National Parks.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He added during tonight’s press caution that the reopening would be done “as we take reasonable precaution.”

    *      *      *

    Update (1805ET): With the CDC remaining mostly tight-lipped about the breakdown of coronavirus patients in the US (a ploy that critics say began as an effort to conceal the lack of testing in the US), more states are releasing breakdowns of COVID-19 patients including those who died in hospital settings, and those who died in managed-care facilities like nursing homes, clusters of vicious disease.

    And a recent analysis of these data by WSJ found that facilities that primarily house older people who are often in frail health have been the source of roughly 25% of the deaths linked to the coronavirus in the US. A WSJ survey has found at least 10,783 fatalities among more than 35 states that either report data online, or responded to requests for information.

    And that’s only with 70% of states (and zero territories) reporting.

    States including Massachusetts, West Virginia are trying to ramp up testing in nursing homes in their states, and while Cuomo has tried to do the same in NY, he did say earlier that “it’s not our job” to provide PPE to nursing homes” – meaning Americans private and public corporations, entities that, despite their tremendous economic power, have proved just as impotent as the federal government in helping alleviate the crisis. In fact, as we explained earlier, one could argue that corporations are actively hurting the rest of the economy by sucking up resources that should be flowing to small business owners who are in danger of shutting down.

    *      *      *

    Update (1550ET): Earlier in the afternoon, remarks made by WHO Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus drew the attention of the international press as he asked the US to “reconsider” cutting funding to the organization, insisting that the organization acts to combat discrimination and fight for human rights everywhere (except China). The organization also released a list of six conditions that should be met before countries begin to reopen.

    Earlier, Saudi Arabia reported 1,141 new cases of coronavirus and 5 new deaths for a total of 12,772 cases and 114 deaths, while the UAE reported 483 new cases of coronavirus and 6 new deaths for a total of 8,238 cases and 52 deaths.

    Meanwhile, the state of California said it recorded 86 new COVID-19-linked deaths since yesterday, an increase of 6.8% to nearly 1,300 deaths.

    Earlier, two cats in the US tested positive for the coronavirus, becoming the first household pets in the country to be confirmed positive for the virus after at least one tiger at the Bronx Zoo was found to be carrying strains of the virus. At least one of the cats was experiencing mild symptoms, per the CDC.

    *      *      *

    Update (1330ET): New York has reached another grim milestone: the state’s death toll has surpassed 15k on Wednesday, though the pace of deaths continued to slow. Deaths climbed to 15,302.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Texas, meanwhile, reported another 18% jump in new cases. France reported 3,201 new cases on Wednesday, the highest number in four days, to right around 160k cases. The WHO noted that in the Middle East, cases are rising everywhere except Iran.

    *      *      *

    Update (1205ET): Though it sounded almost as if he was speaking to his fellow governors, Cuomo urged local officials in his state to “resist political pressure” to reopen their towns too early, warning that they might risk ruining all the hard work of the American people. “We make a bad move, it’s going to set us back…Frankly, this is no time to act stupidly. Period. I don’t know how else to say it,” Cuomo said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Cuomo added: “This is not the time for confusion or disagreement among government…”local laws can’t counteract state laws, anyway.”

    “We can’t have people lose their life because we acted imprudently.”

    In other news, Italy reported a jump in new cases, while the pace of new deaths continued to slow. 3,370 new patients tested positive yesterday, said Italy’s Civil Protection Service, compared with an increase of 2,729 the day before (Italy’s countrywide total is 187,327). Deaths continued to slow, with another 437 new deaths reported, compared with 534 new deaths a day ago, as the curve continues to slow at a rate that’s even surprising some of Italy’s leading scientists. In total, 25,085 Italians have died – with deaths in the country moving above 25k, becoming only the second country to hit this number after the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another 54,543 Italians have recovered, including another 2,943 declared “recovered” over the last day, an increase of +5.7% as more patients finally recover from the illness. Of course, as we’ve noted, many patients who struggle in serious condition for days or weeks have a higher likelihood of suffering long-term consequences. Finally, the number of tests run in the country has surpassed 1.5 million.

    *      *      *

    Update (1130ET): One day after Singapore extended its lockdown until the end of June amid a stunning resurgence in coronavirus infections involving the city’s migrant workers, the city-state has reported another record jump in new cases.

    The Health Ministry reported 1,016 new cases of coronavirus, bringing its total to 10,141 cases in total. Of the new cases confirmed over the last day, 1,001 of them were foreigners, likely mostly migrant workers.

    Meanwhile, during Wednesday’s press conference, NY Gov. Andrew Cuomo warned “what we do today, we will see the results in 3, or 4, or 5 days”, since most of the worst viral cases tend to manifest within 10 or 11 days, tops, though some cases have taken far longer.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    His big theme is that New Yorkers have arrived at a “profound moment” in history, where everybody will be judged for their actions during the reopening. “If we get reckless today, we’ll suffer the consequences tomorrow.”

    *      *      *

    Update (0810ET): President Trump is starting the day by once again encouraging the ‘reopen now’ protesters and courting even more responsibility for the eventual outcome of the reopening – something that we’ve repeatedly argued is a boneheaded political strategy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The president also affirmed plans to sign his executive order prohibiting immigration into the US for 60 days.

    *      *        *

    Now that the Senate has passed the $484 billion relief bill to top off the ‘Paycheck Protection Program’ (which hasn’t been able to make any new loans in five days), Washington reporters claim that the House should follow that up with a vote on Thursday, before hopefully sending it to the president’s desk.

    Last night, we reported on a new study out of China authored by the same scientist who first proposed Beijing’s lockdown plan that highlighted some troubling new discoveries that might complicate the quest for a vaccine. The researchers isolated and analyzed new mutant strains of the virus that appeared to be much more ‘aggressive’ (i.e. likely deadlier) than earlier strains. Furthermore, these deadlier strains were not only found to carry higher viral loads – making them much more infectious – but they were also found to have genetic similarities to strains isolated in New York and Europe, potentially explaining the strikingly high mortality rates.

    During the early days of the US response, Dr. Fauci and others insisted that there was “no evidence” of any significant mutations in the virus that might impede research into a possible vaccine. While that might have been true given the evidence at the time, clearly, it no longer is.

    Whether this leads to a revision in vaccine timeline targets remains to be seen, but we would be surprised to see any such information released through official channels.

    Curiously, the only vaccine-related news we’re seeing on Wednesday are reports about two companies, one German, one British, that have just received a ‘green light’ to move on to the next phase of vaccine-related study.

    German biotech company BioNTech will become the first European company to proceed to clinical trials of a potential COVID-19 vaccine after receiving regulatory approval to accelerate the firm’s testing. Presumably, the firm’s experimental vaccine has already shown some success in preliminary human studies – typically a prerequisite before moving on to clinical trials. The German Federal Institute for Vaccines was responsible for issuing the approval.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Times of London reported last night that the first British human trials of a coronavirus vaccine will start on Wednesday as Britain ‘throws everything it has’ at developing a vaccine, according to Health Secretary Matt Hancock. Scientists in Oxford are expected to begin to test the safety of their experimental vaccine. Hancock also announcing another £20 million in funding to speed the quasi-public project through larger-scale human trials over the summer, as well as £22.5 million for a parallel vaccine project at Imperial College London.

    For anybody hoping that these early-stage triumphs might herald an even earlier time-frame for a vaccine, try not to get too excited: Remember the words of Sir Patrick Vallance, the UK’s chief scientific adviser, who once warned that every vaccine is a “long shot”.

    However, the biggest bombshell to drop overnight was probably a statement from health authorities in California that the first coronavirus deaths in the US likely occurred weeks earlier than initially thought. Officials told the local press that forensic scientists in Santa Clara had discovered two autopsies on people who had died undiagnosed at home on Feb. 6 and Feb. 17 that showed signs of COVID-19.

    A third death on March 6 was also found to be caused by COVID-19. The first virus-related death in the US was reported in California on Feb. 26.

    “These three people died at home at a time when testing was very limited and only possible to get via the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,” the forensics department said. Tests at that time were only available to people who returned from high-risk areas, or those who went to a doctor with serious and obvious coronavirus symptoms. Notably, a recent study in Santa Clara County also found that the viral penetration in the area was “50-80x higher” than official statistics suggested.

    As India begins the process of reopening its economy, a new issue is arising: Indian doctors and nurses report that they have been subjected to horrifying treatment at the hands of their fellow townspeople and community members, as family members of dead patients have, in some cases, attacked doctors for failing to save their family member. The situation has gotten so bad that a funeral procession for a doctor who died fighting the virus was attacked by an angry mob, forcing the doctor’s family and colleagues to flee. A colleague returned later to dig a grave for his friend.

    To try and stop doctors from simply walking off the job as India’s rate of confirmed infections climbs above 20k and the bodies continue to pile up, the Indian government has, at the behest of the Indian Medical Association, issued an emergency order making violence against health-care professionals a serious crime. Doctors around the country have said they will observe a “Black Day” on Friday, with any opting to wear black armbands to identify themselves as health-care workers.

    Spain announced a slight relaxation of its five-week lockdown earlier this week when the government caved to popular demands that children under the age of 14 be allowed to leave their homes unaccompanied by an adult.

    And now, as Spain’s rate of deaths ticks higher, PM Pedro Sanchez is pushing ahead with his plan to extend the lockdown until May 9, asking his country’s parliament to approve the extension, which he first announced days ago. Sanchez said that the lifting of the quarantine order must be “slow and gradual” to save lives.

    “The general requirement to stay at home will not be lifted until we are prepared,” he said, although he added that in future the conditions of the lockdown “will not be the same as up to now,” with shifts in the rules in the second half of May.

    Finally, an FT analysis of data released by the ONS has determined that the actual death toll from COVID-19 across the UK might be as high as 41k, more than double the roughly 17.5k ‘official’ death toll according to the Department of Health and Social Care. Here’s more on that from FT reporter Chris Giles.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Following the report’s release, UK Foreign Minister Dominic Raab announced that the death toll of UK health care workers has climbed to 69, significantly higher than the previous number.

    And in South Korea, while the world waits to learn more about what’s going on with KJU, South Korean President Moon Jae-in unveiled a $32.4 billion relief package for hard-hit businesses, while pushing for a New Deal-style program that would put out-of-work South Koreans to work building new national projects.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:33

  • Mankind's Best Friend: Dogs Being Trained To Detect COVID-19 Odors Could Test 750 People Per Hour
    Mankind’s Best Friend: Dogs Being Trained To Detect COVID-19 Odors Could Test 750 People Per Hour

    Authored by Elias Marat via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    There’s plenty of reason why dogs have historically been considered man’s best friend. For at least the past 15,000 years, dogs have served human societies in myriad ways. Whether by hunting pray, helping to herd sheep and cattle, or simply providing us with unconditional love, they have proved themselves to be indispensable companions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In modern times, dogs have also provided crucial help sniffing out pests such as bedbugs, narcotics, trapped humans or broken gas mains after earthquakes, improvised explosive devices in war zones, and even ailments such as migraine headaches, malaria Parkinson’s disease, and cancer. After all, with some 200 to 300 million sense receptors in dogs’ noses—versus 5 million in human noses—our trusty canine comrades have olfactory abilities that can sense odors we have no ability to perceive.

    And now, an ambitious project hopes to wield dogs’ uncanny sense of smell to train them to detect CoViD-19, the infectious disease caused by the novel coronavirus SARS-COV-2.

    British charity Medical Detection Dogs has partnered with the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine (LSHTM) and Durham University to begin efforts to train their elite sniffing dogs for the task. According to behavioral psychologist Dr. Claire Guest, CEO of Medical Detection Dogs, there is no reason to doubt that the canines are up to the task.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Guest told CTV News:

    “We already train dogs in the past… [there is] absolutely no reason why a dog can’t detect the virus.”

    And it’s not just a matter of confidence—it’s also an approach that is rooted in the rigorous science of over a dozen peer-reviewed papers that Medical Detection Dogs has produced in the course of training dogs to detect serious illnesses.

    Head of the disease control department at LSHTM Prof. James Logan explained:

    “Our previous work demonstrated that dogs can detect odors from humans with a malaria infection with extremely high accuracy – above the World Health Organization standards for a diagnostic.”

    After six weeks of intensive training we could see a brigade of dogs who are capable of providing a speedy and non-invasive diagnosis at the tail end of the pandemic. The dogs would undergo some of the same training they received to detect bacterial infections, prostate cancer, and Parkinson’s—mainly through sniffing samples, indicating when they found it, and being able to detect the subtle changes in skin temperature indicating a fever, according to a statement from the group.

    Logan cautioned that it still remains early for detecting any specific odor belonging to CoViD-19. However, because other respiratory diseases cause body odor changes, it is quite likely that CoViD-19 does as well, which means that dogs would definitely be able to detect it. Such a new diagnostic tool has the potential to provide a revolutionary new method to help curb the pandemic.

    On the Medical Detection Dogs website, Guest wrote:

    “The aim is that dogs will be able to screen anyone, including those who are asymptomatic and tell us whether they need to be tested.  This would be fast, effective and non-invasive and make sure the limited NHS testing resources are only used where they are really needed.

    We know that other respiratory diseases like COVID-19, change our body odor so there is a very high chance that dogs will be able to detect it. This new diagnostic tool could revolutionize our response to COVID-19 in the short term, but particularly in the months to come, and could be profoundly impactful.”

    Professor Steve Lindsay at Durham University says:

    “If the research is successful, we could use COVID-19 detection dogs at airports at the end of the epidemic to rapidly identify people carrying the virus. This would help prevent the re-emergence of the disease after we have brought the present epidemic under control.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:20

  • Trump Says He "Strongly Disagrees" With Gov Kemp's Decision To Reopen Georgia
    Trump Says He “Strongly Disagrees” With Gov Kemp’s Decision To Reopen Georgia

    After a week in which President Trump deliberately courted blame for the entire coronavirus pandemic response by egging on demonstrators, reopening the national parks and repeatedly made snide remarks about the risks of waiting too long, it appears the president is finally listening to his advisors – at least on the messaging front.

    In his first major break with Republican governors since the beginning of the pandemic, President Trump said during Wednesday evening’s press briefing that he “strongly disagreed” with Georgia Gov. Brian Kemp’s decision to start reopening his state on Friday.

    “I told the governor of Georgia, Brian Kemp, that I disagree strongly with his decision to open certain facilities which are in violation of the phase one guidelines for the incredible people of Georgia,” the president said during his nightly press conference on Wednesday. “But at the same time, he must do what he thinks is right, I want him to do what he thinks is right.”

    Specifically, Trump cited Georgia’s non-compliance with the standards laid out in the ‘Phase 1’ federal guidelines as his reason for disagreeing with the decision. Remember, qualifying for phase one requires seeing a 14-day decline in new infections, though cases have declined from record highs seen earlier this month.

    Trump’s comment prompted a torrent of amazed tweets and more than a few jokes about what many imagine is Kemp’s utter shock at Trump’s decision to distance himself from the governors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kemp might be disappointed, but this represents a critical turning point for the president, who appears to be listening to the advice of his closest advisors once again instead of almost pathological thirst for political confrontation. According to Kempe’s plan, The state would begin loosening some lockdown restrictions on Friday, and by Monday, gyms, beauty salons and even restaurants and bars would be allowed to reopen.

    The governor’s decision, which he announced on Monday, was met with a hail of criticism from scientists, the press, Democrats and even some Republicans. Many small business owners have said they probably won’t reopen right away despite the decision, and the mayors of the state’s biggest cities – all of whom are Democrats – are telling residents to simply ignore the governor.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:04

  • Mitch McConnell Says Struggling States Should File For Bankruptcy
    Mitch McConnell Says Struggling States Should File For Bankruptcy

    Over the past month, the economic shutdown resulting from the coronavirus pandemic – which as we hear every day was “nobody’s fault” just to make sure there are no unpleasant mentions of moral hazard during the biggest bailout in history

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … has emerged as the perfect excuse for anyone and everyone in need of additional funds or a full-blown bailout to come begging for some generosity. Unfortunately for insolvent US states, they may be too late to get a piece of the bailout pie because as Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell, said Wednesday, he is open to allowing states to declare bankruptcy – rather than sending governors more federal money to deal with their own ballooning deficits. Because after $10 trillion in fiscal and monetary funds was allocated to bailout mostly America’s rich in just the past month, somehow states don’t quite cut it.

    McConnell made the comments on “The Hugh Hewitt Show” amid a growing chorus of state governors imploring the federal government for urgent fiscal help and congressional Democrats seeking to work with the Trump administration to provide it. McConnell, instead, said he “would certainly be in favor of allowing states to use the bankruptcy route,” an option that is not currently available to them – as he called for a “pause” in such aid from Washington.

    “I mean, we all represent states. We all have governors regardless of party who would love to have free money,” McConnell said in response to a question on what the federal government should do to help states in tricky financial situations. “And that’s why I said yesterday we’re going to push the pause button here, because I think this whole business of additional assistance for state and local governments need[s] to be thoroughly evaluated.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    McConnell also said that many states are struggling with funding pensions or similar programs, saying “[t]here’s not going to be any desire on the Republican side to bail out state pensions by borrowing money from future generations.” And yet, when it comes to corporations, that’s precisely what the Republican side is doing, so who gets to decide where the line is drawn.

    After Hewett weighed in, criticizing liberal states that racked up significant liabilities, McConnell said he favored letting states declare bankruptcy, as local governments are allowed to.

    “Yeah, I would certainly be in favor of allowing states to use the bankruptcy route. It saves some cities,” McConnell said. “And there’s no good reason for it not to be available.”

    McConnell’s comments come one day after the Senate advanced an interim stimulus package to restock funds in the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) and address a handful of other priorities. He initially sought to have the bill include only funding for the PPP but Democrats held up the legislation until they could extract concessions from the majority leader. Though McConnell ceded to some of their requests, he kept funding for state governments out of the bill, which is expected to see a vote in the House of Representatives on Thursday.

    Democrats, predictably, were not happy: “Democrats are disappointed that the Administration has not agreed to more funding for state, tribal, and local governments on the front lines of this crisis who desperately need an infusion of funds to pay the essential workers who keep us safe,” House Speaker Nancy Pelosi, and Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer, said in a joint statement Tuesday, quoted by Fox News.

    “However, we are pleased that the President has committed to addressing this critical priority in CARES 2 and will work with urgency to see that this commitment is fulfilled,” they continued, indicating that the president was on their side of the issue rather than McConnell’s.

    New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo, a Democrat, said in his daily coronavirus briefing Monday that Trump told him “he’s going to work very hard” to secure funding for states in what Pelosi referred to as CARES 2, another massive stimulus bill that many in Congress, along with Trump, hope to pass once legislators return to Washington, D.C., on May 4.

    “We have to have state funding,” Cuomo said Wednesday. “The states have a role basically in a deficit situation. And we need funding from Washington.” It’s unclear whether fiscal concerns, though, could lead some in Congress to reconsider the scope of any additional aid packages.

    Governors have been calling for federal help for over a week. Maryland Republican Gov. Larry Hogan, the chairman of the National Governors Association, issued a statement on April 11 pleading with Congress to appropriate $500 billion for state governments as they deal with the economic and fiscal consequences of the coronavirus pandemic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “In the absence of unrestricted fiscal support of at least $500 billion from the federal government, states will have to confront the prospect of significant reductions to critically important services all across this country, hampering public health, the economic recovery, and — in turn — our collective effort to get people back to work,” Hogan said in a statement that also touted the work of governors to fight the coronavirus pandemic.

    McConnell’s comments Wednesday were not the first time allowing states to declare bankruptcy has been discussed. In the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, some advocated allowing hurting states to reorganize in bankruptcy. But Republicans at the time squashed the idea, even as they also panned the possibility of the federal government bailing states out.

    “While bankruptcy for states may seem like an attractive alternative to state bailouts, there are significant constitutional concerns that should be addressed by congressional hearings,” former Rep. Lamar Smith, R-Texas, said at the time.

    McConnell concluded that states are likely to agree that bankruptcy shouldn’t be the first option.

    “My guess is their first choice would be for the federal government to borrow money from future generations to send it down to them now so they don’t have to do that,” he said. “That’s not something I’m going to be in favor of.”

    Somehow we doubt that what McConnell is or is not in favor of will matter.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:03

  • Japanese PMI Collapses To Record Low, Signals 10% Crash In GDP
    Japanese PMI Collapses To Record Low, Signals 10% Crash In GDP

    After China’s ugliest GDP print ever, and the collapse of US economic surprise index data, it should be no real surprise that Japan’s manufacturing and services industry PMIs would plunge (despite the “everything’s fine, the Olympics is imminent” narrative puked forth by the government for most of the month).

    But, to crash to record lows is something else…

    • Japan’s April flash manufacturing purchasing managers’ index falls to 43.7 from 44.8 in March – Lowest reading since April 2009

    • Japan’s April flash services purchasing managers’ index falls to 22.8 from 33.8 in March – Lowest reading since series began

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which combined to leave Japan’s April flash composite purchasing managers’ index plunging to to 27.8 from 36.2 in March – the lowest reading since records began.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Across the indices everything was a disaster…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Commenting on the latest survey results, Joe Hayes, Economist at IHS Markit, said:

    “PMI data for Japan tell us that the crippling economic impact from the global corona virus pandemic intensified in April. Furthermore, the data show us the initial impact of Japan’s lockdown. The survey was conducted between 7 and 21 April The 7th was the day Prime Minister Abe announced a state of emergency in some parts of Japan, although this was upgraded to a nationwide state of emergency on the 16th and extended the lockdown to the whole country. “

    The decline in combined output across both manufacturing and services was the strongest ever recorded by the survey in almost 13 years of data collection, surpassing declines seen during the global financial crisis and in the aftermath of the 2011 tsunami.”

    Overall, GDP looks set to decline at an annual rate in excess of 10% in the second quarter…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And it is not about to get better anytime soon:

    “The current state of emergency will stay in place until 6May, although given Japan’s lagged response relative to other parts of the world, one would expect this to be extended, meaning the harsh economic effects are likely to drag out further.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:47

  • Here's Why 2/3rds Of US Oil & Gas Companies May Not Exist A Year From Now
    Here’s Why 2/3rds Of US Oil & Gas Companies May Not Exist A Year From Now

    Authored by Bryce Coward via Knowledge Leaders Capital blog,

    Energy companies are facing a life or death moment in 2020 with the price of WTI crude oil falling to $13.64/barrel as of this writing. Indeed the collapse in energy prices combined with poor fundamentals leading into the COVID crisis make most of the oil and gas sector vulnerable to takeover or bankruptcy in the not too distant future.

    For example, a simple analysis of the 96 companies in the US Integrated Oil & Gas companies, E&P companies, Drilling, Equipment & Services sub-industries shows that 67% of these firms have total liabilities in excess of equity as of their latest reporting period. That would be strike one in any situation, but with oil prices about 80% below the price that prevailed at the beginning of the year, the ability of these companies to meet debt payments or pay suppliers is further brought into question.

    If that wasn’t enough, we ran a simple extrapolation to estimate how many of these companies will have enough cash on hand to pay current liabilities this year. We simply take 2019 EBITDA and estimate what 2020 EBITDA will be if WTI prices average $25/barrel in 2020 and assume total 2020 consumption will be 85% of 2019 consumption.

    If this situation comes to pass, then 71% of these firms will have 2020 EBITDA + Cash that is less than 2020 Current Liabilities. Now, maybe these assumptions are wildly off the mark and WTI will average $35/barrel or higher. Maybe these businesses will be able to access vast sums of new capital to stay afloat. I suppose they could sell assets, too, if there were willing buyers. If that’s the case then it would certainly take some pressure off, but even then the bulk of these firms would be under severe distress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, to be fair, even though oil prices have absolutely collapsed in recent days, the equities themselves as well as their credit risk seem to be hanging in there. For example, the energy sector has actually outperformed the S&P 500 by about 9% since March 16th.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    High yield energy spreads also peaked in mid-March (blue line below) as the WTI near-term futures contract (red line, right inverted axis) traded in the $20 range. These credit spreads have backed off considerably since then even though they have turned back up modestly as WTI has collapsed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, the message from the fundamentals tells us that unless something changes and fastlike energy prices rise a lot and/or consumption rebounds to pre-crisis levels and/or these companies get a Federal bailoutmuch of the US energy sector is going to pursue restructuring in 2020 or get purchased by a stronger hand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet, the price signals from the market are telling us it’s all good. You be the judge. We suppose the next several weeks will be telling.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:40

  • What Rebound? Hedge Funds Have Been Selling For 8 Of Past 9 Days As "Global HF Heavyweights Remain Bearish"
    What Rebound? Hedge Funds Have Been Selling For 8 Of Past 9 Days As “Global HF Heavyweights Remain Bearish”

    Today’s market rebound was impressive, but after the first major sell-off in some time on Monday and Tuesday, it was not impressive enough for Nomura’s quant Masanari Takada who writes that what is going on in the market – i.e., the unprecedented arrival of negative WTI crude oil futures prices which seems to have dealt a blow to investor confidence – looks like the sort of shakeout from long positions that he has been expecting and “at almost precisely the timing we had expected.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But while a gut feeling is one thing, a tangible reversal is something far more notable, and according to the Nomura quant, “it appears that CTAs have put a stop to their accumulation of long positions in NASDAQ 100 futures” and as a result, a key concern is whether the NASDAQ 100 manages to hold the line at around 8,180 that Nomura estimates is the average entry point for CTAs’ net buying of futures since the beginning of April.

    In terms of technical patterns, CTAs may take another stab at chasing the market up starting around 29 April, provided that the index stays above this line. However, if such an upside attempt were to fail to squeeze some investors out of shorts or convince others to stake out fresh longs, Takada expects the buying pressure generated by these CTAs on their own in the US equity market to fizzle out on or around 8 May: “This would imply a need to brace for selling in tune with the “sell in May” adage.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recent reversal in the Nasdaq aside, CTAs still have outstanding net short positions in Russell 2000 futures and DJIA futures. However, their net short position in Russell 2000 futures is now 80% smaller than it was at its most recent peak, while their net short position in DJIA futures is similarly about 60% smaller than it was at its peak. So “what we are seeing now looks like a pause after a period of concentrated short-covering.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One notable observation, and a continuation of a trend we discussed late last week when we discussed that “Record Human Hedge Fund Selling Meets Furious Robot CTAs Buying“, is that unlike CTAs, global macro hedge funds – i.e., those controlled by humans – appear to be targeting further downside in DM equities. Indeed, as Takada writes overnight, “that the risk-off mood arrived just when historical patterns suggested it might lends further support to the idea that the buying of DM equities in April thus far has been powered by CTAs and other short-term trend-followers along with fundamental value hedge funds and other such perma-contrarians. Meanwhile, the funds looking least interested in buying have been those that focus mostly on fundamentals.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most interesting, and yet another indication that humans are not buying this rally at all – literally –  is that according to Nomura, “the global heavyweights among macro hedge funds are still bearish on equities” and their trades targeting the downside are snuffing out early attempts by some investors to feel out the upside. “We suspect that global macro hedge funds will remain bearish until there is some reason to believe that DM economies are on their way to finding a floor”, according to Nomura.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, investors could quickly become more optimistic before economic indicators have had a chance to bottom out. Should that happen, global macro hedge funds might have to make an emergency rush for the exits from their short trades.

    However, with equity sentiment stubbornly parked in negative territory, Nomura’s impression is that there is not much impetus among global macro hedge funds to rethink their current strategies just now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All of this helps explain why as Morgan Stanley’s quants write, long/short hedge funds have sold longs for 8 of the past 9 days, and were net sellers of equities again on Tues with selling led by L/S funds who were adding to shorts, and also selling on the long side.” As a result, net exposures fell further, down another 2% to 38%– a level which represents a near record low, or 2nd %-tile, over the last 12M and the 1st %-tile since 2010.

    In other words, the ongoing war between human and machine investors wages with the former expecting the worst, while robots – who are obviously immune to the wu flu – understandably eager to push stocks back to all time highs.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd April 2020

  • The COVID-Crisis And Leader Approval Ratings
    The COVID-Crisis And Leader Approval Ratings

    Despite the massive impact of the coronavirus crisis in Italy, where over 180 thousand people have so far contracted the virus and 24 thousand people have died, leading to the country’s healthcare system to be catastrophically overwhelmed, its leader Giuseppe Conte is riding an unprecedented wave of popularity.

    Having Jumped to 71 percent in March, his highest rate since taking office, his approval rating in April is 63 percent – still a whole 11 points higher than his figure for February before the national lockdown was announced.

    As Statista’s Martin Armstrong notes, it’s a similar story in the UK too, where Boris Johnson, who spent a couple of nights in intensive care due to Covid-19 himself, is 18 points up on February. This, although his government’s response has been under severe fire in recent weeks due largely to low testing capacity and a drastic lack of PPE for medical staff.

    Where this coronavirus goodwill ends though is in the United States where the starkly divided population has been unmoved by Donald Trump’s crisis response to cross any of the deeply set party lines. Comparing poll averages in February to those in April show a very modest one-point increase for the president.

    Infographic: The Coronavirus Crisis and Leader Approval Ratings | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    In Brazil, Jair Bolsonaro’s inept handling of the spread of the virus has caused his already low approval ratings to drop by another 6 points since February – from 34 to 28 percent – with his grip on power seemingly at an all-time low.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 02:45

  • Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You're Not Being Told, Part 1
    Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You’re Not Being Told, Part 1

    Authored by Iain Davis via Off-Guardian.org,

    We have been given a very clear narrative about the declared coronavirus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The UK State has passed legislation, in the form of the Coronavirus Act, to compel people to self isolate and practice social distancing in order to delay the spread of SARS-CoV-2 (SC2). We are told this “lockdown”, a common prison term, is essential. We are also told that SC2 has been clearly identified to be the virus which causes the COVID 19 syndrome.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Necessary? Lawful?

    At the time of writing SC2 is said to have infected 60,733 people with 7,097 people supposedly dying of COVID 19 in the UK. This case fatality ration (CFR) of 11.7% is seemingly one of the worst in the world. Furthermore, with just 135 people recovered, the recovery rate in the UK is inexplicably low.

    Some reading this may baulk at use of words like “seemingly” and “alleged” in reference to these statistics. The mainstream media (MSM) have been leading the charge to cast anyone who questions the State’s coronavirus narrative as putting lives at risk. The claim being that questioning what we are told by the State, its officials and the MSM undermines the lockdown. The lockdown is, we are told, essential to save lives.

    It is possible both to support the precautionary principle and question the lockdown. Questioning the scientific and statistical evidence base, supposedly justifying the complete removal of our civil liberties, does not mean those doing so care nothing for their fellow citizens. On the contrary, many of us are extremely concerned about the impact of the lockdown on everyone. It is desperately sad to see people blindly support their own house arrest while attacking anyone who questions the necessity for it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Exercise? Yes / No?

    The knee jerk reaction, assuming any questioning of the lockdown demonstrates a cavalier, uncaring disregard is puerile. Grown adults shouldn’t simply believe everything they are told like mindless idiots. Critical thinking and asking questions is never “bad” under any circumstances whatsoever.

    Only the State, with the unwavering support of its MSM propaganda operation, enforces unanimity of thought. If a system cannot withstand questioning it suggests it is built upon shaky foundations and probably not worth maintaining. Yet perhaps it is what we are not told that is more telling.

    Among the many things we are not told is how many lives the lockdown will ruin and end prematurely. Are these lives irrelevant?

    We are not told the evidence for the existence of a virus called SARS-CoV-2 is highly questionable and the tests for it unreliable; we are not told that the numbers of deaths reportedly caused by COVID 19 is statistically vague, seemingly deliberately so; we are not told that these deaths are well within the normal range of excess winter mortality and we are not told that in previous years excess winter deaths have been higher than they are now.

    We didn’t need to destroy the economy in response to those, far worse, periods of loss so why do we need to do so for this?

    We will look at this in more detail in Part 2.

    UNDERSTANDING MAINSTREAM MEDIA DISINFORMATION

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before we address what we are not being told it’s worth looking at how the MSM is spreading disinformation. On February 22nd one rag printed a story which absurdly alleged, without a shred of evidence, that Russia was somehow deliberately spreading disinformation about coronavirus. It reported this uncritically, questioning nothing. Their opening paragraph read:

    Thousands of Russian-linked social media accounts have launched a coordinated effort to spread misinformation and alarm about coronavirus, disrupting global efforts to fight the epidemic, US officials have said.”

    On March 10th the same rag reported another story about disinformation in which it was noted:

    Disinformation experts say, there remains little evidence of concerted efforts to spread falsehoods about the virus, suggesting that the misleading information in circulation is spread primarily through grassroots chatter.”

    The irony shouldn’t be overlooked. Directly contradicting their own previous disinformation, this MSM pulp assumes we are all so stupid we won’t notice their perpetual spin and evidence-free claims. The UK’s national broadcaster the BBC is perhaps the worst of all the disinformation propagandists. The sheer volume of disinformation they are pumping out is quite breathtaking.

    The United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights spells out what freedom of expression means. All human beings are born free with equal dignity and rights. All are afforded these rights without any distinction at all. Article 19 states:

    Everyone has the right to freedom of opinion and expression; this right includes freedom to hold opinions without interference and to seek, receive and impart information and ideas through any media and regardless of frontiers.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The BBC, who obviously couldn’t care less about human rights, gleefully supported the censorship of so called conspiracy theorist David Icke. They did so by spreading disinformation. Icke raised concerns about the possible link between 5G and the spread of coronavirus. He did not incite violence, as suggested in the BBC’s disinformation. The BBC misled the public utterly when they stated:

    “Conspiracy theories linking 5G signals to the coronavirus pandemic continue to spread despite there being no evidence the mobile phone signals pose a health risk.”

    While I agree with the BBC that there is no evidence of a link between 5G and the apparent coronavirus, we certainly can’t rule it out. Because the second half of their statement, that there is no evidence that mobile signals pose a health risk, was a mendacious deceit.

    There is a wealth of evidence of that risk.

    The leading medical journal The Lancet noted these risks in 2018:

    …mounting scientific evidence suggests that prolonged exposure to radiofrequency electromagnetic radiation has serious biological and health effects.”

    Why are the BBC so willing to mislead the public and expose them to unnecessary health harms? Is it deliberate or are they just shoddy journalists?

    Either way, quite clearly they are habitual pedlars of disinformation. They appear to no better than the worst clickbait sites that have proliferated over recent years.

    The MSM is responsible for the majority of misinformation and disinformation circulating at the moment. We must diligently verify every claim they make and check the evidence ourselves. They are not to be trusted. As the BBC quite rightly points out:

    STOP BEFORE YOU SHARE

    CHECK YOUR SOURCES

    (If it’s the MSM check to see if they offer any evidence at all or if it’s just their opinion. If it’s their opinion ignore it. It’s almost certainly unfounded)

    PAUSE IF YOU FEEL EMOTIONAL

    (If you do feel emotional you have probably just been manipulated by the MSM)

    “SCIENCE LED” MEANS CHERRY PICKING SCIENCE

    The UK State has been keen to insist that we all believe their lockdown response is led by the science. However they have cherry picked the science to roll out the lockdown and ignored the considerable scientific evidence which contradicts it. Both the UK and U.S. governments used the computer models of Imperial College London (ICL), predicting millions of deaths, to justify the removal of our civil liberties.

    Almost as soon as the lockdown was in place the scientists, having launched their vaccine research fund raiser, downgraded their projections from an estimated 550,000 deaths in the UK to 20,000 or even lower. Neil Furguson, the lead scientist responsible for the initial ICL report stated that they had revised the figures because of the effectiveness of the lockdown safety measures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Claiming the lockdown would need to last for at least 18 months until a vaccine is found. ICL are grant recipients of the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation. They have shown no interests at all in researching possible preventative treatments, reducing the need for a vaccine, such as hydroxychloroquine.

    The initial ICL computer models were based upon unproven assumptions. They assumed that SC2 would spread like influenza. This was contrary to the findings of the World Health Organisation who stated both that SC2 did not appear to spread as quickly as influenza and was less virulent.

    The WHO found up to a 20% infection rate, where people were exposed to SC2 in crowded settings for prolonged periods, and a 1-5% infection rate in the community. This was nothing like the spread of the 1918 H1N1 influenza pandemic.

    However, publishing their paper on March 16th, the ICL completely ignored the WHO research which was published a month earlier and stated, without any justification whatsoever:

    COVID-19, a virus with comparable lethality to H1N1 influenza in 1918”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr Knut M. Wittkowski

    Public Health England (PHE) disagreed with ICL’s evidence free assumptions and downgraded COVID 19 from a High Consequence Infectious Disease (HCID), due to relatively low mortality rates.

    However, ignoring both the WHO and PHE, the UK and US decided only the ICL knew what they were talking about. Cherry-picking their highly dubious research, they insisted the lockdown was necessary to “flatten the curve” and, in the UK, protect the NHS.

    The science the State has chosen to believe is the minority view it seems. Epidemiologists, epidemiological statisticians, microbiologists, mathematicians and many other scientists and academics the world over have repeatedly warned that the lockdown is precisely the wrong thing to do.

    COVID 19, the disease supposedly caused by SC2, is experienced as little more than a bad cough or cold by the vast majority of relatively healthy people. Dr Knut M. Wittkowski (Ph.D) is among the growing number of globally renowned scientists who question what we are told by the State and its MSM. In regard to both SC2 and COVID 19.

    Dr Wittkowski stated:

    “With all respiratory diseases, the only thing that stops the disease is herd immunity. About 80% of the people need to have had contact with the virus. it’s very important to keep the schools open and kids mingling to spread the virus to get herd immunity as fast as possible, and then the elderly people, who should be separated, and the nursing homes should be closed during that time, can come back and meet their children and grandchildren after about 4 weeks when the virus has been exterminated….If we had herd immunity now, there couldn’t be a second wave in autumn.”

    Such scientists and academics are all completely ignored by the State. Yet they believe others, such as Professor Neil Ferguson and Professor Karine Lacombe without hesitation. Perhaps it is just a coincidence that the scientists the State chooses to believe overwhelmingly appear to have close links to the globalist foundations and pharmaceutical corporations developing the vaunted coronavirus vaccine.

    ARE YOU SURE ABOUT THE CORONAVIRUS LOCKDOWN?

    Those who reject all criticiam of the lockdown, and simply accept whatever the State tells them, presumably believe the State only has our best interests at heart and would never do anything to harm us. Perhaps they believe that to question the claims of the State can only ever be conspiracy theory.

    Certainly that’s the message constantly reinforced by the MSM.

    However, there is also plenty of evidence that the State frequently deceives the public. We only need look to the WMD lies told to start an illegal Iraq war in 2003 to understand that the State is willing to further the interests of the powerful and cares little about lives lost in the effort.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Therefore, in the UK, it is worth recapping what it is we are consenting to with the Coronavirus Act:

    We consent to increased State surveillance of ourselves and our family.

    We are happy that we could be detained, without charge, because some state official suspects, or claims they suspect, we may be infected.

    It is fine with us that we or our loved ones can be sectioned under the Mental Health Act on the recommendation of a single doctor and neither we nor they need to have the protection of a second opinion before we are locked up.

    We accept that the state can retain our biometric data and fingerprints for an extended period.

    We consent that jury trials are a bit of an anachronism and Judges can hear more evidence by video or even audio link.

    We think its fine that the evidence required, and processes undertaken, to determine and record our or our loved one’s deaths can be eroded to the point where they can be registered by people with no medical or legal expertise at all.

    We don’t think the NHS needs to adhere to practice standards or bother with assessing the needs of some patients, especially older people.

    We are also fine with the complete suspension of democracy in Britain.

    We accept all of this based upon a unique subset of scientific opinion which, contrary to every known scientific principle, can never be questioned.

    We agree with the MSM that people who question any aspect of the stories they tell us are dangerous because these people just don’t care if their own loved ones die. Only true believers care about their families.

    We also accept the need for the State to invest considerable resources creating counter disinformation units whose purpose is to censor anything and everything which questions our firmly held beliefs. The beliefs informed by the many of the same people doing the censoring.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Sucharit Bhakdi -world leading microbiologist

    I don’t know about you, but I remain unconvinced by the evidence I’ve seen so far. I have no doubt that there is a health crisis and excess seasonal deaths, but I have seen no evidence at all that the numbers are unprecedented or unusual in any way. Evidence we will explore in greater detail in Part 2.

    I accept that we should exercise the precautionary principle and take steps to limit the risks to the most vulnerable but I do not accept that the lockdown is the best way to go about it. Nor do I see any necessity at all for all the other dictatorial clauses in the Coronavirus Act. I do not consent.

    If you think this will all be over soon and won’t get worse I’m afraid you may be disappointing. The UK state have based this lockdown on the scientific rubbish spewed out by ICL. Here’s another one of the ICL’s recommendations:

    The major challenge of suppression is that this type of intensive intervention package – or something equivalently effective at reducing transmission – will need to be maintained until a vaccine becomes available (potentially 18 months or more).”

    There is nothing to suggest this isn’t the intention of the State. Certainly voices in the U.S. are already indicating their desire for an 18 month lockdown. Apparently taking their cue directly from the discredited ICL report and steadfastly ignoring everything else. Nor should we assume the draconian powers seized by the state won’t get worse.

    Most of this response is being driven by globalist policy emanating, on this occasion, from the World Health Organisation. Speaking at the daily WHO press briefing on the March 30th Dr. Michael Ryan, Executive Director of the WHO Health Emergencies Programme, said:

    Lockdowns and shutdowns really should just be part of an overall comprehensive strategy…..Most of the transmission that’s actually happening in many countries now is happening in the household at family level….Now we need to go and look in families to find those people who may be sick and remove them and isolate them in a safe and dignified manner.”

    Given that we now live in a de facto dictatorship there’s no reason to believe that states across the globe won’t use this as justification to start removing people from their homes. My hope is that sense will prevail and, as it becomes clear the pandemic is waning, public pressure will mount to repeal this dictatorial legislation.

    However, given some of the comments I have seen on social media over the last two weeks, the panic buying and attacks upon anyone questioning the State’s narrative, it seems many people are so frightened they desperately need to believe the State is trying to save them.

    This fear is based upon apparent ignorance of the economic severity of the lockdown and the monumental health risk it poses. People don’t seem to want to know there is considerable doubt the Coronavirus Act is even legal in international law. There is also doubt that SARS-CoV-2 is an identifiable virus and the statistics we are given may well be based upon tests that can’t identify it anyway. There is evidence that the statistics we have been given have been deliberately manipulated to exaggerate the health risk and there is no evidence these excess deaths are “unprecedented.”

    If you are among the few willing to look at this evidence I hope you will read part 2 of this article series. Coming soon.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 02:00

  • Forget The Pandemic, This Could Kill 90% Of US Population
    Forget The Pandemic, This Could Kill 90% Of US Population

    Authored by Paul Bedard, op-ed via WashingtonExaminer.com,

    As bad as the coronavirus and the COVID-19 sickness it causes are, warning cries are increasing over a much bigger threat with the potential to kill 90% of the U.S. population. And, unlike the virus, Washington has known of the threat for decades and done little to nothing.

    “We have seen this movie before and are living through it now,” said Peter Pry, one of the nation’s leading experts on electromagnetic pulse, the electric grid killer that threatens naturally from the sun and from weapons held by China.

    “If we are not even prepared for the coronavirus, imagine the consequences if we get hit with a real existential threat, like EMP,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Advocates for protecting the nation’s electric grid and other vital systems, including military bases, from an EMP attack are seizing on the virus crisis to inject urgency into budgeting to protect electric transformers, transfer stations, and wires from disruption or meltdown.

    “For the $2 trillion that will be spent on the coronavirus, we could harden all critical infrastructures against EMP, deploy space-based missile defense Brilliant Pebbles before the end of a second Trump term, modernize the U.S. nuclear deterrent from top to bottom (delivery vehicles, weapons, scientific-industrial base), and have over $1 trillion to spare,” said Pry, a key member of congressional EMP commissions and author of the new book The Power and the Light: The Congressional EMP Commission’s War to Save America 2001 – 2020.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Brian Sullivan, a government and military security analyst, said, Can you imagine if our grid went down and we lost electricity for an extended period of time? As bad as our current situation is, it could always be a lot worse. We relied on our government leaders to prepare our country for a pandemic, and we see what that got us. We rely on that same leadership now to protect our electric grid.”

    While warnings of the current pandemic have been around for less than a year, reports have been written about EMP attacks for decades. The first congressional EMP panel, for example, warned of a yearlong blackout following an attack on the electric grid.

    “The EMP Commission estimates a nationwide blackout of the United States lasting one year could kill 90% of Americans from starvation and societal collapse,” said Pry. That would be about 295 million people.

    In the past, warnings have been met inside the government and energy industry with eye-rolling. But President Trump has taken the threat seriously, especially as China and other foes have developed EMP weapons, and signed an executive order to move toward protecting the grid. The military has also taken steps to protect its operations.

    But Pry details in his new book the efforts inside the “deep state” federal bureaucracy and electric industry to “slow-roll and sabotage” Trump’s agenda while making it look like they’re making progress.

    “The strategy of pretending to do something but really doing nothing and then throwing money at the threat when it happens will get millions of Americans killed when there is an EMP,” he told Secrets.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 00:10

  • "New Normal" – Demand For Thermal Imaging Cameras Soar During Pandemic
    “New Normal” – Demand For Thermal Imaging Cameras Soar During Pandemic

    From “pandemic drones” with thermal optics searching for COVID-19 carriers to Amazon using thermal cameras to screen employees for the virus – there’s one certain thing: demand is surging for thermal sensors during the pandemic. 

    Bloomberg notes that thermal-imaging devices are in high demand among manufacturers and businesses preparing to reopen operations, who plan on using the technology to mitigate the spread of the virus. 

    FLIR Systems, one of the largest thermal imaging camera manufactures in the world, has reported a jump in demand: 

    “When the virus moved into Europe and North America, it was more Fortune 500 companies, hospital and health-care networks and immediate needs from essential business that were required to operate,” Flir CEO Jim Cannon said in an interview.

    Here’s an example of a FLIR camera in use: 

    To control the spread of the virus, the “new normal” at corporate facilities appears to be the utilization of thermal cameras to screen for feverish employees. 

    Amazon is leading the charge with the installation of thermal cameras at its warehouses. They have made the screening of employees much more streamlined than using forehead thermometers.

    Here’s an alleged image of one thermal device at an Amazon warehouse. The cameras are not FLIR made, but rather from an outfit called Infrared Cameras Inc in Texas.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    News on corporate America deploying thermal cameras has led to a jump in FLIR’s stock. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    General Motors and other automakers have recently confirmed they’re deploying thermal cameras to screen employees. 

    Bloomberg notes some thermal cameras could range between $2,500 to $15,000 per device.

    “Scanners can be used to detect higher body temperatures, a common symptom of Covid-19. They measure temperature on the skin’s surface using infrared light to create a thermal image. They come in different forms from complex, fixed-position scanners to more basic hand-held devices. Costs can range from $2,500 to $15,000 each.”

    Bill Parrish, Co-Founder & CTO of Seek Thermal, said, “there is big demand” for thermals at the moment from “Fortune 500 companies.” He said, “We have been inundated” with requests for products. “They are doing demos and evaluations to help them open up their factories.

    Before the pandemic, thermal sensors have been widely deployed in warzones. So, one can make the argument that corporate America is using military technology to keep an eye on its workforce.

    Besides screening at entrances of factories, thermals will be installed within facilities that will monitor workspaces for COVID-19 carriers. 

    Flir said it is gearing up for an exponential rise in demand for its sensors:

    “If overnight huge industries place huge orders, that certainly will take time to satisfy those orders,” Flir’s Cannon said.

    It’s only a matter of time before corporations and governments deploy pandemic drones with thermals, hunting for virus carriers. 

    The rise of Big Brother is imminent, it’s all happening under cover of the pandemic. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 23:50

  • China Is Waging A New Kind Of War Against The US
    China Is Waging A New Kind Of War Against The US

    Authored by Gregory Copley via OilPrice.com,

    Beijing made it clear in 1999 that when it went to war with the US it would be a new kind of war.

    People’s Republic of China (PRC) Pres. Xi Jinping then announced in October 2018 that he had begun a “new 30 Years War” with the US.

    But there seemed to be no “Pearl Harbor” moment, so the rest of the world disregarded the declaration of war. That was a mistake.

    It became clear that the 2020 COVID-19-inspired “global fear pandemic” laid out the battlefield terrain and saw the opening shots emerge from the PRC in a variety of strategic formats. To be sure, COVID-19 was not itself the “Pearl Harbor moment”; it was the subsequent fear pandemic which drove down the global economy.

    Beijing could not wait any longer to begin strategic operations — the new form of “total war” — if it was to survive as a global power and to assume primacy within its symbolic 30 year timeframe.

    Shakespeare once noted:

    “There is a tide in the affairs of men, Which taken at the flood, leads on to fortune. Omitted, all the voyage of their life is bound in shallows and in miseries. On such a full sea are we now afloat. And we must take the current when it serves, or lose our ventures.”

    From Beijing’s standpoint, given that the PRC economy was already in massive decline, it was critical that the economies of its strategic rivals should also be forced into decline. That may or may not have been a planned aspect of the PRC’s COVID-19 response strategy, but it certainly was quickly adopted by Beijing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other words, if the PRC could not reverse its economic decline, its strategic competitiveness moving forward was critically dependent upon seeing its rivals decline commensurately, or even become crippled. It was not a race to the top; it was a race to avoid being first to the bottom.

    And from Beijing’s standpoint, too, this was to be a war engaging broad-form population warfare strategies, particularly harnessed to electronic communications, in turn linked to a range of strategic and tactical psychological and psychopolitical operations. That was clear from the benchmark PRC 1999 study, Unrestricted Warfare, which has now emerged literally as the textbook of the new “total war” against the US and the West.

    It was also all connected, as far as Beijing was concerned, to economic and social warfare, including population warfare, on a variety of levels. And only tangentially — in the short-term — was military force projection a component. Military confrontation involved risk if, for example, the US was to be directly engaged with force. So it was a strategy by which the PRC required the weakening and splitting of what otherwise would be an overwhelming adversary alliance.

    – A fundamental tenet of the engagement by Beijing was to split the US away from its traditional allies, exploiting schisms which have been festering and expanding since the end of the Cold

    – The parallel tenet was — and is — to then split the internal populations of US and its allies by exacerbating and supporting existing societal

    By such means are solid and cohesive adversaries broken down to be challenged piecemeal, and then each of the separate adversaries weakened internally and prevented from achieving unfettered and decisive action even at a national level. If an adversary is fighting within itself or preoccupied with domestic issues it cannot pose a threat.

    “Splittist” has long been a particularly vitriolic epithet used by Chinese communists to denigrate those who split away from the Communist Party of China (CPC), or attempted to split the country away from the CPC. Now, splitting strategies are employed against the enemies of the CPC.

    Beijing’s approach was learned from the Western strategy of the Cold War, which was to exacerbate to the point of fracture the People’s Republic of China links with the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (the USSR).

    To drive a wedge into the Sino-Soviet rift.

    Beijing understood this when it allowed itself to be part of that Sino-Soviet splitting operation when CPC Chairman Mao Zedong met with US Pres. Richard Nixon on February 21, 1972. At that time, the Soviet-PRC alliance was one of convenience, but it was never an easy match. Indeed, the Russian Federation modus vivendi with the PRC by 2020 — it would be difficult to call it an alliance — was fraught with as much mutual suspicion as the Sino-Soviet link of the Cold War.

    Now Beijing has begun to apply that splitting technique against the West itself.

    But, as central as that process is to PRC strategy — or, more accurately, to the strategy of the CPC, which is as much aimed at subduing the Chinese people as foreign societies — it is only one component which would enable the PRC, economically in decline and militarily no match for even the US let alone the formerly close Western set of alliances, to have a chance at strategic success.

    Moreover, it should not be assumed that it is the CPC alone which has moved onto a “war footing” and which saw the new conflict as an amorphous “total war”: a total war which has taken on absolutely new dimensions from the shape of “total war” in the 20th Century. US Pres. Donald Trump began moving the US from a passive acceptance of PRC strategic expansionism — which had been underway for two decades at least — in 2017, and then moved into defensive strategic economic policies by late 2019.

    Trump knew the PRC was at war with the US the moment his Administration took office in January 2017. Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe was also by that time already aware of the war, and was preparing Japan for it.

    The COVID-19-related upheaval meant that, by early 2020, the prime ministers of Australia and the United Kingdom were also gradually coming aboard with the reality that they had been forced onto a war footing. What is significant is the degree to which public opinion in Africa generally, and in Australia, South-East Asia, the US, parts of Europe, and so on, has moved against the PRC as a result of the way in which Beijing has postured itself during the crisis.

    The CPC — or at least Pres. Xi Jinping — does not seem to care. The velvet glove has been removed to some extent. It has begun to take advantage of the cover of the crisis to step up actions against rebellious elements in its autonomous Hong Kong region, for example, and to move its sole operational aircraft carrier, the Liaoning, into the South China Sea to highlight the perception that its armed forces have not been constrained by the COVID-19 crisis in the same way that the US and French navies have been.

    But nowhere, however, was the extent of the war — the type of the war — discussed or understood. It is a global total war; one in which all elements of society, indeed of all societies, are conscripted. I have written extensively on this in a new book which will appear in the coming months.

    This is not a “black swan event” — there is no such thing — but it is finally a clarification of the dynamic framework which has been emerging for the 21st Century. It is also worth noting that although the Xi strategy may be ambitious and innovative, it does not necessarily involve any real understanding of the US or the world by Pres. Xi, and more than most of the world understands Xi’s personal fusion of “China”. Arguably, Xi’s view of China and its destiny is akin to the mythical view which Hitler had of and for Germany.

    But now Xi has committed the PRC to a strategic course of action. That is the physical component. So the planning can begin, by other states, as to how to deal with that PRC action.

    1.     How Societies Revive

    Economic, social, and strategic recovery in any society beset by major crisis requires clean-sheet approaches and decisive steps to sweep away impediments to revival.

    This is impossible — and usually undesirable — in normal conditions, and even in a crisis it is difficult unless societies and government agree that extraordinary steps are

    permitted. In all of this should be understood the basic concept, angrily refuted by statists, that it is not the job of governments to control societies; it is the job of societies to control government.

    But, in the present climate of widespread fear for the future, the fact that societies also fear change means that:

    (a) The appearance of normalcy and continuity of institutions must be maintained as far as possible, and the utilization and revival of familiar, iconic, symbols, instruments, language, and faces is desirable; and

    (b) The reality that massive change and threat has already been visited upon society means that substantive, planned, further underlying change is now more possible. In other words, change has already occurred: use it to “Remold it nearer to the Heart’s Desire!”, as Omar Khayyám suggested. But what that desire is, or should be, then becomes the primary

    In the 2020 context, these factors were true as much for the PRC as for the US, UK, European Union (EU), or any other country. The difference in the application of the necessity to clearly specify what outcome is desired, however, lies in the goals and paths which each government wishes for its society.

    Every major conflict tends to allow a government to increase its dominance over a society in order to combat an existential threat. How much that dominance is subsequently relaxed following the threat shows the difference between command economies – essentially socialist autocracies by definition – and classical democracies.

    What has been significant in the early response to the fear pandemic which was triggered by the COVID-19 crisis is that many Western nation states actually began adopting permanent changes which would move their societies closer to the command status normally associated with communist or socialist-fascist autocracies. In this regard, my colleague, Prof. Yuri Maltsev, cites Friedrich Nietzsche: “Whoever fights monsters should see to it that in the process he does not become a monster. And if you gaze long enough into an abyss, the abyss will gaze back into you.”

    Apart from the move toward greater control over economies, the move toward cashless societies, toward the implementation of technology-enabled control of individuals (enabling total surveillance and obedience, for example) by definition changes the nature of the societies.

    But does greater control over an economy and the minimizing of social freedom lead to the kind of longer-term strategic recovery which was ostensibly the declared goal of combating the immediate threat? In other words, like suicide, is it a long-term solution to a short-term problem? Is it a successful operation which kills the patient?

    Crisis provides the opportunity for many actions.

    Things can be achieved in chaos which could never be accomplished in calm. Positive and negative things. The view of statists, usually, is that the answer to a crisis is more government. That, of course, is antithetical to the free movement and thought of the individual, and therefore alien to entrepreneurship and productivity.

    The primary lessons, then, from the 2020 crisis, which has caused virtually all major nations to add unsustainably to their debt burdens, should include:

    (i) Simplify and open society rather than legislate and control.

    Remove inhibitions to economic and social stimulation which do not require state funding.

    In other words, reduce the emphasis on activities which require taxpayer funds (which add to national debt). These neither stimulate revenue production by their action, nor enable productivity regeneration to occur. It is entrepreneurship which generates employment, taxation, and addresses the needs of national self-sufficiency;

    (ii) Eliminate or reduce the penalties, efforts, and cost of both starting economic enterprises or closing them.

    This means allowing corporate bankruptcies to occur. Better to endure short-term losses than to lose long-term economic momentum. Governments are now searching, in any event, for ways to write off, refute, or inflate out of their debt obligations anyway.

    Is it not hypocritical to stop the marketplace from moving forward after the failure or collapse of commercial enterprises when governments routinely do so with impunity, often by printing more unsupported money? And many of the commercial enterprises have failed, in any event, due to the actions of governments in suppressing normal market activity. Efficient bankruptcy is the key to economic momentum.

    (iii) Stimulate self-sufficiency through national and local-level policies which favor the local production of necessities and tools of strategic advantage, and deny that advantage to the adversary. This does indeed require the application — selectively, carefully, and temporarily — of bans on certain imported products in order to guarantee sovereign viability, and it does involve selective use of tariffs. It also involves the denial of some exports to an adversary.

    In the case of the containment of the PRC, the US and other food exporting adversary states would deny supply of food to the PRC, given that food and water shortage is Beijing’s critical strategic vulnerability.

    Clearly, the “globalism” philosophy, which grew progressively since the end of the Cold War, had swung the strategic pendulum in favor of great powers which sought to dominate markets for their own purposes.

    It was the globalist interpretation of “free trade” which, in fact, made many economies totally dependent on a foreign power.

    This has particularly, in the 21st Century, benefited the PRC, which was able to use “free trade” to build strategic control of other societies. Beijing is not unique, historically, in utilizing the battle-cry of “free trade”, which is ultimately not free to the party which allows itself to become strategically dependent. Britain and the United States have themselves done this in the past.

    2. Repurposing Alliances

    Treaties and alliances are meant to address immediate threats and opportunities. They do not last forever. Nor should they.

    Lord Palmerston said, in the 19th Century: “Nations have no permanent friends or allies, they only have permanent interests.” Alliances and treaties are meant to serve specific objectives, and time often vitiates these objectives.

    But what is clear at present is that the People’s Republic of China in 2020 lacks a viable alliance network. It treats states such as the DPRK (North Korea) as a mere tributary state, and other trading partners as though they should be tributary states. Thus, their compliance with Beijing must be forced.

    The US, for most of the past seven decades, also treated its allies to greater or lesser degrees as more-or-less tributary states, and, as a result, its alliance structures became greatly reduced by resentments of junior alliance partners. Those partners may return to alliance with the US only through fear of the PRC and, to some extent, Russia.

    What occurred in the first decades of the 21st Century, among other things, was that:

    (a) The original purpose for the North Atlantic Alliance (NATO) withered away, and yet the alliance had developed bureaucratically into one of the most effective strategic tools possible;

    (b) The European Union (EU) created a layer of governance and control of Western and Central Europe which inhibited the growth, freedom, and security of most of the members of that union; and

    (c) The United Nations moved from being a forum to mitigate differences into one which exacerbated them.

    Bearing in mind the reality that the EU in many ways geopolitically overlaps the NATO membership (obviously excluding Canada and the US, which are in NATO but not the EU), it is clear that NATO now has a new role in protecting the physical borders of Europe. Significantly, it has not been deployed to meet this new role.

    And that role is not specifically against an immediate threat of military intrusion by Russia, but very specifically in resisting a multi-faceted strategic physical intrusion by Turkey, or facilitated by Turkey.

    How much, for example, has Europe been strategically inhibited by its inability to resist Turkish-sponsored or Turkish-supported population warfare which has weakened the economies and social frameworks of European states for the past decade. Turkey attempted to substantially expand and accelerate this population-political warfare Westwards since the start of the 2020 crisis. Moreover, this has not been constrained merely by the onpassage of refugees from the Syrian civil war, but by “commoditizing” refugees fleeing economic and security challenges in Afghanistan, Pakistan, Eritrea, and sub-Saharan Africa.

    What has emerged is that NATO remains a viable and efficient military alliance for the protection of Western interests, whereas the EU has not. NATO, in an attempt to repurpose itself with the collapse of the original threat, the Warsaw Treaty bloc, has sought an “out-of-area” mission, and was thus employed in the war in Afghanistan, for example in the first two decades of the 21st Century. But there was no real thought given to a broader redefinition of the Alliance, to include IndoPacific partners.

    It has the potential to be broadened and renamed to include the ANZUS (Australia-New Zealand-US) Alliance, the US-Japan Security Alliance, and so on, to take on a new purpose akin to the World War II alliance against the nazi-fascist-Japanese bloc. Similarly, the UKUSA Accords — commonly referred to as the Five-Eyes intelligence exchange between the US, UK, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand — has the capacity to be repurposed with strategic objectives.

    Clearly, alliances and treaties need sunset clauses: dates by which they are either retired or repurposed. The various arms limitation treaties have all either expired through mutual disinterest, or they have been consistently and dynamically given ongoing lives. Or they have become tools by one party to inhibit another.

    The successive treaties to limit the construction of capital ships by major navies in the first half of the 20th Century was a classical case of how treaties were overtaken either by technological change or by the change in strategic objectives of the major powers. That included the Washington Naval Treaty of 1922; the London Naval Treaty of 1930; the Second London Naval Treaty of 1936 (by which time the process had become more or less meaningless).

    Treaties and alliances are meant to give the signatories breathing space. Nothing more. All that is constant is “permanent interests”. And then we need to renegotiate the meaning of “permanent”.

    Again, as we discussed in Point 1, above, the COVID-19 interregnum was the ideal time to revisit national goals, and to redefine the means of achieving them in a world in which the strategic context — the terrain — had clarified in new ways.

    We will discuss in Point 4 the need to look at alliances within the framework of trade and survival patterns.

    3. Repurposing Economies

    It is time to re-designate the economic framework which existed up until 2020 as the “old economy”.

    And that includes the economic prisms through which we viewed science and technology up to that point.

    The “new economy” includes some fundamentals, such as:

    1. Global and national economies constrained by unprecedented levels of debt and debt-service;

    2. Declining market size due to economic constraints and to the actual decline in population levels, particularly within key socio-economic market groups;

    3. Polarization, because of economic, political and security factors, of trading networks, leading to greater bilateralization of trade and the need to re-monetize some trade as barter or counter-trade, or define it by creative currency “baskets”;

    4. Reduced availability of funding for a period for research and development, some commercial infrastructure, and for pure science. On the other hand, viable stimulus to re-engage unemployed workers would likely include some public sector infrastructure packages;

    5. Greater ease by armed forces in achieving recruiting targets as commercial jobs fail to take up all available workforce;

    6. Growing distrust of governmental attempts to control the economy by restricting the use of cash as paper currencies lose the “full faith and credit” of governments. This will see a stimulus for the use of alternate forms of “currency”, including cryptocurrencies. All of this will lead to a polarization of societies away from governments (ie: lead to greater distrust in government), which can only be contained for a limited period and which will absolutely lead to a further decline in economic productivity, as the PRC has been discovering for the past eight years. This further compounds the challenge of global strategic competitiveness.

    What, then, is to be done?

    The stimulation of national economies is very much linked to seeing economies as just that: national. Or at least best protected within specific geopolitical regions.

    The first decades of the 21st Century (indeed, the period since the end of the Cold War) saw most countries outsource much of their manufacturing to the PRC. The crash of 2020 saw, then, most countries exposed to an existential dependency on the PRC for vital supplies across all sectors of society.

    This resulted in the biggest single event in history highlighting the destruction of the sovereignty and independence of action of most nation states in the world. The PRC, in order to capitalize on the damage inflicted by the 2020 crisis on most national economies, quickly moved to return to full PRC manufacturing capability to ensure that, as the coronavirus containments were lifted on most economies, the PRC could then dump manufactured goods onto the world market.

    This was designed to ensure that national manufacturing in other countries would be disincentivized from being re-established to end dependency on the PRC. The PRC manufacturing base had already begun to outprice itself during the past five years at least (to 2020), and the PRC had to do something to regain its position as the “sole source” for manufacturing.

    This meant that the PRC had a vested interest, too, in ensuring that those rising economies which had been beginning to take over the global manufacturing roles from the PRC were themselves set back. That included the manufacturing sectors of Thailand, Vietnam, and so on.

    Hence the need for those nation states wishing to re-assert a measure of sovereign independence to consider restrictions and tariffs on imported goods as a means to protect the re-start of local industries. The question, then, was how to do this in a way which did not allow also the re-building of workforce complacency and revived union opportunism, knowing that domestic markets were protected.

    A variety of actions, then, would need to be considered by those “advanced” societies which had thought themselves somehow in the post-industrial phase, but now found it necessary to revive domestic manufacturing. These could include:

    – Eliminating constraints on small to medium businesses by (i) minimizing the burden of tax reporting bureaucracy; (ii) creating a simplified tax structure for small to medium business; and (iii) creating freedoms from heavy unionization for small to medium businesses

    – Repurposing education away from the “pseudo-post-industrial” model which focused on university degrees of questionable value either to liberal, contextual thinking, or to education in spheres of practical value to manufacturing. This would mean reversing the demeaning and paternalistic view of academia toward “blue collar” workforces, and instead providing technical school educations, and structured trade apprenticeships. This could and should enable many people to enter the workforce at a younger age, thus stimulating the economy by removing them from society-supported dependency. Moreover, it could also include apprenticeship-like skills acquisition in the armed services.

    – Eliminating most of the punitive elements of bankruptcy laws, and lower the barrier to the creation of new corporations to stimulate the creation of entrepreneurial enterprises. Even the US has, in recent years, made aspects of its bankruptcy laws more punitive, but the US still provides the best model in this regard. Australia, for example, has corporate start-up and wind-up practices which are draconian and Dickensian. The more that the state is removed from the process, the more that enterprise and productivity will be stimulated.

    – Eliminating or reducing the size of centralized governmental structures. Government employment is a burden for any economy. Some of it is vital to ensuring a viable state; most of it is not. Reducing governmental bureaucracies by enforcing a wave of mandatory retirements and a selective freeze on hiring is a far better use of state funds than financing an unproductive economy.

    – Eliminating legislative constraints on agricultural efficiency and encourage programs which help restore soil balance. Ensuring adequate farmer control over water sources, and also reversing the negative impact of the use of chemical fertilizers over the past century.

    4. Repurposing Trading Blocs

    Trade is an essential tool of society. It is assumed that free trade is the vital aspect of a prospering society. But the reality is that trade in essentials is an existential underpinning of sovereignty.

    The control of trade and trading patterns is also, therefore, a decisive tool in national security strategy. World Wars I and II made clear how control of global sea lanes determined the outcome of those conflicts.

    “Free trade” in a time of confrontation and crisis, then, is axiomatically counterproductive to achieving national survival and in constraining an opponent.

    The crisis of 2020 ensured that, for the time being, the age of free trade was now ended. That is not an ideological or philosophical position — concepts of markets determining free trade can endure — but rather a position of ensuring national survival, and minimizing the advantage of a competitor. Apart from the major power which wishes to dominate its trading partners, only those who do not recognize that a war has begun will continue to insist on “free trade”.

    So if trade is to be emphasized between trusted partners, then that would assume that trade pacts would need to include security provisions to ensure the delivery of that trade. This re-emphasizes, of course, the security of sea lanes, straits and waterways, and air traffic routes. The assumption of a continuation of the old “rules-based world order” is no longer valid.

    The PRC, in announcing (in October 2018) its “new Thirty Years War” indicated that at the end of that war (in 2049) it would have in place a “new Treaty of Westphalia” — by some new name — to emplace a Beijing-dominated “rules-based world order”. Saying it does not make it so, but the intention was clear: the PRC does not accept the pre-2020 order of theoretically-equal nation-states to be valid.

    The new trading objectives of post-2020 governments, then, need to be defined, because it is clear that they have not been defined up until this point. These objectives would need to define national goals, needs, and methods of achieving the desired ends.

    It means that trading patterns must overlay security patterns. In other words, if trade is critical, the means must be there to ensure that it can be achieved. Trade, then, becomes not merely about commodities, but about the means and routes of delivering them, and the security to guarantee that pattern.

    5. Repurposing Strategies

    How can strategies designed for different times be applied in the post-2020 world?

    Economic, geopolitical, and trade dependency factors changed with the crisis of 2020. Yes, much business will continue as usual, but the underlying strategic inflection has changed, and the global debt position has transformed economic capabilities.

    More to the point, the People’s Republic of China has made it clear that it has already embarked on a war — an amorphous total war of the 21st Century kind — from which it cannot resile. That war, for the PRC, as noted, is dominated by a strong interactive pattern of population, sociological, economic, technological, and information dominance factors, quite apart from military factors.

    Indeed, the PRC hopes that the war would be won before any resort to military confrontation of a formal kind.

    Does that mean that one response would be to force the PRC to fight its war on terms it considers disadvantageous? Because that would indeed be a military aspect of the “total war”.

    So, at present, the PRC is embarked on a defensive military strategy vis-á-vis the United States, while posturing with symbolic military actions in some areas, such as the South and East China Seas. But Beijing is highly aggressive in its power projection by diplomatic and non-military means against other targets. And it only has economic levers to sustain that attempted use of “overwhelming force” on its trading and diplomatic partners.

    And these are levers from a declining PRC economy. As noted, the PRC approach is to minimize resistance to its strategic offensive by minimizing the economic strength and independence of its targets.

    Where have we seen a comparable model of strategic projection in history? Nothing appears to be immediately comparable. This is very much a grand strategy of bluff, deception, and audacity. It has, for Beijing, been effective to this point, but the 2020 crisis did polarize much thinking against the PRC.

    6. Repurposing Defense

    What military structures and doctrine will survive the 2020 inflection point?

    Clearly, for the first time in many years, most governments will need to force their defense planners to harmonize defense strategic plans with national grand strategic goals and options. That will be difficult, because defense structures are heavily dependent on legacy capital items, legacy doctrine, and inherited postures. And government leaders are notoriously resistant to giving long-term goals.

    Governments are revisiting their situations, but to what extent can long-term capital defense programs be recalibrated for the new strategic environment? Even more significantly, how can defense forces even sustain operational capabilities when declining national economic outlooks will likely constrain defense spending growth, if growth is even feasible in the coming few years?

    To a significant degree, because the “new total war” is likely to be less kinetic and less formal than in the 20th Century, improvements in efficiency will likely emerge from more interdisciplinary cooperation than has been historically achieved. This is the most difficult aspect. In “war” situations, the military assumes it must lead.

    The Russian Government recently gave warfighting leadership authority, even in nonkinetic frameworks, to the Russian General Staff on the basis that “non-military actions comprised 80 percent of contemporary conflict”. But can careers of military discipline, logic, and chain of command adapt to the new, fluid, amorphous social face of “total war of the 21st Century”?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 23:30

  • "Crazy Premiums" In Oil ETFs – Crude Carnage Sends AsiaPac Oil Futures Limit-Down
    “Crazy Premiums” In Oil ETFs – Crude Carnage Sends AsiaPac Oil Futures Limit-Down

    Forget Turnaround Tuesday. Oil is a “dangerous market to trade in right now,” said Pierre Andurand, founder of Andurand Capital Management LLP, in a Bloomberg TV interview. The market needs shutins to happen now, he said.

    “This has changed everything,” said Monica Malik, chief economist at Abu Dhabi Commercial Bank.

    “So much of the recent recovery was based on the fact that the oil price had been above $50-$60, providing support to economic activity, and that’s just been decimated.”

    This “price slump was psychologically very important,” said Eugen Weinberg, Commerzbank AG’s head of commodity research.

    “There is a possibility it will change perceptions forever.”

    The best summary of today’s chaos came from Bloomberg energy reporter Javier Blas who put it simply: “Yesterday was scary. Today is a lot more scary. The whole oil market is screaming oversupply simultaneously. June WTI, which four weeks away from expiry, just touched $6.5 a barrel. The market is going to force huge production cuts not in May or June, but immediately.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    Update (2300ET): There is no escaping the carnage in the crude complex as Asian futures and ETFs linked to oil prices are trading chaotically overnight.

    June WTI futures are rolling back over…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shanghai Oil Futures are ‘only’ down 10% (thanks to China’s limit-down circuit-breakers)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China futures catching down to WTI…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Samsung Crude Oil Futures ETF (which held more than $500 million worth of the derivatives as of April 20) has crashed 45%…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bloomberg reports, Samsung Asset Management (Hong Kong) Ltd, which manages the fund, said in a Tuesday exchange filing that the fund will sell its entire holdings of June oil contracts and buy September contracts. It also warned that in a “worst case scenario,” the net asset value of the fund may drop to zero and investors may suffer “a total loss” of their investments.

    “There is a big tracking error after the ETF switches from tracking June futures to September futures,” said Castor Pang, head of research at Core Pacific-Yamaichi International Hong Kong.

    “After the switch, the value of the ETF evaporates by more than half because of the plunge in oil futures.”

    Additionally, as Bloomberg’s Ye Xie notes, because short-selling is not allowed in China, making arbitrage more difficult – several Chinese ETFs tied to crude oil prices are trading at “crazy premiums”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    As Xie so correctly concludes, until they can find the next fool to push up the ETF prices, investors need oil prices to rally a lot just for them to break even.

    Good luck with that.

    *  *  *

    Update (1435ET): With settlement now come and gone, the May contract soared back higher today…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    and adjustments to the USO allocation (to June, July, and August) prompted a bid in each ahead of the settle which all then plunged back after…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    (Update 1425ET): It has been an exciting day for the USO ETF, if not so much its holders, and after growing speculation the largest oil ETF may have to follow its peer OIL and liquidate, moments ago USO was halted again, this time announcing that it has moved 5% of its futures into the August WTI contract, stating that it may invest in any month available due to market conditions, and warning that it may see significant deviations from its benchmark.

    • USO SAYS IT HAS MOVED SOME WTI HOLDINGS INTO AUGUST CONTRACT
    • USO: MAY INVEST IN ANY MONTH AVAILABLE DUE TO MARKET CONDITIONS
    • USO SAYS MAY SEE SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS FROM ITS BENCHMARK
    • USO HAS ABOUT 40% OF HOLDINGS IN JUNE CRUDE FUTURES CONTRACTS
    • USO HAS ABOUT 55% OF HOLDINGS IN JULY CRUDE FUTURES CONTRACTS

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All of this real-time jiggering with the terms of the USO to avoid going under just goes to show that ETFs, and passive investing in general, are products geared exclusively to bull markets and promptly implode when there is a downdraft in risk assets.

    * * *

    Update (1345ET): Here we go again. June WTI is now crashing – trading below $7 – down over 65% on the day…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And July is crashing, down over 30%, below $18…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Remember the settle occurs at 1430ET (and the expiry of the May contract)… and the prompt spread (May-June) has surged back to zero…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USO is also testing pre-market lows as retail and the roll panic out…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “A lot of retailer investors are looking at it and realizing that they are losing money hand over fist,”  Tariq Zahir, commodity fund manager at New York-based Tyche Capital Advisors LLC said.

    “It’s undeniable that the USO is having a having a very big effect on the June contract and it wouldn’t be surprising if we go substantially lower.”

    *  *  *

    Forget Turnaround Tuesday, paper oil markets are collapsing once again with USO halted numerous times, OIL liquidated, and June futures puking hard in a repeat of yesterday’s May contract bloodbath…

    May is rallying here as June crashes… (we suspect more ETF rolls)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sending the prompt spread soaring back…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But June is now down a shocking 45% to a $10 handle… and there is still 90 minutes until settlement.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yesterday, the break of $10 was what sparked the waterfall in the May contract.

    USO is down 30%…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are five analysts’ views on what’s happening in the world’s largest oil ETF…

    Dave Lutz, macro strategist at JonesTrading:

    “Retail investors should have a way to trade the price of oil, but USO has such problems with the roll effect that I’m not sure that’s the best vehicle. Problem is, it’s really the only one,” he said. In addition, “the fact that creations are suspended means that this is no longer going to track properly.”

    Joseph Saluzzi, Themis Trading LLC partner and co-head of equity trading:

    Some ETFs are not exactly what you think they are — the rule for any investor is to know what you own. Some folks may have thought that USO was simply a proxy for the current oil price, and they didn’t really understand the mechanics of the oil futures market.

    Matt Maley, equity strategist at Miller Tabak + Co.:

    “There is no question that this is a tool for investors of all sizes to bet on the price of oil. Many of these investors — again, of all sizes — have tried to pick the bottom in oil several times over the past week or two and they’ve all gotten burned. This has caused these buyers on weakness to become forced sellers. When the dust settles, it’s going to create an unbelievable opportunity for buyers. Until we get a better feeling of when the demand side of the supply/demand equation is going to improve, it tells me that the risks are still much too high compared to the potential rewards,” said Maley.

    “I worry that it’s going to have a negative impact on liquidity in the oil markets, and thus have a negative impact on confidence in that market.”

    Jeremy Senderowicz, a partner at law firm Dechert:

    “Once creations are suspended then the arbitrage process cannot work as normal, as new shares cannot be created to meet increased demand,” he said.

    “The 8-K says they are suspending creations because they’ve used up all the shares they’ve registered (they filed yesterday to register more shares but the SEC needs to declare it effective and they haven’t done so yet). That indicates that demand for the shares was quite high. If that demand continues, then until new shares can be created you can fill in the blank as to what might happen in trading…(which may be why they had the trading halt). That seems like the big takeaway to me.

    Dan Genter, CEO of RNC Genter Capital Management:

    “The ETFs that are dealing with the contracts in the commodities are never going to take physical delivery, they can’t take it. There’s not a doubt the oil ETFs distorted the market. It was across the board but the ETFs, in our opinion, were the biggest problem,” he said. “The panic is because there are people invested in that commodity and in the contracts that not only have no intention of taking delivery, they have no capacity for taking delivery. All of a sudden, you’re up against a wall. They call it a contract for a reason.”

    But, don;t worry, because President Trump will take the pain way… right?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 23:21

  • Rich Americans Flee To Luxury 'Doomsday Resort' Shelters In New Zealand As Panic Grows
    Rich Americans Flee To Luxury ‘Doomsday Resort’ Shelters In New Zealand As Panic Grows

    New Zealand has become the ‘doomsday resort’ and #1 pandemic escape destination for America’s rich. Those in Silicon Valley or Manhattan lucky enough to have caught the last international flights into Auckland before borders were shut to foreign travelers late last month — to say nothing of the uptick in private jets landing in the country even days after the ban took effect — in many cases for the first time moved into their multi-million dollar specially designed luxury doomsday bunkers

    Bloomberg profiles how rich Americans escaped in droves just as US coronavirus cases began to explode, arriving in isolated and beautiful New Zealand over 1,000 miles off Australia’s southern coast — and among the least impacted countries on the earth, currently at a little over 1,400 COVID-19 cases and 12 deaths, out of a population of almost 5 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “As coronavirus infections tore across the U.S. in early March, a Silicon Valley executive called the survival shelter manufacturer Rising S Co. He wanted to know how to open the secret door to his multimillion-dollar bunker 11 feet underground in New Zealand,” the Bloomberg story begins dramatically enough. 

    “He went out to New Zealand to escape everything that’s happening,” Gary Lynch, general manager of Rising S Co., described of one elite bunker owner. “And as far as I know, he’s still there.” The Texas-based company specializing in high-tech luxury survival bunkers and homes has multiple such clients moving into what are often their third or fourth homes designed specifically for just such an apocalyptic pandemic or other scenario. 

    “For years, New Zealand has featured prominently in the doomsday survival plans of wealthy Americans worried that, say, a killer germ might paralyze the world,” writes Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The island of Waiheke off Auckland has in recent years been a playground for the super-rich, now fast becoming home to those waiting out the pandemic in luxury, via stuff.co.nz.

     The report describes further:

    Rising S Co. has planted about 10 private bunkers in New Zealand over the past several years. The average cost is $3 million for a shelter weighing about 150 tons, but it can easily go as high as $8 million with additional features like luxury bathrooms, game rooms, shooting ranges, gyms, theaters and surgical beds. 

    The ultra-wealthy have long bet that New Zealand would be the safest place in the world to hunker down during a global crisis, and so far that bet is proving right.

    One popular such destination within the country is Waiheke Island, dubbed “the Hamptons of New Zealand” for the high concentration of billionaires who enjoy local wineries and elite eateries set amidst cliff-top mansions and breathtaking views of the ocean. 

    Mihai Dinulescu, a 34-year old Silicon Valley entrepreneur who fled to New Zealand said “a lot of venture capital people I know were not afraid enough in time for the border close.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Young Silicon Valley tech entrepreneur Mihai Dinulescu in New Zealand, via Bloomberg.

    He added somewhat ominously: “And now they can’t get in.”

    “Over the years, the moneyed North Americans who have managed to wrangle properties there include hedge-fund pioneer Julian Robertson, Hollywood film director James Cameron and PayPal Holdings Inc. co-founder Peter Thiel, who has two estates in New Zealand, one of which features views of snow-capped mountains and has a safe room,” Bloomberg describes.  

    Tech leaders have long been smitten by picturesque New Zealand’s potential as a place to ride out the apocalypse, given its extreme isolation – now its biggest strength. Billionaire Thiel, who in 2011 became a joint US-New Zealand citizen years ago described it as “utopia”.

    * * *

    Diagram of a typical luxury doomsday shelter produced by Texas-based Rising S Co, via Bloomberg:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Delux Bomb Shelter”

    Kiwis fully expected the recent boom in billionaire doomsday prepper homes to continue. One local luxury home company related the example of a $12 million house which

    had an “air tunnel” marked in the foundation plans that could easily fit four people walking shoulder-to-shoulder. “It was quite obviously an escape tunnel in the basement,” he said. 

    This as more broadly the disaster preparedness industry is generally expected to grow around the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Luxury shelter under construction by Rising S Co, via Bloomberg.

    However, those without such means can only ‘stay behind’ and watch as the super-wealthy flee virus hotspots for safer and more comfortable climes. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 23:10

  • Documents Reveal Feds Are Excited To Create A Mass Surveillance Network
    Documents Reveal Feds Are Excited To Create A Mass Surveillance Network

    Via MassPrivateI blog,

    A FOIA request by the Electronic Privacy Information Center revealed how excited the National Security Commission on Artificial Intelligence (NSCAI) is about using CCTV cameras to create a national surveillance network.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An NSCAI presentation titled “Chinese Tech Landscape Overview” discusses China’s facial recognition CCTV camera network in glowing terms.

    “When we talk about data resources, really the largest data source is the government.'” 

    The presentation discusses how the Chinese government profits from encouraging companies to use facial recognition on visitors and employees.

    “Now that these companies are operating at scale they are building a host of other services (e.g. facial recognition for office buildings, augmented reality)”

    In America things are not all that different.

    In the United States, the Feds encourage private companies like Clearview AI, Amazon Ring and Flock Safety to use facial recognition and automatic license plate readers to identify everyone.

    Under the section “State Datasets: Surveillance = Smart Cities” the presentation extol’s China’s smart city surveillance saying, “it turns out that having streets carpeted with cameras is good infrastructure for smart cities as well.”

    Americans do not need more government surveillance and we certainly do not need our smart cities carpeted with government surveillance devices.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The NSCAI says, “mass surveillance is a killer application for deep learning.”

    As our government applies AI deep learning to things like CCTV cameras, cellphone locations, and license plate readers, a person’s entire life can be predicted.

    AI’s will use deep learning to accurately guess where you work, eat, shop, sleep, worship and vacation. Basically, mass surveillance is a killer application for knowing all there is to know about everyone.

    Last week MLliverevealed that a startup AI company co-founded by the University of Michigan is helping governments use CCTV cameras to monitor people for social distancing as indicated by a professor of electrical and computer engineering at the University of Michigan (UM):

    “Two weeks ago, Corso said he and his team began tracking physical distancing at locations like Times Square in New York, Miami Beach, Abbey Road in London and the Ruthven Museums Building at UM.”

    Police in New York City use CCTV cameras to fine people up to $1,000 for not social distancing. While police in Florida set up checkpoints on highways and police in the United Kingdom use CCTV cameras to enforce stay-at-home orders.

    Voxel51 uses their “physical distancing index” to track social distancing in major cities around the globe.

    “Voxel51 is tracking the impact of the coronavirus global pandemic on social behavior, using a metric we developed called the Voxel51 Physical Distancing Index (PDI). The PDI helps people understand how the coronavirus is changing human activity in real-time around the world. Using our cutting-edge computer vision models and live video streams from some of the most visited streets in the world, the PDI captures the average amount of human activity and social distancing behaviors in major cities over time.”

    What worries me is how law enforcement might use Voxel51 to fine or arrest people for not observing government-mandated social distancing.

    Despite what Voxel51 claims about anonymizing identifiable data, they are still collecting their data from public/government cameras.

    A 2019 article in the Michigan News University of Michigan revealed that Voxel51 uses artificial intelligence to identify and follow people and objects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Voxel51 has set out to overcome those obstacles with their video analytics platform and open source software libraries that, together, enable state-of-the-art video recognition. It identifies and follows objects and actions in each clip. As co-founder Brian Moore says, We transform video into value.”

    I find it hard to believe that cities and governments would pay money to simply look at anonymized data. Especially when Voxel51’s business model is built around identifying people and objects on a mass-scale.

    A perfect example of how the Feds view mass surveillance can best be summed up in the NSCAI presentation, “American companies have a lot to gain by adopting ideas from Chinese companies.”

    Everyday, it seems Americans are being told we need more national surveillance programs to keep everyone safe.

    Our governments’ obsession with monitoring everyone is only going to grow as the coronavirus grips the country. It is our job to keep these surveillance programs from being implemented or risk becoming an authoritarian state like China.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 22:50

  • Social Distancing Sacrifice: Texas ER Doc Lives In Treehouse To Keep Family Safe
    Social Distancing Sacrifice: Texas ER Doc Lives In Treehouse To Keep Family Safe

    An emergency room doctor at an area hospital in Corpus Christi, Texas, has decided to live in a treehouse in his backyard to limit the transmission risk of COVID-19 to his family.

    Jason Barnes, 39, works in the emergency room at CHRISTUS Spohn Health System in Corpus Christi, has treated COVID-19 patients over the last month. He decided to live in the family’s treehouse after he wanted to be near his family but removed at a safe distance.

    “The main reason I’m isolating from my family because I’ve been treating patients with the virus,” Barnes told USA Today. “My wife and kids often get sick with things I bring home from the hospital, and many times in the emergency department, we get caught off guard with patients.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Barnes has been lodging in the treehouse for three weeks. He said it comes with air-conditioning, a bed, access to WiFi, and a minifridge. He speaks to his kids while sitting on his balcony. 

    “They’re within yelling distance,” Barnes said. “But I can call or go up to the glass. They know not to open the door and risk catching something.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He considered purchasing an RV or renting an apartment but wanted to be at home and safely removed that he could see his kids every day before he heads off to the emergency room. 

    Barnes describes his living situation as similar to camping but “much more comfortable.”

    The hardest part he said is showering:

    “Christus leadership has made it easy for us to shower at work, but when I’m off for a few days I don’t want to go to work to shower, so my oldest son will rig up a water hose,” Barnes said. “He’s got a nozzle he created with one of those water balloon things that fills up like 30 balloons at a time and he’ll set it up and I’ll take a quick cold shower.”

    He said other doctors are isolating from their families in this challenging period, though he said he might be the only one living in a treehouse.

    “Many people are doing this quarantining,” Barnes said. “I just happen to have a more quirky way, but I’m not doing this to be funny. I’m taking these precautions to be safe.”

    Some Americans are making scarifies for the nation, while others continue to ignore social distancing measures and could trigger the second coronavirus wave.  


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 22:30

  • House To Vote On 'Remote Proxy Voting' Despite Serious Security & Constitutional Concerns
    House To Vote On ‘Remote Proxy Voting’ Despite Serious Security & Constitutional Concerns

    Authored by Eoin Higgins via CommonDreams.org,

    The House is expected on Thursday to vote on a measure allowing members to vote remotely via proxies for the duration of the coronavirus outbreak crisis, a proposal that could be a solution to legislative gridlock exacerbated by the House’s extended recess due to the pandemic which has made it unsafe for Congress to meet. Rules Committee chair Rep. Jim McGovern (D-Mass.) explained the proxy rules change to the New York Times in an interview last week. 

    “This is what we’re comfortable with doing now that I think poses the least amount of risk,” McGovern told the Times. “For those who feel they want to be here and engage in debate, they can come back, but for those members who are in states where they are instructed not to leave their homes or not to travel, they can still participate.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    House Majority Leader Steny Hoyer (D-Md.), center, looks at Rep. Jim McGovern (D-Mass.), right, as McGovern speaks during a news conference on Monday, March 9, 2020. (Photo: Caroline Brehman/CQ-Roll Call, Inc/Getty Images)

    House Majority Leader Rep. Steny Hoyer (D-Md.), in a letter to the chairs of the House Committee on Rules and the House Committee on Administration, said he sees the implementation of the new rule as a first step in virtual, remote voting for Congress.

    “Beyond implementing the proxy voting as a first step, we ought to use this time as an opportunity to prepare for Congress to be able to work according to its full capabilities even with social and physical distancing guidelines in place,” wrote Hoyer.

    Hoyer acknowledged challenges and security risks to the process, but expressed confidence that lawmakers could find a solution. 

    But, as the Washington Post reported Tuesday, there are technological hurdles in front of representatives.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Many members of Congress probably couldn’t handle two-step authentication from their laptops,” a senior House Democratic aide told the Post. “We have conference calls where people can’t even mute themselves or get off mute. There’s a big tech gap that’s going to be problematic.

    And even if the House can manage to make the virtul meetings work, the aide added, there are Constitutional concerns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Flordia Rep. Matt Gaetz wore a gas mask onto the floor last month: “Essentially the floor of the Congress is a Petri dish. We all fly into these dirty airports, we touch and selfie everyone we meet, and then we congregate together,” Gaetz said at the time.

    “If this is challenged in the courts and we’ve passed 40 laws that have been enacted and the Supreme Court invalidates them all,” said the aide, “that’s a nightmare.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 22:10

  • Shocking Study Finds Coronavirus Mutations That Are Much Deadlier Than The Original
    Shocking Study Finds Coronavirus Mutations That Are Much Deadlier Than The Original

    A shocking new study found that SARS-CoV-2’s ability to mutate has been vastly underestimated…

    A group of researchers at Zhejiang University, a top-flight research university situated in Hangzhou, the capital of the eastern coastal Chinese province of Zhejiang, have made what just might be remembered as a critical breakthrough in our understanding of the wide range of symptoms that patients face.

    Studies have suggested that as up to half of those who have been infected with the virus might be “asymptomatic”, a categorization that includes those who experienced extremely mild symptoms, often resembling a bad cold or a mild fever. Now, this team of scientists has discovered 31 new mutated strains of the virus that might explain the stubbornly high mortality rates in parts of Europe and New York.

    According to the South China Morning Post, some of the mutant strains exhibited a much more dangerous capacity to invade human cells, implying that certain strains might be much more lethal than others. What’s more, these strains were found to be “genetically similar” to samples isolated in New York and places like Italy in Europe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Critically, the study, led by Professor Li Lanjuan, the first Chinese academic to recommend a complete shutdown to fight the virus, showed for the first time a probable link between the type of strain that infects a patient and the level of brutality of the symptoms they face.

    This is nothing short of a breakthrough – though it’s being underplayed in the American press, probably because health journalists are grappling with a confusing paradox: Dr. Fauci said last month that there was “no evidence” of deadly mutations, yet these researchers have found exactly that – though of course this research has yet to be replicated or peer reviewed.

    “Sars-CoV-2 has acquired mutations capable of substantially changing its pathogenicity,” Li and her team wrote in their non-peer-reviewed paper which was published by the preprint service medRxiv.org, another top research for non-peer-reviewed research, along with the Lancet.

    Li took an unusual approach to investigate the virus mutation. She analysed the viral strains isolated from 11 randomly chosen Covid-19 patients from Hangzhou in the eastern province of Zhejiang, and then tested how efficiently they could infect and kill cells.

    The deadliest mutations in the Zhejiang patients had also been found in most patients across Europe, while the milder strains were the predominant varieties found in parts of the United States, such as Washington state, according to their paper.

    A separate study had found that New York strains had been imported from Europe. The death rate in New York was similar to that in many European countries, if not worse.

    But the weaker mutation did not mean a lower risk for everybody, according to Li’s study. In Zhejiang, two patients in their 30s and 50s who contracted the weaker strain became severely ill. Although both survived in the end, the elder patient needed treatment in an intensive care unit.

    Li’s study involved a notably small number of strains, only a few dozen were investigated, as opposed to hundreds or thousands of strains in some major studies of new viruses. However, she still managed to find what appears to be a definite link that could shed new light – or unearth new complications in the quest to finding a cure or a vaccine. Li’s team attributed these “functional changes” in the different strains to variations in the “viral-spike protein” – aka the “spikes” on the “ball” used to represent SARS-CoV-2.

    Li’s team detected more than 30 mutations. Among them 19 mutations – or about 60 per cent – were new.

    They found some of these mutations could lead to functional changes in the virus’ spike protein, a unique structure over the viral envelope enabling the coronavirus to bind with human cells. Computer simulation predicted that these mutations would increase its infectivity.

    The fact that such unexpectedly intense variations could arise from a sample of fewer than a dozen patients means the genetic variability of this virus might be much higher than initially expected. And it may have mutated since the outbreak began, which of course could create complications in the quest for a vaccine. Most alarmingly, some of the mutated strains carried as much as 270x the viral load as the weakest strains.

    To verify the theory, Li and colleagues infected cells with strains carrying different mutations. The most aggressive strains could generate 270 times as much viral load as the weakest type. These strains also killed the cells the fastest.

    It was an unexpected result from fewer than a dozen patients, “indicating that the true diversity of the viral strains is still largely underappreciated,” Li wrote in the paper.

    It’s just the latest reminder of how much we don’t know about this virus. The projection that a virus could take 18 months to 2 years to develop is based on not much more than guesswork inspired by wishful thinking. Because of this, waiting until a vaccine or cure is in hand could lead us to wait much longer than many were expecting.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 21:50

  • Trump Suspends Green Card Issuance For 60 Days
    Trump Suspends Green Card Issuance For 60 Days

    Following a surprise twitter announcement that shook the nation late on Monday, President Trump said he would suspend legal immigration to the US for at least two months to help Americans who have been put out of work because of the coronavirus crisis.

    “It would be wrong and unjust for Americans laid off by the virus to be replaced by new immigrant labor flown in from abroad,” Trump said at a White House briefing on Tuesday evening. “We must first take care of the American worker.”

    The pause will be for 60 days and will apply only to individuals seeking permanent residency such as green card applicants,  Trump said. He added that certain exemptions would be allowed in an executive order, which he said would be signed, “most likely” by Wednesday. “There will be some people coming in.” According to Bloomberg, agricultural laborers are exempt with Trump stating that “the farmers will not be affected by this at all.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “I have determined that we cannot jump start the domestic economy if Americans are forced to compete against an artificially enlarged labor pool caused by the introduction of foreign workers,” Trump said in the draft. “I have determined that the entry of most aliens as permanent or temporary workers in the immediate term would have adverse impacts on the national interest.”

    A draft of the executive order obtained earlier by by Bloomberg News, which said the suspension would last for 90 days, includes exceptions for people seeking jobs in “food production and directly helping to protect the supply chain,” which could apply to farm workers. The ban would also not apply to health care or medical research professionals, according to the draft.

    Technology industry workers living in the U.S. on H-1B visas, however, would have to provide updated certifications to the government that they are not displacing American workers. Refugees and asylum seekers would not be affected by the order, nor would spouses and children of U.S. citizens or permanent residents. The draft order, which has not been finalized, frames the immigration curbs as crucial to the Trump administration’s effort to revive the economy devastated by the coronavirus pandemic, by protecting what it calls “the marginal worker.”

    In response to a question on Tuesday evening, Trump said he was considering a “secondary order” that would include more immigration restrictions. “I’ll be signing the primary order and then we have a secondary order that, if I want to do that, we’ll make that determination. We could that — yeah we could do that at a little bit different time if we want.” He did not elaborate.

    Trump announced the measure in a tweet late Monday. As of midday Tuesday, the White House had provided no detail, but the Justice Department is reviewing the executive order for form and legality, one department official said. The substance remains up for debate internally as does whether it applies to non-immigrant visas held by students, physicians, teachers, or researchers, among others, according to a person close to the administration, who discussed the matter on condition of anonymity.

    While the White House had asked the Department of Homeland Security to begin working on a ban last week, Trump’s tweet Monday caught immigration officials off guard. Early Republican reaction was mixed, and carve-outs were already emerging, such as the abovementioned farm and agriculture workers.

    Trump’s sudden announcement comes as he looks to contain the health, economic and political fallout from the coronavirus pandemic, while shuttering the economy whose strength had been the base of his campaign only two months ago. At the same time the president has been pushing to reopen the economy which is losing $25BN in output per day according to Federal Reserve estimates for every day it remains closed. Previously, Trump had cited the virus as evidence to stay the course on his agenda, by further restricting U.S. borders and pushing to manufacture more goods domestically.

    According to Bloomberg, “the practical effect of the order remains unclear” as immigration agencies and embassies have already stopped processing visas, meaning many of those seeking to immigrate to or visit the U.S. cannot do so. Meanwhile,
    refugee admissions have been suspended since March 19 after the United Nations and International Organizations for Migration temporarily halted refugee travel. The U.S. suspension has been extended to May 15.

    While some have debated if Trump has a right to enforce such as uniform ban, a 5-4 Supreme Court decision in 2018 found that the president has sweeping authority to restrict entry into the country — and might not even have to explain why. The ruling upheld Trump’s earlier controversial travel ban, which barred entry into the country from a group of mostly Muslim countries.

    Providing further details, National Security Advisor Robert O’Brien, spoke to reporters Tuesday at the White House and called the suspension “a temporary issue” and said he didn’t know how long it would last.  “We’ll have to wait and see. Look, we don’t know what the time horizon is going to be for the fight against this virus,” O’Brien said. “No one likes it. The president didn’t want to put travel restrictions in place, he didn’t want to put immigration restrictions in place, but we have to because of this terrible virus that’s been unleashed from foreign shores.”

    The president has often said the pandemic has strengthened his desire to further restrict access to the U.S., and even to manufacture certain products on home soil. Meanwhile, Congressman Joaquin Castro, a Texas Democrat and chairman of the Congressional Hispanic Caucus, wrote on Twitter that the suspension was “not only an attempt to divert attention away from Trump’s failure to stop the spread of the coronavirus and save lives, but an authoritarian-like move to take advantage of a crisis and advance his anti-immigrant agenda.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 21:37

  • Why China Is Unlikely To Be Held Liable For The Pandemic
    Why China Is Unlikely To Be Held Liable For The Pandemic

    Update: Shortly after this post was completed, two members announced that they would be introducing the amendment to the federal law discussed below. There are now at least seven lawsuits filed against China which is pushing a public relations campaign to deflect blame.

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Joseph Stalin once said “a single death is a tragedy” and “a million deaths is a statistic.” The observation was chilling because it has a grain of truth about how we process tragedies. The same is sometimes true legally. If a government kills one person, it is a murder.

    If it kills thousands of people, it is a policy. That cold fact soon may be evident in a growing number of class action lawsuits now brought against China over its failure to notify the world promptly of the coronavirus, along with renewed allegations that the outbreak may have started in a laboratory in Wuhan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The question of Chinese responsibility, and of potential liability, became more acute this week. Many in the media have dismissed allegations of a release from the lab as a politically motivated conspiracy theory. It is the same narrative aggressively pushed by China. For some of us, however, the dismissal of the lab as the possible source always seemed willfully blind. It might not prove to be true, but it hardly seems a baseless idea since the lab was working on coronavirus research. We also know that China arrested and silenced people who tried to raise alarms.

    The true origin of the coronavirus may be incredibly difficult to prove. The media reported on an account by scientists that the genome sequence of the coronavirus does not show any signs of being artificially manipulated or engineered. The coverage suggested that it is now established that it was a purely natural outbreak rather than the fault of China. That would not seem to definitively answer the question, however, of whether a lab employee had been infected by a bat carrying the coronavirus.

    Two years ago, the State Department raised concerns over coronavirus research on bats at the lab and its allegedly lax practices. Both American and British intelligence officials recently found a credible possibility that the lab was the source and that the outbreak then spread at first through the Huanan Seafood Market. There is no proof of this, but dismissal of the theory occurred as some in the media condemned President Trump for his use of the terms “Wuhan virus” and “Chinese virus.” That narrative seemed to demand universal rejection of the theory that the outbreak might have been the result of negligence at the lab. There remains no evidence that supports the theory of an intentional release of the coronavirus.

    While legitimate questions surround the origin, there is little debate that the Chinese government cost the world crucial weeks of preparation and containment by hiding the outbreak and by silencing those brave doctors who tried to warn of a new highly contagious respiratory illness.

    There are even reports that the coronavirus may not have really emerged in Wuhan. Needless to say, had China fulfilled its responsibility to alert global experts and be transparent on early testing and data, many countries might have restricted international travel, ramped up production of medical supplies, or imposed social distancing rules much sooner than they did.

    Many continue to advance the narrative that the outbreak is not the fault of China.

    Democratic Senator Chris Murphy of Connecticut said “we are in the crisis that we are today” not “because of anything that China did” but “because of what this president did.” Some critics now call it the “Trump virus” and attack those who focus on the responsibility of China as Trump supporters peddling conspiracy theories. Such narratives are music to the ears of Chinese officials, and they undermine any hope of an investigation by Congress that examines the issue with no bias or agendas.

    The single advantage to private litigation is that it comes with evidentiary discovery if that is even allowed. Such lawsuits are exceptionally difficult, and China is known for blocking depositions and document disclosures. At least four class action lawsuits have recently been filed in the United States. One lawsuit claims the coronavirus was designed as a biological weapon, an allegation that both experts and intelligence officials have rejected. All of the lawsuits allege intentional or negligent acts.

    The Foreign Sovereign Immunities Act of 1976 extends blanket immunity to countries from most lawsuits in the United States. The exceptions are rather narrow and rarely accepted by American courts, which read this statute as clearly conveying the intent to discourage such lawsuits. The United States can be sued just as easily in foreign courts and thus favors immunity as the general rule. The most common exception under this law concerns commercial activities by foreign nations. For that reason, some lawsuits have stretched the facts to suggest that the wet market or lab in Wuhan were commercial enterprises effectively run or directed by China. That argument is likely to be far too attenuated for the courts.

    One legal question could turn on Congress. In 2008, a lawsuit with some interesting analogies was filed against Saudi Arabia over the financing of the terrorists who attacked us on 9/11. The kingdom had been accused of effectively releasing terrorists, rather than a virus, but the courts rejected those claims under the Foreign Sovereign Immunities Act. Congress then amended it to allow for such lawsuits with the Justice Against Sponsors of Terrorism Act. President Obama vetoed it, but Congress overrode his veto. It is possible that Congress could do so again for this virus, which has now cost tens of thousands of lives and trillions of dollars in losses.

    Even with a legislative fix, China is unlikely to make people or information freely available and, even if it was found to be liable, we are back to what Stalin said. There is corollary in tort law for personal injuries in causation theory. Courts tend to cut off liability when causation gets too attenuated. In cases such as James Ryan versus New York Central Railroad, courts cut off liability for spreading fires by limiting it to natural direct damage rather than the ultimate damage. Courts ruled that spreading fires is caused by many reasons. Courts could also balk at liability for millions of cases, tens of thousands of deaths, and trillions of dollars in losses. They could rule that the outbreak was due to negligent decisions by countries.

    Some of us would welcome an evidentiary discovery into the origin of the coronavirus. But Democrats and Republicans appear wedded to political narratives for their advantage. With questions about financial support for the lab by the Obama administration and allegations over a slow response by the Trump administration, we may have another farcical commission or investigation in which each party appoints loyalists to protect its interests. The 9/11 commission skillfully avoided holding anyone responsible despite negligent acts by government officials. However, litigation means building a provable case rather than maintaining a narrative. The brutal fact is that, in politics as in war, tens of thousands of deaths can just be a statistic. For some politicians, the real tragedy is who ends up with the blame.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 21:30

  • Pentagon Pressures Mexico To Reopen Factories Vital To Making US Weapons
    Pentagon Pressures Mexico To Reopen Factories Vital To Making US Weapons

    It apparently took a global pandemic and corresponding economic shutdown of entire nations’ economies for the American public to realize that surprisingly, the US military relies heavily for supplies involved in weapons systems manufacturing just south of the border.

    The Pentagon’s defense undersecretary for acquisition and sustainment, Ellen Lord, urged at the start of this week that Mexico reopen those factories which many US defense firms rely on, especially aircraft manufacturers, previously shuttered due to COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via Safran Group

    “I think one of the key things we have found out are some international dependencies,” Lord said Monday at a Pentagon press briefing. “Mexico right now is somewhat problematical for us but we’re working through our embassy, and then there are pockets in India, as well.”

    This follows Lord previously saying she would write Mexican Foreign Secretary Marcelo Ebrard “to ask for help to reopen international suppliers” in Mexico. “We are seeing impact on the industrial base by several pockets of closure internationally,” she had warned.

    Lord said further in her Monday comments

    Domestically, we are seeing the greatest impacts in the aviation supply chain, ship-building, and small space launch. We are seeing impacts on the industrial base by several pockets of closure internationally. Particularly of note is Mexico, where we have a group of companies that are impacting many of our major primes.

    Among major defense suppliers that have outsourced vital portions of their supply-chain to Mexico include General Dynamics, Boeing, Raytheon, Lockheed Martin, Textron, General Electric, Honeywell, and others. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image: S-70i Black Hawk helicopter

    For example, key electrical components in Lockheed’s Black Hawk and S-92 helicopters as well as fighter jets are manufactured in Chihuahua, Mexico under the aegis of French firm Safran – Mexico’s largest aerospace employer.

    Military news site Defense One cites a United States International Trade Commission 2013 report which helps explain why over the past decade US defense firms’ supply chains have increasingly relocated to America’s southern neighbor.

    “Lower manufacturing costs (largely due to a lower wage structure), proximity to original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) in the United States, duty-free access to other important aerospace markets, and a Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA) with the United States all contribute to Mexico’s greater appeal compared with other global manufacturing locations,” the report outlined


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 21:10

  • China Slams Australia For "Taking Orders From The US" As Canberra Questions Coronavirus Origins: Live Updates
    China Slams Australia For “Taking Orders From The US” As Canberra Questions Coronavirus Origins: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Singapore extends lockdown until end of June, longest in the world
    • Demonstrators fill the streets of Paris
    • Cuomo holds Tuesday briefing in Buffalo
    • Yonhap denies reports that NK’s KJU is dying
    • Schumer revives hopes for Tuesday night Senate vote on relief bill
    • Italy bond yields climb as PM Conte says EU rescue package proposal not enough
    • US cases jump 5.7% on Tuesday, biggest jump since April 10
    • Air Canada suspends flights to the US
    • AG Barr says DoJ may sue some states with strict virus limits
    • Congressional leaders strike deal on $320 billion bailout
    • Spain caves, decides to let children under 14 leave the house unaccompanied
    • Fla. reports 835 new cases
    • Georgia, Tennessee & South Carolina unveil plans to start reopening economies by Tuesday
    • Trump orders 60-day stop to immigration into US
    • China slams Aussies for “taking instructions from US” by questioning virus response
    • Cuomo had a good meeting with Trump, he says
    • Senate passes bill to top off ‘PPP’
    • Sweden sees another jump in cases
    • Gottlieb says true # of US cases likely “10x higher” than official total
    • New York sees total new cases decline for 6th day
    • Gavin Newsom says “now is not the time” to reopen the country
    • France suspends flights outside the Schengen area
    • JPM has developed plan to get employees back in the office
    • Global cases pass 2.5 million
    • Ireland won’t allow mass gatherings until August “at the earliest”
    • 540 federal inmates now infected
    • US cases near 800k, with deaths passing 170k

    *     *      *

    Update (2045ET): Before we call it a night, we’re going to do a quick roundup of the major virus-related headlines from the last couple of hours.

    Just as many were beginning to fear a vote on the package might be pushed back until Friday or even next week, the Senate managed to pass a $484 billion bill to replenish the ‘PPP’ as President Trump resorts to bashing Harvard and other recipients who don’t exactly ‘need’ the money to give it back, as it looks like criticisms that the program allotted too much money to too many applicants who didn’t really need it, leaving thousands of small businesses to shut down permanently. The bill also boosts spending for hospitals and coronavirus testing. The House plans to vote on the measure Thursday, and the bill is expected to pass but…who knows what might change between now and then.

    Andrew Cuomo had some comments on his Tuesday meeting with the president:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And in a warning that was reminiscent to the reaction to Australia’s restrictions on Huawei and support for the US during the Meng Wanzhou incident, China’s foreign ministry has accused the Aussies of “taking instructions from the US” by questioning the origins of the coronavirus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Australia recently joined the US in calling for a probe into the origins of the outbreak following reports that the virus may have leaked from a nearby biolab.

    A second wave of the novel coronavirus will be far more dire, the CDC warned Tuesday, in response to several governors announcing plans to start reopening their economies.

    And, of course, President Trump officially suspended immigration into the US for 60 days.

    Finally, the US Bureau of Prisons just reported that 540 federal inmates and 323 BoP employees have tested positive as the virus continues to spread through America’s federal prisons.

    *     *      *

    Update (1620ET): New York reported 4,178 new cases of coronavirus and 481 new deaths, bringing its statewide total to 251,690 cases and 14,828 deaths, still far and away the highest numbers in the country. It’s the lowest number of new cases since March 21, and represents the latest indication that the state is indeed on the “downward slope” as Cuomo has insisted…

    *     *      *

    Update (1605): The number of confirmed coronavirus cases in the US climbed by 5.7% on Tuesday, the biggest jump since April 10. The US has a total of 814,587 cases as of 4pmET, according to JHU.

    The big milestone today was cases broke above 800k earlier. We’re coming up on the three-month anniversary of when cases broke above 8,000, shocking everybody who thought that this outbreak wouldn’t even be as bad as SARs, and would fade in a few weeks without every really making an impact outside China. The US also has more than 41,000 recorded COVID 19-linked deaths now, nearly double the nearest rival (Italy), though nobody can say for sure how many thousands or millions remain uncounted around the world.

    The ‘just the flu’ truthers laughed at the thought of it back then; but nobody’s laughing now.

    *     *      *

    Update (1600ET): Congressional leaders have purportedly reached a deal to provide $320 billion in additional funding for US small businesses, part of a $484 billion interim stimulus package announced on Tuesday.

    Meanwhile, in Spain, the government has caved to pressure and decided to roll back additional restrictions on children under 14 leaving the house unsupervised.

    *     *      *

    Update (1520ET): Just as the states expected to stay closed the longest are facing newfound pressure to reopen, California and New Jersey are posting record single-day increases in new cases and deaths. NJ reported a record 379 deaths over the last 24 hours, while California reported a 7% jump in cases and 5% jump in deaths, disrupting what had been an encouraging slowdown. Cali also announced that ICU cases have climbed 3.8% from Monday.

    Is it just a coincidence that two blue states reported such alarming numbers hours after a Newsom interview triggered backlash by Californians pressing the governor to reopen the state more quickly?

    Spanish PM Pedro Sanchez is facing criticism after announcing over the weekend that children under the age of 14 won’t be allowed to leave their homes without being accompanied by an adult. Spaniards had expected children to be allowed to leave home as part of a batch of new measures allowing more businesses to reopen and lifting other restrictions, even as Spain extends its lockdown deadline into May.

    Meanwhile, the Dutch government has announced plans to gradually relax the country’s lockdown, beginning with the partial reopening of primary schools next month. Prime minister Mark Rutte on Tuesday said primary school children can attend school beginning May 1 and held open the possibility of secondary schools following from June 1.

    The numbers of new hospitalizations of coronavirus patients needing intensive care and of COVID-19 deaths have continued to decline in France after more than a month of confinement for the population, the government said on Tuesday. Jérôme Salomon, director-general of health, released figures showing an additional 387 hospital deaths and another 144 deaths in old people’s homes and other care homes over the previous 24 hours. France’s total death toll rose to 20,796, of which 12,900 were recorded in hospitals and 7,896 in homes. The number of COVID-19 cases confirmed by testing in the country is 117,324. “The epidemic is massive,” Salomon said, noting that 83,000 people had been hospitalized while suffering from coronavirus since the beginning of March.

    *     *      *

    Update (1450ET): Global Times editor Hu Xijin issued another tweet mocking President Trump’s support for the ‘reopen now’ protesters, claiming “the president supports protesters, not scientists”…”the America is lost.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Just in case Trump was wondering how his geopolitical adversaries (and probably more than a few allies) view his decision to court the protesters.

    *     *      *

    Update (1405ET): Sweden reports 545 new cases of the coronavirus, and 185 new deaths, for a total of 15,322 cases and 1,765 deaths, as cases continue to accelerate in the Scandinavian country which opted to skip lockdowns and never really shuttered its economy, or its borders.

    And in another notable milestone for the outbreak, the number of confirmed cases in India has surpassed 20k, as the government finally takes its first tentative steps toward alleviating the lockdown.

    Banxico announced a few minutes ago that it would slash its benchmark interest rate by 50 bp, sparking a slide in the Mexican peso against the dollar.

    *     *      *

    Update (1340ET): As Canada reels from its worst shooting in history (the death toll has been revised up to 19), the total confirmed cases climbed to 37,933, while its total deaths hit 1,753.

    Meanwhile, Air Canada has cancelled all fights between Canada and the US after April 26.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Speaking of mass flight cancellations – something we’d finally thought we’d seen the end of, but… – France cancelled all flights from France to destinations outside the Schengen area.

    *     *      *

    Update (1210ET): The National Institutes of Health has released new treatment guidelines for doctors and other health-care providers treating patients sickened by COVID-19.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Political news out of Washington over the last 24 hours has mostly fixated on negotiations on another relief bill to replenish the ‘PPP’, aside from more evidence showing more FBI mismanagement and rule-breaking associated with the Russia probe.

    On Tuesday, AG Barr said that states with “strict virus limits” might be prosecuted by the DoJ to, we assume, push them to reopen their economies more quickly.

    Again, this is a move with terrible political consequences for President Trump, as it will drag more responsibility for the outcome of the outbreak – an outcome that can only be negative – to the president’s door.

    Italy has also seen the total number of recovered patients reach 50,000, another positive milestone.

    *     *      *

    Update (1200ET): With European markets closed for the day, Italy has just reported its coronavirus stats from the past 24 hours, and they started with a jump in deaths day-over-day: 534 were reported over the past day, compared with 454 reported on Monday. It also reported a notable uptick in new cases, though the single-day jump on Tuesday remained below the highs from a couple of weeks ago.

    Italy’s Civil Protection Service reported 2,729 new cases, compared with 2,256 new cases reported a day earlier. The countrywide total was 183,957.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Though some blamed the weekend and a larger number of tests run on Tuesday vs Monday for the jump in new cases and deaths. Moreover, there was a silver lining: for the first time, the number of patients deemed ‘recovered’ over the last 24 hours nearly passed the number of new cases confirmed.

    Italian bond yields shot higher on Tuesday as Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte criticized the EU’s rescue package for economies that have been most badly hurt by the outbreak, like Italy’s. Last week, French President Emmanuel Macron warned that the EU could break apart if not enough is done to help countries like Italy and Spain (and, presumably, France).

    The parsimonious Germans might doom the whole thing by allotting plenty of their tax dollars for their own people, and none for the Italians.

    These tensions are bound to come to a head on Thursday, when the EU holds a summit on Thursday to discuss the fiscal response to the virus.

    Following a controversy over Wall Street’s cultural resistance toward working from home where traders at JPM reportedly sickened a whole floor after refusing to stop coming  to work despite being infected with the coronavirus (which they didn’t learn until later), JPM has reportedly formulated a plan to get its employees back in the office.

    Finally, back in the UK, 4,301 new cases were reported as the number of tests rose, bringing the countrywide total to 129,044.

    *     *      *

    Update (1140ET): Florida reported that it’s case total jumped 835 cases to 27,495, which leaves it in 8th place in the US. The state reopened beaches over the weekend, a decision that has aroused much outrage.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As the continued begging the federal government for more tests, Cuomo explained that one reason for the shortage was the lack of chemical reagents from overseas.

    *      *      *

    Update (1130ET): Three months ago, when we reported that the global total of confirmed coronavirus infections might number in the millions – citing projections released by credible epidemiologists who had begun publicly sharing their views – we were dismissed by some as ‘alarmists’.

    Now, almost three months to the day when the number of confirmed coronavirus cases (almost all in mainland China) surpassed the global total from the SARS outbreak, the total cases have surpassed 2.5 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Irish Times just reported that Ireland will ban all mass gatherings until August “at the earliest.”

    *     *      *

    Update (1115ET): Just when Britain had hoped that the pace of COVID-19 deaths had finally started to flatten, the UK has reported a sharp jump in deaths, one of its highest single-day readings in the last 2 weeks.

    The news broke a two-day streak of falling fatalities.

    The Department of Health and Social Care reported 828 today, up from 449 yesterday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As of 5pm London Time on Monday, the UK’s confirmed deaths stood at 17,337, the health department said. The more than 800 deaths reported Tuesday is above last week’s average of 778.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Too bad…it seems every time the UK takes one step forward, the virus seems to invade another nursing home, or some other densely populated area, producing a dramatic resurgence.

    The UK and the US have seen some of the highest mortality rates in the West in recent weeks. As of 9am on Tuesday, 535,342 tests have been completed in the UK, including 18,206 on April 19. England again reported 778 of the deaths, in keeping with precedence of almost all the deaths and cases coming from England. Meanwhile, England has recorded an 82% rise in deaths compared with yesterday’s figures.

    Finally, as Cuomo wrapped up his press conference in Buffalo, he confirmed that the total cases in NY have risen 4,178 to 251,690. It’s the 6th straight day of declining pace of new cases.

    *     *      *

    Update (1100ET): Gov Cuomo is holding Tuesday’s briefing in Buffalo.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The theme of today’s press conference: “Think regionally” – Cuomo said that different regions of his enormous state are experiencing differences in the rate at which the ‘curve’ of new cases is flattening. This means different areas of the state will reopen at different times. “We have to think regionally…and act based on the facts on the ground,” the governor tweeted.

    As always, Cuomo released data on the deaths in the state over the last 24 hours at the beginning of the press conference: On Tuesday, the state reported 481 deaths, only slightly higher than the 478 virus-related deaths reported on Monday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The number of patients requiring hospitalization has also stabilized, according to the charts below:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we noted above, Cuomo is starting to plan out how to reopen his state one region at a time, while also continuing to cooperate with other northeastern states who joined his ‘alliance’.

    *     *      *

    Update (1030ET): During an appearance on “CBS This Morning” on Tuesday, California Gov. Gavin Newsom says now is “not the time” to start pulling back on coronavirus restrictions, as his state gives millions of dollars away to undocumented aliens while insisting that its poorest residents stretch their dwindling dollars further and further.

    The worst is not over for Calif. and “if we all pull back, we could see a second wave that makes this pale in comparison,” Newsom said.

    “ICU numbers are beginning to flatten but we’re not seeing the decline that we need” to roll back restrictions, Newsom said.

    Hundreds of people converged on California’s state capital in Sacramento to protest the state’s indefinite stay at home order, and Newsom’s signaling that the order will remain into place well into May.

    Asked whether students would return to school in September, whether baseball would happen in the summer and whether – crucially – we’ll vote “as normal” in November, Newsom said “no” on all three.

    So much needs to happen before life can return to normal, Newsom said. Schools and all businesses will need to reconfigure floor plans and the notion of people coming together in large crowds until a vaccine or “successful widely distributed…treatment” is found.

    Our question: As these super-progressive governors keep talking about a “new normal” where people must maintain social distancing at all times until we get herd immunity or a vaccine. But do they realize that this simply isn’t realistic? Restaurants won’t be able to do business, full stop. Even if widespread WFH policies become the new normal, these drastic reconfigurations of everything from schools to businesses to entertainment to life…as we know it…sound increasingly fanciful – especially when places like Norway have had some success combatting the outbreak without mass shutdowns.

    With some southern states preparing to reopen, the big shutdown theory is going to be put to the ultimate test: initially, we were told the shutdowns would only be necessary to ensure that hospitals won’t be overwhelmed. Though hospitals in NYC and a few other places came close, there’s no question that the rate of hospitalizations and ICU patients has been falling across the country. Even Italy is starting to relax its lockdown, and so is Spain, despite extending some of the country’s notably strict restrictions until May 9.

    Does Newsom really think that small businesses will simply be able to “stay closed” for 2 years, living off government handouts during the interim? We’re really starting to wonder.

    Watch the interview below:

     

     

    *     *      *

    Update (0820ET): The word out of Washington overnight was that a vote on the next relief bill likely won’t happen until tomorrow. But Minority Leader Chuck Schumer said Tuesday that there’s a chance that a vote in the Senate could happen tonight, as new progress has been made on negotiations for a $125 billion slug of cash that will go directly to ‘unbanked’ and ‘mom-and-pop’ stores. The Democratic leader added that “we will not be able to open up America without a national testing strategy.” This, despite Dr. Fauci saying last week that universal testing is not a mandatory condition to start reopening economies.

    *     *      *

    Update (0730ET): Last night, just as Georgia Gov Brian Kemp was beginning his Monday press briefing, the conservative Republican made an announcement that instantly horrified the mainstream media: The state would begin loosening some lockdown restrictions on Friday, and that by Monday, businesses from gyms to beauty salons in his state would be allowed to reopen.

    Hundreds of talking heads immediately pointed out that the state is hardly on track to meet the guidelines set out by the White House. But by Tuesday morning, several additional states, including Tennessee and South Carolina, had joined Georgia in planning to begin lifting restrictions before May 1.

    As new hotspots continue to form across the country, including in Ohio, Michigan and other states that appear to be headed toward reopening in a few weeks, these states have made the calculation that the damage to their economies simply isn’t worth the risk to life and health. Georgians will be able to dine in restaurants again by the end of the day on Monday.

    Some states are flinging the doors back open. In Tennessee, Gov. Bill Lee said he had opted not to extend his “safer-at-home” order that is set to expire on April 30. According to Lee, “the vast majority of businesses in 89 counties” will be allowed to reopen on May 1. Businesses in Ohio are expected to reopen on that date as well.

    Others are taking a slightly more measured approach. In South Carolina, Gov. Henry McMaster will allow some retail businesses, including department stores, that had previously been labeled “nonessential” would be allowed to reopen on Tuesday. But even after opening, they must abide by social distancing guidelines, the governor said. Residents will also be able to access the state’s beaches on Tuesday.

    Ohio Gov.Mike DeWine said on “Meet the Press” that he would move to “try and open this economy…[without getting] a lot of people killed,” though he didn’t give an exact date, it has been reported that the process will begin next month.

    While the global case total hovered slightly below 2.5 million, as of 8amET, Johns Hopkins had tallied 787,960 cases of the virus in the US (while some estimates have put the true total infected at closer to 5 million). As we pointed out Sunday night, recent signs suggest that the lockdowns have worked to flatten the curve: In the US, daily new cases are down 33% from the peak 10 days ago. 6% of the US counties have reported zero new cases in the past 7 days. And 7 states have announced plans to start reopening in the next two weeks, equivalent to roughly one-fifth of GDP.

    Speaking on “Squawk Box” Tuesday morning, former FDA Director Scott Gottlieb said “it might be possible” that 1 million people have been exposed to the virus in metro New York (meaning NYC alone; that’s roughly 1/9 people), the latest suggestion that the US mortality rate is much lower than the official numbers reflect – one more reason for governors to move ahead with reopening.

    If you’re wondering what the situation is in your state, here’s a roundup of what

    Before we go, we just wanted to highlight this tweet from the Federalist’s Sean Davis.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Just some food for thought.

    *     *      *

    After a day of historic insanity in the American oil market, the Brent international oil benchmark is down more than 40% already Tuesday morning as investors continue to digest reports from late last night that North Korean leader Kim Jong Un might be in critical condition (a Trump Administration source said ‘yes’ while South Korea’s Yonhap said ‘no’) and a Tweet from President Trump that he would be “suspending” immigration into the US due to the coronavirus. The news prompted a whipsaw in equity futures late last night.

    While liberals lose their minds, it’s worth remembering that immigration into the US is already effectively shut down. Refugee resettlement has been put on hold, visa offices have been shuttered, and citizenship ceremonies have been put on hold. CNN said it’s unclear how this will impact green-card holders.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, in the latest indication that nobody really knows what’s going to happen with this outbreak, Singapore announced just minutes ago that it will extend its mandatory stay-at-home order until June, making Singapore’s lockdown the longest currently on record.

    Singapore’s Straits Times reported that, in a televised national address, Singapore’s leader PM Lee Hsien Loong said that after yet another record jump in new cases – an outbreak that has been tied to camps of migrant workers who represent a ‘forgotten class’ in Singapore society – his government has decided to extend the densely-populated city-state’s lockdown for another month until June, making Singapore’s the longest lockdown extension in the world.

    In addition to extending the lockdown, Singapore is paring down the number of ‘essential’ businesses allowed to remain open, in effect ratcheting up the pressure on its economy.

    The city-state reported another 625 new cases on Tuesday, bringing its total case number to 7,213 according to BNO News, in a country of 5.7 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While Lee insisted that Singapore’s ‘circuit breaker’ – don’t call it a lockdown – has been effective at suppressing the spread, Lee stressed that Singapore cannot be complacent, and that the number of “unlinked” cases has been stubbornly high, suggesting a “hidden reservoir” of cases in the community still.

    Singapore was praised for its rapid and intense methods to combat the outbreak, rolled out back in February when the virus first started to spread outside Wuhan and mainland China. Among its toolkit was a protocol that required a team of investigators to trace contacts of newly positive patients within 2 hours to prevent further spread.

    If you’re curious about how Singapore went from poster-child of effective virus response to one of the worst-hit countries in Asia ex-China, the WSJ can explain.

    The virus found a blind spot: migrant workers. Hundreds of thousands of workers from Bangladesh, India and other countries live in dormitories, often 10 to 20 people to one room. They climb into packed vans on their way to build the city’s gleaming office towers and condominiums.

    More than three-quarters of Singapore’s 9,125 cases now come from dormitories. Prime Minister Lee Hsien Loong said in an address Tuesday that the clusters in these facilities had remained “largely contained” and not spread to the wider community. Authorities were working to detect any transmission from dormitories to populations outside them early, he said.

    Mr. Lee said Singapore’s lockdown – which began earlier this month and was intended to last four weeks – would be extended by four weeks beyond that, until June 1. The list of essential services allowed to remain open would be pared down, he said, to further reduce the risk of transmission among workers who keep these going.

    But the big flaw was that Singapore overlooked the densely populated camps of migrant workers who typically fill the lowest level of jobs in Singaporean society. The second round of Singapore’s outbreak has been largely centered around these camps, with thousands of migrant workers becoming infected.

    During Lee’s fourth national address to the nation since the virus emerged, the PM explained that the current measures would remain in place until May 4, at which time the city-state will start trying to slowly reopen society, using some of the same cautious criteria adopted by New Zealand and Germany.

    To accomplish this, workplaces will be closed to further reduce the number of workers keeping essential services going. Some hot spots, such as popular wet markets, remain a problem, as large groups of people continue to congregate there, Lee said.

    Lee noted that while there will be some “privacy concerns”, ramping up contact tracing via the “TraceTogether” contact tracing app – which all residents of Singapore have been asked to download – is a critical priority for the government as it moves to stamp out the virus.

    “There will be some privacy concerns, but we will have to weigh these against the benefits of being able to exit from the circuit breaker and stay open safely.”

    And as far as migrant workers are concerned, Lee promised that “we will take care of you like we take care of Singaporeans.”

    Roughly one-fifth of the world, led by India, is starting the painful process of reopening. And countries that are refusing to start lifting some restrictions are facing growing unrest, including in France, where protesters poured into the streets of Paris to protest the lockdown and alleged mistreatment of minorities under lockdown conditions.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 20:59

  • The Twisted Political Considerations That Will Extend Lockdowns & Deepen This Depression
    The Twisted Political Considerations That Will Extend Lockdowns & Deepen This Depression

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    For better or worse, COVID-19 has become the most important political issue of the 2020 election.  And it is very unfortunate that this pandemic has erupted in an election year, because for many of our politicians finger pointing has become much more important than finding solutions.  In particular, Democrats seem quite eager to exploit any stumbles by President Trump, and many on the left are absolutely thrilled that Joe Biden’s poll numbers have improved over the past couple of weeks.  But if this pandemic rapidly subsides over the next few months and the economy dramatically improves by November, that could potentially be enough to put Trump over the top.  The stakes are incredibly high for both sides, many regard this upcoming election as the most important in modern American history, and no quarter will be given as operatives from both parties seek any advantage that they can possibly get.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From the very beginning of his presidency, top Democrats, the mainstream media and activists on the left have usually responded to any stance that Trump has taken by immediately taking the exact opposite position.

    If Trump said the sky was blue, they would say it was red.  And if Trump said that the sky was red, they would say that it was blue.

    This coronavirus pandemic has given us quite a few examples of this phenomenon.  When Trump decided that this pandemic was serious enough that travel with China should be shut down, they immediately slammed him for being “racist” and they insisted that he was overreacting.

    And when Trump started touting hydroxychloroquine as a potential treatment, they immediately started coming up with all sorts of reasons why people should not be taking it.

    Whatever Trump does or says, the left instinctively has a negative reaction to it.

    In recent days, Trump has encouraged states all over the country to start reopening their economies, and anti-lockdown protests all over America have become very pro-Trump in nature

    Anti-lockdown protests continued to gather momentum across the United States Monday as armed demonstrators waving Trump 2020 flags and ignoring social distancing rules called for America to reopen immediately.

    Crowds gathered close to one another in North Dakota, Ohio, Pennsylvania and California, calling for their ‘liberty’. Armed militia groups protested alongside young families and Americans out of work, all calling for businesses to be reopened.

    Meanwhile, those on the left have been loudly denouncing the anti-lockdown protests, they have been arguing that it would be “dangerous” to end the lockdowns too soon, and top Democrats on both coasts are telling us that the lockdowns in their states could last for several more months at least.

    And on Monday, a group of 45 “leading thinkers” on the left released a report which warned that reopening the country too soon could cause “a resurgence of COVID-19 that would cost the US economy trillions of dollars”

    In a report titled ‘Roadmap to Pandemic Resilience’ released Monday, more than 45 leading economists, social scientists, lawyers and ethicists warned that sending Americans back to work too quickly will likely cause a resurgence of COVID-19 that would cost the US economy trillions of dollars.

    The experts labeled COVID-19 ‘a profound threat to our democracy, comparable to the Great Depression and World War II’ as they outlined the three main components to safely ending quarantine: testing, tracing and supported isolation – a combination known by the acronym TTSI.

    So how long do these “leading thinkers” believe that we should extend the lockdowns for?

    Well, their report suggests that we will need to be cranking out 20 million tests a day before it will be safe to reopen the entire country…

    Test producers will need to deliver 5 million tests per day by early June to safely open parts of the economy by late July, according to the report. To “fully re-mobilize the economy,” the country will need to see testing grow to 20 million a day, the report suggests.

    “We acknowledge that even this number may not be high enough,” according to the report.

    It is difficult to believe that the authors of that report were serious when they put that in there.

    I don’t think that we will ever get to the point where 20 million Americans are being tested per day, and that is certainly not going to happen in 2020.

    Needless to say, there is a perverse incentive for those on the left to drag out these lockdowns for as long as possible, because the worse the economy does the harder it is going to be for Trump to win in November.

    So whether they are doing it consciously or unconsciously, there seems to be a desire on the left to squeeze as much drama out of this pandemic as they possibly can and to blame Trump for everything that has gone wrong.

    I think that one nominee for the biggest drama queen during this crisis so far should be CNN host Brian Stelter.  Just check out what he tweeted on Saturday

    “Last night, I hit a wall,” Stelter tweeted on Saturday. “Gutted by the death toll. Disturbed by the govt’s shortcomings. Dismayed by political rhetoric that bears no resemblance to reality. Worried about friends who are losing jobs; kids who are missing school; and senior citizens who are living in fear.”

    “I crawled in bed and cried for our pre-pandemic lives,” he said. “Tears that had been waiting a month to escape. I wanted to share because it feels freeing to do so. Now is not a time for faux-invincibility. Journos are living this, hating this, like everyone else. ”

    Yes, this pandemic has been a great tragedy, but as I pointed out yesterday it isn’t the end of the world.

    Life will go on, and as long as our hospitals are not being overwhelmed, we need to let people get back to work.

    But most Democratic governors are not willing to even consider such a move yet, because ending the lockdowns now would be seen as an admission that Trump and the anti-lockdown protesters were right.

    Plus, many of them realize that ending the lockdowns “too quickly” could give Trump a boost in November.

    So even though some conservative states such as Georgia are moving very quickly to lift their “shelter-in-place” orders, many liberal states are going to drag their lockdowns out for as long as they think they can.

    All of this is extremely unfortunate, because our approach to this pandemic should have nothing to do with political considerations.

    But these days virtually everything in America has taken on a political tone, and that is only going to intensify the closer we get to election day.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 20:50

  • Trump Demands Harvard Return Stimulus Money; Harvard Responds It Has No Idea What Trump Is Talking About
    Trump Demands Harvard Return Stimulus Money; Harvard Responds It Has No Idea What Trump Is Talking About

    The resentment against publicly-traded companies and major corporations and enterprise who abused the Treasury’s $349 billion small and medium business bailout by applying for the Paycheck Protection Program is growing.

    Earlier today, we reported that over 80 publicly listed companies tapped the PPP – which is really a grant if used to pay wages – which not surprisingly ran out of funds just days after it was launched. The most prominent public company to take the funds was Shake Shack, which sparked backlash after receiving $10 million in PPP funds through JPMorgan. Sensing pitchforks in its its immediate future, the company announced on Monday that it would be returning the funds. It then sold 3.4 million shares of stock raising $136MM in gross proceeds.

    Another company which tapped into the PPP was Ohio-based biotech Athersys, which received $1 million through the program despite raising nearly $60 million in a Monday stock offering after its shares have nearly doubled YTD. Meanwhile Nikola Motor – backed by Fidelity and hedge fund ValueAct, announced a $4 billion valuation in early March when it announced a merger with VectoIQ. The company borrowed $4 million from the PPP according to a disclosure. Ruth’s Chris steakhouse made $42 million in profit on $468 million in revenue last year, yet tapped $20 million from the PPP.

    The figure below lists the 40 largest PPP loans that inexplicably went not to small businesses but to major corporations which not only have access to institutional debt capital markets – unlike most mom and pop shops – but can also sell stock and raise cash overnight, a luxury that America’s small business – which employ over half the US labor force -do not have.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One especially large organization that supposedly received millions in bailout loans was none other than Harvard. 

    Yesterday we reported that as part of the $2 trillion CARES Act, $14 billion was set aside to support higher education institutions – ostensibly those without billions already in the bank. Harvard, which has a $40 billion endowment, was set to receive $8.7 million in federal aid. Harvard points out that at least half of which has been mandated for emergency financial aid grants to students, which we would note that they can cover themselves

    Hilariously, Harvard’s Crimson pointed to the risk that their endowment could shrink due to market volatility – maybe it will request a bailout next too? – and that the University’s financial situation is “grave.”

    None of the made an impression on President Donald Trump, however, who during Tuesday’s Wu Flu briefing, said he plans on asking Harvard University to give back more than $8 million given to them under the CARES ACT.

    “I’m going to request it,” Trump told reporters at the White House, singling out the Ivy League school. “Harvard is going to pay back the money. They shouldn’t be taking it.”

    “I’m not going to mention any other names, but when I saw Harvard — they have one of the largest endowments anywhere in the country, maybe in the world. They’re going to pay back the money,” the president added.

    Asked if he was confident he would be successful in asking Harvard to return the money, Trump said that if the university “won’t do that, then we won’t do something else.” The president also noted the size of the university’s $40 billion endowment.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Harvard responded shortly after Trump’s demand, saying it did not receive funds through the Paycheck Protection Program and that the school is committed to using all of the funds to cover financial assistance to students.

    “Like most colleges and universities, Harvard has been allocated funds as part of the CARES Act Higher Education Emergency Relief Fund. Harvard has committed that 100% of these emergency higher education funds will be used to provide direct assistance to students facing urgent financial needs due to the COVID-19 pandemic,” Harvard spokesman Jonathan Swain said. Again, it was unclear how said funds were so critical to the Harvard educational system – which charges $70,000 a year (for video conferences) and has $40 billion in its piggybank – that the college would be unable to provide “assistance” to students facing financial needs if it did not get money that could have gone to some other business that actually needs it.

    “This financial assistance will be on top of the support the University has already provided to students – including assistance with travel, providing direct aid for living expenses to those with need, and supporting students’ transition to online education,” Swain added.

    So, basically, bailout funds that are footed by the US taxpayer – in the form of trillion in new debt that will be repaid by all Americans, are now going to poor Harvard students. Wait, did we say “poor” Harvard student? According to the NYT, the median family income of a student from Harvard is $168,800 (95 percentile), and 67% of students come from the highest-earning 20% of American households. About 15% come from families in the top 1% of American wealth distribution.

    * * *

    Harvard is just one example of the thousands of companies which used their banker connections to get to the front of the line in getting “much needed” stimulus funds, even as millions of small business are waiting to this day for their loans. 

    “I will comment there have been some big businesses that have taken these loans. I was pleased to see that Shake Shack returned the money,” Mnuchin said. “The intent of this was not for big public companies that have access to capital.”

    Mnuchin also said he wanted to give companies the “benefit of the doubt” by assuming they didn’t understand the requirements but warned of consequences for large businesses that take advantage of the program. Asked to expand on what those consequences could be, Mnuchin did not provide any specifics.

    “We’re going to put up very clear guidance so that people understand what the certification is, what it means if you are a big company,” Mnuchin said.

    Some have called for reform to the program, run by the Small Business Administration, in order to ensure that the funds go to small businesses in need.

    The good news is that so far there has been little rampant fraud as some feared. Instead, the crony capitalism that the US has become so famous for was on full display, and instead of bailing out the poor, the US government – together with the Fed – has once again bailed out those who spend $10 million for their annual private jet maintenance.

    In short, nothing has changed.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 20:35

  • Whitney Tilson Spams Inboxes Selling "Partnerships" In Newsletter That Don't Come With Any Equity
    Whitney Tilson Spams Inboxes Selling “Partnerships” In Newsletter That Don’t Come With Any Equity

    Things appear to be going off the rails for Whitney Tilson. Just days ago we wrote about how the failed hedge fund manager was spamming inboxes across Wall Street congratulating himself for calling the market bottom.

    What followed appeared to be collective groaning among people on social media about how often Tilson’s e-mail spam was hitting their inbox and how some people were having trouble unsubscribing from his list. In response, one social media user said of Tilson’s e-mail list:

    “They say herpes stays with you forever, but even it doesn’t come 3-5 times per day.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now Tilson is using his inbox spamming skills to try and sell a $6,000 “Founding Partner” membership to his newsletter. The catch? There’s no real equity stake. The deal appears to just be $6,000 to gain “lifetime access” to Tilson’s research. As part of Tilson’s used-car-salesman-esque pitch of these $6,000 memberships, he recently put out what can only be described as an insanely cringeworthy video where he:

    1. Says his newsletter “could be the most profitable financial relationship you ever enter”

    2. Uses the term “the sky’s the limit”

    3. Says he envisions a day when becoming a “founding partner” could cost over $30,000

    4. Compares membership in his newsletter to “an elite country club, like Augusta National”

    5. Tells people they can find financial success that allows them to “Go on that dream vacation you’ve always wanted to”

    6. …Or “Pay off your mortgage early”

    7. …Or “Buy a condo in Costa Rica”

    Finally, he assured the saps willing to hand over $6,000 to him that they will “become a part of my inner circle and I will always treat you like a VIP.”

    We’ll pay $6,000 to not become a part of your inner circle, Whitney. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Oh and again – don’t get confused by the word “partner”. You will be offered zero equity stake in Tilson’s business for forking over $6,000. One of Tilson’s recent e-mails states:

    I’d love for you to become my “partner” – and watch the value of your “partnership” stake grow as our business grows.

    Now by “partner”, I do not mean receiving shares of my company or anything. Instead, Founding Partners gain access to every research product we at Empire Financial Research ever publish for life.

    He finished that e-mail, which went out about noon EST on April 20, by stating: 

    You will never have another chance to become a “Founding Partner” in my business. Don’t let this opportunity pass you by. You might kick yourself down the road if you do.

    Just three hours later, another e-mail was sent out to his list that said:

    This is your last chance….Remember, Whitney Tilson’s “founding partner” offer will be much higher the next time you see it. Please, call us right away if you are still on the fence.

    So, which is it? Never have another chance or inevitably will be available again in the future?

    Recall, Tilson is most famous for blowing up two hedge funds before becoming a newsletter writer. As a reminder, Tilson famously blew up closed Kase Capital Management in 2017 (5 years after shuttering its predecessor T2) after getting his ass handed to him by the market “sustained underperformance”. 

    “My returns my first 12 years were much better than my returns the last 5 years,” he said during a CNBC interview in 2016. “And that’s sort of irritating and embarrassing. Because I’m a very public figure.”

    “Reporting sustained underperformance to you was making me miserable,” Tilson wrote to his investors in 2017.

    He continued: “I couldn’t in good conscience continue to manage your money unless I had a high degree of confidence that I could turn things around within a reasonable time frame.” And with that, he wasn’t managing money anymore.

    Recall, Tilson had relaunched his first fund, T2 Partners, as Kase Capital in 2012 after losing 24.9% in 2011.

    In addition to hawking his newsletter, Tilson has also been spotted sending out e-mails about his most recent colonoscopy

    “I had a colonoscopy last week and, while the prep wasn’t so fun, overall it was a perfectly tolerable experience and I’m glad I did it,” Tilson said in a 2017 e-mail he fired out to his mailing list.

    He also made PowerPoint slides.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 20:30

  • Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez Rejoices At Negative Oil Prices
    Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez Rejoices At Negative Oil Prices

    Authored by Irina Slav via OilPrice.com,

    Congresswoman Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez rejoiced at the news that U.S crude oil prices had dropped into negative territory earlier this week, tweeting “You absolutely love to see it.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the tweet, which she later deleted, Ocasio-Cortez also wrote:

    “This along with record low interest rates means it’s the right time for a worker-led, mass investment in green infrastructure to save our planet.”

    Ocasio-Cortez is perhaps the most vocal opponent of the U.S. oil industry in Congress, along with Bernie Sanders, and she was also the author of a Green New Deal that envisaged a shift to a completely renewable energy future. 

    Some analysts have estimated that this shift would cost tens of trillions of dollars.

    Oil prices turned negative yesterday, with West Texas Intermediate falling below minus $37 a barrel as traders scrambled to ditch their May delivery oil contracts to avoid actual delivery that would have come at a steep cost as free storage space shrinks.

    However, Ocasio-Cortez’s joy at this price development may be both ill-timed and misguided. As Senator Ted Cruz tweeted in response,

    “Which part of the millions of blue-collar workers losing their jobs & small refineries closing their doors forever is what you ‘love to see’ (per your deleted tweet) @AOC? Asking for those in Texas & across USA whose livelihoods (ability to put food on the table) are AT RISK.”

    But job loss aside, Congresswoman Ocasio-Cortez appears to be confused about the relationship between the fossil fuel industry and the renewable energy industry. The nature of this relationship is striking: when oil is cheap, renewable energy reaps no benefits because consumption of the cheap commodity increases.

    Granted, right now, we are in a unique situation when oil is cheap because there is no demand for it and the supply is too high. However, demand for electricity, including from renewable sources, is also down because of the lockdowns. Solar and wind industry representatives even warned of massive job losses in their industry because of the pandemic. In other words, the renewable energy industry is also in trouble—it’s not just bad old oil. And this trouble, along with the 22 million workers that lost their jobs over than last four weeks alone, will make her mass green investment vision particularly challenging to materialize.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 20:10

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st April 2020

  • Turkey Overtakes China & Iran In Total COVID-19 Cases But Still Resists Lockdown
    Turkey Overtakes China & Iran In Total COVID-19 Cases But Still Resists Lockdown

    For the first time going back to February 25 when Iranian leaders first publicly admitted they had a serious outbreak on their hands, and with the country establishing itself with the grim distinction of remaining the Middle East epicenter, another regional country now leads in total infection numbers outside the US and Europe. As of Monday morning, Turkey has 86,306 cases, surpassing China’s 83,817 and Iran’s 83,505 reported cases.

    Turkey on Saturday confirmed that its numbers had risen to over 82,000 – a jump of nearly 4,000 cases from Friday, surpassing Iran for the first time ever, making it the new regional epicenter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Line outside of Istanbul market, AFP via Getty.

    Like Iran before, Turkey is another country which has come under scrutiny and criticism for not only its slow response since cases began growing last month, but lack of testing and under-reporting numbers as well.

    Over the weekend the Interior Ministry announced it was extending travel ban orders between 31 major cities for at least 15 more days.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ankara has still held out against ordering a nationwide lockdown like other countries with its high numbers of cases, only opting to close schools and bars and imposing a weekend curfew only. It’s also imposed various age-restricted curfews. 

    “At [Turkey’s] level, most countries are implementing a full lockdown,” one virology expert was quoted in CNN as saying. “A partial lockdown can be good, it can balance keeping some of the economy functioning while still trying to contain the outbreak.”

    The government has maintained its hospitals and heath care system is still functioning optimally and is nowhere near capacity, as Foreign Policy describes

    As the number of coronavirus cases has increased, Turkish Health Minister Fahrettin Koca has sought to allay fears of an overwhelmed health system. Speaking on Friday, Koca said that unlike Western nations, Turkey’s hospitals still hold excess capacity and that intensive care units were not exceeding 60 percent occupancy. A licensed physician, Koca’s daily briefings have made him a star on social media over the course of the pandemic; he has gained over 4 million followers on Twitter since the beginning of the year.

    “Turkey’s problems with containing the virus came into focus on April 10, when a late announcement of a weekend curfew led to panic buying across the country,” FP adds.

    The already battered Turkish economy looks to be pummeled further by the crisis, as the Turkish lira’s recent plummet to a near-historic low of 6.95 lira to the dollar demonstrates. 

    Recall too this report from ten days ago: “Turkey has held talks with the United States about possibly securing a swap line from the U.S. Federal Reserve and has discussed other funding options to mitigate fallout from the coronavirus outbreak, Turkish officials said on Friday.”

    As recently as Sunday Presidents Trump and Erdogan spoke on the phone and agreed to continue pursuing “close cooperation” to contain the pandemic.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 02:45

  • Merkel May Survive The Coronapocalypse, But The EU Won't
    Merkel May Survive The Coronapocalypse, But The EU Won’t

    Authored by Tom Luongo via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    No matter how hard I try to dig German Chancellor Angela Merkel’s political grave she proves more adept at staying alive than a cockroach in a woodpile. And the recent fight amongst European Union members over “Coronabonds” has proven yet another escape path for her to avoid political termination.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Thanks to Merkel holding the line on debt mutualization and EU fiscal integration, which is very unpopular in Germany, her Christian Democratic Union (CDU) is now polling at levels it hasn’t enjoyed since before the last general election in 2017.

    According to Europe Elects, the latest polling out of Germany has the CDU commanding around 35-37% of German voters. This is a party that was in shambles not two months ago after Merkel heir apparent Annagret Kramp-Karrenbauer stepped down as CDU leader, prompting a new leadership vote, which, conveniently for Merkel, has now been postponed indefinitely thanks to the COVID-19 crisis.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some of that is the normal “rally around the current leader” that occurs during any crisis. President Trump’s numbers in the U.S. have been strong despite the twin crises here. Even marginal leaders like Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte in Italy have seen their numbers rise.

    But a 15-point bump for Merkel is tremendous and it only happens in conjunction with her refusing to cave on Germany being seen bailing out southern Europe. It may win her support domestically, but it sets up a disastrous future for the European Union.

    As COVID-19 rages across Europe the two major factions within the EU have been fighting a desperate battle for its future with the issue of debt mutualization being the fulcrum. Now, I believe wholly that the use of lock downs and draconian measures to fight the disease have been more political than practical. Using a public health care crisis to advance a political agenda is the height of cynicism and megalomania.

    On the one side we have the Euro-integrationists, led by French President Emmanuel Macron. On the other are the fiscal conservatives led by Merkel, who has given way to Dutch Prime Minister Mark Rutte to be the point man for Macron’s derision.

    Trapped in the middle is the real human tragedy in northern Italy where thousands of people have died from the toxic mix of a lack of medical infrastructure, high concentration of high-risk people and lack of knowledge of how to fight the disease.

    Worse than that, the government in Italy was put together to spearhead this fight for Eurobonds since Conte was kept in power to ensure Lega’s Matteo Salvini didn’t and fight Macron and Merkel by threatening to leave the euro-zone.

    Whether you believe the EU’s response, or, more accurately, lack thereof, to Italy’s plight was motivated by malice or incompetence the result is the same. Thousands of Italians died and weakened already weak bonds between Italy and the rest of the EU technocracy.

    As I said in an article back on March 14th:

    So in the midst of this mess comes COVID-19 and the uncoordinated and inept response to it from the political center of Europe to date. Only now are they coming to the conclusion they need to restrict travel, after sitting on their hands for a few weeks while Italians died by the hundreds.

    And do you think that’s engendering waves of love and affection among Italians towards Germans?

    If you do then you don’t know Italians… at all.

    And this is your signal that this is the beginning of the real crisis. Because while COVID-19 may have been the catalyst for the breakdown of capital markets, capital markets were simply waiting for that spark to occur.

    Honestly I wasn’t harsh enough in my assessment of what was happening back then, but it was clear that this crisis was being used to push forward EU integrationist plans of Macron and ECB President Christine Lagarde trying to strongarm the Germans and the Dutch into their position.

    By the meeting on March 26th that plan failed. Rutte, Merkel, Austrian Chancellor Sebastain Kurz and Norway all held their ground and the meeting would have ended in a fistfight had it not been held using social distancing rules via teleconference.

    That meeting set up last week’s which saw Italy cave to German and Dutch intransigence. Macron and Lagarde lost, securing just $500 billion in new loans but no ECB bond issuance. And the issue now is whether Conte will partake of the program or not.

    His failure to act as Macron’s Agent of Shame to secure the EU’s future now puts the whole European project in jeopardy because Conte’s government is in serious trouble in Italy. Moreover, this failure was likely unexpected because now even the hardest-core EU integrationists in Italy’s government are wondering why they are part of the EU.

    Meanwhile the polls in Italy haven’t really budged with Salvini’s Lega holding onto around 30% of the electorate with the Brothers of Italy holding onto recent gains in the mid-teens.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Moreover, now the question of EU membership in Italy is a coin flip. Two different polls (here and here) have it well within the margin of error.

    Lastly, and most importantly, Conte’s coalition government is split on whether to avail itself of the newly-approved loans. Reuters reported that the divisions within the Italian coalition are rising and portend a split. In a show of political spine not seen in over a year senior partner Five Star Movement (M5S) is opposed while the Eurocentric Democrats are all for it since, as of right now, there are no strings attached to the money.

    Conte will have to settle the dispute before a video conference among European leaders on April 23 when Italy will be expected to make its position clear.

    He tried to defuse the quarrel on Wednesday, warning in a Facebook post that the ESM “risks dividing the whole of Italy,” and adding that more information was needed on the terms of any credit lines before a final decision could be taken.

    Until these details are clear, discussing whether an ESM loan is in Italy’s interests is “a merely abstract and schematic debate,” Conte said.

    But we all know there will be strings in the end. If you doubt that assertion, I suggest you ask Greece how about this. So, Conte has his work cut out for himself. There is real urgency now in the EU to get even token Eurobonds approved before Germany takes over the Presidency of the European Commission in July, where it will set the agenda on the EU’s next seven-year budget.

    After years of kicking the can down the road to avoid a messy political upheaval, which is Merkel’s trademark move, nothing has changed in the EU when it comes to fixing its untenable structure. And for this reason, as long as Angela Merkel is on the stage, there will be no European dream.

    All Merkel ever does is manipulate events back to the previous status quo. She has no capacity or stomach to face the German voters nor will she allow anyone else to fully express themselves. Her handling of Brexit negotiations was a fiasco for the EU, thankfully, and her handling of Italy today is just as inept.

    With Salvini waiting in the wings, the people ready to revolt over Germany’s handling of the crisis and a weak coalition government put in place by Merkel to hold things together, the probability of Italeave occurring rises daily.

    So, while Merkel may have won this latest battle in the end she may lose the war for the EU. And, in the ultimate irony, the people of Europe may have her to thank for their deliverance from its dysfunction.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 02:00

  • Watch: Russian Fighter Buzzes US Spy Plane Near Syria For 2nd Time In Four Days
    Watch: Russian Fighter Buzzes US Spy Plane Near Syria For 2nd Time In Four Days

    For the second time in four days a Russian jet has intercepted a US plane over the Mediterranean, bringing tensions between the two countries to boiling point at a moment Moscow is appearing to flex in defense of its ally Syria.

    The Pentagon confirmed the latest “unsafe and unprofessional” intercept incident in international airspace Sunday, after an incident the prior Wednesday involving a US P-8A Poseidon reconnaissance aircraft, which was similarly “buzzed” by an aggressive Russian SU-35, which reportedly performed a high-speed, inverted maneuver.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Russian SU-35 aircraft is seen over the Mediterranean Sea in new footage released by the US military.

    “The unnecessary actions of the Russian SU-35 pilot were inconsistent with good airmanship and international flight rules, seriously jeopardizing the safety of flight of both aircraft,” the US Navy said Monday. “While the Russian aircraft was operating in international airspace, this interaction was irresponsible. We expect them to behave within international standards set to ensure safety and to prevent incidents.”

    However, a Russian Defense Ministry (MoD) statement framed the latest incident as one in which the Russian fighter, scrambled from Hmeymim air base in Syria, “shadowed” the US spy plane which apparently came too close to the Syrian coast for comfort. 

    The Navy’s 6th Fleet released video of Sunday’s incident in which a Russian SU-35 Flanker came dangerously close to a Navy P-8A surveillance aircraft:

    The Russian MoD said Monday: “On April 19, the Russian equipment controlling the airspace over the neutral waters of the Mediterranean Sea detected an air target performing a flight towards Russia’s military facilities in the Syrian Arab Republic,” according to TASS. “A fighter jet from the air defense alert quick reaction force of the Hmeymim air base was scrambled to identify the target.”

    “The aircraft of Russia’s Aerospace Force performed and perform all flights in strict compliance with the international rules of using the airspace over neutral waters,” the statement added.

    Gen. Tod Wolters, Commander of US European Command and NATO’s Supreme Allied Commander, has subsequently said he’s protested Russia’s “unprofessional” and potentially dangerous maneuvers involving US planes over the Mediterranean directly with counterparts in Moscow. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/21/2020 – 01:00

  • Revolutionary Times & Regime Collapse – "The System Cannot Handle It"
    Revolutionary Times & Regime Collapse – “The System Cannot Handle It”

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Some have queried how it could be that President Putin would co-operate with President Trump to have OPEC+ push oil prices higher – when those higher prices precisely would only help sustain U.S. oil production. In effect, President Putin was being asked to underwrite a subsidy to the U.S. economy – at the expense of Russia’s own oil and gas sales – since U.S. shale production simply is not economic at these prices. In other words, Russia seemed to be shooting itself in the foot.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Well, the calculus for Moscow on whether to cut production (to help Trump) was never simple. There were geo-political and domestic economic considerations – as well as the industry ones – to weigh. But, perhaps one issue trumped all others?

    Since 2007, President Putin has been pointing to one overarching threat to global trade: And that problem was simply, the U.S. dollar.

    And now, that dollar is in crisis. We are referring, here, not so much to America’s domestic financial crisis (although the monetisation of U.S. debt is connected to threat to the global system), but rather, how the international trading system is poised to blow apart, with grave consequences for everyone.

    In other words, Covid-19 may be the trigger, but it is the U.S. dollar – as President Putin has long warned – that is the root problem:

    “We’re looking at a commodity-price collapse and a collapse in global trade unlike anything we’ve seen since the 1930s”, said Ken Rogoff, the former chief economist of the IMF, now at Harvard University. An avalanche of government-debt crises is sure to follow, he said, and “the system just can’t handle this many defaults and restructurings at the same time”.

    “It’s a little bit like going to the hospitals and they can handle a certain number of Covid-19 patients but they can’t handle them – all at once”, he added.

    “More than 90 countries have inquired about bailouts from the IMF—nearly half the world’s nations—while at least 60 have sought to avail themselves of World Bank programs. The two institutions together [only] have resources of up to $1.2 trillion”.

    Just to be clear, this amount is not nearly sufficient.

    Rogoff is saying that $1.2 trillion is a drop in the ocean – for what lies ahead. The health of the global economy thus has attenuated down to a race between dollars flooding out of this ‘complex self-organising’ system amidst the coronavirus pandemic, versus the very limited resources of the IMF and World Bank to pump dollars in.

    Simple? Just ramp up the dollar flow into system. But whoa there! This would mean the U.S. providing a flow of dollars sufficient to meet ‘rest of world’ needs – ‘during the biggest collapse since the 1930s’? There is $11.9 trillion of U.S. denominated debt out there alone, plus the dollar float required to finance day-to-day international trade (usually held as national, foreign exchange reserves).

    That however, is only a fraction of the dollar-denominated debt ‘problem’, since a part of that debt takes the characteristics of a distinct ‘currency’ used in international trade, called Eurodollars. Mostly (but not exclusively), they present themselves as if ordinary dollars, but what distinguishes them is that they are overseas dollar deposits that exist outside of U.S. regulation, in one sense.

    But which – in the other sense – they become the tools extending U.S. jurisdiction (think Treasury sanctions), across the globe, through the use of U.S. dollars, as its medium of trade. That is to say, this huge Eurodollar market serves Washington’s geo-political interests by enabling it to sanction the world. Hence, the Eurodollar market is a main tool to the U.S.’ covert ‘war’ against China and Russia.

    Eurodollars just ‘emerged’, (initially) in Europe after WW2 (no-one is sure quite how), and they grew organically to huge size, by the European banking system simply electronically creating more of them. The Achilles’ Heel is that it lacks any Central Bank to supply it with liquid dollars, as and when, payments into the U.S. sphere are sucked out of it.

    This happens especially in times of crisis, when there is flight to the onshore dollar. Oh, no. Oh yes: It’s another self-organising dynamic system that can only ‘grow’ under the right conditions, but will be prone to dynamic de-construction if too many dollars are withdrawn from it. And now, with the Covid-19 pandemic, the Eurodollar market is in a near panic for dollars: liquid dollars.

    The U.S. Fed does ‘help out’, at its own discretion, but mainly through offering to swap other currencies for dollars, and by extending short term dollar loans. But this ‘swap bandage’ cannot of course staunch full-blown global trade blowout – in the same way that the Fed is ‘supporting’ U.S. domestic financial system – by throwing trillions of dollars at it.

    President Putin saw this eventuality long ago, and predicted the dollar’s ultimate collapse, as a result of the world’s trade becoming too large and too diverse to be sustained on the slender back of the U.S. Fed. And because the world is no longer ready for the U.S. to be able to sanction it, willy-nilly, and at will.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And here ‘is’ that moment – very possibly. So, the collapse in the oil price is a piece to this much bigger story. Putin – not so surprisingly – thus cooperated with Trump’s OPEC initiative, no doubt guessing that the attempt to ramp prices higher would never ‘fly’. Putin may not want to see the dollar hegemony renewed, but nor would he want Russia to be viewed as a main contributor to a global blow-out. The blame being heaped on China over coronavirus serves as a potent alert in this context.

    This – emphatically – is not an essay about barely-understood Eurodollars. It is about real global risk. Take the Middle East, as one example. Oil is trading currently at $17 (Friday’s WTI). No producer state’s Middle East business-model is viable at this price level. National budget ‘break-evens’ require a price of oil to be at least three times higher – maybe more. And this, comes on top of the collapse of the Gulf air-travel hub business and tourism. The northern tier of states additionally, is being pressed hard by U.S. sanctions, with the latter tightening the sanctions tourniquet, as Covid-19 strikes, rather than relaxing it. Lebanon, Jordan, Syria – and Iraq. All have national business-models that are bust. They all require bail-outs.

    And into this bleak picture, coronavirus has gripped precisely that class of expatriates and migrant workers that sustain the Gulf ‘way of life’ and its business model. NGOs presently are scouring the UAE for empty buildings, and Bahrain is re-purposing closed schools in order to re-house migrant-labourers from cramped accommodation where one room with bunk-beds would sleep a dozen workers.

    The virus has also spread to densely populated commercial districts of cities, where many expatriates share housing to save on rent. Many have lost jobs and are struggling. The authorities are trying to deport the migrants home; but Pakistan and India both are refusing them immediate entry. These victims have lost their livelihood, and any chance to escape their misery.

    Just to be clear: Gulf élites are not exempt from Covid-19. The al-Saud have been particularly hit by what they sometimes call the “Shi’i virus”. The situation is turning explosive. Gulf economies are held aloft by expatriates, migrant workers and domestic help, and coronavirus has upended the pillars of their economies.

    The state looms large over the financial sector in the Gulf, and this makes financial institutions especially vulnerable, because the proportion of loans that local banks extend to the government or to government-related entities, has been rising since 2009. As the authorities draw further on these institutions, so the Gulf economies will prove more vulnerable to Eurodollar stress – absent huge Fed bail-outs.

    The global impact of Covid-19 is only beginning, but one thing is abundantly clear: Middle Eastern states will be needing a great deal of spending money, just to fend off social disorder. An economic breakdown is more than just economic. It leads quickly to a social breakdown that involves looting, random violence, fraud and popular anger directed at authorities. Global trade is going to be hit hard, and U.S. imports are going to tumble, which threatens one of the main USD liquidity channels into the Eurodollar system.

    This fear of a systemic dynamic destruction of the trading system has led the BIS (Bank for International Settlements: the Central Bankers’ own Central Bank) to insist that:

    “… today’s crisis differs from the 2008 GFC, and requires policies that reach beyond the banking sector to final users. These businesses, particularly those enmeshed in global supply chains, are in constant need of working capital, much of it in dollars. Preserving the flow of payments along these chains is essential if we are to avoid further economic meltdown”.

    This is a truly revolutionary warning. The BIS is saying that unless the Fed makes bail-outs and working capital available on a massive scale – all the way down, and through, the supply-pyramid to nitty-gritty individual enterprises – trade collapse cannot be avoided. What is hinted at here is the concern that when multiple dynamic complex systems begin to degrade, they can, and often do, enter into a spiralling feedback-loop.

    There may be agreement in the G7 on the principle of a limited debt moratorium to be offered to struggling economies, but an approach à outrance – on the BIS lines – apparently is being blocked by U.S. Treasury Secretary Mnuchin (the U.S. enjoys a veto at the IMF by virtue of its quota): No more U.S. cash is being offered to the IMF by Mnuchin, who prefers to keep the U.S. Fed front and centre of the USD liquidity roll-out process.

    In other words, Trump wishes to keep intact the scaffolding of the ‘hidden’ dollar-based, sanctions and tariff ‘war’ against China and Russia. He wants the Fed to be able to determine who does, and who does not, get help in any ‘liquidity roll-out’. He wants to continue to be able to sanction those he wants. And he wants to maintain as large an external footprint of the dollar as possible.

    Here then, is the crux to Putin’s complaint:

    “At root, the Eurodollar system is based on using the national currency of just one country, the U.S., as the global reserve currency. This means the world is beholden to a currency that it cannot create as needed”.

    When a crisis hits, as at present, everyone in the Eurodollar system suddenly realizes they have no ability to create fiat dollars, and can rely only on that which exists in national foreign exchange reserves, or in ‘swap lines’. This obviously grants the U.S. enormous power and privilege.

    But more than subjecting the world to the geo-political hegemony of Washington, the crucial point is made by Professor Rogoff:

    “We’re looking at a commodity-price collapse – and a collapse in global trade unlike anything we’ve seen since the 1930s. An avalanche of government-debt crises is sure to follow, he said, and “the system just can’t handle this many defaults and restructurings – at the same time”.

    This simply is beyond the U.S. Fed, or the U.S. Treasury’s capacities, by a long shot. The Fed is already set to monetize double the total U.S. Treasury debt issuance. The global task would overwhelm it – in an avalanche of money-printing.

    Does Mnuchin then, believe his and Trump’s narrative, that the virus will soon pass, and the economy will rapidly bounce-back? If so, and it turns out that the virus does not rapidly disappear, then Mnuchin’s stance portends a coming, tragic débacle. And with further massive money issuance, a collapse in confidence in the dollar. (President Putin would have been proved right, but he will not welcome, assuredly, being proved right in such a destructive manner).

    In a parallel sphere, the global trade plight is being mirrored in the microcosm by that of EU states, such as Italy, whose economies similarly have been racked by Covid-19. They too, are beholden to a currency – the Euro – that Italy and others cannot create as needed.

    With this crisis hitting Europe, everyone in the Euro system is experiencing what it means to have no ability to create fiat currency, and be entirely subject to a non-statutory body, the Eurogroup, which – like Mnuchin – simply says ‘no’ to any BIS-like approach.

    Again, it is about scale: this is not business as usual, as in some neo-‘Greek’ eruption, to be countered with EU ‘discipline’. This crisis is much, much greater than that. The absence of monetary instruments – in crisis – can become existential.

    Some muse might recall to Mnuchin and the Eurogroup, Alexander del Mar’s 1899 Monetary History, in which he observes how the manoeuvres of the British Crown, in constricting the export of gold and silver (i.e. money) to its American colonies, led to the Crown’s ‘war’ on the paper monetary instruments – Bills of Credit – issued by the Revolutionary Assemblies of Massachusetts and Philadelphia, to compensate for this British monetary starvation.

    Finally, it left the desperate colonists with but one resort: “to stand by their monetary system. Thus the Bills of Credit of this era … were really the standards of The [American] Revolution. They were more than this: They were the Revolution itself!”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 23:55

  • India Reports Record Spike In Coronavirus Cases Just As It Starts Reopening Economy
    India Reports Record Spike In Coronavirus Cases Just As It Starts Reopening Economy

    With increasingly politicized debates raging across developed countries whether or not to reopen economies as new coronavirus cases and deaths appear to be plateauing, India has made the decision to ease one of the world’s strictest lockdowns to allow some manufacturing and agricultural activity to resume after the economy suffered a sharp slowdown in recent weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Homeless people wait for free food during a nationwide lockdown to curb the spread of new coronavirus in Gauhati, India, Sunday, April 19, 2020.

    India’s shelter-in-place orders were imposed on March 24 and halted all but essential services, sparking an exodus of migrant workers and people who survive on daily wages out of India’s cities and toward villages in rural areas. Authorities picked up travelers in a fleet of buses and quarantined many of them in empty schools and other public buildings for 14 days. An even  bigger problem, however, was the freefall in the Indian economy.

    Here is why India is in a rush: according to Goldman’s current activity indicator (CAI), growth in India was reported at 2.8% in March, a 4.2% plunge relative to February, and the slowest uptick since the financial crisis. The sharp fall in March, is driven by both industrial and services, with the decline in exports, imports, auto sales, and PMI services being the biggest drivers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Goldman also gathered a variety of high-frequency economic indicators, similar to how the banks looked at China’s economy in February to gauge the slowdown. Here are some of the findings across various sectors:

    Industrial:

    • Daily electricity consumption collapsed in March (-30% yoy on March 27), and remains at low levels since then. (Exhibit 4).
    • The relative usage of coal also fell sharply in March. The fraction of total electricity generation through coal declined by almost 10 percentage points between 1st and 31st March 2020. Our rough estimate showed coal consumption was almost 11% weaker in the last week of March and first 12 days of April, relative to last year (Exhibit 5).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • Air pollution, which is an indicator of industrial activity, has fallen in several cities. The Air Quality Index (AQI) (which is positively related to air pollution; higher values for the AQI indicate greater air pollution) decreased in April for major Indian cities such as Bengaluru, Chennai, Kolkata and New Delhi, as per the data from the Central Pollution Control Board.

    Services:

    • Railway transportation: Railway passenger volume contracted by 7.4% in the first 10 days of March 2020, according to the Indian Railways data, and is expected to decrease for the rest of March and April.
    • Traffic congestion data shows that congestion has reduced to very low levels in three major Indian cities, indicating reduction in movement (Exhibit 6).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • Mobility tracker from Apple. Mobility trend reports from Apple are based on changes in routing requests of ~12 mn Iphone users in India. Based on the latest reported data, walking and driving mobility have contracted by 73% and 81% between January 13 and April 14, 2020 (Exhibit 7).
    • Daily unemployment and labor force participation rates from the Center for Monitoring Indian Economy. Daily unemployment shows a sharp spike since March 29th, driven by both rural and urban areas. Not only has unemployment (defined as the number of people, 15 years of age or more, who are part of the labor force but unemployed) spiked, but labor force participation rates (number of people, 15 years of age or more, employed or actively seeking employment as % of total working age population) has also collapsed (see Exhibit 8).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other words, just like in China in February and early March, much of India has shut down, and just like China, India is now scrambling to reboot its economy, as the alternative for the country with a population of 1.4 billion is a social upheaval that would likely be far worse than letting the coronavirus run rampant.

    However, unlike China which largely reopened only after the number of reported new cases had collapsed, India is starting to ease its lockdown just as the number of single-day new cases spiked the most yet, as an additional 1,553 cases were reported over 24 hours compared with 1,334 reported on Sunday morning, raising the national total to 17,265, potentially resulting in an even faster breakout in new cases in the world’s most densely-populated nation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As AP further adds, at least 543 people died from the Wu-Flu and epidemiologists forecast the peak may not be reached before June.

    And while New York City has emerged as the global case study for rampant disease spread so far, skeptics warn that a full blown pandemic in India would be orders of magnitude more catastrophic.

    However, starting Monday, limited industry and farming were allowed to resume where employers could meet social distancing and hygiene norms, and migrant workers were allowed to travel within states to factories, farms and other work sites.

    This is taking place even as government surveys in the central Indian state of Maharashtra, the worst-hit by the virus, have suggested few companies eligible to restart operations can do so because they are required to transport and shelter workers as a virus-prevention measure.

    “In the event a group of migrants wish to return to their places of work within the state where they are presently located, they would be screened and those who are asymptomatic would be transported to their respective places of work,” India’s home ministry said in a letter to state governments.

    While a partial lifting of a curfew permitted the restart of coal plants and oil refineries, animal feed and agro-industry, and other labor-intensive manufacturing such as brick kilns, much of the country remained under lockdown. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A group of Indians distribute free food and water to homeless people during a nationwide lockdown to curb the spread of new coronavirus in Gauhati, India, Sunday, April 19, 2020.

    Additionally, India’s airspace was closed to commercial traffic, its passenger rail system, buses and metros were halted, e-commerce was restricted to food and other essentials, and schools, stadiums and houses of worship remained closed until May 3.

    In hopes of preventing an even faster breakout, India is also continuing to ramp up testing, build up stocks of ventilators and personal protective equipment and prepare makeshift isolation wards and dedicated COVID-19 hospitals.

    Yet one difference between India and the rest of the world that may help India contain the pandemic is that in Mumbai, the capital of Maharashtra and home to Asia’s largest slum, city authorities were planning to administer hydroxycloroquine to thousands of slum-dwellers over 14 days to gauge whether the drug helped to slow the spread of the disease in a place where social distancing norms aren’t possible to achieve. It was unclear how many people would participate in the experiment, or when it would begin.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 23:35

  • How To Get Rid Of A POTUS
    How To Get Rid Of A POTUS

    Authored by ‘John Quincy Adams’ via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In the Soviet Union there was an expression “The Organs of State Security” or “Organs” for short. Their supposed power in the USSR was one of the things that separated them from what we used to call “the free world”. Not so much any more – the American Organs came very close to getting rid of the so-called Most Powerful Man in The World. They made only one mistake; they probably won’t next time.

    The impeachment of US President Donald Trump is over, or at least this iteration is. This was not a normal impeachment, it was an attempt by the Deep State, the Organs of State Security, the Blob, the Borg – later we will learn what its members call it – to remove a president of the United States. After some false starts, it succeeded at every step except the very last one. But, as they say, practice makes perfect and the Organs have learned from their mistake.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note that such a removal only becomes necessary when the Organs have failed to block a challenger, a Bernie Sanders or Tulsi Gabbard for example, who might question the status quo. But, in 2016 they failed and, to the amazement of the wise ones, Trump won the election. His remarks about getting along with Russia showed that he might wander off the path The Organs had laid out. The Organs got to work. They first stirred up opinion that he was so unfit for office that getting rid of him would be laudable, no matter how it was done. Not so difficult given the small number of “news” media owners in the USA well trained to take their lead from “anonymous sources in the intelligence community” and not so difficult because the losers were so bitter. He was -phobic – islamo-, trans-, homo-. He was -ist – rac-, sex-, class-. Limited mental abilitiespsychological instabilitypersonal deficiencies,incapabledangerous. An entire theory of incapacity was built on a typo. Each attempt faded and was forgotten – faithless Electors25th AmendmentLogan Act – nobody remembers the details, but the stink remains.

    But these produced no effective actions. There are only two ways to get rid of an American president if you are unwilling to wait until the next election – murder or impeachment. Media hysteria creates an atmosphere but it doesn’t get anything done.

    It’s an experiment – this fails, that fails, try something else.

    So the Organs moved to another idea – treason as grounds for impeachment. The seeds had been planted – “All 17 intelligence agencies” agreed that he was the nominee of a hostile foreign power. Three years on an inquiry intended to provoke him, but he resisted the provocations and, eventually the inquiry had to admit it found nothing. But the accusation is always there – enemies of the Organs, Tulsi GabbardBernie SandersJill Stein are accused of being puppets of the foreign power.

    Trump talks a lot and, sooner or later, will say something the Organs can seize on and twist. And he did. A phone call to a subservient foreign leader provided the opportunity and The Organs of State Security took it. One operative became a “whistleblower” – he didn’t overhear the phonecall, didn’t know what it said but did know that a fellow operative was “visibly shaken“. Another operative actually said it out loud:

    In the Spring of 2019, I became aware of outside influencers promoting a false narrative of Ukraine inconsistent with the consensus views of the interagency. This narrative was harmful to U.S. government policy. While my interagency colleagues and I were becoming increasingly optimistic on Ukraine’s prospects, this alternative narrative undermined U.S. government efforts to expand cooperation with Ukraine.

    Read that again because it’s an important stage in the History of the Decline and Fall of America.

    “Inconsistent with the consensus views of the interagency”.

    That’s what they think should make foreign policy, not transient presidents (never mind Art 2 Sec 2). This is the moment when even the dullest should have understood that yes there is a Deep State, the Organs do exist and its operatives call it The Interagency.

    The president is already unpopular, many think he must be removed and now The Interagency says he is a traitor. The opposing party stages a show in which “witnesses” from The Interagency testify that he is a traitor because he says or will say, does or will do something that violates “the consensus views of The Interagency”. Like trade Alaska to Russia for support. The House brings bills of impeachment charging that he has weakened national security (The Interagency told us so) and obstruction of justice (many members are ex-prosecutors and built their careers on plea bargains and obstruction of justice charges; that charge is an automatic reflex.)

    But the plot failed in the Senate. The Interagency must be wondering what would have happened had it produced, at the right time, compromising information on 20 or 30 senators.

    We recapitulate. Should someone who threatens The Interagency manage the improbable feat of climbing over the obstacles and becoming president, The Interagency will

    1. Start a campaign at which obedient media scribes, quoting “people familiar with the matter“, throw all the accusations they can find or imagine. Details will be forgotten but surely, with such clouds of smoke, there must be some fire somewhere. Easier still if members of The Interagency become TV pundits themselves.

    2. Gather all the compromising information The Interagency has – the NSA keeps everything – on Congressmen and be prepared to deploy it. Easier still if members of The Interagency become members themselves.

    3. Wait for some event in which the POTUS goes against The Interagency Consensus.

    4. Use the compromising information in the House to start an inquiry which listens to testimony from Interagency operatives that the POTUS has violated The Interagency consensus and threatened national security

    5. The House charges him with 1) endangering national security and 2) obstruction of justice.

    6. Use the compromising information to get enough Senators to vote to remove.

    7. Repeat as necessary until every candidate understands who really runs things.

    And that’s how how do it.

    And The Interagency nearly pulled it off – 20 or 30 Senators, confronted with evidence of sexual or financial peccadilloes (or, these days, -isms or -phobias), could have been “persuaded” to do the right thing.

    And so, as Adams foresaw two centuries ago, step by step, America, having bound “an imperial diadem” to her forehead, has ceased to be “the ruler of her own spirit”. The Interagency – built up for the pursuit of monsters – very nearly ate the government. It failed only at the very last step.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 23:15

  • Big Brother Bezos Is Now Tracking Amazon Factory Workers With Thermal Imaging Camera
    Big Brother Bezos Is Now Tracking Amazon Factory Workers With Thermal Imaging Camera

    Amazon is installing thermal cameras at its warehouses across the country to detect feverish employees in a bid to speed up screening of potential COVID-19 carriers, reported Reuters

    The new cameras measure how much heat a person releases relative to their surroundings, Amazon workers told Reuters, adding that the new process of screening is a much quicker approach than forehead thermometers.

    “We implemented daily temperature checks in the locations of our operations as an additional preventative measure to support the health and safety of our employees who continue to provide a critical service in our communities,” Amazon spokesperson Kristen Kish told The Verge via an email statement. 

     “We are now implementing the use of thermal cameras for temperature screening to create a more streamlined experience at some of our sites,” Kish said. 

    Screening tents have also been erected at some warehouse entrances. Thermal cameras are expected to be installed at Amazon’s Wholefood stores. 

    Several employees said if the cameras flag someone, they will be given a second round of checks via a thermometer to determine if they exhibit signs of coronavirus. 

    The move by Amazon to increase health monitoring of its workforce comes as 50 warehouse employees in the US have contracted the virus. 

    We’ve reported in recent weeks that employees have conducted several strikes at a New York Amazon warehouse, many of whom demanded the company close the facility for disinfecting after several employees fell ill. 

    One warehouse employee in Los Angeles said a screening line wrapped around the facility one day. After the thermal cameras were installed, there was no more line as the process was streamlined. 

    Shown below, here is the alleged thermal cameras Amazon has deployed at some locations. It appears Infrared Cameras Inc in Texas powers the device.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Amazon has also been distributing masks and gloves to employees while disinfecting workstations. Other reports note the company is developing a testing lab to screen its employees for COVID-19.

    We’ve noted before the virus has been a cover for corporate America to increase surveillance in the workplace. Now Big Brother Bezos is deploying advanced optical sensors to monitor employees’ health. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 22:55

  • Here Is The Full Explanation Behind Today's Unprecedented Negative Oil Price
    Here Is The Full Explanation Behind Today’s Unprecedented Negative Oil Price

    Courtesy of IHSMarkit’s energy vice president Roger Diwan

    How did you end up with negative oil prices today?  This happens when a physical futures contract find no buyers close to or at expiry. 

    Let me explain what that means:

    A physical contract such as the NYMEX WTI has a delivery point at Cushing, OK, & date, in this occurrence May.  So people who hold the contract at the end of the trading window have to take physical delivery of the oil they bought on the futures market.  This is very rare.

    It means that in the last few days of the futures trading cycle, (which is tomorrow for this one) speculative or paper futures positions start rolling over to the next contract. This is normally a pretty undramatic affair.

    What is happening today is trades or speculators who had bought the contract are finding themselves unable to resell it, and have no storage booked to get delivered the crude in Cushing, OK, where the delivery is specified in the contract.

    This means that all the storage in Cushing is booked, and there is no price they can pay to store it, or they are totally inexperienced in this game and are caught holding a contract they did not understand the full physical aspect of as the time clock expires.

    The contract roll and liquidity crunch that made the extreme sell-off today possible but it DOESN’T necessarily represent futures market conditions: NYMEX June settled today at $21.13.

    The June contract is not out of the woods either: today’s action indicate that physical oil markets at Cushing are not in good shape and that storage is getting very full.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A decline of over 15% in the June contract price points to real worries that the physical stress will continue to reverberate, and will force a lot more production shutdowns during May than the ones announced so far.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So today negative prices are the reflection of dire market conditions for producers, with the hope that demand restart before the middle of May and that the June contract does not face the same fate.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 22:40

  • Mike Krieger: "The Whole System Is Breaking Down Under Its Own Weight"
    Mike Krieger: “The Whole System Is Breaking Down Under Its Own Weight”

    Authored by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    We find ourselves at a moment where the financial and political systems that have dominated for decades are failing in a spectacular and irredeemable fashion. Those who pull the levers are (as usual) attempting to take advantage of the situation by rapaciously snatching and consolidating more wealth and power, while leaving the general public to rot. When faced with such a historic moment, one should assume a certain degree of responsibility to make sure the next paradigm ends up better than the one we’re leaving. If we fail to think deeply about an improved vision and framework for the future, someone else will do it for us.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From my perspective, humanity remains stuck within antiquated paradigms that generally function via predatory and authoritarian structures. We’ve been taught — and have largely accepted — that the really important decisions must be handled in a centralized manner by small groups of technocrats and oligarchs. As a result, we basically live within feudal constructs cleverly surrounded by entrenched myths of democracy and self-government. We’d prefer to be lazy rather than take any responsibility for the state of the world.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We’re now at a point where simply recognizing current structures as predatory and authoritarian isn’t good enough. We require a distinct and superior political philosophy that can appeal to others likewise extremely dissatisfied with the status quo. My belief is humanity’s next paradigm should swing heavily in the direction of decentralization and localism.

    Decentralization and localism aren’t exactly the same, but can play well together and offer a new path forward. The simplest way to describe decentralization to Americans is to look at the political framework laid out in the U.S. Constitution.

    As discussed in the 2018 piece, The Road to 2025 (Part 4) – A Very Bright Future If We Demand It:

    At the federal level, a separation of powers between the three branches of government: the legislative, the executive and the judicial was a key component of the Constitution. The specific purpose here was to prevent an accumulation of excessive centralized power within a specific area of government…

    Beyond a separation of powers at the federal level, the founding founders made sure that the various states had tremendous independent governance authority in their own right in order to further their objective of decentralized political power.

    Localism takes these Constitutional ideas of political decentralization and pushes them further, by viewing the municipality or county as the most ethical and logical seat of self-governance. The basic idea, which I tend to agree with, is that genuine self-government does not scale well. A one-size fits all approach to governance not only ends up making everyone unhappy, it also entrenches a self-serving political and oligarchical class at the top of a superstate which makes big decisions for tens, if not hundreds of millions, with little accountability or oversight. This is pretty much how the world functions today.

    While localism implies relative political decentralization, decentralization is not always localism. One of the best examples of this can be found in bitcoin. Unlike traditional monetary policy, which is handled in a topdown manner by a tiny group of unelected technocrats working on behalf of Wall Street, there’s no bitcoin politburo. There’s no CEO, there’s no individual or organization to call or pressure to dramatically change things out of desire or political expediency. The protocol is specifically designed to prevent that. It’s designed to operate in a way that makes all sorts of people uncomfortable because they’re used to someone “being in control.” We’ve been taught that centralization works well, but the reality is political and economic centralization concentrates power, makes the public lazy and ultimately winds up in a state of authoritarian feudalism.

    Bitcoin also demonstrates how decentralization and localism, though not quite the same, can complement each another well in an interconnected planet. Imagine a world where governance is largely occurring at a local level, but global trade remains desirable. You’d want a politically neutral, decentralized and permissionless money to conduct such transactions. Similarly, a free and decentralized internet allows the same sort of thing in the realm of communications. Regions that can’t grow coffee will still want coffee, and people in New York will still want to chat with people in Barcelona. Decentralized systems allow for the best of both worlds — localism combined with continued global interconnectedness.

    The big question all of us should be asking ourselves right now is: When should small groups of people be making extremely important decisions for the masses? My answer would be almost never, yet that’s the world most of us live in irrespective of which nation-state we call home.

    The pendulum has swung so far in the direction of centralization, oligarchy and authoritarianism that the whole thing is breaking down down under its own weight.

    Those in charge are doing everything possible to keep it going in that same direction, but we can’t let that happen. What we need is a new era defined by decentralization and localism.

    *  *  *

    For more, see my 5-part series on localism.

    Liberty Blitzkrieg is an ad-free website. If you enjoyed this post and my work in general, visit the Support Page where you can donate and contribute to my efforts.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 22:35

  • Trump Temporarily Suspends All Immigration Into The United States
    Trump Temporarily Suspends All Immigration Into The United States

    In a stunning turn of events, late on Monday, president Trump tweeted that “In light of the attack from the Invisible Enemy, as well as the need to protect the jobs of our GREAT American Citizens, I will be signing an Executive Order to temporarily suspend immigration into the United States!”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump did not offer specifics, such as the time frame or the scope of who would be affected.

    As some noted, Trump’s decision to escalate the US response to the coronacrisis is at odds with his desire to rush in reopening the country:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And while we wait for more details, we wonder if this executive order will be followed by Trump canceling the November elections.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 22:16

  • Futures Whipsaw After Conflicting Reports That NKorea's Kim Is In Critical Condition
    Futures Whipsaw After Conflicting Reports That NKorea’s Kim Is In Critical Condition

    Update (2252ET): Futures rebounded sharply after South Korea’s Yonhap refuted reports that Kim Jong Un is seriously ill.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Update (2240ET): Bloomberg is now reporting that Kim is in a ‘critical state,’ according to a US official speaking on condition of anonymity.

    US officials are now studying the North Korean line of succession.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    S&P futures are sliding on the reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Update (2215ET): NBC’s Katy Tur was quick to respond to being scooped by CNN and tweeted the following:

    “@KatyTurNBC

    🚨 North Korean leader Kim Jong Un is brain dead, according to two US officials. He recently had cardiac surgery and slipped into a coma, according to one US current and one former US official.

    @NBCNews confirms and adds to CNN scoop from me, @ckubeNBC @carolelee”

    Only to delete it shortly after:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    South Korea’s KOSPI stock market index and the Won are tumbling as uncertainty grows over the health of their northern neighbor’s leader.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Earlier headlines from Daily NK – a website run mostly by North Korean defectors – reported that North Korean leader Kim Jong Un recently had cardiovascular surgical procedure and is now mostly recovered, citing unidentified sources inside the isolated state saying Kim is recovering at a villa in the Mount Kumgang resort county of Hyangsan on the east coast after getting the procedure on April 12 at a hospital there.

    However, CNN  has upped the ante and reported that the US is monitoring intelligence that North Korea’s leader, Kim Jong Un, is in grave danger after a surgery, according to a US official with direct knowledge.

    Kim last appeared in North Korean state media on April 11. April 15 – North Korea’s most important holiday, the anniversary of the birth of the country’s founding father, Kim Il Sung – came and went without any official mention of Kim Jong Un’s movements or explanation of his absence.

    CNN notes that Kim Jong Il’s absence from a parade celebrating North Korea’s 60th anniversary in 2008 was followed by rumblings that he was in poor health.

    So who to believe – “mostly recovered” from NK defectors or “in grave danger” from CNN’s intel sources.

    As Seoul Bureau Chief for VOA, William Gallo tweeted:

    Bottom line: there is a hell of a difference between “US officials think Kim Jong Un is in grave danger” and “US officials have read unconfirmed media reports about Kim Jong Un being in grave danger.” We need to know which this is.

    The market for now appears to be erring on the side of CNN’s warnings as stocks tumble…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And Korea’s Won hits a two-week low…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We wonder, of course, if President Trump will send Kim a “Get Well Soon” card (and we note that Kim Jong Un is only ~36. His father lived to be 82).

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 22:11

  • Something Impossible Just Happened: A CLO Failed Its AAA Overcollateralization Test
    Something Impossible Just Happened: A CLO Failed Its AAA Overcollateralization Test

    Over the weekend, we reported that in its quest to bailout the richest Americans and the country’s financial system, the Fed unleashed an unprecedented array of actions meant to backstop capital markets, going so far as buying investment grade, high yield bonds and even AAA-rated CLO bonds.

    However, as we warned, it won’t be enough, for two reasons: first, recall that the expanded Term Asset-Backed Securities Loan Facility (TALF) announced by the Fed last Thursday only buys AAA-rated bonds of CLOs, which after the coming tsunami of CLO downgrades is complete, will not only collapse in nominal size but will mean that any further attempts to stabilize the CLO space will require yet another Fed backstop of even riskier – i.e., rated AA and lower – structured products.

    The second reason – one which Bloomberg called a “bigger and more ominous force at work that has investors bracing for the kind of pain they’ve never experienced in the decades that the [CLO] market has existed” – is that late on Friday, in the most draconian and widespread ratings action since the financial crisis, Moody’s warned it may cut the ratings on $22 billion of U.S. collateralized loan obligations – a fifth of all such bonds it grades – as a result of the collapse in cash flows due to the Covid-19 pandemic.

    The ratings agency took action on 859 bonds from 358 CLOs that package leveraged loans into securities of varying degrees of risk and return. The step – which according to Bloomberg affects about 19% of Moody’s-rated CLOs that purchase broadly syndicated loans – comes as the underlying debt gets downgraded at a record pace.

    The action followed a report by Moodys earlier in the week in which it reported that its “B3 Negative and lower list” soared to its highest tally ever — 311 companies. That tops a former peak of 291 companies, reached during the credit crisis of 2009 and the commodity-related downturn in April 2016. At 20.7% of the total rated spec-grade population, the list also shot up above its long-term average of 14.8%, and closing in on its all-time high of 26.1%. This spike is the result of the confluence of a coronavirus outbreak, plunging oil prices, and mounting recessionary conditions, which created severe and extensive credit shocks across many sectors, regions and markets, the effects of which are unprecedented.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And with the underlying bonds set to suffer an unprecedented collapse in solvency, it is only a matter of time before the products where they are packaged are also hammered. Products such as CLOs.

    Today, picking up on this growing risk of widespread impairments across the CLO deal stack, Bloomberg echoes what we said, namely that credit ratings on risky corporate loans that were stuffed into the CLOs “are being downgraded at a pace so frenetic that it threatens to overwhelm safeguards that were put in place to ensure the securities’ financial strength.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And “if that happens” Bloomberg continues, “the firms that manage the CLOs will be forced to dump under-performing debt at fire-sale prices or suspend the cash payments they hand over to their investors.”

    It just happened.

    In yet another case of something that was previously deemed impossible becoming reality thanks to the Coronavirus depressionlike oil trading at a negative $14 per barrel – Bank of America’s Chris Flanagan writes that with some deals already reporting late March/early April data, we find that some deals are failing, not just the junior overcollateralization (OC) test but in one case, even the AAA/AA OC test!

    According to Flanagan, this will be the likely be the first “CLO 2.0” deal failing the senior most OC test; as a reminder, not even during the financial crisis were the supersafe AAA tranches impaired. This time it took just a few weeks for the cash flow collapse to impair the very top of the stack!

    The CLO deal in question is JFINC152, where downgrades have sent the reported CCC percentage to 19%, up 9%, and the result is that every single test cushion is now showing impaired results, from BB (-4.7%) all the way to AA (-0.6%).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Those seeking the reason for this unprecedented development will find it in the dramatic deterioration of CLO credit ratings: for the deals that failed any one of the tests, the increase in CCC is almost 2x over the past month, BofA notes adding that the lack of reinvestment flexibility for some of the transactions as the deals were post the RP period implied managers could not take advantage of the volatile loan market condition in March.

    Looking at the past month, since March, S&P and Fitch have placed around 100 tranches on negative watch. The vast majority of these deals were initially rated BB/B and there are 8 IG-rated tranches (mostly BBB). BBB bonds continue to face a high risk of downgrade in the near term considering the increasing CCC share and the recent uptick in defaults. According to an analysis by S&P, should CCC’s increase to 18%, defaults to 5% and OC declines of 2pts, around 46% of BBB bonds could be downgraded to Non-IG.

    This has important ramifications for both bondholders and investors as many deal documents initiate a restricted trading condition if any IG-rated bond is downgraded. This will further limit manager’s ability to trade in/out of loans.

    Additionally, the surging share of CCC downgrades has caused many deals to have lower OC ratios as a result of CCC excess and/or par burn as managers traded out of lower priced/lower rated loans. BofA currently estimates that around 17-19% (and counting) of loans in CLOs have been downgraded by both Moody’s and S&P since February, and many more downgrades are coming. Currently, the share of CCC+/lower rated issuers is estimated to be 10.5% and the share of Caa1/lower rated loans is estimated to be around 8.5% across CLO portfolios (assuming loans with a negative watch have been downgraded by a notch lower).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    BofA also highlights the average price across each rating cohort currently (after adjusting for downgrades). There has been an increased dispersion between high/low quality names with B+/BB issuers trading around $90 and CCC issuers, around $60. As a result, to swap from a CCC name into a B or higher rated asset still implies taking a $25 hit to par.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Next, looking at updated CCC concentrations, BofA estimates that as many as 20-30% of deals are now potentially breaching their OC tests (assuming a $40-50 price for excess CCC assets and based off March portfolios). In some cases, the BB bonds may PIK as well. With April determination dates beginning and around the corner, managers have very less room/time to trade out of loans and cure these breaches.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking ahead, BofA thinks further OC breaches are likely to occur as more deals that make their payment in April report. With the estimated CCC share reaching 10.5%, roughly 20-30% of deals could breach their junior OC tests, and increasingly more deals will likely impair the AAA tranche as well – that’s where Japanese pensioners’ money is currently allocated an outcome that until just a few weeks ago was inconceivable.

    * * *

    With the safest tranches facing impairments, the riskiest – or equity – tranches are set for a historic wipeout. According to Bloomberg, analysts expect as many as one in three CLOs may soon have to limit payouts to holders of the equity portion. 

    The loan downgrades have come so fast that Stephen Ketchum of Sound Point Capital Management compared it to a spill “at the Daytona 500, where the cars are crashing into each other.” It’s a lot different, he said, than the 2008 financial crisis, which “was a slow-moving train wreck.”

    Another major difference between the financial crisis and now is that back in 2008, the CLO market emerged largely unscathed – especially the AAA tranches – an outcome which we now know will not happen. Corporate loans were far enough removed from the epicenter of the 2008 crisis – a housing bubble – to avoid much of the collateral damage and, besides, the CLO market back then was a fraction of its size today.

    Ironically, the strong track record, the lack of major CLO impairments, along with the fact that the securities provided juicy returns in an era of near-zero global rates; fueled a boom in demand over the past decade. The same boom will now lead to hundreds of billions in losses.

    Worse, it means that a key pillar of the credit market will be crushed for years: CLOs have been the biggest buyers in the $1.2 trillion leveraged loan market, helping fuel a surge in debt-fueled buyouts and other transactions.

    In sympathy with the broader market, prices on CLOs have recovered some in recent days with AAA securities recouping most of their declines since the selloff began largely thanks to the Fed’s promise to backstop the supersafe tranche. However, as cash flows plunge and as a flood of downgrades hit the underlying loans which then leads to even more AAA tests being missed, the entire CLO space is in for a very violent repricing and unless the Fed is prepared to backstop the entire $1.2 trillion market, the consequences – for both the loan and broader bond market – will be catastrophic, while the Fed ends up holding paper that in a few months will be insolvent, at which point the Congressional hearings why Powell bought worthless securities with freshly printed dollars will be the hottest thing on TV.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 21:58

  • Who Was Panic Selling Oil Today? Goldman Answers
    Who Was Panic Selling Oil Today? Goldman Answers

    In the annals of market history, April 20, 2020 will be forever remembered the day when, for the first time ever, the deliverable WTI future contract plunged 50%, 60% – the drop accelerating – then 70%, 80%, 90%, 99%, … and then the unthinkable happened: after the May WTI contract dropped to $0.00, meaning it was free to get delivery of oil, it proceeded to slide into negative territory – a never before seen event in market history – as oil producers were paying their customers to take delivery of physical oil in a world in which oil storage has essentially run out. 

    And so the price of oil tumbled, dropping further into negative territory, before finally stopping at -$40.32, the lowest price ever recorded for a barrel of WTI.

    In many ways, the move was a mirror image of what happened during the legendary Volkswagen short squeeze, when countless shorts found out there were not enough freely floating shares to cover all existing short positions, unleashing a scramble to buy shares at any price and avoid being the last man standing, as the alternative was – in theory – a stock price hitting infinity (it almost did: very briefly, Volkswagen became the world’s most valuable company destroying dozens of iconic shorts in the process and leading to the suicide of one of Germany’s richest people). Today’s move was similar, as many inexperienced traders suddenly realized that instead of an asset, oil had become a liability, having only hours to find a place where to receive delivery of physical barrels of oil, and failing to do that, finding a greater fool to dump the deliverable obligation to. Only it wasn’t so easy.

    As a result, a game of explosive hot potato (or rather highly flamable black gold) ensued around noon, when the deliverable WTI contract hit $10, its drop accelerating in an increasingly bidless market, before triggering hundreds of $0.01 stops, at which point oil plunged vertically, crashing $40 dollars in minutes.

    As Roger Diwan explained in further detail, “speculators found themselves unable to resell the WTI contract, and have no storage booked to get delivered the crude in Cushing, OK, where the delivery is specified in the contract. This means that all the storage in Cushing is booked, and there is no price they can pay to store it, or they are totally inexperienced in this game and are caught holding a contract they did not understand the full physical aspect of as the time clock expires.”

    So what happens now?

    Well, some stability appears to have been restored, because since its settlement close around -$37, May WTI has recovered all its losses for the day and was last trading just above $0.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But don’t count on the relative stability lasting into tomorrow’s contract expiration – or the next month – because as Goldman’s commodity strategist, Damien Courvalin, who first predicted one month ago that negative oil prices are coming for landlocked producers, warns of “potential further distress ahead of the settlement window” tomorrow for the May WTI contract.

    It gets worse from there because as we discussed earlier, the pain will then shift to the June contract, which expires on May 19:

    The June contract will then become the prompt contract until its expiration on May 19. While it has outperformed significantly today, down only $4.60 to $+20.43/bbl, it will nonetheless likely see downward pressure in coming weeks

    In other words, there will be more fireworks tomorrow for the May future, for the simple reason that there are likely still tens of thousands of maturing May contracts that need to find a literal home, which – with Cushing effectively full – is a problem, to wit:

    The May CME WTI contract expires tomorrow, April 21. Any holder of a long position going into settlement would then be obligated to take delivery of crude in Cushing during the month of May (either by transfer into a designated pipeline or storage facility or by in-tank transfer). This means that an investor long a WTI May contract would be forced to sell out of this position (at any price) before tomorrow’s settlement to avoid being stuck having to find room for barrels in the Cushing storage hub which will likely be completely full by then (it is 77% full as of last Friday with the last 2-week builds pointing to stock-out by the first week of May).

    Goldman then lists the following three reasons why the June future will be crushed next:

    1. the potential exit of spooked long retail investors given the violence of today’s move (and the negative carry incurred at each contract roll),
    2. the negative impact of investors rolling their long positions from the June to the July contract in early May (the USO rolls on May 5-8), and ultimately
    3. the still unresolved market surplus that will hit binding storage capacity in coming weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, here is Goldman’s answer to the question on everyone’s lips: who was left long heading into today’s record price drop, and who was selling at any price?

    Given the difficulty and costs of storing oil (even in normal times), investors typically never keep positions into expiration. The size of the long positions in May WTI had therefore already shrunk significantly as all the major commodity indices and ETFs rolled earlier this month into the June contract. Illustrating that point, the unprecedented collapse in May WTI prices occurred with only 100k contracts trading today, a tenth of the June contract volumes.

    In terms of holders, the surge in retail interest in recent weeks — as illustrated by the USO ETF which now represents 30% of the June WTI contract open interest — suggests that retail positions (in outright WTI contracts rather than systematically rolling products) were likely still long May WTI contracts into this week and now forced sellers (consistent with the sell-off accelerating in the 30 minutes ahead of the close and the sharp rebound that followed).

    And so it was once again the mom and pop daytraders and r/wallstreebets amateurs, who however have felt quite professional if not invincible, thanks to the Fed’s constant market manipulation and bailout out of every crash… but not in the commodity sector. It was they that suffered unprecedented losses having held on to a contract they did not understand, and without realizing that they faced not only a total wipe out, but a wipe out more than 100% of their invested capital, a privilege traditionally only reserves for short sellers.

    And while we agree with Goldman that retail was the biggest victim of today’s crash, we doubt it’s the only one, because if there is one thing this market has created – if not real value (sorry but rising nominal stock prices due to printing money is the opposite of value creation) – it is an army of professional money-managing idiots who think they are geniuses whenever they are not on CNBC declaring how brilliant they are. And in the next few days we will find out not only just how many of them were wiped out, but also the names of all those “pros” who at the end of the day were as clueless as 23-year-old reddit discussion board “traders.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 21:42

  • Uber Sticks Former Star Engineer With $180 Million Legal Bill After Google Ruling
    Uber Sticks Former Star Engineer With $180 Million Legal Bill After Google Ruling

    Uber says it will not be indemnifying former star engineer Anthony Levandowski for a $180 million legal award won against him by Google. The company instead claims that Levandowski’s guilty plea confirms he’s a liar and that he should not be entitled to have the company help with his legal fees.

    Levandowski was brought on in 2016 from Alphabet’s self-driving car program but Uber wound up firing him after the two companies went to war over trade secrets, according to Bloomberg.

    This year, Google won a contract-breach arbitration case against him and Levandowski agreed to plead guilty to trade-secret theft. He was driven into bankruptcy as a result. Levandowski had been counting on Uber’s promise for indemnification, but Uber now says they have no obligation to support him. 

    Instead, in a legal filing, the company said: “Levandowski secretly committed a crime by stealing trade secrets with the intent to use them at Uber. If Uber had known that, it never would’ve entered into any agreements with Levandowski.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sure. Because that’s not why you hire people directly from Google’s competing self-driving program, right?

    Levandowski’s lawyer claims that Uber is not allowed to renege on the indemnification because it vetting Levandowski before hiring him and know there was a reasonable chance he had taken information from Google. He claims Uber is trying to protect itself from an unfavorable legal outcome, and nothing more.

    “Uber’s assertion that Anthony did not disclose material information to Uber is false,” Levandowski’s lawyer said.

    Uber says Levandowski forfeited his indemnification when he asserted his 5th Amendment right and refused to testify. Levandowski will likely argue in the future that Uber was so eager to hire him, they offered to buy his $680 million in stock and looked the way when red flags arose during his vetting report. 

    Their vetting report on Levandowski showed he had “highly confidential Google proprietary information,” including source code, design files, engineering documents and software related to self-driving cars.

    Which is probably why they hired him in the first place…


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 21:35

  • "The Hit Is Huge": Colleges Brace For 'Fatal' Blow Of Next Fall As Face-To-Face Instruction Uncertain
    “The Hit Is Huge”: Colleges Brace For ‘Fatal’ Blow Of Next Fall As Face-To-Face Instruction Uncertain

    A viral post written by a veteran professor on Medium recently grabbed prospective students’ attention in saying provocatively: “This is a message to all high school seniors (and their parents). If you were planning to enroll in college next fall — don’t.”

    “No one knows whether colleges and universities will offer face-to-face instruction in the fall, or whether they will stay open if they do,” University of La Verne law professor Diane Klein wrote. “No one knows whether dorms and cafeterias will reopen, or whether team sports will practice and play.”

    It’s that simple. No one knows. Schools that decide to reopen may not be able to stay that way. A few may decide, soon, not even to try. Others may put off the decision for as long as possible — but you can make your decision now,” the veteran teacher said, making the case that it’s the worst time ever for families to make the massive financial commitment. After all, who wants to drop an initial $50K or more to potentially sit at home for Fall 2020 and take online classes?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Student sits with her belongings before returning home to Florida from Massachusetts for the rest of the semester, Getty Images.

    And it’s 100% accurate that colleges and universities are flying through the coronavirus economic ‘pause’ blindly, now slashing budgets for next year and in many instances notifying employees that drastic cuts are coming, including regarding salaries and staffing positions — possibly even reaching into faculty ranks.

    Colleges and universities across the nation are stuck in financial limbo at a moment that key staffing, faculty contracts, student recruiting, tuition and donor revenue-related decisions are typically made for next year, also as controversy erupts over refusal to refund student housing and campus activity fees. Crucially, endowment values have plunged along with markets.

    The $600 billion-plus higher education industry is expected to suffer effects of this Spring’s campus shutdowns at least through next Fall, given everything down to campus tours for potential recruits have been canceled, leaving open the crucial question of incoming levels of freshmen and vital tuition revenue for next year. And now it’s not a question of profitability, academic reputation or long-term growth, but of mere survival

    In a new report Bloomberg warns this week“Administrators across the nation increasingly fear their schools may not reopen for the fall semester.” This amid mass cancellations of everything from sports to summer programs and classes, to shuttering of on-campus facilities and student activities. It further details panicked institutions which were already struggling, now fearing amid coronavirus closures and ‘online only’ format, bracing for the “fatal” blow of next Fall, when students may opt to not return and wait things out. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The hit is huge,” Larry Ladd, a consultant with the Association of Governing Boards of Universities and Colleges, told Bloomberg. “They will have less financial cushion because that summer revenue is no longer is there.”

    Worse, high school guidance counselors and parents are well aware of this ‘state of limbo’ and don’t want to risk major investment in their entering college freshmen’s education when there may not be a Fall semester. Bloomberg continues

    “I would tell kids: Number one, the likelihood of having face-to-face classes in September is pretty darn small,” said Scott White, a retired guidance director for more than 20 years at Montclair High School in New Jersey. Referring to Covid-19’s risk to older people, he said: “You’re not going to get 65-year-old college professors going in.”

    Northwestern University is still making that tough call. “Our return to on-campus instruction in the summer or fall quarters is also not guaranteed,” the school’s president, Morton Schapiro, wrote in a letter Thursday. He said the decision to refund room-and-board payments and student fees for the spring had cost more than $25 million, and the school is facing more losses from endowment declines, increased financial aid and the cancellation of some on-campus programs.

    Another consultant said “empty dorms is what kills colleges” — precisely the state of things at institutions across the nation at least through summer. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Empty campus amid coronavirus lockdown: California State University, Northridge resembles a ghost town during lockdown. Image source: Danielle Tranter/Medium.com

    While wealthier schools such as Harvard, Brown and Princeton are expected to weather the storm with greater ease, with some already offering students housing credit and prorated refunds conditioned in their return to campus, the crisis has hit student housing managers and investors hard for the majority of campuses in which the university doesn’t own its own student housing. Some students and families are already suing to get tuition and campus fee refunds.

    Needless to say this is completely uncharted territory for institutions which of necessity make all their major funding, staffing, and financial decisions some six months before the Fall opening and start of the semester. Like other sectors of the US economy, universities are bracing for the avalanche of debt problems sure to roll down hill into the still very much up-in-the-air Fall semester.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 21:15

  • Central Banks Have Pumped An Annualized $23.4 Trillion Into The Financial System
    Central Banks Have Pumped An Annualized $23.4 Trillion Into The Financial System

    You know there is a lot of confusion in the market when even fundamental, deep-value investing bloggers legends like Howard Marks now flip-flop every single week (accompanied by one investor letter after another) from bearish to bullish and back again, as if so much has changed besides, you know, the stock market:

    But while Marks may simply be talking both sides of his book – see “Howard Marks’s Oaktree Seeks $15 Billion for Biggest Distress Fund Ever“, the vast majority of traders have legitimately lost the plot, and merely follow momentum or whatever the algos are doing at any given moment.

    As Deutsche Bank’s Jim Reid explains, the most confusing thing in the market at the moment is the huge dichotomy between what will possibly be one of the worst synchroniszd global economic slumps in history against what is undoubtedly the largest ever intervention. On the second point, DB’s Alan Ruskin showed that global central bank balance sheet expansion has already spiked by $2.7 trillion since early March which now comfortably eclipses the full peak 12-month increase seen during the GFC (under $2.5tn). This is the same amount as the annual total GDP of either the UK or French economies. Two thirds of this increase has come from the Fed so far.

    Again using Reid’s back of the envelope calculations, “given that the global economy is worth around $80 trillion dollars annually and that the IMF last week said it would fall -3% in 2020 (in real terms under the base case) that’s potentially ‘only’ $2.4 trillion of lost activity. Relative to the pre-covid trend they forecast $9 trillion of global GDP losses by the end of 2021.” And even if one thinks these numbers are a bit low, when central banks have so far pumped in an annualized $23.4 trillion into the financial system you can see how it’s hard to get a feel for where markets can go, besides eventually becoming a replica of the world’s best performing market, of course – that of Venezuela.

    And while it unlikely that central banks will keep up that pace of liquidity injections unless economies fall even further but could you really have a situation in 1-2 months’ time where economies are still struggling to fully open and yet equity markets are back at record highs? While Reid doesn’t think so one certainly can’t rule it out given the ginormous liquidity injections. As he concludes “crazy times and we haven’t even mentioned the government injections.”

    And speaking of Alan Ruskin, here is why the German bank’s macro strategist said that “Global QE is already on another scale.

    By almost any metric Central bank balance sheet expansion in the last few weeks has already exceeded anything seen in the 2008/9 crisis period. In the last six weeks alone, G10 Central banks have expanded their collective balance sheet by $2.7 trillion, and 2/3rds of this comes from the Fed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Fed has stepped up into a role sometimes seen by China, in its credit policies, and sheer scale of support.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The steep ascent of Central Bank balance sheets has of course been more than matched by the collapse in the global economy. Unprecedented QE policy accommodation will then build substantially from here, which warrants asking all the usual questions about what this might reap? The answers unfortunately belie simplicity. QE delivers very different results depending on circumstance, but in general, the marginal risk appetite gains from QE will wane with time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Fed appears to be working under the premise that in past crises of historic proportion, there are almost no occasions when the monetary authorities are remembered and accused of doing too much. So why not load the bazooka with the kitchen sink and go nuclear?

    Theoretical models typically would see large scale QE as negative for a currency, but in this instance, the initial positive QE impact on risk (helping EM and commodity currencies) but also seen as an alternative to negative rates, is a mixed bag for the USD, enough to leave the USD choppy at elevated levels.

    The experience during and after the 2008 crisis, is that markets are apt to initially support a major currency backed by an aggressive Central bank, especially when the economic morass that provoked the easing is universal. There is currently a brief window for many Central Banks to pursue QE, including EM Central Banks precisely because everyone else is doing it.

    If persistent QE looks like the Central Bank is out of ideas, and, especially where the actions are enacted by a Central bank in isolation, QE will be greeted with a weaker currency. The EUR and JPY have periodically suffered this fate, and Japanization will become a more widespread phenomena in this downturn.

    And here is why readers should be loading up on every bar of physical gold they can find, because once it becomes clear to everyone what the endgame is, and everyone demands delivery of their physical gold, the move in gold will be similar to what we saw in oil today, just in the opposite direction.

    … when QE looks more obviously a cover for unsustainable fiscal policies and especially if the primary function appears to be long standing debt monetization, currencies will suffer. This is a story for 6 months and beyond, and is certainly relevant for EM countries, but may also be important for countries like the US, where fiscal discipline was abandoned before the crisis.

    Finally, when even Deutsche Bank tells you to buy gold…

    “Gold is a natural beneficiary of this latter stage QE, and looks to be already anticipating this outcome.

    … then it’s clearly time, amusing “who is the biggest goldbug sideshows” such as this one…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … notwithstanding.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 20:55

  • "Tourist Go Home" – Tensions Soar As Hawaiians Urge Non-Residents To "Leave"
    “Tourist Go Home” – Tensions Soar As Hawaiians Urge Non-Residents To “Leave”

    Hawaiians are becoming increasingly angry, not because the tourism industry has collapsed, and 37% of the labor force has just filed for unemployment, but mostly because US mainlanders, motivated by super discounted flights and hotel rooms, continue to pour into the various Hawaiian Islands during the pandemic

    Troy Kane, a local on Oahu, who was interviewed by The Guardian, said residents are abiding by the stay-at-home orders as cases and deaths surge. He points out tourists on the island are ignoring social distancing rules and risk spreading the virus to locals.

    “Locals are following the orders, staying home. But there are people, who are clearly tourists, here by the dozens,” said Kane. “They’re still out here, still in groups of seven or more, still coming, and that’s a problem.”

    The Guardian says, “$100 airfares” are enticing people in quarantine in the continental US to vacation in Hawaii. Last week, nearly 800 tourists arrived on the islands. The influx triggered a nerve among locals and officials who argue tourists need to leave. 

    As of Monday, 580 cases and ten deaths have been confirmed across the Hawaiian Islands. About 35 cases have been non-residents.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kane is a neighborhood board member and community representative of Waimanalo and says the native Hawaiian and Micronesian populations on the islands are at higher risk of contracting the disease. He worries for his community and family that tourists are blatantly disregarding the public health order. 

    “People will always see this place as their playground. And in this moment, as a Native Hawaiian, this is very reflective of many historical circumstances, where people from outside of the islands have come in and caused real harm to the native population. It’s not always with the direct intent to do so, but the impacts, especially on Hawaiian people, are very real,” he said.

    “If you take our history, it tells us that we are not very well protected.”

    Hawaiians last month protested tourists arriving at the Maui airport. Some held signs that said: “TOURIST GO HOME,” “LEAVE OUR AINA!,” “TIME TO GO,” and “GO HOME.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maui residents protesting tourist near airport on March 21. h/t Star-Advertiser

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protester near airport on March 21. h/t Star-Advertiser

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protesters near Maui airport on March 21. h/t Star-Advertiser

    Josh Masslon, a Maui-based ICU nurse, said the healthcare system on the islands does not have enough capacity to handle a virus outbreak. 

    “It’s beyond frustrating,” said Masslon. “We cannot handle an outbreak with our resident population alone.”

    Masslon said he’s called the police on tourists for breaking the public health order.

    So, at what point do Hawaiians, fed up with ignorant tourists breaking social distancing rules and risk infecting the local community, take the law into their own hands and start blocking airport exits, preventing new arrivals from entering?


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 20:35

  • Exposing Harvard's Chinese Agent Charles Lieber's "Virus Transmitters"
    Exposing Harvard’s Chinese Agent Charles Lieber’s “Virus Transmitters”

    Via Great Game India,

    Dr. Charles Lieber is a nano-scientist at Harvard University. He was recently charged by the American authorities for secretly being a Chinese agent.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, there is a mystery surrounding the nature of his work. It is said he was recruited for advanced research into nanowire-batteries. But investigation by GreatGameIndia has shown that Lieber was infact working on virus transmitters that could penetrate cell membranes without affecting the intercellular functions and even measure activities inside heart cells and muscle fibers.

    Chinese Agent Charles Lieber

    Dr. Charles Leiber is a nano-scientist at Harvard University who also serves as a chair for Harvard’s Department of Chemistry and Chemical Biology. He was arrested by the U.S. Department of Defense in January for lying about his association with China’s Thousand Talent Program. It is basically a recruitment plan which seeks to lure Chinese overseas talent and foreign experts to bring their knowledge and experience to China and in return, reward individuals for stealing proprietary information.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chinese Agent Dr. Charles Lieber

    According to the charging documents, Lieber was a contractual participant of the program and was paid $50,000 monthly, along with $158,000 in living expenses and $1.74 million to set up a research lab at Wuhan University. The fact that Lieber kept his association with the Chinese a secret put his integrity in question as well as financial conflicts of interest, including financial support from foreign governments or foreign entities.

    Nanowire-Batteries – a Smokescreen?

    What’s more concerning is that the affidavit released by the federal prosecutors states that Leiber signed an agreement between Harvard and Wuhan Insitute of Technology. According to the affidavit, the purpose of the agreement was to “carry out advanced research and development of nanowire-based lithium-ion batteries with high performance for electric vehicles.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Charles Lieber at Wuhan Institute of Technology in 2011

    However, things don’t add up since the focus of Leiber’s research has never been about nanowire batteries. One nanoscientist and former student of Lieber’s says: “I have never seen Charlie working on batteries or nanowire batteries.” In fact, in all his research papers and patents, there is no mention of “batteries” or “vehicles”.

    Although Lieber was released a day later on a $1 million bond, the question remains what exactly was the nature of Leiber’s research.

    Leiber and his ‘Virus Transmitters’

    Dr. Leiber joined Harvard in 1991. In his early days at the university, he made great strides in the field by growing nanowires in a flask. Researchers before Leiber were already creating wire-like structures with the help of semiconductors, metals and other materials. However, their approach would be quite expensive and would need clean-room facilities like the ones used by computer chip-makers.

    In contrast, Lieber could create nanostructures using nothing but simple and inexpensive chemical techniques. He even went a step further to show how these nanowires could be used as transistors, complex logic circuits, data storage devices, and even sensors.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A V-shaped silicon nanowire is attached to bimetal connectors that lift the entire structure up out of the horizontal plane on which it is made. B.Tian and C.M. Lieber, Harvard University

    In 2001, Harvard Magazine published a report that discussed Leiber and his team’s research into what was termed as ‘Liquid Computing’. The report mentioned how Leiber was at the forefront solving silicon-based microelectronics industry’s greatest challenge – making silicon chips smaller and smaller.

    Leiber noted that “continued shrinkage ultimately becomes problematic in terms of just how one achieves [it].” Instead, he created tiny logic circuits and memory – the two main components of a computer – using nanowires. And these circuits were really tiny, some of which just a few atoms across!

    Ten years later, Leiber created a transistor so small it can be used to penetrate cell membranes and probe their interiors, without affecting the intercellular functions. The bio-compatible transistor – the size of a virus – can not only measure activities inside a neuron but also heart cells and muscle fibers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Charles Lieber created a transistor so small it can be used to penetrate cell membranes and probe their interiors, without disrupting function. The transistor (yellow) sits near the bend in a hairpin-shaped, lipid-coated silicon nanowire. Its scale is similar to that of intra-cellular structures such as organelles (pink and blue orbs) and actin filaments (pink strand). B.Tian and C.M. Lieber, Harvard University

    In 2017, Leiber and his team successfully created flexible 3D nanowires mesh that can inject into the brain or retina of an animal, attach itself to the neurons and monitor electrical signals between the cells.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Once the nanowire has been lifted up, it can penetrate three-dimensional structures such as cells. B.Tian and C.M. Lieber, Harvard University

    It’s no surprise the Chinese officials were quick to get him onboard considering he’s the brightest brain when it comes to nanotechnology. Not only his research would have made China an important player in this futuristic technology but it would also be a be a step forward towards China’s stated goal of Biological Dominance.

    Nanotech in the Battlefield

    The importance of nanotechnology in advanced warfare can be understood from the fact that the United States’ Department of Defense (DoD) is one of the largest supporters of nanotechnology research. They have funded hundreds of millions of dollars into various research related to nanoelectronics and nanomaterials.

    The technology could help create nanosensors and nanocoatings that military could use to protect soldiers against chemical and biological attacks. The fact that nanosensors can detect microscopic quantities of chemicals means it can be used as an effective early warning system against chemical warfare agents such as nerve agents and blood agents.

    One can see why Charles Lieber’s secret association with the Chinese institutes and universities and his expertise in nanotechnology could pose a serious threat. Lieber lied about his involvement with the Thousand Talents Plan and affiliation with the Wuhan Institute of Technology and that makes him no less than a Chinese biowarfare agent.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 20:15

  • Cancellation Wave Continues, China Leasing Firm Scraps Boeing 737 MAX Order
    Cancellation Wave Continues, China Leasing Firm Scraps Boeing 737 MAX Order

    As thousands of Boeing employees head back to work in the Puget Sound region over the last week, the Washington-based aircraft manufacturer has noticed a string of recent cancellations of the grounded 737 MAX jet.  

    Last Tuesday (April 14), Boeing announced a total of 150 MAX cancellations in March, including 75 previously reported from Irish leasing company Avolon. Cancellations also came from other buyers, including 34 of 135 aircraft ordered by Brazil’s GOL.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now on Monday morning (April 20), China Development Bank Financial Leasing Co. (CDB) has joined the cancellation party, slashing 29 MAX planes from its order, worth about $2.9 billion, reported Bloomberg.

    The MAX jet has been grounded globally for a little more than a year after two deadly crashes in Indonesia and Ethiopia.

    “In light of evolving aviation market dynamics, we’ve been working together with Boeing over many months to re-calibrate our MAX order book to be in line with our long-term view of the market and related opportunities,” Xuedong Wang, chairman of CDB Financial unit CDB Aviation, said in a statement to the Hong Kong stock exchange Monday.

    The statement says CDB’s outstanding MAX order is now 70 after the adjustment. 

    The coronavirus pandemic coupled with MAX groundings, has crushed Boeing. CEO Dave Calhoun recently warned that the commercial jet market could take years to recover.

    Boeing published a statement on Monday outlining how it continues to partner with CDB amid challenging times.

    “As we work to return the 737 MAX to service, our focus remains on addressing our customers’ fleet needs while optimizing the delivery of the more than 4,000 airplanes in our 737 backlog,” it said.

    “As market conditions normalize, Boeing anticipates that lessors who have restructured or reduced their order books will continue to add MAX aircraft to their portfolios through sale-leaseback agreements with airlines,” Boeing said. “Longer term, we expect these lessors will again place orders for direct MAX purchases.”

    Boeing suspended MAX production in January, and it plans a phased restart by the end of April. We noted last month how the struggling company drew down a $13.8 billion revolver and is also seeking billions of dollars in bailouts from the US government.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Boeing shares are down several percent on Monday morning (April 20) following the news of more cancellation orders. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 19:55

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th April 2020

  • Cape Town Cops Fire Rubber Bullets, Teargas As South African Food Shortages Spark Riots, Looting
    Cape Town Cops Fire Rubber Bullets, Teargas As South African Food Shortages Spark Riots, Looting

    COVID-19 has now claimed over 1,000 lives across Africa, and is accelerating fast, with a total of 52 of Africa’s 54 countries having reported cases and the number of infection approaching 20,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an effort to control the spread of the deadly virus, which a report by the United Nations Economic Commission for Africa warned could lead to a death toll across Africa of 3.3 million people, authorities are instituting some of the world’s strictest lockdown rules.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the restrictions sales of non-essential items – including alcohol and cigarettes – have been banned, and four weeks into a 35-day shut down food supplies have virtually run out.

    One community leader in Cape Town has pleaded with South Africa’s leaders to combat food shortages now. Joanie Fredericks, of the Mitchells Plain township, said:

    “Mr President we are in the middle of a food crisis. It’s war out here.

    “People have broken into tuck shops. They have attacked people. The simple reason is because they are hungry.”

    And food shortages in South Africa, have created panic and, as The Sun reports, prompting rioting and looting across some of the most deprived sections of the city.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Those waiting for much-needed aid built barricades of burning tyres and fought running battles with similar scenes witnessed in Johannesburg and Port Elizabeth.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Police fired rubber bullets and teargas to disperse the mobs but local community leaders fear more outbreaks of violence are imminent.  Fredericks continued:

    “When we started out feeding people we started out with the very vulnerable, …the children, the disabled people and the pensioners.

    But we are way past that Mr President, we are past the stage of sending people away.”

    Pictures from Johannesburg also showed long queues of people formed at food distribution points (which makes sense since before the coronavirus struck, at least 20 million people were estimated to be in danger of acute food insecurity)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Previously, The Sun reported how nurses in South Africa were shot with rubber bullets after they protested abut working conditions amid the pandemic.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 02:45

  • Led By "The Science" Towards A Medical Despotism?
    Led By “The Science” Towards A Medical Despotism?

    Authored by Rob Slane via TheBlogMire.com,

    Having packed my TV in a box some 20 years ago (did I miss anything good?), I feel I have developed a certain immunity to some of the more blatant propaganda techniques waged upon the populace by the media and Government. On the occasions I do get to see them, I often find myself at a loss to know whether to laugh out loud at the absurdities, or weep that many will swallow them without question.

    My favourite recent example of this in the media is this piece here on the BBC (the Babylon Bee Corporation?), where they examine the sinister measures being taken by some of Europe’s more authoritarian leaders, asking whether they are using Covid-19 as an excuse to oppress their populations and increase their power. Be thankful, O ye readers of such happenings, that nothing like that could ever happen in free countries such as Britain, France and Italy. If there ever came a time in free and happy Britain where they rushed draconian legislation through Parliament without opposition, put the population under house arrest, sent the economy into a tailspin, and set the police on us in case we sit on park benches — Heaven forfend — be assured that it would all be entirely benevolent and for our own good.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    My favourite recent example from the Government was when I had the misfortune to listen to a clip from one of Dominic Raab’s regular evening stand-ups this week. He used the phrase — “We’re being led by the science. Led by the science” — so many times that I began to wonder whether the point was to lull us all into a trance. I think they were missing a trick, though. If they’d had some soothing harp music going on in the background, and got some nice, dreamy looking woman with hypnotic eyes and beautiful dulcet tones to say the words — “The science. The science. We’re being led by the science. We’re all in this together. Led by the science.” — why I reckon they could have lulled the whole population into gently falling asleep saying the words in ever-slower, ever more monotonous and drowsy tones. Mr Raab, however, didn’t quite cut it.

    When some people hear Governments using slogans like, “Led by the science,” the aura of scientists and especially Government-endorsed scientists seems to be sufficient to make them roll over like puppies being stroked gently on their bellies. When I hear such slogans, my propaganda antennae immediately goes on full alert, and I start to wonder what they’re actually up to.

    “Ah, so you’re anti science,” comes the taunt.

    “Not a bit of it,” says I. “I’m just aware that scientists are rarely in complete agreement, and that when Governments use such statements to justify their actions in this way, it probably means that we are going to come out of this more restricted and less free than we were before.”

    Because — whaddaya know? — whereas Mr Raab and co would have us believe that on Covid-19 there is something called “the science” and that there are people called “the scientists” who are all in agreement on “the science”, this is far from the truth. For example, these 12 extremely well qualified scientists do not agree with “the science” being followed by the likes of the British Government. Nor do these 10 extremely well qualified scientists. Oh and these 8 extremely well qualified scientists don’t either.

    What Mr Raab really means is scientists who agree with the Government (and in case you weren’t sure where you’d heard the expression before, I believe Mr Raab was quoting from Greta Thunberg’s Greatest Hits, which she used back in the day to promote her particular brand of panic-mongering ). Or perhaps more accurately, we should say scientists whose inaccurate predictions using flawed data were swallowed by the Government, subsequently used to justify landing us all into a mess of truly gargantuan proportions, and yet are now apparently the shepherd which will lead us out into the Promised Land. Well, perhaps not the Promised Land, but at least to the point where we can leave our houses and go for a walk, unmolested and without watching out for who might be watching us. It is not, therefore, Government led by science. Rather it is Government using approved scientists to do whatsoever they will.

    The great C.S. Lewis, with his remarkable foresight, saw the way all this was going as far back as 1958:

    “On just the same ground I dread government in the name of science. That is how tyrannies come in. In every age the men who want us under their thumb, if they have any sense, will put forward the particular pretension which the hopes and fears of that age render most potent. They ‘cash in’. It has been magic, it has been Christianity. Now it will certainly be science. Perhaps the real scientists may not think much of the tyrants’ ‘science’ — they didn’t think much of Hitler’s racial theories or Stalin’s biology. But they can be muzzled.”

    And indeed they are muzzled! For here we are in a situation where the science falsely so-called put forward by the likes of Imperial College, which relied on extremely scant and dubious data, is treated as the very Oracle of God by both Government and a compliant media, whilst the views put forth by the following extremely qualified people, are almost entirely ignored:

    • Dr Sucharit Bhakdi, former professor at the Johannes Gutenberg University in Mainz and head of the Institute for Medical Microbiology and Hygiene

    • Dr John Ioannidis, Professor of Medicine, of Health Research and Policy and of Biomedical Data Science, at Stanford University School of Medicine

    • Professor Knut Wittkowski, Senior Research Associate, Rockefeller University

    • Dr Alexander Kekulé, Chair for Medical Microbiology and Virology at Martin Luther University Halle-Wittenberg and Director of the Institute for Medical Microbiology at the University Hospital Halle

    • John Oxfordvirologist at Queen Mary, University of London

    • Dr Sunetra Gupta, Professor of Theoretical Epidemiology at the University of Oxford

    • Dr Pablo GoldschmidtProfessor of Molecular Pharmacology at the Université Pierre et Marie Curie in Paris.

    Why are their views ignored by the mainstream media? Firstly, because they do not fit the narrative set by the Government, which the likes of Mr Raab would have us believe is the only science in town and secondly, because they all state that huge decisions with enormous consequences have been taken on the basis of little or flawed data. Theirs is the kind of science that cannot be easily manipulated by Governments, which is why Governments are ignoring it. Again, Lewis foresaw this happening decades before it came to fruition:

    “Again, the new oligarchy must more and more base its claim to plan us on its claim to knowledge. If we are to be mothered, mother must know best. This means they must increasingly rely on the advice of scientists, till in the end the politicians proper become merely the scientists’ puppets. Technocracy is the form to which a planned society must tend. Now I dread specialists in power because they are specialists speaking outside their special subjects. Let scientists tell us about sciences. But government involves questions about the good for man, and justice, and what things are worth having at what price; and on these a scientific training gives a man’s opinion no added value. Let the doctor tell me I shall die unless I do so-and-so; but whether life is worth having on those terms is no more a question for him than for any other man.”

    It is not even, as some might suppose, merely a question of scientific opinion versus other scientific opinion. The original Imperial College model, followed by the British Government, was based on assumptions that were simply unknown and which could not have been known at that time. It was not, therefore, in anyway properly speaking scientific. For instance, whereas the original case-rate fatality was assumed to be about 3.4%, as Dr. John Lee points out:

    “In many examples, more complete data are now suggesting case-fatality rates of 0.4 per cent. My guess is that it will end up between 0.5 and 0.1 per cent, and probably nearer to the lower end of that.”

    Imagine crashing an economy and imposing what is effectively a police state, with all the concomitant evils that will lead to, in order to deal with an illness with a case-fatality rate not significantly greater than a bad flu season. Is that rational? Is that proportional? Is that being led by the science?

    Nor is there an scientific evidence whatsoever that placing the country under extreme lockdown measures proves any more effective than the more sensible measures taken by the likes of Japan and Sweden. Dr Lee again:

    “The real point is that there isn’t any direct evidence that what we are doing is actually affecting the peak. It is possible to make arguments that sound reasonable that a lockdown should affect the peak. And yet other places which are doing different things seem to have similarly shaped graphs. It is only an assumption that the lockdown is having a big effect on the virus spread, but this is not a known scientific fact. As far as I can see, Sweden, despite not having anywhere near as severe a lockdown as we have had, actually has a very similar curve to ours. And Sweden’s death rate per hundred thousand people is roughly half of ours at the moment. So it is not a given that what we are doing is either working or is having all the right effects.”

    Is he right? You can check for yourselves using the charts below, which show weekly Covid-19 reported deaths, both in terms of absolute numbers and per million population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I cannot see any correlation whatsoever between the death rates in those countries under full lockdown, and Sweden which is not.

    What is a given, however, is that the measures put in place by the British Government, and many other governments, which have allegedly been led by the science, are certain to lead to:

    • Massive job losses (US unemployment has apparently risen by 22 million in just over a month)

    • Far lower wages

    • A huge rise in poverty

    • A decline in general health

    • A lowering of life expectancy

    • A rise in mental health problems

    • A rise in the suicide rate

    • And many old people dying alone with no carers.

    We cannot be sure of the extent, but these are the sorts of things that happen in a depression, which is what we are very obviously entering.

    But my fear of where this leads to goes beyond even those possible scenarios. I have noticed in recent years an increasing propensity of those in charge to propose solutions to problems that are largely of their making. The noises I’m hearing from some of them suggest that this is what is taking shape, but on a larger scale than ever before. Being “led by the science” is turning out to be an unmitigated disaster, yet it will be “the science” — or Government-approved science — which will be proposed as the saviour. To stop such situations occurring again, we will be told that we must avail ourselves of more technology, more monitoring, more checks, more vaccines, more controls.

    Lewis has spoken twice — let him speak for the third time:

    “Under modern conditions any effective invitation to Hell will certainly appear in the guise of scientific planning—as Hitler’s regime in fact did. Every tyrant must begin by claiming to have what his victims respect and to give what they want. The majority in most countries respect science and want to be planned. And, therefore, almost by definition, if any man or group wishes to enslave us it will of course describe itself as ‘scientific planned democracy.’ All the more reason to look very carefully at anything which bears that label.”

    In our Godless, unrepentant, modern technological society, it’s bound to happen. But no thanks.

    Personally, I’d rather trust myself into the hands of the Living God than surrender to the Bill Gatesian Social Distancing Medical Despotism of compulsory vaccines, certifications and health apps that is starting to take shape around us. I urge those of you who hate where this is going as much as I do to do the same: repent; believe the Gospel; and pray like furies.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 02:00

  • Russia Sees COVID-19 Infections Explode In 8th Consecutive One-Day Record
    Russia Sees COVID-19 Infections Explode In 8th Consecutive One-Day Record

    In a deeply alarming development for a nation of almost 150 million people, Russia’s coronavirus cases have spiked by over 6,000 on Sunday, marking the 8th consecutive one-day record, the independent Moscow Times reports.

    The nationwide infection tally is now at 42,853 following Sunday’s reported record rise of 6,060 cases – the most ever in a 24-hour period

    This despite in the early months of the crisis Russia reporting far fewer infections than most western European countries, though Russian officials at times warned they believed the reality to be far worse. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The country has been on lockdown since March 30, with Russian Orthodox Easter services which fell on this weekend curtailed to smaller numbers of celebrants (one week later than the holiday in the West).

    “Orthodox priests have held Easter services in churches empty of parishioners because of restrictions imposed to block the spread of coronavirus,” AP reports.

    Coronavirus cases began exploding early this month, with even President Putin having been exposed by an infected Moscow doctor, but subsequently testing negative, but still working in isolation out of an abundance of caution.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russian Orthodox Easter service this weekend, via AP.

    Moscow Deputy mayor Anastasia Rakova over the weekend indicated city authorities in the country epicenter of Moscow will see the worst in the “difficult weeks” ahead. 

    “The peak in morbidity should arrive in the next two to three weeks,” she said.

    The AFP has cited claims by Russian health officials to have carried out some 1.7 million coronavirus tests, however, there’s also been questions over the sourcing and reliability of the tests. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/20/2020 – 01:00

  • "I've Never Encountered Anything Like This": China Stock Index Suffers Record Crash And Nobody Knows Why
    “I’ve Never Encountered Anything Like This”: China Stock Index Suffers Record Crash And Nobody Knows Why

    One of the consequences of centrally-planned markets is that – with no organic price discovery – “prices” are whatever some computer decides they are, and while major glitches have yet to hit US capital markets, Chinese stocks just suffered one of the biggest crashes in recent history, and nobody knows why.

    Moments after the open of trading on Monday, China’s CSI 300 Health Care Index fell as much as 17% according to data compiled by Bloomberg and confirmed by the Shanghai Stock Exchange. That’s even as none of the 29 stocks in the industry group lost more than 2%, indicating that this was most likely an ETF trade gone bananas and demonstrating to the world the unprecedented risk from relying entirely on passive investing when all links to underlying securities – let alone fundamentals – are severed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The crash, which was the biggest on record…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … sent the index to levels last seen in August of 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The broader CSI 300 Index, of which the Health Care Index is a constituent, and which comprises stocks listed in Shanghai and Shenzhen, was down 2.4% at 10:26 a.m. local time. Both the Shanghai and Shenzhen benchmarks were higher. Daily stock price moves on the mainland are capped at 10%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I‘ve never encountered anything like this in my entire career,” said Shenzhen Qianhai Daoyi Investment Holdings fund manager Lu Boliang. “It’s definitely a bad mistake, especially as it impacts various ETF trades — what will happen to those trades placed at misleading prices? No one knows as it’s never happened before.”

    What will happen is that some people will lose money, while those who are connected and wealthy to begin with, will see any “erroneous” trades unwound, and may even get some compensation for their troubles. Because that’s how centrally planned “markets” work.

    As Bloomberg reports, “the Shanghai Stock Exchange is looking into an apparent pricing error in a gauge of health-care shares which affected the broader index.”

    The bourse operator reportedly said it noticed the issue and is looking into its pricing, according to an employee in the media relations department. It wasn’t clear if Beijing had to pre-clear whatever the new price was “agreed” upon.

    Suggesting that China just had a mini version of August 2015, Bloomberg adds that at least 20 ETFs track the CSI 300 Index; “They are mostly listed in Hong Kong, mainland China, Taiwan and South Korea.”

    So in addition to exporting deadly viruses, China is now also in the business of exporting massive capital losses due to ETF “glitches.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:58

  • COVID-19, Smartphone Surveillance, And The State
    COVID-19, Smartphone Surveillance, And The State

    Authored by Kurt Nimmo via ‘Another Day In Empire’ blog,

    Total surveillance will negate political threats and our natural rights as well…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the state, there is one primary imperative – to remain in power at all cost. If this imperative is to be successful, the state must impose, by stealth or deception, a system capable of monitoring all individuals who may pose an immediate or future threat to its dominance. 

    The COVID-19 “crisis,” produced either deliberately or by an act of nature, provides the state with a nearly airtight pretext for the imposition of further surveillance of the public, in particular political adversaries. 

    The largely manufactured “war on terror” following the attacks of 9/11 produced the needed climate of suspicion and fear to make possible the implementation of the Patriot Act, “a domestic-surveillance wish list full of investigatory powers long sought by the FBI,” an agency that has for many decades served as a political police force, a fact made public during the Church Committee hearings in the mid-1970s. 

    Much of what we know about technological surveillance in the wake of 9/11 was gleaned from the revelations of Edward Snowden, a former NSA, and CIA employee. Snowden exposed a number of global surveillance programs, including PRISM and XKeyscore, the former in partnership with Microsoft, Apple, and Google

    “The story of the deliberate creation of the modern mass-surveillance state includes elements of Google’s surprising, and largely unknown, origin,” writes Jeff Nesbit for Quartz. 

    The NSA and CIA “research arms” funded “birds of a feather,” including Google, as part of an effort to track and trace individuals across the internet. Funding was provided in part by the National Science Foundation and Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency, also known as DARPA. 

    Human beings and like-minded groups who might pose a threat to national security can be uniquely identified online before they do harm. This explains why the intelligence community found [Google founders Sergey Brin and Larry Page’s] research efforts [into search engines] so appealing; prior to this time, the CIA largely used human intelligence efforts in the field to identify people and groups that might pose threats. The ability to track them virtually (in conjunction with efforts in the field) would change everything.

    During the development of the Google search engine, Brin was in contract with an employee of the defense contractor MITRE Corp, a corporation “leading research and development efforts for the NSA, CIA, US Air Force Research Laboratory and US Navy’s Space and Naval Warfare Systems Command [and] the CIA’s internal Research and Development department,” according to journalist Kit Klarenberg

    The advent of social media further increased efforts to profile, track, and trace individuals. “You don’t need to wear a tinfoil hat to believe that the CIA is using Facebook, Twitter, Google… and other social media to spy on people,” CBS News reported almost a decade ago. 

    The coronavirus provides an additional pretense to further the already deep reach of the surveillance state and its corporate partners. The national security state has graduated from the exaggerated threat of Muslim terrorists in caves to an invisible pathogen a corporate propaganda media has exploited to frighten an ill-informed public—and thus clear the way for the state to introduce new and more intrusive surveillance. 

    Google and Apple have teamed up to create a system that tracks and traces individuals allegedly exposed to the coronavirus. “The technology would rely on the Bluetooth signals that smartphones can both send out and receive,” NPR reports. 

    If a person tests positive for COVID-19, they could notify public health authorities through an app. Those public health apps would then alert anyone whose smartphones had come near the infected person’s phone in the prior 14 days… The companies insist that they will preserve smartphone users’ privacy. 

    Google, however, cannot be trusted to preserve and respect privacy. In September the corporation was ordered to pay $170 million fine after it knowingly and illegally harvested personal information from children on its YouTube platform. Prior to this, the Silicon Vally tech giant was caught sharing its users’ personal information without obtaining consent. In 2014, Google was fined $22.5 million for implementing a workaround that let it spy on the browsing histories of mobile clients.

    As Snowden recently pointed out, after COVID-19 runs its course the data collected will still be available to government and it will “use new causes like terrorist threats to justify continually gathering and analyzing people’s data.” 

    The expansion of the state’s surveillance network under the guise of protecting the American people from an invisible predator is being led by the son-in-law of President Trump, Jared Kushner. 

    The proposed national network could help determine which areas of the country can safely relax social-distancing rules and which should remain vigilant. But it would also represent a significant expansion of government use of individual patient data, forcing a new reckoning over privacy limits amid a national crisis,” Politico reports. 

    Health privacy laws already grant broad exceptions for national security purposes. But the prospect of compiling a national database of potentially sensitive health information has prompted concerns about its impact on civil liberties well after the coronavirus threat recedes, with some critics comparing it to the Patriot Act enacted after the 9/11 attacks.

    The state, however, is far less concerned with the health of the American people than it is with enhancing its control over them, in particular those involved in political activism outside predefined parameters set by the state and its political class. 

    If a total surveillance system is to be realized, people will be required to submit, not under duress or force but willingly and with open arms. Henry Kissinger declared after the LA riots that presented with the right crisis, people will turn to the state and demand protection. 

    “The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with this scenario, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their well-being granted to them by the World Government,” said the notorious Rockefeller operative.

    Kissinger made his remark during a Bilderberg meeting in Evian, France in 1992. 

    It is hardly surprising, then, that Kissinger used the exaggerated and media-hyped threat of a seasonal virus killing millions to argue in favor of world government. “Addressing the necessities of the moment must ultimately be coupled with a global collaborative vision and program,” Kissinger wrote for the Wall Street Journal. 

    This “global collaborative vision” of a one-world government cannot be effectively realized so long as there are political adversaries warning of lost liberty and the inevitability of totalitarianism inherent in the framework of so-called global governance. If allowed to be implemented, total surveillance will negate all political threats and our natural rights as well. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:55

  • China Outraged After Largest German Newspaper Accuses Beijing Of "Exporting" Coronavirus Pandemic, Demands €149 Billion In Damages
    China Outraged After Largest German Newspaper Accuses Beijing Of “Exporting” Coronavirus Pandemic, Demands €149 Billion In Damages

    Let’s see how the pro-China “fact checkers” blow up on this one.

    The editor-in-chief of Germany’s largest paper Bild on Thursday launched a full frontal attack on China’s communist president Xi Jinping for his regime’s failure to lying about the coronavirus outbreak and the massive human rights violations carried out by the Communist Party, and demanding no less that €149 billion in damages as a result of China’s actions.

    In an article titled “What China Owes Us”, Julian Reichelt, the prominent editor-in-chief of the Bild, wrote to Jinping that  “Your embassy in Berlin has addressed me in an open letter because we asked in our newspaper Bild whether China should pay for the massive economic damage the coronavirus is inflicting worldwide.”

    Addressing the Chinese president, the German editor wrote that, “You, your government and your scientists had to know long ago that coronavirus is highly infectious, but you left the world in the dark about it. Your top experts didn’t respond when Western researchers asked to know what was going on in Wuhan. You were too proud and too nationalistic to tell the truth, which you felt was a national disgrace.”

    Reichelt said that, “You rule by surveillance. You wouldn’t be president without surveillance. You monitor everything, every citizen, but you refuse to monitor the diseased wet markets in your country. You shut down every newspaper and website that is critical of your rule, but not the stalls where bat soup is sold. You are not only monitoring your people, you are endangering them – and with them, the rest of the world.”

    He continued with his bill of particulars, noting that “surveillance is a denial of freedom. And a nation that is not free, is not creative. A nation that is not innovative, does not invent anything. This is why you have made your country the world champion in intellectual property theft.

    “China enriches itself with the inventions of others, instead of inventing on its own,” Reichelt wrote. “The reason China does not innovate and invent is that you don’t let the young people in your country think freely. China’s greatest export hit (that nobody wanted to have, but which has nevertheless gone around the world) is coronavirus.”

    We can’t wait to read what Reichelt will have to say when it is confirmed that the “Wu Flu” escaped from the Wuhan Institute of Virology, a development we expect will take place any day. 

    The best-selling paper Bild calculated prior to Reichelt’s editorial that China owed Germany €149 billion for coronavirus damages, triggering the angry response from the Chinese embassy in Berlin. Bild said the compensation amounts to  €1,784  per person if Germany’s GDP drops by 4.2 percent. The Bild article was titled: “What China owes us.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In response, the spokeswoman for China’s embassy, Tao Lil, published an open letter to Bild in German on the embassy’s website stating that, “I followed your reporting on the corona pandemic in general and China’s alleged guilt in particular today. Apart from the fact that we consider it a pretty bad style to blame a country for a pandemic that is affecting the whole world and then to present an explicit account of alleged Chinese debts to Germany, the article ignores some essential facts.”

    She added that “We note that many countries now struggling with COVID-19 have had time to prepare for the cross-border spread of the pathogen after China reported its outbreak under IHR [World Health Organization] guidelines.”

    And in taking a page out of every liberal textbook, everywhere, having no credible defense, China’s embassy spokeswoman promptly changed subjects and said the article “stirs up xenophobia and nationalism.”

    So… accusing a government of a giant cover up – which we already know happened as China itself admitted when it silenced the Wuhan doctor who tried to bring the world’s attention to the plague ravaging his town only to be arrested and forecefully silenced before dying from the coronavirus – is now nothing more than an act of racism. Got it. Perhaps the next time the IRS comes knocking and demanding a “fairer share” of one’s income, the same “you are racist” excuse can be applied as well?

    Oh, and yes, the same line of questioning that got this site banned by the “ultra liberal” arbiters of all that is true and just in this world – and direct whose actions may have facilitates the deaths of thousands of people around the globe – was not lost on the Bild editor-in-chief, who cited last week’s Washington Post article reporting that, “your laboratories in Wuhan have been researching coronaviruses in bats, but without maintaining the highest safety standards. Why are your toxic laboratories not as secure as your prisons for political prisoners? Would you like to explain this to the grieving widows, daughters, sons, husbands, parents of corona victims all over the world?”

    We couldn’t have said it better ourselves, even if we did say it about 3 months earlier, for which we got the ultimate punishment from that paragon of free speech, Jack Dorsey.

    Reichelt concluded that, “In your country, your people are whispering about you. Your power is crumbling. You have created an inscrutable, non-transparent China. Before Corona, China was known as a surveillance state. Now, China is known as a surveillance state that infected the world with a deadly disease.That is your political legacy.”

    Bild’s full frontal attack on China may have been the trigger for everyone else to pile on, and on Saturday, President Donald Trump warned that China should face consequences if it was “knowingly responsible” for unleashing the coronavirus pandemic, especially if it involved open lies about the origin of the deadly virus: the country’s only maximum security Level 4 biolab, which as Nature wrote in February 2017 was tasked with “studying the world’s most dangerous pathogens” in which the highly respected scientific publication also warned about “worries surround the Chinese lab. The SARS virus has escaped from high-level containment facilities in Beijing multiple times.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Virologists read data on a container for viral samples at China’s first level-four biosafety lab at the Institute of Virology in Wuhan.

    Trump told reporters: “It could have been stopped in China before it started and it wasn’t, and the whole world is suffering because of it. “If it was a mistake, a mistake is a mistake. But if they were knowingly responsible, then there should be consequences.”

    We eagerly look forward to finding out just what those consequences are… not just for China, but for all those – such as Jack Dorsey and Twitter – who enabled this lie to be perpetuated for months.

    Trump concluded the Chinese were “embarrassed” and the question was whether what happened with the coronavirus was “a mistake that got out of control, or was it done deliberately?” All this happened just hours after this week the city of Wuhan, where the outbreak started, revised its number of fatalities by with a sudden 50% jump in the figure, confirming yet again that anything that comes out of China is a lie, and that all those who defend China’s position – for purely monetary pursuits even if it means the deaths of countless people – should be judged, if not in a just as corrupt legal system, then in a court of the people.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:40

  • Watch: Dramatic Footage Shows Chadian Military Jet 'Accidentally' Fires Missile At Senior Commander's Home
    Watch: Dramatic Footage Shows Chadian Military Jet ‘Accidentally’ Fires Missile At Senior Commander’s Home

    A missile was ‘accidentally’ fired from a Chadian military jet while sitting on the tarmac, preparing for an anti-jihadist mission in Chad. The missile struck a nearby house, killing five people, reported DefPost

    The incident occurred on Friday (April 17), involving a Russian-made Sukhoi Su-25 of the Chadian Air Force. Local media said the missile was fired from the warplane parked on the tarmac at the Adji Kossei airbase, bordering N’Djamena International Airport, an international airport serving N’Djamena, the capital city of Chad.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Local media said the blast destroyed the home of Mahamat Saleh Arim, deputy commander of the presidential guard and a close ally of President Idriss Deby Itno. Five people were reported dead. It was also reported that the missile struck several meters from the Chad headquarters of anti-jihadist Operation Barkhane, an operation that started in 2014 and is led by the French military to exterminate Islamist groups in Africa’s Sahel region. 

    “Following the accidental explosion of a rocket that occurred in the morning from a ground device of the Chadian Air Force, which caused several victims near the Kosseï Base, the French soldiers of the Barkhane force are immediately intervened in support of the Chadian security services to provide assistance to the victims. 

    Lifting, excavation and medical transport equipment, as well as several dozen Barkhane force personnel, including firefighters and medical personnel, were mobilized for rapid clearance of the affected area. Three wounded were taken into emergency care at the hospital of the French military base. The French Embassy in N’Djamena offers its deepest condolences to the families of the victims,” the French Embassy in N’Djamena wrote in an online statement

    The dramatic footage was caught on the airbase’s CCTV camera, shows the missile being fired from the Su-25. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In another tweet, the missile allegedly pierced through a French Army fuel truck, before hitting the home of the top military commander. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Joseph Dempsey, a defense and military analysis research associate at the International Institute for Strategic Studies, said if the missile did not go off course, it would have hit or at leased “crossed” French military assets. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “An investigation is underway to determine the circumstances of this incident,” said Youssouf Tom, public prosecutor at the N’Djamena High Court. 

    “The plane was taking off when the bomb broke loose, and hit a private residence in the city that houses soldiers’ families next to the airbase,” military personnel at the airbase told AFP. 

    The Chadian Air Force has a fleet of Russian-made Sukhoi jets that have been used to conduct aerial bombing raids against Boko Haram militants in the Lake Chad region.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:30

  • Young COVID-Positive Redditors Describe Agony Of Ongoing Symptoms Nearly Two Months After Getting Sick
    Young COVID-Positive Redditors Describe Agony Of Ongoing Symptoms Nearly Two Months After Getting Sick

    While COVID-19 mostly kills older people with underlying conditions, it can have devastating effects on the vast majority who survive the initial illness – including younger individuals.

    Based on what we know about this brand new disease, up to half of those who contract it may show no symptoms. Of those who become sick, effects range from no worse than the common cold, to ‘worst flu I’ve ever had,’ to requiring hospitalization and oxygen support, to death. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while many believe we need to just rip the band-aid off and achieve herd immunity with a de-facto global ‘chickenpox party,’ evidence is mounting that coronavirus may remain in the body for weeks after a patient is ‘cleared’ of the disease – with some experiencing a second stage of the disease, and others reporting the illness hitting them in waves.

    In South Korea, nearly 100 COVID-19 patients deemed ‘recovered’ had tested positive again, according to Jeong Eun-Kyeong, director of the Korean CDC, adding that the virus may have been reactivated rather than the patients being re-infected.”

    To that end, members of Reddit’s Covid 19 positive” forum – many of whom are younger, have been sharing their frustrating experiences as their bodies can’t seem to shake the virus.

    A few examples of this alarming trend in threads:

    And a few excerpts, mostly from the ‘7th week’ thread above:

    “I first became symptomatic on the 29th of February. I’m 30 years old and male. Have had 2 ER visits including a chest x-ray which was apparently clear. Cough comes and goes, absence of taste in mouth/metallic taste on tongue. Mild fever which has worsened this week. Starting to get incredibly weak. Had diarrhoea on and off since the start also. Lymph nodes are very sore and had shortness of breath feeling quite a lot too although my sats have normally been good.

    Today marks the 49th day (7 weeks) of being sick and whilst I have had a few days where I began to feel better, overall I don’t feel like I’m recovering.”

    And in reply:

    I’m on day 51. Still weak off and on through the day, still have gunk in my lungs. I cried last night over the kitchen sink because I’m so sick of this. My breathing has been not too bad for the last week, but I woke up this morning feeling shortness of breath, which freaked me out. I thought that that symptom was over and done with.

    I wish that there was more in the news about this presentation of the virus-the long lasting, up and down symptoms.

    Another Redditor responds:

    I started with mild symptoms in the first week of March…my most severe ones were about 4 weeks ago where I was struggling to breathe. I’m still getting wiped out just by going for a 30 minute walk outside. Breathing starts getting laboured at that point too, but otherwise I’m fine.

    It’s exhausting dealing with it. I’m not sure how my wife is handling it because she says I’m looking and acting normal all of a sudden and then after a bit of activity I’ve got sputum, laboured breathing, and am ready to fall asleep on the next park bench.

    I’m so frustrated because I’ll be walking along a path seeing people riding their bikes at the pace I was running at 5 weeks ago…it just doesn’t feel like it’s going away any time soon

    And another:

    “ME TOO. I’m 26 years old, healthy BMI, no pre-existing conditions. Week 7 (49 days) since I first got sick and the last week or so I’ve had chest pains and heart flutters. The difficulty breathing has gotten better some days but then regresses a bit. Like 2 steps forward, 1 step back. This is getting to the point where it seems ridiculous…I’m still barely able to work and can’t exercise yet.

    An Italian coronavirus victim writes:

    Hi, I’m 29M And on week 6 since first symptoms. I feel better but not as before the disease. I have occasional muscle pain occasional diarrhoea and occasional sore throat. Some day I feel like nothing happened and the day after bam my happiness disappear because I fell not so well. Hope that they will develop some medicine. I feel that this is not over….

    And another:

    I have been battling this for more than 30 days at this point. It has never gotten to the point in which I had to go to the hospital but I have experienced a wide range of symptoms that I have never experienced before. Everything from the usual fever, cough, chest tightness to elevated heart rate, edema in one foot and very sharp pain on my left thigh, that seemed to come out of nowhere and I’m still dealing with.

    These symptoms are unpredictable, weird and relentless.

    This virus is honestly the worst thing that has ever happened to me and it’s really hard to find the strength to keep going at times. I understand I’m very lucky…it could be worse. It’s just hard to deal with this for sooo long. I just want to wake up one day and feel normal.

    I really would love to know if recovery is truly real.

    Clicking through the rest of the bulleted threads above reveals similar experiences shared by a disturbing number of people who have been grappling with COVID-19 with no end in sight.

    So, as we consider the plan to reopen the economy by putting those most likely to survive contract COVID-19 back to work, it’s crucial that we employ strict measures to minimize infections to the greatest extent possible until we know more about the long-term effects of the disease, and/or a treatment is developed which can manage the myriad of lingering mystery symptoms. Unfortunately, a woeful lack of personal protective equipment (PPE) is going to make that a challenge.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:22

  • Are We Brewing A New Feudalism?
    Are We Brewing A New Feudalism?

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    The answer to the question is “YES.”  The large bailed-out creditors will end up with the property of the non-bailed-out debtors who are being pushed deeper into debt with “bail-out loans” and fees and penalties for missed debt payments. Write-offs for the One Percent, and more indebtedness for everyone else.

    Turn your mind to the economy.  The US has a work force of 164,000,000.  The unemployment forecast from the work closedowns is 30%.  That would mean 49,000,000 people who are potential rioters. (We are half way there with today’s report of a 16% unemployment rate with 22 million unemployed). Many of these people were already living paycheck to paycheck, could not raise $400, and their debts leave them no discretionary income.  As they could barely service their debts when employed, how do they service them when unemployed and when their small businesses are closed and incurring costs but have no revenues?  Loans further indebt them. The cash payouts to the unemployed might cover food and housing but will not service their debts.  

    Fast food franchises and stores in malls are saying they are not paying their rents for three months.  Mall owners won’t be able to pay their creditors.  The bailout works for no one except those who caused the problem. As they are being bailed out, they will have the money to buy up or foreclose on the bankrupted businesses. More property will be concentrated in fewer hands.  

    The bail-out scheme concocted by the New York banks and Trump’s Treasury Secretary, who earned the name “the foreclosure king” during his Wall Street career, leaves creditors whole and debtors deeper in debt.  

    The more debt is concentrated in fewer hands and the more indebted everyone else becomes, the less consumer purchasing power there is to drive the economy.  The foreclosed assets become less valuable as their profitability declines with consumer purchasing power.

    • The destruction of the US economy has been underway since global corporations moved middle class jobs offshore.

    • It has been underway since the financial sector diverted a larger share of consumer income to the service of debt. 

    • It has been underway since corporations invested their profits in buying back their own shares instead of expanding their production capabilities.  

    • It has been underway since Quantitative Easing inflated stock and bond prices beyond realistic values.

    • It has been going on since the rules against concentration were set aside and the Glass-Steagall Act was repealed. 

    •  It has been going on since endless wars crowded out infrastructure investment and social safety net expansion.  

    Is this a plot or stupidity?  Whatever the answer, the economy is being destroyed.  

    The economic problem is that private sector debt, both personal and corporate, is too great to be paid.  This problem existed prior to the closedown.  The closedown means that there is even less income with which to service the unsustainable level of debt.  This is not a problem that can be fixed with more debt.

    The problem is that banks lend to finance the purchase of existing financial assets, not to exand the economy’s productive potential.

    The problem is that corporations use their profits and borrow money in order to buy back their own equity instead of investing in their businesses.  The executives indebt the corporations while decapitalizing them, and they are rewarded for doing so with “performance bonuses.”

    The problem is that global corporations thinking short-term moved high-productivity, high-value-added US jobs to Asia, thus reducing earned income in the US, impairing state and local tax base, and causing the Federal Reserve to substitute a growth in consumer debt in place of the lost consumer income growth.

    The people in charge of the fix are only fixing it for themselves and in a short-sighted way.  There is only one way to fix the situation, and that is to write down private sector debts to levels that can be serviced.  As the creditors are being bailed out regardless, their loan losses don’t matter.

    The bank and corporate bailouts are an opportunity to fix the economy in other important ways. In effect, the bailouts amount to nationalization.  The government should accept the ownership that it is purchasing.  Then the government can break up the “banks too big to fail” and separate investment from commercial banking without having to pass new Glass-Steagall legislation and without having to battle against financial lobbying in Congress.  Once broken up, the banks could be sold off.  This would take enormous vulnerability out of the financial system and restore financial competition.  With corporations in government hands, the jobs could be brought home from overseas.  The middle class would be restored. 

    These measures together with a debt writedown would restore consumer purchasing power. Pent-up demand would propel the economy to higher growth as occurred following World War II.  

    This is a real solution to a real problem.  But with the One Percent in charge of the problem, we are not going to get a real solution.  We are going to get more money used to push up prices of financial assets and paper over unsustainable debt and a dying economy with an artificially-inflated stock market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The elite have failed us too many times.  It is time to dethrone them.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 23:05

  • Repo Guru Zoltan Pozsar Spots The Next Crisis
    Repo Guru Zoltan Pozsar Spots The Next Crisis

    Having been the first to correctly predict the Fed’s “nuclear bomb” response to the coronavirus pandemic as early as March 3 when in his 27th Global Money Notes “Covid-19 and Global Dollar Funding” he warned about the unprecedented dollar short squeeze that was set to rock global financial markets, Credit Suisse and former NY Fed repo guru Zoltan Pozsar has been one step ahead of the Fed – and virtually everyone else – when it comes to how the Fed’s monetary plumbing and liquidity operations are interwoven during times of crisis, and how to best unclog them when an black swan bat event like the global economic shutdown hits.

    Which is why the Fed must have breathed a big sigh of relief when in his latest note “U.S. Dollar Libor and War Finance“, Pozsar gave the Fed’s unlimited liquidity injection over the past 4 weeks the thumbs up, saying that the “The Fed’s liquidity injections are working” pointing out that “Global dollar funding conditions have eased, and U.S. dollar Libor-OIS spreads started to tighten.”

    Specifically, Pozsar lays out four reasons why he is confident that the market’s funding crisis is now over (which includes an interesting if tangential discussion on whether the Fed is sending a “Machiavellian” or “Bagehotian” message on benchmark rate reform – i.e., Libor vs SOFR – which readers can parse on their own in the attached note) and concludes that…

    The machinery of war finance is in full swing and liquidity injections over the past month have stabilized funding markets and are compressing Libor-OIS spreads from the top down.

    Yet despite the nuclear bomb of liquidity which appears to have fixed most of the funding conditions that snapped in the second half of March, there is one thing that Pozsar believes can still spoil the party, the same thing we discussed last week when we pointed out that in order to boost the cash balance at the Treasury to a record $960BN…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … the Treasury had unleashed an unprecedented flood of T-Bill issuance, which in the past 12 trading days has amounted to a record $1.5 trillion in gross new debt sold between T-Bills and Cash Management Bills, as shown below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is the chart above – the unprecedented burst in Bill supply – that Pozsar is keeping his eyes on and warning that while things may be getting better, and the Fed’s “machinery of war finance is easing unsecured funding pressures from the top down” the risk is that “bill supply can complicate this picture from the bottom up.”

    Specifically, the sudden avalanche of Bill supply – and to think less than a month ago there was such a shortage of Bills, we were seeing negative yields through three months

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which the Treasury is using to prefund the multi-trillion fiscal stimulus (and will have to be rolled every few weeks), Bill supply last week pushed Treasury bill yields from below OIS to 20 bps above OIS. To Pozsar this spike is ominous and suggests that the market may be nearing a tipping point on the front-end. The only solution: the Fed has to launch yield curve control to contain OIS as further supply without yield curve control – and there will be a lot of future supply – could push bill yields higher, “which would risk undoing the improvement that the Fed’s liquidity and regulatory measures helped engineer”, the repo guru warns.

    The immediate – and potentially dangerous – consequence of sharply higher yields is that it would offset much of the Fed’s actions and serve as a liquidity drain: according to Pozsar, “higher bill yields could pull funds away from the FX swap market as foreign central banks put their dollars into bills, not FX swaps, and as bill-OIS spreads grind more positive, they will push FX swap implied yields higher, OIS-OIS cross-currency bases more negative and that will limit how much more U.S. dollar Libor-OIS spreads can tighten from here.”

    This is how the Credit Suisse strategist dissects this potential landmine:

    For all the talk about the war on an invisible enemy and war finance, we haven’t heard from the Debt Management Office of the Treasury and the Fed about the need for the monetary financing of the CARES Act and further stimulus measures. The exemption of Treasuries from the leverage ratio frees up demand for supply (“limitless inventories”), but the near-term supply of bills is too much and can push bills yields higher from here, risking a reversal to the improved funding conditions the Fed worked so hard to achieve.

    So what should the Fed do? Simple: since Powell has already nationalized virtually all of the long-end with unlimited QE (and one can argue has taken over the corporate bond market by purchasing IG and HY bonds), the Fed will have to go all the way, and take over the entire yield curve, fixing the front-end by pegging three month T-Bill yields at OIS rates, to wit:

    The Fed has done a lot and yield curve control where they peg three month Treasury bill yields at OIS rates and is the only thing the Fed has not done yet, but soon will have to. The target range for overnight rates and the OIS curve – the bottom layer of the money market cake – are the Fed’s monetary sanctum. Everything the Fed does is priced based on variables within that sanctum: the top of the band, IOR, IOR plus a spread and OIS plus a spread.

    Incidentally it is not just repo “god” Pozsar who believes the next step for the Fed is yield curve control is Deutsche Bank’s rates strategist Stephen Zeng, although where Zeng disagrees with Pozsar is that latest move by the Fed which is now just a matter of time, will keep the system in a state of artificial balance since the Fed has to be far more worried about the long-end:

    As volatility and market liquidity continue to normalize, the Fed’s market functioning-oriented purchases should slow further. On the other hand, uncertainty around the extent of economic damage the virus has caused and rapidly-increasing Treasury issuance to fund the fiscal stimulus suggest the Fed will be cautious in unwinding the pace of purchases… This reduction should coincide with a very gradual and staggered reopening of the US economy in the coming months.

    Beyond June, we think the objective of these purchases will pivot towards more traditional goals of supporting a more rapid rebound and ensuring that the scarring effects of this crisis are as limited as possible. With inflation stuck below target and likely to move lower, inflation expectations anchored at uncomfortably low levels, and unemployment rising sharply, the Fed has every reason to ensure that financial conditions remain exceptionally accommodative. In this context, we foresee the Fed adopting front-end yield curve control (YCC) in late Q2 or Q3 that sets caps on Treasury yields out to about three years.

    But…

    While YCC may be a necessary policy response, it is not sufficient since it focuses on the front-end. In the US, medium- and long-term rates are more relevant for impacting financial conditions important to business and consumer economic decisions. If implemented, front-end YCC should be paired with more traditional QE that purchases securities across the curve and keeps long-end rates contained as well.

    In short, the only thing that experts agree will avoid another crisis in the bond – and funding – markets is if the Fed effectively takes over the entire yield curve, ending capital markets as we know them, and launching “price discovery” by decree. While we have no doubt that the Fed will go the length, we can’t help but remember that such terminal central planning did not have a happy ending for the USSR.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 22:53

  • Greenwich Mansions Are Finally Back In Demand, But Only As Short-Term Quarantine Escapes
    Greenwich Mansions Are Finally Back In Demand, But Only As Short-Term Quarantine Escapes

    The Greenwich housing market had been cooling off significantly over the last 12-18 months – that was, until the government tried to keep everybody quarantined in Manhattan.

    We had written several articles talking about how the market was imploding as far back as April 2019 and how, at the beginning of 2020, almost no houses in the area were being sold without concessions or price cuts. 

    The state of the union for Greenwich in January of this year was that sales listings were falling…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …and buyers were demanding discounts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, thanks to the government mandated quarantine of New York City, interest in homes in the area has skyrocketed – no longer for luxury long term housing, but rather as short-term rental escapes from the pandemic’s epicenter in the city. 

    City-dwellers are now bidding up leases in the Connecticut town, which has suddenly become a hot spot for people who have the financial means to make their way out of the city, according to Bloomberg

    Joanne Mancuso, an agent at Houlihan Lawrence, said: “It kind of builds. You got a couple of calls, and then all of sudden, the flurry came in.”

    A listing that she had been shopping for $32,000 per month – a 9,261 sq. foot house on North Street with a pool – recently found a tenant who was willing to pay 56% more than the list price. The owners had previously sought a yearlong tenant when they put the house on the market in January. There were no takers, despite 6 people looking at the house.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the week of March 16, when NYC closed schools, interest in the home suddenly surged. Three offers came in over the course of just 48 hours. The owners went with the tenants who wanted to stay the longest: 10 weeks. The renters are a family, with their grandparents and children, from Manhattan who “wanted to get out [to Greenwich] as soon as possible”. 

    In March, 53 single family homes in Greenwich were leased, which is nearly double the 27 from March 2019. In about 25% of the deals, tenants agreed to pay above the asking rents. 

    So far in April, 32 lease agreements have been signed compared to 14 last year. Homes are being rented for an average of $15,172, up from $8,817. 5 of the 32 deals this month went off above the asking price. One 3,200 sq. foot home that was being listed for $8,000 per month found a tenant for $8,700.  

    Broker Blake Delany seems to think the rental interest could help sales later this year. It reduces the amount of homes available to buy and promotes living in the town, Delany said. 

    “Interest in the Greenwich market will have increased. A lot of tenants are going to see that living in the suburbs is quite nice.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 22:40

  • Between A Rock & A Hard Place: Pandemic And Growth
    Between A Rock & A Hard Place: Pandemic And Growth

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    There is no way authorities can limit the coronavirus and restore global growth and debt expansion to December 2019 levels.

    Authorities around the world are between a rock and a hard place: they need policies that both limit the spread of the coronavirus and allow their economies to “open for business.” The two demands are inherently incompatible, and so neither one can be fulfilled.

    The problem is the intrinsic natures of the virus and the global economy. This virus is highly contagious during its asymptomatic phase, which is long (5 to 20 days), and therefore impossible to control with the conventional tools of identifying people with symptoms and isolating them, and tracking their contacts with others.

    While there is much we do not know for certainty about Covid-19, what’s clear (and not well-reported) is that its lethality is not exactly like a normal flu. The number of otherwise healthy people under the age of 60 who die of a regular flu is near-zero. The number of otherwise healthy people under the age of 60 who die of Covid-19 is not large as a percentage of cases but it is worryingly above zero. A great many otherwise healthy people under the age of 60 have died of Covid-19.

    Yes, the vast majority of those who die are elderly and suffering from chronic health issues, but the number of younger, healthier people who are dying makes this virus consequentially different from a typical flu.

    Everyone looking at total deaths (currently much lower than the fatalities in a typical flu season) is missing the semi-random lethality of Covid-19 in younger, healthier people, or at least certain strains of the virus in certain conditions (air pollution, viral load, etc.) and in not yet fully understood sub-populations.

    This uncertainty and semi-randomness means authorities cannot claim that Covid-19 is “no worse than a regular flu” because the number of 40-year old doctors, nurses, transit employees, etc. who die of regular flu is near-zero, but the number who are dying of Covid-19 is far above zero.

    In a regular flu season, people with healthy immune systems have little fear of dying of the flu. But Covid-19 is killing enough otherwise healthy people that there cannot be absolute certainty that the risk of death is essentially zero. This is an enormous difference psychologically, a difference that is currently under-appreciated.

    The global economy is much like a shark: it must keep moving forward in growth and debt expansion or it dies. This reality is poorly understood and therefore of paramount importance.

    The difference is debt. A large percentage of global consumption is ultimately based on debt. Debt masks a variety of inefficiencies, but the drag of inefficiencies and unproductive profiteering is visible if we look at the rate of “growth” and the rate of “debt expansion.”

    In the past 12 years, debt has exploded higher globally just to maintain weak growth. Where $1 in new debt once increased GDP by 50 cents, now it boosts GDP by 5 cents–or by some measures, zero. It’s taking more and more debt to keep the “growth” shark moving forward.

    The problem is debt must be serviced: interest must be paid and principal paid down. Even at near-zero interest rates, the principal payments loom large.

    Debt has a built-in opportunity cost. Once the borrower takes on more debt, a chunk of income must be allotted to paying the new debt. That income is no longer available to be saved or invested or spent on goods and services; it’s tied up for the life of the loan.

    Eventually, borrowers’ income is completely consumed by debt service and paying essentials such as rent and food. There is no income left after essentials and debt service are paid.

    So what happens when income falls? There is no longer enough income to pay all the expenses, and so what does the household or company do? It pays the essential bills and defaults on the debt, i.e. stops servicing the debt.

    The lender can pursue legal action to collect the debt, but heavily indebted households and companies simply don’t have the income or assets to pay the loan back. They declare bankruptcy and all their lenders must eat the loss.

    This has far-reaching consequences. Lenders saddled with huge losses due to mass defaults are insolvent, and must conserve earnings to rebuild their capital requirements. To stem the flood of losses, they have to tighten lending standards and avoid making loans to over-indebted households and companies.

    But reducing their lending to marginal borrowers greatly reduces their income, as marginal borrowers must pay higher interest rates, and so these are the most profitable loans lenders can make.

    You see the feedback loop here: less lending, less profits, and lenders’ losses pile up. The banking sector unravels.

    As in 2008, we see central banks bailing out insolvent lenders, but as I explained in a recent blog post, bailouts are not the same as revenues. Bailing out lenders and over-indebted corporations doesn’t magically create new creditworthy borrowers. Buy The Tumor, Sell the News (April 10, 2020)

    Bailouts are short-term emergency measures, but they don’t restore the foundations of sustainable debt: credit-worthy borrowers.

    From the point of view of the potential borrower, why borrow more money to spend on a superfluous vacation if income is uncertain? Why buy a house if there’s a chance it might decline in value by 20%? Wouldn’t it be wiser to delay purchases funded by more debt? Of course it’s wiser.

    Let’s add up the uncertainties:

    1. Covid-19 is not as risk-free for healthy people as ordinary flu. Therefore there is an uncertainty that favors caution and prudence and risk avoidance.

    2. From the point of view of potential borrowers, there is also uncertainty about future income and asset values, and so lowering risk makes sense. The easiest way to avoid risk is not take on new debts to fund discretionary purchases and save money to create a cushion against uncertainties.

    3. From the point of view of lenders, there is uncertainty about the creditworthiness of borrowers, households and companies alike. The past is not a good guide to the future: households with sterling credit may default if a primary wage earner loses their job.

    Charging marginal borrowers higher interest rates is no longer a low-risk strategy, as what good is a month or two of higher interest if the borrower defaults and the lender is stuck with an enormous loss?

    These uncertainties cannot be dialed back to zero. To truly limit the spread and semi-random lethality of Covid-19, authorities will have to make extreme measures permanent–for example, mass testing of the populace on a scale never seen, plus identifying those at lower risk (those who have recovered, etc.) and those at higher risk (elderly people with multiple health issues) and imposing different rules of conduct on each group.

    This article outlines the incredibly cumbersome requirements of such a program: Disease Control, Civil Liberties, and Mass Testing — Calibrating Restrictions during the Covid-19 Pandemic. (via Ron G.)

    Economically, the global financial system will unravel if debt expansion ceases or reverses, and incomes decline or even become uncertain.

    Recall that the absolute number of defaults does not have to rise by much to sink the system. Even if there are no additional defaults, once debt stops expanding, the system unravels, as it requires expanding debt to fund expanding consumption (“growth”) and the continuing purchase of assets at bubble-top high valuations.

    Once assets decline in market value, the system unravels, as bubble-top valued assets are the collateral holding up the world’s mountain of debt. Once the collateral shrinks, the system becomes increasingly prone to a self-reinforcing collapse of lending and asset crashes, as sellers can’t find any buyers and lenders can’t find any creditworthy borrowers with solid collateral and income.

    For an example, consider global tourism and travel, including business-related travel. This sector accounts for roughly 10% of global GDP ($9.25 trillion). Tourism worldwide – Statistics & Facts. In 1960, about 25 million people traveled internationally. In 2019, the number of international travelers was 1.4 billion. This is a 56-fold increase.

    When I moved to Hawaii as a young teen in 1969, the state had just cracked the 1 million visitors per year line. In 2019, 10.4 million visitors came to Hawaii.

    Tourism and even business travel are the epitome of discretionary spending. What happens to incomes, asset valuations, collateral and debt defaults if global tourism only recovers to 50% of 2019 levels?

    That would reduce global GDP by 5%, but this drop will trigger financial consequences many multiples of 5%.

    What happens to the pricey room rental rates that have become standard? What happens to the incomes of AirBnB hosts? How many will seek to sell their properties or default on their mortgages?

    What happens to property values in cities dependent on tourism when a significant percentage of AirBnB owners try to sell their properties? Who will want to take the risk of buying a property which could lose much of its value going forward?

    Another apt analogy for the global financial system is an airliner. Airliners are optimized for flying at high altitudes at speeds of between 500 and 575 miles per hour. This is their envelope of maximum fuel efficiency.

    While an airliner is physically able to fly at 500 feet, its fuel efficiency will be greatly reduced. Just as airliners cannot fly above a maximum altitude (around 45,000 feet) or approach the speed of sound (Mach 1), they cannot reach their maximum range flying at 500 feet.

    The airliner is optimized for a very narrow envelope, and once it leaves that envelope, bad things happen: its engines flame out, it runs out of fuel, etc.

    The global economy is optimized for a vast, steady expansion of debt to fund an equally vast and steady increase in consumption. Once it slips out of this narrow envelope, it crashes.

    Central banks and governments can mask this in the short-term by substituting bailouts for revenues, but bailouts are not sustainable replacements for revenues, incomes, profits and debt service. The global economy has already fallen out of its sustainable envelope, and the only questions are its rate of descent and how long the remaining fuel will last.

    There is no way authorities can limit the coronavirus and restore global growth and debt expansion to December 2019 levels. This is not what people want to hear, but it’s the reality we will have to deal with.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This essay was drawn from Musings Report 15. The Musings Reports are emailed weekly to subscribers and patrons. To subscribe or become a patron, please visit how to subscribe/become a patron.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Audiobook edition now available:
    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World ($13)
    (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 22:15

  • China Cuts One And Five-Year Loan Prime Rate Despite "V-Shaped Recovery"
    China Cuts One And Five-Year Loan Prime Rate Despite “V-Shaped Recovery”

    One of the more entertaining and fake narratives in the world right now is that China’s economy has experienced a “V-shaped post-covid” recovery, with various economic indicators such as trade and PMIs (if not so much GDP), staging a miraculous recovery after the economy collapsed in February. Not only is this not true, with vast stretches of China’s output still shut down as a result of collapsing demand, both domestically and internationally, but watching Beijing huff and puff even as it sends conflicting signals in hopes of further stimulating the economy is downright hilarious.

    Case in point, last Wednesday China cut the rate on its one-year Medium Term Lending Facility – or the cost the central bank charges on 1-year funding to banks – from 3.15% to 2.95%, which of course is just one of the many, many rates that have emerged in China in recent years in a time when Beijing is afraid of cutting the overnight funding rates as China’s economy remains an overlevered time bomb. Indeed, as Rabobank’s Michael Every wrote last week, “yet again we have a muddle over which rate really matters most in that economy, but the underlying picture is crystal clear. China needs to get far more liquidity into the real economy, but can’t match the level of easing being seen abroad for fear of destabilising CNY and ending up dealing with the kind of USD real politik being shown above.

    Indeed, as China’s Politburo made clear during a meeting on April 17, more cuts would be coming (almost as if there isn’t really a V-shaped recovery but there is a whole lot of new liquidity). As Goldman reported, the most tangible and meaningful statements from the meeting chaired by President Xi “was the mentioning of RRR and interest rate cuts in the discussion of monetary policy stance. While this language is vague in the sense that RRR cuts could be partial, which the PBOC has done a number of times already, and it is not clear which interest rate needs to be cut, the short-term interbank rate has already been guided to a very low level, so the mention of these likely increases the odds of broad-based RRR cut and/or a benchmark deposit rate cut.

    Yet while China has been leery of touching it RRR which it cut last at the start of the year, it had no choice but to cut more and with traders expecting some announcement out of the PBOC, the Chinese central bank did not disappoint when on Monday morning it announced that China cut the 1 and 5-Year Prime rate – the benchmark rate local financial institutions charge for new loans – from 4.05% to 3.85%, and from 4.75% to 4.65%, respectively, sending both rates to their historic lows (which is not really all the long since China only introduced the Loan Prime Rate, better known as China’s Libor, only last summer). The rate decided by a group of 18 banks is released on or around the 20th of every month and is reported in the form of a spread over the interest rate of the central bank’s medium-term loans. The steady decline in the LPR since August last year has led to lower borrowing costs in the wider economy, and also to lower profits for banks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Bloomberg, some analysts had expected a cut of 20 basis points after the central bank trimmed several of its policy rates since the last LPR was set in March, and added liquidity to the financial system. The five-year tenor, a reference for mortgages, was cut to 4.65% on Monday versus 4.75% in March.

    In addition to the MLF cut last week, the central bank also cut the cost of short-term open market operations in late March by the most since 2015, and announced a two-phase cut to the reserve ratio requirement for smaller banks.

    As a reminder, Friday’s data showed GDP dropped the most since at least 1992.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, as noted above, hours after the dismal economic reports, the country’s leaders pledged to deliver more stimulus including interest rate cuts to boost domestic demand. Authorities will keep liquidity “reasonably ample” by cutting the amount of reserves banks need to hold, China Central Television reported after a meeting chaired by President Xi Jinping.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 21:55

  • As Coronavirus Depression Continues, Americans Are Putting Their Rent On Credit Cards
    As Coronavirus Depression Continues, Americans Are Putting Their Rent On Credit Cards

    Despite what the stock market would have you believe, the United States is sinking further into a depression. And the unemployed are now resorting to putting their rent on credit cards. 

    It’s a temporarily solution that may help tenants get through a month or two, but it’s ultimately driving an already broke consumer deeper into debt that will cripple them in the long term. About 84% of tenants in the U.S. have paid full or partial rent through April 12, the WSJ reports, a number that has risen significantly since the first week of April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But credit cards as a form of payment are also rising by 13%, compared to the first three months of the year. The number of tenants paying with a credit card is up 30% when compared to the same period in March.

    While sometimes tenants pay rent with credit cards to boost their credit score or earn rewards, this is increasingly looking like a desperation scenario, where credit cards could be the last fallback before tenants start filing for bankruptcy and wind up out on the street.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In general, electronic payments have risen since the start of the pandemic. Building owners will sometimes accept credit cards through apartment management software or third party apps. Even with interest rates near 0%, the average interest rate on a credit card is still in the double digits. It’s even higher for those taking cash advances. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While some landlords and creditors have said they would make provisions for those who have lost their jobs, the credit bureaus will be far more unforgiving. They will be offering no special treatment, according to the WSJ, because a revision to the CARE act that would have prevented them from reporting negative information due to the pandemic was left out at the last minute.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some landlords have offered to absorb the transaction costs related to using credit cards. “Once we saw where things were going with this pandemic, a lot of our rules just kind of went out the window,” one landlord said.

    But if unemployment doesn’t start to arrive by the time many of these tenants have to pay May rent, they could be faced with far more dire consequences.

    Bruce McClary, spokesman for the National Foundation for Credit Counseling, said: “Your rent payment isn’t the only thing you owe, and chances are you have other financial commitments you’re having to keep on track as well.”

    Over 22 million people have applied for unemployment over the past fourweeks.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 21:50

  • Luongo: Government Intervention Is Always, Without Fail, The Wrong Response To Economic Problems
    Luongo: Government Intervention Is Always, Without Fail, The Wrong Response To Economic Problems

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    Government intervention into the market is always, and without fail, the wrong response to an economic problem. Politicians justify their intervention with ‘saving jobs,’ ‘dealing with a crisis’ or simply, ‘because I can.’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    They only focus on the ‘seen’ and ignore the ‘unseen’ effects of their policies, selling them to voters on that basis alone. This is the first rule of economic analysis.

    The great Frederick Bastiat described this in his seminal work of 1850, ‘That Which is Seen, and That Which is Unseen”

    No discussion of the secondary or tertiary effects is allowed.

    Even though those effects are often far worse. But because they are harder to predict and more pernicious and diffuse they are ultimately ignored.

    President Trump is no different in this than any other politician. In fact, he may be one of the worst examples of a politician doing too much in history. To Trump nothing cannot be fixed without his direct application of the weight and force of the U.S. government.

    From sanctions to tariffs, stimulus spending to bailouts, Trump has become the WWE Version of FDR in the past month. The latest bailout to the oil industry Trump is proposing is paying drillers to leave their oil in the ground.

    The Energy Department has drafted a plan to compensate companies for sitting on as much as 365 million barrels worth of oil reserves and counting it as part of the U.S. government’s emergency stockpile, said senior administration officials, who asked not to be identified describing deliberations prior to a decision and announcement.

    Federal law already gives the Energy Department authority to set aside as much as 1 billion barrels of oil for emergencies — without dictating where they should go. That creates a legal opening for storing crude outside the government’s existing reserve and even blocking its extraction in the first place.

    The keep-it-in-the-ground plan, which would require billions of dollars in appropriations from Congress, could be unprecedented and reflects a Trump administration push to help domestic drillers battered by a surge of oil production and a collapse of demand tied to the coronavirus.

    I’ve warned for years that Trump’s policies of antagonizing the world would come back to bite him. The frantic response by his administration to the breaking of the world financial system through the collapse in oil prices is precisely because he pursued his “Energy Dominance” policy which sought to make America the price-maker in oil versus being a price-taker.

    It put the U.S. in the vulnerable position it was in in March, having spent trillions in ramping up domestic production while attacking competition around the world — Russia, Iran, Iraq, Venezuela.

    Everyone saw the charts of U.S. oil production go vertical. Most everyone didn’t see the cumulative negative free cash flow generated by the industry doing the same thing, quarter over quarter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump’s “Best Economy Ever” was built on a foundation of quicksand and now he’s scrambling to prop it up before it sinks into oblivion.

    He put himself in this position with his insane and ridiculous belligerence in foreign policy around the world. If you don’t think Putin’s decision to say no to OPEC+ production cuts in March which precipitated this collapse wasn’t a direct response to Trump’s lunatic antics in Iraq, Syria and Iran then you are either willfully obtuse, a moron or both. (I told you in my last article I’m done mincing words).

    He put himself in this position by intervening in the oil markets at every level and now the worm has turned on him.

    For most of 2019 we wondered what the world would look like at $200 per barrel oil in the case of a U.S. war with Iran. But the truth is it would look a helluva lot like the world today at $20 per barrel.

    And it’s not going to improve anytime soon. Trump is right to push to open the U.S. economy up regardless of the status of COVID-19 because the best way to save the oil industry is to get people working and raising the demand for oil.

    The U.S. had a grenade dropped on its budget. It looks like a nuclear bomb, but that’s only because of the continued arrogance and necessity of politicians, like Trump, needing to be ‘seen’ doing something caused far more damage than it would have if they hadn’t intervened in the first place.

    The adage, “never let a crisis go to waste,” is apropos here. Politicians use the cover of crisis to act. They have to be ‘seen’ acting rather than not. Trump is acutely aware of this because he truly can’t stand criticism.

    A man without principles, Trump acts mostly out of his need to deflect criticism and be ‘seen’ by his base as their champion.

    You could argue this ‘pay-not-to-drill’ plan is Trump’s way of getting around agreeing to production cuts with OPEC+ publicly, but that would be giving him far too much credit (more of that willful obtuseness I mentioned earlier)

    But, really this is just another ridiculous bailout no different than FDR paying farmers not to plant (which we still do nearly 90 years later) and burning crops while people were starving.

    And the unseen effects of these bailouts and alphabet soup programs of asset purchases will be the final wholesale looting of what once was the engine of the U.S.’s economic greatness, the middle class.

    Trump thinks he’s saving middle class jobs here but he’s destroying them. These were jobs that should never have existed in the first place. Extending them into the future only prolongs the agony while the money spent mostly goes to the vultures hanging around D.C. to save themselves.

    The fact that every action taken so far by the Trump administration to counter the effects of the deflationary spiral set off last money has been to bail out someone else, tells you no one in D.C. is even paying lip service to the unseen effects of their actions.

    Moral Hazard? We don’t have time for that!

    And the people surrounding Trump, including Trump himself, know this and can’t help themselves.

    This is not an economic one but rather a crisis of confidence and faith in the role of government. This is why they are acting so swiftly, to save themselves, not us.

    If they’d get out of our way and let the market clear, which it will do eventually anyway, we could all get back to productive work that much faster.

    We crossed the monetary Rubicon last month. From here on out it will be an endless series of Hollywood Red Carpet openings while they further destroy what’s left the discipline of the market and hollow out what’s left of our lives.

    The government has always been an economic vandal, obsessed with first-order effects to further is own ends. As the after-effects of this period of history present themselves we’ll come to understand this even more acutely.

    By the time Trump and his band of economic ignoramuses are done there won’t be an America worth making great again. That’s the future once seen, you can’t unsee.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon if you want help navigating the unseen effects of insane policy. Install the Brave Browser because Google Sucks and private money is the future.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 21:25

  • New Jersey Reports Alarming Jump In New Cases As Global Total Passes 2.4 Million: Live Updates
    New Jersey Reports Alarming Jump In New Cases As Global Total Passes 2.4 Million: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Singapore, Russia report big upticks in new cases
    • NY reports drop in deaths
    • NY launches nation’s largest surveillance testing program
    • Cuomo: “We’re on the downward slope”
    • No. of confirmed cases reaches 2.4 million
    • Peru case total passes 15k
    • Spain, UK see big drop in deaths
    • PA reports jump in new cases, deaths
    • Putin offers words of encouragement for Russians celebrating Easter in isolation
    • South Korea considers extending social distancing guidelines despite drop in new cases
    • Turkey passes Iran as worst-hit country in ME
    • Protesters gather in Wisconsin, Texas
    • NJ reports jump in new cases, deaths
    • US death toll passes 40k
    • Italy sees slowdown in new cases, deaths

    *     *      *

    Update (2010ET): As another week begins, several governors around the country are pushing back at VP Mike Pence’s claims that there are enough tests available for any states that meet the other criteria in the “Opening Up America Again” plan to start opening up. Meanwhile NY Gov. Andrew Cuomo is pushing to kick off what would be the nation’s first broad-based random surveillance testing regime. He said Sunday that beginning this week, public health officials will aim to start testing thousands of NYers a day who have never shown symptoms of COVID-19 for “antibodies” to try and determine just how widespread the virus has really become.

    New York will test 2,000 people a day, or 14,000 per week, out of its nearly 20 million residents, Cuomo said.

    The presence of antibodies should indicate that a person has been infected, and recovered from, the virus. However, whether infection means patients will be forever immune to reinfection hasn’t yet been conclusively determined.

    Earlier, New Jersey reported a surprisingly large jump in cases, while also reporting more than 100 deaths, one of its worst reports since the outbreak began in terms of deaths and new cases.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Nearby Connecticut also reported a drop in hospitalizations, and a rise in deaths, a pattern familiar to both NJ and NY.

    As of Sunday evening, here’s a ranking of the most hard-hit US states.

    1. New York (223,699 cases)
    2. New Jersey (32,181 cases)
    3. Massachusetts (32,181 cases)
    4. Pennsylvania (29,463 cases)
    5. Michigan (29,263 cases)

    Also at tonight’s press conference, to try and plug a major weakness in America’s testing infrastructure, Trump said he would use the DPA to force American companies to produce more of the “swabs” needed to run COVID-19 tests – many governors have been complaining about shortages of the swabs impacting testing capacity.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Finally, in Latin America, Peru reported another huge jump in cases, pushing the total number of confirmed cases in the world’s No. 2 copper producer past 15,000. Meanwhile, Mexico looks to be the next country to join Sweden in seeing a dangerous uptick in new cases and deaths after refusing to go all-in on lockdowns and social distancing. Bloomberg reported Sunday that Mexico City hospitals are near the point of being overwhelmed by COVID-19 patients as the country’s mortality rate soars, suggesting that the virus is much more widespread in Mexico than testing would indicate.

    Still, the US has by far the world’s largest number of confirmed coronavirus cases, with more than 740,000 infections and over 40,000 deaths. And while many governors are slamming President Trump for taking a step back with one breath then encouraging protesters demanding states to reopen to essentially break the law.

    Reuters reports on Saturday, several dozen protesters gathered in the Texas capital of Austin chanting “USA! USA!” and “Let us work!” In Brookfield, Wisconsin, hundreds of demonstrators cheered as they lined a main road and waved American flags to protest the latest extension of the state’s “safer at home” order, imposed by Democratic Gov. Tony Evers.

    It’s another example of Trump’s feckless behavior, and unnecessarily leaves him vulnerable to more criticism should the reopening process hit a ‘snag’.

    Finally, the global case total has surpassed 2.4 million.

    *     *      *

    Update (1410ET): The US has reached another ignominious milestone: The countrywide death toll has surpassed 40k.

    That’s according to an official toll kept by Reuters, which also found that the US case count was nearing 760k.

    Notably, PA warned earlier that it was adding nearly 300 new deaths to the statewide death toll, many of which occurred earlier this month, but were never tested.

    There have been a couple of other interesting developments in the past few hours: Turkey has surpassed Iran as the Middle Eastern country with the largest total of coronavirus cases.

    Turkey reported 3,977 new cases on Sunday, along with 127 new deaths. That was for a total of 86,306 cases and 2,017 deaths. By the same totals, Iran is just around 86k.

    Meanwhile, New York State continued its frustrating practice of releasing its data in drips and drabs, releasing its latest daily positive test totals – it was 6,054 for the last 24 hours – which brought the total to 242,786. Cuomo announced the death toll hours ago.

    *     *      *

    Update (1315ET): Eager not to sound too triumphant following the latest optimistic coronavirus figures, French President Emmanuel Macron said Sunday that he expects France’s economy to contract around 10% in 2020 (keep in mind, nearly all estimates of growth/contraction for 2020 are, at this point, probably based almost entirely on guessswork). He also said that he was weighing whether to pass legislation to make wearing a mask on public transit a legal requirement, subjecting those who aren’t wearing a mask to fines and potential imprisonment.

    Back in New York, Cuomo reiterated several of his points from the last few days, namely that the state intends to proceed with widespread antibody testing as soon as possible (a strategy that might produce some unpleasant surprises, according to recent data) while also again bashing the federal government for failing to supply the state with an endless river of tests. Any NY reopening plan must be firmly rooted in testing, Cuomo said (despite Dr. Fauci’s comment that testing everybody doesn’t need to be a priority to reopen the economy).

    Finally, PA reported a jump in new cases and deaths that reflected new cases from earlier this month that had initially been left out of official totals.

    • PENN. REPORTS 276 NEW DEATHS, REFLECTING DEATHS FROM EARLY APR
    • PENNSYLVANIA REPORTS 1,215 NEW CASES, BRINGING TOTAL TO 32,284

    Many of these involved patients and residents in managed-care facilities like – you guessed it – nursing homes…

    *     *      *

    Update (1255ET): Italy reported 3,047 new cases of coronavirus and 433 new deaths over the last 24 hours on Sunday afternoon, yet another notable lowdown in deaths that will help the government led by PM Giuseppe Conte make the case that its decision to start slowly lifting the lockdown is working out.

    The new numbers have brought the Italian total to 178,972 cases, and 23,660 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, Sunday’s latest round of figures out of NY show what’s contributing to the continued drop in hospitalizations and ICU intubations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And finally, the arch of new cases and deaths….

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before we go, here’s an updated map comparing the arc of outbreaks in different states and different countries.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We’ll have more to come shortly.

    *     *      *

    Update (1225ET): Andrew Cuomo kicked off his slightly-delayed Sunday morning press briefing by announcing that the state recorded only 507 COVID-19-related deaths during the past 24 hours, the lowest single-day reading since April 6.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Elsewhere, while new cases in Singapore soared, France saw its latest daily death toll shrink to its slowest level in three weeks, the latest optimistic headline out of Europe.

    As Cuomo continued on, he insisted that, after more than a week of mostly encouraging numbers, “we believe NY is past the peak and we are now descending the other side of the mountain.”

    So, the US is finally joining Europe at the top of the “downward slope” – for round one, at least.

    Regardless, even the best-case scenario for the US calls for another six weeks of “la quarantena”. And Italy, Spain and France are, realistically, not that much further ahead, despite governments in both countries taking the first tentative steps toward reopening.

    *       *        *

    One day after Spanish PM Pedro Sanchez announced plans to extend what is about to become a strict, six-week-long countrywide lockdown until May 9, health authorities declared another drop in the rate of new COVID-19 cases and deaths, while also reporting an encouraging drop in patients in severe condition, suggesting that the country’s dramatic efforts have worked – even if doubts remain about the accuracy of the government’s figures.

    Of particular concern to lawmakers, particularly members of the Spanish opposition, are the numbers of deaths that have occurred in nursing homes and other private facilities that are especially susceptible to the virus, and whether or not they are accurate, or even whether the government is deliberately trying to obscure the death toll to keep the mortality rate, an already outrageous 10%, from climbing even higher.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be sure, many experts suspect these double-digit mortality rates seen in Spain, but also in other countries including Italy and the UK, are a sign that the virus is much more widespread than official tallies reflect. The countries with the most thorough testing – countries like Germany and South Korea – have kept their mortality rates at a fraction of 1%, which is certainly encouraging. In the US, the mortality rate has been pretty steady, though it ticked up to ~5% this week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the debate over accurate accounting rages in Spain, Sanchez asked parliament during a televised address last night to pass a plan to extend the lockdown but begin easing some of the more-strict measures like one requiring children to remain in the house. The PM hopes to have them playing outside again by the end of the month.

    Now, to conveniently support his argument for why Parliament should support his plan, the health ministry has reported its lowest single-day death toll in a month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Things were also looking fairly rosy in the UK, which reported another 596 hospital deaths, a drop of nearly 300 from yesterday’s tally.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Elsewhere, in Russia, President Vladimir Putin is being forced to reckon with the reality that SARS-CoV-2 has penetrated Russian society to a much deeper extent than had been previously believed. The rate with which new cases are being reported continued to accelerate on Sunday, as health officials counted 6,060 new cases over the past 24 hours, another record count. The 16% jump brought the country’s total to 42,853. Meanwhile, a total of 361 people have died from the virus. President Vladimir Putin has warned that the outbreak is not yet close to peaking, even after imposing a national lockdown last month.

    “This year, [Easter] is being celebrated amid forced restrictions,” Putin said on Sunday, which is the traditional Easter celebration day for all Orthodox Christian churches, like the Greeks and the Russians, among others.

    “These are essential in fighting the spread of the disease,” Putin said about the government’s lockdowns and social-distancing guidelines.

    Signs of real progress in Europe and the US (not to mention South Korea and a handful of other countries that acted aggressively and achieved outstanding results) have helped ease the sense of terror brought about by a lingering uncertainty: As Gov Cuomo put it, America now knows for sure that these measures – social distancing and lockdowns – have been working to contain the virus.

    The question now is ‘to what degree?’, and will we risk a serious relapse if America starts reopening in the next few weeks? However, with Japan enduring a sudden and surprisingly harsh resurgence, and even China doing its level-best to tamp down any reports of new clusters discovered since “the Great Reopening” began, more countries are starting to second-guess their decisions, and on Sunday, South Korea decided to extend its ‘social distancing’ campaigns – just in case.

    News this morning about a Hormel-owned food processing plant shutting down are raising fears that, should the lockdown drag on for much longer inside the US, the tears at the social fabric might start to widen.

    And as Trump’s critics continue to deride reports about the virus potentially having leaked from a bio-lab, Australia on Sunday called for an “independent, international inquiry” into the origins of the coronavirus in Wuhan, and officials even signaled that the country’s relationship with China – which has helped fuel Australia’s 3-decade economic boom, an expansion virtually unrivaled in modern times – “will change”. And it doesn’t sound likely that they’ll be changing for the better.

    More alarming even than Russia and China, however, is Singapore. The city-state won plaudits for containing the coronavirus early on with strict contact-tracing protocols that required contacts to be identified within 2 hours. But for some inexplicable reason, the densely populated city saw its total case count grow by 160% over the past week, with officials reporting hundreds of new infections on Friday and over the weekend, a revelation that is simply staggering in light of the strict lockdown measures that the country is currently under. The country reported a jump of almost 1k new cases on Saturday, as we noted at the time, with most of the new cases tied to packed migrant-worker apartments that are basically like college dorms.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 21:15

  • Study Finds Doing This Regularly Is Likely To Prevent COVID-19 Hospitalization
    Study Finds Doing This Regularly Is Likely To Prevent COVID-19 Hospitalization

    Multiple reports have been issued over the past month carefully documenting many of the underlying health issues which make the chances much higher for COVID-19 infected individuals of landing in the hospital, and possibly death. 

    Foremost among these is the pervasive American problem of obesity, and the often corresponding disease of diabetes. “Young adults with obesity are more likely to be hospitalized, even if they have no other health problems, studies show,”New York Times report detailed days ago.

    However, in the first weeks and months of the crisis it seems there were few studies and reports advancing the opposite: what are ways and individual might prevent infection or at least greatly mitigate its severity? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Researcher Zhen Yan, PhD, University of Virginia School of Medicine. Image source: UVA Health

    Newsweek reported Friday on new University of Virginia School of Medicine, which found regular exercise is behind healthier immune systems able to withstand and beat the virus

    Specifically regular exercise is likely to prevent COVID-19 patients from developing severe complications like acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), a common cause of death among the infected, the study found. 

    “According to the study, between 3 and 17 percent of all COVID-19 patients will develop ARDS, while available data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention estimates that between 20 and 42 percent of all patients hospitalized with COVID-19 will develop ARDS,” Newsweek reports. Of these about 45 percent of patients who develop severe ARDS will die, according to researchers.

    Per the report:

    In his research, Yan studied a powerful antioxidant that is released throughout the body when exercising, which showed to help prevent disease, such as ARDS. The antioxidant is known as “extracellular superoxide dismutase” (EcSOD), which is created naturally by our muscles, but Yan’s studies discovered an increase in production when exercising.

    “These findings strongly support that enhanced EcSOD expression from skeletal muscle or other tissues/organ, which can be redistributed to lung tissue, could be a viable preventative/therapeutic measures in reducing the risk and severity of ARDS,” Yan’s study says.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Our findings suggest aerobic exercise is particularly potent in stimulating EcSOD expression,” Zhen Yan, head researcher at the University of Virginia School of Medicine stated to Newsweek. “With that said, weight training helps maintain or even increase muscle mass. More muscle mass will likely lead to more EcSOD production, hence more benefits.” Yan’s team used mice running “about 10 miles/day” as part of the studey.

    “Generally speaking, 30 min moderate intensity exercise per day would be enough to have many of the health benefits,” Dr. Yan added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Obesity has been linked with COVID-19 complications in recent studies. Image: istockphoto

    Further Yan emphasized the following following exercises as producing the most EcSOD in the body:

    • Aerobics.
    • Weight lifting.
    • Running.

    “Aerobic exercise can be easily done at home, such as [a] stationary bike, aerobic floor exercise and rowing machines. Of course, canoeing, biking and running outside with strict social distance are good options,” he said.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 21:00

  • Beware The Russian Disinformation Trope
    Beware The Russian Disinformation Trope

    Authored by Thomas Farnan via TheNationalPulse.com,

    Last week, the DOJ declassified three footnotes in the Inspector General’s FISA report. They showed the FBI knew Christopher Steele had associations with shady Russian oligarchs and that somebody – whose identity is redacted – suggested in 2017 that parts of the dossier may have included Russian disinformation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some responded as if the footnotes revealed Vladimir Putin and not an FBI-CIA-Clinton conspiracy was responsible for the ridiculous machinations of Russiagate. National Review editor Rich Lowry was especially over-the-top, even managing by passive-aggressive link to turn the disclosures into a criticism of President Trump:

    In other words, the Kremlin may have succeeded in getting us to turn even more viciously against ourselves and conduct our politics in an atmosphere characterized by screaming headlines, dark insinuations and endless investigations — all by feeding a few lies to a private eye hired by the Hillary Clinton campaign to dig up dirt on Trump.

    Let’s unwind that.

    We already knew that something happened a few months after the election that made the FBI stop using the dossier to get FISA warrants. By then the British had come clean and were discrediting Steele. Maybe it was British spies saying, “Have you idiots considered yet whether this is Russian disinformation?”

    Anyone with half a brain would have asked the question.

    That would explain why the identity of the dossier skeptic in the footnotes is blacked out. Under the Five Eyes Agreement, details about British intelligence sharing cannot be disclosed. The second footnote (#350) says that whomever the undisclosed dossier skeptic is, he or she has “no information” tying its salacious allegations to Russia.

    It is just speculation, in other words.

    Did Russia fabricate the Steele dossier with the intent of getting us to turn viciously on ourselves?

    It is theoretically possible that Vladimir Putin fed a whopper to Christopher Steele about Donald Trump hiring prostitutes to pee on a bed the Obamas had once used.

    There are two problems with that scenario, though.

    • First, Steele had not been to Russia for 20 years. He spent his professional life as an anti-Russia gadfly. Fatuous claims are made on his behalf that Putin had ordered him to be poisoned. If Christopher Steele is the ex-spy our vaunted intelligence services relied on to explore whether Putin had kompromat on Trump – that’s really bad.

    • The bigger problem with any Russian disinformation scenario is for the dossier to affect the succession of power in America even slightly, the FBI would have to make 17 separate sloppy mistakes, all inuring to the benefit of Hillary Clinton and against Trump. Unless his name was Ras-Putin, there is no way Putin could have divined that such a wild story would be treated with a seriousness it never deserved. 

    As I have asked on this page before:

    “If the Steele dossier tapped Russian sources to reveal a Putin plot to harm Hillary, why did it primarily include crazy stuff that hurt Trump? And if it was created to smear Trump, why did the intelligence community rely on it to conclude that Putin was out to get Hillary?”

    CBS reporter Catherine Herridge may have provided some answers this week when she uncovered two additional declassified footnotes from the report. These revealed, not surprisingly, that US spy agencies contorted themselves in 2017 to conclude that Steele was somehow connected to Russian intelligence, but he wasn’t compromised by them.

    What a tangled web our spies weaved, huh? We already knew they were trying to sell the idea of kompromat, though. Indeed – by definition – it’s not kompromat if it’s not from Putin. 

    More interesting in the notes was the admission that the FBI knew a Steele sub-source favored Hillary Clinton.  As those of us chided as conspiracy theorists have been saying for years, they were the only kinds of sub-sources Clinton opposition researcher Fusion GPS used. 

    Most importantly, the footnotes reveal dubious intelligence assessments based on unidentified but compromised second and third-hand sources, and no real evidence of a Russian disinformation campaign.

    Okay, let’s assume – even with all that –  it was the Russians.

    If so, they were just messing with someone they hated (Christopher Steele) and probably thought if he repeated the pee tape stupidity it would only make him look like an idiot.

    Read closely, though, the dossier tells you who fabricated it beginning on its first page, and it was not the Russians:

    Source B asserted that the TRUMP operation was both supported and directed by Russian President Vladimir PUTIN.  Its aim was to sow discord and disunity within the US itself, but more especially within the Transatlantic alliance which was viewed as inimical to Russia’s interests.  Source C, a senior Russian financial official said that the TRUMP operation should be seen in terms of PUTIN’s desire to return to Nineteenth Century ‘Great Power’ politics anchored upon countries’ interests rather than ideals-based international order established after World War Two. S/he had heard PUTIN talking in this way to close associates on several occasions.

    Unless Vladimir Putin goes around the Kremlin talking like an Ivy League graduate with a plush job waiting for him as an analyst at John Brennan’s CIA, he never said any of those things. An ideals-based Transatlantic alliance that defies the rabble who prefer governance based on national interest is, instead, a uniquely Western worldview.

    Nobody has produced evidence that Source C was acting at the behest of the Russian government. Instead, he or she is parroting official Washington’s psycho-fantasies about the world. A good guess is that it was either a complete fabrication or a self-serving oligarch buying a favor by telling the Clinton campaign what it wanted to hear, who would later strongly deny any involvement. 

    Even before the footnotes were released everyone knew Steele had connections with such characters. 

    Lee Smith, the venerable, readable, oracle of Spygate is right: the dossier is a political operation sourced in Washington and any other interpretation is just a distraction.

    Beware especially pundits associated with NeverTrump who assert with ontological certainty that Russia interfered in the election. They would love to believe that when people in Pittsburgh defied them and voted for Trump, we were tricked by Putin.

    The problem with their self-serving ruse is that “Putin-did-it” provides a lifeboat for the Spygate conspirators. Brennan, Comey, McCabe et al. are going to say, “we were fooled by the Russians like everyone else.” In the hysteria they generated, Putin is the matinee villain du jour and Russian disinformation makes them victims of his shenanigans, poor fellas.

    Three years of scrutiny has determined that the dossier was phony. That the FBI, CIA and Clinton campaign used it to orchestrate the biggest political dirty trick in American history is the real scandal, and Putin is a red herring.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 20:35

  • Eric Peters: 'Fed Isn't Just Delaying The Inevitable Reckoning…It's Making It Worse'
    Eric Peters: ‘Fed Isn’t Just Delaying The Inevitable Reckoning…It’s Making It Worse’

    As investors in the US and around the world confront the fact that the Federal Reserve is never really out of ammo, One River Asset Management Founder Eric Peters joined Erik Townsend for an interview on Townsend’s weekly MacroVoices podcast, which features in-depth interviews with portfolio managers and prominent figures in the wealth-management industry.

    Markets finally rebounded last week after the fastest, most brutal selloff in modern history, a selloff that was inspired by the realization that half the world would need to stop to prevent millions from dying and hospitals from being absolutely overwhelmed like they were in Wuhan.

    Fueling the enthusiasm, late last week, just before Peters’ interview, the Fed unleashed its latest program: a $2.3 trillion program that expanded liquidity to small businesses and municipalities alike – or at least that’s how Jay Powell marketed it.

    With the Fed’s balance sheet on its way to $6 – and then $8 – trillion, Townsend asked Peters what he suspects will be the ultimate result of Powell & Co’s repeated interventions in credit markets, interventions that the market has come to depend on, especially now.

    Whether or not the central bank’s decision is setting us up for an even more dramatic reversal later on no longer seems like a matter of speculation. The rapidity with which the market unraveled in March – erasing three years’ worth of artificially inflated gains in three weeks – is evidence of what happens when artificial supports finally give way, leaving chaos in their wake.

    But at this point, actually swallowing the medicine is almost too painful a prospect to contemplate. Peters pointed out that it wasn’t just stocks that crashed. At points, corporate debt and gold have gotten hammered – the selling hasn’t been constrained to stocks.

    The fact that the market was only 25% shows just how potent the Fed’s market interventions have been: Peters believes the drawdone in US equity benchmarks would have been “at least 50%” and possibly as much as 80% if the central bank had sat on its hands.

    So you have a very leveraged economy. And all of a sudden, because of this catalyst (meaning the virus), people needed to gross down quickly. And so you had way too many people selling essentially everything, which is why you saw not only stocks fall but you saw bonds fall, you saw gold fall. Everything fell all at the same time. And if the Fed had not come in and drawn a line underneath that with the policies that they implemented, we would have seen a crash that was far worse than what we’ve seen. I think we had the US equity market fall 35% from the highs or something like – it may sound dramatic, but it was only down 25% on the year. So I think, just unambiguously, we would have been down at least 50% and perhaps 80% had the Fed not done what it did.

    Why? Well, the logic behind Peters’ supposition is pretty straightforward: the central bank’s massive liquidity injections led virtually every private market participant to become a buyer.

    And when the shock came and everybody turned to sell, the people at the controls suddenly realized – oh wait – there’s nobody to sell to. So the Fed needed to step in.

    After all: “If everyone is overleveraged and they all need to gross their books down in one way or another at the same time, there literally is not a buyer. There is just no buyer. There is no strong hand out there. There is only one hand and that was the Fed.”

    “So that’s what they did.”

    And again, these losses aren’t really an exact reflection of the virus’s impact on economic fundamentals and therefore corporate earnings…this is simply a reaction, like the release of a slingshot. Because the truth is, the Fed set the stage for this reversal ten years ago in the aftermath of the crisis. As Townsend and Peters discussed, the outbreak was merely a catalyst for losses that probably would have been inevitable.

    Though the coronavirus was probably about as bad as it gets for equity bulls.

    Listen to the whole interview below:


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/19/2020 – 20:10

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 19th April 2020

  • Kyle Bass Blasts China's "Most Lying, Coercive, Manipulative Government" For "Knowingly Infecting The World"
    Kyle Bass Blasts China's "Most Lying, Coercive, Manipulative Government" For "Knowingly Infecting The World"

    Authored by Jan Jekielek via The Epoch Times,

    With countries around the world in quarantine or lockdown mode to deal with the Wuhan coronavirus or CCP virus pandemic, what can we expect in terms of economic fallout?

    What evidence has emerged showing the Chinese Communist Party is culpable?

    What will happen to the US, Chinese, and Hong Kong economies as the pandemic wanes?

    And why is Hong Kong’s situation particularly perilous?

    In this episode, we sit down with Kyle Bass, the founder and chief investment officer of Hayman Capital Management, a Dallas-based hedge fund. Bass is a founding member of the Committee on the Present Danger: China, and he is also Chairman of the Board of The Rule of Law Foundation.

    This is American Thought Leaders 🇺🇸, and I’m Jan Jekielek.

    This interview has been edited for clarity and brevity… emphasis ours.

    Jan Jekielek: Kyle Bass, such a pleasure to have you back on American Thought Leaders.

    Kyle Bass: Thank you. Great to be here, Jan.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle, you’ve been this fierce speaker on the Chinese Communist Party’s culpability behind this virus. We’re going to talk about all sorts of economy-related stuff because this is your wheelhouse and everyone wants to hear.

    Mr. Bass: I just think it’s important for the press to really think about, and for the world to think about what really happened in a timeline, and not some conspiracy theory because China won’t allow us in, and won’t allow our scientists to try to find patient zero and origin of the virus. And in fact, you’ve probably seen recent communiques between the Chinese Communist Party and their labs that their lab output has to be censored by the CCP, or that has anything to do with the Wuhan virus, [has to be approved] before it goes to the rest of the world. So, they are very sensitive on this topic—number one.

    And number two, if you look back to the timeline, and you understand what happened, China has an enormous culpability. They actually have a legal liability, and one that’s a financial liability. I don’t know if you’ve seen various interviews in the last few days of U.S. legislators but there is a growing tide, of not only resentment, but a growing tide of people in the legislative branch of the U.S. and the UK governments, and now it’s bleeding into Australia and Canada, where they’re starting to say that we need to use the rule of law, the U.S. rule of law, the British Common Law, to start talking about reparations and getting the Chinese government to pay for their malign actions. And I think it’s important to note: on December 31, there were already 104 cases and 19 deaths in Wuhan. The Wuhan scientists, the heroes who first found this strange new pneumonia that was propagating itself so freely in Wuhan, not only were they arrested, and punished, and forced to retract statements that they had put on WeChat, but as you know, since then, one of the doctors who was 33 years old has died from the Wuhan virus.

    Secondarily, that all happened in December. So by December 31, the government of Taiwan sent a white paper to the World Health Organization explaining that they had full evidence that there was human-to-human transmission, and that it was going to be a new global pandemic. And if you remember, on January 14, Tedros said to the world in a proclamation on a Tweet that this is not a global pandemic, and that he had just consulted with Xi Jinping and the Chinese, and that there is no evidence of human-to-human transmission—this is January 14. And then January 23, Xi Jinping closed down all air traffic from Wuhan to the rest of China. But he allowed Wuhan air traffic to travel to the rest of the world. Essentially, Xi Jinping knowingly infected the rest of the world. … “If he’s going to go down, the world is going to go down with him,” essentially what he was saying. That is not a responsible actor. That is not a government who’s ideologically aligned with the rest of the West. This is a government that basically covered up the truth. And we all know that they covered up the truth, but now, it’s actually after Neil Ferguson’s Boston Globe article, and now you see that the Chinese Foreign Ministry said on February 2 that it is xenophobic to close anyone’s borders to the Chinese, and that travel restriction shouldn’t be made. Xi Jinping himself shut down Wuhan, January 23; this is February 2, they’re telling the world this.

    They are the most lying, coercive, manipulative government in the world, and you and I both know, they are committing the largest crimes against humanity prior to this outbreak of the sinister virus that God knows where it really came from—somewhere between the Wuhan wet market, the Chinese Center for Disease Control, which is right across the street, or maybe 20 miles north, at the Biosafety Level 4 lab in China. But the bottom line is, this disease has been unleashed on the rest of the world, and it was knowingly done so. And that’s why I’m so visibly upset about this.

    And I think that you probably saw the Jackson Foundation in the UK, the Harvard professors in the U.S., are starting to set forth a legal framework for which international laws (that) China has broken, and the fact that there is a financial liability. As you remember, Chinese [SMEs] (small-medium enterprises) have businesses, and properties, and stock issued in all the various markets in the West. There is a way that we can go after them and grab their assets. And [Mitch McConnell] this morning in an interview on Maria Bartiromo’s show said that China also owns a trillion dollars of U.S. Treasury bills, and those are just book entry bills. We could actually grab and basically forgive that debt—basically cancel that debt. There are plenty of things the government can do here to make China pay for its actions. And the beauty of all that, Jan, is one thing we’ll never be able to do: the West will never stoop to China’s lows. We will never out-lie, we will never out-cheat, will never out-steal, the Chinese Communist Party—they’re the “best” in the world. But what we can do is we can use the foundational bedrock of our countries, the rule of law, and we can exercise and enforce our laws on them for their malfeasance. And that is the play, that is how we level the playing field, against such a tyrannical lying actor.

    Mr. Jekielek: I was aware of all these facts, but the culpability is so obvious, right? It’s almost like it takes an extra level of crazy spin-doctoring to try to say, “No, China is the hero. The Chinese Communist Party took care of everything incredibly well, and now, world, you should probably thank us for that.”

    Mr. Bass: I think Xi is overplaying his hand because seeing something like that and seeing something like what (Lijian) Zhao said that it was the U.S. military that brought it to Wuhan, their counterclaims are so outrageous that it makes them look stupid, and I think you have this scenario today where there are really four wars we could be fighting with China, and we’re fighting three of the four. There is the information/ narrative war that they’re active every single day fighting with us and the rest of the West. There is the cyber war, which they’ve been fighting for the last 20 years, and they fight it every single day—they’re on offense in the cyber war mostly. Then there’s the economic war. And then there’s the kinetic war. We’re fighting three or four wars with China as we speak, and one could say that the new battlefield, let’s say the battlefield of the 21st century, isn’t going to be with planes, and tanks, and boats. It’s going to be on the economic front, on the cyber front, on the narrative front.

    There are 70-plus official Chinese blue-check accounts on Twitter, and they are either ambassadors or official ministry spokespeople for China. Twitter is banned in China; why do we let them on there? Why don’t we put a red propaganda diagonal sticker across every single thing they say? It is absolutely insane that we allow official Chinese accounts on Twitter without labeling them as propaganda, just like the Global Times, and Xinhua, and [inaudible], and all of these different Chinese propaganda outlets that disguise themselves as media. Again, there’s so many things that we need to do that are really easy to do.

    Mr. Jekielek: If there is possibly a silver lining to this whole crazy situation, the suffering inflicted upon the world, … you and I both know this realization has been a long time coming. These aren’t new activities, as you’ve said.

    Mr. Bass: Yes, the misery that China has brought to the rest of the world with this virus has really been shining a disinfecting light on global supply chains reliance. Think about this: we have Western democracies relying almost completely on a supply chain in a totalitarian, communistic nation. It’s actually insane when you lay it out like that, right? We could go back to our corporate boards and say, “Did you really do this? Because maybe you really weren’t thinking about the different potential avenues for supply chain connectivity.”

    But to your point, there is a silver lining, because number one … you and I know Rosemary Gibson. Rosemary Gibson wrote the book in 2018 about the U.S. over reliance on China for prescription drugs and even OTC, over-the-counter drugs, where they manufacture 90% of the active pharmaceutical ingredients for all U.S. antibiotics. It’s actually crazy that we’ve let this happen. We’ve been with a really good [inaudible] from, let’s say, a microchip perspective, and from the perspective of strategic rivalry in very key technological areas, but we completely missed the drug—a national security problem. Well, the good news is, Jan, we’re not going to miss it anymore. We got this. We are going to legislate drug production here in the United States, so that no communistic sovereign actor can decide whether or not our military gets drugs to the hospital, or not—or population. Think about this: we get 100% of our blood pressure medicine from China. 100%. There are 700,000 people in the United States who take blood pressure medicine every single day. We have a 13-day supply. This is insane. This has to change. That’s the silver lining as these kinds of things will change.

    Mr. Jekielek: Talk about leverage on the side of the Chinese Communist Party with just this one thing: the blood pressure medicine. It’s astounding. Tell me a little bit about what you’re seeing with respect to the economic situation globally. I’m looking at a headline right now in which the IMF says that the great lockdown is going to be worse than the global financial crisis.

    Mr. Bass: I would name it the “sinister Wuhan virus lock-down”, right? The supernational institutions have all been infiltrated by the Chinese government, and so they call it “COVID-19”, you’re calling it the “coronavirus”—it’s the “Wuhan virus.” That is exactly where it came from. It’s how virus nomenclatures worked for hundreds of years; we should stay with that. And it’s not “racist” to call it something that it is. And so, I think from the perspective of the IMF and the economy, the U.S. alone has already lost 16 million jobs. … We think there’s been 4-5 million new (unemployment) filings last week. So we have 20 million jobs that have been lost today. That 16% unemployment in the US alone. And so, as you know, the better part of 3 billion people are under quarantine, homestays, today, and the global economy is off. And so, when you turn a $23 trillion economy like the U.S. off for between 60-90 days, you’re talking about a $6 trillion hole. We’re going to have to run a 15% or 16% fiscal deficit this year, at the very least. I actually think it will be bigger than that. Next year, it’s going to be north of 10%. During the global financial crisis, we never got wider than a 10% of the GDP fiscal deficit. So, the IMF is right in its numbers. The question is, can we bounce back quickly once we have a vaccine and treatment, and relax our social distancing? I think it’s going to be a little bit more difficult than markets imply at this moment in time.

    Mr. Jekielek: I’m sure all your investors are running to asking questions about this: What is this going to look like? What does recovery look like? Is it V-shape? Is it U-shape? How fast are we going to actually be able to bounce back? Do you have any sense of this at this point?

    Mr. Bass: It’s my view and our firm’s view that it’s going to be a W. It’s not going to be a U or V, or an L. I think that with people holed up in their apartments, their homes, and not able to work from their place of business, and the restaurants are closed, and the whole service economy’s off. When things start to become loosened, and people get out and start to get back to work, the animal spirits are going to be conjured in a positive way; not in the negative way that this began. But I think we’re going to see a lot of enthusiasm, a lot of optimism, because as Americans, we get out of bed every day and we’re very optimistic, and we have the best intellectual property in the world, the best educational institutions in the world. And so, I think we’re going to hit the ground running pretty hard.

    I’m fearful—and I’m very dangerous because all I’ve read (are) a few white papers on the subject; I’m not a virologist by any stretch of the imagination—but it sure looks to me, we have 70 vaccines that are currently under research and review. And at some point in time, I believe that the world, given its intense focus on the subject, is going to develop a vaccine for this hideous Wuhan virus. But I think that’s probably going to take until the end of the year, Jan. So, I don’t know how international travel bounces back because I can tell you, I won’t get on an airplane until there’s no virus, right? I will never cross the pond again, until there’s a vaccine. And so, I don’t think you’re going to see the same level of business activity right away. And so, I say a W because I think we’re going to have an initial spurt, and then the question is when flu season comes back this fall, does it show itself again?

    As we’ve seen in Singapore and Hong Kong, we’re having reinfection. And we’re actually having reinfections of those that are believed to have developed an antibody—[people] that have already recovered from the virus. And so, this is going to be a bit of a slog. And I think a W shape recovery is what we’re looking at. And I think, hopefully, Melinda Gates gave an interview a couple of days ago where she said, … “We think we’ll have a vaccine in the next 18 months.” If it’s 18 months from now, it’s a real problem, Jan. If we don’t get people back to work in the next 45-60 days, we’re going to have damage that’s irreparable, and we’re going to have a much longer lasting damage, and it will also damage the psyche of all the participants. If you remember, there was a profound change in the proclivities of those that suffered the Great Depression. … You probably heard from your father, and your father’s father, about an aversion to debt because it wiped people out back then. And not only did it affect that generation, the 1920s, 1930s, 1940s, but it also affected the baby boomers that were born to that generation, right? And so, there were two entire generations whose actions were influenced by one very specific, horrible financial event. And I believe this will be somewhat of a similar event from the perspective of how people operate their lives going forward. It will not go back to where it was.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle, we just recently had a mental health expert, psychiatrist, pharmacologist, talk about the effect of this lockdown on suicide rates and a whole range of”side effects”. They’re not really “side” because they’re a direct result of what’s actually happening. I couldn’t help but remember this Tweet that you put out recently saying that perhaps there’s been a “delay in reporting” in the Chinese numbers. Well, it looks like there has been a “delay in reporting” the Tiananmen Square numbers, to that point. So, I’m guessing you don’t really believe the Chinese numbers. What are the implications of this?

    Mr. Bass: I’d be willing to bet you, Jan, if you did a 100,000-person survey in the United States, every socio-economic group, and you ask them, “Do you believe the Chinese government numbers?” I would be willing to bet you today that would be an 85% super majority, “No.” … From the origin of the virus and 1.4 billion people, not one of them passed away from the virus when it’s on every continent, and we have millions of cases all over the world? And they say, “No official deaths today,” and I thought back, “Well, they haven’t ever officially reported any deaths from the Tiananmen Square incident, so maybe there’s just a ‘lag in reporting’.” It was a little tongue in cheek saying, “Why should we ever believe the Chinese government?” They just lied to the world in January, and they covered everything up, and now the world is where it is today, and somehow they want us to think that Huawei is the savior because Huawei is delivering masks to hospitals in New York City and Washington, DC. That’s it. Their soft diplomacy—”soft” because they’re delivering masks—it’s so clear what their motives are, and what they’re trying to do and take advantage of a situation that they created themselves. And it’s just ugly. And I think that even Joe Sixpack in the United States, even the guy that grabs a six pack of beer and goes to a NASCAR race, understands that the Chinese government is not trustworthy, they’re not our friends, and one could deem them to be our mortal enemy. And at some point in time, I think Wall Street’s view is going to have to change. And I think it’s happening now.

    Mr. Jekielek: We were talking about the pharmaceutical industry sourcing just about everything from China. And I’m thinking about the Buy American executive order. It seems like a no brainer to repatriate critical medicine production. Why is this being stalled or slowed down?

    Mr. Bass: I’m sure you’ve heard that the Chinese Communist Party decided that anyone that’s to move their supply chains out of China needs a permit to leave. I don’t know if you’ve heard that in the last couple of weeks. But for the last three years, really since the fourth quarter of 2016, when the Chinese completely closed off any kind of external foreign direct investment by rank and file Chinese and even the government—if you remember when they closed the door when they were having a serious currency devaluation problem—companies that do business in China, whether you’re Intel, or Sony, or BMW, or Chevron, those companies haven’t been able to get their dollars out of China, their dollar profits, since the fourth quarter of 2016. I know several of them have hired friends of mine that are former bureaucrats in U.S. administration who have relationships with Wang Qishan, with Xi, with his party, trying to get the money out. They haven’t been able to get the money out for four years, Jan, and now we’re being told that maybe you can’t get your supply chains out.

    Shinzo Abe of Japan, as you probably saw, set forward a program of US$2.25 billion to pay the actual moving costs of the Japanese companies that want to move their supply chains back to Japan, from China. And you probably heard, even Larry Kudlow (Director of the United States National Economic Council) said, “We think that’s a great idea and we should do that.” I am all for setting aside and legislating a pool of capital to help our institutions leave China. And I think that’s, again, a moral imperative—I think we should be out of there. All of the cheap tennis shoes, and T-shirts, and trinkets we buy from China is nowhere near the amount of money that they steal from us every year in intellectual property. People say, “Well, if we just disengage with China, it’s going to cost us 2-2.5% of GDP. To that I say, “They steal 2% of GDP from us every year in intellectual property, and they earn a return on that. It’s actually a better deal for us to just stop. I know that sounds hyperbolic, but it’s just a fact.

    Mr. Jekielek: You’ve been a big advocate of decoupling—bringing the economy out of China. Has anything changed with respect to that view, or the approach, since all this new information we have?

    Mr. Bass: I think the silver lining of this horrible virus is that it’s going to accelerate this decoupling. We’re going to have forced decoupling from a national strategic perspective, let’s say, from our government, and I think there’ll be forced decoupling from many other Western governments. And then you’re also going to see corporate boards … forced to rethink their whole supply chain immediately. So, this is no longer, “Well, we’ll think about it next year, or maybe in our three- or five- year plan. We’ll think about how to maybe open our next factory in Vietnam, or Cambodia, or Mexico, or one of the other competitors to the Chinese factory floor.” Now, it’s forcing everyone to do it right away, and that’s a beautiful thing. So, all this has done is speed up something that had to have been done in the past, (but) people were just dragging their feet.

    Mr. Jekielek: Can you foresee a situation where the Chinese Communist Party says, “Sorry, everything that’s in here, we’re keeping it”? They’ve already done that in a few instances—the nationalizing of certain factories and so forth.

    Mr. Bass: Yes, I know of a company that I’ll leave unnamed, a very large public company, that has $10 billion in cash on its balance sheet as per its annual filing, and $1.5 billion of that money is in China. They haven’t been able to get it for four years, and I don’t know how they’re ever going to get it out, truthfully. And so, this is what I worry about: our pensions and all of the money that China has figured out how to coerce MSCI and the various index providers, the passive providers, to weigh China so heavily. In the MSCI Asia index, if you include U.S. listed ADRs, they’re now 48% of the index, right? They’re supposedly 15% of global GDP, but less than nine-tenths of 1% of global currency cross border transactions settle in Chinese currency. There is a Potemkin Village here. There is an economy that we give them the credit for because we dollarized it at the current dollar exchange rate… Think about this: They’re supposedly the second largest economy in the world, but they have a closed capital account. They’re not a real country. They are ideologically 100% different than the developed West, and economically, they couldn’t be more closed if you look at their capital account. They only have it open enough to buy the things that they need to buy, that they’re so desperate to buy. They have to buy food, they have to buy energy, they have to buy base materials, and they have to buy base metals. They have to buy those things from the rest of the world and they have to spend dollars. They need blood to fuel the CCP tumor, and that blood is dollars. And all they do, their entire MO with Belt and Road, and with cajoling the index players to figure out how to get U.S. dollars into China, because they need those dollars to buy things. No one will accept Chinese monopoly money because no one trusts the government. The beauty of this is once our government really understands this, we hold all the cards—the U.S. government holds all the cards.

    Mr. Jekielek: I want to ask you about the realities of the Chinese economy and the Hong Kong economy. Before we go there, there’s been a number of very high-profile U.S.-listed Chinese companies that have basically lost most of their value because of fraud being discovered. What are the implications of that? Is this the beginnings of some kind of a trend?

    Mr. Bass: I think it catches people by surprise. If we were to poll the population of the United States and say, “do you think Chinese companies that are listed on the US stock exchanges are subject to the same audits that US companies are?” They would probably say, “yes.” Well, that’s just not the case. They aren’t subject to the same Dodd Frank compliance features as US companies are. We gave China a pass, right? The whole Nixon-Kissinger view of China was to open up to this totalitarian, dictatorial regime, and let’s give them a taste of Western capitalism. Let’s bring wealth into their country in dollar terms, and what that should make them do, is open up and become more democratized, and also ideologically, maybe become more of a responsible “global actor.”

    For anyone that’s questioned whether that’s worked out well or not, I think you see that they have gone the other way.

    If you listen to Xi Jinping’s speech in the 19th Party Congress, his entire plan was to build a socialist system. They call it socialism with Chinese characteristics or Marxist, Leninist socialism. They want to build a socialist system to basically show the world that that system is better than Western capitalism. He said that in the 19th Party Congress. He is not trying to converge with the West, he’s trying to teach the West a lesson after their hundred years of being humiliated. Post Opium Wars and Hong Kong and Great Britain, one of those wars. I think it’s important to know that they don’t have any intention to westernize and converge. This is not a race for power. This is a simple ideological difference between two completely different cultures and governmental styles. I actually think it’s intractable. I think this relationship is impossible to solve.

    So when we get into the financial aspects of this, this is where the Chinese propaganda machine has been so effective. A lot of people don’t know that every single joint venture with a US or European financial firm in China, the chief Asian economist of that JB has to be a member of the Chinese Communist Party. So when you think about the fact that Goldman Sachs Asia chief economist must be a member of the Chinese Communist Party, and Barclays Bank Asia, … or even the Chinese investment banks. Everything that gets written about the Chinese financial system is through the lenses of the perpetrator, right through the lenses of the propagandists that want to convey a message to the rest of the world. We all just …give them the benefit of the doubt. We say, ‘well yeah, they have a $13 trillion economy, and that is 15% of global GDP.” They are the second largest economy in the world, and if you purchasing power parity, many of the economists say, well, “China’s already wealthier the United States.” That is such complete crazy talk, but we just give them that benefit of the doubt of the US dollar exchange rate, which they manipulate on a nightly basis and a daily basis. They prop up their currency every single night in the foreign exchange markets, and their capital account is closed. Less than 1% of global transactions settle in their own currency. This is a house of cards.

    If they were to open their capital account, how many wealthy Chinese people do you know, that can’t wait to buy more real estate in China and send their kids to school in China? They all want to send their kids to the west to learn from real schools, and they want to buy property that can’t be taken away from them because we have a rule of law. So their capital account would collapse them, if they opened it up. Their currency would drop 50%-60%. And then think about what their GDP would be. It wouldn’t be 13 trillion, it would be seven or six. Right? And so it’s important to know that again, we give them the benefit of the doubt of having this monstrous economy. It’s big, alright. And they’re influential to a certain extent, but it’s nowhere near as big as they say. Again, they must have dollars to make it work.

    Mr. Jekielek: To your point with these Chinese Communist Party members being the top economists for the Asian operation of all these banks, I think this CCP virus disaster has shown how the political survival of the party is always above all other considerations, even human lives. Never mind talking about honest reporting of financial numbers.

    Mr. Bass: That’s exactly right. When you look at a Marxist-Leninist socialist system, or socialism with Chinese characteristics, it’s always for the betterment of the party. They will trample human rights and basic rights of individuals in order to get to that goal and they make no mistake about that. And we know what they’re doing to the ethnic Uyghurs in northwest China and Xinjiang. We know what they did in Tibet, and we know what they’ve done to the Falun Gong and the Christians. They religiously persecute anyone that doesn’t hold President Xi, or Secretary Xi, above your God or whatever religion you want to practice. It’s actually crazy what they do. And again, we give them passes. Can you imagine if you explain to someone that you’re doing business with a regime that has more than a million prisoners of conscience locked up and is executing live organ harvesting on this population of political prisoners on a daily basis, and yet [companies] like Blackstone can’t wait to invest another dollar in China. People like Sheldon Adelson can’t wait to open another casino in Macau. You know why? Because they just let money blind them to the blatant human rights abuses of maybe one of the most tyrannical regimes that has ever lived. It’s crazy.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle, I’m thinking of something that Alan Leung, one of the perennial pro-democracy people in Hong Kong, said. He said in Hong Kong they have a saying, “if we burn, you’ll burn with us”, i.e., if Hong Kong burns, China will burn as well. You recently showed me your Q1 report for Hong Kong, and honestly, my mouth was wide open. I was kind of feeling the fear. What is the reality around Hong Kong that you can talk about economically right now?

    Mr. Bass: I think Hong Kong is the crucible. Hong Kong has always tried to exist as its own sovereign entity with its own rights under British common law. Back when Deng Xiaoping was negotiating the handover with Margaret Thatcher in the late 1970s, early 1980s, that discussion of the handover of Hong Kong, back to the Chinese, which was to happen in July of 1997 was being had in secret in the early 1980s. When it got around to Hong Kong and around Southeast Asia, who had been enjoying British common law, and essentially a vacation to British existence with a real respect for autonomy and human rights and everything that Hong Kong was so good at back then, when it got around that China was going to get its grimy mitts on Hong Kong, what happened? The currency actually collapsed. So between 1980-1983, the Hong Kong currency fell 50% value versus both the dollar and the pound. That’s what precipitated the Hong Kong monetary authority to peg the currency to the dollar because there were front page articles saying Hong Kong is a banana republic, and that it will be handed back to the Communist Party, and no one knows what they’re going to do with it.

    So that was a crisis that precipitated the peg. 36 years later we are today. But think about this: July 1, 1997 was the handover of Hong Kong back to the Chinese. July 2 1997, the very next day is the day the Thai Baht broke its peg and collapsed 60% That is not coincidental. If you remember the Asian financial crisis happened during the handoff in 1997-98, you had an Asian crisis where all of a sudden they borrowed a lot of dollars, and their currencies collapsed versus the dollar and it blew apart many of those countries. This was the fear of the handoff of Hong Kong back to the Chinese actually happening.

    So you had a crisis that precipitated it, which was a discussion of the handoff. The handoff itself caused another crisis. And here we are today where the Sino-British act of joint declaration of 1984 was signed, whereby China agreed to leave Hong Kong in situ, autonomous until at least 2047. That was the plan 1997 to 2047. They agreed to do it for 50 years. Now in 2047, it was just going to become another city in China. But was going to be a 50-year grace period. In 2019, the Chinese government decided that they wanted to put through a very slick extradition policy whereby any crime the Chinese government alleged anyone in Hong Kong committed they could simply grab them an extradite i.e. take all their personal freedoms away in an extrajudicial environment. That is what precipitated the protests, and that bill floated through the Hong Kong Legco (Legislative Council) in February of 2019, and the protests began in earnest June 1.

    So you already have a significant uprising of the Hong Kongers. You saw a massive part of their population peacefully protest in the streets of Hong Kong this last summer, and what did you see happen? You saw their economy in the third and fourth quarter of last year drop north of a 10% real rate of GDP. It was clocking at the end of the fourth quarter down more than 15% of GDP. For those of you that aren’t economists, when you’re down 10% real GDP, that is not a recession, that is a depression. They are the most levered economy in the world. Their banks are 850% of their GDP and assets, and so when you think back to the European crisis, you had Iceland, Ireland and Cyprus. Remember how those dominoes fell? They fell in order of the size of the banking system. Those banking systems were enormous and they went unchecked. And so at the very first sign of loss, it detonated the entire sovereign.

    What you have happening here, is you have the worst of all situations for Hong Kong. The Hong Kong leadership, Carrie Lam is a failed leader. She is polling at a 14% approval rating. I say this in my office and laugh. I say my door knob could poll at 14%. You could easily get 14% of 100% with anything. So that’s about as low as a political leader can get. She’s finished. She’ll be replaced one day very soon. The police of Hong Kong have lost the trust of the people. The people don’t trust the police. They don’t trust the leadership. The shelves are bare. They’re in a full quarantine, and it’s a failed state. Their GDP before the Wuhan virus was dropping at an annual rate of 15%. They have the most levered banking system in the world, and they’re entering a full depression.

    So what you’re going to see is this concept is crucible of “one country two systems” being a complete failure because ideologically those two systems can’t exist together. These are mutually exclusive of one another. Either you have the heavy hand and rule by law, or you have a rule of law that is respected, everyone’s autonomy and personal freedoms are respected, and so are simple property ownerships and rights. That is all going to be taken away. I don’t know if you saw this, but there is this new person I showed you when you and I talked yesterday, who was just put into place. The butcher of Tibet, Luo Huining, is who the Chinese Communist Party decided should run the relationship between the CCP, China, and Hong Kong. Luo Huining doesn’t even speak Cantonese, and he’s in charge of Hong Kong. So what do you think’s going to happen next? So Hong Kong is this fascinating crucible of these two systems that can’t coexist, finally bashing heads together. This isn’t going to magically get better [where] trust is going to be resumed, and we … go back to the Hong Kong that we knew just about a year ago. Think about January of last year, everything was fine. And look at where we are today. By the way, we haven’t seen any of the numbers since the virus lockdown. So you can’t take an economy that’s 850% levered of GDP in the banks and turn it off, which is what’s happening.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle, I’ve been speaking with a number of friends in Hong Kong about this. People are deeply worried, including US lawmakers. There has been an outpour of support from the west for Hong Kong. But how can Hong Kong even be helped in this situation? It is a big question mark in people’s minds. What can policymakers in the West do to help this? Or is there anything?

    Mr. Bass: The die is cast. The pattern is set. They took on entirely too much leverage. Two of the largest banks in Hong Kong are two British banks with essentially no British depositors and their bankruptcy remote subsidiaries in Hong Kong. I think the die is cast. You can’t lever an economy that much. You can’t have real estate values at astronomical prices, and then all of a sudden turn the economy. You know what happens next, everyone knows what happens next. It doesn’t take a genius to know that they are going to have one of the ugliest banking crises that has ever happened to any country anywhere in the world. That is going to happen this year. Even if we come back from the Wuhan virus in the next few months, Hong Kong is already finished.

    So if the good people of Hong Kong have fought the good fight, for those that can leave, I think they should leave. I think that you and I both know the Chinese surveillance state is going to be reviewing all the videos of the protests, and they’re just going to summarily incarcerate people and rip their liberties away from them. Hong Kong is just going to become another failed city within China. That is what’s going to happen. And it is going to happen 27 years too early. We know the people that are going to execute it. I know that is a grim view, but I can’t see another way out of this for Hong Kong. There are 85,000 US citizens and 200,000 British citizens that live in Hong Kong. You can bet this summer that they are all going to leave.

    Mr. Jekielek: It is a very difficult situation, any which way you slice it. Hong Kong is basically also the conduit through which the foreign direct investment goes into China. So now let’s sort of open up the lens here. Let’s look at the Chinese economy, and what is happening with it. And how are the indexes responding to all this?

    Mr. Bass: The index providers just claim that they practice free speech, very much like the ratings agencies did in the US going into the crisis. Post global financial crisis, the ratings agencies got regulated. These index providers in the US, such as the MSCI the FTSE, all these other ones in the West, are unregulated in the US, and they are actually regulated in Europe. Maybe the US should look to Europe for regulatory oversight, because they set the gold standard. They decide where hundreds of billions of dollars get invested, and they’re basically acting as fiduciaries, but they are not taking fiduciary liability. I think these index providers should be in real trouble going forward. I just believe this money will never come back. I believe that, to your point, much of it will get stuck in China and the relationship between the US and China is only going to worsen going forward.

    Mr. Jekielek: What is the reality for the Chinese economy as we speak? They are saying it is business as usual, and everyone has gone back to work. Of course, we don’t trust the numbers. We know that, but there’s certainly been some recovery that has happened. Where do things stand?

    Mr. Bass: China’s two largest trading partners by far, are the US and Europe. The US and Europe are off. We are closed. We’re at home. Our unemployment rates are skyrocketing in the mid-double digits. Our businesses are shut down. Who is China selling anything to right now is all I want to know. If their economy is fine, and only down a couple percentage points and “nothing to see here.” It is complete BS. Their banking system is 350% of their GDP. They are uber-levered. The leverage in their banks against real estate in tier one and tier two cities in China is enormous. They are going to have a crisis just like we are. The difference between crisis within China versus crisis out of China is that in China, they control everything. How many times have you heard? They are just China. They do what they want.

    Internally, they print more RMB than any economy prints money anywhere in the world. They control the printing press, they control the police, they control the narrative, and they control the government. So internally, they can fix things by printing a lot of their money. Again, that makes their money worth a lot less when and if it ever converts to dollars, euros, yen or pounds. I think it’s important to know that they have an enormous amount of leverage. They have a huge fiscal deficit. Their fiscal deficit was almost 14% of GDP before the crisis. They were running a small current account deficit going into the crisis. Now the world is off. The IMF says global GDP is down 3.5% instead of plus 2-3%. That is a major shift in global GDP. If we get back to work, if we reopen our economy in the next 30-45 days, our GDP will end up dropping 10% or 11%. That’s what I think, and that’s what our numbers show us. If we don’t get back to work in the next 45-60 days, our GDP is going to drop a lot more and it’s going to be a real problem. So just imagine that our banks are one times levered to our economy. And off balance sheet if you include Fannie and Freddie, it’s about 1.3 times. China is 3.5 times levered, and Hong Kong is 8.5 times levered. Just think about the negative convexity of those two situations. They have got their hands full. They have 25 spinning plates, and when one plate drops, they’re all gonna drop.

    Mr. Jekielek: Tell it to me like I’m five. Why does that create a more combustible situation?

    Mr. Bass: You only need to look back at Iceland, Ireland, or Cyprus where let’s say you have had a GDP, for argument’s sake, of 100 billion dollars, and you had a trillion dollars worth of bank loans in your banks. Just imagine. Your GDP is 100 billion. Let’s say you have foreign exchange reserves of 10 billion dollars, and you have a trillion dollars worth of loans in your banks where 5% of the loans go bad or 10% of the loans go bad. God forbid, 10% of your loans go bad when you enter an economic depression. You are going to lose 100 billion dollars. Just think about that. That is your entire economic output. That is 10 times your reserves you’re gonna lose. So that’s why it’s such an enormous problem when you let your banking system grow unchecked, which is what Hong Kong has done.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle, do you expect to see any change in the investment activity of some of these larger entities like CalPERS, that uses the indices to guide their investment?

    Mr. Bass: You are opening an entire new can of worms here by bringing up CalPERS. I’m sure you know, their chief investment officer is actually a member of the Chinese Communist Party. He is the deputy director of China’s currency administrator. You don’t get a top five job in China unless you are part of the party elite. He managed the entire currency reserves for the Chinese Communist Party when he worked at SAFE, and now he somehow has weaseled his way in to be the CIO of the largest pension fund in the United States and he is shoveling dollars to China. That itself needs a full-scale investigation. He has already admitted to being part of the Thousand Talents Program, which I’m sure your viewers know what that is. There are about 70,000 members of the Chinese Communist Party that are instructed to infiltrate other economies and steal all intellectual property methods, business methods, and any kind of secrets and report back to the Communist Party. In fact, they have an award every year for the best theft and they give 750,000-1,000,000 dollars and you get a plaque. Ben Meng, the CIO of CalPERS, is a part of the Thousand Talents Program and a member of the Chinese Communist Party. That begs the question to me: who is your fiduciary responsibility to? In theory, if you are a Communist Party member, there is no one higher than Xi Jinping, even whatever God you want to worship. Yet, if you are the CIO of a massive pension fund, you must have a fiduciary responsibility to the teachers of California. I’m not sure where his loyalties lie. Actually, I’m pretty sure as to where they lie, and therefore that situation itself is crazy. How does that happen in our country? I’m not sure. And we need to change these things.

    Mr. Jekielek: What about the different funds like the military thrift fund? These which, presumably, don’t have the same kinds of challenges that you are describing here, but have still made these decisions based on the indices. Have you heard anything about changes of approach?

    Mr. Bass: There is a way to fix this. If I was anointed to be, let’s say, the head securities regulator in the United States, I could fix it with a few waves of a wand. It would actually be pretty easy. Number one, I would say any company that wants to list in the United States, forget about if it’s just from China or from anywhere else in the world, you have to adhere to real audits just like US companies do. You have to adhere to the same standards as US-listed companies. Let’s just level the playing field. That’s not being punitive. That’s not being xenophobic. That’s not being anything other than saying everyone’s going to play by the same rules, and everyone is going to live by the same rule of law. If we did that, 95% of Chinese companies couldn’t be listed, or maybe 99%. When I was in Washington DC, meeting with members of the House Financial Services Committee, the Senate Finance Committee, I was told by one particular member of Congress, “You know, who was sitting in your very seat yesterday telling me why Chinese companies don’t need to be adhering to the same standards as US companies?” I said “who?” He said it was the head of the Chinese Securities Regulatory Commission, the CSRC, which is the Chinese version of the FCC. He was lobbying US Congress members sitting in their offices, explaining to them that it’s a national secret that every person and every audit within any Chinese SOE is a state secret, and therefore it cannot be audited, to which this one member of Congress said, “we have Northrop Grumman and Raytheon and defense companies that have huge amounts of secrets that our auditors audit and we don’t see their secrets.” To which the Chinese regulator had nothing to say. That Chinese regulator is also a professor at Stanford.

    They have infiltrated every single aspect of our government and our regulatory system. You wonder why their companies don’t have to adhere to the same standards we do? It is unimaginable to me. You could fix that in a nanosecond. Those kinds of things have to happen. You know, when the Chinese invest in our markets? They invest in venture capital or they invest in stocks? Let’s say they invest in Uber and they make $5 billion. You know how much tax they pay on that investment? Zero. Not a penny. They don’t pay a dime of US tax for capital gains, whether it’s short term or long term, it is zero. How many people that watch Epoch Times know that? That is such a simple thing. When Saudi Arabia invests in companies here in the US, and they use our judicial system to adjudicate wrongs that they think were done against them, how much do they pay in tax? Zero. Our system has to change. Those are simple things that we can do to change it.

    Mr. Jekielek: Basically, you are talking about evening the playing field for everyone.

    Mr. Bass: Why doesn’t everyone play by the same rules and have the same taxes here? If you want the benefit of the US rule of law, the US fee simple property ownership, a great western democracy and send your kids to school here, you are going to pay the same taxes that US people pay. How about that? If you want your companies to be listed here, you’re going to submit to the same regulatory procedures and audits that US companies do. Does that sound hyperbolic or crazy to you? It’s not.

    Mr. Jekielek: The theme throughout all of this has been the horror show that comes out of the Chinese Communist Party operating on its own terms in the US and everywhere. The situation that you are describing economically seems to be a threat to the Communist Party. A number of folks that have been on the show have talked about this. I’m wondering about your thoughts. And we’ll finish up with that.

    Mr. Bass: The path to “greatness” that Deng Xiaoping set forth, and that every leader post-Deng followed, whether you are Hu Jintao, Jiang Zemin and now Xi, who has not bided his time and kept his head low like Deng said. Xi is playing his hand out loud and he’s actually playing it in a not-so-smart way in these situations where the globe is in a state of dire stress and he’s overplaying his hand. What I have heard from my contacts within China and the people that I talked to on a daily basis, is the whole faction of Deng Xiaoping and this family. It is the Guangdong elite that are already rattling the cages for change. They believe that Secretary Xi has kind of stuck his head up a little too high and overplayed a bad hand, and I think the larger the economic disruption is, and the more unemployment that ends up coming about in China or let’s say, famine and disease and everything that might come from an economic depression, that could easily unseat this “Emperor for life” and I think his days are numbered, if my economic ideology is even close to being right.

    Mr. Jekielek: Do you think they might try to use him as a scapegoat?

    Mr. Bass: This is like when the military conducts a coup. As we saw in Turkey, a coup has a binary outcome. Either you’re going to win, or you’re going to die or get thrown in jail. So I think this concept of somehow overthrowing Xi is a very dangerous game for those that play it in China, and I think everyone knows that. I am hearing the rumblings already, and we will see if those come to fruition.

    Mr. Jekielek: The reason I’m asking is that just because you change the head doesn’t mean the Chinese Communist Party changes. Right?

    Mr. Bass: Right. For all intents and purposes, the modern Chinese Communist Party like to call it [inaudible] 1949. My god, look at the death and destruction that has happened since then, with horrible experiments on their population. This concept of socialism with Chinese characteristics being a better system. It is all a facade, and a closed capital account. Their desperate need for dollars will actually show the world that the whole thing is a facade. I think that’s a positive thing over time, because Western democracies are, I think, the best systems for inalienable human rights and the rights of great nations. Think about every big war that has been fought, has been fought for freedom. The people of China have no freedom. I just can’t imagine that these two ideologies can coexist in some sort of peaceful manner. We are already fighting three or four wars with them. Let’s hope it never goes kinetic but it is bad as it is. These propaganda, economic, and cyber wars that we’re fighting with the Chinese are principally as hard as they get. We are fighting on a daily basis and fighting a good fight. The problem is, we’re playing a game against an intolerant opponent with tolerance.

    Until we change our ideology and the manner in which we play the game, we are going to be on the wrong end of that stick which we have been for so long. It feels to me like that narrative and our game plan is changing. I think this sinister virus is going to force that change to happen quicker. So it’s a terrible thing for the hundreds of thousands, and I think eventually millions, of people that will lose their lives because someone in China fumbled the virus football in their own end zone. At some point in time, it will actually change the manner in which we interact with such a tyrannical, awful regime.

    Mr. Jekielek: Kyle Bass, such a pleasure to have you on again.

    Mr. Bass: Jan, it is a pleasure seeing you.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 23:30

  • Is This The Safest Place In America To Hide From COVID-19?
    Is This The Safest Place In America To Hide From COVID-19?

    As Americans exit major metros, headed for rural communities, in search of remote areas to weather the virus storm, there has been one question on everyone’s mind: Where is the safest place in America to hide during the pandemic?

    Well, from our past writings, we noted it could be Joshua Tree National Park in Southern California or a doomsday bunker in Colorado, but now it appears to be a small town situated on a five-square-mile peninsula connected to Canada, according to the UK’s Guardian.

    Point Roberts, a pene-exclave of the US, located on the southernmost tip of the Tsawwassen Peninsula, that is south of Vancouver, has a population of approximately 1,300, and is a geographical anomaly – is one of the very few regions on the US mainland to be untouched by the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It’s probably the safest place to be in the country,” said Pamala Sheppard, 65, who has lived on the peninsula since 1989.

    The town found itself isolated last month when the US and Canada agreed to halt travel at the border to all non-essential travel.

    “Because our borders are shut, we’re like an island right now,” Sheppard added. “We’re like an island with no boats.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Christopher Carleton, Point Roberts fire chief, said travel restrictions have dramatically reduced the flow of vehicles from Canada. 

    With the border shut and the peninsula isolated, the town’s economy has slid into recession:

    “Economically, it’s hurting our community, as with any community that’s going through this at this point, but it is in a sense also protecting our community,” Carleton said.

    Carleton said there are no virus cases in the town. Travel restrictions and social distancing have kept many residents at home. He warned that people traveling to places in the US where the virus is festering could bring it back, adding that it would be devastating mainly because the community is overwhelmingly populated with baby boomers. If cases develop, the town does not have the proper medical infrastructure to treat patients.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Drone view of Point Roberts’ marina 

    Theresa Coe, 57, who works at the Point Roberts Marina, said the area is a ghost town, and this is “the safest place in probably North America; definitely within the states,” adding that, “You have US customs coming in and Canadian customs going out. Nothing’s going to happen here or very little.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 23:00

  • What Will You Do If They Try To Extend COVID-19 Lockdowns Into Next Year?
    What Will You Do If They Try To Extend COVID-19 Lockdowns Into Next Year?

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    We are seeing a massive backlash against the coronavirus lockdowns all over the United States, and it is likely that the protests against these lockdowns will only intensify in the days ahead. 

    But some elected officials are doubling down and are insisting that “shelter-in-place” orders will remain in effect in their jurisdictions for quite a few months to come.  I honestly do not know how that is possibly going to work, because after just a few weeks millions upon millions of Americans have become deeply frustrated with these lockdowns.  Trying to confine people to their homes for the foreseeable future is likely to spark tremendous explosions of anger, but that appears to be exactly what authorities intend to do in some of our largest urban areas. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For example, New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio just told Fox News that he expects his city will be shut down until July or August

    New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio joined Bill Hemmer today on FOX News Channel.

    The mayor told Hemmer he does not expect New York City to open until July or August.

    Does he honestly believe that New York City residents will put up with being confined to their homes for another three or four months?

    Over on the west coast, California Governor Gavin Newsom recently told the press that there probably will not be mass gatherings in his state “until we get to herd immunity and we get to a vaccine”

    “The prospect of mass gatherings is negligible at best until we get to herd immunity and we get to a vaccine,” Newsom told reporters at his press briefing.

    “Large-scale events that bring in hundreds, thousands, tens of thousands of strangers … [are] not in the cards based upon our current guidelines and current expectations,” he said.

    It is exceedingly unlikely that we will get to the point of “herd immunity” in the United States this year, and most experts do not anticipate a vaccine until some time in 2021.

    Would he really try to keep his state locked down for that long?

    L.A. Mayor Eric Garcetti appears to be on the exact same page, and he has already pretty much ruled out all large gatherings in his city “until 2021”

    Los Angeles Mayor Eric Garcetti said Wednesday that large gatherings like sporting events and concerts are unlikely to occur until 2021 due to the coronavirus pandemic, a major blow for one of the world’s major sports and entertainment capitals.

    Considering the fact that the NFL has two teams in Los Angeles, this is potentially an absolutely devastating blow for football fans.

    Of course it is possible that the Rams and the Chargers could play their games elsewhere, but that is probably not likely.

    Especially in liberal bastions on the east and west coasts, fear of large gatherings is likely to persist for a long time to come.  Facebook has already canceled all large company events until 2021, and other big tech firms will almost certainly follow suit.

    Infographic: Where COVID-19 Has Been Confirmed in the U.S. | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Without a doubt, everyone should be in favor of reasonable measures to help prevent the spread of the virus, but the hysteria that we are seeing in some areas of California right now is off the charts.

    For instance, Mendocino County has actually banned people from singing in online worship services.  The following is an excerpt from their absurd social distancing directives…

    No singing or use of wind instruments, harmonicas, or other instruments that could spread COVID-19 through projected droplets shall be permitted unless the recording of the event is done at one’s residence, and involving only the members of one’s household or living unit, because of the increased risk of transmission of COVID-19.

    Of course we aren’t just seeing this sort of insanity here in the United States.

    Over in Australia, Prime Minister Scott Morrison is seriously considering extending his nation’s social distancing measures for many months to come

    Australian public life could be constrained for another year because of the coronavirus pandemic, Prime Minister Scott Morrison warned on Friday, as the country’s most populous state mulled sending children to school in shifts.

    Australia has so far avoided the high numbers of coronavirus casualties reported around the world after closing its borders and imposing strict “social distancing” measures for the past month.

    These lockdowns may be slowing down the spread of the virus to a certain extent, but they are also absolutely crushing economic activity.

    Thousands of businesses have been either crippled or destroyed, and tens of millions of jobs have been lost in the United States alone.

    Needless to say, business owners and workers all over the nation are sick and tired of not being able to make a living, and President Trump added fuel to their frustration when he called for several states to be “liberated” on Friday

    President Trump made himself the star of the ‘lockdown rebellion’ on Friday by tweeting ‘LIBERATE Minnesota’ and then adding Michigan and Virginia to the list of states that should be freed.

    The tweets came one day after the president’s coronavirus taskforce rolled out guidelines that would give governors broad power to decide when states’ economies would open back up amid the coronavirus pandemic.

    And instead of waiting for permission, some business owners across the country have decided that they are going to reopen anyway

    Summit Motorsports Park owner Bill Bader Jr. vowed to start holding events with or without government permission, in a Facebook live post earlier this week.

    “I’m not asking, I’m opening,” he said in the video and said that he thought that business closures were an overreaction. “If in Huron County, for example, we are able to save every life and limit and ultimately mitigate any outbreaks of Covid-19, but in the process of that we all starve to death, what have we accomplished.”

    As I have warned all along, Americans are simply not going to have much patience with these sorts of lockdowns, and this is particularly true in areas of the nation that tend to lean conservative.

    Infographic: Going Back to Normal? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    But those on the left are pointing out that we are already starting to see a huge surge in confirmed cases in parts of the country that haven’t been locked down

    The bump in coronavirus cases is most pronounced in states without stay at home orders. Oklahoma saw a 53% increase in cases over the past week, according to data compiled by Johns Hopkins University. Over same time, cases jumped 60% in Arkansas, 74% in Nebraska, and 82% in Iowa. South Dakota saw a whopping 205% spike.

    Once restrictions start being lifted nationwide, it is probably inevitable that we will see another huge wave of new cases and new deaths.

    However, it is important to point out that this virus is going to eventually spread through most of the population no matter what measures we take.  Yes, we want to keep our hospitals from being completely overwhelmed, but we also don’t want to completely destroy our economy at the same time.

    Our policy makers are going to have some very, very tough decisions in the days ahead, and the truth is that this coronavirus pandemic is just the very beginning of our problems.

    The months in front of us are going to be extremely challenging, and life as you have known it will never be the same again.

    The good news is that some of the coronavirus lockdowns will start to be lifted in the weeks ahead, and that will enable millions of Americans to start making a living once again.

    But in other areas, politicians are warning that the lockdowns could last for many months to come.

    If the politicians in your state tried to do that, what would you do?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 22:30

  • Goldman Now Sees A 123% Plunge In Q2 S&P Earnings, $850BN Drop In Corporate Cash Spending
    Goldman Now Sees A 123% Plunge In Q2 S&P Earnings, $850BN Drop In Corporate Cash Spending

    With 9% of S&P 500 firms having already reported Q1 earnings including all of the major banks, results have generally disappointed relative to already tepid expectations. 43% of companies have missed consensus expectations, on pace for the highest rate since at least 1998 with earnings set to drop by 15% Y/Y, but it’s Q2 where the real pain will be with Goldman now expecting S&P 500 to plunge by a record 123% plunge.

    As a result, the very same Goldman which last week announced it no longer expects the S&P to retest the lows and pulled its S&P to 2,000 base case while predicting that stocks will surge to 3,000, which would make forward PE multiples just shy of a bizarro-world 30x, now forecasts S&P 500 cash spending will decline by an annual record 33% during 2020 as firms prioritize liquidity in a worsening economic environment.

    Additionally, Goldman which late last year said that the US is now recession proof and predicted a surge in capital spending, now expects that Capex will decline by 27%, R&D by 9%, and cash acquisition spending by 49%, leading to a 26% plunge in investment for growth, which means a collapse of money in circulation besides that which is injected by the Fed and ends up going directly into risk assets, of course. And, as Goldman first predicted two weeks ago, the bank expects buybacks and dividends will also decline sharply in 2020, falling by 50% and 23%, respectively, which means that once the current CTA-driven rally fades as momentum suffers a “spectacular crash” in the words of Nomura.

    Altogether, Goldman – which has flip-flopped so many times in the past month even the bank’s chief equity strategist David Kostin joked at his latest bullish reversal (See “Goldman Mocks The Absurdity Of Its Own “S&P To 3,000” Forecast“) when he said “surprisingly, the largest shock to the global economy in 90 years has left equities only 18% below the record highs of mid-February and roughly in line with the market price in June 2019, just 10 months ago“, now expects aggregate S&P 500 cash usage will plummet by 33% – or $850 billion – to $1.8 trillion in 2020. Investment for growth (capex, R&D, and cash M&A) will fall by 26% to $1.0 trillion and account for 56% of total S&P 500 cash outlays. Buybacks and dividends will fall by a combined 39% to $770 billion and account for 44% of total spending.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Incidentally JPMorgan is not too far behind, and now expects a 35% decline in shareholder payout, just shy of the 50% recorded during the GFC, with Dividends somewhat more resilient than buybacks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JPM’s forecast may prove quite optimistic, considering that announced buybacks YTD are running at just under the 3-year average.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Below is a breakdown of what Goldman expects will happen to the five key corporate uses of cash: capex, R&D, cash acquisitions, all of which are instrumental for growth, as well as a share buybacks and dividends, i.e., returns to shareholders.

    • S&P 500 capex will fall by 27% to $534 billion during 2020. Sell-side analyst estimates revised during the past 45 days indicate S&P 500 capex likely fell by 5% year/year during 1Q. Goldman expects a 33% decline during the remaining three quarters will result in a 27% full-year drop. Capital expenditures fell by 23% from peak to trough during the Global Financial Crisis and 33% after the collapse of the Tech Bubble. Notably, the Energy sector accounted for one third of the index-level decline in capex after the financial crisis. In contrast, the sector accounted for just 15% of 2019 S&P 500 capex. In addition, Energy spending has declined 50% from its 2014 peak, further reducing the likely drag from Energy on total S&P 500 capex.
    • R&D is comparatively less cyclical than capex and will fall by just 9% in 2020. Since 1990, research and development only experienced a peak-to-trough decline greater than 5% during 2009, when spending fell by 13%. In that experience, 80% of the index-level decline came from Consumer Discretionary and Health Care. Despite the COVID-related R&D spending boost, Healthcare R&D outlays during 2020 may be worse than many investors expect. Most S&P 500 biopharma firms are conducting research to find a vaccine for COVID-19, but data indicate new clinical trials for non-COVID treatments have fallen by 80% since early March.  In addition, a significant portion of vaccine research is being shouldered by governments and NGOs rather than biopharma firms.
    • Cash acquisition spending will fall by 49% due to a collapse in transaction volumes and a shift in consideration toward stock-based deals. Completed M&A volume with a strategic, US-based acquirer has fallen by 2% YTD compared to the year-ago period. However, the cash portion of these deals fell by 31% year/year. Announced volumes have collapsed by 56% YTD, with a similar decline in the cash portion of these deals. We believe continued weak announced M&A volumes, a light backlog of deals pending completion, and a shift in consideration away from cash as firms prioritize liquidity will contribute to a sharp decline in cash acquisitions during 2020. Cash M&A declined by 39% during 2019. Goldman’s forecast decline in 2020 cash M&A spending would result in a 70% peak-to-trough decline and is consistent with declines around the recession during the early 1990s (-75%), the collapse of the Tech Bubble (-64%), and the Global Financial Crisis (-81%). And since corporate CapEx is once of the biggest GDP drivers, this is yet another reason why the bulls can forget about a V-shaped recovery.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • Share repurchases will decline by 50% to $371 billion during 2020. Goldman’s review of S&P 500 earnings transcripts consistently reveals that management teams view buybacks as the lowest priority use of cash. Since the beginning of March, 58 S&P 500 companies accounting for 29% of total 2019 buybacks have suspended their repurchase programs. Mounting  liquidity constraints and increasing political and social pressure will curtail buyback spending during 2020.
    • Aggregate S&P 500 dividends will slide by 23% to $398 billion in 2020. S&P 500 dividends per share (DPS) rose by 9% in 1Q. However, since the start of 2Q, 21 firms accounting for 4% of overall DPS have cut or suspended their dividend. Dividend suspensions, cuts, and eliminations will result in S&P 500 DPS falling by 25% vs. 2019 levels, according to Goldman. For context, futures imply an 18% decline this year. The relationship between changes in S&P 500 DPS and aggregate dividends – which also includes cash preferred dividends – suggests total dividend spending will fall by 23% during 2020. In contrast, bottom-up analyst dividend expectations imply S&P 500 DPS will increase by 2% during 2020. This may be yet another reason why the market will suffer a spectacular second crash as soon as reality collides with sellside narrative fiction again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That said, not all companies will slash dividends during 2020. In fact, this week JNJ and PG announced dividend hikes of 6.3% and 6.0%, respectively. To reflect the new reality, Goldman has rebalanced its dividend growth basket, which consists of the 50 S&P 500 stocks with the best combination of dividend yields and expected dividend growth; here each company has a payout ratio of less than 75%. There are 25 new constituents in the basket since it was rebalanced in Oct. 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And here something curious: after investors rewarded the biggest trash companies, those with the worst and most levered balance sheets for most of the past decade, the market has shifted and investors instead have started to reward firms with safe balance sheets. Consistent with the YTD outperformance of strong balance sheets, debt reducers have outperformed debt issuers YTD, and Goldman’s Debt Reducers basket has outperformed a comparable basket of Debt Issuers by 8 pp YTD (-18% vs. -26%). The median stock in the basket of Debt Reducers paid down debt equal to 5% of enterprise value during the past 12 months vs. an increase of 5% for the median debt issuing stock and no change for the typical S&P 500 stock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then again, with the Fed now explicitly backstopping the riskiest of companies by buying their junk – literally – we fully expect that this brief return to investing sanity will quickly reverse, as algos and millennial traders reward the biggest junk they can find, sparking more short squeezes until everything crashes again and the Fed is forced to start buying stocks.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 22:00

  • Reopening Too Soon Could Cause "Exponential Explosion" Of US COVID-19 Cases, MIT Researchers
    Reopening Too Soon Could Cause "Exponential Explosion" Of US COVID-19 Cases, MIT Researchers

    Authored by Victor Tangermann via Futurism.com,

    Researchers at MIT trained a neural network model on data that predicted the spread of the coronavirus from late January to early March, including information on how countries implemented quarantine measures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The researchers have a dire warning, as detailed in a preprint uploaded to medRxiv earlier this month.

    Having positively noted that:

    “In the case of the US, our model captures well the current infected curve growth and predicts a halting of infection spread by 20 April 2020.”

    The researchers warn that reopening the US too early would lead to a catastrophe.

    “We further demonstrate that relaxing or reversing quarantine measures right now will lead to an exponential explosion in the infected case count, thus nullifying the role played by all measures implemented in the US since mid March 2020,” reads the paper.

    The researchers’ model focused on four locations: Wuhan, Italy, South Korea and the US — and found some good news.

    “Our results unequivocally indicate,” they wrote, “that the countries in which rapid government interventions and strict public health measures for quarantine and isolation were implemented were successful in halting the spread of infection and prevent it from exploding exponentially.”

    The neural network was able to closely match the predictions by just feeding it data from January 24 to March 3. It was able to validate the US’s current infected curve growth and was even able to pinpoint a “halting of infection spread by April 20.”

    The danger in reopening the gates and relaxing measures is very real.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Singapore experienced a spike in new COVID-19 cases this week after initially seeing major successes after implementing lockdown measures.

    The news also comes on the same day that president Donald Trump revealed his plans for “Opening Up America Again,” a guideline document for state governors.

    “America wants to be open and Americans want to be open,” he said during today’s announcement. “A national shutdown is not a sustainable long-term solution.”

    Epidemiologists found major flaws with the statistics model that the White House’s new guidelines were based on, warning that it was unreliable and misleading for the public and policy makers, according to STAT.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 21:30

  • Shocking Report Shows Half The Homeless At Boston Shelter Tested Positive For COVID-19: And None Had Symptoms
    Shocking Report Shows Half The Homeless At Boston Shelter Tested Positive For COVID-19: And None Had Symptoms

    Researchers and clinicians who have ‘experimented’ with random mass testing for COVID-19 have made some pretty amazing – and amazingly depressing – discoveries. Yesterday, we shared a report about one sweeping antibody testing regime set up by researchers in Santa Clara County in California.

    The study found that the estimated level of novel coronavirus penetration in the county was “50-80% higher” than what had been recorded.

    If that isn’t enough to terrify every day trader who ratcheted up their exposure heading into the weekend, a news story about another surprising discovery – this time on the East Coast – has just come to our attention.

    After a cluster of cases involving residents of a South Boston homeless shelter, Massachusetts public health officials tested every resident of the Pine Street shelter in Boston’s South End.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The results have garnered the attention of the CDC, which is “actively investigating the situation,” according to Boston 25 News.

    The CDC is now “actively looking into” into universal COVID-19 testing at Pine Street Inn homeless shelter.

    The broad-scale testing took place at the shelter in Boston’s South End a week and a half ago because of a small cluster of cases there.

    Of the 397 people tested, 146 people tested positive. Not a single one had any symptoms.

    “It was like a double knockout punch. The number of positives was shocking, but the fact that 100 percent of the positives had no symptoms was equally shocking,” said Dr. Jim O’Connell, president of Boston Health Care for the Homeless Program, which provides medical care at the city’s shelters.

    O’Connell said that the findings have changed the future of COVID-19 screenings at Boston’s homeless shelters.

    The big takeaway, if you couldn’t tell, is that a pattern is developing here: When mass testing is conducting, a shocking number of new cases are being identified, and – what’s even more surprising – often none of them even show any symptoms/.

    As we’ve noted several times already today, the theme of under-counting cases and deaths in institutions like nursing homes, prisons, homeless shelters and other settings has been especially prominent lately, as officials try to compensate for missed or undercounted cases and, in some countries, the veracity of the ‘official’ numbers is becoming a hot potato political issue.

    The discovery of so many asymptomatic cases, many of which involve individuals who are indigent and presumably at high risk, has, according to the report, changed the way public health officials in Massachusetts are testing.

    O’Connell said that the findings have changed the future of COVID-19 screenings at Boston’s homeless shelters.

    “All the screening we were doing before this was based on whether you had a fever above 100.4 and whether you had symptoms,” said O’Connell. “How much of the COVID virus is being passed by people who don’t even know they have it?”

    The 146 people who tested positive were immediately moved to two different temporary isolation facilities in Boston. According to O’Connell, only one of those patients needed hospital care, and many continue to show no symptoms.

    But that’s not all: It’s also forces officials to confront the uncomfortable elephant in the room: what would “the curve” look like if we had the capacity for general testing?

    “If we did universal testing among the general population, would these numbers be similar?” said Lyndia Downie, president and executive director at the Pine Street Inn. “I think there are no many asymptomatic people right now. We just don’t know. We don’t have enough data on universal testing to understand how many asymptomatic people are contagious.”

    Hundreds of tests are now set to be conducted at additional Boston homeless shelters in the coming days.

    “It tells you, you don’t know who’s at risk. You don’t know what you need to do to contain the virus if you don’t actually have the details or facts,” said Marty Martinez, Boston’s chief of Health and Human Services.

    What would be the takeaway here? Is the mortality rate in the US, which has lingered at a surprisingly high 5% according to the official numbers, in reality significantly lower? Or is there perhaps even more that we’re missing here?

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 21:00

  • Exposing The New Fault Lines In A Post-Globalized World
    Exposing The New Fault Lines In A Post-Globalized World

    Authored by Marshall Auerback and Jan Ritch-Frel. This article was produced by Economy for All, a project of the Independent Media Institute

    The coronavirus pandemic has upended the global economic system, and just as importantly, cast out 40 years of neoliberal orthodoxy that dominated the industrialized world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Forget about the “new world order.” Offshoring and global supply chains are out; regional and local production is in. Market fundamentalism is passé; regulation is the norm. Public health is now more valuable than just-in-time supply systems. Stockpiling and industrial capacity suddenly make more sense, which may have future implications in the recently revived antitrust debate in the U.S.

    Biodata will drive the next phase of social management and surveillance, with near-term consequences for the way countries handle immigration and customs. Health care and education will become digitally integrated the way newspapers and television were 10 years ago. Health care itself will increasingly be seen as a necessary public good, rather than a private right, until now in the U.S. predicated on age, employment or income levels. Each of these will produce political tensions within their constituencies and in the society generally as they adapt to the new normal.

    This political sea change doesn’t represent a sudden conversion to full-on socialism, but simply a case of minimizing our future risks of infection by providing full-on universal coverage. Beyond that, as Professor Michael Sandel has argued, one has to query the “moral logic” of providing “coronavirus treatment for the uninsured,” while leaving “health coverage in ordinary times… to the market” (especially when our concept of what constitutes “ordinary times” has been upended).

    Internationally, there will be many positive and substantial international shifts to address overdue global public health needs and accords on mitigating climate change. And it is finally dawning on Western-allied economic planners that the military price tag that made so-called cheap oil and cheap labor possible is vastly higher than investment in advanced research and next-generation manufacturing.

    This also means that the old North (developed world) versus South (emerging world) division that long preoccupied scholars and policymakers in the post–World War II period will become increasingly stark again, particularly for those emerging economies that have hitherto attracted investment largely on the grounds of being repositories of low-cost labor. They will now find themselves picking sides as they seek assistance in an increasingly divided and multipolar world.

    The fault lines of the next economic era have already begun to surface, creating friction with the previous international structure of banking and finance, trade and industry. There is a force beyond elites and critical industries driving this: The proletariat has literally become the “precariat.”

    In the U.S. and Europe, the staggering number of service economy workers are going to be quickly politicized by the shortfalls: People have seen a collapse in income, and big failures in education, and health care. Union-busting, pension fleecing, and austerity budgets and new technologies that concentrate wealth away from labor have created a circumstance where ownership and profit models must be revisited to sustain stability. The needs are too acute to be distracted by the lies of Trump, or the inadequate responses in other parts of the industrialized world. The current crisis will likely prompt geopolitical and economic shifts and dislocations we haven’t seen since World War II.

    Death of Chimerica, the Rise of New Production Blocs

    One of the biggest casualties of the current order is the breakdown of “Chimerica,” the decades-old nexus between the U.S. and Chinese economies, along with other leading countries’ partnerships with Chinese manufacturing. While the geopolitics of blame for the origins of coronavirus continue to shake out, the process that saw a decrease in exports from China to the U.S. from $816 billion in 2018 to $757 billion in 2019 will accelerate and intensify over the next decade.

    While a decoupling is unlikely to lead to armed conflict, a Cold War style of competition could emerge as a new global fault line. Much as the Cold War did not preclude some degree of collaboration between the U.S. and the former Soviet Union, so too today there may still be areas of cooperation between Washington and Beijing from climate to public health, advanced research to weapons proliferation.

    Nor does this shift necessarily spell the sudden collapse of Chinese power or influence—it has a colossal and still-growing domestic market and is on the international leaderboard for a wide range of advanced indicators. But its status as the world’s most desirable offshore manufacturing hub is a thing of the past, along with the economic stability that steady inflows of foreign capital brought with it. It does show a susceptibility to domestic stress, with the Hong Kong protests last year providing a hint of what is in store as the party leadership can’t pivot to new realities that include slower economic growth and declining foreign investment.

    As investment flows turn inward back to industrialized countries, there will likely be corresponding diminution of the global labor arbitrage emanating from the emerging world. In general, that’s a negative for the global South, but potentially a positive factor for workers elsewhere, whose wages and living standards have stagnated for decades as they lost jobs to competing overseas low-cost manufacturing centers (the increase in inequality is principally a product of 40 years of sustained attacks on unions). The jobs won’t be the same, but to be sure, manufacturing incomes exceed those of the service industry.

    As each country adopts a “sauve-qui-peut” mentality, businesses and investors are drawing the necessary conclusions. Coronavirus has been a wake-up call, as countries trying to import medical goods from existing global supply chains face a shortage of air and ocean freight options to ship goods back to home markets. Already, the Japanese government has announced its plans “to spend over $2 billion to help its country’s firms move production out of China,” according to the Spectator Index. The EU leadership is publicly indicating a policy of subsidy and state investment in companies to prevent Chinese buyouts or undercutting prices.

    Two billion dollars is small potatoes compared to what is likely to be spent by the U.S. and other countries going forward. And it can’t simply be done via research and development tax credits. The state can and must drive this redomiciling process in other ways: via local content requirements (LCRs), tariffs, quotas and/or government procurement local sourcing requirements. And with a $750-billion-plus budget, the U.S. military will likely play a role here, as it ponders disruptions from overseas supply sources.

    Of course, if the U.S. does this, other parts of the world—China, the EU, Japan—will likely do the same, which will accelerate the regionalization trends in trade. This may mean that some U.S. firms will have to operate in foreign markets through local subsidiaries with local content preferences and local workforces (that is how it worked in the 1920s—Ford UK was a mostly local British company, different from the U.S. Ford Motor Company, but with shared profits).

    An examination of U.S. planning for the post-1945 world reveals the emphasis was on free trade in raw materials mostly, not finished goods. (The U.S. only adopted one-way “free trade” with its Asian and European allies later as a Cold War measure to accelerate their development and keep them in the American orbit.)

    Domestically within the U.S., as Dalia Marin writes, the coming declines in interest rates will accelerate “robot adoption” by 75.7 percent, with concentration “in the sectors that are most exposed to global value chains. In Germany, that means autos and transport equipment, electronics, and textiles—industries that import around 12 percent of their inputs from low-wage countries. … Globally, the industries where the most reshoring activity is taking place are chemicals, metal products, and electrical products and electronics.”

    As the coronavirus pandemic is illustrating, a viable industrial ecosystem cannot work effectively if it is dispersed to too many geographic extremities or there are insufficient redundancies built into the transportation of goods back into the home market (rail, highway, etc.). Proximity has become a significant competitive advantage for manufacturers, and a strategic advantage for governments. But the U.S. government must play an expanded role in the planning process. The U.S. is still a leader in many high-tech areas, but is suffering the consequences of a generation-long effort to undermine the government’s natural role as an economic planner.

    In the form of the regionalized blocs that are being sketched, in the Americas, Mexico is likely to be one of the leading recipients of American foreign direct investment (FDI). It already has a $17 billion medical device industry and is sure to absorb much more capacity from China. This has already started to happen as a result of the U.S.–Mexico–Canada Agreement (USMCA, or new NAFTA). Furthermore, the Washington Post reports that “[a]s demand soars for medical devices and personal protective equipment in the fight against the coronavirus, the United States has turned to the phalanx of factories south of the border that are now the outfitters of many U.S. hospitals.” This is in addition to the thousands of assembly plants already in place in Mexico since the establishment of NAFTA. Indeed, if the jobs that had moved to China move to Mexico, Central America, and South America, this likely addresses many long-standing social tensions in regard to immigration management, currency imbalances and corresponding black market industries (ironically, it also likely means the end of Trump’s wall, as the industrial ecosystem of the Americas becomes more cohesive and widespread).

    Big Business Is Good Business

    But this will also have significant impacts closer to home: Much as Franklin Delano Roosevelt ultimately prioritized domestic ramp-ups in wartime production over trust-busting, so too national champions are likely to feature more prominently today, as domestic scale and balance sheet strength are given precedence to accommodate the drive to revive employment quickly, and work collaboratively to halt the spread of the coronavirus. The scale of companies will not be regarded as a political problem if they can both deliver for consumers and show the capacity of following political direction for what the public’s needs are. Tech companies like Apple and Google are stepping up to fill the void left by massive federal government dysfunction. The “break up Big Tech” voices are nowhere to be heard at the moment.

    We still need a more robust form of regulation for these corporate behemoths, but via a system of regulation that is “function-centric,” rather than size-centric. As co-author Marshall Auerback has written before, this kind of regulation “restricts the range of corporate activities (e.g., structural separation so as to prevent companies like Amazon and Google from owning both the platform as well as participating as a seller on that platform), or the prices such companies can charge (as regulators often do for utilities or railways). These considerations would be ‘size neutral’: they would apply independently of corporate size per se.”

    Capitalism has always had its plutocrats, but scaling back America’s overly financialized model (by preventing stock buybacks, to cite one example) would represent a useful reform and prevent a lot of economic waste. Instead of going to enrich executives and shareholders beyond the dreams of Croesus, that measure might help to ensure that the profits of these companies will be directed to the workers’ wages (which also means supporting increased unionization), or plowed back into investment (e.g., increased robotics).

    Biodata, Privacy, and an End to Pandemic Profiteering

    And there are fault lines in the business world. The pharmaceutical and medical research industries face immense pressure from other businesses to end the pandemic so they can get back to profitability. That means temporarily setting aside profits and pooling intellectual property to encourage collaborative efforts on the part of biotech and pharmaceutical companies to find proper treatments for COVID-19, and make them freely available, especially if governments were to waive antitrust scrutiny in exchange for all of the data Big Pharma companies collectively hold. As the Guardian reports, “[t]here is a precedent. Last June, 10 of the world’s largest pharmaceutical companies—including Johnson & Johnson, AstraZeneca and GlaxoSmithKline—announced they would pool data for an AI-based search for new antibiotics, which are urgently needed as antibiotic-resistant bacteria have proliferated across the world, threatening the growth of untreatable disease.”

    Privacy advocates are already expressing concerns about a growing and overweening medical surveillance state. These surveillance concerns lack historical context: From the 19th century on, serious health problems were met by hardline government policies to reduce them. Policies ranging from quarantine to vaccine were not always mandatory, but there was an understanding that personal concessions had to be made to manage a huge population and an advanced society; the Constitution was not a suicide pact. We can further alleviate those concerns today by ensuring that the information uncovered does not become a precondition or additional cost of receiving insurance coverage. In light of coronavirus, cost savings of incorporating biodata into immigration and customs are a no-brainer for governments, and are certain to cause friction with individuals who may not want to give blood or saliva to get a visa or work permit, and agribusiness leaders who know that safety measures cut into profitability. But the scales have tipped in the other direction.

    North Versus South

    What about the other countries in the developing world that don’t have close geographic proximity to a home market, or abundant supplies of key commodities required for 21st-century manufacturing needs, or even a well-developed manufacturing base (in other words, the countries that have hitherto been large recipients of investment solely on the grounds of cheap labor)? Many of them have faced immediate pressure with the collapse in global trade, unprecedented capital flight that is sure to grow as the coronavirus spreads, all the while coping with COVID-19 with highly inadequate health systems.

    In the meantime, the multi-trillion-dollar market for emerging market debt, both sovereign bonds and commercial paper, has collapsed. Many of these countries, via their state pension funds and sovereign wealth funds, have become the ultimate endpoint for many of the newer asset-backed securities that finally revived years after the 2008 financial crisis. This has become the potential new stress point in the $52 trillion “shadow banking” market. The U.S. Federal Reserve has sought to ease the funding stresses of much of the developing economies by offering central bank swap lines. It has also broadened prime dealer collateral acceptance rules, and set up commercial paper swap facilities, all of which have eased short-term funding pressures in these economies that have incurred substantial dollar liabilities.

    As the emerging world central banks then start to lend on those lines to their own banks, it should start to alleviate the shortage of dollars in the offshore dollar funding markets. We are starting to see some easing of stresses, notably in Indonesia—because it’s an exporter of resources more than a cheap labor price economy.

    But whereas in previous emerging markets crises, China was able to buttress these economies via initiatives such as the “Belt and Road Initiative,” Beijing itself is likely to be buffeted by the twin shocks of declining global trade and a reversal of foreign direct investment, which declined 8.6 percent in the first two months of this year.

    Longer-term, many other countries face comparable challenges to China: Capital controls, collapsing domestic currencies, and widespread debt defaults are likely to become the norm. That’s already happened to serial defaulter Argentina again. South Africa has been downgraded to junk status. Turkey remains vulnerable. The so-called “BRICS” economies—Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa—are all sinking like bricks. The problem is exacerbated by the fact that coronavirus and likely future pandemics will create additional stresses on developing economies that depend on their labor price advantage in the international marketplace to survive.

    By contrast, countries like South Korea and Taiwan have had a “good crisis.” Both have vibrant manufacturing sectors and created successful multiparty democracies. Foreign investment in South Korea continued to grow in the first quarter of this year, as it rapidly moved to contain the spread of COVID-19 through an extensive testing regime (while keeping its economy open). Similarly in Taiwan, by activating a national emergency response system launched in 2004 (following the SARS virus), that country has mounted a thoroughly competent coronavirus intervention of unprecedented effectiveness. The results speak for themselves: as of April 15, in South Korea, a mere 225 deaths, while in Taiwan, an astonishingly low total of six deaths in a country of 24 million people—this despite far more exposure to infected Chinese visitors than Italy, Spain or the U.S.

    Of course, the very success of Taiwan’s response revives another potential fault line, namely the tension underlying the “One China” policy. Before COVID-19, it is noteworthy that the WHO “even refused to publicly report Taiwan’s cases of SARS until public pressure prompted numbers to be published under the label of ‘Taiwan, province of China,’” according to Dr. Anish Koka. At the very least, Taiwan’s divergent approach and success at fighting the pandemic will bolster its pro-independence factions.

    The question of foreign nations upholding Taiwan’s sovereignty with regard to China is increasingly thorny, given Beijing’s growing military capacities. This will present an ongoing diplomatic challenge to Western parties who seek to increase engagement with Taipei without heightening tensions in the region.

    A Recalculation of ‘Economic Value’

    We have outlined many fault lines likely to be exposed or exacerbated as a consequence of COVID-19. Happily, there is one fault line likely to be slammed shut: namely, the false dichotomy that has long existed between economic growth and environmentalism. The Global Assessment from the Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services reports that “land degradation has reduced the productivity of 23 percent of the global land surface, up to US$577 billion in annual global crops are at risk from pollinator loss and 100-300 million people are at increased risk of floods and hurricanes because of loss of coastal habitats and protection.” Likewise, the study cites the fact that as of 2015, 33 percent of marine fish stocks “were being harvested at unsustainable levels,” and notes the rise of plastic pollution (which “has increased tenfold since 1980”), both of which play a key role in degrading ecosystems in a manner that ultimately destroys economic growth.

    Finally, repeated pandemics over the past few decades have shown these are not blips, but recurrent features of today’s world. Hence, there is an increasing public appetite for regulation to deal with this ongoing problem. Some industries, such as agribusinesses, won’t like this, but the concerns are well-founded. According to expert Josh Balk, 75 percent of new diseases start in domestic and wild-caught animals, and 2.2 million people die each year from illnesses transferred from animals. The majority of these are transferred from poorly regulated factory farm chickens, cows and pigs; still, the “wet markets” of Asia and Africa, and the trade in potential “transfer species,” such as pangolins, a major driver of the $19 billion-a-year global trade in illegal wildlife, must also be addressed. Beijing has suggested it will ban trade in illegal wildlife and seek tighter regulation of the wet markets. The latter in particular may be easier said than done, according to Dr. Zhenzhong Si, a research associate at Canada’s University of Waterloo who specializes in Chinese food security, sustainability, and rural development. Dr. Si argued that “[b]anning wet markets is not only going to be impossible, but will also be destructive for urban food security in China as they play such a pivotal role in ensuring urban residents’ access to affordable and healthy food.”

    To be fair, this isn’t the first time that the sacred tenets of the global economic framework have dealt with a crisis that seemed to usher in a new era. The same thing happened in the aftermath of the financial crisis of 2008. But that was largely seen as a financial crisis, a product of faulty global financial plumbing that nobody truly understood, as opposed to a widespread social collapse closely approximating the conditions of the Great Depression as we have today.

    Not only has the current lockdown put the entire global economy into deep freeze, but it also came amidst a backdrop of widespread political and social upheaval, and a faux recovery whose fruits were largely restricted to the top tier. A collateralized debt obligation is not intuitively easy to grasp. By contrast, being forced to stay at home, deprived of vital income and isolated from loved ones, while health care workers perish from overwork and lack of protective gear, is a different order of magnitude.

    Even as we re-integrate, it is hard to envisage a return to the “old normal.” Trade patterns will change. Self-sufficiency and geographic proximity will be prioritized over global integration. There will be new winners and losers, but it is worth noting that the model of capitalism we are describing—one that does not feature obscenely overcompensated CEO pay co-existing with serf labor and the widespread offshoring of manufacturing—has existed in different forms in the U.S. from 1945 into the 1980s, and still exists in parts of Europe (Germany) and East Asia (Japan, South Korea, Taiwan) to this day.

    Our everyday lives will be impacted as selective quarantines and some forms of social distancing become the new normal (much as they were when we dealt with tuberculosis epidemics). All of this has implications for a multitude of industries: restaurants, leisure, travel, tourism, sporting events, entertainment, and media, as well as our evolving definition of “essential” industries. Even our concept of personal privacy will likely have to be amended, especially in regard to medical matters. Concerns about medical surveillance—stigma (STDs, alcoholism, mental illness) and denial of insurance—can be alleviated if everyone is guaranteed treatment regardless of ability to pay, which will mean greater government intrusion into the lives of citizens and activities of businesses as the public sector seeks to socialize costs.

    Taken in aggregate, we are about to experience the most profound social, economic and political changes since World War II.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 20:35

  • "Under Siege" – Social Unrest Unfolds As Frustrated Americans Demand Reopening Of Economy
    "Under Siege" – Social Unrest Unfolds As Frustrated Americans Demand Reopening Of Economy

    We laid the groundwork for readers over the last three weeks that social instabilities could materialize during or after the pandemic. It has become clear that protests in Lansing, Michigan, on Thursday (April 16), was the beginning of the lockdown-backlash that is now unfolding across the country. 

    Americans are becoming increasingly frustrated with state governments that have closed their economies and issued strict stay-at-home public health orders, resulting in one of the worst economic crashes in the country’s history.

    More than 22 million people have lost their jobs in a month, and the true extent of the crash won’t be realized until the second half of the year. The one thing we do know is the financial crash has been so severe that it has forced people to organize on social media to mobilize en mass at their respective state capitol buildings across the country, demanding their governors reopen the economy and return life to normal. 

    The lockdown-backlash sounds like a revolution is in the making. And, of course, every revolution has a song, and maybe this Nickelback song “Edge Of A Revolution,” already circulating on some pro-Trump feeds, could be it. 

    As for Saturday’s protests, Infowars’ Owen Shroyer is planning one at the Texas state capitol in Austin. The rally is called “You Can’t Close America,” which is directed at the Texas state government to put an end to the draconian measures that have confined people to their homes for nearly a month. 

    In Maryland, a protest organization known as Reopen Maryland is already underway in locking down streets around the state capitol building in Annapolis. 

    “We are the strongest country on the planet and have put a man on the moon, there is no compelling reason why we can’t protect the sick and vulnerable and get our economy back to work,” the Facebook event says.

    The group has 13,000 members on Facebook. By Saturday afternoon, dozens of vehicles, presumably from the group, were shutting down streets. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    From Oregon, California, Idaho, Minnesota, Michigan, Florida, Virginia, and Maryland, thousands of people are ignoring social distancing rules and are protesting their state governments to reopen the economy on Saturday. 

    In a series of tweets on Friday, appearing to kick off the protests for this weekend, President Trump tweeted: “LIBERATE MICHIGAN!,” “LIBERATE MINNESOTA!,” and “LIBERATE VIRGINIA, and save your great 2nd Amendment. It is under siege!”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stephen Moore, a member of President Trump’s council to reopen the country, launched a protest in Wisconsin on Saturday. Here are some scenes from the rally: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President Trump released plans on Friday to reopen individual states in phases that were currently experiencing a flattening in the cases and deaths.  

    The president is eager to reopen the economy to save it from a crushing depression. The danger of reopening an economy too soon is that it could spark a second wave. 

    And maybe now is not the best time to reopen, considering deaths across the US are surging once more… 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    People are protesting across the country, ignoring social distancing rules and lacking proper health gear, which could result in a further spread of the virus. Nevertheless, the attempt to reopen will be a failure, just look at what’s happening in China… However, we suspect the protests will grow over the next couple of weeks. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 20:10

  • CLOs Face "Extinction Level Event" As Moodys Prepares To Downgrade A Fifth Of All CLO Bonds
    CLOs Face "Extinction Level Event" As Moodys Prepares To Downgrade A Fifth Of All CLO Bonds

    Over the past month, in its quest to bailout the richest Americans and the country’s financial system, the Fed has unleashed an unprecedented array of actions meant to backstop capital markets, going so far as buying investment grade, high yield bonds and even AAA-rated CLO bonds.

    It won’t be enough.

    In what would mark the most draconian and widespread ratings action since the financial crisis, on Friday Moody’s warned it may cut the ratings on $22 billion of U.S. collateralized loan obligations – a fifth of all such bonds it grades – as a result of the collapse in cash flows due to the Covid-19 pandemic.

    The ratings agency took action on 859 bonds from 358 CLOs that package leveraged loans into securities of varying degrees of risk and return. The step – which according to Bloomberg affects about 19% of Moody’s-rated CLOs that purchase broadly syndicated loans – comes as the underlying debt gets downgraded at a record pace.

    Earlier in the week, Moodys reported that its “B3 Negative and lower list” soared to its highest tally ever — 311 companies. That tops a former peak of 291 companies, reached during the credit crisis of 2009 and the commodity-related downturn in April 2016. At 20.7% of the total rated spec-grade population, the list also shot up above its long-term average of 14.8%, and closing in on its all-time high of 26.1%. This spike is the result of the confluence of a coronavirus outbreak, plunging oil prices, and mounting recessionary conditions, which created severe and extensive credit shocks across many sectors, regions and markets, the effects of which are unprecedented.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And with the underlying bonds set to suffer an unprecedented collapse in solvency, it is only a matter of time before the products where they are packaged are also hammered.

    Which brings us to what some have called a possible “extinction level event” for the CLOs space, and not just the lowest rated tranches. On Friday, Moody’s warned that as a result of a surge in expected losses on the CLO securities which have “increased materially,” it could downgrade an unprecedented 20% of all CLOS, with more than 40% of the bonds on review having an investment-grade rating, with 13 rated A, and 355 rated at the Baa level. The rest have sub-investment ratings through to CCC.

    While we have discussed the importance of CLOs for both the US loan markets – and Japan’s banks and insurance companies –   on numerous previous occasions (here, here and here), in a nutshell CLOs are the biggest buyers in the $1.2 trillion leveraged loan market, which in recent years fueled a boom in debt-fueled buyouts and other transactions. But the loans have been particularly hard-hit in the market rout triggered by the pandemic, with a benchmark index plunging last month to the lowest level since the global financial crisis (although the index has recovered some of its losses in recent weeks when the Fed stepped in to partially backstop the sector).

    As Bloomberg notes, the extent of losses that CLO bonds incur depends on the deals’ exposure to downgrades and other negative ratings actions on the underlying loans, as well as the bonds’ priority in the capital structure. How much cushion the bonds have either from asset coverage or cash flow diverted from riskier debt that sits below them is also a factor.

    In any event, the more severe the downgrades, the greater the impairments for structured investors, with losses potentially stretching deep into the A-space. And while Moody’s said it usually tries to conclude its ratings reviews within 90 days, the “high degree of uncertainty” of the current environment may mean it takes longer.

    Or not: in summarizing the surge in deep junk rated companies, the rating agency said that “key indicators flashing red on an alarming rise in spec-grade credit stress, increasing defaults” and added that “a wide range of industry outlooks turned negative in the first quarter of 2020, based in large part on the economic consequences of the coronavirus outbreak.” Worse, “the share of companies carrying B3 ratings is much higher than at the start of 2009, providing tinder to fuel future downgrades. These companies will find it difficult to refinance debt in deteriorating economic conditions and, once downgraded, could ultimately face a default if markets remain shut to lower-rated issuers.”

    Moody’s warning comes just hours after S&P also on Friday put 155 CLO bonds on review, accounting for about 6.3% of its rated CLO securities.

    And while some may say the Fed will fix it, recall that the expanded Term Asset-Backed Securities Loan Facility (TALF) announced by the Fed last Thursday only buys AAA-rated bonds of CLOs, which after the Moody’s downgrade is complete, will not only collapse in nominal size but will mean that any further attempts to stabilize the CLO space will require yet another Fed backstop of even riskier – i.e., rated AA and lower – structured products.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 20:10

  • COVID-19 Could Change Travel Behavior Forever… Putting 3 Million b/d Oil Demand At Risk
    COVID-19 Could Change Travel Behavior Forever… Putting 3 Million b/d Oil Demand At Risk

    Authored by Daniel Klein via S&P Global Platts Inisghts blog,

    Global air, road and rail travel have been massively reduced as governments attempt to limit the spread of coronavirus, taking a heavy toll on short-term oil demand.

    Clearly, the mandated restrictions will lift when the pandemic eases and low oil prices will further aid in stimulating oil demand. However, it is possible that consumer behavior could be altered structurally, with impacts that persist even once the pandemic has ended.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For oil demand, the two sectors most at risk from a potential change in behavior are light-duty transportation and aviation. These risks are investigated in depth in the report Quantifying Risk: How COVID-19 could change consumer behaviors and impact long-term oil demand, issued by S&P Global Platts Analytics’ Scenario Planning Service on March 24.

    For light duty transportation, a key risk is reduced oil demand from fewer workers commuting if there is a structural shift towards working from home. After mandated restrictions are lifted, businesses may question the cost of physical offices and offer more flexible working from home arrangements or even mandate employees to work from home.

    Clearly, the potential to work from home is limited to certain segments as many industrial and service sector employees have virtually no flexibility to work from home. Even some white collar workers may not be able to work from home due to a lack of ubiquitous telecommunications and home computing.

    Based on country-specific employment data and an analysis of commuting patterns, Platts Analytics estimates that 5% of commuting vehicle miles travelled are at risk from a structural shift to more of the labor force working from home. Over the long term this could wipe out as much as 193 billion miles travelled globally by 2030.

    Aside from commuting to work, other light duty transportation activity has declined due to the COVID-19 outbreak. Consumers are being forced to reduce the number of trips to grocery and other stores and purchase goods online during the outbreak. These behaviors may persist after restrictions are lifted, particularly if cost savings are identified. Most major online retailers have made great strides in using big data and algorithms to predict consumer behavior to optimize supply and delivery chains. On balance, a shift to online shopping will lower overall vehicle miles travelled.

    Additionally, many of these retailers have their own delivery fleets, and there is a shift toward electrifying these delivery trucks, illustrated by the landmark partnership between Amazon and EV manufacturer, Rivian. This has the potential to further compound overall oil demand losses. Platts Analytics estimates the resulting potential loss in oil demand in road transportation from a greater prevalence in working from home and changing shopping patterns at 1.9 million b/d by 2040.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The aviation sector has also been severely impacted by the coronavirus outbreak and is susceptible to structural behavioral changes after the crisis is over if there is a desire to fly less. Like road transportation, a portion of aviation demand is secure from a potential change in consumer preferences, such as air freight.

    For passenger aviation, recent surveys suggest that 40% of airline passengers travel for business purposes. Businesses are currently being forced to experiment with ways to conduct operations without travel, and may make long-lasting changes to travel policies to push more vigorously for virtual meetings to reduce costs, lower CO2 emissions and, improve environmental, social and governance (ESG) scores.

    Platts Analytics believes that business travel is the most susceptible to a change in behaviour from the COVID-19 outbreak. For leisure travel, virtual tourism and voice or video calls with distant loved ones are poor substitutes for the real thing, and this segment of air travel may prove to be the most secure.

    The aviation sector has been on a strong upward trend due to a rising middle class, particularly in Asia. Before coronavirus struck, Platts Analytics assumed long-term oil demand growth in aviation at 2% per annum due to prevailing economic and travel trends. A scenario where aviation growth is half this original expectation would result in 1.8 million b/d less oil demand by 2040.

    The impacts of coronavirus will ultimately be determined by the length and severity of the outbreak. However, the longer consumers and businesses adjust to restrictions and identify potential cost savings, the greater the probability these changes will become structural and long-lasting.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 19:45

  • Los Angeles County Suffers Deadliest Day Yet As COVID-19 Kills 81: Live Updates
    Los Angeles County Suffers Deadliest Day Yet As COVID-19 Kills 81: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Spain death toll tops 20k, joining US & Italy
    • Report claims 7,500 died uncounted in UK nursing homes
    • US total cases passes 700k, deaths near 40k
    • NYPost claims nursing home deaths in NY went uncounted
    • South Africa reports largest daily increase so far
    • LA reports record jump in deaths
    • Spain extends lockdown by 2 weeks
    • Saudi Arabia reports record new cases for 4th day in a row
    • Cali releases data on nursing home outbreaks
    • NJ Gov: “we’re flattening the curve”
    • Sweden reports 606 new cases
    • Belgium reports 1,000+ cases
    • Cali reports latest update
    • Cuomo reports fewer than 500 deaths in NYS
    • Japan case total passes 10k
    • Italy reports drop in new cases, deaths, hospitalizations
    • Phoenix TV station warns of undercounting of deaths
    • Dr. Fauci says tests ‘aren’t everything’ when reopening states
    • Iran death toll crosses 5k as country’s reopening begins
    • UK reports another ~900 deaths

    *      *       *

    Update (1910ET): No sooner did we highlight the rash of new deaths and cases reported in California nursing homes than LA County revealed that it suffered its deadliest streak yet during the last 24 hours, reporting 81 deaths, along with a huge jump in cases (642).

    That brings the total to 576 deaths and 12,021 cases.

    In a statement, Dr. Barbara Ferrer, the director of the Department of Public Health, specifically cited nursing homes as a source of particular concern for county health officials.

    “Today marks a very sad milestone for our county, we are reporting the highest number of COVID-19 deaths for any one day since the beginning of the pandemic, and our deepest condolences go out to each and every person grieving the loss of their loved ones,” she said in a statement.

    She also pointed out that the number of deaths in the county have doubled in a week, a trend that has been seen in other hot spots around the country.

    “In this last week we have doubled the number of deaths that occurred among L.A. County residents,” she said. “We are especially concerned about the overwhelming number of residents residing in our nursing homes who have passed away.”

    Ferrer noted that she’s requested additional support from the state and federal governments to ensure that nursing homes are as safe as possible for residents and employees.

    “This includes asking for supplementary staffing and PPE, increased ability to test residents and employees, and improvements in infection control capacity at nursing homes,” she explained.

    Of the total 576 deaths, 89% had underlying health conditions, Ferrer said. Information about race and ethnicity was available for 498 victims or about 93%. Of the deceased, 36% were Latinx residents, 29% were white, 17% were Asian, 16% were African American, and 3% identified as other races.

    Outside of the US and Europe, South Africa reported 251 new COVID-19 infections, its largest single-day jump yet, bringing its total to 3,034 cases.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Slowly but surely, the virus is spreading across Africa.

    *      *       *

    Update (1600ET): California reported 87 new deaths, bringing its statewide total to 1,072.

    Watch Gov Newsom’s press briefing below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    California has confirmed 28,963 cases of COVID-19, Newsom said. Of those, 3,221 of those cases are in our hospitals, with 1,173 of those in the ICU.

    Meanwhile, as the issue of outbreaks in nursing homes and the lack of transparency and accountability becomes an international issue, the LAT reported earlier on Saturday that the Department of Health for the state of California has released new numbers on nursing home outbreaks, mirroring a move earlier by the State of New York.

    More than 30% of patients who died in LA County were residents of assisted-care facilities, while more than 70% of deaths in Long Beach were nursing home residents. The California Health Department listed the names of 261 skilled-nursing facilities across the state with more than 3,000 positive cases among residents and staff. However, the “snapshot” only included 86% of the state’s 1,224 skilled-nursing facilities that have reported data within the last 24 hours.

    One of the worst-hit homes was Brier Oak on Sunset in LA, where 80 residents and 62 staff members have tested positive. The Country Villa South Convalescent Center in Palms has had 58 patients and 15 staff infected, while the Garden Crest Rehabilitation Center in Silver Lake has had 35 each of patients and staff.

    Earlier, we noted today’s giant jump in Singapore’s case total illustrating how ridiculous the idea of reopening the economy seems right now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *      *       *

    Update (1545ET): Illinois Gov. JB Pritzker is holding today’s press briefing…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The state also reported 1,259 new cases and 125 new deaths, bringing its total cases closer to 30k, and its death toll closer to 1.5k.

    As we wait for more news out of Springfield, as well as the capitals of other midwestern and west-coast states, here’s a reminder of today’s good news from NY:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *      *       *

    Update (1540ET): Cuomo has finally released the new case numbers for Saturday, reporting 7,090 new cases, bringing the total to 13,362. As we reported earlier, the state confirmed only 540 coronavirus-linked deaths on Thursday, the lowest number since April 1.

    Total of 236,732 cases and 13,362 deaths.

    *      *       *

    Update (1445ET): Once again, as expected, Spain has officially extended what has been a five-week coronavirus lockdown until May 9, adding another 2 weeks, but plans to relax the lockdown, one of the most strict in the world, to allow children out of their homes before the end of this month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, in yet another alarming acceleration in new cases, Sweden reported 606 cases of COVID-19 over the last 24 hours, and 111 deaths, bringing its totals to 13,822 cases and 1,511 deaths.

    Sanchez said  Saturday night in an address that he would ask the Parliament to extended the state of alert, which have given Sanchez the extraordinary – some might say almost fascist – unilateral power to impose and enforce the lockdown, which Spain has down, dramatically lowering the number of newly confirmed cases, even if deaths have remained stubbornly high.

    In New Jersey, the spread of coronavirus continued to slow, as hospitals reported more patients leaving than entering.

    During a Saturday press conference, Gov. Phil Murphy said: “We are flattening the curve”…adding that NJ has recorded a slower rate of new infections and a slower rate of new hospitalizations…progress, even if there’s still a long way to go.

    As we look around for more signs that the death toll or case count in the US might be undercounting by thousands, we found a report aired by a Phoenix area news station claiming that first responders don’t have a protocol for reporting dead bodies suspected of dying from COVID-19, meaning dozens of these cases – the city’s firefighters have reported an unprecedented spike in dead body reports, likely due to COVID-19 – aren’t being marked as COVID-19-linked deaths.

    *      *       *

    Update (1350ET): In his latest troll to Democratic states like NY demanding more from the federal government (and, it seems, Republicans in general), President Trump tweeted this photo of a shipment of ventilators to be distributed to the states.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *      *       *

    Update (1330ET): Even as the number of new cases in Italy have slowed, a jump in the UK and France has helped push the European case total past 1,000,000 on Saturday.

    France looks set to be the next country to see its case total pass 150k and confirmed deaths past 20k.

    France saw 642 more deaths over the past 24 hours health officials said Saturday, bringing the countrywide total to 19,323, the fourth-highest tally in the world, although the number of people in hospital declined for a fourth day running. France’s public health authority said in a statement that the total number of patients in ICU units across the country also declined for the 10th day in the row to 5,833 – the lowest level since March 31.

    France has been in virtual lockdown since March 17 as part of efforts to curb the outbreak.

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As South Korea prepares for the start of baseball season with the prospect of winning over legions of new American fans, the country’s health officials on Saturday reported 18 new cases of coronavirus, 9 of which were purportedly imported. It was the lowest total since February, and the latest evidence that the local officials in Westchester County, Suburban Seattle, and parts of California can and have taken the right states to suppress the outbreak. China also reported a low total on Saturday, with more than half the cases imported, while Singapore, in its most alarming report yet, confirmed 942 new cases of coronavirus, bringing its total to 5,992 cases in total, a roughly 15% increase in one day and the biggest single-day jump by far. Just when observers think the outbreak has finished accelerating, even more cases are reported as officials begin to fear that nearly all of the migrant workers living in densely populated highrises in parts of the city state have been infected.

    Over in NY, Cuomo said there were “about” 2k cases confirmed in the last day, about even with the last few weeks. Cuomo also continued to bash the federal government over what he described as a critical shortage of tests.

    *      *       *

    Update (1240ET): Some good numbers were just reported out of Italy.

    Countrywide, officials reported 3,491 new cases and 482 new deaths, bringing the totals for cases to 175,925 and deaths to 23,227. Compared with yesterday, that marks a drop in new cases and deaths, while the number of patients hospitalized and the number in the ICU also declined.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, 45k have now recovered from the illness – including a handful of centenarians – across Italy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking back at Cuomo’s press conference, it seems the most important number reported overnight was the continued decline in hospitalizations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Though, to be sure, the pace of new hospitalizations remained steady compared with yesterday, but more deaths and recoveries, combined with fewer new cases, means less stress on NYC’s hospitals, most of which were seeing capacity stretched pretty thin.

    Once again, Belgium on Saturday reported more than 1,000 new cases in 24 hours, with 1,045 new cases of the virus, and 290 new deaths, for a total of 37,183 cases and 5,453 deaths, as Belgium, the Netherlands and several other countries in Europe, as well as Russia, report a startling acceleration in the virus.

    In the US as a whole, more than 700k cases have been confirmed, along with more than 35,000 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *      *       *

    Update (1220ET): President Trump probably managed to kill two birds with one stone by delegating control of the reopening process to the governors: He made what truly appears to be the best move for the country, and the move that was most politically palatable. For once during Trump’s presidency, those two imperatives were obviously and dramatically aligned, and the president – likely feeling a ton of pressure from the public during a legacy-defining moment (this is all for the history books) – overcame his natural inclination toward sometimes-reckless confrontation, and took a step back.

    However, by sticking his nose in the process and commenting – as he did yesterday with a series of tweets calling on governors to “LIBERATE!” certain states – he is putting what was truly a big win for him and his campaign (not to mention the country) at risk.

    Asked about the demonstrations taking place at state capitols across the country, the president offered a tacit word of encouragement, calling the crowds “very responsible people.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While these crowds are likely packed with his supporters, and Trump has never shied away from a shoutout in exchange for gestures of loyalty, right now, he’d probably be better served by staying quiet, and focusing on the real task at hand: How is his administration going to replenish the ‘PPP’ and work with the states to reopen the US in a way that doesn’t cause the outbreak to come roaring back.

    *      *       *

    Update (1215ET): New York Governor Andrew Cuomo is holding Saturday’s daily press briefing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In keeping with established practice, Cuomo revealed the number of COVID-19-linked deaths recorded across the state over the last 24 hours. Fortunately, he reported a less than 500 deaths, marking a slowdown from highs reached over the prior week.

    *      *       *

    Update (1155ET): As expected, the US and Canada have agreed to extend the closure of their shared border as the global coronavirus outbreak has now sickened more than 2.2 million people, and killed roughly 155,000.

    Here’s more on that from the FT:

    Canada and the US will extend their border closure agreement for at least another 30 days, the prime minister Justin Trudeau said. The nearly 9,000km frontier is closed except to trade, essential workers and citizens returning home. The deal is “another example of the excellent collaboration between our two nations,” Canada’s Mr Trudeau said on Saturday at his daily briefing.

    In the UK, health officials reported almost 900 more COVID-19-linked deaths over the last 24 hours, according to the Department of Health and Social Care.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Though the rate of new cases remained steady at roughly 5k.

    *      *       *

    Investors cheered and pundits dared to speculate that the worst just might be over Friday evening after US stocks finished the week with a blowout rally into the close (a rally that, sadly, appears to have been driven by misplaced optimism among retail investors, while hedge funds that were long GILD have cashed out).

    A sketchy report touting unexpectedly promising results from one leg of an international study of Gilead’s anitviral remdesivir, a drug that was developed to treat ebola but hasn’t been approved by the FDA to treat…well…anything. Which is why several patient trials are being conducted around the world, to try and determine ASAP whether this might be the ‘miracle cure’ Trump and everybody else has been hoping for. Just days after CPC officials shut down two trials in mainland China because of a  ‘shortage’ of ‘eligible patients’ (likely a hilarious ruse), Statnews reported late Thursday that a trial at the University of Chicago had essentially cured every patient in the trial except for 2.

    The market took that story and ran with it, ignoring warnings from Gilead itself that the connotations of the data had been exaggerated by the story, and that this is only one trial out of many, with evidence of the drug’s efficacy remaining mostly ‘anecdotal’. Remdesivir has been given to enough COVID-19 patients at this point that, if the drug truly were a ‘miracle cure’, doctors would have known by now.

    Thanks to a revision in new numbers coupled with a rash of deaths in the US and UK that have cleared out hospital beds and ICUs, while still likely falling well short of the ‘real’ numbers, it appears that the world about to experience a rapid rise in the virus’s global death toll, which topped 150k as of Friday. Late Thursday evening, the US reported a massive jump in deaths over the last 24 hours, driven by NJ, NY and Michigan, along with several other of the worst hit states.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Splashed across the front-page of the Saturday edition of the Telegraph is a story claiming the number of deaths in nursing homes is ~3,700% higher than government figures reflect.

    Citing a seemingly authoritative – if ‘unofficial’ – survey of patients from one of the UK’s largest care-home associations, the Telegraph claimed that as many as 7,500 elderly patients have passed away from COVID-19 in nursing homes and other assisted-living facilities across the UK. That contrasts with the roughly 217 care-home deaths recorded by the Office of National Statistics, which is responsible for compiling data for the Department of Health and Social Care. It’s also roughly 5x higher than a previous estimate of 1,400 released by the organization earlier this week.

    Around the world, more than 2.2 million cases of COVID-19 have been confirmed, and nearly 155k have died, as of Saturday morning in the US. And deaths have continued to accelerate, even as the pace of newly reported cases has slowed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: FT

    That initial report helped spark a national conversation about undercounting at UK nursing homes that has become a huge problem for Health Secretary Matt Hancock as Boris Johnson continues to recover from COVID-19 (Hancock was also infected).

    The number of care home residents who have died of suspected coronavirus may have reached 7,500, according to the latest estimate, The Telegraph has learned.

    New data collated by Care England, the country’s largest representative body for care homes, suggests the number of deaths from Covid-19 is far higher than its previous estimate of 1,400 from earlier this week.

    The number is also far in advance of the official figure from the Office for National Statistics (ONS), which has recorded 217 care home deaths from the virus up to April 3 – the most recent date for which official data is available.

    Of course, without testing, it’d be extremely difficult to say with any degree of certainty exactly how many have died. The only thing that seems almost certain is that the official number is a serious under-representation.

    The notion that deaths have almost certainly been undercounted not just in the UK, but also in the US, Spain and around the world has become a major scandal in some countries because it makes so much sense. The US isn’t alone in not having enough tests: Shortages abound; even China struggled for months and is still likely exaggerating its real testing capacity. Earlier this week, NYC Mayor Bill de Blasio added nearly 4k deaths to the roll that included patients who died at home, or who died in the hospital of COVID-19-liked symptoms, but were never tested.

    When supplies are limited, wasting precious resources on the dead solely for record-keeping purposes hardly seems sensible, and we can understand why hospitals wouldn’t want to waste those resources. We understand it – and so should everybody else. De Blasio’s revision followed pressure from the NYT. And just yesterday, health authorities in Wuhan “revised” its official numbers, claiming the decision was made as officials reconcile numbers across different data sets and so forth, stuff they didn’t have time to do when the crematoriums were running at full tilt back in February and March.

    The WHO quickly stepped up to defend the decision, claiming Beijing simply won’t rest until it accounts for every single COVID-19 related death. Much of the world, including – of course – President Trump, but also many who have been persistent Trump critics, suspect that China has undercounted the number of cases and deaths in Wuhan by several orders of magnitude, not by a few thousand. You saw the pictures, remember? People were literally dropping dead in the streets – that’s how overwhelmed Wuhan’s hospitals were at the time. Video showed dying patients lying in hospital hallways and splayed out across packed rooms. The evidence was so glaringly obvious that not even the CPC, which had permitted thousands of foreign journalists into the city, could hide it. In fact, in terms of information suppression, it seems the best the part could do in Wuhan was “disappear” a few local citizen journalists.

    In Spain, the opposition is accusing the socialist-led government of PM Pedro Sanchez of being reckless in reopening the country, a process Spain has already tentatively started, and accusing the government of deliberately lying about the deaths. The country’s health ministry reported more dismaying news on Saturday as the country’s death toll has climbed above 20k, even as the number of new cases reported each day is half what it was two weeks ago. With a mortality rate of roughly 10%, Spain’s outbreak has become one of the deadliest in the world.

    And it’s only the third country (after the US and Italy) to report more than 20,000 deaths.

    As one Twitter wit points out:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Per the Health Ministry, the number of new coronavirus cases in Spain rose by 4,499 people in the last 24 hours, pushing the countrywide total to 191,726 as the government continues to “review” its process for reporting the data. The official death toll is now 20,043 deaths, since another 565 people have reportedly died in the last 24 hours. That’s roughly in line with this week’s data, although the ministry hasn’t clarified discrepancies in the number of deaths reported yesterday.

    Across the Atlantic, the New York Post reported in its Saturday edition that the outbreak has ravaged the city’s nursing homes to such a horrifying degree that even de Blasio’s revisions earlier this week didn’t fully cover it. Citing new data released Friday by the New York State Department of Health (likely, we suspect, handed to the NYP to undercut de Blasio), the paper cited several alarming examples that we imagine the mayor will be forced to address during his next press briefing.

    In one Brooklyn facility – the Cobble Hill Health Center – 55 patients have died during the outbreak, the highest single-facility number in the whole state. 45 patients at the Kings Harbor Multicare Center in the Bronx have died, the next highest death toll among the city’s nursing homes. Another 40 people died at the Holliswood Center for Rehabilitation in Queens. Starting to get the picture?

    Here’s the latest data broken down by the NYP…

    The partial breakdown only includes 72 nursing homes across the state that reported more than five deaths. Of those, 42 reported at least 10 deaths. There are more than 600 nursing homes in New York State.

    More than 1,100 residents cumulatively died just at these 72 facilities.

    Overall, 3,316 elderly nursing resident residents died at either nursing homes, adult day care facilities or hospitals from COVID-19. Of that total, the virus killed 2,056 nursing residents in New York City.

    There are 6,475 confirmed COVID-19 positive cases in licensed nursing homes.

    …and to prove that even these numbers are still woefully incomplete, the Post added that several homes in the city that reportedly suffered dozens of deaths weren’t even listed in the state database.

    But two other nursing homes highlighted by The Post as having dozens of deaths combined amid the pandemic  — the Chateau at Brooklyn Rehabilitation & Nursing Center in Sheepshead Bay and the King David Center for Nursing and Rehabilitation in Gravesend — were not listed in the tally.

    Cuomo signed an executive order Friday requiring these facilities report deaths to families within 24 hours to prevent the kind of terrible confusion that occurred at one suburban Seattle nursing home in Kirkland that found itself at the center of Washington state’s first outbreak.

    While an abundance of tests would certainly have helped health authorities all over the world keep better track of cases and deaths, the fact remains that, looking forward, Dr. Fauci, Dr. Birx and their team believe that the US is now approaching the testing capacity that we need for some parts of the country to enter the initial phases of reopening which, remember, is all that they’re currently planning to do. For all the talk about starting back up before May, it seems May 1 is a real line in the sand for most states. And President Trump has repeatedly attacked Cuomo (during last night’s press conference and in tweets sent earlier in the day) for complaining too much about the ‘lack’ of tests, pointing out that the state did the same complaining about the lack of beds and ventilators, only to find that the social distancing worked better than the projections indicated.

    That’s nobody’s fault, and it’s an unmitigated win for America. But do governors and the mainstream media need to make such a massive deal about the shortage of tests? Sen. Angus King, an Independent from Maine who caucuses with the Dems, accused VP Pence of a “dereliction of duty” during a phone call last night, a comment that was promptly leaked and played up in the press.

    Speaking of undercounting, health authorities in Japan reported on Saturday that the number of confirmed cases in the country had finally topped 10k, NHK reports.

    The case count continues to climb by stunning margins just days after PM Abe extended a state of emergency to the entire nation in an attempt to slow the spread of the virus and promised to hand out nearly $1,000 in Japanese yen to the entire country. He pleaded with Japanese to stay indoors as cases reported in Tokyo hit a record high. Abe, too, expressed fears about the virus spreading in nursing homes, but given Japan’s large population of elderly, its official death rate – well below 1% – seems far too low to be realistic.

    Finally, one new study out of Santa Clara County found some astonishing data suggesting the number of cases that weren’t counted among the county’s residents could be many times higher than currently believed.

    And in Iran, officials reported another 73 deaths on Saturday, raising the official death toll to 5,031, breaking above 5k, just as officials warn that the country’s return to work doesn’t mean citizens should cease taking social distancing precautions. Overall, Iran has reported 80,868 cases, though the totals for both deaths and cases are suspected of being much higher.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 19:20

  • China Emerges As A Major Obstacle In Japan's Quest To Triple Stockpile Of Abe's "Miracle" COVID-19 Drug
    China Emerges As A Major Obstacle In Japan's Quest To Triple Stockpile Of Abe's "Miracle" COVID-19 Drug

    Many Americans probably don’t realize this, but President Trump isn’t the only world leader with a “favorite” experimental drug intended to treat COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe has been pushing a medication called Avigan, which, like remdesivir and hydroxychloroquine, has shown some efficacy in treating the worst symptoms of COVID-19, especially administered early.

    As a reminder, he’s a reminder of all the potential therapies and vaccines in the works to try and treat COVID-19, courtesy of Reuters:

    • Remdesivir
    • Hydroxychloroquine / chloroquine
    • Actemra (tocilizumab)
    • Kevzara (sarilumab)
    • Jakavi (ruxolitinib)
    • mRNA 1273
    • Convalescent plasma
    • Kaletra (lopinavir/ritonavir)
    • NKG2D-ACE2 CAR-NK cells
    • NVX-CoV2373
    • RhACE2 APN01
    • Lentiviral Minigene Vaccines (LV-SMENP)
    • BCG tuberculosis vaccine
    • INO-4800
    • Camostat mesylate
    • IFX-1
    • AD5-nCov
    • Aspirin, Clopidogrel, Rivaroxaban, Atorvastatin, Omeprazole
    • ChAdOx1
    • Serology / Antibody Testing

    And, unfortuantely for Japan, Abe and his government are quickly discovering that widely distributing the drug to the population to try and stave off a brutal resurgence of the virus that could pose a serious problem not just for Japan’s elderly population, but for its neighbors in Asia who have resorted to extreme measures to keep the outbreak from spreading.

    The government has taken steps to ramp up production of some ingredients for the medication as it seeks to triple its stockpile of the drug as quickly as possible. These steps have included enlisting Fujifilm, a diversified Japanese conglomerate, to effectively conscript other Japanese corporate giants into producing some of the ingredients needed to make the medication.

    Here’s more on that according to Nikkei Asian Review:

    Japan’s push to triple its stockpile of anti-flu medicine Avigan for coronavirus treatment has proven a challenge as the lack of a raw ingredient from China forces Fujifilm Holdings to switch to a domestic supplier.

    The frantic scramble for a production boost has highlighted Japan’s heavy reliance on foreign-sourced ingredients as well as the nation’s slow drug approval process — issues both the government and pharmaceutical sector will have to grapple with.

    As patents for Avigan have expired overseas, China has already begun producing generic versions for domestic use, making it impossible for Fujifilm to continue sourcing a chemical called malonic acid from that country.

    Few doubt the efficacy of the drug to treat at least some patients. However, one problem is that for a successful course of treatment, patients often require triple the amount of Avigan as compared with Tamiflu, the prescription medication used to treat the flu virus (and, for some readers, commonly confused with the over-the-counter medication Theraflu).

    Reports suggest Avigan can prevent the replication of the new coronavirus inside the body. But treating a coronavirus infection appears to require three times more Avigan than the flu, which means the country’s stockpile designed for 2 million flu patients covers only 700,000 COVID-19 patients.

    While Japanese firms are working diligently to fill the orders, they’re running up against a shortage of essential raw ingredients produced – guess where?

    Fujifilm has asked Japanese chemical company Denka to manufacture the acid domestically, aiming to boost local Avigan production starting in July. Denka retreated from malonic acid production in 2017, but the company retained its manufacturing sites and can resume output once enough workers are secured.

    Kaneka, a Japanese chemical company, also announced on Thursday that it will start manufacturing pharmaceutical ingredients that go into Avigan for supply to Fujifilm in July in response to a request from the latter. Kaneka will strengthen its domestic plant  capacity through capital expenditure and securing employees to prepare for production.

    The government, eager to build a supply chain at home, acted as a go-between to prod Denka into resming production. Denka says it does not plan capacity increase at this point and will makes future plans based on the production volume of Avigan.

    As explained in one of the above quotations, the recent expiration of a patent on the medication has led China to start ramping up production of generics, consuming much of the global supply of a chemical called malonic acid, which China sources domestically. With demand higher in China, those companies get preferred access thanks to the No. 2 economy’s widespread rigging of markets in favor of domestic firms. In Japan, meanwhile, the scramble continues to simply produce more of the stuff in Japan, or rely on sources outside of China.

    But all of those things will take a while. It’s difficult to say exactly how long. It’s just another reminder that the US isn’t the only country struggling with sudden export restrictions imposed by China and India on essential materials, drugs and medical equipment.

    It’s important to remember that one of the reasons producing these resources has moved abroad is that synthesizing some of these ingredients creates toxic waste that must be subjected to special treatments to dispose of it. These treatments cost almost 10x as much in Japan as they do in China and India, according to Nikkei.

    Manufacturing costs are expected to surge as well.

    Tablets and other nonprescription drugs are produced through chemical syntheses, necessitating the costly treatment of toxic gases and contaminated water.

    Processing water discharges for medicines in Japan costs tens or even hundreds of yen per kilogram, reportedly 10 times higher than in China and India. As a result, producing 50 yen (46 cents) worth of drug in Japan could actually cost over 100 yen.

    Japan’s generics industry simply can’t compete with the raw material prices abroad, and because of this massive discrepancy, only roughly 30% of Japan’s supply of generic Avigan is produced using materials 100% produced in Japan.

    Producing drugs to treat 2 million patients is achievable as long as the raw material is produced at home. But the government will need to set a price consummate with manufacturing costs and keep it at that level.

    Leading anti-flu drug Tamiflu carries a price of about 2,700 yen for two doses daily over five days. If Avigan is priced the same as Tamiflu, a patient will have to pay 8,100 yen because the drug needs to be administered three times more often. For 2 million people, the cost would be 16.2 billion yen, or about $150 million.

    Japan’s reliance on foreign-made materials is a structural problem. Generic drugs made entirely of materials produced in Japan accounted for only 30% of total shipment value, according a health ministry survey in 2013, while the remaining 70% relied on at least some imported ingredients.

    Of the imports, 30% came from India, along with 24% from China and 26% from South Korea. As Japan moves to further reduce government-set drug prices, the percentage of ingredients sourced overseas is expected to increase even further.

    The US isn’t the only country that’s learning the hard way what happens when corporations apply the principles of ‘comparative advantage’ to critical strategic assets like drugs and medical products, as we are learning. That being as it may, it’s still unclear to what degree changes can be made for the long-term, especially when sustainability – not just financially, but in terms of natural resources as well – is taken into account.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 19:20

  • Von Greyerz: A Hyperinflationary Depression Has Always Been The Inevitable Endgame
    Von Greyerz: A Hyperinflationary Depression Has Always Been The Inevitable Endgame

    Authored by Egon von Greyerz via GoldSwitzerland.com,

    Hyperinflationary Depression has always been the inevitable end to the biggest financial bubble in history. And this time it will be global. Hyperinflation will spread from country to country like Coronavirus. It could start anywhere but the most likely first countries are the US and the EU or ED (European Disunion). They will quickly be followed by many more like Japan and most developing countries. Like CV it will quickly jump from country to country with very few being spared.

    CURRENT INTEREST RATES ARE A FALSE INDICATOR

    Ever since the last interest cycle peaked in 1981, there has been a 39 year downtrend in US and global rates from almost 20% to 0%. Since in a free market interest rates are a function of the demand for credit, this long downtrend points to a severe recession in the US and the rest of the world. The simple rules of supply and demand tell us that when the price of money is zero, nobody wants it. But instead debt has grown exponentially without putting any upside pressure on rates. The reason is simple. Central and commercial banks have created limitless amounts of credit out of thin air. In a fractional banking system banks can lend the same money 10 to 50 times. And central banks can just print infinite amounts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Global debt in 1981 was $14 trillion. One would have assumed that with interest rates crashing there would not have been a major demand for debt. High demand would have led to high interest rates. But if we look at global debt in 2020 it is a staggering $265 trillion. So debt has gone up 19X in the last 39 years and cost of debt has gone from 20% to 0% – Hmmm!

    CORONAVIRUS IS THE CATALYST BUT NOT THE CAUSE

    The crisis that the world is now encountering has not been caused by the Coronavirus. As I have stressed in many articles recently, CV is just the catalyst, albeit the most vicious one which could have hit the world. The real cause of the Greatest Financial Crisis in history is the Central Banks. They have been pouring fuel on the fire for 50 years by continuously reducing the cost of money until it became free in 2008 when rates were reduced to ZERO. Since then we have also seen negative rates around the world.

    Negative rates are not just a total paradox but also absolute lunacy. Bankrupt sovereign nations around the world have been issuing debt at no cost or have even been paid for it. The whole purpose of interest is to be paid for the risk of lending money. As governments around the world have issued virtually unlimited debt which will never be repaid, the risk of lending to them has increased exponentially. But instead of much higher rates, to reflect the massive increase in debt plus severely elevated risk, central banks have got away with defying the laws of nature buy falsely manipulating rates..

    FALSE MARKETS WITH NO REAL PRICES

    Money is a commodity and the price should be a direct function of risk plus supply and demand. But since we currently have a false financial system with fake money and false markets, there are no real prices. So through constant manipulation and intervention central banks together with a few accomplices can totally rig most markets and prices.

    Therefore, the cost of money today neither reflects the risk nor the demand. All it represents is malicious manipulation to serve governments and their masters the central bankers. But like all fake markets, also this one will end, not just badly but catastrophically.

    THE SITUATION IS DESPERATE FOR BUSINESSES AND INDIVIDUALS

    As I discussed in last week’s article, we now have the perfect storm. Virtually every government in the world is now committing billions and trillions of dollars, euros etc in fruitless attempts to save a collapsing world economy. In many countries, 50% or more of industry is shut. Most service industries are in a total lockdown and so is aviation, transport and most small businesses. Unemployment is approaching rates not seen since the 1930s depression. All businesses need assistance, from major corporations to small firms. The majority of individuals haven’t got savings for more than a couple of weeks living and for the ones who are now becoming unemployed, the situation is desperate.

    Many major US corporations need assistance from the government. Very few of these have put aside profits to reserves for a rainy day. Instead management has been too generously rewarded as well as the shareholders. Since 2009, S&P 500 companies have spent $5.4 trillion in share buybacks. Instead of asking government for assistance, management should pay back their bonuses and shareholders who have received major payouts should recapitalise the companies. But this will obviously not happen. Just like in 2006-9, profits are privatised and losses are socialised.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Businesses are haemorrhaging cash and so are individuals. All that becomes a vicious circle with bills not being paid including rents, mortgages and taxes. Estimates predict a 40-50% fall in Q2 2020 GDP in the US. The problem is that this is not a temporary crisis. This means that GDP will see permanent erosion of a major magnitude in most countries.

    SECULAR DOWNTURN LEADING TO HYPERINFLATIONARY DEPRESSION

    So what we are experiencing is the start of a secular downturn which soon will become a hyperinflationary depression. This was always the inevitable end to this cycle as I have discussed in many articles for over 20 years.

    A crisis of this magnitude is always a debt crisis. Very soon we will see debt around the world come under enormous pressure as borrowers start defaulting. This will lead to bonds crashing and rates surging. Central banks will then lose control of interest rates as long rates first go up and soon also pulling the shorter rates up. Rates can easily go to 15-20%. Many bonds will go to zero and rates to infinity. I have previously talked about paying 21% on my first mortgage in the UK in 1974. So I have personal experience of high inflation but never hyperinflation.

    Since the majority of the $1.5 quadrillion derivatives market is interest related, this market will also blow up. All this will lead to unlimited money printing and currencies crashing fast to their intrinsic value of ZERO. At that point the entire financial system will be unrecognisable and parts of it nonexistent. All of this could happen very quickly, possibly within the next 6 -18 months.

    2006-9 WAS A REHEARSAL

    Could my Cassandra forecast be wrong. Yes, of course it could. But let’s be clear that the rehearsal of what I am predicting took place in 2006-9. Nothing was resolved at that point, just temporarily deferred. This is now the real thing and whatever money central banks print this time will have no effect. So I doubt very much that our banker “friends” can pull another trick out of the hat again. Because the only trick they know, to print more money, can never solve a debt problem.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    MARKETS

    Stock markets, in their first leg down of the new secular bear market, reached a 40% loss in most countries and that in less than 4 weeks. We are now seeing a typical correction that can go a bit higher. But when that is finished which could take 1-3 weeks, the next devastating downleg will start. Anyone trying to catch this falling knife will be slaughtered.

    Bond markets might hold up for a bit longer with massive central bank manipulation and money printing. Junk bonds will first start crashing and constant downgrades will turn a lot of debt to junk. Much of corporate debt will go the same way and within 6-12 months also sovereign debt will come under attack.

    Property markets are a major bubble and are already starting to disintegrate. Industrial, commercial, retail and residential, no sector will be spared. There will be no buyers, no financing and many forced sellers. A perfect recipe for a collapse.

    Before the secular bear market has bottomed in these three markets, prices will be down 90-100% in real terms. And real terms means in constant purchasing power like gold.

    We must remember that markets will bottom long before the economy. The likely development is first a hyperinflationary depression that could come and go very quickly within the next couple of years. Thereafter we will most probably see a deflationary implosion of all assets and a collapse of most of the financial system.

    But we mustn’t believe that this is the end. It is just another phase in the world economy to correct excesses of the 100 or 300 years or even 2000 years. Once debt has imploded and all asset prices have come down from current fantasy valuations, a new system will emerge built on sound values and principles. And then the cycle starts all over again.

    GOLD

    There are currently severe pressures in both the paper gold market and the physical market. The Comex and LBMA are making noises that everything is under control. LBMA is giving the illusion that they have plenty of gold in their vaults. But virtually all of that gold is already committed. Comex, the gold futures exchange is under tremendous pressure since they can’t deliver more than a small fraction in physical when paper holders of gold demand delivery. And that day is not far away.

    The 3 biggest refiners in the world based in Ticino, Switzerland have been closed for 2 1/2 weeks, representing at least 50% of world production. The refiners have just opened this week but at a very reduced capacity of 25-33%.

    If we just take the Gold ETFs as an example, they increased their holdings by 93 tonnes in the last 4 weeks. That represents a total value of $5 billion

    It is today virtually impossible to get hold of physical gold so you wonder where the ETFs have bought their gold.

    The answer is of course simple. It was lent to them by LBMA banks which are custodians for the biggest gold ETF GLD. These banks also hold central bank gold and all they need to do is to lend the same gold yet one more time to the ETFs. So if you hold a gold ETF, which you mustn’t, you know that it is unlikely to be backed by gold for more than a small portion of the fund total.

    In a world where prices of most assets are about to implode, gold is life insurance and virtually the only asset that will maintain its value in real terms. Silver is also likely to do very well and will most probably outperform gold. But gold is safer and much less volatile.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the 20 year gold chart shows above, gold is in an extremely strong uptrend. In all currencies but US dollars, gold has surpassed the 2011 highs. The gold price in dollars has just broken out and is now likely to go to $1,700 on its way to the old high of $1,920 and thereafter much, much higher.

    As I have expressed before, I have been standing on a soap box for 20 years in my attempt to inform investors of the critical importance of gold for wealth preservation purposes. Fortunately many investors have listened but they still represent less than 0.5% of world financial assets. Since we started 18 years ago, gold is up 6-7X depending on the currency. That rise is insignificant compared to what is coming next.

    But remember you are not holding gold to measure the gains in debased paper money. Instead you are holding physical gold as insurance against a broken financial system that is unlikely to be repaired for a very long time.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 18:55

  • Retail Sales Were Bad; The Reality Is Catastrophic
    Retail Sales Were Bad; The Reality Is Catastrophic

    Last week’s retail sales print was – just like the rest of recent economic data – dismal, with the year-over-year drop of 6.2% the largest since September 2009.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alas, it appears that the government data may have dramatically underrepresented the full severity of the recent plunge.  As a reminder, the Census Bureau takes unadjusted numbers and smooths them through the X-14-Arima goalseekarator, which however has never before had to apply a Fourier transformation to an economy which overnight entered a hard stop. That’s why the unadjusted data is far more important to get a true sense of the severity of the current plunge. And since consumer spending accounts for 70% of US GDP, having an accurate read of just how far it has fallen is critical not only to gauge the change in GDP, but corporate profitability which as JPMorgan calculated previously, has a 7x beta to changes in GDP.

    To do that, we used Bank of America’s credit and debit card data for the month of March. What it showed is that while the standard measure of spending – retail sales ex-autos – was down just 1.6% month-over-month (mom) seasonally adjusted, total card spending was down a severe 11.5% mom SA. The difference speaks to the composition of each measure as retail  sales ex-autos exclude the hardest hit sectors from COVID-19 such as travel and other types of services.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since the year over year drop was also greater than the depths of the 2008 financial crisis, expect not only March data to be far worse than initially reported, but April – when the entire economy was shut down for the full month – to be absolutely abysmal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking ahead, BofA expects the weakness “to persist through April and become more apparent in the narrow measures as well.” And indeed, when examining the latest daily debit and credit card spending in the first week of April 10th, BofA finds that total card spending was down an average of 30% yoy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The continued drop took place despite a “meaningful improvement in online retail card spending, which was up 50% yoy in the 7-day period ending April 10th.” This partly reflects a shift to online ordering for food with online grocery store spending up 162% yoy and restaurant orders placed online up 85% yoy over the same 7-day period. Some more good news: online discretionary spending also improved, with further gains in online electronics as well as modest improvement in online clothing and department stores.

    On the other side, a number of categories continue to show virtually no spending, including airlines, lodging and  entertainment services.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Restaurants and clothing stores have stabilized, with % yoy down around 50% and 60%, respectively. Even spending at grocery stores has cooled from a very strong March as people shelter at home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There was a paradoxical silver lining in that if looking at just the GDP-defining control group  (retail ex-autos, building materials, restaurants and gasoline), the aggregate actually increased in the month. This reflects the fact that core control nets out restaurants and gasoline which were both down sharply, and leaves a more narrow measure of spending where grocery store spending – which was up 31% mom SA – has a larger weight.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And speaking of paradoxical, the breakdown of spending by income group shows something even more strange: spending slowed down the most for the highest income group, to just 0.3% in March from 2.7% in February. This could reflect the fact that higher income households have a larger share in discretionary spending which saw the biggest drop. It would also mean that the economy could be hit even more severely than some of the latest fire GDP forecasts which expect as much as a 50% drop in GDP growth.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Below we present some more charts to show the dramatic transformation to consumer spending which the covidepression has triggered within the US economy, first for just the month of March…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and then also for the first ten days of April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 18:30

  • US Builds Up Naval Forces In Caribbean In Pressure Campaign Against Maduro
    US Builds Up Naval Forces In Caribbean In Pressure Campaign Against Maduro

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    US Southern Command chief Admiral Craig Faller said in an interview that the growing US buildup in the Caribbean does not represent a change in Venezuelan policy, and is not aimed at removing President Maduro from power.

    Faller said that the US continues to want to oust Maduro through “economic and diplomatic pressure,” and not military force, though other officials have said the US would not rule out the use of military force to do so.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image: US Navy, Flickr

    As the AP writes:

    “This is not a shift in U.S. government policy,” said Faller, who nonetheless celebrated that enhanced interdiction efforts would hurt Maduro’s finances and staying power. “It’s not an indication of some sort of new militarization in the Caribbean.”

    The deployment announced this month is one of the largest U.S. military operations in the region since the 1989 invasion of Panama to remove Gen. Manuel Noriega from power and bring him to the U.S. to face drug charges. It involves assets like Navy warships, AWACS surveillance aircraft and on-ground special forces seldom seen before in the region.

    When the US started this latest buildup in the Caribbean, it was done nominally to fight drugs, and came immediately after the US put a bounty on Maduro accusing him of drug smuggling. Attorney General Barr created the legal basis for this.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro meets with Russia’s ambassador Sergey Melik-Bagdasarov at Miraflores Palace in Caracas, Venezuela, March 30, 2020. Via Reuters

    This was why there was substantial concern about a US military invasion, as Barr had similarly constructed the pretext to invade Panama in 1989 and remove Manuel Noriega.

    It was conceivable, after failing to oust Maduro other ways, that they might revisit the old tactic.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 18:05

  • Here's Why A Coronavirus Vaccine Might Not Happen Within 18 Months
    Here's Why A Coronavirus Vaccine Might Not Happen Within 18 Months

    With much of the world under some form of lockdown to slow the spread of COVID-19, and debates rage over when, and how, to reopen the global economy in order to avoid the next great depression, the light at the end of the tunnel has been top-down predictions of a vaccine within 18 months.

    JPMorgan, for example, makes a core assumption that “it could take 12-16 months for a vaccine to be under mass production,” and that the US will go through cycles of increased distancing measures followed by virus flare-ups, which require more lockdowns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet after bold predictions and vaccines rumored to be ‘just around the corner,’ Dr. Anthony Fauci, director of the US National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Disease who sits on President Trump’s coronavirus task force, offered a less enthusiastic view – saying in early March that a vaccine might be available in 12 – 18 months.

    The whole process is going to take a year, a year and a half, at least,” said Fauci.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And while Fauci has been accused of fear mongering – relying on wildly-pessimistic models while advising President Trump on lockdown measures, he may have been wise to downplay the vaccine timeline.

    According to a new report by Australia’s ABC, the creation of a vaccine may be incredibly difficult for several reasons, as this particular coronavirus is ‘posing challenges that scientists haven’t dealt with before.’

    According to Ian Frazer of the University of Queensland – who was involved in the creation of the HPV vaccine, coronaviruses are particularly difficult to create safe vaccines before because the virus infects the upper respiratory tract, which our immune system isn’t particularly adept at protecting.

    There are several reasons why our upper respiratory tract is a hard area to target a vaccine.

    “It’s a separate immune system, if you like, which isn’t easily accessible by vaccine technology,” Professor Frazer told the Health Report.

    Despite your upper respiratory tract feeling very much like it’s inside your body, it’s effectively considered an external surface for the purposes of immunisation.

    It’s a bit like trying to get a vaccine to kill a virus on the surface of your skin.” –ABC News

    In other words, because the upper respiratory tract is effectively “outside” of the body, and the outer layer of (epithelial) cells in the tract is our natural barrier to viruses, it’s difficult to produce an immune response which can reach them. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Complicating matters is that if a vaccine causes an immune response that doesn’t benefit the target cells, the result could potentially be worse than no vaccine at all.

    “One of the problems with corona vaccines in the past has been that when the immune response does cross over to where the virus-infected cells are it actually increases the pathology rather than reducing it,” said Frazer. “So that immunisation with SARS corona vaccine caused, in animals, inflammation in the lungs which wouldn’t otherwise have been there if the vaccine hadn’t been given.”

    Antibodies, meanwhile, don’t last forever

    The human immune system releases antibodies to neutralize threats such as viruses. With the coronavirus, those who have been infected have shown varying degrees of antibody production – with some weak and some strong. That said, antibodies don’t last forever.

    “Yes, you get antibodies after a [cold] infection, and yes it lasts for a while, but it’s not lifelong… sort of months rather than years,” said Frazer. “I think it would be fair to say that the natural immunity that you get after infection from this coronavirus is probably going to turn out like the coronaviruses we’ve seen in the past.”

    That said, “The good news is that if you get reinfected with the virus a second time some months down the track, there will probably be enough immunity there to stop you becoming seriously ill.”

    Vaccines under development

    Current efforts to find a cure have ranged from the use of deactivated virus fragments like we do with influenza, to using mRNA to induce an antibody response. Many will fail before a successful treatment is found, according to the report.

    Professor Frazer’s prediction is that the most likely candidate will be a vaccine that uses a part of the virus attached to a chemical to induce an immune response, or “subunit” vaccine.

    “That [vaccine type] has been successful in animal models for coronaviruses in the past and that is of course where the money is being put in large measure at the moment,” he said.

    Another sort of vaccine would be just antibody transferred from somebody who had been infected already and had got rid of the infection.

    “Which would be an immunological means of preventing infection, and could probably be more quickly developed than an actual vaccine.”

    This sort of vaccine was tested with SARS in 2003 and resulted in reinfected lab monkeys having a nasty immune response, which is why many groups working on a vaccine for Sars-CoV-2 are going for a very specific antibody response.

    Professor Frazer said the narrow, targeted approach is fine, unless you pick the wrong specific antigen — the substance that stimulates an immune response which antibodies bind to — in which case you could end up with the same problem. –ABC News

    Perhaps the best minds in the world focusing all of their efforts on COVID-19 will be able to crack the code and develop a successful vaccine. Then again, we also don’t have vaccines against HIV and cancer despite decades of efforts.

    “I think it would be fair to say even if we get something which looked quite encouraging in animals, the safety trials in humans will have to be fairly extensive before we would think about vaccinating a group of people who have not yet been exposed to the virus,” according to Frazer.

    “They might hope to get protection but certainly wouldn’t be keen to accept a possibility of really serious side effects if they actually caught the virus.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 17:40

  • The Timeline Of WHO's Cover-Up Exposed
    The Timeline Of WHO's Cover-Up Exposed

    Authored by Peter Svab via The Epoch Times,

    The World Health Organization (WHO) is facing a flurry of criticism for its response to the CCP virus pandemic, and much of the problem can be attributed to the growing influence the communist regime in China has on the organization.

    Critics mainly point out that the WHO was too slow to recommend travel restrictions and some other preventive measures, and also that the agency accepted information from China at face value, despite numerous red flags.

    While China experts were sounding alarms about a coverup, the WHO continued to praise China’s response and never warned the world that data coming from the regime was suspect.

    WHO, an agency of the United Nations, has long been swayed by Beijing’s political preferences. Its current head, Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, is a former member of a Maoist group in Ethiopia.

    As The Epoch Times previously documented, China has been increasing its power over U.N. institutions for years. Beijing’s clout has now gone so far, it undermines WHO’s basic functions, such as providing timely and accurate information about the world’s health situation.

    Case in point: the CCP virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Timeline

    The CCP virus, commonly known as the novel coronavirus, broke out in the central Chinese city of Wuhan around November 2019, before spreading across China and the world.

    As of April 14, there are some 2 million confirmed cases of the virus, which causes the disease COVID-19. Almost 130,000 deaths have since been attributed to the disease worldwide.

    The WHO has said that Chinese authorities first informed it about the outbreak on Dec. 31, 2019. While that would have been a golden opportunity to mitigate the spread of the virus worldwide, the WHO conveyed none of its information to the world that day.

    It appears that only one country had its ear close enough to the ground at that point to respond meaningfully—Taiwan.

    By Dec. 31, the island nation off the coast of mainland China had already started monitoring travelers coming on flights from Wuhan. Taiwan authorities also told the WHO that day that Taiwanese doctors had learned from their mainland counterparts that health care workers had been falling ill with the mysterious new virus.

    That was crucial information, since it indicated the virus was spreading from person to person. The WHO, however, ignored it, Taiwan officials later said.

    It was to be expected of the WHO to ignore that warning. The CCP considers Taiwan a breakaway province and has pressed the U.N. to ignore Taiwan’s existence as an independent country.

    Taiwan has been denied membership in the WHO, whose personnel are prohibited from using documents or even information from official Taiwan sources without prior special permission, according to a leaked 2010 WHO memo.

    Such permission would involve “coordination with the Permanent [UN] Mission of China in Geneva,” the memo stated.

    While Taiwan was getting its response to the virus underway, the situation in Wuhan was quickly deteriorating.

    On Jan. 2, The Epoch Times reported on the efforts of the CCP to block information about the outbreak and the high levels of anxiety spreading throughout the city.

    A Wuhan Health Commission directive prohibited all medical facilities in the city “from publicizing medical information without permission,” and online discussions about the outbreak were quickly censored. On Jan. 1, Wuhan police said that they had detained eight locals who had spread “rumors” about the outbreak.

    As it turned out, at least some of the suppressed whistleblowers were doctors who had tried to warn colleagues about the new virus.

    Panicked locals cleared Wuhan pharmacies of surgical masks and over-the-counter preventive Chinese medicines. China expert and physician Tang Jingyuan warned a government coverup might exacerbate the spread of the virus.

    Meanwhile, the WHO remained silent.

    By Jan. 3, the WHO was informed by Chinese authorities of 44 cases, 11 of them severe.

    That was likely the tip of the iceberg.

    On Jan. 5, The Epoch Times reported, citing multiple experts, that the CCP had likely been covering up information about the virus, which was detrimental to controlling the outbreak.

    That day, the WHO commented for the first time about the outbreak,  disclosing that it had known about an outbreak of a “pneumonia of unknown cause” in Wuhan for five days and recommending that it should be “handled prudently.” But the agency didn’t recommend “any specific measures for travelers.”

    Instead, it did the opposite.

    “WHO advises against the application of any travel or trade restrictions on China based on the information currently available on this event,” it said.

    Five days later, the WHO addressed the outbreak again.

    “From the currently available information, preliminary investigation suggests that there is no significant human-to-human transmission, and no infections among health care workers have occurred,” the agency stated, contradicting information that had been provided by Taiwan.

    “WHO does not recommend any specific health measures for travelers,” WHO said. It instead released general information on how to deal with virus infections.

    On Jan. 12, WHO said there was “no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission,” slightly adjusting its language.

    “Preliminary investigations conducted by the Chinese authorities have found no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission,” WHO announced two days later, never expressing a shadow of a doubt about the Chinese communist regime’s official statements.

    At this time, Taiwan had already arranged for its own fact-finding team to travel to Wuhan.

    “They didn’t let us see what they didn’t want us to see, but our experts sensed the situation was not optimistic,” Taiwanese government spokesperson Kolas Yotaka told NBC News.

    Soon after the team returned, Taiwan initiated testing and reporting requirements for its hospitals.

    “Looking after itself, not listening to the WHO in this particular case, I think actually helped,” said Dr. William Stanton, vice president of the National Yang-Ming University of Taiwan and a former U.S. ambassador to China, in a recent interview with The Epoch Times’ Jan Jekielek.

    The WHO only managed to get its team to Wuhan for “a brief field visit” on Jan. 20.

    On Jan. 17, the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) sent personnel to screen travelers coming from Wuhan to three major U.S. airports – JFK, Los Angeles International, and San Francisco International, which were getting the highest traffic from the outbreak’s epicenter.

    More airports were added to the list in subsequent weeks.

    On Jan. 20, China confirmed human-to-human transmission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Jan. 23, the day the CCP put Wuhan on lockdown, the WHO announced that, despite some internal disagreements, it wouldn’t declare the outbreak a “public health emergency of international concern.”

    By then, cases had already started to crop up around the world, including in the United States.

    Three days later, Taiwan banned flights from Wuhan and arranged special flights to return its people from the city.

    On Jan. 28, while visiting China, the WHO’s Tedros urged the countries of the world “to remain calm and not to overreact,” expressing confidence in the CCP’s epidemic control, Chinese state-run media reported.

    On Feb. 3, three days after President Donald Trump prohibited foreigners who had recently been in China from traveling to the United States, Tedros voiced opposition to travel bans, saying measures that would “unnecessarily interfere with travel and trade” weren’t needed.

    In a March 20 tweet, Tedros repeated CCP propaganda, saying that “for the first time, #China has reported no domestic #COVID19 cases yesterday.” While for China experts, the news all but confirmed that the CCP numbers were fake, Tedros touted it as “an amazing achievement, that gives us all reassurance that the #coronavirus can be beaten.”

    Statistical modelingeyewitness accounts, and documents provided to The Epoch Times have shown that Chinese authorities concealed the true scale of the outbreak in Wuhan and other parts of China.

    Tedros, however, repeatedly praised China for “transparency” in its response to the outbreak—something experts and government officials around the world have emphasized as being the most lacking.

    The Victims of Communism Memorial Foundation, a nonprofit established in the 1990s by the U.S. government, published on April 10 a detailed timeline of the CCP’s coverup of the epidemic and of the WHO’s culpability in it. The organization also announced it would be adding the global CCP virus deaths to the historical death toll of communism.

    “The WHO has abdicated its responsibility to the entire world population in order to carry water for the Chinese Communist regime,”  the foundation’s executive director, Marion Smith, said in a release.

    A Personal Connection

    While part of the CCP’s influence over the WHO was coming from the U.N., another part of it was played by Tedros himself.

    Tedros is a former Politburo member of the Tigray People’s Liberation Front, a Maoist group that had waged a guerrilla war in the 1980s against the Soviet-backed Mengistu regime in Ethiopia.

    “The nearest you would put [Tigray’s ideology] to would be North Korea today,” according to Trevor Loudon, an expert on communist movements and front groups.

    In the early 1990s, as the regime at the time lost financial support from the collapsing Soviet Union, a coalition of Tigray and other groups overthrew it and ruled the country until 2019.

    While on the surface, the government embraced market reforms and democratic elections, ideologically it remained socialist, Loudon said, especially in terms of foreign policy.

    “They still keep up their foreign communist connections,” he said in a telephone interview with The Epoch Times.

    Tedros, a former health and later foreign minister of the African nation, naturally maintained strong ties with the CCP, embracing projects such as the “Belt and Road” initiative, which serves the CCP to expand its geostrategic influence.

    Tedros scored the WHO’s top post in 2017 with strong backing by the CCP’s lobby, despite allegations that he had covered up three cholera outbreaks during his tenure as health minister.

    “Chinese diplomats had campaigned hard for the Ethiopian, using Beijing’s financial clout and opaque aid budget to build support for him among developing countries,” Sunday Times columnist Rebecca Myers wrote at the time.

    Tedros denied covering up the cholera outbreaks, saying it was just “acute watery diarrhea.”

    He has proven adept at playing into Western sensitivity to accusations of oppression.

    When an adviser to his British opponent for the WHO leadership brought up the cholera coverups, he accused him of having a “colonial mindset.”

    When Taiwan called him out for ignoring its information about the CCP virus, Tedros accused Taiwan of racist attacks.

    That accusation seems to have done little to deflect the criticism; a petition calling for Tedros’s resignation has garnered nearly a million signatures.

    Meanwhile, the Trump administration is considering cutting off its funding to the WHO – the United States is by far the largest benefactor of the organization, providing more than $110 million a year in regular funding, plus hundreds of millions more in voluntary contributions.

    In Stanton’s view, the WHO, “as currently constituted,” should lose its funding.

    “I think we have to take a much harder line in terms of how the WHO has handled this virus,” he said. “Because it’s clearly been simply a mouthpiece, in my view, of the PRC [People’s Republic of China] government.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 17:15

  • US Abruptly Ends Continuous Bomber Presence In Guam Days After B-52 'Show Of Force'
    US Abruptly Ends Continuous Bomber Presence In Guam Days After B-52 'Show Of Force'

    Coming as a likely surprise to US enemies and rivals at a moment regional tensions with China are once again on the rise, and just days after a major aircraft “elephant walk” show of force was conducted at Anderson Air Force Base in Guam, the Air Force has announced it will end its continues bomber presence in Guam.

    This ends an ongoing bomber rotation since 2004, as The Drive reports: “Five B-52H Stratofortresses left yesterday with no replacement aircraft in place, bringing an end to what the service had called the Continuous Bomber Presence Mission.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    B-52 bombers at Guam, file image, Pinterest.

    A US Strategic Command (STRATCOM) statement confirmed the bombers are now to be “permanently based in the United States” after returning to American soil.

    “In line with the National Defense Strategy, the United States has transitioned to an approach that enables strategic bombers to operate forward in the Indo-Pacific region from a broader array of overseas locations, when required, and with greater operational resilience, while these bombers are permanently based in the United States,” STRATCOM said. 

    “U.S. strategic bombers will continue to operate in the Indo-Pacific, to include Guam, at the timing and tempo of our choosing,” the statement added

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Per Air Force Magazine, a major adjustment was expected

    The last deployment ended April 16, just three days after the elephant walk, as B-52s returned to Minot Air Force Base, N.D. The long-expected change comes as service leaders, including Air Force Chief of Staff Gen. David Goldfein and Air Force Global Strike Command boss Gen. Timothy Ray have said dynamic deployments of task force-size groups of bombers will be more effective in the future.

    “Yes, we are absolutely adjusting our presence in theater when it comes to bombers,” Goldfein said April 1.

    A separate STRATCOM statement late this week additionally said the bomber fleet allows the US to “respond to global events anytime, anywhere”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Our diverse bomber fleet – B-52, B-1 & B-2 – allows us Whether they’re launched from Louisiana, Guam, or the U.K., long-range strategic bombers have and will remain a bedrock of our deterrence!” – the statement posted on Twitter said.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 16:50

  • The Government Shows Little Respect For Our Tax Dollar
    The Government Shows Little Respect For Our Tax Dollar

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    Hard-working Americans that pay taxes should be more than angry over how little respect the politicians in Washington have for their tax dollars...

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An article that appeared on MarketWatch details what people that receive an undeserved 1,200 dollar stimulus checks under the CARES Act should do. The answer appears just over halfway down on the page in answer to the following question;

    Question: I believe that my adult son received a $1,200 EIP, via automatic deposit to his checking account, that he was not entitled to because he is my tax-return dependent. Will the IRS go into his checking account and debit it to get the money back?

    Answer: No. The statutory language in the CARES Act that set the whole EIP scheme in motion says that anybody who gets more money than they are actually entitled to can keep the excess. I endorse that concept: any money that gets into people’s hands is fair game.

    In the above case, it appears the fella received the money in error but I have heard, and I’m also under the impression the same issue exists in the case where a check is sent to somebody that is deceased. The article explains the Feds are using our beloved Internal Revenue Service to distribute these so-called Economic Impact Payments (EIPs). The IRS is not currently processing 2019 returns because the agency is swamped with all the new COVID-19-related tasks it has been given.

    The article also states the IRS’s data processing systems were notoriously inadequate even before getting overwhelmed with all these new tasks.

    Apparently to those in our government, 1,200 dollars isn’t worth the time it takes to do the administrative job of reclaiming it.

    From what I understand we are talking about checks that total several billions of dollars. This type of waste is just another example of why people don’t like paying taxes.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 16:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 18th April 2020

  • Did Xi Jinping Deliberately Sicken The World?
    Did Xi Jinping Deliberately Sicken The World?

    Authored by Ben Lowsen via TheDiplomat.com,

    PRC moral turpitude forces us to consider the unthinkable…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We often ascribe a basic level of humanity to even the cruelest leaders, but People’s Republic of China leader Xi Jinping’s actions have forced us to rethink this assumption. Although the emergence of the novel coronavirus now known as SARS-CoV-2 was probably not due to China’s actions, the emphasis that its authoritarian system places on hiding bad news likely gave the disease a sizable head start infecting the world. But most ominously, China’s obsession with image and Machtpolitik raises serious questions about its lack of moral limits.

    At some point the Chinese Communist Party learned of the epidemic and made a decision to hide its existence, hoping it went away. Exposés in Hong Kong’s South China Morning Post and the Chinese mainland’s Caixin show that the information that did flow out of China early in the crisis did so only because of the courage of individual Chinese people in the face of government repression. People in the Wuhan epicenter, however, began to get wise — and scared (here and here) — by the end of December 2019, forcing their government to say something. The authorities gave the impression of a nontransmissible disease already under containment. We know now this was entirely false, likely designed more to ease civil unrest than protect the people.

    The mayor of Wuhan even suggested that the central government prevented him from revealing details about the epidemic until January 20.

    Considering the first public announcements came out of Wuhan on January 1, we can assume that Xi had a sense of the danger prior to that.

    Clearly, downplaying the disease wasn’t working and it was time for the Party to get serious. But how serious? Would it provide full cooperation to the international community? Would being seen as the source of this virus hurt its international image? Beyond these, there was a darker dimension: the more Beijing cooperated, the less the disease stood to affect other countries. This includes countries China sees as a threat to its existence, like the United States. Why should China suffer the effects of a pandemic while others stayed safe — and increased their strength relative to China — based on China’s own costly experience?

    Such a question is of course inimical to human decency. And yet we must consider that Xi Jinping has produced the greatest program of ethnic cleansing in the world today. He has curtailed freedoms in China severely and is the father of the panopticon state. His incessant military buildup threatens neighbors while using economic and other subversive means to erode the sovereignty of countries around the world. We should not assume it was beyond his imagining to withhold a degree of support from the international community to ensure that China would not suffer alone.

    Strong evidence supports this idea. Hearing the World Health Organization (WHO) repeat and praise the Party line while giving short shrift to health advice until quite recently has alarmed many. Seeing Beijing sell defective wares and claim it as humanitarian aid has angered many more. Spreading disinformation during the crisis and hinting at using life-saving goods for leverage (original here) — while denying even the faintest hint of wrongdoing – I suspect have ruined China’s reputation for some time to come. In short, China’s good offices have been reserved almost entirely for burnishing its image at the world’s expense, while calling it “the greatest kindness and good deeds.”

    None of this can prove whether or when Xi made a deliberate decision to withhold information in order to imperil others. However, as a long-time student and admirer of China, it is with great sadness I must concede that such a state — and its increasingly paranoid leader — might very well provide less than full cooperation to stem the pandemic of the century in the crass pursuit of its own interests. This may constitute biological warfare. But even if it doesn’t Xi should be brought to account for his other crimes against humanity.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/18/2020 – 00:00

  • COVID Concerns Crush World's Oldest Profession – Demand Plunges 80%
    COVID Concerns Crush World's Oldest Profession – Demand Plunges 80%

    In mid-March, we pointed out how sex worker income was on the verge of collapse as states imposed social-distancing rules and enforced lockdowns amid the COVID-19 pandemic. 

    About a month later, the world’s oldest profession, that is prostitution, has seen an unprecedented slide in income for workers. Some reports detail how demand has dropped by 80% in a month. 

    AFP News interviews several sex workers who say demand for their services has slid due to fears of contracting the virus. 

    “Being a prostitute has always been a good option in times of crisis… until this one,” says Bruno, a sex worker who has seen his business crash under social distancing rules enforced by the government.

    Bruno is a sex worker in Los Angeles, now suffering as he is drawing from savings to survive. 

    Despite 20,646 deaths across the country, infecting 530,830 people, Bruno said he would have to continue his services:

    “I’m going to have to take the risk, it’s the only way I can make money,” he said.

    He said sex demand has fallen up to 80% as there are only a handful of clients asking him for private sessions. 

    Bruno said his line of work leaves him at high risk of contracting sexually transmitted diseases, nevertheless, now, coronavirus. 

    “I’m surprised that, with this virus going around, people still want to take the danger,” he said.

    Molly Simmons, a New York sex worker, said her profession is not “recognized” by the government and leaves many of her colleagues “pushed into a state of financial desperation.” This is because they cannot tap into government assistance programs to supplement income when times get bad. 

    We noted last month that an evolving trend in the sex industry was the increase of live stream shows that have allowed sex workers to diversify their income. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bruno said he has a friend that makes $3,000 per month doing live shows online. 

    “I’m not criticizing it, but I’m not getting into it,” he said. “I don’t want my financial difficulties to cost me my privacy.”

    Toronto dominatrix Lady Pim told Vice last month that quarantines would drive people to pay for online sex

    “If we’re in lockdown—just by ourselves, don’t have a partner, and don’t have any sex or kink outlets—then I can 100 percent see people turning around to do a Skype session or phone session.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Lady Pim was right last month, as we noted days ago, Americans are flooding porn sites like PornHub during the quarantine. 

    Lingerie chain Ann Summers reported a run on dildos over the last week of March, sales surged 27% over the same period the previous year. 

    It remains to be seen if the sex worker income will ever recover to pre-corona levels. That is because the way people interreact with one another will change until a proven vaccine is seen. 

    So, in the meantime, sex worker income crashes, the ones who survive resort to online shows. And does that mean the rise of the sex doll industry is imminent


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 23:40

  • The Real Reason Russia & China Teamed-Up… Here's What Comes Next For American Preeminence & The Dollar
    The Real Reason Russia & China Teamed-Up… Here's What Comes Next For American Preeminence & The Dollar

    Via InternationalMan.com,

    Vladimir Pozner is Russia’s most influential political TV talk-show host, journalist and broadcaster.

    Pozner has hosted several shows on Russian television, where he has interviewed famous figures such as Hillary Clinton, Alain Delon, President Dimitri Medvedev and Sting.

    Pozner has appeared on a wide range of networks, including NBC, CBS, CNN and the BBC. He has worked as a journalist, editor (Soviet Life Magazine and Sputnik Magazine) and TV and radio commentator in a long career covering many major events in Russia.

    Pozner has appeared on The Phil Donahue Show and Ted Koppel’s Nightline. He has also worked for the Institute for US and Canadian Studies, a Soviet think tank.

    He co-hosted a show with Phil Donahue called Pozner/Donahue. It was the first televised bi-lateral discussion (or “spacebridge”) between audiences in the Soviet Union and the US, carried via satellite.

    In 1997, he returned to Moscow as an independent journalist.

    Doug Casey’s friend Mark Gould sat down with Pozner in Moscow to help us better understand the relationship between the US and Russia.

    *  *  *

    International Man: Do you see a resurging Russia and a restoration of Russian Empire, or simply a national state resurgence?

    Vladimir Pozner: Certainly not. Russia is not a resurging empire. There is no way it’s ever going to be an empire again.

    Empires have this universal feature of disappearing forever, whether it’s ancient Rome or whether it’s the UK or whatever. Once it’s gone, it’s gone.

    It’s not going to come back, and people have to come to terms with that. Russia has been an empire since the days of Peter the Great— we’re talking about the 18th century. It is used to being an empire. The Soviet Union was an empire.

    The loss of an empire is painful. It’s like when you lose a leg but have phantom pains—the leg isn’t there, but it still hurts.

    Well, that’s what’s going on. Psychologically, it’s difficult to accept. So, you have a certain degree of nationalism, chauvinism—and it’s part of growing out of what you were once upon a time and becoming something else.

    Is that happening in Russia? Yes.

    Is it painful? Yes, it’s painful. Is there a deep divide between the older generation and the younger generation? There’s always a divide, but in this case, a very deep divide.

    It’s because the older generation is a Soviet generation that was brought up in the Soviet Union, that went to Soviet schools, that was created by a society that no longer exists.

    The younger generation grew up in a different kind of place. It could travel, it has the Internet, it can watch whatever movies, read, whatever books, whatever newspapers, whatever it wants. It is independent in the way it thinks, as differing from the older generation.

    There‘s a real divide between the two. It‘s not until the older generation who are in power today are gone—and those who today are 18, 19, 20 come to power—that the real changes will begin to occur in this country.

    It‘s a gradual, very difficult change, but nonetheless, it‘s happening. I can see it.

    I travel a lot around Russia, and when I speak the places are packed, and most of the people, much to my surprise and gratification, are under 30. To put it bluntly, I‘m not young, and yet about 80% are young people.

    When I‘ve asked myself, why is it? What do I say that attracts them?

    What I think it is, they see that I tell the truth.

    I don‘t beat around the bush, and I ask questions to make them think, not to accept. I always say, “Don’t accept what you’re told. Think about it; doubt it”; that kind of thing.

    International Man: How do Russia’s actions, say in the Middle East, reflect this, for instance in Syria or the theoretical pulling of American troops out of the Middle East?

    How do you see Russia vis-à-vis Iran and China? Are the days of Pax Americana, indeed, coming to a close?

    Vladimir Pozner: For me, the problem is this: If you have a country like Iraq or Syria, you have local people living there. What goes on in that country, in my opinion, is strictly their business.

    It would be a good thing if no other country felt the need to interfere in the business of another country. However, that’s not the case. Certain countries have so-called global interests.

    The Soviet Union had its global interest. It had a lot of influence in the Middle East and the surrounding area—which is much closer to it than the United States.

    When the Soviet Union disappeared, there was a vacuum. The United States immediately moved into that area because it had its global interest.

    When Russia started coming back in—in the case of Syria—first, the Americans went in supporting the opposition to Bashar Al Assad, and then the Russians came in supporting Assad.

    So, what you have is these two countries—plus China, in a different way—trying to further what they consider to be their global interests at the cost of local people. The local people never asked them to come in the first place.

    I totally disagree with the foreign policy of Russia, and in that respect, the foreign policy of the United States as well. My view would be to keep out. It’s none of your goddamn business. It’s their country.

    The only reason you go in is that you’re stronger than they are.

    You don’t go into China, for instance, because you don’t like the system, and you don’t even go into North Korea for a very good reason because you’re afraid you’ll get a bomb on your capital or something.

    This whole idea of global interests, to me, is a profoundly provocative and dangerous idea that can lead to serious military conflict.

    The United States is finally getting out of Afghanistan. The only reason the US is getting out of Afghanistan is that it didn’t succeed in doing anything there. The Taliban is back.

    The Russians fought there for a while, and they also had to get out. Isn’t that a lesson?

    How many times does this have to happen before you understand that well, we may not like what’s going on in that country, but it’s just none of our business.

    There can be very specific, rare cases when the United Nations might say we must interfere. For example, when there is some kind of genocide. That has to be a decision of the UN, not of the United States or the Russian Federation or the Chinese People’s Republic.

    It has to be the United Nations—all together unanimously says, yes, we must interfere.

    That’s legitimate; otherwise there should be no such things as global interests.

    International Man: Russia has been building alternatives to Western-dominated systems. This includes measures to protect itself from sanctions involving the US financial system, an alternative to the SWIFT system, alternative trade deals with other BRICS countries, the Eurasian Economic Union, and integration with China’s New Silk Road program.

    What are the implications for this?

    Vladimir Pozner: I’m not an economist, and so I prefer not to discuss issues that I don’t really know very well.

    One thing I will tell you, the turning of Russia towards the East, towards China, is not something that was done voluntarily. It is something that is the result of, first and foremost, the United States making clear that it would not agree to trade with Russia on an equal basis—it would not regard Russia as an equal partner.

    In fact, it would employ sanctions to punish Russia. In a way, it kind of forced Russia to look the other way.

    Ultimately, this could lead to some very profound changes in the world situation because if you have a trading block that consists of Russia, China, India, and the Arab nations, you’re really changing the status of the world.

    I’m very hesitant at this because, after all, I do believe in the importance of the similarities of culture, the similarities of religion.

    Although I’m an atheist, but nonetheless, I fully understand the implications of coming from a Judeo-Christian past heritage, which is very different from what you will find in the East, be it Confucianism or Muslim or Buddhism or whatever.

    I don’t think that there can ever really be the kind of deep understanding.

    I put it somewhat vaguely, West and East—after all, East is East and West is West, and never the twain shall meet.

    In that sense, I think Kipling had an important point. I don’t know where this is going to lead. I’m not particularly fond of that, but again, I place it squarely at the doorstep of the United States.

    It’s a forced move because if you’re told, “Well, we were not going to deal with you.” Then where do you go?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: Amid the poor relations with the US, Russia has strengthened its relationship with China. The two countries have increased their economic, military and political ties. How does this impact US hegemony in the world?

    Vladimir Pozner: I think that the leading factor here is China, not Russia.

    China sees itself historically at the center of the world. Today, it views itself as the fastest-growing powerful nation that, by the middle of this century, will be number one in every possible respect: militarily, economically, etc.

    Russia has a much closer relationship with China, historically, than does the United States.

    Russia has a huge border with China, and it is much more dependent on China than the United States is.

    I think that the Russian leadership understands the need to create as many positive relations with China as possible, looking down the road as to what’s going to happen.

    There could have been a US-Russian entente, if you will. That would have stood in the way of Chinese hegemony, but that is not happening.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the long run, I think what’s going to happen is that the big winner is going to be China. The big losers are going to be Russia and the United States, but perhaps the United States even more than Russia because the Russians are doing a lot to improve relations with China. The United States is continuously opposing China economically, so on and so forth.

    The Chinese have a very long memory, and they’re not forgetting who was doing what. I would say that what the United States is doing is very shortsighted vis-a-vis China.

    International Man: In a number of your talks or discussions over the past several years, you’ve stated your purpose as a journalist of bringing about more understanding between the 2 countries.

    Considering the tensions that have arisen in the past 6 years, is there actually a path towards better understanding?

    Vladimir Pozner: I think it’s possible, but it’s hard to imagine that happening in the short term, because for that to happen, there has to be an understanding on both sides—that this is necessary and in the national interest of both countries.

    Without that understanding, it’s very difficult to achieve anything. Should that understanding, through a new president let’s say, then there are ways to make this happen and to make the attitudes change as rapidly.

    One of the grand ideas of course, is for instance, on a yearly basis to exchange, say 10,000 kids between the ages of 9 and 12 to live in the homes of each other—and to go to the schools of each other just for one year, and then go back home.

    That in itself would play a stupendous role in changing outlooks or even informing outlooks. If you did that for 10 years, you’d have 100,000 of those, and those are the people who would be able occupy important posts in the future.

    Certainly, things like space bridges are quite possible.

    Today, I know for a fact that the Russians are open to it, the Americans are not.

    I proposed this to Channel 1, they said, if the Americans are willing to, we’ll do it.

    ABC, NBC, CBS – nobody’s interested.

    This face to face contact is extremely important in changing attitudes. We saw that happen back in 1985. It could happen again, but the basic underlying thing is an understanding on the part of both sides that this is something we need. It’s good for us. It’s good for others too, but we’re not talking about others.

    We’re egoists, it’s good for us.

    What I’m waiting for, and I don’t know whether I’ll live long enough for this to happen is for the leadership on both sides to come to this conclusion.

    It doesn’t mean we’re going to fall in love with each other. It doesn’t mean we’re going to be close friends. It means we’re going to have, normal relations. We’ll have our differences, but we won’t have the prejudice, the fear, and sometimes the hatred that we harbor.

    Therefore, the danger, of being misunderstood and of firing off a few missiles – the atomic clock will no longer be at two minutes to midnight but maybe at 15 minutes to midnight. That’s basically a huge triumph.

    *  *  *

    There are so many momentous events unfolding right now, including a stock market crash and a global pandemic. The biggest financial bubble in human history has popped… and the coming financial volatility will be unlike anything we’ve ever seen before. It will be an increasingly dangerous time for retirees, savers, and investors. That’s precisely why, NY Times best-selling author Doug Casey and his team released their report on how to Survive and Thrive the volatility ahead. Click here to download the free PDF now.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 23:20

  • Watch: Failed Israeli Drone Strike On Top Hezbollah Official Caught In Rare Video
    Watch: Failed Israeli Drone Strike On Top Hezbollah Official Caught In Rare Video

    Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) have once again ramped up operations along the southern Lebanese border at a moment Hezbollah leadership has declared it is “fully prepared for war with Israel”.

    The latest escalation came Wednesday when an Israeli drone targeted a car full of Hezbollah operatives just inside Syria near the border with Lebanon. The Shia resistance organization said all escaped alive and without injury in what’s become an increasingly common IDF tactic – assassination attempt by drone. 

    However, it’s extremely rare that such an assassination attempt be caught on video. But on Friday CCTV footage emerged capturing the moment of the strike, appearing in Arabic and Israeli media:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s being widely reported that there was initial strike – either a missed strike or possibly a ‘warning’ – followed by a missile which destroyed the vehicle. 

    An eyewitness told AFP “An Israeli drone first struck near a car transporting Hezbollah members,” but indicated “The passengers got out before it was then directly hit in a second strike” – leaving no casualties. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image via Middle East Monitor

    Syria’s state SANA news service also confirmed the attack and breach of its sovereign territory in the IDF operation. 

    Since the beginning of the nine-year long proxy war in Syria, Israel has attacked inside Syria hundreds of times and over the past years has vowed to roll back Iran’s presence inside the country – there at the invitation of the Assad government. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Screenshot of UAV attack aftermath, via “Arab News”.

    Late Friday the IDF reported fence damage along the Isreali-Lebanese border. “This is a severe event. We hold the Lebanese government responsible for actions from its territory,” the IDF said in a statement.

    It’s unclear who among Hezbollah’s ranks was the intended target of Wednesday’s UAV strike, however, regional media reporting indicated a “top Hezbollah security official” was in the car and escaped.

    There’s been no confirmation of who exactly was in the car, but they were likely on their way to Damascus for high level meetings.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 23:00

  • How The Military-Industrial Complex Is Using The Coronavirus
    How The Military-Industrial Complex Is Using The Coronavirus

    Authored by William Hartung and Ben Freeman via TheNation.com,

    Arms industry lobbyists are addressing this pandemic and preparing for the next by pushing weapons sales…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There’s a battle brewing for the future of national security spending.

    On one side, there’s a growing bipartisan consensus that the coronavirus has fundamentally changed the way we should think about national security. Ben Rhodes, former deputy national security adviser in the Obama White House, recently argued in The Atlantic that we have to rethink the orientation and priorities of our government, and “it makes no sense that the Pentagon budget is 13 times larger than the entire international-affairs budget, which funds the State Department, USAID, and global programs at other agencies.”

    Kori Schake, the director of foreign and defense policy studies at the conservative American Enterprise Institute, said the bottom line is that “we’re going to see enormous downward pressure on defense spending because of other urgent American national needs like health care.”

    Even conservative commentators like Max Boot, who less than two years ago wrote, “the United States is losing the ability to defend itself,” recently wrote that “Instead of simply pouring more money into the Pentagon, we need to develop new capacities to combat foreign disinformation, transition away from carbon fuels and stop the spread of pandemics.”

    On the other side, despite this support from across the political spectrum to reduce the Pentagon’s budget and focus more on non-military threats to national security – an argument the Center for International Policy’s Sustainable Defense Task Force made long before the coronavirus pandemic – there stands one of the most powerful players in American politics: the military-industrial complex.

    If history is any indication, the military-industrial complex isn’t going down without a fight, nor is the Pentagon budget. Through their droves of lobbyists, the revolving door between the Pentagon, contractors, and Congress, and the promise of providing jobs to every Congressional district, Pentagon contractors have kept the defense budget artificially inflated for years at the expense of funding for things like the Centers for Disease Control and other agencies that can help fight disease outbreaks. And, in this new coronavirus era, they’re using the same playbook once again.

    The power of the military-industrial complex to keep the defense budget artificially high has perhaps never been more apparent than in the last nine years when the Pentagon budget was under perpetual threat of being reduced after passage of the Budget Control Act in 2011 (BCA). While Pentagon contractors decry the damage wreaked by the BCA, their lobbyists and advocates omit one key fact: The defense budget has actually increased under the BCA to roughly $750 billion per year, well above the levels reached during the Vietnam or Korean Wars.

    After the BCA was enacted, military spending was to be capped at an ample $5.4 trillion over 10 years, but over that same time period the US actually spent $5.7 trillion on the military. This was largely because Congress and presidents Obama and Trump consistently agreed to lift the caps on defense spending in addition to using the Overseas Contingency Operations account—which has been described as a slush fund—to dodge the spending caps.

    The arms lobby is well-positioned to exert influence over Pentagon spending going forward.  Hundreds of former senior government officials—645 in 2018 alone, according to the Project on Government Oversight—have gone through the “revolving door’ to work for the defense industry as lobbyists, executives, consultants, or board members. This gives them an inside track on debates over budget priorities. And, the revolving door swings both ways.

    The last three secretaries of defense have been a former board member of General Dynamics, a former Boeing executive, and the former chief lobbyist for Raytheon, respectively. Most importantly of all, President Trump has been the greatest champion of the arms industry, touting (and exaggerating) the number of jobs created by arms sales to countries like Saudi Arabia.

    This massive influence operation has already led to early wins for the arms makers in the coronavirus era. Boeing successfully pushed for billions in aid to the arms industry in the $2 trillion stimulus bill, and arms industry lobbyists successfully pushed to get weapons makers deemed “essential” businesses during the coronavirus pandemic.

    While the battle to defeat this pandemic rages, the battle to defeat the next one has already begun, and so far, arms industry lobbyists are winning. They’re making sure that Pentagon contractors continue to thrive, even as much more pressing priorities than bomb making demand our attention. Instead of protecting contractor profits, Congress must choose to protect the American people from the very real threats that are killing thousands of Americans as we speak.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 22:40

  • New Footage Shows Chinese Soldiers Firing Next-Generation Assault Rifle 
    New Footage Shows Chinese Soldiers Firing Next-Generation Assault Rifle 

    New footage of China’s next-generation assault rifle, called the QBZ-191, recently appeared on state-owned broadcaster China Central Television (CCTV), reported Defense Blog

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chinese troops firing the QBZ-191

    QBZ-191 chambers a 5.8 × 42 mm round, which will replace the QBZ-95 assault rifle in service with the People’s Liberation Army (PLA). CCTV says the new lightweight assault rifle was developed by the No. 208 Research Institute of China Ordnance Industries. 

    “According to sources, the new rifle is chambered in the standard 5.8x42mm caliber using a new type of rounds that have better performance on medium to long-range. It has an effective firing range of 300 m for the carbine version and 400 m for the assault rifle version with a rate of fire of 750 rpm (Rounds Per Minute),” Defense Blog said.

    QBZ-191’s design is very similar to modern bullpup-style rifles designed in Europe and the US with a top Picatinny rail for attachments. The weapon is outfitted with a new optical device, presumably a red dot sight. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    QBZ-191 revealed at Beijing’s 70th-anniversary parade in 2019

    The PLA has been on the hunt for several years to replace its legacy QBZ-95 assault rifle. It wasn’t until the 70th anniversary of the People’s Republic of China in 2019, that a military parade via the PLA revealed the new weapon. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 22:20

  • Is The Russia-Saudi Oil-Price War A Fraud And A Farce?
    Is The Russia-Saudi Oil-Price War A Fraud And A Farce?

    Authored by Mike Whitney via The Unz Review,

    The Russia-Saudi oil-price war is a fabrication concocted by the media. There’s not a word of truth to any of it. Yes, there was a dust up at an OPEC meeting in early March that led to production increases and plunging prices. That part is true.

    But Saudi Arabia’s oil-dumping strategy wasn’t aimed at Russia, it was aimed at US shale oil producers. But not for the reasons you’ve read about in the media.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Saudis aren’t trying to destroy the US shale oil business. That’s another fiction. They just want US producers to play by the rules and pitch in when prices need support. That might seem like a stretch, but it’s true.

    You see, US oil producers are not what-you’d-call “team players”. They don’t cooperate with foreign producers, they’re not willing to share the costs of flagging demand, and they never lift a finger to support prices. US oil producers are the next-door-neighbor that parks his beat-up Plymouth on the front lawn and then surrounds it with rusty appliances. They don’t care about anyone but themselves.

    What Putin and Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman want is for US producers to share the pain of oil production cuts in order to stabilize prices. It’s an entirely reasonable request. Here’s a clip from an article at oilprice.com that helps to explain what’s really going on:

    “… there was a sliver of hope that oil prices may rebound after Reuters reported that Saudi Arabia, Russia and allied oil producers will agree to deep cuts to their crude output at talks this week but only if the United States and several others join in with curbs to help prop up prices that have been hammered by the coronavirus crisis. However, in an attempt to have its cake and eat it too, the U.S. DOE said on Tuesday that U.S. output is already falling without government action, in line with the White House’s insistence that it would not intervene in the private markets….

    … OPEC+ will require the United States to make cuts in order to come to an agreement: The EIA report today demonstrates that there are already projected cuts of 2 (million bpd), without any intervention from the federal government,” the U.S. Energy Department said.

    That is not enough for OPEC+ however, and certainly not Russia, which on Wednesday made clear that market-driven declines in oil production shouldn’t be considered as cuts intended to stabilize the market, Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov tells reporters on conference call.

    “These are completely different cuts. You are comparing the overall demand drop with cuts to stabilize global markets. It’s like comparing length and width,” Peskov said…..Moscow’s participation is highly contingent on the US, and is unlikely to agree to output cuts if the US does not join the effort.” (“Historic Oil Deal On The Verge Of Collapse As Russia Balks At U.S. ‘Cuts’”, oilprice.com)

    Putin is being reasonable and fair. If everyone else is forced to cut supply, then US oil producers should have to cut supply too. But they don’t want to share the pain, so they’ve settled on a strategy for weaseling out of it. They want their reductions in output (from weak demand during the pandemic) to count as “production cuts”. They even have a name for this swindle, they call it “organic production cuts”, which means no cuts at all. This is the way hucksters do business not responsible adults.

    What does Putin want from this deal?

    Price stability. Yes, he’d like to see prices settle somewhere north of $45 per barrel but that’s not going to happen for a while. The combination of a weaker demand (due to the coronavirus) and oversupply (from the Saudis flooding the market) have ensured that prices will remain low for the foreseeable future. Even so, Putin understood what the Saudis were doing by flooding the market, and he knew it wasn’t directed at Russia. The Saudis were trying to persuade US oil producers to stop freeloading and cut production like everyone else. That’s the long and short of it. Check out this excerpt from an article by oil expert, Simon Watkins at oilprice.com:

    “Saudi Arabia was continually peeved …(because) its efforts to keep oil prices up through various OPEC and OPEC+ agreements were allowing these very shale producers to make a lot more money than the Saudis, relatively speaking. The reason for this was that U.S. shale producers…. were not bound in to the OPEC/OPEC+ production quotas so could fill the output gaps created by OPEC producers.” (“The Sad Truth About The OPEC+ Production Cut”, Simon Watkins, oilprice.com)

    This is what the media fails to tell their readers, that US oil producers– who don’t participate in any collective effort to stabilize prices– have been exploiting OPEC production quotas in order to fatten the bottom line at the expense of others. US producers figured out how to game the system and make a bundle in the process. Is it any wonder why the Saudis were pissed?? Here’s more from the same article:

    “This allowed the U.S. a rolling 3-4 million bpd advantage over Saudi in the oil exports game, meaning that it quickly became the world’s number one oil producer…. Hence, Saudi Arabia decided initially to unilaterally announce its intention for the last OPEC+ deal to be much bigger than that which it had pre-agreed with Russia, hoping to ambush the Russians into agreeing. Russia, however, turned around and told Saudi Arabia to figuratively go and reproduce with itself. MbS,… then decided to launch an all-out price war.” (oilprice.com)

    So you can see that this really had nothing to do with Russian at all. The Crown Prince was simply frustrated at the way US oil producers were gaming the system, which is why he felt like he had to respond by flooding the market. The obvious target was the US shale oil industry that was taking advantage of the quotas, refusing to cooperate with fellow oil producers and generally freeloading off the existing quota system.

    And what’s funny, is that as soon as the Saudis started putting the screws to the US fracking gang, they all scampered off to Washington en masse to beg for help from Papa Trump. Which is why Trump decided to make emergency calls to Moscow and Riyadh to see if he could hash out a deal.

    It’s worth noting that domestic oil producers have been involved in other dodgy activities in the past. Check out this excerpt from an article in the Guardian in 2014, the last time oil prices crashed:

    “After standing at well over $110 a barrel in the summer, the cost of crude has collapsed. Prices are down by a quarter in the past three months….

    Think about how the Obama administration sees the state of the world. It wants Tehran to come to heel over its nuclear programme. It wants Vladimir Putin to back off in eastern Ukraine. But after recent experiences in Iraq and Afghanistan, the White House has no desire to put American boots on the ground. Instead, with the help of its Saudi ally, Washington is trying to drive down the oil price by flooding an already weak market with crude. As the Russians and the Iranians are heavily dependent on oil exports, the assumption is that they will become easier to deal with

    The Saudis did something similar in the mid-1980s. Then, the geopolitical motivation for a move that sent the oil price to below $10 a barrel was to destabilize Saddam Hussein’s regime….

    Washington’s willingness to play the oil card stems from the belief that domestic supplies of energy from fracking make it possible for the US to become the world’s biggest oil producer. In a speech last year, Tom Donilon, then Barack Obama’s national security adviser, said the US was now less vulnerable to global oil shocks. The cushion provided by shale oil and gas “affords us a stronger hand in pursuing and implementing our national security goals”. (“Stakes are high as US plays the oil card against Iran and Russia”, The Guardian)

    This excerpt shows that Washington is more than willing to use the “oil card” if it helps to achieve its geopolitical objectives. Not surprisingly, good buddy, Saudi Arabia, has historically played a key role in helping to promote those goals. The current incident, however, is the exact opposite. The Saudis aren’t helping the US achieve its objectives, quite the contrary, they’re lashing out in frustration. They feel like they’re being squeezed by Washington (and US producers) and they want to prove that they have the means to fight back. Flooding the market was just MBS’s way of “letting off steam”.

    Trump understands this, but he also understands who ultimately calls the shots, which is why he took the unusual step of explicitly warning the Saudis that they’d better shape up and step in line or there’d be hell to pay. Here’s a little background that will help to connect the dots:

    “..the deal made in 1945 between the U.S. President Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Saudi King at the time, Abdulaziz, that has defined the relationship between the two countries ever since… the deal that was struck between the two men on board the U.S. Navy cruiser Quincy… was that the U.S. would receive all of the oil supplies it needed for as long as Saudi Arabia had oil in place, in return for which the U.S. would guarantee the security of the ruling House of Saud. The deal has altered slightly ever since the rise of the U.S. shale oil industry and Saudi Arabia’s attempt to destroy it from 2014 to 2016, in that the U.S. still guarantees the security of the House of Saud but it also expects Saudi Arabia not only to supply the U.S. with whatever oil it needs for as long as it can but also – and this is key to everything that has followed – it also allows the U.S. shale industry to continue to function and to grow.

    As far as the U.S. is concerned, if t his means that the Saudis lose out to U.S. shale producers by keeping oil prices up but losing out on export opportunities to these U.S. firms then tough..

    As U.S. President Donald Trump has made clear whenever he has sensed a lack of understanding on the part of Saudi Arabia for the huge benefit that the U.S. is doing the ruling family: “He [Saudi King Salman] would not last in power for two weeks without the backing of the U.S. military.” (“The Sad Truth About The OPEC+ Production Cut”, Simon Watkins, Oil Price)

    Trump felt like he had to remind the Saudis how the system actually works: Washington gives the orders and the Saudi’s obey. Simple, right? In fact, the Crown Prince has already slashed oil production dramatically and is fully complying with Trump’s directives, because he knows if he doesn’t, he’s going to wind up like Saddam Hussein or Muammar Gaddafi.

    Meanwhile, US shale oil producers won’t be required to make any cuts at all or, as the New York Times puts it: “It was not immediately clear if the Trump administration made a formal commitment to cut production in the United States.”

    Got that? So everyone else cuts production, everyone else sees their revenues shrink, and everyone else pitches-in to put a floor under prices. Everyone except the “exceptional” American oil producers from the exceptional United States. They don’t have to do a damn thing.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 22:00

  • After 86 Million Miles In Space, NASA Astronauts Forced To Take 186 Mile COVID-19-Detour On Return To Earth
    After 86 Million Miles In Space, NASA Astronauts Forced To Take 186 Mile COVID-19-Detour On Return To Earth

    You know the coronavirus restrictions in place globally are serious when its easier to get back to Earth from the International Space Station than it is to get home once you’ve touched back down on the blue planet. 

    NASA astronauts Andrew Morgan and Jessica Meir are being forced to take a major detour on their way home from the Kazakh steppe, where they landed early Friday morning. After 205 days in space, more than 3200 orbits around the Earth and a trip of 86.9 million miles, the astronauts still have to take a 186 mile detour before boarding a flight back to the U.S.

    The astronaut’s Soyuz MS-15 capsule touched down southeast of the Kazakh town of Dzhezkazgan at 1117 local time, according to Reuters, as was planned.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But all of Kazakhstan’s provinces are in lockdown as a result of coronavirus quarantines, so search and rescue teams were unable to set up a base in Dzhezkazgan for the astronauts.

    According to Vyacheslav Rogozhnikov, the deputy head of Russia’s Federal Medical Biological Agency, the Baikonur cosmodrome spaceport, which is rented by Russia despite being in Kazakhstan, was instead being used as a base for the crew. 

    The U.S. astronauts will then have to endure a 186 mile drive to Kzylorda, where they will then board a NASA aircraft that will finally wind up taking them home. 

    You can watch the livestream of the landing, as it happened early Friday morning, here:

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 21:40

  • 14 Ways To Improve Mental Health During The World's Biggest Psychological Experiment
    14 Ways To Improve Mental Health During The World's Biggest Psychological Experiment

    Authored by Natalia Braun via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    What we were warned about but turned a blind eye to and did not expect in the Western world to this extent, happened: we found ourselves in the midst of a pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Social distancing, quarantine and hygienic practices are essential behavioural methods in such times to reduce spreading of the new virus and mortality. But these precautionary measures, whether imposed or consciously chosen to protect ourselves and the persons at risk against the coronavirus, could be challenging for us humans as we are social beings. They can be particularly tough to those who are prone to anxiety and depression. 

    Still, solitude should not mean loneliness and has also its positive sides. Here is some practical advice on how to cope with the challenges we may face during quarantine or a lockdown and what we can proactively do for our mental health. In the present distress, some of these things we used to take for granted might sink into oblivion. 

    • Follow recommendations for protecting yourself.

    • Stop following every news on the virus. Read only serious, respected media, arrange a limited time for that and stick to it.

    • Stay in touch with your loved ones and friends via telephone and virtual forms of communication. 

    • Avoid making major life decisions as far as possible. This is not the right time for that: too much unpredictability and uncertainty for the long-term future, too many emotions might mislead you and cause problems in the future.

    • Clean up your home place: cleaning up your living space has an effect of cleaning up and sorting out your mind and soul. You could certainly find a wardrobe, a box or a bookshelf you’ve always wanted to sort out or rearrange but never got around to it. Now it’s a good time to do that.

    • Exercise every day. Physical health plays a major role in maintaining good mental health. Exercise releases chemicals like endorphins and serotonin that improve your mood and reduce stress and the symptoms of anxiety and depression. You may try yoga (five simple but very effective exercises that activate your whole body – and mind: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=71jaJu0dc98) or put on some rhythmic music and dance (simple movements that are fun and very effective, too: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1p1ubjp_VtA. For the fans of Latin music and dance among us, there is a wonderful way to dance alone, too: try salsa suelta, a solo form of Cuban salsa. It will not only bring in motion your whole body, but boost your energy, mood and zest for life. More on salsa suelta with a great video: http://www.mivida.com.au/portfolio/salsa-suelta/. As my research shows, dance improves health and wellbeing and is an effective stress coping mechanism.

    • Try some further forms of creative arts, they are powerful in stress reduction. There is lots of evidence that making art significantly lowers stress-related hormone cortisol. Art-making is being experienced as relaxing, enjoyable, helpful for learning about new aspects of self, and freeing from constraints. As Picasso said: “Art washes away from the soul the dust of everyday life.” Besides dancing, it could be painting, drawing, playing piano or some other instrument. But also pottery, baking and knitting are very creative and relaxing activities that additionally involve tactile sensations, important in countering loneliness. 

    • If you have indoor plants, a balcony or a terrace, you might engage into some kind of gardening and reconcile with nature. Gardening has a positive effect on our mental health, which includes relaxation, positive feelings, staying in the present moment, coping with difficult emotions, and feeling in control. Spending some time in the sun boosts your vitamin D balance which is important for maintaining healthy bones.

    • Keep a diary. Writing down your feelings and thoughts may help sort them out and calm down. You may even want to try poetry writing – you never know what hidden talents you may have.

    • Try relaxation techniques like meditation, diaphragmatic breathing or progressive muscle relaxation: tightening an individual muscle group, holding it for a while and then relaxing it.

    • As our mind and body are deeply interconnected, eat healthy: choose nutrition rich foods, especially those that strengthen your immune system. Food supplements like L-arginine and reishi mushroom would additionally boost your immune system. 

    • Get enough sleep. Good sleep is crucial for countering anxious and depressive mood and overall for good mental and physical health. Try to wake up and go to bed at more or less the same time and get at least 8 hours of sleep. Don’t look at your phone or tablet (which you are hopefully disinfecting regularly) at least an hour before going to bed, don’t read, listen or watch any news. Read a good, relaxing book instead. Make power naps in the afternoons. 

    • All that being said, maintain daily routine. Make a schedule and try to stick to it.

    • But first and foremost – try to live in the moment and enjoy whatever you do, also if it’s just doing nothing. You don’t have to achieve anything nor prove yourself. You are ok as you are. 

    We are living in trying times, which to a considerable degree are brought about by ourselves. A number of researchers today think that it is actually humanity’s destruction of biodiversity that creates the conditions for new viruses and diseases such as Covid-19 to arise. Nobody knows when we’ll return to “normality” and what kind of “normality” it will be. But all things pass and this pandemic will pass, too, even if in the long term we most probably will often deal with the outbreaks of infectious diseases. Let’s take it as an opportunity to learn out of it and reflect. We took lots of things for granted and learn to appreciate and cherish them now. In our rush for achievement, we forgot to pay attention – to these small but important things, to our environment, to those around us, to ourselves.

    Try to stay mindful, fully present in the here-and-now, and enjoy the silence. For this, too, will pass. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 21:20

  • FBI Says Foreign States Hacked US Research Centers Seeking COVID-19 Breakthroughs 
    FBI Says Foreign States Hacked US Research Centers Seeking COVID-19 Breakthroughs 

    A top FBI official has warned that foreign governments are seeking to break into American companies’ cyber systems where crucial coronavirus research data is stored. 

    “We certainly have seen reconnaissance activity, and some intrusions, into some of those institutions, especially those that have publicly identified themselves as working on COVID-related research,” FBI Deputy Assistant Director for the FBI Cyber Division Tonya Ugoretz told an Aspen Institute online panel discussion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Coronavirus research at US Army Medical Research and Development Command at Fort Detrick in Frederick, MD. Image source: AP

    The FBI official described the spike in state-backed hacking cases comes as several Western bio-research companies could be on the cusp of developing breakthrough treatments and potentially a vaccine related to the ongoing pandemic, which over the past weeks has been ravaging the United States as the new global epicenter. 

    The flipside to companies publicizing their research, Ugoretz said in her comments this week, “is that it kind of makes them a mark for other nation-states that are interested in gleaning details about what exactly they’re doing and maybe even stealing proprietary information that those institutions have.”

    “For example, if we see that a secure institution is a victim or has been targeted, we, of course, go out and work with them,” Ugoretz continued. “Ideally, what we are doing is talking to healthcare institutions and research institutions before they have been a victim so that we can use the intelligence we have to identify the trends and identify who else is in the same category of the victims.”

    She noted the FBI’s Internet Crime Complaint Center currently receives some 3,000 to 4,000 calls per day. Prior to the pandemic crisis hitting North America this figure was at 1,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tonya Ugoretz, deputy assistant director for the FBI Cyber Division, via BankInfoSecurity/Twitter.

    The official did not name specific countries or bad actors; however, it follows a report from the WHO earlier this month, which described “a sustained digital bombardment” by hackers described as seeking internal information on the deadly coronavirus, further said to be “more than doubled” amid the pandemic crisis.

    Western intelligence sources in early April fingered Iran as being behind the bulk of recent alleged hacks of international health organizations, including the UN.

    Bill Evanina, Director of the National Counterintelligence and Security Center, was cited by Reuters in the latest report as saying:

    “Medical research organizations and those who work for them should be vigilant against threat actors seeking to steal intellectual property or other sensitive data related to America’s response to the COVID-19 pandemic.”

    “Now is the time to protect the critical research you’re conducting,” he added.

    The FBI further declined to comment on specific pending investigations. It’s unclear whether the message was intended as purely a warning against potential future hacks, or the degree to which US companies have already experienced data thefts. The FBI’s Ugoretz did say there were confirmed “intrusions” into “some” research institutions, however.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 21:00

  • These 10 Colleges Are Receiving The Most Federal Bailout Money
    These 10 Colleges Are Receiving The Most Federal Bailout Money

    Authored by Jon Street via Campus Reform,

    Thousands of colleges across the country are being infused with billions of dollars in cash after they were forced to close their campuses and move classes online amid the coronavirus pandemic. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Higher Education Emergency Relief Fund is part of the $2 trillion CARES Act that was passed by Congress and signed into law by President Donald Trump. The fund contains a total of about $14.2 billion for both private and public colleges and universities across the U.S.

    In a letter to college presidents dated April 9, Education Secretary Betsy DeVos wrote that “the most significant portion of that funding allocation provides that $12.56 billion will be distributed to institutions using a formula based on student enrollment,” adding that at least 50 percent of the money to each institution “must be reserved to provide students with emergency financial aid grants to help cover expenses related to the disruption of campus operations due to coronavirus.” 

    The most money any university is receiving is about $63.5 million while $291 was the least amount received by any academic institution. 

    Campus Reform identified the ten universities receiving the most money from the Higher Education Emergency Relief Fund, courtesy of the American taxpayer.

    1. Arizona State University- $63.5 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    2. Pennsylvania State University- $54.9 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    3. Rutgers University- $54.1 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    4. University of Central Florida- $51 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    5. Miami Dade College- $49 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    6. Georgia State University- $45.2 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    7. California State University-Northridge- $44.6 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    8. The Ohio State University- $42.8 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    9. California State University- Long Beach- $41.7 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    10. California State University- Fullerton- $41 million

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 20:40

  • Oil Stored At Sea Hits A Record 160 Million Barrels, Doubling In Two Weeks
    Oil Stored At Sea Hits A Record 160 Million Barrels, Doubling In Two Weeks

    The historic OPEC+ “Mexican Standoff” production cut came and went, and after a very short kneejerk spike higher oil has continued to plunge to historic lows for the two reasons we laid out previously: i) the production cut was not nearly enough to offset the demand collapse of as much as 36 million barrels, and ii) every day that tens of millions of excess barrels are produced brings us one day closer to that catastrophic D-day when oil storage runs out.

    Of course, just like not all oil producers are equal – recall Goldman recently predicted that landlocked producers may see oil prices go negative, as they run out of buyers or places where to store the oil, while tanker access to most Brent exporters means that the price of Brent will not drop materially below $20 – not all storage is equal either, and while Cushing and ARA commercial storage is expected to hit full in just a few months at the current rate of net supply, many producers are using water storage as a flexible alternative.

    As a result, traders are now storing an estimated record 160 million barrels of oil on ships – double the level from two weeks ago as they seek to tackle a glut of stocks, Reuters reportsas traders have rushed to find storage on land and at sea in what is believed to be the biggest oil glut in history.

    The surge in water storage, which started with Saudi Arabia unleashing an armada of tankers last month to flood the world with cheap oil…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … has swept the globe and shipping sources say oil held in floating storage on tankers had reached at least 160 million barrels including 60 supertankers, aka very large crude carriers (VLCCs), which can each hold 2 million barrels. This compared with just 25 to 40 VLCCs already chartered with storage options at the start of April and fewer than 10 VLCCs in February, the sources said adding that smaller tankers were also being used, which was also boosting volumes being held at anchor.

    The last time floating storage reached levels close to this was in 2009, when traders stored over 100 million barrels at sea before offloading stocks; the plunge in oil prices then prompted one of our very first posts in January 2009 “Risk-Free Profit Idea of the Day” in which we explained how to benefit from $25 contango.

    Putting naval oil infrastructure in context, the red dots show oil-tankers transporting over 100 million barrels each day. Now add another 60 million barrels to begin..

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “This is an unprecedented time in the history of tankers and while VLCC tanker storage is garnering the headlines, smaller crude and product tankers are also being used for storage,” said BTIG shipping analyst Gregory Lewis.

    Locations typically include the U.S. Gulf and Singapore, where major oil hubs are situated. A supercontango that briefly emerged in 2016 when oil prices also crashed for a period of time, resulted in the following stunning navel map of tankers parked off Singapore.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As mentioned above, the crude market is currently trading in deep contango, where forward prices are higher (in some cases much higher)than immediate prices.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The ability to buy a barrel of oil cheap today and lock in a profit by selling it in the future, encourages traders to park barrels in storage in the hopes of selling them for a profit later.

    And with the contango barely budging, analysts – who notes that there are over 770 VLCCs in the world – estimate that as many as 100 to 200 supertankers could be deployed for floating storage in coming months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The eventual wind down of this inventory glut will be most painful to tanker demand, but in the meantime floating storage remains the only outlet for a mismatched production and consumption backdrop,” said Jonathan Chappell with investment banking advisory Evercore ISI


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 20:36

  • Landlords Are Reportedly Asking Broke Tenants To 'Pay' Rent With Sex
    Landlords Are Reportedly Asking Broke Tenants To 'Pay' Rent With Sex

    Desperate times call for desperate measures. And with the Fed in the process of destroying the monetary system as we know, we can’t say we were surprised to hear that some landlords were attempting to use the age-old system of barter to accept payments.

    The problem? They’re reportedly asking their broke tenants for sex, according to BuzzFeed.

    Citing the Hawaii State Commission on the Status of Women, the report details several complaints of sexual harassment since the coronavirus outbreak began. 

    One woman says when she texted her landlord about a more affordable property after being unable to pay her April rent, “he responded with a dick pic.” A different woman claimed that her landlord told her she could come over and “spoon him” instead of paying her April rent. 

    Khara Jabola-Carolus, the executive director of the commission said: “We’ve received more cases at our office in the last two days than we have in the last two years.”

    She thinks the cases are becoming more egregious as tenants become unemployed, broke and more vulnerable. “Of course that’s not the root cause of why it’s happening, but it makes it easier because now [landlords] have access to people at their fingertips,” she said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sheryl Ring, the legal director at Open Communities, a legal aid and fair housing agency just north of Chicago said: “We have seen an uptick in sexual harassment. Since this started, they [landlords] have been taking advantage of the financial hardships many of their tenants have in order to coerce their tenants into a sex-for-rent agreement — which is absolutely illegal.”

    She says sexual harassment complaints related to housing are up threefold in the last month. Ring was already working on six cases before the epidemic began and says that women of color and trans women are the most likely to be targeted. Ring advises women not to give in to trying to negotiate with landlords at all if the topic comes up.

    “You can’t really negotiate how much illegality the landlord is willing to do,” she said. “We’ve heard some landlords are attempting to use the situation where a tenant falls behind to pressure a tenant into exchanging sex for rent,” she continued. 

    “It’s important to know what your rights are as quickly as possible. Even now, just because courts are closed to most things, it doesn’t mean you do not have recourse right now and can’t be protected,” Ring concluded.

    “The conditions are ripe for sexual exploitation,” said Jabola-Carolus, noting that since Hawaii’s tourism industry has fallen apart, many immigrant and native Hawaiians are out of work.

    Jabola-Carolus concluded: “The power dynamic goes without saying. All of us feel intimidated by our landlords because shelter is so critical.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 20:20

  • The Paper Of Record Says Feel Sorry For Bill Gates, Who's Been Targeted With Conspiracy Theories
    The Paper Of Record Says Feel Sorry For Bill Gates, Who's Been Targeted With Conspiracy Theories

    The Wall Street Journal‘s Deepa Seetharaman wants us to know that while poor billionaire Bill Gates has ‘long been a target for online trolls,’ that ‘the social-media attacks have intensified’ as the Micrrosoft co-founder and World Health Organization (WHO) benefactor has become the left’s de-facto coronavirus czar.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Seetharaman suggests that the attacks have increased due to Gates’s angry criticism towards President Trump, who halted funding to the WHO due to the organization’s handling of the COVID-19 pandemic and its allegiance to China.

    In the 24 hours after Mr. Gates’s comments, his Twitter account was mentioned at least 270,000 times—more than 30 times more than average—mainly by angry supporters of President Trump, according to Clemson University researchers. Mr. Gates’s Instagram post from April 5 drew an additional 45,000 comments in that same 24-hour period. The post now has more than 225,000 comments. –WSJ

    Perhaps the ‘conspiracy theorists’ are having a little trouble digesting the fact that Gates – whose vaccine efforts in India were blamed for a devastating non-polio acute flaccid paralysis (NPAFP) epidemic that paralyzed 490,000 children – coincidentally hosted an October, 2019 high-level ‘pandemic simulation’ in New York called Event 201 which specifically focused on coronavirus and projected over 65 million deaths worldwide.

    Combine that with Gates’ recent comments about mass vaccination and biometric identification in order to ‘open up’ the country and allow people to attend mass gatherings – an idea which Dr. Anthony Fauci said “has merit,” and so-called conspiracy theorists have plenty of dots to connect.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the Journal, “social-media platforms remain fertile ground for virus-related conspiracies and online harassment, despite repeated pledges by the companies to crack down on such activity.”

    So – Gates is being harassed and nobody is stopping these thought criminals with their menacing opinions. And of course, ‘bots’ are also being blameed for amplifying ‘conspiracy claims’ – since there can’t be that many real humans with bad things to say about Mr. Gates.

    I’ve never seen a time where more mis- and disinformation has flowed than this coronavirus period,” said Univsity of Texas assistant professor Sam Woolley, who has ‘studied disinformation for nearly a decade.’

    Some antivaccine activists and conspiracy-minded posters encouraged their followers across social media to attack Mr. Gates on Instagram, a form of harassment called “brigading” in which people coordinate attacks and hijack conversations online, according to a review of accounts. This week, one Instagram account told its 52,000 followers that “it wouldn’t be a bad thing for all of us to go visit Bill Gates Instagram and let him know what you think.” A spokeswoman for the Gates Foundation declined to comment. –WSJ

    According to the report, Facebook is now “looking at this behavior carefully to determine whether it violates our policies. People on our services are allowed to speak freely, and do so in an organized way, but we remove accounts that are fake or designed to mislead,” and will begin notifying users who have engaged with what they deem misinformation that they’ve been hoodwinked by bad actors in cyberspace.

    How nice! Maybe Facebook will hire someone from the Gates foundation to do their fact checking?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 20:20

  • The "Iron Law" Of Oligarchy – Always Pick The Policy-Makers
    The "Iron Law" Of Oligarchy – Always Pick The Policy-Makers

    via TheChicagoEconomist.com,

    “The iron law of oligarchy” is a political theory, first developed by the German sociologist Robert Michels in his 1911 book, Political Parties. 

    It asserts that rule by an elite, or oligarchy, is inevitable as an “iron law” within any democratic organization as part of the “tactical and technical necessities” of an organization.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Michels’ theory states that all complex organizations, regardless of how democratic they are when started, eventually develop into oligarchies. Michels observed that since no sufficiently large and complex organization can function purely as a direct democracy, power within an organization will always get delegated to individuals within that group, elected or otherwise.

    Michels argues that democratic attempts to hold leadership positions accountable are prone to fail, since with power comes the ability to reward loyalty, the ability to control information about the organization, and the ability to control what procedures the organization follows when making decisions.

    All of these mechanisms can be used to strongly influence the outcome of any decisions made ‘democratically’ by members.

    Michels stated that the official goal of representative democracy of eliminating elite rule was impossible, that representative democracy is a façade legitimizing the rule of a particular elite, and that elite rule, which he refers to as oligarchy, is inevitable.” (sourced from Wikipedia)

    Stiegler refines the Iron Law of Oligarchy, in his Theory of Economic Regulation, also suggesting that the big guys will always win and the little guys will always lose. He bases this conclusion on the following premises:

    1. The fundamental asset controlled by the state is the power to coerce. Any group that can control how this power is used can profit.

    2. Since we are self-interested actors, we will seek to get the state’s coercive power to support our interests. Efforts to do so, however, are costly.

    Large firms win because:

    • Large firms have high benefits from mobilizing (the stakes our high). Since they are a small group, and since they are fairly homogeneous, they have no difficulty with collective action problems (they can lobby efficiently).

    • Small firms don’t organize for political reasons because of collective action problems (very high coordination costs).

    • Consumers don’t organize because the costs of doing so are high compared to the benefits (very high coordination costs).

    This is made crystal clear in the financial crisis of 2008 and the current economic collapse. In 2008 the perpetrators of the reckoning were provided with cheap loans that negated free market forces while rewarding excessive risk taking. This free flow of cheap money continued for the next decade. Financial markets as an efficient pricing mechanism of the productive allocation of finite resources died in 2008. What we were left with was a clear display of The Iron Law of Oligarchy.

    Millions of young Americans were inundated with loans that could not be absolved even through bankruptcy. While they took these loans of their own free will, they were entering adult life during the greatest economic failure of all time and so most were left with very few viable alternatives. The $1.8 trillion in student loans provided a huge boost to corporate earnings as about only half of borrowing goes to tuition. So about $900 billion was spent at Walmart, Target, etc., and lots of consumer goods were consumed. That consumption transferred cash to the top line of S&P 500 income statements. And while the cash from the loan was transferred to corporations, the obligation remained with America’s youth.

    In today’s crisis we see that financial markets received enough support to prop market capital within short reach of all time highs despite the economy seeing 22 million working Americans filing for unemployment. Policy makers first response to the crisis was to quickly allocate $5 trillion to a relatively few financial firms in order to prevent them from having to take losses on their speculative trades. These firms used the cash to re-inflate market prices, which created profits, from which they paid back the loan via the repo market.

    On the other hand, it took several weeks for policy makers to allocate only $350 billion to support the government forced closure of around 20 million small businesses. This relatively small funding allocation ran out after 1.5 million small businesses received assistance.

    Policy makers are yet to agree on a second bill to increase funding while many small business owners are left with $0 in the bank to feed their kids, pay their bills and wonder how they are going to recover. Imagine the stress. No seriously, pause and imagine the soul crushing stress they are living with every minute of every day. Yet policy makers are choosing to remain on break until early May. You can be certain if the banks or hedge funds were in trouble a bill would be passed immediately.

    Stiegler argues:

    “the first purpose of empirical studies of regulatory policy is to identify the purpose of the legislation! The announced goals of a policy are often unrelated or perversely related to its actual effects and the truly intended effects should be deduced from the actual effects [over time].”

    That is, don’t listen to the stated objectives of policy makers but study the actual results of their policies over time; the results over time are the intended effects. If we look at the actual effects of economic policies over the past 30 years it should provide us a strong indication of the intended effects.

    Market capital driven wealth of the S&P 500 has increased by 1500% since 1988 while median weekly incomes have increased by 113%. For some perspective, rents of primary residence for Americans has increased 269.7% over that same time period.

    It doesn’t matter to me what profession you chose or how proficient you are in finance, the notion that the system is designed to enrich a few and enslave many has never been more clear. You may be one of those still receiving an income but at some point you will be on the other side. That is guaranteed. Because the Oligarchs don’t want to be wealthy they want to have all the wealth. That is the way our system works. Slowly, over time, policies will allocate all wealth to those that can coerce the policies.

    Jeff Bezos’s wealth has increased by $24 Billion since the crisis began. That is due to market share capture from millions of small businesses. Policy makers pick winners and losers. Oligarchs pick policy makers.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 20:00

  • Daily Briefing – April 17, 2020
    Daily Briefing – April 17, 2020


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 19:59

  • Rural Communities Are Not Safe From COVID-19, Researchers Warn 
    Rural Communities Are Not Safe From COVID-19, Researchers Warn 

    Princeton researchers have determined that rural counties concentrated in the western U.S., the northern Midwest, Florida, and northern New England have elderly populations that could be the most vulnerable to COVID-19. 

    The new report titled “Mapping the Burden of COVID-19 in the United States” suggests that rural communities with high concentrations of baby boomers (people over 60) and limited access to health care facilities could “eventually be among the hardest hit by the coronavirus pandemic.”

    “The burden is still going to be high in urban areas and the absolute number of cases will be highest in cities, but we could see rural areas have a higher per capita burden and a higher ratio of cases to hospital beds,” said author Ian Miller, who is a graduate student in ecology and evolutionary biology at Princeton.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Miller and co-author Alexander Becker, another graduate student at the university, said intensive care units are lacking in many rural communities that are critical medical devices to save lives during the pandemic.

    “We’re hoping that our study will prompt state and public health officials to keep an extremely close eye on rural areas,” said Miller, who has been talking with state governments about vulnerable counties. 

    “If they know where the vulnerable counties are, they can allocate resources to those counties, or try to help direct cases originating in those counties to health systems with more adequate capacity,” he said. 

    Researchers used a combination of the American Hospital Association and Census data to determine where the most at-risk population in rural communities resided. 

    “The researchers conducted an epidemiological simulation that compared how many hospital and ICU beds each county currently has — according to the American Hospital Association — to the number of coronavirus cases they would experience if the infection rate reaches 20% of the county’s population.

    Using 2018 demographic data from the U.S. Census Bureau, the researchers broke down each county’s population by age group, starting at 0-9 and continuing every 10 years through the final designation of 70-plus. Their model then factored in the proportion of each age group that has been likely to become severely ill, with people over 60 being the most vulnerable.”

    Miller and his team developed two disease transmission models, one slow and one fast, that determined the western U.S., the northern Midwest, Florida, and northern New England emerged as the most at risk.

    “In the “optimistic” scenario, disease transmission was relatively slow, people had contact mostly with those within their age group, and people presenting symptoms of coronavirus were effectively quarantined. In contrast, the “pessimistic” scenario was characterized by a high transmission rate, homogenous contact between different age groups, and people showing signs of infection being quarantined too late or not at all. 

    The counties that became overwhelmed in both the optimistic and the pessimistic scenarios are those that the study authors identified as most vulnerable to the current outbreak.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The study comes as the US reports 671,273 confirmed cases and 33,286 deaths on Friday (April 17). 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Becker said rural communities are not immune to the virus. 

    “Because people’s needs are so different within a state, that motivated us to look at the county level to get as high a resolution as we could,” he said. “Maybe these results can be used as a preparation guide for officials in counties that are at risk, especially if there’s a large distance between a rural area and an urban area with greater access to health care.” 

    “We’re not trying to tell public health officials to focus only on rural areas or only on urban areas,” Miller said. “We’re trying to give them a holistic picture of the burden all of the different parts of their state might face so they can try to provide equitable care.”

    While everyone is focused on the pandemic sweeping across major metro areas, could the next big health crisis be rural America?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 19:40

  • The "Best" Economy Ever? Neither Before, Nor After Coronavirus
    The "Best" Economy Ever? Neither Before, Nor After Coronavirus

    Submitted by Joe Carson, former chief economist at Alliance Bernstein,

    The strong rebound in equity prices since mid-March suggests investors are banking on a fast rebound in the economy once government eases the restrictions on work-life, travel and social and recreational gatherings. Reopening regions or sectors of the economy will undoubtedly produce a statistically powerful rebound; triggering a race among analysts to revise up growth estimates as fast as they raced to reduce them. 

    But “boomerang” statistics on jobs and GDP does not mean a return to the “best” economy for the simple it was not the best before. Here’s why.  

    Corporate Profits: In 2019, operating profits for US companies totaled $2.075 trillion, essentially unchanged from the prior year. That flat performance represents the fifth consecutive year of no growth in corporate profits. It would be flat out wrong to characterize the economy’s recent performance as the “best” when corporate profitability has stalled for 5 consecutive years. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even if the current recession proves to be short in time, it still will be historic in terms of the scale of decline in operating profits. 

    The peak to trough decline in operating profits during the Great Financial Recession was 40%. But that drop in operating profits occurred against a 3% peak to trough decline in Nominal GDP. 

    Currently, consensus economic forecasts point to a decline in Nominal GDP two or three times greater than what took place in 2008/09. Accordingly, investors should brace for a 60% to 70% decline in operating profits, and a long road back to pre-recession earning levels. 

    Corporate Debt: At the end of 2019, nonfinancial corporations had outstanding debt and loans of $10.1 trillion, nearly double what these firms on their balance sheet at the start of the last decade. A relatively large part of the debt binge was used for financial engineering (i.e. stock buybacks) instead of engineering for innovation and making things. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In recent weeks, commercial and industrial loans have increased nearly $500 billion as firms drew down credit lines to increase cash and liquidity levels. Also, Congress gave the federal government and the Federal Reserve the authority to initiate a new lending program for small and mid-sized companies. So the level of corporate indebtedness will continue to increase further even as the economy nosedives.

    The road from recession to recovery is based on “reliquification, or the process of freeing up of cash flow by refinancing existing debt obligations for lower interest payments, longer terms or by paying down debt.

    Extending more debt to companies is the exact opposite of the practices that were employed in the past to help the economy escape recession. Enabling companies to stay afloat by adding to existing debt levels might stop the economic bleeding in the short run, but it does not make the economy stronger or better. The payback will be weak growth as firms struggle with record debt levels.  

    Finance vs. Economy: The last decade saw the greatest divide ever between finance and the economy. At the end of 2019, household holdings of equities stood 2 times the level of disposable personal income, an all-time high. Also, the market value of domestic companies to Nominal GDP stood at a record 1.9 times, exceeding the prior record high of 2000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The divergence between the stock market and the real economy was fueled by easy money. To be sure, policymakers kept official rates near zero for roughly half of the record 130-month economic expansion.

    Also, the cycle high of 2.37% in the federal funds rate represented the lowest nominal peak rate in the post-war period, and only for a short 6-month span in early 2019, did the fed funds exceed the core rate of consumer price inflation.

    Never before in any business cycle has official rates remained below the inflation rate for almost the entire growth cycle.

    In the end, monetary policy stimulated finance over the economy and in the process created an equity market that was “too big to fail”; and its fall deepens the recession and slows the recovery.

    The US economy has the potential to be the “best”. But to be the “best” it needs to clean up corporate balance sheets and follow best policies and best practices.

    Best policies means the capital markets fairly and freely price and allocate credit and capital. Best practices means firms focus on innovation and making things.

     “Are we there yet?” Unfortunately, from a public policy and business practice perspective the US is moving in the wrong direction. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 19:20

  • No "Buy American" This Time: Munger Warns Berkshire "Will Shutter Some Businesses"
    No "Buy American" This Time: Munger Warns Berkshire "Will Shutter Some Businesses"

    On Oct 16, 2008, in what seemed America’s darkest hour at least until a Chinese manmade virus escaped a Wuhan lab and killed thousands of Americans, forcing the Fed to nationalize capital markets and preserve social order by artificially inflating stock prices to idiotic levels based on the complete collapse in earnings, Warren Buffett came to America’s rescue by frontrunning a multi-trillion taxpayer bailout of US banks when he penned a NYT Op-ed “Buy American. I am” in which he wrote “The financial world is a mess, both in the United States and abroad….So, I’ve been buying American stocks.” And sure enough, Berkshire spent tens of billions of dollars investing in General Electric, Goldman Sachs Group, and many others as well as buying Burlington Northern Santa Fe outright.

    And yet, for all his pompous poseur patriotism, the Omaha billionaire knew he was exposed to zero risk as US taxpayers would bail out the companies he was buying if it all came crashing down. In other words, what Buffett did not say at the time, is that he only “bought stocks” because he was frontrunning the largest bailout in US history.

    Until now… when a newly merged Fed and Treasury have unleashed helicopter money which will amount to tens of trillions in “bailout” funds and liquidity injections, which are really meant to spark hyperinflation and inflate away the world’s record amount of debt.

    So will Berkshire step up now to “Buy American” again in a repeat attempt to spark a wave of patriotic buying by retail investors? Don’t count on it.

    In an interview with the WSJ’s Jason Zweig, best known for calling gold – whose price is now just shy of all time highs – a “pet rock” in 2015, Buffett’s right hand man, Charlie Munger explained that Berkshire’s patriotic buying would be far more muted this time… if at all:

    “I would say basically we’re like the captain of a ship when the worst typhoon that’s ever happened comes. We just want to get through the typhoon, and we’d rather come out of it with a whole lot of liquidity. We’re not playing, ‘Oh goody, goody, everything’s going to hell, let’s plunge 100% of the reserves [into buying businesses].’”

    He added, “Warren wants to keep Berkshire safe for people who have 90% of their net worth invested in it. We’re always going to be on the safe side. That doesn’t mean we couldn’t do something pretty aggressive or seize some opportunity. But basically we will be fairly conservative. And we’ll emerge on the other side very strong.”

    Something else odd: unlike 2008 when every CEO was begging Buffett for a bailout, this time executives have learned that they can just go to the Fed. Asked if “hordes of corporate executives” are calling Berkshire begging for capital, Munger said “No, they aren’t. The typical reaction is that people are frozen. Take the airlines. They don’t know what the hell’s doing. They’re all negotiating with the government, but they’re not calling Warren. They’re frozen. They’ve never seen anything like it. Their playbook does not have this as a possibility.”

    He repeated for emphasis, “Everybody’s just frozen. And the phone is not ringing off the hook. Everybody’s just frozen in the position they’re in.”

    As Zweig correctly (this time) notes, “with Berkshire’s vast holdings in railroads, real estate, utilities, insurance and other industries, Mr. Buffett and Mr. Munger may have more and better data on U.S. economic activity than anyone else, with the possible exception of the Federal Reserve. But Mr. Munger wouldn’t even hazard a guess as to how long the downturn might last or how bad it could get.”

    “Nobody in America’s ever seen anything else like this,” said Munger. “This thing is different. Everybody talks as if they know what’s going to happen, and nobody knows what’s going to happen.”

    Which is an interesting – if hypocritical – observation since if “nobody knows what’s going to happen” how is everyone also saying it won’t be a depression, Munger included?

    “Of course we’re having a recession,” said Mr. Munger. “The only question is how big it’s going to be and how long it’s going to last. I think we do know that this will pass. But how much damage, and how much recession, and how long it will last, nobody knows.”

    He added, “I don’t think we’ll have a long-lasting Great Depression. I think government will be so active that we won’t have one like that. But we may have a different kind of a mess. All this money-printing may start bothering us.”

    Finally, can the government reduce its role in the economy once the virus is under control?

    “I don’t think we know exactly what the macroeconomic consequences are going to be,” said Mr. Munger. “I do think, sooner or later, we’ll have an economy back, which will be a moderate economy. It’s quite possible that never again—not again in a long time—will we have a level of employment again like we just lost. We may never get that back for all practical purposes. I don’t know.”

    Munger may not know, but Buffett does and explains why this time he will not only not be buying, but in fact shuttering:

    This will cause us to shutter some businesses,” Munger said. “We have a few bad businesses that…we could be tolerant of as members of the family. Somebody else would have already shut them down. We’ve got a few businesses, small ones, we won’t reopen when this is over.”

    Finally, here is what Berkshire thinks stocks will do in the future. “I don’t have the faintest idea whether the stock market is going to go lower than the old lows or whether it’s not.” The coronavirus shutdown is “something we have to live through,” letting the chips fall where they may, he said. “What else can you do?”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 19:15

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 17th April 2020

  • WHO Advises EU To Restrict Alcohol Sales During Lockdown
    WHO Advises EU To Restrict Alcohol Sales During Lockdown

    The World Health Organization (WHO) published a statement Tuesday that read European governments should restrict the sales of alcohol to citizens as nationwide lockdowns continue. 

    The statement read, “during the COVID-19 pandemic, alcohol consumption can exacerbate health vulnerability, risk-taking behaviors, mental health issues, and violence.” 

    The WHO’s European office said, “Existing rules and regulations to protect health and reduce the harm caused by alcohol, such as restricting access, should be upheld and even reinforced during the COVID-19 pandemic and emergency situations.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It also said, “alcohol compromises the body’s immune system” and can lead to higher probabilities of contracting the deadly virus. During the pandemic, people should “minimize their alcohol consumption” to build up their immune system. There was also mention that Europeans are known for their “excessive” consumption of alcoholic beverages. 

    While the WHO attempts to persuade European countries to enforce alcohol restrictions, the European Union (EU) published a note on Thursday morning detailing how mobile apps are being used to contain the spread of the virus. 

    Last week, France admitted that it was working on a “StopCovid” app that would march the country, and even maybe the bloc, towards an Orwellian society. 

    It appears the pandemic has been a perfect cover for governments to implement totalitarian measures to control and track their citizens, all in the name of “flattening the pandemic curve.” 

    When it comes to banning alcohol sales, France already tried that last month, and because of public and internet uproar, the measure was quickly reversed. 

    It was reported that Greenland had banned alcohol consumption in the capital Nuuk and nearby settlements in a bid to decrease incidences of child abuse as people stay inside to avoid spreading the virus. 

    More recently, Thailand banned sales of alcoholic beverages in an attempt to curb irresponsible socializing. 

    As for the US, alcohol sales surged 22% at supermarkets for the week ending March 28 compared with the same time last year, according to Nielsen data. Banning or limiting sales in the US would be hard, and if the WHO attempted to instruct the Trump administration on it, well, we believe it wouldn’t fly, considering Trump is now defunding the NGO. 

    Nevertheless, angry Americans would riot if sales of alcohol would be limited or banned. Already, they are pissed about lockdowns, as protesters on Wednesday surrounded the state Capitol building in Lansing, Michigan, demanding the economy to be reopened. 

    Is the WHO overreaching as it calls for the EU to ban or restrict alcohol? Or do they have some valid points?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 02:45

  • The EU Has Failed Europe Over Coronavirus
    The EU Has Failed Europe Over Coronavirus

    Authored by Con Coughlin via The Gatestone Institute,

    The deepening divisions among European nations over their response to the coronavirus pandemic has highlighted the inability of the European Union to provide strong and effective leadership in times of crisis.

    Faced with arguably the greatest challenge Europe has faced since the end of the Second World War, the EU’s failure to help coordinate the actions of the 27-nation bloc in tackling Covid-19 has once again brought the organisation’s institutional failings into sharp focus.

    Not only has the Brussels bureaucracy been unable to provide vital medical assistance to stricken countries in the form of badly-needed protective clothing and key equipment, such as ventilators. The EU has also completely failed in its efforts to provide financial support for those countries, such as Italy and Spain, that have been worst affected by the crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The EU’s inability or unwillingness to respond should raise fresh questions about the EU’s long-term future.

    Furthermore, a meeting of EU finance ministers held to discuss setting up a $380 billion coronavirus rescue package failed to reach agreement when wealthier northern European states refused to back measures to help their less wealthy southern partners unless they agreed to punitive loan terms.

    This additional failure prompted Italian Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte to warn that if the EU proved unable to help member states in their hour of need, it was in danger of collapse.

    “If we do not seize the opportunity to put new life into the European project, the risk of failure is real,” Mr Conte said.

    The EU’s failure to organise a coordinated response among member states to the pandemic has also been the subject of criticism. The EU’s refusal to set up a special programme for Covid-19 research last week prompted Professor Mauro Ferrari, the President of the European Research Council, to resign in protest. In his resignation letter, Prof Ferrari launched a blistering attack against the EU, citing “a complete absence of coordination of health care politics among member states.”

    As a result, rather than heeding the EU’s belated advice for member states to coordinate their response to the outbreak, all the evidence suggests that nations are taking matters into their own hands rather than relying on the EU for guidance.

    A letter sent by the European Commission to member states earlier this month appealed for European leaders to coordinate their actions as they sought to ease the strict lockdown measures that have been in place since the coronavirus outbreak. The letter warned that failure to do so would “unavoidably lead to a corresponding increase in new cases.”

    Instead, all the evidence suggests that the majority of European governments are ignoring the EU’s advice, and acting unilaterally to tackle the impact of the pandemic on their citizens.

    Thus, at a time when countries like Spain, Italy and Austria are taking the first, tentative steps to ease the lockdown, with certain businesses being allowed to reopen, French President Emmanuel Macron has announced that the strict lockdown measures imposed over the whole of France will remain in place for the next four weeks.

    The divergence in approach among various member states indicates that European leaders are — as they have been from the outset — acting selfishly in their own national interest rather than for the good of the EU as a whole.

    It also means they are in breach of some of the EU’s fundamental principles, such as the single market which requires all member states to conduct business on an equal footing. The fact that several countries are allowing various businesses, such as construction, to return to work, whereas in other nations they have been banned from operating during the lockdown, means that disparities will inevitably develop in the economies of member states, a fact that is likely to increase tensions between European leaders in the months to come.

    Brussels now says it wants to present an EU-wide “roadmap” for lifting restrictions next week, which will call for national capitals to co-ordinate their exit.

    “At a minimum, member states should notify each other and the [European] Commission in due time before they lift measures and take into account their views,” the document is expected to recommend.

    “It is essential that there is a common approach and operating framework.”

    The problem for the EU is that, now that so many European countries have already taken matters into their own hands, any attempt by Brussels to impose a unified approach to ending the lockdown will surely be a case of too little, too late.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 02:00

  • Iraq Warns That ISIS Now Using Coronavirus Crisis To Reestablish 'Virtual Caliphate'
    Iraq Warns That ISIS Now Using Coronavirus Crisis To Reestablish ‘Virtual Caliphate’

    Via AlmasdarNews.com,

    The Digital Media Center in Iraq revealed an increase in the number of accounts belonging to the so-called “Islamic State” (ISIS/ISIL/IS/Daesh) and their supporters on social media platforms, especially Facebook.

    The center said in a press release that “this return came during the past months that accompanied the coronavirus pandemic and led to a delay in the response of Facebook’s support to delete accounts.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration via The Wahid Foundation

    “The members of ISIS and those who support them took advantage of the opportunity and started creating new accounts or reactivating old accounts, and they published and promoted their terrorist operations through the platform,” Iraqi media monitoring watchdog said.

    The Center warned users not to interact with these posts even if it was criticizing them through comments or sharing them, which leads to unintentionally free promotion.

    The official government-run Iraqi Counter-Terrorism Service also echoed the warning, alerting the public to the “growing number of accounts of ISIS members and supporters on social media platforms, especially Facebook.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In January of this year, a United Nations warning was issued as follows

    Islamic State has begun to reassert itself in its heartlands in the Middle East and continues to seek opportunities to strike in the west, the United Nations has said.

    report to the UN security council based on recent intelligence from member states describes how the group is mounting increasingly bold insurgent attacks in Iraq and Syria, calling and planning for the breakout of its fighters from detention facilities and exploiting the weaknesses of local security forces.

    The report portrays an organisation that has suffered significant setbacks but is tenacious, well-funded and still poses a considerable local and international threat.

    Iraq’s counter-terrorism forces further called on users to make “the necessary concerted efforts to counter the terrorist tide through extensive reporting of these accounts so that Facebook closes them.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/17/2020 – 01:00

  • No, We Are Not "All In This Together"…
    No, We Are Not “All In This Together”…

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    A common phrase I have heard lately all around the internet as well as all around the area I live whenever the pandemic situation is broached is that “We are all in this together, and WE will get through this together….”

    The sentiment is repeated like a religious mantra and I believe it is rooted in a collectivist reaction in the minds of many. The idea is that if we all comfort each other by repeating the lie that we’re all in the same boat, and if everyone believes it, then the threat of the outbreak along with the economic collapse will somehow simply “disappear”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The notion that “we are going to get through this together” seems to be based in the assumption that the crisis is going to move quickly, and if we hold tight, our sacrifice will be minimal and all will go back to the way things were before. This is simply not so.

    I highly respect the ideal of giving hope to others whenever possible (as Aragorn says in Return Of The King “I give hope to men.  I keep none for myself”). However, hope has to come from a legitimate place. It has to be based in some reality. There are too many lies driving public psychology right now to give concrete hope to anyone. The lies have to land, they have to touch ground, and the facts have to hit people hard before we can then come to an understanding of what we have to do to survive this event. In the meantime, the majority of people are going to be trapped in fantasy land, hypnotized by delusions of magical cures and economic silver bullets that will lead to salvation “in just two more weeks”.

    On top of all that, the American public has never been more divided than it is right now. Sure, we can soak in a bathtub of brain-dead dreams with worn-out elitist celebrities like Madonna, telling us that the virus “makes us all equal”, but does it really? I’m sorry, but the truth that not all people are equal is about to become more apparent than ever before.

    The pandemic along with the economic collapse is going to separate people into clearly definable categories, and many of these groups will be in direct conflict with each other:

    The Prepared

    These are the people that saw this event coming ahead of time and spent many months if not many years stocking supplies and training to survive it. The Prepared were smarter and had more insight into the reality of the situation than most people. If we were to apply evolutionary standards then The Prepared would be at the top of the food chain, the alpha species, but let’s not let this go to our heads; there are many downsides to being a member of The Prepared.

    In a just world, the masses would be going to The Prepared for answers to the crisis, and some do, but overall I think The Prepared will be more hated for their predictive capabilities than admired. This is why prepared people have to stick together, organize and protect one another; because the day is coming when they will be targeted as enemies of the collective.

    The Unprepared

    The Unprepared are not all alike. There are people who are arrogant and ignored all evidence of collapse presented to them ahead of time, and now they are going to suffer for that. These are the people I call “grasshoppers”, as in the fable of ‘The Ant And The Grasshopper’. They danced and played all summer and laughed at all the warnings of impending winter. These are the people who will act indignant and vicious when they are deprived of comfort, and they will demand that the ants give up their preps to save them (which is not going to happen).

    There are other people who were merely oblivious to the situation and are mostly innocent in their lack of preparation They just weren’t exposed to the available information for whatever reason. They live decent hard working lives and they are mostly innocent in all of this. They too will be faced with hard decisions in the near future – Some of them will try to prepare as best they can while the crisis is still in its early stages. Others will join the grasshoppers out of fear and demand a draconian government response.

    The Independents

    The Independents are people that will seek to solve the problems surrounding the crisis with their own ingenuity. They will not demand help from the government, nor will they demand that other people “share” their resources with them out of a sense of entitlement. They will ask for help where needed, but they will try to do the best they can to endure the crisis without trying to force others to make things easier for them.

    The Independents will understand the difference between collectivism and voluntary organization. The first strategy requires force and fear, the second strategy does not. The Collectivists will try to interfere or even destroy The Independents, because if they are successful in organizing voluntarily and becoming prosperous through free market innovation then this will prove that the collectivist ideology is unnecessary and outdated. The Collectivists would rather “win” than be right in their thinking.

    The Collectivists

    Collectivist people will applaud the vast expansion of government power and control, because within their cult religion government is god. To them, the pandemic is not a curse but a blessing, because it gives them a rationale to take part in a grand subjugation of other people and feel the power they have always wanted to feel. These are the people with inherent narcissistic and sociopathic traits within our culture. They represent only 1% to 5% of the total population, but they are predatory and single-minded in their goal to control others and feed off the world like parasites.

    These people are not always elites. In fact, most of them are just like you and me in terms of status and income.  In times of great crisis, these creatures tend to rise to the surface and reveal themselves.  They feel particularly energized within environments that fuel tyranny; they love the feeling of power and will exploit crisis events as an excuse to act as evil as they always wanted to but could not during normal times.  Take for example Doctor John Rademaker in Louisville, Kentucky who attacked a group of girls and tried to strangle one of them for “not social distancing”.  Once we consider the fact that by attacking the girls he was also breaking social distancing guidelines, it becomes clear that people like this don’t actually care about their own rules, they only care that OTHER PEOPLE follow those rules.

    They want to be the observers, like the Soviet Cheka.  They know will never be at the top of the power totem pole, so they ride the coattails of tyranny and feed on whatever scraps of power they can get.

    These people seem like they would not work well with others, but they do tend to congregate in groups as long as there is mutual gain to be had.  They have all the character qualities of global elites including a complete lack of empathy, a penchant for self worship and idolization, zero belief in anything greater than themselves, a propensity towards deceit and violence to get what they want, and using disasters to their advantage.

    The Global Elites

    This is a tiny group of creatures that benefit the most from the pandemic crisis.  Through this disaster they will be able to absorb vast amounts of hard assets for pennies on the dollar, devouring wealth and property from the middle class and changing the entire economy into something unrecognizable.  The elites don’t want your property and wealth simply because they are greedy; they want your property and wealth because they don’t want YOU to have any.  They want to end the concept of private property for all time, for without property and the ability to accumulate wealth through our labors the masses are always dependent on government for their survival.

    Beyond this, the ultimate goal of the elites is a one world cashless society, as well as a one world government.  Already, the US Senate is considering a bill that would create a digital dollar and a digital wallet system to replace paper currency.  Other nations have begun going cashless, and the coronavirus is being used as an excuse to speed up the process.  The UN’s World Health Organization has specifically called for going cashless as well.  Once the public is trapped into a digital system, they will never be able to trade without using the banks as the middle men, and all transactions will be tracked.  Nothing will be private ever again, and with the push of a button what little wealth you are allowed to accumulate can be frozen within the new socialist control culture.  You will be at the mercy of the government and the banks.

    Moving past the economic, the elites have bigger dreams of a massive surveillance society in which every person is tracked 24 hours a day.  Bill Gates is all over the mainstream news lately promoting the idea of tracking apps (like those already being used in China) to “fight the coronavirus”.  Apple and Google are pushing the agenda as well and are ready to launch tracking apps whenever the government is ready to write them into law.

    The Global Elites do not care about saving lives.  They do not care about saving the economy as we know it.  They do not care about political affiliations.  They are on their own side, and they only care about power.  Like I said, we are NOT all in this together.

    The Sheeple

    Sheeple are people that have no capacity for self leadership. They will follow whoever they think has the best chance of securing their survival, even if those people have evil intentions. Sheeple are not necessarily nefarious minded, they just don’t care about the bigger picture and they only see what is right in front of them. This is a different mindset from those of us that look for leadership in people that display integrity, experience and competence; Sheeple don’t care about any of that. They just want to feel protected and secure no matter what, even if they have to sacrifice their freedoms in exchange for that feeling. They are a prime target for The Collectivists and The Global Elites.

    Trying to talk sense to sheeple is almost impossible. They will not listen. You probably know a few Sheeple in your life who even now in the midst of a global collapse still think this crisis will be over in a matter of weeks and that the government will save them. Attempting to convince them otherwise is a waste of time.

    All you can do is provide a better solution than the collectivists and hope The Sheeple follow your lead instead of the evil empire’s when the crash hits hardest.

    Irreconcilable Differences

    These different types of people are mostly at odds with each other. There is no “we”, there is no “us” and there is no “getting through this thing together”. I will say that the vast majority of people do have a conscience, unlike the globalists that created this calamity in the first place, but that does not mean we will all end up on the same team. The dark magic of chaos is that it can be used to convince otherwise peaceful people to support horrifying tyranny in the name of the “greater good”.

    Beware anyone promoting the notion that we are “all in this together”; this is the gateway to collectivism and it is a blatant lie. As mentioned, there are establishment elites that plan to gain from this event while the rest of us suffer; they are NOT on our side or in our boat. They will use the pandemic and the simultaneous economic collapse (which they have engineered) to maneuver the public into abandoning their freedoms in the name of collective safety.

    There are useful idiots and narcopaths out there that thrive in these types of unstable environments. They too are vampires seeking to bleed people dry while using the disaster as cover. These are the people screaming at strangers walking down the street that they need to “go back home” and “flatten the curve”. These are the people calling the cops on their neighbors for talking in a group bigger than two or three. These are the local government officials calling for bans on church services even when they are held outside and follow the “guidelines” of social distancing. These are the people calling preppers “hoarders” and demanding that their supplies be redistributed. These are the people that revel in authoritarianism.

    Understand that there are many sides to this conflict and very few of them are honorable. Listen to your conscience, listen to evidence, truth and reason, and choose your side wisely.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 23:45

  • Ford Tests Buzzing Wristbands To Keep Workers Six Feet Apart
    Ford Tests Buzzing Wristbands To Keep Workers Six Feet Apart

    Ford Motor Co. is now piloting new wearable social-distancing wristbands for its workers once its factories reopen, reports Bloomberg.

    A group of workers at a factory in Plymouth, Michigan, are currently testing the wristbands that vibrate when someone on the assembly line comes within six feet of one another.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kelli Felker, the company’s spokeswomen, said the new wristbands could be deployed more widely when manufacturing plants reopen next month. She said the new devices would allow employees to work safely with social distancing in mind. 

    Ford is expected to restart production lines next month after a six-week shutdown. All employees will be subjected thermal-imaging scan before entering any facility. Felker said employees would be given protective medical gear such as masks, face shields, and gloves.

    The new health measures are being worked out with the United Auto Workers union (UAW):

    “Ford and the UAW are working closely to identify different ways to keep our people safe while they are at work,” Felker said.

    The Plymouth plant is also the site where Ford is producing ventilators and respirators for hospitals. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The automaker has also converted airbag material and reworked assembly lines to manufacture protective suits for hospital workers. 

    And maybe Amazon’s patent from a few years ago to track employees via wristbands could finally come in hand during these challenging times.   

    In a post-corona world, surveillance in the workplace will certainly increase.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 23:25

  • Quantifying The COVID-19 Shock On The Job Market: Where Jobs Are Growing And Where They Are Gone
    Quantifying The COVID-19 Shock On The Job Market: Where Jobs Are Growing And Where They Are Gone

    Submitted by Priceonomics,

    The coronavirus outbreak has been an unprecedented shock to the hourly job market. The past few weeks have seen huge changes in who’s hiring. Snagajob is the largest site for hourly jobs. Its employers include some of the hardest hit categories like sit-down restaurants. It also helps employers in the grocery and warehouse industries—and these jobs are critical to keeping the economy running during this crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Snagajob, overall job postings are down almost 40% from their peak a month ago. In particular, sit-down restaurants, staffing firms and entertainment have been the hardest hit. If you’re looking for a job, hiring is up in warehousing (Amazon), logistics (shipping, i.e. more Amazon), retail, groceries (Whole Foods, so even more Amazon) and transportation (you guessed it). 

    ***

    Before we start in with the charts, here are a few points to remember. The following data looks at the number of job postings by category and location, before and after the World Health Organization (WHO) declared a pandemic on 3/11/2020. 

    To start, let’s look at overall jobs posted on Snagajob over the last two months.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You can see that jobs peaked on March 4th, before starting to drop, even before the WHO declared a worldwide pandemic on 3/11. From this peak, job postings have declined 41%. However, compared to the first day of this analysis (2/3/2020), jobs postings are only down 12.6% so far.

    There is a  bright spot though. There’s a small uptick in job postings in the most recent dates. There is a complete reordering of the hourly job market, where some categories have disappeared for the time-being, but others are growing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world is completely different than before the pandemic, but it’s not all bad news when it comes to job postings. Logistics and warehouse job postings are up over 156% since the pandemic declaration. Retail, transportation and grocery job postings are also up. You can still find jobs in essential services that keep people fed and supplied.

    There are still a lot of categories, however, that have seen a steep decline in job postings. Temporary staffing jobs have seen the largest drop, falling 74.1%. Entertainment, hospitality, on-demand and sit-down restaurant job postings have all fallen more than 30%.

    Lastly, let’s look at the impact on job postings across America. The chart below shows the decline (or increase) in hourly jobs after the declaration of pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of the 122 largest metro areas on Snagajob, 113 of them have seen a decline in hourly jobs—just nine have seen an increase so far.  At the high end, places like Lafayette, Louisiana have seen a nearly 60% decrease in job postings for hourly workers. Of the top 10 most negatively affected cities, seven of them are in Louisiana or Utah. So far, Boston, San Francisco and Seattle have all seen an increase in job postings on Snagajob after the pandemic.

    ***

    In summary, warehouse and logistics jobs are up over 150% in three weeks. Job postings for grocery stores and retail are also up as people still need to shop for essential items. While job postings may be down overall, the companies that are providing essential services to the country are still hiring. The hourly job market is still in flux and overall job postings are in decline. However, for those who are currently looking for jobs, some employers are hiring more than ever.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 23:05

  • For The First Time Ever, The Fed Will Monetize Double The Total Treasury Issuance
    For The First Time Ever, The Fed Will Monetize Double The Total Treasury Issuance

    While daytraders look transfixed at a stock market which continues to surge higher even as the US has lost around 22 million jobs in the past month alone, something far more nefarious is taking place behind the scenes: the Fed is nationalizing (or privatizing, depending on whether one views the Fed as a public, or a private – which it actually is – entity) the entire capital market at a pace unseen before in history.

    AS the following chart from DB’s Torsten Slok shows, the current pace of weekly Treasury purchases is simply staggering, unparalleled by anything seen before in history.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s not just the Fed: with QE officially back (and not in the cute “Not-QE” variant, but full blown global debt monetization), every single central bank is now actively injecting billions of liquidity into the stock market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We show this chart just so all the idiots on TV (and in the Minneapolis Fed) who still claim the Fed has no impact on stock prices and instead stocks are driven off future earnings (which are now expected to be down 70% according to JPM) will mercifully shut up for ever.

    But back to the Fed, where we bring up something Torsten Slok said today, and which has to go straight to the heart of the issue whether MMT will unleash a new era of socialist prosperity and utopia for everyone, or instead, it will result in a fiscal crisis and the loss of the dollar’s reserve status, to wit:

    At the peak in late March, the Fed was buying $75bn in Treasuries every day, and we are now down to “only” $30bn per day, see also here. These enormous Fed purchases combined with rates moving sideways in recent weeks make you wonder where 10-year rates would have been if the Fed had not intervened. As the Fed gradually steps away over the coming weeks, and Treasury issuance continues to increase to finance the fiscal stimulus, the market will be focusing more and more on demand and supply in the US Treasury market.

    And as we ride into the sunset of US monetary supremacy and into the gaping chasm of economic, financial and fiscal turmoil now that helicopter money has been unleashed without anyone apparently realizing what has just happened, we highlight the following chart, also from Slok, which lays out succinctly what it now takes to avoid a full-blown fiscal crisis: a Fed which is monetizing twice the Treasury’s net issuance. From Slow:

    When the Fed did QE in the years following the 2008 financial crisis monthly Treasury purchases never exceeded US Treasury net issuance, but the Fed is now on track to buy double the amount of net issuance

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While we have nothing else to add to the chart above, a quote from Shelley: “Round the decay Of that colossal Wreck, boundless and bare The lone and level sands stretch far away.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 22:45

  • Facebook 'Fact Checker' Worked At Wuhan Biolab; Ruled Out Virus-Leak While 'Debunking' Articles
    Facebook ‘Fact Checker’ Worked At Wuhan Biolab; Ruled Out Virus-Leak While ‘Debunking’ Articles

    A Facebook fact checker who has ‘debunked’ articles suggesting that COVID-19 may have leaked from the Wuhan Institute of Virology (WIV) has a giant conflict of interest; she worked at the institute – which is now suspected of accidentally leaking the hyper-virulent virus which has killed over 130,000 people and cast the global economy into chaos.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Danielle Anderson, who works at Duke University’s NUS Medical School lab in Singapore, also contributes to Science Feedback – which Facebook has been using to slap “False Information” labels on articles claiming that COVID-19 may have originated at the Wuhan institute – where Anderson worked with bat coronavirus.

    A quick search of Anderson’s publications reveals no fewer than nine collaborations with Dr. Peng Zhou – a Wuhan scientist experimenting on bat coronavirus (the mention of whom may result in a Twitter ban).

    Anderson has been adamant that the lab adheres to the highest standards of safety, and that COVID-19 simply couldn’t have accidentally been leaked by her colleagues.

    “I have worked in this exact laboratory at various times for the past 2 years. I can personally attest to the strict control and containment measures implemented while working there,” Anderson writes in one such ‘debunking’ of a New York Post article that claims “China [is having] a problem keeping dangerous pathogens in test tubes where they belong” while Science Feedback cast doubt on the Post‘s claim that “evidence points to SARS-CoV-2 research being carried out at the Wuhan Institute of Virology.”

    Except, they were carrying out SARS-CoV-2 research at that exact lab, according to new reports in the Wall Street Journal, the Daily Mail and Fox News.

    An April 9 report in the Journal reveals that COVID-19 is genetically identical to a coronavirus found in a horseshoe bat “collected by hazmat-clad scientists from the Institute of Virology in Wuhan.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While a Wednesday report from Fox News reveals that COVID-19 leaked from the Wuhan Institute of Virology, and that “patient zero” was an employee who became infected before spreading it throughout the community, according to ‘multiple sources who have been briefed on the details.’

    And while Anderson was busy covering for her corona-labmates with Facebook debunkings implicating the WIV, she went on national television to explain that the virus could have only come from outside the lab.

    Anderson further peddled the now-debunked wet-market theory in a paper she co-wrote in The Lancet, which reads: “While recognising the tremendous effort by the China CDC team in the early response to the 2019-nCoV outbreak, the small number of team members trained in animal health was probably one of the reasons for the delay in identifying an intermediate animal(s), which is likely to have caused the spread of the virus in a region of the market where wildlife animals were traded and subsequently found to be heavily contaminated. Unfortunately, what animal(s) was involved in transmission remains unknown.”

    Any suggestion to the contrary is now deemed ‘False Information’ by Facebook, thanks to the highly conflicted Danielle Anderson and crew over at Science Feedback.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 22:35

  • The History Of Hydroxychloroquine In India
    The History Of Hydroxychloroquine In India

    Via Great Game India,

    As most of us are already aware, Hydroxychloroquine has already taken the world by storm as a treatment against COVID-19. Every newspaper is talking about it, and all countries are requesting India to supply it. Now, a curious person might wonder why and how this chemical composition is so deeply entrenched in India, and is there any history behind it. Well, there is an interesting history behind it which goes all the way to the Indian king Tipu Sultan’s defeat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 1799, when Tipu was defeated by the British, the whole of Mysore Kingdom with Srirangapatnam as Tipu’s capital, came under British control. For the next few days, the British soldiers had a great time celebrating their victory, but within weeks, many started feeling sick due to Malaria, because Srirangapatnam was a highly marshy area with severe mosquito trouble.

    The local Indian population had over the centuries, developed self immunity, and also all the spicy food habits also helped to an extent. Whereas the British soldiers and officers who were suddenly exposed to harsh Indian conditions, started bearing the brunt.

    To quickly overcome the mosquito menace, the British Army quickly shifted their station from Srirangapatnam to Bangalore (by establishing the Bangalore Cantonment region), which was a welcome change, especially due to cool weather, which the Brits were gravely longing for ever since they had left their shores. But the malaria problem still persisted because Bangalore was also no exception to mosquitoes.

    Around the same time in 18th century, European scientists had discovered a chemical composition called “Quinine” which could be used to treat malaria, but it was yet to be extensively tested at large scale. This malaria crisis among British Army came at an opportune time, and thus Quinine was imported in bulk by the Army and distributed to all their soldiers, who were instructed to take regular dosages (even to healthy soldiers) so that they could build immunity. This was followed up in all other British stations throughout India, because every region in India had malaria problem to some extent.

    But there was a small problem. Although sick soldiers quickly recovered, many more soldiers who were exposed to harsh conditions of tropical India continued to become sick, because it was later found that they were not taking dosages of Quinine. Why? Because it was very bitter!! So, by avoiding the bitter Quinine, British soldiers were lagging behind on their immunity, thereby making themselves vulnerable to Malaria in the tropical regions of India.

    That’s when all the top British officers and scientists started experimenting ways to persuade their soldiers to strictly take these dosages, and during their experiments,  they found that the bitter Quinine mixed with Juniper based liquor, actually turned somewhat into a sweet flavor.

    That’s because the molecular structure of the final solution was such that it would almost completely curtail the bitterness of Quinine.

    That juniper based liquor was Gin. And the Gin mixed with Quinine was called “Gin & Tonic”, which immediately became an instant hit among British soldiers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The same British soldiers who were ready to even risk their lives but couldn’t stand the bitterness of Quinine,  started swearing by it daily when they mixed it with Gin. In fact, the Army even started issuing few bottles of Gin along with “tonic water” (Quinine) as part of their monthly ration, so that soldiers could themselves prepare Gin & Tonic and consume them everyday to build immunity.

    To cater to the growing demand of gin & other forms of liquor among British soldiers, the British East India company built several local breweries in and around Bengaluru, which could then be transported to all other parts of India. And that’s how, due to innumerable breweries and liquor distillation factories, Bengaluru had already become the pub capital of India way back during British times itself.

    Eventually, most of these breweries were handed over from British organizations after Indian independence, to none other than Vittal Mallya (the fugitive Vijay Mallya‘s father), who then led the consortium under the group named United Breweries headquartered in Bengaluru.

    Coming back to the topic, that’s how Gin & Tonic became a popular cocktail and is still a popular drink even today. The Quinine, which was called Tonic (without gin), was widely prescribed by Doctors as well, for patients who needed cure for fever or any infection. So, that’s how the word “Tonic” became a colloquial word for “Western medicine” in India.

    Over the years, Quinine was developed further into many of its variants and derivatives and widely prescribed by Indian doctors.

    One such descendant of Quinine, called Hydroxychloroquine, eventually became the defacto cure for malaria, which is now suddenly the most sought after drug in the world today.

    *  *  *

    Thread by Primordial Kāshyap on Twitter. Read here the history of The Prince Who Defeated East India Company In House Of Commons.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 22:25

  • "A Bad Global Precedent" – Chinese GDP Collapses More Than Expected, Worst Since At Least 1992
    “A Bad Global Precedent” – Chinese GDP Collapses More Than Expected, Worst Since At Least 1992

    So, the question is – just how ‘manufactured’ will this smorgasbord of Chinese macro data be? As v-shaped as the incredible ‘survey’ data? Or as realistic as the traffic and pollution numbers suggest?

    The red oval is the ChiNext stock index’s reaction to the worst of China’s virus impact… green is PMI and red is the macro surprise index (which will be smashed one way or the other tonight)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Of course the big one tonight is Chinese GDP growth. The median forecast of economists surveyed by Bloomberg was for a 6% contraction in the first three months of the year, when the coronavirus outbreak forced an unprecedented lockdown of factories, stores and schools across the country (ING Bank saw a +3.6% print and at the other end of the spectrum, Capital Economics forecast a 16.0% contraction in GDP).

    “China’s economy is going to recover only gradually,” said Scott Kennedy, senior adviser and trustee chair in Chinese business and economics at the Center for Strategic & International Studies.

    “If the government over-stimulates, the only result will be a lot of wasted spending and greater debt. And that won’t help resolve the core problem of China’s economy: low productivity.”

    Additionally, the government will also release data for retail sales, fixed asset investment and industrial output for March, offering the most complete picture yet of the economic destruction since the virus outbreak (but we have already seen the collapse in this monthly data for February and expectations are for a rebound or slowdown in the collapse).

    And so here we go… the magic number for tonight is… a miss – Chinese GDP shrank by 6.8% from a year ago (considerably worse than the 6.0% drop expected) and the worst drop on record (since 1992)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bloomberg notes, the sharp contraction underscores the pressure that Chinese policy makers face as they attempt to revive the economy without nullifying efforts to contain the virus. The continued spread around the world also threatens to add fresh downward pressure on China’s exporters in a feedback loop that could throw millions out of work.

    “The economic loss is unprecedented,” Pacific Investment Management Co. economists wrote.

    “The global recession will hit exports primarily in the second and third quarters of 2020, domestic demand is still hampered by quarantine curbs, and stimulus transmission is weak amid spreading bankruptcies and job losses.”

    And the rest of the Chinese data improved marginally but:

    • Industrial Production fell 8.4% YTD YoY (better than -10.0% exp)

    • Retail Sales fell 19.0% YTD YoY (worse than -12.5% exp)

    • Fixed Asset Investment fell 16.1% YTD YoY (worse than 15.0% exp)

    • Property Investment fell 7.7% YTD YoY

    • Surveyed Jobless Rate improved from 6.2% to 5.9%

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bloomberg’s Asia Economy Team Manager, Malcolm Scott notes, the March numbers probably tell us a bit about human psychology as well as economics — you can turn factories back on and rev up production lines, but it’s tougher to restore consumer confidence that’s been so badly shaken. And while the consumer plays a larger role in China’s economy today than in the past, it’s nothing like the contribution in most advanced economies. That could be a bad precedent globally. 

    Finally, International Monetary Fund Chief Economist Gita Gopinath said in an online media briefing on Tuesday that the fund is tipping 1.2% growth for China this year.

    “The rest of the global economy is now in the grips of the pandemic and there are severe containment measures around the world so that would have a big negative impact in terms of external demand on China’s growth.”

    However, “until there is a usable vaccine, it is tough to see life getting anything like being back to vague normality,” warned Jim O’Neill, Chair of Chatham House and the former Goldman Sachs Group Inc. chief economist who coined the term BRIC.

    And for those craving the next stimulus move by Chinese officials, Shang-Jin Wei, a China expert at Columbia Business School in New York and formerly chief economist of the Asian Development Bank, warns: “Prevention of a return or the ‘second wave’ of the virus outbreak is more important than getting a high growth rate for the remainder of the year.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 22:10

  • Trump Says Guidelines Would Allow Some States To Reopen "Tomorrow"
    Trump Says Guidelines Would Allow Some States To Reopen “Tomorrow”

    Update (1900ET): President Trump definitely hasn’t shied away from rambling tonight, though he’s also remained pretty poised in the face of some pretty tough questioning.

    But one thing he said is that he believes there are about 29 states that he expects will be reopening “soon”, though he refused to name them.

    When the time comes, it’ll be “up to the governors” Trump said.

    *      *      *

    Update (1830ET): One of the first questions for President Trump was if the new federal guidelines would replace the old federal guidelines that called for social distancing, school closures and WFH to remain in place at least until the end of the month. Trump replied that they did. So, could a state like, say, Montana reopen tomorrow, if it wanted?

    “Sure,” Trump said.

    The press corp. didn’t seem to happy with that, as they pressed Trump to discuss which states he felt were on track to reopen, and when.

    *      *      *

    Update (1840ET): If you’re looking for a copy of all of the slides shared by Dr. Birx during Thursday evening’s press conference, they’re included in the White House report which, as we noted earlier, was leaked to the New York Post shortly before the press conference started.

    Read it below:

    *      *      *

    The moment we’ve been waiting for (or at least that Trump has been hyping up) has finally arrived…President Trump is unveiling his “guidelines” to re-open America, officially entitled the “Opening Up America Again” plan.

    Trump kicked off the press conference by saying that the US has succeeded in flattening the curve, and that the “peak” is finally behind us.

    Some details of the guidelines leaked to the New York Post (and were immediately shared by the newswires), and we discussed them here.

    Many New York City and Washington DC-based journalists might be surprised to learn that a large swath of the country hasn’t reported a single new case in a week.

    And remember, since futures are soaring thanks to that remdesivir report, Trump is thinking everything really is fixed, as he ticks off the many deleterious effects of the ‘stay at home’ orders, including suicide and drug abuse.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 22:09

  • Eric Holder Sees Coronavirus As 'Opportunity' To Redesign US Election System
    Eric Holder Sees Coronavirus As ‘Opportunity’ To Redesign US Election System

    Eric Holder thinks the COVID-19 pandemic is a great opportunity to fundamentally change the way America votes.

    “Coronavirus gives us an opportunity to revamp our electoral system so that it permanently becomes more inclusive and becomes easier for the American people to access,” Holder told Time magazine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as the Washington Examiners Andrew Mark Miller notes, the former Obama Attorney General thinks mail-in ballots are the solution.

    “There has to be a sea change in our thinking there,” Holder told the magazine, adding “Allow people to access their primary American right by voting at home. It’s not as if this is an untried concept. Oregon has been doing this for years. But we have to make sure that we’re being sensitive to the needs of poor communities and communities of color by doing things like having prepaid postage on envelopes. Construct a system so that you’ve got expanded in-person voting, you’ve got expanded at-home voting and expanded no-excuse absentee vote-at-home measures.”

    The changes, according to Holder, will help “enhance our democracy.”

    Democrats across the country have been pushing for increased mail-in voting during the coronavirus crisis despite reports over the past week suggesting over 28 million mail-in ballots have been lost in the past 10 years and that thousands of ineligible voters could possibly receive mail-in ballots, including many dead people.

    Fox News host Tucker Carlson said on his show this week he believes these efforts to push mail-in voting are part of a broader effort on behalf of Democrats to “encourage” voter fraud to win elections. –Washington Examiner

    The push for mail-in ballots has gained steam in Congress, with House Speaker Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) suggesting that the new system would “remove all obstacles to participation” in the 2020 election.

    Trump and GOP lawmakers have suggested that the scheme is a politically motivated power-grab – warning that the system is “corrupt” and would invite widespread fraud.

    “They grab thousands of mail-in ballots and they dump it,” Trump told reporters earlier this month, adding that vote-by-mail “doesn’t work out for Republicans.”

    Holder and Pelosi are joined by House Majority Whip Rep. Jim Clyburn (D-SC) reportedly suggesting in a March conference call that coronavirus presents political opportunities – referring to it as a “tremendous opportunity to restructure things to fit our vision.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 21:45

  • Baltimore PD Wants 24-Hour HD Surveillance Drones To Enforce Social Distancing
    Baltimore PD Wants 24-Hour HD Surveillance Drones To Enforce Social Distancing

    Authored by Cassius K. via The Organic Prepper blog,

    The Baltimore Police Department and “Persistent Surveillance,” an Ohio-based company, signed a deal together to spy on the residents of Baltimore, Maryland with drones. In Nazi Germany, fascism was characterized by the fusion between corporate and government power.

    This shady company was under fire almost 4 years ago in 2016, for doing surveillance with the Baltimore Police Department and violating their own 45-day data retention policy.

    Give an inch, they take a mile. Their client, the BPD was able to violate their official policy with impunity.

     “All media will be stored in a secure area with access restricted to authorized persons,” states the official policy of Persistent Surveillance Systems.

     “Recordings not otherwise needed for criminal evidence or for official reasons are retained for a period of 45 days and then destroyed.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company used drones to collect over 300 hours of aerial surveillance footage over Baltimore throughout 8 months in 2016.

    This was directly after nationwide scrutiny came to the department in the aftermath of the death of Freddie Gray, which sparked nationwide protests.

    City officials approved the new deal on April 1, and then the ACLU filed a lawsuit against the Baltimore Police Department about a week and a half later on April 9.

    How invasive is surveillance in Baltimore?

    The drones will be equipped with high-resolution cameras, capable of posing a real threat to the security of anyone deemed a “criminal.”

    The ACLU emphasized that this crosses a massive line, explaining that the plan places every resident of Baltimore “under constant aerial surveillance.”

    “It is equivalent to having a police officer follow us, each of us, outside all the time in case we might commit a crime,” senior staff attorney for the ACLU of Maryland, David Rocah said“If that happened in real life, everyone would clearly understand the privacy and First Amendment implications, and it would never be tolerated.”

    The high definition surveillance drones can reportedly cover around 90% of the City of Baltimore’s land area at any particular moment.

    The ACLU noted that in combination with cameras on the ground accessed by the Baltimore Police Department, license plate readers, and other sources of info, it can all be combined to provide detailed information about the actions, identities, whatever you can think of, in regard to residents.

    Representing the philosophical split between the fundamentally opposed sides of totalitarian vs not totalitarian, a Baltimore Police Commissioner admitted the police will in fact combine the data and have massively increased power.

    “This actually can serve as a force multiplier for the police department, and perhaps can be used as an investigative tool while we are practicing social distancing,” said Police Commissioner Michael Harrison.

    This week happens to be the 5 year anniversary of Freddie Gray’s tragic death at the hands of the Baltimore Police Department.

    It sparked protests throughout 2015 from Baltimore, Maryland to Sacramento, California, coast to coast in the US during a year of police brutality-awareness.

    “Putting residents under continuous, aerial surveillance will impact the privacy rights of everyone, but it is especially dangerous for Black and Brown communities,” the ACLU representative said. “Baltimore is a city with a terrible history of racism and lack of accountability for abuses by police. It’s the last place a novel system of mass surveillance should be tested.”

    Will your city be next?

    Common sense tells us that if one American city is under totalitarian drone surveillance, more will follow.

    The ACLU recognized that possibility as well. A staff attorney with the ACLU stated that they are concerned if the drones are deployed in Baltimore, police across America will try to use police drones.

    This month, in April 2020 the drones are set to launch, and this “trial period” of their use will last 180 days. A decision will be made by April 24, regarding the ACLU lawsuit against the Baltimore Police Department.

    If the police drones are deployed, it will probably happen around the end of April.

    If the trial comes to an end and the drone use is discontinued, according to their promises, the drones will be out of the sky around 6 months from their launch: the end of October.

    Baltimore, Maryland is of course known to have one of the highest crime rates in not just America, but the world, providing a heavy justification for deploying police drones equipped with high definition cameras.

    If the drones were deployed and accepted, one might see a city like Chicago or Atlanta, San Francisco or New York adopt them. San Diego-area city Chula Vista, California is already using police drones equipped with similar night vision cameras, to spot people breaking quarantine rules.

    A line into totalitarianism is being crossed.

    5 years after one of the most protested police murders in American history, the city of Baltimore is threatened with becoming the location of the line being crossed. Baltimore is threatened with becoming the location of a new paradigm of totalitarian surveillance, a fork in the road in history that we can either fight now or be subject to for who knows how many years.

    It will definitely take more than civil liberties organizations and lawsuits to shut down a movement like this, directly aimed at the civilian class. This could be considered equal to a declaration of war against the common people: a very clear line being crossed that could usher in true totalitarianism.

    What scenarios might people see if these drones were deployed throughout America? Jails and prisons might fill up with people charged with new crimes, destruction of surveillance drones and things like that. Your every move could be watched when you’re outside your home. Where you go who you go there with…and yes, even if you aren’t doing anything wrong, you do have something to worry about: your complete invasion of privacy.

    It’s difficult to believe people will be accepting of this. Either way, this moment of the line being crossed is extremely important to recognize. Whatever social power we have, it should be utilized to oppose the persistent advances of totalitarianism and the surveillance state.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 21:25

  • Wholesale Gasoline Hits 12 Cents A Gallon In Midwest
    Wholesale Gasoline Hits 12 Cents A Gallon In Midwest

    Two weeks ago we reported how the “steepest decline in global oil consumption ever recorded” spelled negative prices for crude in what Goldman’s Jeffrey Currie as “the largest economic shock of our lifetimes.”

    Now, the unprecedented collapse in consumption has hit the other end of the industry – gasoline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Bloomberg, gasoline in Fargo, North Dakota has hit 12 cents a gallon at ‘the rack’ – the wholesale market where gas station owners buy fuel before marking it up at the pumps – which have become “little more than makeshift storage for ballooning inventories.” 

    When you see gasoline down around 12 cents a gallon, no one is going to be making money,” said Ron Ness, President of the North Dakota Petroleum Council, who added that it’s nearly impossible for retailers to turn a profit at that price.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Our gasoline business has been cut in half,” said David Olson, general manager of RJ’s Gas Station outside of Fargo. Nearby, Shaun Lugurt told Bloomberg that he estimates sales at his station have tumbled 80% in a month.

    “The biggest part for us that has been so hard is the unknown,” said Lugurt, adding “It’s been kind of a roller coaster.” Lugert co-owns Don’s Car Washes, and has also been forced too cut back store and worker hours.

    The slump in rack prices, which are typically stable due to intense competition among distributors, is the latest sign that the coronavirus pandemic is wreaking havoc on every aspect of the fuel market. American gasoline consumption fell to the lowest level on record last week as lockdowns take drivers off the road while gasoline stockpiles rose to a record high. That’s caused rack prices across the U.S to collapse. Milwaukee this week beat out Fargo for the lowest price in the nation. –Bloomberg

    “The local racks are just inundated with material,” according to Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy – who suggested that some refineries may be selling gasoline “at a break even or even a loss.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “What we are seeing is that a lot of the big pipelines are being used as storage, and the product will just get pushed and pushed until it has no place else to go,” said DTN refined products analyst, Brian Milne. “Those places are at the end of the line.”

    Retail gas prices, meanwhile, are catching up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “You’re not going to be able to flip a switch and go back to what it was before coronavirus,” said Olson, the station manager at RJ’s. “Even with businesses opened back up again, people are going to be apprehensive.

    Olson is probably right – as a recent Gallup poll found that 80% of Americans say they will wait to return to normal activities after the government lifts the nationwide coronavirus lockdown.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 21:05

  • Gilead Pours Cold Water On Report That Sent Market Soaring: "Anecdotal Reports With No Statistical Power"
    Gilead Pours Cold Water On Report That Sent Market Soaring: “Anecdotal Reports With No Statistical Power”

    After a one-two punch of disappointing news for Gilead out of China, where as we reported yesterday a trial of remdesivir in Covid-19 patients with mild or moderate symptoms was suspended as no eligible patients could be recruited according to an update on ClinicalTrials.gov, which in turn followed a trial of the drug in severely ill Covid-19 patients which was also terminated for similar reasons, it felt like one or more hedge funds would seek to manipulate public sentiment – and the market – and get out of an underwater position.

    They did just that at 430pm today when the low profile Statnews published a report by Adam Feuerstein, best known for doing the bidding of one or more hedge fund clients, according to which a “Chicago hospital treating severe Covid-19 patients with Gilead Sciences’ antiviral medicine remdesivir in a closely watched clinical trial is seeing rapid recoveries in fever and respiratory symptoms, with nearly all patients discharged in less than a week, STAT has learned.”

    “Learned” from whom? A hedge fund or two who were long GILD and needed a fake news catalyst to get out? Because last time we checked, double blind, secret drug trials are, er… secret.

    The report went on: “patients using Gilead’s remdesivir were “seeing rapid recoveries in fever and respiratory symptoms”, which is odd considering the two previous incomplete/failed trials in China. According to the report, “almost all patients were discharged in under than a week, and only two patients died.”

    Which actually is very bad news because as the FT reported later – this time using facts not sources – “none of the patients on the Chicago trial had been on invasive ventilation“, so is it possible that the drug killed them? Maybe Feuerstein can ask his hedge fund source.

    In any case, at the time the data hit Bloomberg around 4:21pm, it barely registered among the institutional audience, or even the algos, as most serious players were well aware of Feuerstein’s “tactical” reputation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It wasn’t until the news was reported by CNBC about 30 minutes later – and hit the retail investing audience – that GILD stock soared 16 and the entire market took off as if someone had suddenly discovered not only a cure but also a vaccine for coronavirus.

    Alas, neither happened, and as it has done on numerous occasions previously, about three hours after the news broke conveniently providing one or more hedge funds ample opportunity to offload their position in the thin after hours market, Gilead issued a statement which suggested that STAT was pumping the stock based on nothing more than “anecdotal reports” to wit:

    “We understand the urgent need for a Covid-19 treatment and the resulting interest in data on our investigational antiviral drug remdesivir. The totality of the data need to be analysed in order to draw any conclusions from the trial.”

    Anecdotal reports, while encouraging, do not provide the statistical power necessary to determine the safety and efficacy profile of remdesivir as a treatment for Covid-19. We expect the data from our Phase 3 study in patients with severe Covid-19 infection to be available at the end of this month, and additional data from other studies to become available in May.”

    And so, one more attempt to ramp the market using fake news of an imminent drug has failed, with some observing that a Phase 1 drug trial is now the functional equivalent of a Phase 1 trade deal – both meaningless on their own, but with the power to send stocks surging when used tactically by unknown players.

    Experts had high hopes for remdesivir because it had shown it was effective in stopping the Ebola virus replicating. Ebola shares a similar mechanism of replication with Sars-CoV-2, the virus that causes the Covid-19 disease. However, there has been no definitive statistic evidence yet that that is the case.

    As a result, the drug has not been approved to treat any disease and scientists are waiting for the results of large trials with control arms for proof that it works and that the benefits outweigh any risks of side-effects. Umer Raffat, a biotech analyst at Evercore, said that he was “cautiously optimistic” about remdesivir but warned it was not a “silver bullet”.

    He said it was important to note that none of the patients on the Chicago trial had been on invasive ventilation, which tends to be an indication of a more serious condition and worse outcomes. In short, the observed response could have been nothing more than a placebo effect.

    And while stocks soared to new one month highs on the initial overhyped news of a trial that has not yet even concluded amid the latest powerful short squeeze, the rally has since reversed even if the drop has a long way to go before it fills the gap. Meanwhile, stocks are now the most overvalued ever, ever on the basis of forward multiples.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In short, we just observed another marketwide pump and dump, in which whales used gullible, CNBC-watching Joe Sixpack retail investors for “distribution”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 20:46

  • Some Things Will Never Be The Same After The 'Bat-Gobbler-Flu'
    Some Things Will Never Be The Same After The ‘Bat-Gobbler-Flu’

    Authored by Kurt Schlichter, op-ed via Townhall.com,

    You cannot have a social upheaval like the Bat Gobbler Flu and expect everything to go back to exactly how it was before the ChiCom’s fetish for eating weird Schiff turned the world upside down. Pressure has a way of changing what it is applied to. Sometimes it makes diamonds, other times it makes things go splat. No one expected something like this to come out of leftist field and derail our booming economy. We wanted to let the good times roll, but no one saw them rolling right off a cliff.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The pandemic and the response are going to not change some things much at all. For example, once the economy gets rolling again the survivors will rally and we’ll knock unemployment way down while pumping the Dow back up. But other things are another story. Some things were changing anyway, and this body blow is going to accelerate the trends towards creative destruction as old ways of doing things fade away quicker than expected and new ones come to the forefront. We’re going to see many areas where change was always coming, and now it’s come faster. In many cases, it will help crush our enemies, which is awesome.

    Academia: Speaking of enemies, a lot of colleges have moved online, and do you think that millions of students and their parents haven’t noticed that the only real difference between staring at a screen and staring at some hippie burnout prof run his filthy bunghole from 33 rows back is that the students aren’t getting hammered in the dorms every night? Okay, maybe they are getting hammered at home, but the fact is that the four-year party model of post-secondary education was headed for retirement anyway and this is really ripping away academia’s lame claims that campuses are necessary to get a real education. Have you noticed the clueless campus commies who claim to be educated these days?

    The lockdown has demonstrated that you can impart knowledge just as effectively over a computer, but then the purpose of modern academia is not to impart knowledge. It’s to provide sinecures for man-bunned lefty academics and bureaucrats and allow them access to the soft, bendable minds of our young. But they can no longer justify the $70K a year price tags of their SJW reeducation camps, which are sweetened up with a plot of partying. A quarter mil is a stiff price to pay to drink a lot of Old Milwaukee and cavort with eager booty callers for four years. You can do that at home, and without all the pronoun drama. Look for scores of mid-level colleges to die as the vast majority of students move toward a utilitarian model over the pricey vacation model.

    The Media: It was always a smoldering dung heap and now it’s a fecal inferno. The definitive example of its uselessness was how it decided that what the president is actually saying was unfit to report. No, what is fit to point out – which the president gloriously did via a “Best Media Fails” highlight reel on April 13th – is the garbage media’s garbage take on what the president was actually saying. Just when rediscovering the virtues of objectivity and a commitment to the facts might have saved the media from its fate, or at least put off the inevitable day of reckoning brought on by technology and economics, the media decided to do precisely the opposite. Leave it to the media to empty the water filling up the rowboat by poking some more holes in the hull so the water can drain out.

    Work: Working at home was already getting to be sort of a thing. Now, it’s pretty obvious that a lot of people can work at home. In fact, they should. Sure, there’s the management challenge of making sure employees don’t confuse working at home with a vacation, but for a lot of us, the office is going to be a thing of the past. This is especially good news if you tend to dislike other people.

    Small Businesses: So, small business owners needed help and the Democrats were right there to demand all sorts of SJW baloney before they would lend a hand. If that didn’t get them woke, nothing will. The days when small business owners had the luxury of imagining that the Democrats really are not that different from the Republicans are over. The Democrats are the party of the big corporation, largely because the Democrats share their ideology with a lot of big corporations’ CEO’s younger second wives – and small business is the enemy. Small business owners are unruly, and independent, and can’t compete in terms of funding lobbyists. Corporate bigshots are much more pliable. A small business owner voting for a Democrat is like an attractive young woman walking over and standing close to Grandpa Badfinger. Nothing good is going to come of it.

    Open Borders Nuts: Gee, it turns out that America faces foreign threats, and that maybe throwing open the door isn’t a great idea. Some ChiCom bat biter got sick and the rest is history. If Trump had listened to the whining children who screamed “RACISM!” before he shut down flights from the Far East petri dish, we’d have a zillion more cases. To paraphrase the old saw, maybe you don’t believe in borders, but borders sure as hell believe in you.

    The Globalist Bureaucracy: Well, CNN and the NYT still think we should be sucking up to the WHO and its Peking puppet of a head honcho, but the rest of us have had a terrific lesson in why the international establishment is garbage. They denied Taiwan exists, which appears to be more important to them than defeating the Chinese coronavirus. They lied about the pangolin pathogen. And we should cut them off without a dime.

    The Climate Hoaxers: Hey, the science people can’t generate a model that correctly predicts tomorrow, but we should totally go for a re-do times a hundred of the current economic chaos because some freaky Nordic waif demands we obey models that purport to give us the weather report for the year 2120. Pass. We’ve now all had a taste of the sacrifice the weather cultists demand for their angry Sun Goddess, and no thanks. We’ll roll the dice that the people who predicted the ice age unless we gave them more money and power in the 1970s are also going to be wrong about us burning to a cinder if we don’t give them more money and power today.

    Regular Americans: You know, we were getting kind of soft. That’s not an entirely bad thing. It’s actually a measure of success. The goal of a lot of hard-working Americans doing hard things over the centuries was so that later generations would not have to do hard things. But hard things happen. The problem is that a lot of us never imagined that things might get tough, or at least a bit scary and challenging like the whole Woking Pneumonia epidemic has been. Yet we have faced this crisis, and we have prevailed. Sure, you see YouTube vids of idiots fighting over Lieu-wipe and bitter Karens hectoring and nagging, but in general we the peeps have done pretty well. You go to a store and the vibe is less free-for-all than all-in-this-together. 

    People have adapted. People have overcome, and many went beyond and helped their family and neighbors too. We learned that we aren’t completely helpless. Some made masks. Some brought local old people and shut-ins food. Other realized that the security of themselves and their community is each citizen’s personal responsibility, not a duty to be outsourced to others, and (where they could) heeded my call to “Buy guns and ammunition.

    No, this is not an epic disaster like a famine, earthquake or plague of frogs, but it is also not nothing. And when the Big One hits – a really bad virus, an asteroid, a leftist administration that declares war on freedom-loving citizens and tries to make us serfs – then maybe, just maybe, we’ll be confident in our ability to face the challenge and emerge victoriously.

    *  *  *

    Want to support Townhall so we can keep telling the truth about China and the virus they unleashed on the world? Join Townhall VIP  and use the promo code WUHAN to get 25% off VIP membership! You’ll get an additional weekly VIP-exclusive Kurt column  AND his podcast Unredacted.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 20:45

  • Anonymous Tip Leads To Grisly Discovery: 17 Bodies 'Piled Up' In Virus-Hit NJ Nursing Home
    Anonymous Tip Leads To Grisly Discovery: 17 Bodies ‘Piled Up’ In Virus-Hit NJ Nursing Home

    From the start of the coronavirus pandemic impacting North America, nursing homes have been hardest and earliest hit, but perhaps none worse than an unfolding nightmare at a large nursing home in New Jersey.

    “The call for body bags came late Saturday,” the WSJ begins of the shocking story of Andover Subacute and Rehabilitation Center I and II long-term care facility in the small town of Andover, New Jersey. 

    Over the weekend an anonymous tip was called into local police reporting that a body had been stored in a shed. Police on the scene subsequently discovered 17 dead people at the facility after COVID-19 swept through the nursing home. No body was actually ever found in the shed, however.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The WSJ describes based on eyewitness testimony a ghastly scene of “17 bodies piled inside the nursing home in a small morgue intended to hold no more than four people.”

    In total over 100 residents are confirmed for COVID-19, with another more than 180 residents and staff reportedly showing respiratory and flu-like symptoms typical of the disease. 

    “The 17 were among 68 recent deaths linked to the long-term care facility, Andover Subacute and Rehabilitation Center I and II, including two nurses, officials said. Of those who died, 26 people had tested positive for the virus,” WSJ continues.

    After a police investigation, which as of Thursday afternoon has reached the attention of the governor, who has also vowed to open an investigation into how bodies were allowed to be piled up – and in many cases families kept in the dark as the fate of their loved ones – Andover’s police chief Eric Danielson acknowledged “They were just overwhelmed by the amount of people who were expiring.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Andover Subacute and Rehabilitation Center, in Andover, New Jersey, Getty Images.

    Andover Subacute is New Jersey’s largest licensed facility, with over 700 beds for patients, according to state figures. When the crisis was first uncovered state authorities reportedly mulled sending in the National Guard to assist. 

    Once local staff were overwhelmed and feared outside help wouldn’t come, at a moment the entire tri-state area is in full crisis mode as now the global COVID-19 epicenter, a staff member of Andover Subacute & Rehab Center Two wrote on Facebook Monday: “To all the people calling into the governor’s office, the congressman’s office to help us tell them WE NEED HELP.” 

    That post has since been deleted as the facility assists in a state investigation, and ahead of likely legal fallout.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AP Photo

    “I feel so helpless,” one family member of a resident of the facility wrote on Facebook on Tuesday according to the WSJ report. “I feel like everyone is going to get Covid. What do we do?”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 20:25

  • NYC's Intensive-Care Units Still "Dangerously Overcrowded" Despite 'Flattening Curve': Live Updates
    NYC’s Intensive-Care Units Still “Dangerously Overcrowded” Despite ‘Flattening Curve’: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Germany reports jump in new cases, deaths
    • Spain reports most new cases in a week
    • North Dakota releases plan to reopen state May 1
    • US case total passes 650k
    • France confirms
    • Turkey releases mafia boss from prison
    • Global Times editor denies report about leak from Wuhan lab
    • Trump reschedules tonight’s press conference for 6pmET
    • Switzerland unveils bailout package
    • Singapore reports another record daily jump as 2nd wave arrives
    • Trudeau says no plans to open border with US to “non-essential” traffic
    • Italy reports slight rise in new cases, pullback in deaths
    • NJ reports jump in cases
    • Phil Murphy opens investigation into nursing home deaths
    • Details of Trump’s reopening guidelines are leaking out
    • Cali gov says Trump said “what we were hoping to hear”
    • More promising reports about remdesivir
    • Sweden reports another alarming jump
    • Chinese factories on verge of second shutdown
    • France coronavirus-linked deaths fall for first time in 4 days
    • UK health minister says it’s too early to end lockdown as measures set to be extended
    • Trump set to release reopening ‘guidelines’ some time after 3pmET
    • Belgium reports more than 1k new cases
    • UK extends lockdown by “at least” 3 weeks
    • Macron says EU may collapse unless “coronabonds” happen
    • 7 Midwestern states drop guidelines for reopening economy
    • Britain crosses 100k case threshold
    • European Commission President apologizes to Italy
    • Russia’s streak of record new cases stretches to 5th day
    • Japan expands state of emergency to cover whole country
    • WSJ reports medical supplies bound for US are being blocked from export by Beijing
    • Cuomo reports 606 more deaths in NYS
    • UK planning to announce lockdown extension today
    • Party of South Korean president wins 180 of 300 seats in legislative vote
    • President Trump to unveil plan to reopen economy Thursday

    *      *      *

    Update (2020ET): Denver Broncos Pro Bowl linebacker Von Miller has tested positive for the coronavirus, becoming the second NFL player to contract the virus.

    “It’s true,” Miller told 9News. “I’ve just been here in the crib and I started to get a little cough. You know, I have asthma and I started getting a little cough a couple days ago. My girlfriend … she told me when I was asleep, she said my cough, it didn’t sound normal.”

    Miller told the press that a nebulizer didn’t help and his assistant persuaded him to go to the doctor on Tuesday to get tested.

    President Trump may have succeeded in assuaging some concerns of his critics by delegating more power to the states, by in a report published a few hours ago, the New York Post just reminded us how bad the situation truly is inside NYC’s hospitals.

    While COVID-19 related hospital admissions have been falling, ICU admissions have been steady or rising. Now, the ICU is where ‘all the drama is happening, according to several nurses. Manhattan’s Mt. Sinai is dangerously overcrowded, with ICU patients crammed into rooms.

    [One] nurse at Manhattan’s Mount Sinai Hospital likewise said that while it’s no longer “so insane in the emergency department,” the ICU was “actually where the crazy s–t is happening.”

    “When we take patients up there, it’s insane,” the nurse said.

    “They’re putting two patients in every ICU unit. When I brought a patient upstairs – a freshly intubated patient who was critical and unstable – we had to transfer them from a stretcher to a bed in the hallway, which is obviously unsafe.”

    The nurse added, “If a patient, God forbid, codes [from cardiopulmonary arrest], there’s no room to do a code. There’s no room because patients are just jam-packed in there.”

    Meanwhile, ERs nurses at some hospitals are still dealing with 3-4 patients dying on them per shift, and a growing number of patients who die during the ambulance ride to the ER.

    *      *      *

    Update (1845ET): Tonight’s press conference is going about as well as can be expected, since President Trump made the smart move of letting Dr. Birx and Dr. Fauci take the reins.

    If you’re looking for a copy of the slides Dr. Birx presented during her turn at the podium, they’re included in the report below, which outlines the White House’s plan to reopen the economy in a surprising level of detail.

     

     

    *      *      *

    Update (1820ET): WSJ reported earlier that China is moving to block exports of medically essential supplies manufactured by US companies on Chinese territory, despite the fact that they were lawfully due to be shipped out.

    The key paragraphs:

    The policies were instituted this month, and Chinese officials have said they are intended to ensure the quality of exported medical products and to make sure needed goods aren’t being shipped out of China. Instead, they have created bottlenecks at a time of urgent need, according to the suppliers, brokers and the State Department memos.

    China’s policies have “disrupted established supply chains for medical products just as these products were most needed for the global response to Covid-19,” according to one of the memos sent this week. The State Department said in a statement: “We appreciate the efforts to ensure quality control. But we do not want this to serve as an obstacle for the timely export of important supplies.”

    As for these ‘export controls’? Beijing blamed ‘complaints’ from Europe about the quality of certain Chinese-made goods.

    To repair its image, China has tried to reshape perceptions about its role in the crisis, leveraging its manufacturing power to export crucial medical supplies to affected countries. Beijing was then hit with complaints from European countries about the quality of masks, gowns and other products they received.

    The export restrictions then followed. Chinese customs prohibited the export of medical products without certifications from China’s National Medical Products Administration, even if the goods had been registered with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. On Friday China added another hurdle, subjecting certain types of surgical protective gear and equipment—including ventilators and masks—to extra checks before they could be shipped overseas.

    Interestingly, the editors at WSJ dedicated a surprising amount of column inches making clear that market factors and “legitimate complaints” were contributing to these shortages.

    Suppliers said the urgent demand has created a “complete sellers’ market,” with prices changing daily as factories, inundated by offers, dictate minimum purchasing quantities and buying conditions.

    “China’s between a rock and a hard place,” said Solomon Matzner, the Shanghai-based founding partner of BioAktive Specialty Products, who assists U.S. and German institutions in sourcing KN95 masks. “They need to get as much product out as possible, but on the other hand, Chinese products are being criticized for quality.”

    Is WSJ buttering up the Communist Party censors to try and win favor for an eventual return of their reporters? Or, is it just trying to shield those reporters who haven’t yet left but are due to depart as Beijing kicks out reporters for the WSJ, WaPo & NYT.

    Suppliers said the urgent demand has created a “complete sellers’ market,” with prices changing daily as factories, inundated by offers, dictate minimum purchasing quantities and buying conditions.

    “China’s between a rock and a hard place,” said Solomon Matzner, the Shanghai-based founding partner of BioAktive Specialty Products, who assists U.S. and German institutions in sourcing KN95 masks. “They need to get as much product out as possible, but on the other hand, Chinese products are being criticized for quality.”

    It’s just the latest evidence that the shortages of certain medical supplies aren’t simply due to closed factories; it’s deliberate policy intervention by Beijing.

    *      *      *

    Update (1710ET): We neglected to note this earlier, but the FT published an interview with French President Emmanuel Macron shortly before the country reported a massive spike in new cases.

    Emmanuel Macron has warned of the collapse of the EU as a “political project” unless it supports stricken economies such as Italy and helps them recover from the coronavirus pandemic.  Speaking to the FT from the Elysée Palace, the French president said there was “no choice” but to set up a fund that “could issue common debt with a common guarantee” to finance member states according to their needs rather than the size of their economies. This is an idea that Germany and the Netherlands have opposed. The EU faced a “moment of truth” in deciding whether it was more than just a single economic market, with the lack of solidarity during the pandemic likely to fuel populist anger in southern Europe, Mr Macron said. “If we can’t do this today, I tell you the populists will win — today, tomorrow, the day after, in Italy, in Spain, perhaps in France and elsewhere,” he said. “I believe [the EU] is a political project. If it’s a political project, the human factor is the priority and there are notions of solidarity that come into play . . . the economy follows on from that, and let’s not forget that economics is a moral science.”

    Now, why is Macron pitching coronabonds as essential for the survival of the EU as a “political project”, when the primary benefactors would be Italy and Spain? It’s right there in the text: France is the next domino to fall, and Macron knows it. Yet, Germany and the Netherlands remain deeply opposed to the idea.

    Too bad for Macron the Europeans are almost as fractious and petty as their colleagues across the Atlantic.

    *      *      *

    Update (1700ET): Never a dull moment this Thursday.

    For the first time, it looks like investors are getting gassed up on reports about a possible “miracle drug.”

    Reports about Gilead’s remdesivir out of a trial in Chicago – trials using the drug are being run around the world on patients in various stages of the illness, though China just shut down two of them for “lack of eligible patients” – are claiming that the drug has shown rapid progress in combating patient’s symptoms.

    Futures spike on the news, though keep in mind: This isn’t really anything we haven’t heard before. It’s more reports that the drug “works”, just this time few a few dozen more patients having been tested.

    Gilead Sciences climbed 4.4% post-market Thursday as STAT reported severe Covid-19 patients being treated in Chicago with the company’s experimental drug remdesivir are “seeing rapid recoveries in fever and respiratory symptoms.”

    Almost all patients were discharged in under than a week, and only two patients died, STAT said, citing comments made this week during a video discussion about trial results with University of Chicago faculty members.

    STAT cautions that trials are running at other institutions and full study results can’t yet be determined; Gilead told the news outlet that it’s looking forward to data becoming available.

    We’re also getting more details on the president’s “guidelines” for reopening the economy, which, like the remdesivir news, is simply more of the same.

    Amusingly, the administration appears to have leaked a copy of the “Opening Up America Again” plan to the New York Post, which published a report that has been digested by newswires.

    President Trump’s reopening guidelines suggest a 14-day downward trajectory in coronavirus cases before beginning phased re-opening, although document is said to not offer a specific timeframe for opening up the economy.

    As a guide, US President Trump told Governors they call the shots regarding reopening the economy and that some could begin before May 1st if they want to, while he will conduct a press conference on re-opening the economy at 1800EDT/ 2300BST where he will explain guidelines for opening up and an official noted that guidelines will be flexible and on data driven recommendations. Furthermore, phase one of the guidelines recommends closed schools should remain shut, that people maximize distance when in public and that gatherings over 10 people should generally be avoided, while bars should remain closed but large venues such as restaurants, theatres and sporting venues could open with strict physical distancing.

    We now wait to hear from the big man himself at 6pmET.

    Meanwhile, in America’s neighbor to the north, Canadian Prime Minister said Thursday that he has no plans to reopen the border with the US. There had been some talk earlier in the week about the possibility of reopening the border following comments by President Trump.

    *     *      *

    Update (1615ET): According to JHU, confirmed coronavirus cases in the US have topped 650k, with more than 30k deaths.

    Meanwhile, Gavin Newsom is beginning his nightly press conference. Early on, he confirmed that 69 new deaths were recorded in California over the last day, bringing the death toll north of 890.

    Newsom said that while there was a modest decline in hospitalizations (down by 0.9% since yesterday) new cases ticked higher. Still overall Newsom said it was “good news” but still only “one day’s headline.”

    The Cali governor also signed an executive order that will allow for paid supplemental sick leave for food service workers across California that have been impacted by COVID-19 for the “larger sector” employers whom Newsom said were left out by the federal package.

    The order allows for two weeks of additional leave for all workers who have contracted, been exposed to someone who has tested positive, or have been exposed to isolation or quarantine orders by local health officials, he said.

    “We don’t want you going to work sick,” he said, referencing workers in grocery, food delivery services, fast food chains and agricultural workers who will benefit from the order.

    “I heard a few grocery store workers say this: ‘We’re called essential workers, but increasingly we feel like we’re disposable.’ I want you to know, you’re not disposable. You’re essential and you’re valued,” Newsom said.

    More numbers here:

    *      *      *

    Update (1607ET): What’s that? The governor of California saying something…vaguely positive…about President Trump?

    • CA GOV SAID WHAT TRUMP SAID WAS ‘WHAT WE WERE HOPING TO HEAR’

    Like Cuomo, Newsom has embraced the bipartisan approach of a pragmatic governor trying to manage their state and guide it through a crisis. Notice the contrast between what’s happening in the state houses and what’s happening on Capitol Hill.

    *      *      *

    Update (1600ET): And details of Trump’s grand reopening ‘guidelines’ are starting to leak out.

    • TRUMP GUIDELINES RECOMMEND STILL DISTANCING IN FIRST PHASE
    • GUIDELINES SAY PHASE 2 FOR STATES WITH NO EVIDENCE OF REBOUND
    • GUIDELINES URGE TELEWORK, SCHOOLS STAYING CLOSED IN PHASE ONE

    And after a volatile session, stocks closed well in the green, leading us to believe…

    *      *      *

    Update (1545ET): During his call with America’s governors, President Trump reportedly said that some states would be allowed to open some businesses and schools before May 1.

    President Donald Trump told U.S. governors on a conference call Thursday that some states would be able to reopen businesses and schools before May 1, when federal social distancing guidelines are set to expire.

    He said some governors may want to take more time, conceding that some states are in rough shape, two people familiar with the call said. But he told the governors that the country is heading in the right direction.

    The president said he’ll announce federal guidelines for states to lift stay-at-home orders and relax social distancing practices during his daily news conference at 6 p.m. He told the governors that they’ll receive booklets with the guidelines.

    While states like North Dakota, that is, states with only a few hundred cases and a handful of deaths, are pushing to reopen asap to stave off needless economic harm (which, as we’ve noted before, can often translate into harming of the physical/emotional variety), others, like California, are looking at a much longer timeline. Meanwhile, Bill Gates is insisting that allowing a few states to reopen earlier would be nothing short of disastrous.

    We imagine he’ll have something to say about Trump’s comment.

     

     

     

    Update (1455ET): In case you haven’t noticed, there’s been a firehose of coronavirus news this afternoon, from various states laying out their plans to reopen their economies, to the White House scrambling to finalize a plan of its own, while the UK, France and even Japan are expanding or extending their own stay-at-home measures.

    The chorus of questions surrounding the virus’s origins has grown louder, and Trump has been saying he’s planning a “major” press conference tonight at 6pmET.

    As if that weren’t enough, as more states sign on to their official reopening guidelines, Trump is teasing that he thinks the states will be “happy” with the federal government’s plan and – furthermore – it might come with a $2 trillion infrastructure package attached.

    The bipartisan infrastructure package has become synonymous with dashed hopes about areas of bipartisan cooperation in the Trump era; the phrase “infrastructure week” has become a niche joke shared by political junkies.

    And now here we go again. The White House can’t even find enough common ground with the Dems to top off the ‘PPP’. An infrastructure package seems like a distant dream, as it always has been, and will likely remain.

    If the White House is resorting to bringing back “infrastructure week”, then we fear the worst: not only is there no plan, but there was never even any hope for a plan.

    Fortunately, the states have been somewhat proactive in that department.

    Trump is now holding a virtual meeting with governors.

    *      *      *

    Update (1450ET): France isn’t alone in reporting a massive jump in cases. New Jersey reported 4,391 new cases, almost as if Gov. Phil Murphy is trying to make Trump and everybody talking about reopening the economy look bad. It brought the state’s total to more than 75k, while 362 new deaths were also recorded.

    The jump in Jersey deaths includes 17 bodies that were found in a nursing home, a story that has scandalized the state.

    Earlier, Murphy has asked the state’s AG to open a statewide investigation into COVID-19 deaths at nursing homes in the state.

    Other states, including neighbor New York, reached out to express support.

    *      *      *

    Update (1435ET): Remember what we said ten minutes ago about French officials saying that the pace of new cases ‘accelerated’ over the past 24 hours?

    Well, turns out that was a bit of an understatement. In what appears to be the biggest single-day jump in new cases in Western Europe for the last few weeks, France reported 17,164 new cases, bringing its total to 165,027.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Might we also remind readers that Germany reported one of the largest batches of new cases in weeks earlier, and Belgium just reported 1,236 new cases and 417 new deaths, indicating that Belgium is in the phase of the virus where cases accelerate rapidly before the ‘peak’ – or at least that’s what they’ll say. Belgium has a total of 34,809 cases and 4,857 deaths.

    Taken together, this doesn’t paint the brightest picture for Europe, even as Italy is looking at May 1 to start accelerating its return to normalcy. In a form of symbolism, the venue in Netherlands that would have been host to the Eurovision 2020 conference has been converted into a COVID-19 hospital.

    *      *      *

    Update (1420ET): Speaking of ‘preempting Trump’, the president just tweeted that tonight’s press conference, which is also supposed to feature the release of the federal guidelines, until 6 pm.

    Meanwhile, in France, deaths linked to the virus rose to 17,920, according to Director General for Health Jerome Salomon, that’s an increase of 753 from figures reported on Wednesday, a smaller jump than was reported the day before. However, the pace of new cases rose.

    *      *      *

    Update (1415ET): As California hints at a return to normalcy that could drag out for over a year, and Cuomo leaves the door open for a summer rebound, a bipartisan group of governors in the Midwest have formed their own little group, as everybody rushes to preempt Trump’s announcement (expected some time after 3pm) to make it look like they’re all firmly in control.

    The consensus is that these states are now shooting to start reopening their economies on May 15, a date that some experts believe should be “a good one” for “a lot of places around the country,” according to Josh Bolton from the Business Roundtable, who was speaking about the news on CNBC.

    The states co-signing the guidelines include: Illinois, Minnesota, Wisconsin, Michigan, Kentucky, Indiana and Ohio.

    *      *      *

    Update (1320ET): One Twitter user has highlighted an extremely depressing fact about Italy’s outbreak:

    Meanwhile, across NY, 1.2 million people have filed unemployment claims over the past five weeks, said Melissa DeRosa, secretary to Gov. Andrew Cuomo. Across the country, a staggering 22 million Americans have filed for unemployment benefits.

    Iran reported its lowest number of new coronavirus deaths since March 13 on Thursday with 92 new deaths, bringing its total to 4,869, and 1,606 new cases, bringing its case total to 77,995.

    In the UK, British Foreign Secretary and acting leader Dominic Raab extended the country’s near-total lockdown by “at least” three weeks, as was expected.

    In Washington, President Trump tweeted more criticisms at Democrats for refusing to strike a deal on reloading the ‘PPP’.

    *      *      *

    Update (1240ET): Italy reported 3,786 new cases of coronavirus and 525 new death on Thursday, bringing its totals to 168,941 cases and 22,170 deaths. Though the number of new cases is higher vs. yesterday, the margin isn’t wide, and testing was also higher. Meanwhile, the number of deaths dropped, while the number of hospitalized and ICU patients also fell.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The highlight, though it’s actually not all that positive, of the report is that 40k people have fully recovered, but that’s only about a quarter of patients. It showcases just how long it takes for some people to recover.

    *      *      *

    Update (1240ET): Cuomo’s decision to extend New York’s stay at home order and North Dakota Gov. Doug Burgum’s decision to release his plan to start reopening the state May 1 have set up an epic clash between states pushing to reopen the economy as soon as possible, and states that want to keep the measures in place as they are for at least another month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Amid all of this, President Trump is expected to deliver the White House ‘guidelines’ some time after 3pmET on Thursday.

    *      *      *

    Update (1215ET): Singapore reported a record 728 new cases of COVID-19 for Thursday, bringing the city-state’s new total to 4,427, up from just a few hundred earlier this month. The sudden resurgence has unfolded despite Singapore’s authoritarian government imposing strict lockdown conditions and focusing on migrant housing units where cases have clustered.
    Of the new cases, 81% are linked to previously identified clusters, according to the Ministry of Health.

    Of the 700+ cases mentioned above, 654 involve foreign worker dormitories, while 26 were work-permit holders who lived outside the dorms (meaning they likely contracted it at work or in another ‘sanctioned’ environment).

    As for local cases in the community, 48 cases were reported on Thursday, and there were no new imported cases.

    CNA reported that among the new cases was an 89-year-old resident of Pacific Healthcare Nursing Home at 21 Senja Road, a dangerous environment for the virus that presumably is in danger of igniting another cluster. The resident has been placed in isolation.

    *      *      *

    Update (1200ET): In keeping with the general theme of the day, Cuomo focused on how the state plans to ‘reopen’ its economy – particularly hard-hit NYC. First, he said that the economy is going to need to change, particularly in crowded public places like restaurants. Employer will need to develop new policies governing everyday activities like travel, interactions in the workplace, commuting etc.

    Whether or not that does come to pass, Cuomo reiterated that the state is planning to follow four key principles which he first shared yesterday.

    Adding that businesses will gradually reopen based on priority.

    He also announced an extension of the state’s shutdown by 2 weeks until mid-May.

    And here are today’s charts illustrating how the number of hospitalized patients in the state is starting to decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *      *      *

    Update (1140ET): New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo started his daily briefing Thursday like he always does, by confirming the new deaths over the last 24 hours. That number was 606 for Wednesday. That brings the statewide death toll to 12,192, up 5.2% from yesterday, which is better than yesterday’s 7.7% jump from the day before.

    The governor added that hospitalizations have continued to fall, as well as intubation and ICU admissions. New cases were roughly ~2k yesterday, roughly even with the rate over the past week or so.

    “The good news is, it means we can control the virus, we can control the spread, and we did not know for sure that we could do that. We speculated that we could do it but we didn’t know for sure. Now we know we can control this disease,” Cuomo said.

    Watch the press briefing live below:

    *      *      *

    Update (1050ET): More alarming data out of Sweden, one of only a handful of European countries that didn’t go all-in on border closures and stay-at-home orders, surfaced this morning: the country reported 613 new cases of coronavirus and 130 new deaths, bringing its totals to 12,540 cases and 1,333 deaths.

    *      *      *

    Update (1000ET): Beating the White House by at least a few hours, North Dakota Gov. Doug Burgum has released new ‘guidelines’ to reopening his state’s economy on May 1.

    • NORTH DAKOTA GOVERNOR ISSUES GUIDELINES TO REOPEN STATE MAY 1 – STATEMENT – RTRS

    Yesterday, the governor moved to extend restrictions on non-essential businesses until the end of April. Now, North Dakota, though his state is one of five sparsely populated states that haven’t issued stay-at-home orders.

    The state has reported only 9 deaths, and 365 cases, as of Thursday morning. Some of Burgum’s critics have slammed him (and his South Dakota colleague, Gov. Kristi Noem) for not taking the outbreak seriously enough by resisting full lockdowns adopted by other states. The mainstream press has been carrying out a veritable crusade against Noem over a small outbreak in Sioux Falls, her state’s largest city, that is, according to all available evidence, completely under controlthe meat-processing plant at the center of the outbreak has been closed indefinitely.

    The Washington Post claims it’s currently “the biggest hotspot in the country”.

    While that might be technically true based on some obscure metric, there are probably apartment blocks in Manhattan with just as many cases.

    Will this inspire more states with fewer cases to follow suit?

    While the governors critics (many of whom don’t live in the state) slam the decision, it’s worth noting that ND has been examining various ‘contact tracing’ strategies including repurposing an app called the Bison Tracker, created to help fans of the North Dakota State University Bison football team follow its 1,000-mile roadtrip to a championship game in Texas, Bloomberg reports. The governor first mentione the plan during a press conference last night.

    *      *      *

    Update (0950ET): Adding to the figures from England released about an hour ago, the UK Department of Health and Social Care reported 861 deaths and 4,618 new cases, bringing its total to 103,093 cases and 13,729 deaths.

    Deaths were moderately higher compared with the ~760 reported yesterday, while the number of new cases was slightly higher, but not by much.

    Though Thursday’s report is notable because it marks the crossing of the 100k threshold, joining a select group of elite nations that have confirmed more than 100k cases. UK is technically only the 6th nation to cross this threshold, though many suspect that China’s true total was probably north of 100k (likely even north of 1mil).

    Britain’s latest release brought the global case total above 2.1 million.

    *      *      *

    Update (0850ET): Singapore has reported another record daily increase of coronavirus cases with 447 new cases. Most of these cases, more than 90%, involve migrant workers who live in cramped housing, which the Singapore government has moved to isolate to prevent what is officially the city-state’s second wave from spreading.

    During an appearance on CNBC Thursday morning, Expedia/AIC Chairman Barry Diller offered some chilling words for what’s left of the American media: Diller said he expects Expedia to reduce advertising spending by 80% this year, from $5 billion to $1 billion.

    And they won’t die alone: More sites from Buzzfeed will face even more pressure: This is certainly bad news for all those ‘freelance writer’ blue-checkmarks.

    *      *      *

    Update (0750ET): The Swiss government has just released measures intended to stave off corporate bankruptcies while helping workers to pay their bills until the economy can be brought back on line. The measures will take effect later this month. The Swiss government has already lent billions of dollars’ in Swiss francs to SMEs operating in the country at an interest-free rate.

    *      *      *

    Update (0730ET): As expected, Japanese PM Shinzo Abe on Thursday expanded his ‘toothless’ state of emergency order to cover the entire country, after initially targeting just seven prefectures (including Tokyo) after the entire northern island of Hokkaido declared its own state of emergency on Sunday following a sharp resurgence in new cases.

    Though the government can’t force businesses to close and people to stay inside, the government has asked some non-essential businesses to close and people to work from home).

    To ease the financial burden on Japanese households, Abe’s government is also planning a Trump-style cash handout of ¥100,000 ($930) for every citizen, regardless of income, according to the Nikkei Asian Review.

    The mayor of Tokyo confirmed 149 patients tested positive for the virus in her city on Thursday.

    The government had originally planned to give 300,000 to qualified households that had lost income, but it came under heavy criticism because the payments were seen as too complicated and too small. Distributing ¥100,000 to every citizen will cost the government more than 1.2 trillion yen, or $11 billion.

    Across the Sea of Japan, South Korean President Moon Jae-in’s left-leaning Democratic Party won a staggering victory during Wednesday’s legislative election, leaving his government in a strong position to push through its agenda of reforms. Despite the outbreak, the turnout in the election reached an all-time high, as South Koreans rushed to reward the government for its response to the outbreak. With 180 seats out of the 300-seat legislature, Moon’s government is in a strong position to push through reforms of the penal system, income distribution and relations with NK, though he doesn’t have enough votes to push through changes to the South Korean constitution.

    *      *      *

    What would have been tax day for US citizens has come and gone. And as we enter the back half of April – and millions of Americans join the ranks of the unemployed – and some are starting to get a little restless.

    The number of confirmed COVID-19 cases surpassed the 2 million mark, as we reported last night. According to the FT, 84,515 new cases were confirmed around the world on Wednesday, roughly even with the numbers from the last two weeks. However, a record 7,959 deaths were recorded yesterday, a worldwide record.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But perhaps the most important revelation from last night came shortly after the conclusion of last night’s White House press conference. A Fox News reporter asked the president a couple of surprising questions about the Wuhan Institute of Virology and whether the virus might have leaked out of the level 4 bio-lab. We were de-platformed by Twitter for asking the same question a few months back.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: FT

    As it turned out, those questions portended a much bigger revelation: Fox News reported last night, citing a handful of anonymous sources, that the novel coronavirus accidentally leaked out of the Wuhan biolab.

    Now, with yet another ‘conspiracy theory’ apparently well on its way to becoming a ‘conspiracy fact’, Beijing has chosen to issue its rebuttal via the editor in chief of the Global Times, one of the CPC’s most popular English-language mouthpieces.

    We imagine we’ll be hearing more from the CPC’s official spokesmen and women. But the fact that such a high-level mouthpiece was tapped for the initial denial is certainly telling.

    Moving on: Two days after Turkey passed a prisoner amnesty law, one of the most notorious Turkish Mafia bosses has been released from prison as part of a program to release 90k offenders, some of whom were violent criminals. Alaattin Cakici, who was convicted for murder and racketeering, is well known for having close ties to an ultra-nationalist party that is working in a coalition with President Erdogan’s AKP. Critics have criticized the amnesty program for leaving thousands of journalists and civil-society activists behind bars.

    Offering the latest indication that mainland China is likely headed for a second shutdown, this one driven by a combination of viral resurgence fears and a staggering drop in demand, BBG reports that Chinese manufacturers who resumed work as restrictions were being lifted are already being forced to halt production again due to rising costs, difficulties in funding and logistics, and, of course, the demand drop, said Xu Kemin, an official with the industry ministry.

    Germany reported a jump in new cases and deaths, with the number of newly diagnosed cases at its highest level in a week. Spain also reported a jump in new cases, confirming 5,183, the most in a week, bringing its countrywide total to 182,816. Health officials also reported 551 deaths, for a total of 19,130 since the outbreak began.

    UK Health Minister Hancock said early Thursday that it’s too early to make a change to lockdown measures in the UK as the virus would likely come roaring back since the outbreak appears to be “approaching” its peak, he said. The UK is expected to announce an extension to its current lockdown period today until May 7, according to reports. The government is reportedly planning to restart the economy by segmenting society into “risk groups”, allowing those in the lower-risk groups to venture back into society. Some scientists have speculated that some level of social distancing will need to remain in place until a vaccine is ready for mass production.

    In Brussels, European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen said that Europe should offer a “heartfelt apology” to Italy for failing to help when the country became the first EU nation to be hit by the coronavirus pandemic.

    “You cannot overcome a pandemic of this speed and this scale without the truth, the truth about everything: the numbers, the science, the outlook, but also about our own actions,” she said during a speech to the European Parliament.

    Of course, as we noted at the time, von der Leyen and the European Commission didn’t just fail to act; they encouraged EU member states to keep their borders open, while playing down the severity of the outbreak.

    Finally, Russia’s streak of disturbing records in new cases reported stretched to a fifth consecutive record jump on Thursday, while the country also recorded its highest jump in deaths. Health officials in Moscow said they had recorded 3,448 new cases across the country, a 14% jump that took Russia’s total to 27,938, while 34 more people died overnight, raising Russia’s death toll to 232. And

    Looking ahead, President Trump said during the White House’s Wednesday night press briefing that he would unveil the White House’s guidelines for reopening the economy this afternoon. The guidelines were purportedly developed following conversations with CEOs and leaders of American corporations (even as some have pointed out that corporations might not have the best interests of small business at heart). 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 20:05

  • Why Americans Don't Have Any Savings
    Why Americans Don’t Have Any Savings

    Authored by Frank Hollenbeck via The Mises Institute,

    In response to a likely worldwide recession, governments have turned on full blast the fiscal and monetary spigots. A $2 trillion spending plan has just been approved in the USA, central banks are on a buying spree, and the $1200 stimulus payment is just helicopter money.

    Since the government does not have a magical tree of plenty and can only redistribute from the left pocket to the right by taxing, borrowing, or printing money, how does this make any economic sense or make any country better off?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Government and Keynesian economists will tell you it’s to protect us from the coming dangers of hoarding; specifically, that banks will stop lending and just let funds sit. Keynes brought hoarding to the forefront of economics in his The General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money; a concept that the classical economist considered to be irrelevant.

    In a circular flow economy, the value of output must be equal to income. Income represents an ability to purchase goods and services and can be divided into three categories: it can be consumed, saved, or hoarded. Consumption is using income to obtain goods and services for current personal satisfaction. Savings is (correctly) defined as a transfer of purchasing power from one group to another.

    The saver is giving up his current access to goods and services to be able to consume more of them in the future. These transfers allow investors to use these claims to purchase plants and equipment to produce goods and services in the future. The last category is hoarding, which in the Keynesian view is the equivalent of stuffing money in your mattress for a rainy day. It is the only claim on income that is not used to purchase currently produced goods and services.

    This Keynesian nonsense about hoarding has been around for nearly a century and has led to some very bad economic decisions over the last eighty years. In reality, hoarding is just saving, and a simple example will show how the fear of hoarding is grossly overblown. Hoarding simply increases the value of dollars in circulation and is hardly anything to panic about.

    Suppose there are ten pencils and only $10. Supply and demand will ensure that the price of each pencil will be $1 each. If the price of each pencil was $2, you could only afford to buy half of the pencils, and the unsold pencils would drive the price down. If the price was only 50 cents, then people would still have $5 looking for pencils to buy, driving their price up.

    Now suppose that people hoard or stuff their mattresses with $2 and we only have $8 left to buy ten pencils. The price for each pencil will normally decline to eighty cents, putting us back in equilibrium. The Keynesian fear, though, is that prices are rather inflexible or adjust poorly, such that the price remains at $1 and we are left with two unsold pencils. There’s not enough demand at the old prices. Keynesians advocate government spending to replace this lost demand.

    Another Keynesian fear is that if input costs such as wages don’t adjust and the cost of each pencil is stuck at ninety cents when the price has fallen to eighty cents, then businesses will be selling at a loss, leading to reductions in output, bankruptcies, more hoarding, and a downward spiral in the economy. This is the Keynesian fear of deflation. Hence, for a Keynesian either output prices don’t adjust or if they do, input prices don’t adjust fast enough. Of course, this entire Keynesian nightmare scenario assumes that in a market economy both input and output prices adjust slowly or with a long lag. This scenario has not been shown to be true in the real world—unless, of course, governments interfere—and we then might as well assume a world with negative gravity and suggest a policy of large nets to catch people from flying into outer space. If we assume that the successful entrepreneurs are the ones who best forecast output prices and then bid for input prices, there is no real reason to believe that prices in a market economy won’t adjust quickly. There is no empirical evidence that prices are sticky when governments allow them to adjust. If you need a current example, just look at the recent steep dive in oil prices.

    Although governments continue their war on cash for fear of hoarding, their real concern today is not individuals stuffing their mattresses, but bank lending. When you put money in your checking account, you are expressing a desire to store purchasing power: otherwise, you would have put this cash in a savings account or purchased a bond. You assume that this money is always there, but banks take this money and lend it to other individuals and businesses in a practice known as fractional reserve banking. This process creates money out of thin air when a bank credits a borrower’s account without debiting the same amount from someone else’s account. It converts your desire to hoard—i.e., save—into spending by someone else with newly created money.

    The government fear is that a recession will increase bankruptcies, nonperforming loans, and induce banks to cut back on lending, or essentially allow the money in checking accounts to revert to its intended function as a store (or reserve) of purchasing power.

    The money supply will then contract, leading to the Keynesian nightmare scenarios described above. But this money contraction results not from hoarding, but from fractional reserve banking. It is this process which leads to swift contractions in the money supply when recessions strike. This problem would be mitigated by more real saving, including the type of saving that Keynesians call “hoarding.” 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 20:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 16th April 2020

  • EU Prohibits Bailed Out Companies From Paying Bonuses, Dividends
    EU Prohibits Bailed Out Companies From Paying Bonuses, Dividends

    Back on April 1, we predicted that with European banks suspending dividends across the board, “if shareholders are impacted, why not also the biggest source of bank cash: banker bonuses.” Today, we got partial confirmation of this when the FT reported that companies given equity injections by EU member states as a result of the coronavirus will not be allowed to pay out dividends, buy back shares or provide bonuses or similar remuneration.

    The terms and conditions of corporate bailouts emerged after the FT reported last week that the European Commission was exploring a further relaxation of the bloc’s rules on state aid to help ailing companies as a result of the pandemic.

    Similar to the US, although in even stricter terms, bailed-out European businesses are also forbidden to take “excessive risks” or even engage in “aggressive commercial expansion”, said a document setting out amendments to the recent relaxation of state aid rules. They will not be able to buy up rivals or other operators in the same sector while still repaying the state.

    The constraints are aimed at preventing “undue distortions of competition” and mirror similar restraints imposed on the banking sector at the height of the global financial crisis more than a decade ago.

    Additionally, European businesses that receive an equity injection of more than 20% from a member state will also be obliged to set up a clear exit strategy from that support in the aftermath of the pandemic, although it does not appear that European taxpayers will be granted a stake and instead the only limitation will be on what management should not do, which in light of the current recession where everyone is scrambling to conserve cash, is likely redundant.

    The EU is also setting out clear timelines to give companies an incentive to pay back the aid. If by 31 December 2024 the state’s shareholding has not been reduced to below 15 per cent, companies will be obliged to present a restructuring plan to the commission for approval.

    “This is more flexible/lenient than the financial crisis principles where the requirement was generally to submit a restructuring plan within 6 months of the recapitalisation,” the document states.

    Contrary to the terms established during the financial crisis, Brussels is also encouraging incentives for companies to exit the schemes as soon as possible. It calls for member states to be paid back as close as possible to “market terms” in order to avoid “potential competition distortion caused by the state intervention”.

    “The member state shall put a mechanism in place to incentivise redemption before 1 January 2023,” the document adds.

    The commission is also proposing that EU countries consider the potential sale of business units for those companies in receipt of large amounts of aid and with considerable market share in a certain sector.

    “The commission is expected to ask member states to attach conditions to recapitalisations in order to preserve competition,” explains Natura Gracia, a partner in law firm Linklaters in London. “It shows that the EU has learnt from past crises.”

    The constraints on bailed-out companies emerged as regulators rushed to implement a so-called temporary framework that has seen state aid rules relaxed to help companies through the pandemic. This week, competition commissioner Margrethe Vestager encouraged European countries to build stakes in companies that might be vulnerable to unfair takeover by state-backed foreign entities.

    It wasn’t immediately clear if this means that banks, all of which are implicitly receiving a bailout courtesy of the ECB’s various QE programs, will see an indefinite pause in bonus payouts or if the banks are exempt and the only targets of this regulation are ordinary corporations and the continent’s small and medium businesses.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 02:45

  • German Lawyer Who Criticized Lockdown Arrested, Taken To Psych Ward
    German Lawyer Who Criticized Lockdown Arrested, Taken To Psych Ward

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    A German medical lawyer who criticized the coronavirus lockdown law was arrested and taken to a psychiatric ward, where she says she was violently abused by authorities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beate Bahner published a press release on April 3rd decrying the German lockdown laws as “flagrantly unconstitutional, infringing to an unprecedented extent many of the fundamental rights of citizens.”

    “These measures are not justified by the Infection Prevention Act, hurriedly amended just a few days ago,” she asserted.

    “Long-term restrictions on leaving home and meeting others, based on high-death-rate modelled scenarios, which fail to take account of actual critical expert opinions, and the complete shutdown of businesses and shops with no proof that they pose any risk of infection, are thoroughly unlawful.”

    Bahner called for a nationwide protest on Easter Sunday to “end the tyranny at once,” before Heidelberg Police announced that they would seek to prosecute her for inciting Germans to break the law.

    On April 13th, Bahner called her sister from Heidelberg’s Klinik fur Allgemeine Psychiatrie describing what happened to her.

    After claiming she was “suspiciously” followed by a car, Bahner says she asked another motorist to call the police only for the police to show up, handcuff her and push her to the ground “with massive force.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    After being driven to the psychiatric facility, Bahner says she was treated like a terrorist.

    “I asked to be allowed to sit down and was shown to a bench. Then I asked to have the handcuffs taken off, since it was actually I who had requested police protection,” she recounted.

    “But instead, I was thrown to the floor again, having my head hurled onto the stone floor from a meter height, which nobody reacted to.Then I was forced to spend the night lying on the floor in some high-security Guantanamo psychiatric clinic…there was no toilet, no sink, though they did allow me water, and there was a bell I could ring, though they ignored it after the third time I pressed it.”

    The lawyer was charged for incitement yesterday, with her attorney sounding the alarm bell over her treatment.

    “I shouldn’t have to add Bahner’s claims of very grave abuse have untoward connotations of the darkest chapters of German history,” he said.

    “The mere fact she claimed to have been so badly abused was what prompted me to write to you. Bahner is in the company of over 50 well-known experts in criticising the nationwide lockdown; I would be glad to furnish you with a list of their names. If it really is the case lawyers critical of government measures can now be intimidated using the state legal apparatus or psychiatry, and can be professionally and socially destroyed, then it is five minutes to midnight in this country.”

    Bahner has won three cases in the Federal Constitutional Court and written five books on German medical law.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 02:00

  • China Launches Survey To Learn More About Asymptomatic Cases, Immunity
    China Launches Survey To Learn More About Asymptomatic Cases, Immunity

    Approximately 11,000 people across ten provinces and cities in China, including Wuhan, will be randomly selected to give blood samples and throat swabs so that researchers can learn more about asymptomatic coronavirus cases, as well as immunity in people with coronavirus infections, according to the Hubei Daily.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The epidemiological survey will include 100 neighborhoods in 13 districts, and will include people who were in Wuhan for at least 14 days between January and March.

    On Wednesday, China published data revealing that most coronavirus patients remain symptom-free throughout the infection.

    Among 6,764 people who tested positive for infection without showing symptoms, only one fifth of them — 1,297 — have so far developed symptoms and been re-classified as confirmed cases, China’s National Health Commission spokesman Mi Feng said at a briefing in Beijing Wednesday. –Bloomberg

    If true, approximately 80% who contract the hyper-virulent coronavirus become silent spreaders, while the 20% who draw the short straw experience a spectrum of symptoms which can last for more than a month – ranging from mild (80% of confirmed cases), to moderate, to critical – up to and including death.

    Meanwhile, China is likely facing a second wave of coronavirus cases in November according to Caixin, citing one of the country’s highest-profile medical experts.

    As we noted on Tuesday, while countries may be able to bring the deadly pandemic under adequate control by autumn, Zhang Wenhong, who heads Shanghai’s Covid-19 clinical expert team and directs the infectious disease department at one of the city’s top hospitals, said during an online livestream broadcast that this coming winter may include a “second wave” of infections in China and elsewhere.

    Zhang’s comments come as Chinese officials gradually ease quarantine restrictions as part of efforts to revive the country’s economy. The East Asian nation, where the previously unknown virus was first detected last year, has seen numbers of daily new cases fall in recent weeks after recording thousands of Covid-19-related deaths and rolling out unprecedented lockdowns.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 01:00

  • They Don't Want You To Know The Truth Or Be Exposed To Differing Opinions
    They Don’t Want You To Know The Truth Or Be Exposed To Differing Opinions

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    ZeroHedge and others are targets of big tech! 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not only has our favorite site for financial news been banned from Twitter, but I recently noticed that when I went to click on its articles shared by others, I end up getting a special disclaimer that gives the vibe that it’s a virus site and is about to crash my computer!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SHTFPlan.com, which is run by a 100% U.S.-born journalist, was identified as a Russian bot in 2016 by the Washington Post!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After this, our income collapsed by 95%! Other alternative media companies, especially anyone who gave President Trump a fair or favorable review, were viciously attacked as being Russian or were simply attacked by Google by reducing their revenue potential.

    If that wasn’t enough, Google began to blacklist sites to destroy our search results and bury us!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is a war, and to be honest, it’s one that we deserve to lose. I’m as guilty as anyone for using Google for search results, Twitter as a news aggregator in the morning, and I still go to CNBC to get stock quotes.

    That ends now. I should have ended it years ago, but with the coronavirus, I now see the mainstream press and its elitist master are going for the final death blow to our liberty – a decapitation strike that has been very successful so far.

    They’ve managed to get Americans to stay home, even from church on Easter Sunday. I’m not religious at all, but I was depressed last Sunday when realizing that the government had an enormously successful lockdown of Americans and there wasn’t even a single protest I could find to cover.

    Where is the tea party? The Occupy Wall Street crowd? Bernie and Trump supporters? Ron Paul people?

    F*CK! And then I look in the mirror and realize I didn’t protest, either.

    NO MORE! ENOUGH!

    If you’re interested in opening up your business, going for a walk on the beach, taking a hike, or visiting a park with your kids, print this out. It’s a permission slip that allows you to live your life and pursue your dreams.

    Download it now and give it to any of these people who are following orders – let them be on the wrong side of history.

    *  *  *

    GOOGLE is doing whatever it can to demonetize SHTFplan.com and shadow-ban us. During these TOUGH financial times, we ASPIRE to stay completely independent and pay our full staff so we can continue to deliver VALUE to you. It is possible for you to HELP us by supporting our COVID-19 expert survival report HERE! Thank You, SHTFPlan.com Staff


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/16/2020 – 00:10

  • US Space Command Blasts Russia's 'Hostile' Anti-Satellite Weapon Test
    US Space Command Blasts Russia’s ‘Hostile’ Anti-Satellite Weapon Test

    It appears Trump’s newly establish Space Command has something to keep it busy with as Russia on Wednesday flexed its muscle in space in a new test of what’s being described as a ground-based, direct-ascent anti-satellite weapon (or ASAT weapon).

    Space Command issued a condemnation later in the day Wednesday against the potential “threat” and “act of aggression,” with SPACECOM chief Jay Raymond saying, “Russia’s DA-ASAT test provides yet another example that the threats to U.S. and allied space systems are real, serious, and growing,” according to an official statement.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Satellite in Earth orbit file image.

    “The United States is ready and committed to deterring aggression and defending the nation, our allies, and U.S. interests from hostile acts in space,” the statement said.

    SPACECOM didn’t specify where the ASAT weapon was aimed during the test, believed to have been a Nudol ballistic missile, and crucially indicated it wasn’t tracking any debris.

    Such tests are deeply controversial given they involve live targeting of an object in space, though it’s believed the Kremlin has actually yet to be successful even after nine reported Nudol space missile tests going back to 2014.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image of 2016 launch of Russian Soyuz 2.1a rocket carrying Lomonosov, Aist-2D and SamSat-218 satellites. AP image.

    As The Verge describes:  

    ASAT tests are also widely condemned by many in the space community, as these demonstrations typically create hundreds to thousands of pieces of debris that can last for months, and even years, in orbit. Because these tests are high speed and high impact, the resulting debris can spread far and wide. Those pieces then pose a threat to other functioning spacecraft. A fast-moving piece of junk can render an operational satellite inoperable if they hit head on.

    Though upon last year’s establishment of the US Space Force, Moscow itself said it dangerously upped the ante to ‘weaponize space’ – it’s Washington now calling out ‘Russia’s hypocrisy’.

    “This test is further proof of Russia’s hypocritical advocacy of outer space arms control proposals designed to restrict the capabilities of the United States while clearly having no intention of halting their counterspace weapons programs,” Gen. Raymond said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Air Force Gen. John “Jay” Raymond stands with President Donald Trump during a ceremony to establish the US Space Command last August, via AP.

    Last year while Trump’s initiative for a military branch which would deal exclusively with threats to US national security in space and related interests was being debated, one key objection raised was that it could spark a new race for the weaponization of space.

    However, hawks argued that it would be inevitable and that if the administration and Pentagon didn’t act, Russia or China may do it first, leaving the US incredibly vulnerable in this new domain. It appears the process is already well underway. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 23:50

  • WHO & Its Never-Ending List Of Errors
    WHO & Its Never-Ending List Of Errors

    Via Great Game India,

    The World Health Organization (WHO) is a primary agency of the United Nations responsible for international public health. However, in recent times, the WHO has been criticized for either acting too late or too little during a health crisis. There have been instances where WHO was caught grossly unprepared with its course of action. Other times, the scientists and researchers at WHO have made laughable errors while preparing reports.

    This begs the question:

    Why WHO makes so many mistakes?

    Is it deliberate?

    Or is there some other reason behind WHO’s never ending list of errors?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Starting with the recent coronavirus outbreak, here are some of the incidents where the World Health Organization committed inaccuracies, mistakes and blunders:

    WHO blunders in Coronavirus Risk Assessment

    The Geneva-based UN agency had – in its earlier reports – said the likelihood of the coronavirus outbreak turning into a global risk was ‘moderate’. However, later WHO acknowledged that they made an error in their previous reports assessing the risk.

    In its report a few days later, WHO said the risk was “very high in China, high at the regional level and high at the global level.” They also admitted that the earlier reports had incorrectly mentioned that the global risk was moderate.

    When asked about the mistakes, Antoine Flahault, co-director of the Swiss School of Public Health, told AFP that “It’s a mistake. It’s definitely a sizeable one… but I really think it’s a mistake that has now been corrected.”

    WHO Chief Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus took to Twitter and apologized for the erroneous report:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    WHO chief was already under severe criticism for its delay in declaring the coronavirus outbreak as an emergency. Some reporters even hinted that the decision was politicized. The fact that the WHO failed to provide the correct risk assessment has only made matters worse for the WHO chief.

    Taiwan demands apology from WHO Chief

    Taiwan demanded an apology from the WHO chief following his controversial allegations against the country where he accused the island nation and its people of racial abuse.

    In a press conference, WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus made serious allegations against Taiwan. The WHO chief said that he has been a target of racial insults for the past three months, which he alleged originated from the island of Taiwan.

    WHO has been criticized for its handling of the corona pandemic including its treatment of Taiwan. The UN agency – due to the pressure from China – does not recognize the sovereignty of Taiwan. The island nation is still considered a territory of mainland China. The exclusion means Taiwan is kept out of the loop and is unable to share and receive crucial data related to the coronavirus pandemic.

    When RTHK journalist – in a video call – questioned WHO advisor Bruce Aylward about Taiwan, the top WHO doctor was lost for words, and abruptly ended the call.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    WHO admits making False Report on India

    A situation report released by the WHO wrongfully placed India at a stage of community transmission. Only when asked to clarify, the WHO was forced to admit its blunder to an Indian News channel saying that India has a cluster of cases and not community transmission.

    A community transmission happens when the cases of infection rise exponentially with multiple, untraceable sources. The Indian government firmly denied that the country has reached stage three or community transmission.

    The joint secretary of Health Ministry, Lav Aggarwal, said that “If it happens, we will be the first to tell you. We will tell people to be especially alert… There is no community transmission.”

    Oxford-based publication stops using WHO’s Coronavirus data, citing errors

    Our World in Data – an online publication based at the University of Oxford – has stopped using Word Health Organization data related to coronavirus for its research. The publication announced that they no longer base their models on the WHO data citing errors and other issues.

    Instead, the researchers are using data provided by the European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. The errors and inaccuracies, which Our World in Data documented in a separate report, showed various discrepancies in the situation reports released by WHO between February 5 to March 16.

    The lack of reliable data available during the coronavirus outbreak has been a major source of frustration for economists, statisticians, researchers, and public policy makers.

    Finland says WHO’s Coronavirus Protocol doesn’t Work

    In a startling disclosure, a senior Finnish health official has dismissed a World Health Organization advisory saying WHO doesn’t understand pandemics and that their Coronavirus testing protocol is illogical and doesn’t work.

    A senior Finnish health official dismissed a World Health Organization (WHO) advisory to test as many people as possible for coronavirus, arguing that such a measure would be completely illogical when combating a pandemic. Finland’s head of health security, Mika Salminen, took aim at the notion that stopping the spread of Covid-19 requires testing on a mass-scale.

    We don’t understand the WHO’s instructions for testing. We can’t fully remove the disease from the world anymore,” she said, adding: “If someone claims that, they don’t understand pandemics.”

    WHO apologizes to UK’s Port Talbot

    In 2018, the World Health Organization issued an apology for wrongfully stating that Port Talbot is the most polluted town in the United Kingdom. The global health agency said that they made an “oversight” in the data which suggested that air pollution in Port Talbot is worse than the UK’s largest cities.

    The WHO database showed that the south Wales town had a fine pollution level of 18 micrograms of M2.5 pollution particles per cubic metre of air. In comparison, London had 14 micrograms while Manchester had 13 – all above the national guidelines of 10 micrograms.

    The then WHO director Dr. Maria Neria later described the figures as “erroneous” and said that the air pollution level for Port Talbot was instead measured at 9.68 micrograms and not 18 as earlier suggested.

    She said: “The PM2.5 level for the year 2015 for Port Talbot should be 9.6853 (and is rounded to 10 in the updated excel sheet) and is noted as ‘measured’. The PM2.5 was erroneously featured as a converted (estimated) value of 18. The World Health Organisation has taken immediate steps to rectify this on its WHO web site, and in the database. We regret that this error happened.”

    WHO excludes tuberculosis from Global Priority List

    In 2017, the WHO compiled the first-ever global priority list for antibiotic-resistant bacteria. It included 12 families of bacteria that WHO considers ‘greatest threat to human health’ and for which there is an urgent need for new antibiotics.

    Surprisingly, the list did not include the bacteria that causes tuberculosis – even though TB causes more deaths than any other infectious disease. According to WHO estimates, approximately 10 million people contracted this airborne disease in 2015 alone. What’s more, tuberculosis has developed a great resistance to the available antibodies. The decision to not include Mycobacterium tuberculosis bacteria on the list had confused many experts.

    In its defense, WHO said that “it is already a globally established priority for which innovative new treatments are urgently needed.” The response from WHO was face-saving at best. If it is already a globally established priority, then why not include it on the list?

    When WHO faked a Pandemic

    An exclusive report by GreatGameIndia revealed how in 2009 WHO prematurely declared ‘swine flu’ a pandemic which resulted in a surge of vaccine orders. The rich and affluent nations were quick to purchase the vaccines for their people. Ironically, most deaths occurred not in Europe but in Africa and Southeast Asia.

    In his controversial book renowned author Stuart Blume discloses that many of the most influential advisers, at both World Health Organisation (WHO) and national levels, are paid consultants to the vaccine industry raising a very serious question – that the WHO might be working for the vaccine industry’s interests and not the people – the reason why 10 years ago WHO faked a pandemic.

    Should WHO be Dismantled?

    The consistent pattern of blunders being committed by WHO raises serious questions on its efficiency in dealing with the lives of people. The amount of errors on a regular basis suggest WHO’s gambling-approach to world health-crisis. Past experiences shedding light on WHO being used as tool of the vaccine lobby have led many experts to call for dismantling of the WHO.

    Can the World Health Organization (WHO) still be reformed or must it be reborn? Can it address concretely and effectively the challenges it is facing? Should WHO be dismantled? These are important questions, not only for the next director-general but perhaps even more for the member states who are the real “owners” of WHO.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 23:30

  • Moscow's Communists Warn "There Will Be Mass Starvation" And Protests As Coronavirus Slams Russian Economy
    Moscow’s Communists Warn “There Will Be Mass Starvation” And Protests As Coronavirus Slams Russian Economy

    As Russian lawmakers and the government led by Vladimir Putin, who has taken a step back and is allowing his prime minister and other government officials to lead the response, plot to offer assistance to small businesses in and around Moscow, and elsewhere, members of the opposition warned Moscow’s mayor that “mass starvation” might ensue if the government fails to rescue small businesses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the Moscow Times, the leader of the Russian Communist Party in Moscow’s Duma warned that unemployment could more than triple resulting in as many as 8 million adult Russians out of work. If that happens, and Muscovites aren’t provided with enough money or food, people will starve, as President Putin’s “Non-Working Month” wreaks havoc on the Russian economy.

    The letter was provided to one of Moscow’s largest business publications, which published it first.

    “Failure to take [support] measures in the coming months may lead to mass starvation…In the event of spontaneous unsanctioned protests attended by several thousand residents, all responsibility will fall on Moscow’s executive authority,” said party leader Nikolai Zubrilin.

    Among other steps, the opposition reportedly suggested that the city dole out 20,000 rubles ($250) to all Muscovites to help pay all of their utility bills and groceries for the year out of the city budget and suspend loan payments until Dec. 31. To finance these expenses, the Communists want to reduce spending on Moscow’s sprawling renovation program, metro construction and other “non-essential” city construction projects.

    The Communist Party’s letter comes after another opposition party, Yabloko, proposed to reroute 300 billion rubles ($3.8 billion) of the city’s infrastructure and entertainment budget toward aid for small businesses and workers.

    About one-third of Russian companies have forced workers to take leave without pay since the beginning of  Putin’s “non-working” period, which began late last month.

    Russia reported a record batch of new cases for the fourth day in a row on Wednesday, with 3,388 new cases, bringing the total to 24,490 cases in total. Confirmations continue to accelerate despite the fact that the country has been on lockdown for two weeks. Putin was one of the first world leaders to resort to travel bans, but like Trump, his government did little to prepare for the coming onslaught in late February and early March.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 23:10

  • Man Waiting For $1,700 Stimulus Check Finds $8.2 Million In Bank Account Instead
    Man Waiting For $1,700 Stimulus Check Finds $8.2 Million In Bank Account Instead

    With some 80 million people expecting stimulus money to hit their bank accounts starting Wednesday in the biggest and unprecedented instance of the government passing helicopter money directly to Americans’ pockets in history, there are bound to be mistakes and errors.

    A volunteer firefighter in New Chicago, Indiana was awaiting a $1700 stimulus payment but upon withdrawing a mere $200 from his dwindling available balance at an ATM last Friday was shocked to find his remaining balance $8.2 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Firefighter Charles Calvin held on to the ATM receipt showing he unexpectedly had over $8 million in his account.

    Apparently, the US Treasury — or possibly the bank itself, it’s unclear which — made a huge mistake in making Charles Calvin an overnight millionaire. 

    The story originated in WGN9 Chicago and quickly went viral: 

    “I went to the ATM at the Family Express and once I withdrew $200 out of my account I looked at the available balance still left in my account,” he said.

    He said his account had $8.2 million in it. He was only supposed to receive $1,700.

    Not believing what he was seeing, he ran his card again but it said the same thing.

    The millions may have stayed in his account over the weekend before it appears someone on the other end realized the massive error. Calvin says he notified his bank upon opening in order to investigate the funds’ origins. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Charles Calvin’s ATM receipt The Times of Northwest Indiana.

    In disbelief he had gotten both a friend and store clerk to verify that what he was looking at was real.

    He went to the clerk at the gas station where the ATM was to ask if there was something wrong with the machine, but no issues had been reported, he recalled. 

    “I showed her the receipt and she looks at the receipt, she looks at me, looks back at the receipt,” he told NBC Chicago in a separate interview. “She said, ‘You have this much money in your account?’ I said, ‘No, I am poor. I’m over here trying to get money out so I can pay my rent’.” — CNBC

    By Monday the bank said they didn’t see that balance in his account anymore, but did verify his stimulus money was sent. CNBC later reported the bank thinks it was actually an ATM error. 

    “It kind of sucks,” Calvin told WGN9“You go from being a millionaire one second then back to being broke again. But hey, once you’re poor you don’t have anywhere else to go but up.”

    It’s still unclear exactly what happened, but its entirely possible that with Washington passing around trillions – it could very well happen again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Calvin still isn’t sure if this was an error on behalf of the federal government, his bank or the particular ATM he used, but he said he’s just glad he did end up with the amount he was entitled to,” WGN9 wrote.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 22:50

  • Here Come Another 6 Million Jobless Claims
    Here Come Another 6 Million Jobless Claims

    After three consecutive weeks of record breaking initial jobless claims, which cumulatively add up to nearly 17 million lost jobs…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … brace for more of the same, even if with a modest improvement because after last week’s 6.6MM print (which in turn was a small decline from the 6.9MM the previous week), the median consensus forecast expects a 5.5MM report tomorrow at 830am, with some notable outliers such as Deutsche Bank which has gone all the way predicting a record 8MM initial jobless claims with JPM Securities and BofA not far behind, at 6.6MM and 6.0MM, respectively (bizarrely JPMorgan Asset Management is on the other end of the spectrum expecting just 2MM claims to be filed in the current week – how one can bank can have two polar opposite forecasts at the same time is precisely why Jamie Dimon is richer than you).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ignoring JPMorgan, we focus on Bank of America’s forecast, which once again runs through local news sources to get an early feel for how jobless claims are likely to evolve in the next report covering the week ending April 11, released tomorrow.

    This week BofA was able to estimate implied figures for 18 states, versus 16 in last week’s analysis. That said, these 18 states were generally smaller, which adds to forecast uncertainty. For these 18 states, BofA calculated a total of 1.6MM NSA, which would be a 5.6% decline from the prior week’s level of 1.7MM.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Applying a similar % decline to total NSA claims in the US and applying this week’s seasonal factor, seasonally adjusted claims would end up in the range of 6.1-6.2MM. The latest Google Trends data also suggest that interest in filing claims waned somewhat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The takeaway is that jobless claims are likely to see some moderation but remain near record levels. As such, the bank revised downs our latest forecast to 6.0mn from a preliminary forecast of 6.5mn.

    What does this mean for unemployment?

    As mentioned above, over the past three reports there has already been nearly 17MM initial jobless claims, and if the latest forecast is correct then that will rise above 23MM. Does this mean unemployment will increase by 23MM? It’s important to note that anyone can file an initial jobless claim even if they are not eligible, which can lead to an inflated number. As such, continuing claims-people who are actually receiving unemployment benefits-has historically tracked much closer with changes in the unemployed. The former generally undershot the latter during the last two recessions, but could track more closely this time around given the expanded eligibility of self-employed and gig workers, who are normally captured by the household survey, for unemployment benefits.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what do the claims data suggest for the April BLS jobs report? We need to monitor claims activity between the March survey period of the week ending March 14 and the April survey period of the week ending April 18. The focus is on continuing claims, which lags initial jobless claims by one week. So far, we only know what has happened in the first two weeks (the second half of March)-continuing claims rose to 7.5mn from 1.8mn two weeks prior, reflecting an increase of 5.7mn. Considering 9.9mn initial jobless claims over that period, that would suggest a high 58% approval rate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So if we assume a 60% approval rate and initial jobless claims averaging around 6mn over the next three weeks, that would imply an additional increase of 10.8MM in continuing claims, or 16.5MM in total over the five week survey period.

    This means that if there was a one-for-one change in the level of unemployed, the unemployment rate would reach 14.5% in April from 4.4% in March, all else equal. In other words, get ready for a new record… while stocks most likely soar on their way back to all time highs.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 22:42

  • Pennsylvania Senate Votes To Override Democrat Governor's Stay-At-Home Order
    Pennsylvania Senate Votes To Override Democrat Governor’s Stay-At-Home Order

    The Pennsylvania senate has passed a measure which would partially reopen the state by lifting the lockdown on most of the state’s businesses imposed by Gov. Tom Wolf (D), according to The Hill.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Passed by the Senate 29-21 on Wednesday, SB 613 would require Wolf’s office to align state policy with federal guidelines in determining which businesses will be allowed to reopen during the COVID-19 pandemic. Businesses which can safely operate with mitigation strategies in line with the CDC and Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency’s guidelines would be allowed to operate, according to language in the bill approved by the Republican senate.

    The measure was sent to Wolf’s desk for his signature or veto. He has given no indication what he will do – however earlier this week he joined a coalition of northeastern governors from Delaware, New York, Rhode Island and Connecticut, who are developing a plan to determine when it would be appropriate to reopen, and how it would be done. 

    Needless to say, PA Democrats aren’t pleased with SB 613.

    “The Pennsylvania GOP has a storied history of passing irresponsible legislation, but even I’m surprised they’ve stooped so low,” said Democratic Legislative Campaign Committee President Jessica Post in a statement. “Republicans have sent the message loud and clear: they don’t care about Pennsylvania families or the lives that will be lost should this legislation become law. The GOP’s focus should be on saving lives, not saving the stock market.”

    Republican state Rep. Mike Jones told WGAL that the process which businesses could follow to apply for waivers was unclear.

    “I think the waiver process has been extremely inefficient. We’re concerned it’s been very unfair. The problem is it’s also not been made public,” said Jones, adding “Those are the big three that virtually every other state in the nation, including many of the surrounding states, continue to operate, and it’s coming at the expense of our state.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 22:30

  • Houston: The Banks Have A Huge Problem
    Houston: The Banks Have A Huge Problem

    For many years after the financial crisis, US commercial banks were mocked when instead of generating earnings the old-fashioned way, by collecting the interest arb on loans they had made, or even by frontrunning the Fed with their prop (and flow) trading desks, they would “earn” their way to just above consensus estimates by releasing some of their accumulated loan loss reserves, which thanks to creative accounting, would end up boosting the bottom line. The thinking here went that having suffered massive losses during the financial crisis “kitchen sink” when all banks suffered crushing losses to they would get bailed out, banks would then “recoup” billions in losses over time that would be run through the income statement as a reversal of accrued loss provisions.

    Well, after the longest expansion in history, it’s time for this process to go into reverse, and instead of releasing loan loss reserves the banks are now starting to build them up again in preparation for a wave of consumer defaults due to the US economic shutdown.

    As we reported earlier, this big story from earnings season so far – now that all major US money center banks have reported earnings – has been how much in loan loss provisions and reserves have the big US banks taken as precaution for the economic upheaval due to the coronacrisis. As shown below, on average most banks – this time including the hedge fund known as Goldman Sachs which has since pivoted to becoming a subprime lender to the masses with “Marcus” – saw their loan loss provisions surge by roughly 4x from year ago levels, with JPMorgan’s jumping the most, or just over 5x, hinting the other banks are likely underprovisioned for the storm that is coming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alas, these provisions amounts are nowhere near enough if history is any indication.

    What if instead of using JPMorgan as a benchmark, one takes the financial crisis as a reference: after all, we already know that both GDP and unemployment will be far, far worse in Q2 compared to even the worst levels of the financial crisis, something today’s Empire Fed number vividly demonstrated…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and even though the duration of the coming recession remains unclear and is a function of how quickly the coronavirus vaccine is developed, it is more than likely that total loan losses will match, if not surpass what happened in 2008, especially since this time the crisis is global and not just US based.

    So as banks are set to be hit with tens of billions in charge offs – for which they are trying their best to reserve even if they have no idea just how bad the hit will be – we decided to look at what the banks did in the aftermath of the financial crisis. What we found is that most banks reserved total losses anywhere between 4 and 6% of total loans. This time around? So far it is less than 2%, as shown in the chart below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This means that there is a reason why banks did not want to discuss what their future provisions would and could be – because they know very well that if the financial crisis is a template, there is a long way to go before banks are properly provisioned. As an aside, BofA CFO Donofrio was almost angry on a few occasions when responding to questions how much more reserves in Q2 the bank would need, saying the bank reserves based on what we know at the moment, and that if he knew how much higher reserves would be he’d “add them now.”

    Well, if he won’t add them now, he will add them in Q2, when loan loss provisions will explode, and we expect bank loss expectations will soar by double digits across most banks as the ghost of 2009 loan losses fully materializes.

    So to put it all in context, so far the Big 4 banks have reserved an additional $24BN in Q1 for future loses. But if the GFC is any indication of the defaults that are about to be unleashed, the real amount of losses, discharges and delinquencies will increase 3x-4x compared to the current baseline, meaning that over the next several quarters, banks will have to take another $75-$100BN in reserves on loans that go bad, wiping out years of profits, which were used not for a rainy day fund but to pay for – drumroll – buybacks.

    This, to put it mildly, is a major problem for banks which until now were seen as generously overcapitalized, because if the US banking sector is facing $100BN (or more) in loan losses, then the Fed will have no choice but to once again step in and bail out the US financial sector.

    How will we know if banks are indeed facing an Everest of loan losses instead of a mole hill? Keep an eye on those charge-off updates. While they have yet to pick up, once they do it will be an avalanche of consumers refusing or unable to pay down their loans, sticking banks with the loss. The only question then is whether the banks will stick taxpayers with what is shaping up as yet another taxpayer bailout of the US financial system.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 22:12

  • Newsom Announces $125 Million In COVID-19 Funds For California's Illegal Residents
    Newsom Announces $125 Million In COVID-19 Funds For California’s Illegal Residents

    California Governor Gavin Newsom (D) announced on Wednesday that illegal immigrants over the age of 18 would be entitled to $500 each during the coronavirus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Paid for with a mix of taxpayer funds and charitable donations from corporations and philanthropists, approximately 150,000 adults out of an estimated 3 million living in the state illegally would receive the benefit.

    The fund, totaling $125 million, will be comprised of $75 million from taxpayers, with charities committing to raise another $50 million on top of that. So far they’ve raised $5.5 million of that from several entities, including the Blue Shield of California Foundation, the California Endowment, the Chan Zuckerberg Initative, the James Irvine Foundation, the Emerson Collective and an anonymous donor, according to Fox News.

    “We feel a deep sense of gratitude for people that are in fear of deportations that are still addressing essential needs of tens of millions of Californians,” Newsom said on Wednesday, noting that 10% of the state’s workforce consist of illegal immigrants who paid $2.5 billion in state and local taxes last year.

    Their personal information will not be required to get those support,” Newsom said of the recipients, adding that money will not be distributed based on income.

    California has been seen as the most aggressive state in the nation when it came to giving benefits to immigrants living in the country illegally. Last year, California became the first state to give taxpayer-funded health benefits to low-income adults 25 and younger living in the country illegally. This year, Newsom had proposed expanding those benefits to seniors 65 and older.

    The move by California came as some Democrats in Washington, D.C., have been lobbying to include payments to illegal immigrants in stimulus packages. –Fox News

    The state has even provided immigrants with a website to help them access funds.

    Included in the $2 trillion federal stimulus package recently passed by Congress and signed into law by President Trump is $1,200 per adult and $500 per child, distributed to those with Social Security numbers as well as working legal immigrants.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 22:10

  • Here Is Goldman's Vision Of What Reopening The Economy Will Look Like
    Here Is Goldman’s Vision Of What Reopening The Economy Will Look Like

    Two days after Goldman introduced its US lockdown index and Social Distancing Index, the bank is out with a follow up report putting this indexes to practical use in setting up a framework for what a reopening of the US will look like now that the daily number of new confirmed virus cases is plateauing and big data measures indicating a sharp decline in the true number of new
    cases.

    So here is Goldman’s chief economist Jan Hatzius explaining how “Reopening the economy” will look like.

    Reopening the Economy

    The US is now largely in lockdown mode and social distancing has increased nationwide. Our US Lockdown Index—a measure of the GDP-weighted share of the country that has shut schools, closed non-essential businesses, and issued stay-at-home orders—has now reached 86%, as shown in Exhibit 1. Virus fears and lockdown orders have led to much greater social distancing, with roughly 50% declines in the share of time spent at workplaces and retail stores and a 25% increase in time spent at home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Relative to the lockdown measures in place in other major economies, current US measures are slightly less tight than average, according to an index developed by researchers at the University of Oxford. Exhibit 2 shows that the US response is currently much less stringent than in Italy, France, and Spain, but more stringent than in Sweden or China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The timing of reopening depends first and foremost on controlling the virus. How far are we from reaching that point? In a survey last week, a panel of experts on infectious disease modeling predicted that the peak rate of COVID-19 hospitalizations is most likely to be reached this month or in May, though they assigned a probability of only slightly under 50% to a later peak, as shown in Exhibit 3. Reducing the spread to a comfortable level would then take at least a few weeks after that point.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest data on the pace of virus spread are encouraging, suggesting that lockdowns have paid large dividends. The count of confirmed new COVID-19 cases has plateaued and perhaps even begun to decline, as shown in Exhibit 4. Our model of the outbreak in the short run—based on a time series analysis using an international panel of case counts—projects a decline in the growth rate of active cases over the next week, in line with the experiences of countries further along in their lockdown timelines.

    Measures of virus spread based on big data are even more encouraging and suggest that the true number of new cases actually peaked a while ago, as shown in Exhibit 4. Data from Kinsa that aggregate readings from web-linked thermometers show that the nationwide rate of influenza-like illness is now well below normal seasonal patterns. In addition, Google searches for “loss of smell”—a symptom that has proven an effective way to track the virus spread—have fallen to roughly one-seventh of their peak US level. These measures appear to lead the official count of cases confirmed by testing by 2-3 weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What Will Reopening Look Like?

    Absent a vaccine or scalable treatment breakthrough, reopening will have to remain gradual.

    There has been some enthusiasm recently about the possibility that far more people than initially believed have been infected but have remained asymptomatic or uncounted for lack of testing. While some hope that this means that “herd immunity” could be close at hand, this appears unlikely. New evidence from full population or random sample testing summarized in Exhibit 5 suggests that the share of the population that has been infected is indeed likely much higher than case counts confirmed by testing imply. But it still appears to be well below the level required for herd immunity— perhaps half of the population. Having already chosen to lock down, governments are very likely to discourage the rapid virus spread required to reach that threshold quickly because of the associated traumatic public health consequences. Moreover, while experience with past coronaviruses suggests that people who are infected will likely have at least some period of immunity, much remains unknown about immunity to Covid-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Because of the risk of renewed virus spread, the public will have to be persuaded that any plan for partial reopening is safe. After all, as we recently showed, most of the increase in social distancing in the US has been a voluntary reaction to virus fears, not a response to government lockdown orders.

    We see a few prerequisites for reopening: further declines in confirmed new infections, some excess capacity in hospital systems, greater ability to test large numbers of people quickly, and the ability to trace5 and quarantine those who have come into contact with infected people in order to control future outbreaks. These goals look achievable in the US in coming months, though there is still great uncertainty about the feasibility of controlling virus spread during reopening.

    Once those conditions are met, reopening is likely to begin with a very gradual relaxation of lockdown measures. Because the initial spread was slowed by social distancing, the US will have to reverse course very cautiously to avoid a second wave of virus spread. The speed of reopening is likely to vary across the country based on local conditions such as virus prevalence and healthcare capacity.

    Many possible adjustments to office and factory work arrangements, commercial activity, and social life can help to reduce the risk of virus spread as reopening gets underway. The middle column of Exhibit 6 highlights some options. Adjustments such as the use of masks, hand-washing, more frequent deep cleaning, routine health checks, maintaining physical distancing, and limitations on gatherings might apply to most areas of public life. Reduced density could be achieved through staggered shifts at work sites or lower capacity limits on public transit or at restaurants and other commercial and cultural locations. And life might reopen to a different degree for different groups, with those who are immune returning first, while those most at risk continue to limit social interactions until a vaccine is available.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We see two possible approaches to the order of reopening.

    The optimal approach might start with activities whose reopening offers maximum economic benefit for a given “cost” of virus risk, with total permitted activity constrained to a level that keeps virus spread under control.6 In practice, measuring this might be difficult. Our Asia economics team found that closings of workplaces and public transport and cancellation of public events show the greatest cross-country correlation with service-sector activity, while restrictions on internal and international travel appear to matter less. But estimating the “cost,” virus transmission risk, might be more challenging. One implication of this approach is that economic activity that can be conducted nearly as well from home as from a work or commercial site should generally come later in the reopening order.

    The natural approach might instead proceed from the safest activities to the most dangerous, as people initially limit their out-of-home activities to those with the least risk of infection. Exhibit 7 illustrates how this might look from an occupational perspective. The exhibit ranks occupations from left to right based on how much physical proximity to others they require according to occupational survey data.

    Absent strong government intervention, the actual path of reopening is likely to fall somewhere in between these two approaches. While the first approach might be optimal from a centrally organized perspective, the private economy would not necessarily arrive at that approach on its own because of incomplete information about virus risk and a failure of businesses and individuals to account for the virus transmission externalities of their own activities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lessons from Foreign Experience with Reopening

    Several countries have already started the process of gradually reopening their economies from virus lockdowns or have announced plans to start soon. These foreign experiences provide a glimpse of what reopening might look like in the US.

    We look first at China, which is furthest along in the reopening process. The majority of provinces in China have now lowered emergency response levels, including Hubei province, the epicenter of the initial outbreak. However, precautionary measures remain in place, such as temperature checks at workplaces and restrictions on movement based on health status.

    Industrial activity in China has recovered significantly as virus control measures have eased, with our Coronavirus China Industrial Activity Tracker now down just 8% compared to the year-ago level. Consumer activity has also rebounded quickly, though the level remains weaker, with our China Consumer Activity Tracker still 25% below the year-ago level (Exhibit 8) and spending on consumer discretionary categories particularly weak. We expect the US to exhibit similar patterns, with a quicker pace of recovery in manufacturing than in consumer services. However, we expect a slower overall pace of recovery in the US than in China because the US has a less manufacturing-focused economy, virus control is likely to be less thorough, and the reopening process will be less centrally directed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Other countries in Asia have imposed or extended lockdowns and enforced social distancing. Malaysia, the Philippines, and India recently extended lockdowns, and Singapore and Japan recently escalated their response to the virus due to spikes in infections, as noted in Exhibit 9. Most countries have moved to more stringent policies over time, and countries with relatively low new infection rates, such as Taiwan and South Korea, continue to heavily restrict international travel due to fear of importing new cases.

    Several countries in Europe have also announced plans for a very gradual reopening. Denmark, the Czech Republic, Austria, Spain, and Italy have lifted some restrictions, but the vast majority of restrictions remain in place, as described in Exhibit 9. In the US, governors from several East Coast states and governors from several West Coast states have each started joint discussions to plan a reopening, although neither group has provided public guidance on a timeline or a reopening plan thus far.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Foreign experience offers three key lessons for the US. First, initial reopening timelines often prove too optimistic, and changes to initial plans have so far instead mostly involved moving toward more stringent restrictions and longer lockdowns. Second, even countries at the forefront of reopening have gradual and conservative plans. Third, recovery is quicker in manufacturing than in consumer services.

    The Economic Recovery: A Scenario Analysis

    We conclude by looking at what various paths for reopening would mean for the growth outlook.

    We strongly expect the economy to begin to recover from the current bottom over the next few months as the peak virus hit fades thanks to partial relaxation of shutdown orders, adaptation to social distancing, and wider antibody testing to identify those who are now immune. While longer-lasting economic damage that delays the recovery is possible, so far the news has been mostly reassuring. On the labor market side, most layoffs have been temporary, meaning that most employer-employee relationships remain intact. On the business side, there has been no major uptick in bankruptcies so far. Admittedly, it is still very early to know how both concerns will evolve in coming months.

    The quarterly growth path largely depends on three key parameters: the depth of the peak decline, the length of lockdown, and the speed of recovery during the reopening process. We estimate a 25% peak hit in April to manufacturing, a 30% hit to construction, a 60% hit to brokerage fees and home improvements, and a 14% hit to consumer services. We assume that the recovery starts in May and June and thereafter proceeds at a gradual pace, with the manufacturing and construction drag fading by 15% each month, and the drag from services activity fading by 12.5% each month.

    Our baseline forecast for GDP growth continues to put the quarterly annualized pace at -7% in Q1, -34% in Q2, +19% in Q3, and +12% in Q4. This implies 2020 growth of -5.7% on an annual average basis and -4.9% on a Q4/Q4 basis.

    The last three charts compare our baseline forecast to plausible upside and downside scenarios in which the initial peak decline in GDP is either smaller or larger, the time spent in lockdown (during which we assume the recovery rate is halved) is longer, and the pace of recovery is either slower or faster.

    An upside scenario could involve greater progress on treatment, much slower spread in warmer weather, or more effective adaptation that makes social distancing measures less economically costly. A widely available vaccine would likely lead to an even sharper recovery of economic activity, but appears unlikely in the near future.

    A downside scenario could involve a slower decline in the number of new infections, longer lockdowns, a second wave of infections that results in an oscillation between easing and tightening restrictions, larger second-round income effects, and more persistent avoidance of face-to-face interactions.

    Exhibit 10 shows both the level (above) and growth rate (below) of output under our baseline assumptions and in an upside and a downside scenario. Specifically, we consider an upside case with a 7% peak hit to activity (vs. 13% in our baseline) and a downside case with both a 20% peak hit to activity and a lockdown that lasts for 6 months. The top chart shows the level of output for each scenario as a range corresponding to different recovery rates, from a very slow recovery in which the virus hit decays at a 5% monthly pace for manufacturing, construction, and services, to a faster recovery in which the hit decays at a 25% pace for manufacturing and construction and a 20% pace for services. The bottom chart shows the implied quarterly growth rates for each scenario, assuming the baseline recovery rate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Exhibit 11 shows what an even broader range of scenarios that vary all three key parameters would imply for 2020 growth. In the most extreme cases shown on the left, the growth hit could reach double-digits. In the most optimistic case shown on the right, even a relatively small peak hit to activity, a 1-2 month lockdown, and a fast recovery would suggest 2020 growth of -3.3%, which would still be the lowest full-year pace since 1946. While we see both upside and downside risks to our baseline path, the numerical risks to full-year growth in 2020 skew downward.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 21:50

  • Ron Paul: People "Should Be Leery About" A COVID-19 Vaccine
    Ron Paul: People “Should Be Leery About” A COVID-19 Vaccine

    Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    Ron Paul, in a Monday interview with host Dan Dicks at Press for Truth, warns that people “should be leery about” coronavirus vaccines that may come out. Further, says Paul, a doctor and former United States House of Representatives member, “right now I wouldn’t think there is any indication for anybody to take them,” noting that “scare tactics” are being used to pressure people into thinking they should take such potential vaccines to protect against coronavirus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Paul supports this conclusion by stressing in the interview the potential danger of a vaccine as well as the overstated threat from coronavirus.

    Regarding the potential danger from a coronavirus vaccine, Paul discusses at the beginning of the interview how, in 1976 in his first week as a House member, Paul was one of only two members, both doctors, who voted against legislation that helped rush through a vaccine in response to swine flu. Paul describes the results of the push for people to take the swine flu vaccine as follows:

    They rushed the vaccine through. The vaccine was not properly made. It had nothing to do with the virus that was out there, so it saved nobody’s life from it. It caused a lot of harm. More people ended up dying from the inoculation than died from the flu that year. And that sort of was a lesson, like that’s a little bit too extreme. But, that’s about what happens when governments get involved and you do things for political reasons.

    There was also, because a lot of people ended up getting the vaccine, I think there were like 50 people or more who got Guillain-Barré syndrome, which is temporary total paralysis and you can die from it but most of them did get better. But, it was a very, very serious complication of a viral injection, you know, a vaccine.

    Paul also discusses in the interview the overstated danger from coronavirus that is being used to scare people to take actions including to potentially take a coronavirus vaccine.

    Paul notes that many of the people whose deaths have been blamed on coronavirus are elderly people, including people living in nursing homes, who have multiple other diseases. Further, explains Paul, doctors have “been instructed by [the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention] and other politicians that, when the doctors sign the death certificate, if [patients] have four different things but they happen to have a positive test for the virus that is to be put down as the major cause of death.”

    “The numbers mean nothing,” concludes Paul regarding the daily tabulation of coronavirus deaths.

    In addition, Paul explains that many more people than officially recorded have contracted coronavirus. Some of these individuals never became sick. Others got better without any treatment, says Paul, pointing to his son Sen. Rand Paul (R-KY) as an example. While Rand Paul was given a test that confirmed he had coronavirus, most people who have had coronavirus and suffered no to minor medical problems have not been tested. With “probably millions of people” having contracted coronavirus, Paul concludes that the percentage of people who have contracted coronavirus and have died as a result “is probably very, very small.”

    While Paul says he would choose not to take a vaccine for the coronavirus should one appear next week even if people claim it is 99 percent effective, he says that the decision to take or not take a vaccine is one that should be made by each individual, who can discuss the vaccine alternative with a doctor. Absolutely, Paul concludes, that decision should not be made by government.

    Watch here Paul’s complete interview, in which he also discusses how government actions taken in the name of fighting coronavirus are harming the economy and his support for people speaking out for ending coronavirus-justified encroachments on freedom:


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 21:30

  • Bailouts Secured: Bezos Wealth Soars By $24 Billion As 17 Million Americans Lose Their Jobs
    Bailouts Secured: Bezos Wealth Soars By $24 Billion As 17 Million Americans Lose Their Jobs

    As the middle class gears up to once again unknowingly bail out the world via way of inflating the money supply, the rich are doing what they do during bailouts: getting richer.

    In fact, just a week after 17 million Americans filed for unemployment, Jeff Bezos saw his net worth increase to $138.5 billion as Amazon’s stock hit all time highs on Tuesday, according to Bloomberg. The stock move was helped along by massive fiscal and monetary stimulus hitting the stock market. 

    Amidst historic unemployment numbers, banks are now claiming that loan losses fueled by job cuts could rival those from the 2008 financial crisis. Among the weakest sectors cutting employees first is the very sector that Amazon has disrupted: retail. 

    Bezos is among the many rich who have seen their fortunes recover as the Fed continues to focus on its sole mandate of jamming stocks higher by any means necessary. The combined net worth of the world’s 500 richest people is up 20% from its low on March 23, as a result. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Matt Maley, chief market strategist at Miller Tabak + Co said: “The wealth gap, it’s only going to get wider with what’s going on now. The really wealthy people haven’t had to worry. Yes, they’re less wealthy, but you haven’t had to worry about putting food on the table or keeping a roof over your head.”

    Meanwhile, corporate insiders continue to buy their own stock at a quick clip, indicating that executives believe the worst could be behind us. Carnival Corp. board member Randall Weisenburger, for example, bought $10 million of his company’s stock in the open market last week. 

    While a couple of big names in oil have seen major losses, like Harold Hamm, who has seen his fortune fall 64% to $3.7 billion, other executives are experiencing significant gains.

    Bezos has added about $24 billion to his wealth in 2020. His ex-wife, Mackenzie Bezos, has seen her net worth climb $8.2 billion to $45.3 billion. Elon Musk has seen his fortune rise by $10.4 billion and the Walton family at the helm of Wal-Mart has seen their combined net worth grow to $169 billion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maley concluded: “The unfairness of it all is who is going to benefit from it most. Money makes money.”

    While Bezos is getting richer, The Verge has reported that Amazon is going to be making “drastic cuts” to affiliate commission rates starting next week:

    Amazon is planning to make dramatic cuts to commission rates for its affiliate marketing program, which allows media organizations, e-commerce companies, and small and independent businesses to receive a cut of revenue from a sale if a customer lands on the product page and purchases the item through a provided link. The cuts go into effect on April 21st, according to CNBC, and some product categories will see drops of more than 50 percent.

    The cuts will no doubt come as a blow to digital media companies who spent time building out infrastructure to recommend users buy products from Amazon. The Verge notes that “companies like BuzzFeed and New York Times-owned Wirecutter are among the more prominent commerce providers in the industry” – so we guess we can expect negative op-eds from those blogs at some point soon. 

    Finally, recall yesterday we reported that Amazon had fired 3 employees who spoke out about working conditions at the company during the coronavirus pandemic. The company confirmed that it had fired Emily Cunningham, Bashir Mohamed and Maren Costa for violating company policy.

    Amazon commented: “We support every employee’s right to criticize their employer’s working conditions, but that does not come with blanket immunity against any and all internal policies. We terminated these employees for repeatedly violating internal policies.”

    With regard to Mohamed’s firing, the company stated: “This individual was terminated as a result of progressive disciplinary action for inappropriate language, behavior and violating social distancing guidelines.”

    That, or perhaps Amazon just found their lack of faith in the Jeff Bezos’ best intentions disturbing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 21:10

  • Americans Need A Trampoline, Not A UBI Mattress
    Americans Need A Trampoline, Not A UBI Mattress

    Authored by Gonzalo Schwarz via InsideSources.com,

    As governments around the world take unprecedented actions to address the coronavirus pandemic, one idea that is being floated as an ideal fix for this crisis is the adoption of a Universal Basic Income (UBI).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Adopting a UBI as a means to solve problems – from income inequality to mass unemployment caused by automation, and now economic shocks from a pandemic – has been touted by many, most prominently former Democratic presidential candidate Andrew Yang. Twitter founder Jack Dorsey recently donated $1 billion to fight the coronavirus, much of which will later be directed to UBI-related projects.

    Despite marketing UBI as a creative solution to a novel pandemic, it’s yet one more attempt to exploit a crisis to push for a policy that proponents say can solve any and all problems. We must tread carefully.

    In announcing his donation, Dorsey stated that the idea needs experimentation.

    However, several UBI experiments have already been tried and most trials have been canceled for a variety of reasons.

    Finland discontinued its program primarily because — surprise, surprise — giving money to jobless people without any requirements wasn’t very popular. The Canadian experiment in Ontario (which had some conditionality, making it not fully universal) was ended due to the high price tag.

    In the United States, one of the pre-eminent UBI experiments currently being conducted is in the city of Stockton, California. And, even though there are some promising developments, it is too early to tell whether the program is successful. More important, an experiment at the local level is small in scale compared to the astronomical cost it would take to adopt it on a national level.

    To address the current crisis, the $2 trillion stimulus package includes critical support for the health care sector and others affected by pandemic, including small- and medium-size businesses. In terms of direct financial support for people (which resembles a UBI), all Americans earning less than $75,000 as an individual and $150,000 as a family would receive $1,200 for each adult and an additional $500 per child, which could go up to $3,400 for a family of four. Furthermore, unemployment benefits have been increased and extended for an additional four months.

    While the stimulus’ direct financial relief resembles UBI, it is important to note that it is at least somewhat targeted and not universal, even if the cap for such relief may still be too high. Nevertheless, we’re already being told the stimulus isn’t enough, and lawmakers are gearing up for a second stimulus without trying to improve on the first one or even waiting for the results.

    Although there are those who do need direct cash payments, there is a strong case that our limited resources should be targeted so that relief can get to Americans most in need. Essential workers are not being laid off and many of the largest employers of essential workers have hired more employees. Amazon and Walmart have even awarded temporary raises.

    Many non-essential businesses and their workers are still able to function remotely while complying with social distancing norms — leaving those businesses and individual livelihoods unaffected.

    There have been salary adjustments all over the private sector, with many private sector CEOs like FedEx’s Fred Smith and others cutting their salaries and avoiding layoffs as much as possible. Additionally, a large number of public-sector jobs will most likely be completely spared.

    Unfortunately, neither a UBI nor the current stimulus package makes such distinctions, which is why universal programs end up being more wasteful than necessary. Targeted social welfare is always preferable, particularly in more normal times when timeliness is less of a concern.

    Before the public health crisis arrived, the labor market was extremely strong, with more job openings than people looking for work. That’s good news: As Nobel laureate Vernon Smith recently wrote, the labor market and our broader economy will bounce back in due time.

    The most important conversation to have now is how the economy can go back to operating close to normally without compromising at-risk groups. The economic problems we’re experiencing have more to do with short- and medium-term uncertainty related to the labor market, and a UBI does not address any of those concerns.

    While a temporary UBI may seem appealing for the duration of this crisis, buyer beware: Calls for UBI to become permanent are a certainty, as is currently happening in Spain. For too many, the coronavirus crisis is just one more nail to be solved with the hammer of a UBI.

    Social welfare programs do have a role in providing a helping hand, especially in extraordinary times like these. But they should be a trampoline instead of a mattress — targeted and temporary rather than universal and permanent.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 20:50

  • Fox News Reports Coronavirus Originated In Wuhan Lab
    Fox News Reports Coronavirus Originated In Wuhan Lab

    Fox News reports that COVID-19 originated in the Wuhan Institute of Virology and that “patient zero” was a lab employee who became infected before spreading it in the community – just as we have reported repeatedly over the past three months, in exchange for which Twitter’s “appropriate content” arbiters deplatformed us without reason or explanation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to ‘multiple sources who have been briefed on the details of early actions by China’s government,’ the initial transmission of the virus was bat-to-human, and that the ‘official’ story amplified by the MSM – namely that the virus originated at the Wuhan wet market – was a coverup by Chinese officials ‘in order to deflect blame from the laboratory, along with the country’s propaganda efforts targeting the U.S. and Italy,’ reads the report.

    In what may or may not be a bit of narrative shaping from ‘official sources,’ Fox reports that China’s Wuhan laboratory was working with COVID-19 “not as a bioweapon, but as part of China’s effort to demonstrate that its efforts to identify and combat viruses are equal to or greater than the capabilities of the United States.

    So – lab accident while trying to compete with America’s capabilities appears to be the official story.

    On Tuesday, the Washington Post reported that the US State Department received two cables from US Embassy officials in 2018 warning of inadequate safety at WIF, which was conducting ‘risky studies’ on bat coronaviruses, according to the Washington Post, which notes that the cables have “fueled discussions inside the U.S. government about whether this or another Wuhan lab was the source of the virus.”

    Responding to the report, Gen. Mark Milley, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff confirmed that the United States has taken a “keen interest” in the theory that COVID-19 originated at the Wuhan lab, but that “we don’t know for certain.”

    On Tuesday, President Trump hinted that there was more to the story about the lab, after a Fox News reporter asked him about the Wuhan Institute and whether the US had considered the possibility that the virus may have leaked.

    Trump’s response was extremely interesting, to say the least.

    “More and more we’re hearing the story…we are doing a very thorough examination of this horrible situation that happened.”

    As a follow-up, the reporter continued, “did you ever discuss with him concerns about lax safety protocols about that lab?”

    Trump replied: “I don’t want to talk about what I discussed with him about the laboratory. I just don’t want to talk about it,” Trump responded.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s suppression campaign

    Meanwhile, Fox News also reports that China “100 percent” suppressed and altered data – destroying samples, scrubbing contaminated areas, and stifling academic articles.

    There were doctors and journalists who were “disappeared” warning of the spread of the virus and its contagious nature and human to human transmission.  China moved quickly to shut down travel domestically from Wuhan to the rest of China, but did not stop international flights from Wuhan.

    Additionally, the sources tell Fox News the World Health Organization (WHO) was complicit from the beginning in helping China cover its tracks. -Fox News

    And now a word from Brendan Carr, commissioner of the FCC to Twitter CEO, @Jack.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 20:22

  • Tverberg: Why Economies Won't Be Able To Recover After Shutdowns
    Tverberg: Why Economies Won’t Be Able To Recover After Shutdowns

    Authored by Gail Tverberg via Our Finite World blog,

    Amid all the clamoring for shutdowns to prevent the spread of COVID-19, there is one major difficulty, however – once an economy has been shut down, it is extremely difficult for the economy to recover back to the level it had reached previously. In fact, the longer the shutdown lasts, the more critical the problem is likely to be. China can shut down its economy for two weeks over the Chinese New Year, each year, without much damage. But, if the outage is longer and more widespread, damaging effects are likely.

    A major reason why economies around the world will have difficulty restarting is because the world economy was in very poor shape before COVID-19 hit; shutting down major parts of the economy for a time leads to even more people with low wages or without any job. It will be very difficult and time-consuming to replace the failed businesses that provided these jobs.

    When an outbreak of COVID-19 hit, epidemiologists recommended social distancing approaches that seemed to be helpful back in 1918-1919. The issue, however, is that the world economy has changed. Social distancing rules have a much more adverse impact on today’s economy than on the economy of 100 years ago.

    Governments that wanted to push back found themselves up against a wall of citizen expectations. A common belief, even among economists, was that any shutdown would be short, and the recovery would be V-shaped. False information (really propaganda) published by China tended to reinforce the expectation that shutdowns could truly be helpful. But if we look at the real situation, Chinese workers are finding themselves newly laid off as they attempt to return to work. This is leading to protests in the Hubei area.

    My analysis indicates that now, in 2020, the world economy cannot withstand long shutdowns. One very serious problem is the fact that the prices of many commodities (including oil, copper and lithium) will fall far too low for producers, leading to disruption in supplies. Broken supply chains can be expected to lead to the loss of many products previously available. Ultimately, the world economy may be headed for collapse.

    In this post, I explain some of the reasons for my concerns.

    [1] An economy is a self-organizing system that can grow only under the right conditions. Removing a large number of businesses and the corresponding jobs for an extended shutdown will clearly have a detrimental effect on the economy. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 1. Chart by author, using photo of building toy “Leonardo Sticks,” with notes showing a few types of elements the world economy.

    An economy is a self-organizing networked system that grows, under the right circumstances. I have attempted to give an idea of how this happens in Figure 1. This is an image of a child’s building toy. The growth of an economy is somewhat like building a structure with many layers using such a toy.

    The precise makeup of the economy is constantly changing. New businesses are formed, and new consumers grow up and take jobs. Governments enact laws, partly to collect taxes, and partly to ensure fair treatment of all. Consumers decide which products to buy based on a combination of factors, including their level of wages, the prices being charged for the available goods, the availability of debt, and the interest rate on that debt. Resources of various kinds are used in producing goods and services.

    At the same time, some deletions are taking place. Big businesses buy smaller businesses; some customers die or move away. Products that become obsolete are discontinued. The inside of the dome becomes hollow from the deletions.

    If a large number of businesses are closed for an extended period, this will have many adverse impacts on the economy:

    • Fewer goods and services, in total, will be made for the economy during the period of the shutdown.

    • Many workers will be laid off, either temporarily or permanently. Goods and services will suddenly be less affordable for these former workers. Many will fall behind on their rent and other obligations.

    • The laid off workers will be unable to pay much in taxes. In the US, state and local governments will need to cut back the size of their programs to match lower revenue because they cannot borrow to offset the deficit.

    • If fewer goods and services are made, demand for commodities will fall. This will push the prices of commodities, such as oil and copper, very low.

    • Commodity producers, airlines and the travel industry are likely to head toward permanent contraction, further adding to layoffs.

    • Broken supply lines become problems. For example:

      • A lack of parts from China has led to the closing of many automobile factories around the world.

      • There is not enough cargo capacity on airplanes because much cargo was carried on passenger flights previously, and passenger flights have been cut back.

    These adverse impacts become increasingly destabilizing for the economy, the longer the shutdowns go on. It is as if a huge number of deletions are made simultaneously in Figure 1. Temporary margins, such as storage of spare parts in warehouses, can provide only a temporary buffer. The remaining portions of the economy become less and less able to support themselves. If the economy was already in poor shape, the economy may collapse.

    [2] The world economy was approaching resource limits even before the coronavirus epidemic appeared. This is not too different a situation than many earlier economies faced before they collapsed. Coronavirus pushes the world economy further toward collapse. 

    Reaching resource limits is sometimes described as, “The population outgrew the carrying capacity of the land.” The group of people living in the area could not grow enough food and firewood using the resources available at the time (such as arable land, energy from the sun, draft animals, and technology of the day) for their expanding populations.

    Collapses have been studied by many researchers. The book Secular Cycles by Peter Turchin and Sergey Nefedov analyze eight agricultural economies that collapsed. Figure 2 is a chart I prepared, based on my analysis of the economies described in that book:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 2. Chart by author based on Turchin and Nefedov’s Secular Cycles.

    Economies tend to grow for many years before the population becomes high enough that the carrying capacity of the land they occupy is approached. Once the carrying capacity is hit, they enter a stagflation stage, during which population and GDP growth slow. Growing debt becomes an issue, as do both wage and wealth disparity.

    Eventually, a crisis period is reached. The problems of the stagflation period become worse (wage and wealth disparity; need for debt by those with inadequate income) during the crisis period. Changes tend to take place during the crisis period that lead to substantial drops in GDP and population. For example, we read about some economies entering into wars during the crisis period in the attempt to gain more land and other resources. We also read about economies being attacked from outside in their weakened state.

    Also, during the crisis period, with the high level of wage and wealth disparity, it becomes increasingly difficult for governments to collect enough taxes. This problem can lead to governments being overthrown because of unhappiness with high taxes and wage disparity. In some cases, as in the 1991 collapse of the central government of the Soviet Union, the top level government simply collapses, leaving the next lower level of government.

    Strangely enough, epidemics also seem to occur within collapse periods. The rising population leads to people living closer to each other, increasing the risk of transmission. People with low wages often find it increasingly difficult to eat an adequate diet. As a result, their immune systems easily succumb to new communicable diseases. Part of the collapse process is often the loss of a significant share of the population to a communicable disease.

    Looking back at Figure 2, I believe that the current economic cycle started with the use of fossil fuels back in the 1800s. The world economy hit the stagflation period in the 1970s, when oil supply first became constrained. The Great Recession of 2008-2009 seems to be a marker for the beginning of the crisis period in the current cycle. If I am right in this assessment, the world economy is in the period in which we should expect crises, such as pandemics or wars, to occur.

    The world was already pushing up against resource limits before all of the shutdowns took place. The shutdowns can be expected to push with world economy toward a more rapid decline in output per capita. They also appear to increase the likelihood that citizens will try to overthrow their governments, once the quarantine restrictions are removed.

    [3] The carrying capacity of the world today is augmented by the world’s energy supply. A major issue since 2014 is that oil prices have been too low for oil producers. The coronavirus problem is pushing oil prices even lower yet.

    Strangely enough, the world economy is facing a resource shortage problem, but it manifests itself as low commodity prices and excessive wage and wealth disparity.

    Most economists have not figured out that economies are, in physics terms, dissipative structures. These are self-organizing systems that grow, at least for a time. Hurricanes (powered by energy from warm water) and ecosystems (powered by sunlight) are other examples of dissipative structures. Humans are dissipative structures, as well; we are powered by the energy content of foods. Economies require energy for all of the processes that we associate with generating GDP, such as refining metals and transporting goods. Electricity is a form of energy.

    Energy can be used to work around shortages of almost any kind of resource. For example, if fresh water is a problem, energy products can be used to build desalination plants. If lack of phosphate rocks is an issue for adequate fertilization, energy products can be used to extract these rocks from less accessible locations. If pollution is a problem, fossil fuels can be used to build so-called renewable energy devices such as wind turbines and solar panels, to try to reduce future CO2 pollution.

    The growth in energy consumption correlates quite well with the growth of the world economy. In fact, increases in energy consumption seem to precede growth in GDP, suggesting that it is energy consumption growth that allows the growth of GDP.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 3. World GDP Growth versus Energy Consumption Growth, based on data of 2018 BP Statistical Review of World Energy and GDP data in 2010$ amounts, from the World Bank.

    The thing that economists tend to miss is the fact that extracting enough fossil fuels (or commodities of any type) is a two-sided price problem. Prices must be both:

    1. High enough for companies extracting the resources to make an after tax profit.

    2. Low enough for consumers to afford finished goods made with these resources.

    Most economists believe that an inadequate supply of energy products will be marked by high prices. In fact, the situation seems to be almost “upside down” in a networked economy. Inadequate energy supplies seem to be marked by excessive wage and wealth disparity. This wage and wealth disparity leads to commodity prices that are too low for producers. Current WTI oil prices are about $20 per barrel, for example (Figure 4).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 4. Daily spot price of West Texas Intermediate oil, based on EIA data.

    The low-price commodity price issue is really an affordability problem. The many people with low wages cannot afford goods such as cars, homes with heating and air conditioning, and vacation travel. In fact, they may even have difficulty affording food. Spending by rich people does not make up for the shortfall in spending by the poor because the rich tend to spend their wealth differently. They tend to buy services such as tax planning and expensive private college educations for their children. These services require proportionately less commodity use than goods purchased by the poor.

    The problem of low commodity prices becomes especially acute in countries that produce commodities for export. Producers find it difficult to pay workers adequate wages to live on. Also, governments are not able to collect enough taxes for the services workers expect, such as public transit. The combination is likely to lead to protests by citizens whenever the opportunity arises. Once shutdowns end, these countries are especially in danger of having their governments overthrown.

    [4] There are limits to what governments and central banks can fix. 

    Governments can give citizens checks so that they have enough funds to buy groceries. This may, indeed, keep the price of food products high enough for food producers. There may still be problems with broken supply lines, so there may still be shortages of some products. For example, if there are eggs but no egg cartons, there may be no eggs for sale in grocery stores.

    Central banks can act as buyers for many kinds of assets such as bonds and even shares of stock. In this way, they can perhaps keep stock market prices reasonably high. If enough gimmicks are used, perhaps they can even keep the prices of homes and farms reasonably high.

    Central banks can also keep interest rates paid by governments low. In fact, interest rates can even be negative, especially for the short term. Businesses whose profitability has been reduced and workers who have been laid off are likely to discover that their credit ratings have been downgraded. This is likely to lead to higher interest costs for these borrowers, even if interest rates for the most creditworthy are kept low.

    One area where governments and central banks seem to be fairly helpless is with respect to low prices for commodities used by industry, such as oil, natural gas, coal, copper and lithium. These commodities are traded internationally, so it is not just their own producers that need to be propped up; the market intervention needs to affect the entire world market.

    One approach to raising world commodity prices would be to buy up large quantities of the commodities and store them somewhere. This is impractical, because no one has adequate storage for the huge quantities involved.

    Another approach for raising world commodity prices would be to try to raise worldwide demand for finished goods and services. (Making more finished goods and services will use more commodities, and thus will tend to raise commodity prices.) To do this, checks would somehow need to go to the many poor people in the world, including those in India, Bangladesh and Nigeria, allowing these people to buy cars, homes, and other finished goods. Sending out checks only to people in one’s own economy would not be sufficient. It is unlikely that the US or the European Union would undertake a task such as this.

    A major problem after many people have been out of work for a quite a while is the fact that many of these people will be behind on their regular payments, such as rent and car payments. They will be in no mood to buy a new vehicle or a new cell phone, simply because they have been offered a check that covers groceries and not much more. They will remain in a mode of cutting back on purchases, not adding more. Demand for most kinds of goods will remain low.

    This lack of demand will make it difficult for business to have enough sales to make it profitable to reopen at the level of output that they had previously. Thus, employment and sales are likely to remain depressed even after the economy seems to be reopening. China seems to be having this problem. The Wall Street Journal reports China Is Open for Business, but the Postcoronavirus Reboot Looks Slow and Rocky. It also reports, Another Shortage in China’s Virus-Hit Economy: Jobs for College Grads.

    [5] There is a significant likelihood that the COVID-19 problem is not going away, even if economies can “bend the trend line” with respect to new cases.

    Bending the trend line has to do with trying to keep hospitals and medical providers from being overwhelmed. It is likely to mean that herd immunity is built up slowly, making repeat outbreaks more likely. Thus, if social isolation is stopped, COVID-19 illnesses can be expected to revisit prior locations. We know that this has been an issue in the past. The Spanish Flu epidemic came in three waves, over the years 1918-1919. The second wave was the most deadly.

    recent study by members of the Harvard School of Public Health says that the COVID-19 epidemic may appear in waves until into 2022. In fact, it could be back on a seasonal basis thereafter. It also indicates that more than one period of social distancing is likely to be required:

    “A single period of social distancing will not be sufficient to prevent critical care capacities from being overwhelmed by the COVID-19 epidemic, because under any scenario considered it leaves enough of the population susceptible that a rebound in transmission after the end of the period will lead to an epidemic that exceeds this capacity.”

    Thus, even if the COVID-19 problem seems to be fixed in a few weeks, it likely will be back again within a few months. With this level of uncertainty, businesses will not be willing to set up new operations. They will not hire many additional employees. The retired population will not run out and buy more tickets on cruise ships for next year. In fact, citizens are likely to continue to be worried about airplane flights being a place for transmitting illnesses, making the longer term prospects for the airline industry less optimistic.

    Conclusion 

    The economy was already near the edge before COVID-19 hit. Wage and wealth disparity were big problems. Local populations of many areas objected to immigrants, fearing that the added population would reduce job opportunities for people who already lived there, among other things. As a result, many areas were experiencing protests because of unhappiness with the current economic situation.

    The shutdowns temporarily cut back the protests, but they certainly do not fix the underlying situations. Instead, the shutdowns add to the number of people with very low wages or no income at all. The shutdowns also reduce the total quantity of goods and services available to purchase, regardless of how much money is added to the system. Many people will end up poorer, in some real sense.

    As soon as the shutdowns end, it will be obvious that the world economy is in worse condition than it was before the shutdown. The longer the shutdowns last, the worse shape the world economy will be in. Thus, when businesses are restarted, we can expect even more protests and more divisive politics. Some governments may be overthrown, or they may collapse without being pushed. I fear that the world economy will be further down the road toward overall collapse.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 20:10

  • "Major Blow To US": Large Group Of US-Backed Fighters 'Defect' To Assad Forces 
    “Major Blow To US”: Large Group Of US-Backed Fighters ‘Defect’ To Assad Forces 

    The brutal proxy war in Syria, which has had the deep involvement of American intelligence and the Pentagon, has been wrapping up after grinding on for nine years. With the coronavirus pandemic now completely taking over the news cycle, and as Washington struggles to contain both the virus and devastating economic fallout, Syria has taken a far back seat in Western media despite the continued presence of American forces on the ground.

    It seems Damascus is ready to take advantage of the situation, rolling back US influence and presence in the country. Syrian media as well as local sources say a large group of US-backed and trained fighters from al-Tanf camp, where American special forces have maintained a presence for years, have defected to the Syrian Army.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US special forces at Tanf base, file image.

    “Several U.S.-backed rebel fighters willingly surrendered themselves to the Syrian Arab Army (SAA) forces in the Homs Governorate this week,” Beirut-based Syrian war monitor al-Masdar News reports, citing local sources. “Members of the U.S.-backed rebel forces in the Tanf region of southeastern Homs agreed to surrender their weapons and equipment to the Syrian Arab Army after lengthy negotiations.”

    Pro-government media described it as “a major blow to the United States” in the region. Video circulated on social media purporting to show a convoy of vehicles leaving the al-Tanf region to join the pro-government side. 

    The video was reportedly taken by a reporter with the pro-government broadcaster “Sham FM” and purports to show the defectors entering Tadmour from al-Tanf in southeast Homs province:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An 8-vehicle convoy reportedly departed the area with US military presence and drove to a Syrian Army post across the desert, where militants handed over their equipment and weapons.

    The conditions of the agreement have not been made known, but negotiations had reportedly been ongoing for some time. More broadly, Damascus has pursued a ‘reconciliation’ program – offering select ‘rebel’ militant groups amnesty opportunities if they switch back to pro-government forces.

    For years the Pentagon has been training and equipping the Kurdish and Arab ‘Syrian Democratic Forces’ (or SDF) — however, the Kurdish-dominated group in Syria’s northeast has lately felt betrayed by Washington last year essentially giving Turkey’s Erdogan a green light to invade northern Syria.

    In particular, America’s control of al-Tanf and its border crossing into Iraq has also been consistently condemned by Russia. The US has long maintained its presence is needed to fight ISIS, but Russia has called it an imperialistic land grab of sovereign Syrian soil in order to ultimately pressure Assad. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 19:50

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 15th April 2020

  • 65% Of Greek Hotels Face Bankruptcy As Lockdowns Continue
    65% Of Greek Hotels Face Bankruptcy As Lockdowns Continue

    The Greek tourism industry has collapsed in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic and on track to lose at least 50% of its revenues in 2020, said Grigoris Tasios, President of the Greek Hoteliers Association, who spoke with the Greek Reporter last week.

    The Hellenic Chamber of Hotels, a group that oversees the tourism industry in Greece, warned in a new study on Monday that a bankruptcy wave looms.

    Alexandros Vasilikos, the president of the Chamber, told the Greek Reporter this week that a recovery in the tourism industry, reverting to 2019 growth rates, could take a very long time to achieve.

    According to the Chamber’s study, 65% of Greek hotels indicate that the threat of bankruptcy is “likely” or “most likely” — at 46.6% and 18.3%, respectively.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hotel in Greece 

    About 95% of hotels said their business volumes had been halved since the crisis unfolded. The Chamber is estimating that the hotel sector would lose upwards of 4.46 billion Euros in 2020. 

    Tasios told Greek Reporter last week that the tourism industry is facing an unprecedented crisis: 

    “It is very difficult to plan ahead during these times, simply because we do not know how long the coronavirus scare will last. We hope to launch the Greek tourist season on July 1, but this is speculative, since everything will depend on how the virus situation will unfold,” he said.

    Tasios said about 300 hotels are currently operating in the entire country under strict social distancing rules. Thousands remain closed, as nationwide lockdowns from mid-March extend into April. 

    “We really do not know how many will be in a position to reopen when the situation becomes normal again,” he said, noting that hoteliers up and down the country basically have zero income right now.

    “We are monitoring developments in the pandemic on a day-to-day basis, not just in Greece but throughout the world, and in particular, in the countries that are tourist markets for Greece,” Tasios said. He then added that the number of arrivals from Greece’s traditional markets will probably be far lower than that of previous years.

    “I think that the situation in Germany, UK, France, Poland and maybe Russia, countries that are among the top five tourism markets for Greece, does not allow much optimism about a quick rebound in visitors,” he explained.

    The Greek Ministry of Tourism announced last month that it would reopen the industry around April 30. 

    For the remainder of the year, tourism across the Western world will struggle to attract guests, specifically in Europe and the US.

    We noted last month that the Spanish tourism industry plummeted after the country went into lockdown following a massive surge in cases and deaths. The tourism industry across Europe has likely gone bust as well.

    Flight bans across the world have made it almost impossible for people to travel to top tourist destinations. 

    Several weeks ago, we reported how the services sector in the US crashed, especially travel and tourism and other consumer-facing industries.

    With no proven vaccine, people are likely to stay home in 2020 — no matter how much optimism governments create in their attempt to reopen crashed economies. It could be years until the global travel and tourism industry recovers. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 02:45

  • Will Quiet Middle East Last? Or Is It Lull Before Next Storm?
    Will Quiet Middle East Last? Or Is It Lull Before Next Storm?

    Authored by Martin Sieff via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Across the Middle East, the coronavirus is stirring up both upheavals and more subtle changes from Tel Aviv to Riyadh, little reported and when covered little understood in the Western media.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Israel, the virus has enabled that master political magician Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to pull off yet another spectacular escape as improbable as any in a James Bond or Star Wars movie to remain in power indefinitely.

    After matching him in three successive national elections, Blue and White opposition leader, former Army Chief of Staff retired Lieutenant General Benny Gantz finally blinked: Because of the coronavirus pandemic crisis, he agreed to enter into a coalition with Netanyahu leading it for the first 18 months.

    This is more than enough time for Netanyahu, a master political infighter and intriguer to splinter Blue and White into fragments. Indeed, Gantz has already done the biggest part of the job for him.

    His own top allies in the new party, former Finance Minister Yair Lapid and former Defense Minister and Army Chief of Staff Moshe Ya’alon both firmly opposed any agreement to compromise with Netanyahu refused to go along with it. Currently, even Gantz and Netanyahu have not yet finalized their agreement, but Netanyahu has seized the initiative from him. His record in power over the past decade suggests he will not release it easily.

    Netanyahu can at least boast that his lockdown has kept Israel relatively isolated from the pandemic. That is not the case in Iran, which boasts close trade and energy ties with China and where the virus has been raging ferociously.

    That of course, is also the case in the United States. Extremist US hawks have been gloating – hopefully – that the crisis in Iran might discredit and topple the government there. That seems very unlikely at the moment.

    What remains possible is that if the virus does significantly “decapitate” the current leadership in Tehran, more extreme and unpredictable rather than more moderate figures may take over more ready to act on provocations from Washington rather than play them down.

    In Saudi Arabia, the virus may also have unpredictable “cushion shot” – surprise ricochet – effects.

    Saudi Arabia’s elite King Feisal Specialist Hospital, which treats members of the kingdom’s royal family, is said to be on “high alert” as senior members of the Al Saud clan become infected with COVID-19. As many as 150 royals in the kingdom are now believed to have contracted the virus, according to a report in the New York Times.

    The highest royal to be infected so far is Prince Faisal bin Bandar bin Abdulaziz al Saud the governor of the capital Riyadh who is in his 70s and therefore at increased risk. Worse yet, at the time of writing, he is said to be in intensive care.

    King Salman bin Abdulaziz, aged 84 is believed to have taken refuge on an island palace near the city of Jeddah on the Red Sea along with Crown Prince Mohamed Bin Salman on the same coast with his ministers. But these moves , if extended, may isolate them dangerously from the national centers of power.

    Bin Salman was already in an uncharacteristic subdued mood before the pandemic hit as his oil price war on Russia and the United States backfired disastrously. Since then, he has been busy mending bridges with Moscow and appears close to completing a deal on reducing oil production with the Kremlin.

    However, the prolonged slump in global oil prices will certainly continue and may intensify. Russia is in a sound position to ride out such a longer-term wave: Saudi Arabia is not.

    If on top of all this, Bin Salman himself should contract the coronavirus, he has made so many enemies across society from royal to business circles with his reckless, warmongering and spendthrift policies that any sign of personal vulnerability could launch an attempt to drive him from power. He has almost certainly survived at least one assassination attempt already.

    Only last month, Bin Salman ordered the arrest of two senior members of the royal family – Prince Ahmed bin Abdulaziz, the younger brother of King Salman, and Mohammed bin Nayef, his first cousin and the king’s nephew.

    Like Netanyahu, Bin Salman has good reason for caution rather than dangerous adventures as both men struggle to maintain their increasingly precarious bases of power. That should point to a quieter, more peaceful region, at least in the short term.

    But as I learned a long time ago in my native North Belfast, no time is more dangerous than when things get too quiet in a dangerous neighborhood.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 02:00

  • US Flexes Military Might Near Russian Forces In Provocative F-35 Flight Over Syria
    US Flexes Military Might Near Russian Forces In Provocative F-35 Flight Over Syria

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    The U.S. military flew their new F-35 stealth jet over Syria’s skies this past week, as they display their strength in front of the Russian Armed Forces who are only a few kilometers away from the American troops in the eastern Euphrates region.

    In a tweet on Monday, the Special Ops Joint Task Force-Operation Inherent Resolve (OIR) in Syria and Iraq released three photos showing the F-35 above Syria, likely in the Al-Hasakah or Deir Ezzor governorates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “A USAF F-35A Lightning II fighter jet flies near the ATG in Syria, April 10, 2020. Coalition and partner forces continue to strike at extremist organizations in Syria despite COVID-19, reflecting the world-wide unity to see an enduring defeat delivered against Daesh,” the U.S. military account posted. 

    The three photos showed up close and far away shots of the F-35A as it flew over the skies of eastern Syria.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Interesting, the statement invoked the ongoing pandemic which has severely impacted the US military – a situation no doubt closely watched by America’s rivals and enemies.

    The coalition statement indicated that US strikes in Syria would continue “despite COVID-19, reflecting world-wide unity…”.

    While the U.S. conducted this flight, the Russian military was likely watching from afar, as they have headquartered their forces in eastern Syria at the Qamishli Airport in the northern region of the Al-Hasakah Governorate.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 01:00

  • A Brave New Normal, CJ Hopkins Has A Theory
    A Brave New Normal, CJ Hopkins Has A Theory

    Authored (satirically) by CJ Hopkins via ConsentFactory.org,

    So the War on Populism is finally over. Go ahead, take a wild guess who won.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’ll give you a hint. It wasn’t the Russians, or the white supremacists, or the gilets jaunes, or Jeremy Corbyn’s Nazi Death Cult, or the misogynist Bernie Bros, or the MAGA-hat terrorists, or any of the other real or fictional “populist” forces that global capitalism has been waging war on for the last four years.

    What? You weren’t aware that global capitalism was fighting a War on Populism? That’s OK, most other folks weren’t. It wasn’t officially announced or anything. It was launched in the summer of 2016, just as the War on Terror was ending, as a sequel to the War on Terror, or a variation on the War on Terror, or continuation of the War on Terror, or … whatever, it doesn’t really matter anymore, because now we’re fighting the War on Death, or the War on Minor Cold-like Symptoms, depending on your age and general state of health.

    That’s right, folks, once again, global capitalism (a/k/a “the world”) is under attack by an evil enemy. GloboCap just can’t catch a break. From the moment it defeated communism and became a global ideological hegemon, it has been one evil enemy after another.

    No sooner had it celebrated winning the Cold War and started ruthlessly restructuring and privatizing everything than it was savagely attacked by “Islamic terrorists,” and so was forced to invade Iraq and Afghanistan, and kill and torture a lot of people, and destabilize the entire Middle East, and illegally surveil everybody, and … well, you remember the War on Terror.

    Then, just as the War on Terror seemed to be finally winding down, and the only terrorists left were the “self-radicalized” terrorists (many of whom weren’t even actual terrorists), and it looked like GloboCap was finally going to be able to finish privatizing and debt-enslaving everything and everyone in peace, wouldn’t you know it, we were attacked again, this time by the global conspiracy of Russian-backed, neo-fascist “populists” that caused the Brexit and elected Trump, and tried to elect Corbyn and Bernie Sanders, and loosed the gilets jaunes on France, and who’ve been threatening the “fabric of Western democracy” with dissension-sowing Facebook memes.

    Unfortunately, unlike the War on Terror, the War on Populism didn’t go that well. After four years of fighting, GloboCap (a/k/a the neoliberal Resistance) had … OK, they had snuffed both Corbyn and Sanders, but they had totally blown the Russiagate psyop, and so were looking at four more years of Trump, and Lord knows how many of Johnson in the U.K. (which had actually left the European Union), and the gilets jaunes weren’t going away, and, basically, “populism” was still on the rise (if not in reality, in hearts and minds).

    And so, just as the War on Populism had replaced (or redefined) the War on Terror, the War on Death has been officially launched to replace (or redefine) the War on Populism … which means (you guessed it), once again, it’s time to roll out another “brave new normal.”

    The character of this brave new normal is, at this point, unmistakably clear … so clear that most people cannot see it, because their minds are not prepared to accept it, so they do not recognize it, though they are looking right at it. Like Dolores in the Westworld series, “it doesn’t look like anything” to them. To the rest of us, it looks rather totalitarian.

    In the span of approximately 100 days, the entire global capitalist empire has been transformed into a de facto police state. Constitutional rights have been suspended. Most of us are under house arrest. Police are rounding up anyone not cooperating with the new emergency measures. They are pulling riders off of public transportation, arresting people whose papers aren’t in order, harrassing, beatingintimidating, and arbitrarily detaining anyone they decide is “a danger to public health.”

    Authorities are openly threatening to forcibly pull people out of their homes and quarantine them. Cops are hunting down runaway grandmothers. They’re raiding services in churches and synagogues. Citizens are being forced to wear ankle monitors. Families out for a walk are being menaced by robots and Orwellian drones.

    Counterterrorism troops have been deployed to deal with non-compliant “rule breakers.” Anyone the U.S. authorities deem to have “intentionally spread the coronavirus” can be arrested and charged as a coronavirus terrorist. Artificial intelligence firms are working with governments to implement systems to log and track our contacts and movements. As a recent Foreign Policy article put it:

    “The counterterrorism analogy is useful because it shows the direction of travel of pandemic policy. Imagine a new coronavirus patient is detected. Once he or she tests positive, the government could use cell-phone data to trace everyone he or she has been in close proximity to, perhaps focusing on those people who were in contact for more than a few minutes. Your cell-phone signal could then be used to enforce quarantine decisions. Leave your apartment and the authorities will know. Leave your phone behind and they will call you. Run the battery down and a police car will be at your door in a manner of minutes …”

    I could go on, but I think you get the picture, or … well, you either do or you don’t.

    And that is the really terrifying part of the War on Death and our “brave new normal” … not so much the totalitarianism. (Anyone who’s been paying attention is not terribly shocked by GloboCap’s decision to implement a global police state. The simulation of democracy is all fine and good, until the unwashed masses start to get unruly, and require a reminder of who’s in charge, which is what we are being treated to currently.)

    No, the terrifying part is how millions of people immediately switched off their critical faculties, got into line, and started goose-stepping, and parroting hysterical propaganda, and reporting their neighbors to the police for going outside for a walk or jog (and then sadistically shrieked abuse down at them like the Goodbye Jews Girl in Schindler’s List as they were wrestled to the ground and arrested).

    They are out there, right now, on the Internet, millions of these well-meaning fascists, patrolling for signs of the slightest deviation from the official coronavirus narrative, bombarding everyone with meaningless graphs, decontextualized death statistics, X-rays of fibrotic lungs, photos of refrigerated morgue trucksmass graves, and other sensationalistic horrors intended to short-circuit critical thinking and shut down any and all forms of dissent.

    Although undeniably cowardly and sickening, this kind of behavior is also not shocking. Sadly, when you terrorize people enough, the majority will regress to their animal instincts. It isn’t a question of ethics, or politics. It is purely a question of self-preservation. When you cancel the normal structure of society and place everyone in a “state of emergency” … well, it’s like what happens in a troop of chimpanzees when the alpha chimp dies or is killed by a challenger. The other chimps run around hooting and grimacing until it’s clear who the new dominant primate is, then they bend over to demonstrate their submission.

    Totalitarians understand this. Sadists and cult leaders understand this. When the people you are dominating get unruly, and start questioning your right to dominate them, you need to fabricate a “state of emergency” and make everyone feel very afraid, so that they turn (or return) to you for protection from whatever evil enemy is out there, threatening the cult, or the Fatherland, or whatever. Then, once they’ve returned to the fold, and stopped questioning your right to dominate them, you can introduce a new set of rules that everybody needs to follow to prevent this kind of thing happening again.

    This is obviously what is happening at the moment. But what you probably want to know is … why is it happening? And why is it happening at this precise moment?

    Lucky for you, I have a theory.

    No, it doesn’t involve Bill Gates, Jared Kushner, the WHO, and a global conspiracy of Chinese Jews defiling our precious bodily fluids with their satanic-alien 5G technology. It’s a little less exciting and more abstract than that (although some of those characters are probably part of it … all right, probably not the Chinese Jews, or the Satanic-Alien Illuminati).

    See, I try to focus more on systems (like global capitalism) than on individuals. And on models of power rather than the specific people in power at any given time. Looking at things that way, this global lockdown and our brave new normal makes perfect sense. Stay with me now … this gets kind of heady.

    What we are experiencing is a further evolution of the post-ideological model of power that came into being when global capitalism became a global-hegemonic system after the collapse of the Soviet Union. In such a global-hegemonic system, ideology is rendered obsolete. The system has no external enemies, and thus no ideological adversaries. The enemies of a global-hegemonic system by definition can only be internal. Every war becomes an insurgency, a rebellion breaking out within the system, as there is no longer any outside.

    As there is no longer any outside (and thus no external ideological adversary), the global-hegemonic system dispenses with ideology entirely. Its ideology becomes “normality.” Any challenge to “normality” is henceforth regarded as an “abnormality,” a “deviation from the norm,” and automatically delegitimized. The system does not need to argue with deviations and abnormalities (as it was forced to argue with opposing ideologies in order to legitimize itself). It simply needs to eliminate them. Opposing ideologies become pathologies … existential threats to the health of the system.

    In other words, the global-hegemonic system (i.e., global capitalism) becomes a body, the only body, unopposed from without, but attacked from within by a variety of opponents … terrorists, extremists, populists, whoever. These internal opponents attack the global-hegemonic body much like a disease, like a cancer, an infection, or a virus. And the global-hegemonic body reacts like any other body would.

    Is this model starting to sound familiar?

    I hope so, because that is what is happening right now. The system (i.e., global capitalism, not a bunch of guys in a room hatching a scheme to sell vaccines) is reacting to the last four years of populist revolt in a predictable manner. GloboCap is attacking the virus that has been attacking its hegemonic body. No, not the coronavirus. A much more destructive and multiplicitous virus … resistance to the hegemony of global capitalism and its post-ideological ideology.

    If it isn’t already clear to you yet that this coronavirus in no way warrants the totalitarian emergency measures that have been imposed on most of humanity, it will be become clear in the months ahead. Despite the best efforts of the “health authorities” to count virtually anything as “a Covid-19 death,” the numbers are going to tell the tale.

    The “experts” are already memory-holing, or recalibrating, or contextualizing, their initial apocalyptic projections. The media are toning down the hysteria. The show isn’t totally over yet, but you can feel it gradually coming to an end.

    In any event, whenever it happens, days, weeks, or months from now, GloboCap will dial down the totalitarianism, and let us out, so we can go back to work in whatever remains of the global economy … and won’t we all be so very grateful! There will be massive celebrations in the streets, Italian tenors singing on balconies, chorus lines of dancing nurses! The gilets jaunes will call it quits, the Putin-Nazis will stop with the memes, and Americans will elect Joe Biden president!

    Or, all right, maybe not that last part, but, the point is, it will be a brave new normal! People will forget all that populism nonsense, and just be grateful for whatever McJobs they can get to be able to pay the interest on their debts, because, hey … global capitalism isn’t so bad compared to living under house arrest!

    And, if not, no problem for GloboCap. They’ll just have to lock us down again, and keep locking us down, over and over, indefinitely, until we get our minds right. I mean, it’s not like we’re going to do anything about it … right? Didn’t we just demonstrate that? Sure, we’ll bitch and moan again, but then they’ll whip out those pictures of mass graves and death trucks, and the graphs, and all those scary projections, and the Blockwart-hotlines will start ringing again, and …


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 00:05

  • 'Rice ATM' Feeds Vietnam's Working Poor In Covid Lockdown
    ‘Rice ATM’ Feeds Vietnam’s Working Poor In Covid Lockdown

    Vietnam’s working-class poor are being fed by a 24/7 automatic dispensing machine providing free rice following a nationwide lockdown to curb the spread of COVID-19, reported Vietnam+.

    Hoang Tuan Anh, the Vietnamese entrepreneur behind the idea, designed the “rice ATM” to help “underprivileged people that have been impacted” by the shutdowns.

    As of Tuesday, there are 265 cases of the virus in the country with zero deaths. The spread has been slowed through strict social distancing measures enforced by the Communist government.

    The first ATM was installed in Ho Chi Minh City, a city in southern Vietnam. It dispenses a 3.3lb bag of rice to workers, many of whom have lost their jobs, as the government has shut down all non-essential businesses to slow the spread of the virus.

    Vietnam+ said the rice ATM would operate until the end of June. Similar ATMs have been set up in other large metro areas across the country.

    “This rice ATM has been helpful. With this one bag of rice, we can have enough for one day,” a 34-year-old mother of three children told Reuters. “Now, we only need other food. Our neighbors sometimes gave us some leftover food, or we have instant noodles.”

    Reuters documents how the rice ATM works in several images: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    24/7 rice ATM in Vietnam. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Women filling a bag with rice at ATM. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Man filling a bag with rice at ATM. h/t Reuters

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At least three rice ATMs can be seen at the one location. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Behind the scenes of rice stockpiled, being prepared to be placed into rice ATM hopper. h/t Reuters 

    Considering the hunger crisis developing in the US since the economy crashed and 17 million people or so have lost their jobs, could rice ATMs, or maybe food ATMs, be next? 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:45

  • An Alchemist Explains To Joe Sixpack: "COVID-19 Alters America's Hidden 'War' Forever"
    An Alchemist Explains To Joe Sixpack: “COVID-19 Alters America’s Hidden ‘War’ Forever”

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A perception ‘gap’, so wide, you could sail a Cruise Liner through it.

    • On the one hand, we have the looming spectre of recession; a major loss of jobs, and of earnings cratered (some 80% of the global workforce has seen their workplaces closed, or partly closed, as a result of the virus crisis),

    • and on the other hand, the shocking non-sequitur of the U.S. Fed reporting that, despite the crisis, ‘the average consumer expectation for higher stock-market prices one year hence has now surged to 47.7%, the highest on record’.

    ZeroHedge wryly comments, “Right … because with his job gone, his $400 dollars of emergency savings just spent on a roll of toilet paper, his bank preparing to foreclose on his home, all while a deadly virus lurks in every corner, all Joe Sixpack can think of – is how to get his ‘money on the sidelines’ into the stock market – since it is about to soar to all-time highs. And so, thanks to the Fed’s now grotesque interventions in all capital markets … as the economy slides into a depression, it is only ‘logical’ – we use the term loosely – that expectations of higher stock prices have never been higher.”

    A freak result, devoid of serious consideration? No. Actually, the paradox rather neatly ties together what is implicit, from that which has been explicit in U.S. policy, both domestically, and in terms of its foreign policy.

    In foreign policy – in the post-Covid era – we see tensions with China ratchetting higher. The U.S. already is engaged in a full-spectrum info-war to blame China for the virus (and to divert criticism from the U.S.’ lack of preparedness). China, recalling the earlier ‘Century of Humiliation’ visited on it by western states, and sensing some inherent racism in the taunts, inevitably is responding unusually assertively.

    In a recent episode of soul-searching by an Obama National Security adviser, Ben Rhodes has written of GW Bush’s speech (in wake of 9/11): “Our War on Terror begins with al-Qaeda, but it does not end there. It will not end until every terrorist group of global reach has been found, stopped, and defeated”. He further defined the nature of the conflict by saying, “Americans are asking, ‘Why do they hate U.S.?’ They hate what we see right here in this chamber – a democratically elected government”. To have this unfathomable event framed in a way that fitted neatly into the American narrative that I’d grown up with in the 1980s and ’90s, was reassuring, Rhodes admits.

    He later (in the article), says that he had been naïve, and swept along by his emotions, at seeing New York’s Twin Towers cascade down into dust – and was roused by Bush’s fiery rhetoric. Mr Sixpack probably feels similarly: He too, had been told that America’s economy was strong and booming, until the virus flew into it, despatching America’s economy into free fall. Shocked and angry, Joe probably hopes that America will ‘Give it to them’ (the Chinese that is, “they”, whom the narrative suggests were responsible for it).

    That is the explicit – in conjunction with Trump’s Trade War, triggered ostensibly by China’s ‘hijacking’ of America’s commercial assets.

    The ‘unsaid’ in this narrative is an old story of warfare. Destroy your enemy’s supply-lines to weaken him. In Britain in 1891, a small circle of the inner élite was formed, in secret, around Cecil Rhodes, the South African diamond millionaire, and Lord Rothschild. Its members aimed to renew the bond between Britain and the U.S., and they believed that ruling-class men of Anglo-Saxon descent, rightly sat at the top of a hierarchy built on predominance in trade, industry, banking and the exploitation of other lands (much as America’s élites do today).

    This élite harbored a deep-rooted fear however, that unless they acted decisively, British power and influence across the world would be eroded, and replaced by that of a burgeoning Germany. In the years immediately after the Boer War, the decision was reached: The danger had to be addressed. And ‘war’ with Germany was planned: initially as a severing of its supply-lines; a propaganda ‘war’ casting Germans as child-eaters, and through diplomatic containment.

    Narratives were harnessed to this objective, and the historian, Paul Vincent, tellingly recreates the atmosphere of jubilation that surrounded the outbreak of the war that was truly the fateful watershed of the twentieth century. H.G. Wells, for instance, gushed: “I find myself enthusiastic for this war against Prussian militarism … Every sword that is drawn against Germany is a sword drawn for peace.” Wells later coined the mendacious slogan “the war to end war”.

    Britain, from the onset of war in 1914, imposed a tight naval blockade on Germany. By preventing food from being imported into the country, the British brought starvation and malnutrition to large masses of the German people. German submarine warfare was a desperate response to the British blockade—a blockade so effective that it threatened to force the Germans out of the war.

    Fast-forward to today: The uprooting, and ‘re-patriating’ of China’s supply-lines back to America (given new fuel now, from the discovery that so many of America’s basic medical needs are ‘made in China’); seizing the commanding heights of technology; building out, militarily, into Space; mobilizing Europe against China; sanctioning China’s external sources of energy, and casting China as the virus-demon – all form today’s toolbox for what threatens the Anglo-élite.

    Perhaps the resident ‘Alchemist’ at ZeroHedge, will take Joe Sixpack aside, and quietly say to him:

    “Look, Joe, Covid-19 is merely a virus – an invisible organism. You can’t see it. You cannot ‘make war’ on it. When the British began imagining Germans as demonic monsters to be destroyed, they ended by not only destroying European culture, but also any commitment to the Ancient World’s notion of Virtù or Homeric heroic conduct.

    In their place, successive generations embraced relativism, nihilism, brooding pessimism and resentment. And from the massive, warring, governments’ intrusions into every facet of civil society, arose the German Kriegssozialismus that was to become the model for the Bolsheviks. Again, as Vincent points out, “the British achieved control over their economy, unequalled by any of the other belligerent states: But everywhere state seizure of social power, was accompanied and fostered by propaganda lies, unparalleled in history, to that time”.

    But why (asks Joe) did you smile so enigmatically when I said that I might buy stock (shares) on credit provided by my broker, to try to recoup my loss of earnings, as a result of the Coronavirus?

    “Well”, says the Alchemist, “I was thinking of the ‘hidden ‘war’, and how a virus ‘out of nowhere’ has changed its course, for good”.

    “What do you mean?”, queries Joe.

    “You recall how you said that the U.S. economy was fundamentally the strongest in the world? Well that’s not quite true. Sometime ago, U.S. growth began to falter, and the Authorities opted for a debt-driven, consumer-led economy. Money was printed (as credit), and – normally – a lot of new money or debt in circulation, would have created inflation (such as we had during the Reagan Administration).

    “How we managed this difficulty (apart from regularly re-jigging the price index), was by the so-called ‘China Trade’. China was then in the midst of its Industrial Revolution: they sent cheap products to Walmart. They effectively subsidised the middle classes, by giving U.S. a standard of living – access to cheap consumer-goods – which otherwise, we could not have afforded. And better still, they recirculated the monetary proceeds back to Wall Street, through buying U.S. Treasury bonds.

    “The point here, was that in so doing (buying our debt), the Chinese allowed U.S. to shrink our created, new-money ‘footprint’, by exporting U.S. dollar debt out of harm’s way – to Emerging Markets. We have lent out $13 trillion in this way, thus repressing the domestic money footprint.

    “These little ‘tricks’ were necessary to avoid inflation. But the inflation threat was mitigated also, in another way. All this new money was used to ‘financialise’ and leverage ‘everything’, from healthcare to education. They blew ‘bubbles’.

    This gave U.S. a simulacrum of ‘growth’ – but money-printing did not make the dollars available to you, I’m afraid, Joe. They got stuck in the financial system and were hoarded. You may have noticed that times were getting less rosy. But that was also a result of the U.S. business model, which has always prioritised capital formation and allowed labour costs to take the strain, or be eased-down by off-shoring labour costs to overseas.

    “Ah, but what of the ‘hidden war’ that you spoke about. How does that fit in?”, asks Joe.

    “You recall what I said earlier about Britain fearing that it could not stay at the pinnacle of international power forever? And seeing Germany somehow coming together, and building-out towards the East, in order in order to rival Britain? Well, China some years ago, stopped re-circulating the proceeds from the China Trade back to Wall Street, and instead started building-out towards Central Asia. It began spending the proceeds of the ‘China Trade’ building the Belt and Road, instead. As Germany had threatened to rival Britain, China was on a path to rival America.

    This posed a problem for the U.S.: firstly, how now to finance that China Trade; and secondly – not least – how to let the middle classes’ down gently, from the loss of their ‘China Trade’ ‘subsidy’, and avoid a ‘revolt’ inside the U.S. The blowing of the housing ‘bubble’ was intended – at least partly – as the offset.

    “Equally problematic for U.S. was that the Chinese-Russian Eurasian project, was intended to channel trade – in a hugely important sphere, including energy and raw materials – not via our channel – the dollar – but rather, away from it. The dollar has been ‘squeezed’ by the de-dollarisation crowd since at least 2007.

    Hence all the ‘tricks’ in the toolbox that I outlined earlier. But it got worse: We have tried to keep all the oil sales in the world going through the dollar (sanctioning non-compliant producers, creating instability of supply etc.), but scattergun of sanctions just brought everybody into our jurisdiction, and made their financial systems subject to arbitrary U.S. Treasury threat. The world doesn’t want to do that anymore. The revolt grew.

    This, in essence, was the ‘hidden war’. And it was not going so well: The U.S. Treasury – simply – was running out of further bubbles to blow. Finally, it had resorted to blowing the ‘everything bubble’ to maintain the appearance of a strong economy; but as this structure became ever bigger, more leveraged, more complex and thus opaque – so it became less stable. The Coronavirus ‘pin’ popped the bubble – forcing Washington to deploy unlimited money-printing, and to bailout simply, ‘everything’ (which is the inevitable ‘logical’ response to an ‘everything bubble’, I would imagine)”, said the Alchemist.

    “Then, what happens now” blurts out Joe, alarmed: “Will it end in war, like in the 19th Century?”

    “Possibly, but probably, not”, responds the Alchemist calmly. “China is too powerful, but its economy inevitably will have been weakened too. More likely, America will continue the struggle against China (and Russia) through proxies, such as in Venezuela, or in the Middle East. (Iran though is a special case, on account of Israel).”

    “At the end of WW1, European economies had been partly shut down by the war – and there were huge dollar debts owing to the U.S. Today, western economies are in partial lockdown due to Covid-19. And national debts today are similarly, more or less, at levels associated with (real) wartimes. And there is the $13 trillion – owed by emerging markets, and for which repayment in full, now must be viewed as problematic.

    “After WWI, there was no debt forgiveness (no debt jubilee), just a pass-the-parcel practiced by the European states, as they tried to off-load their debts onto others. To find an exit, some hoped that austerity could fix the problem. But others did resort to ‘helicopter money’ (much as the U.S. is so doing, in its response to the Covid-19 lockdown). The gold-backed German Reichsmark became the unbacked Papermark. Initially, the Reich financed its war outlays, in large part, through issuing debt. But From May 1923, the quantity of Papermark started spinning out of control. Wholesale prices skyrocketed. By 1918, you could have bought 500 billion eggs for the same money you would have to spend, five years later, for just one egg. The Papermark was scrap value.

    “With the collapse of the currency, unemployment was on the rise. Hyperinflation had impoverished the great majority of the German population, especially the middle class. People suffered from food shortages and cold. And political extremism was on the rise. This is a real risk, since all the earlier Treasury gigs to suppress inflation are no longer available.

    “So what might Washington do – especially about the $13 trillion debt owed by EMs?”, pleaded Joe. “Why don’t they reform the system?”

    “We don’t know what they will do”, sighed the Alchemist, “but the signals suggest that the Central Bankers are toying with a new global, reserve digital crypto-currency – against which EMs (and the U.S.) might devalue their currencies.

    (The former governor of the Bank of England has hinted at something like this).

    It might never happen. The type of ‘crypto’ the Central Bankers have in mind is one giving the authorities complete control: no real money, just a credit at the central bank with ATMs spitting out only what the central banks determine. And no, there will be no real reform – only ‘mumbleswerve’. But that – dirty money, lots and lots of it – is another story. Transparency is not an option.

    “So, you would advise me not to buy stocks?”, asks Joe.

    “No, I wouldn’t Joe. It seems that Trump now wants to bail out the American Middle Class in a different way. I know you, like many others, like to check out daily their 401K (stocks held as a future pension provision). And if it’s up, they are happy; if not they are gloomy. So Trump is trying to blast-up markets, with a wall of freshly printed money – and bailouts unlimited.

    “The President has taken full control of the (nuclear) button that controls the global supply of money, in dollars. He has control of the Treasury which has completed its take-over and merger with the Fed. How things work is that Congress authorises $450 billion in a CARES bailout. The Treasury gives it to the Fed as its stake – and then instructs the Fed to multiply that stake, by a factor of ten (through printing fresh money). The $450 billion becomes $450 trillion and is handed over to a friendly Hedge Fund – Blackrock – to distribute. And the details of the distribution are all tied up in confidentiality clauses and opacity. Trump becomes a secular Croesus: he can ‘print’ as much as he wishes. Nothing to stop him. Will be able to contain himself?

    Joe sighs.

    “So, the question then, Joe, is – is it really feasible for the market to soar when maybe half the economy is semi-furloughed, and inherent value is plunging?

    “As I mentioned earlier, money ‘printing’ does not always make dollars available. Liquidity is being provided to the U.S. banks: yes, but the problem is not so much liquidity; but one of potential default – especially on the $13 trillion owed overseas. So there is a massive scramble by those overseas debtors for dollars, with which to pay interest, and capital repayments, as they become due – and that means the dollar will soar (for now). It is the dollar strength that brings to world to its nadir (just like the 1930s).

    It is the dollar system that is the really big problem. This virus will either prick the dollar bubble and collapse it in an inflationary spiral downwards – or, the CBs will be forced to find some other solution (though God knows what!)

    Joe sighs again.

    “I’m afraid Joe, that I may not have been much help to you – sorry”.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:25

  • China Will Be Hit With Second Coronavirus Wave In November, Top Shanghai Clinical Expert Warns
    China Will Be Hit With Second Coronavirus Wave In November, Top Shanghai Clinical Expert Warns

    Over the past two weeks we have reported on several occasions that hidden behind Beijing’s endless barrage of lies that “all is well”, China – which rushed to reopen the country in March long before the epidemic was eradicated from the mainland – is starting to suffer a second wave of coronavirus despite the government solemn vows that all new cases are imported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Needless to say, the last thing the global economy – which is mostly shut down everywhere but in China – can take is another Chinese lockdown.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, that’s precisely what may be coming. According to Caixin, China could see another surge in coronavirus infections starting in November, one of the country’s highest-profile medical experts has said, as low numbers of new cases prompt governments nationwide to get people back to work.

    While countries may be able to bring the deadly pandemic under adequate control by autumn, the coming winter may bring a “second wave” of infections in China and elsewhere, said Zhang Wenhong, who heads Shanghai’s Covid-19 clinical expert team and directs the infectious disease department at one of the city’s top hospitals.

    Zhang’s comments come as Chinese officials gradually ease quarantine restrictions as part of efforts to revive the country’s economy. The East Asian nation, where the previously unknown virus was first detected last year, has seen numbers of daily new cases fall in recent weeks after recording thousands of Covid-19-related deaths and rolling out unprecedented lockdowns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Zhang Wenhong, head of Shanghai’s Covid-19 clinical expert team

    Speaking Saturday during an online livestream broadcast by popular short-video platform Kuaishou, Zhang said China’s experience with disease control means any resurgence in infections later this year will be manageable, and not require a repeat of the dramatic measures taken to curb the virus’s initial spread.

    “China won’t implement any shutdowns, and imported cases will certainly still make up the bulk of the outbreak,” Zhang said. In recent weeks, Beijing has been reporting that infected people traveling into China have made up the vast majority of the country’s new confirmed cases. Of course, Beijing has not been reporting that there were several thousand more urns mysteriously appearing in Wuhan than “official” deaths, so frankly when it comes to Chinese data, it’s all a lie.

    Like other public health experts, Zhang expects that in the long term, countries will have to take a flexible approach to recurring outbreaks. “For a long time, epidemic prevention and control will go through periods of relaxation and tightening. It will be possible to live and work normally, but it probably won’t be possible to completely eradicate the outbreaks,” he said.

    That means countries must continue to fight the pandemic together even after their initial domestic outbreaks have peaked, Zhang said, adding: “Only when all nations have properly controlled the disease will we all be able to live well again.”

    It wasn’t clear just how China would fight its next pandemic without shutting down the entire nation, when that’s precisely what China did in February, and the result has been a historic surge in defaults and delinquencies which Beijing has yet to address even as China’s economy fails to reboot.

    Aggressive testing and contact tracing, combined with immediate hospitalization of confirmed cases, is the secret to effective epidemic control, Zhang said, perhaps unaware that China did none of those and instead simply dragged the sick away to some unknown place while putting down whole towns and provinces under complete lockdown.

    But what may be most troubling of all, is that if China indeed suffers its next wave in November, that is right around the time when Morgan Stanley predicted the US will be hit by a second coronavirus wave as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Incidentally, as we reported earlier today, according to BofA’s latest Fund Managers Survey, a second, more powerful and economically crippling wave of infections similar to the one observed during the Spanish Flu…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … is now the biggest “tail risk” facing investors.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In that case, investors are about to be hit with a perfect storm some time in November/December when not just China but also the US are shut down for a second time. We only bring this up for those who – after watching the recent market surge with a dumbfounded expression on their face – are considering what month to pin their calendar put spread on. Well, now you know.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:12

  • Mapping The Wealthiest Person In Every US State In 2020
    Mapping The Wealthiest Person In Every US State In 2020

    There are different degrees of wealth that exist, even among the richest in America.

    For example, a heavy-hitting millionaire might have the most impressive fortune in his or her home state – but, as Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins shows below, venture a few miles across the state border, and suddenly they become a small fish in a much bigger pond.

    Today’s map comes to us from HowMuch.net, and it shows the incredible variance in the biggest fortunes on a state-by-state basis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Rich List, by State

    Below is the full list containing the wealthiest person in every U.S. state, based on calculations by Forbes in early March 2020.

    Amazon founder Jeff Bezos tops the list with a net worth of $117.1 billion in the state of Washington — meanwhile, the smallest fortune on the list is located in Alaska at just $0.3 billion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While all of the names above are considered extraordinarily wealthy in their home states, there is still a magnitude of difference involved. The low end of the list ($0.3 billion) would need to multiply their fortune by 390 times to get up to the $117.1 billion Bezos level.

    To put this another way, the same degree of difference exists between the median household wealth in the U.S. (~$100,000) and a multi-millionaire with $39 million to their name.

    Rising and Falling Fortunes

    The above figures were obtained prior to the COVID-19 market crash, which will surely impact the size of some of the fortunes listed here.

    Who will be most and least impacted by the recent stock market turmoil?

    Even though Jeff Bezos has most of his wealth tied up in Amazon stock, so far it has been relatively unaffected by the volatility. With more people staying home because of social distancing, orders on online platforms such as Amazon have exploded.

    Similarly to Amazon, the heirs of the Walmart fortune in the Walton family — including Jim Walton, Alice Walton, and Rob Walton — are also seeing Walmart’s stock price hold relatively steady in the face of volatility. In fact, some analysts consider Walmart to be the ultimate “recession-proof” stock, as consumers flock to discount goods in poor economic times.

    Warren Buffett is also an interesting case. Though the stock market has certainly disrupted the real-time value of his fortune, that’s not the game that Warren Buffett plays. In fact, he is known for waiting for times of crisis to deploy his cash, and has a significant stockpile of money ready for just this kind of situation.

    Billionaires like Sheldon Adelson in Nevada or Philip Anschutz of Colorado might be singing a different tune than some of the other above magnates. Adelson, for example, owns a good chunk of the Las Vegas Strip, as well as casinos and hotels in Singapore and Macao. Unfortunately, tourism-related businesses are some of the hardest hit in the COVID-19 crash.

    Meanwhile, Anschutz owns the Coachella Music Festival and stakes in many professional sports teams (LA Lakers, LA Kings, and multiple MLS teams), which have all been impacted by the cancellation of big events and gatherings throughout the country. Like many others, Anschutz is probably itching for things to get back to normal.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:05

  • Social Distancing Efforts Are Now Cemented Into American Life
    Social Distancing Efforts Are Now Cemented Into American Life

    Authored by Justin McCarthy via Gallup.com,

    Avoiding public transportation such as planes, buses, subways or trains (89%) and small gatherings (84%) has become the norm for more than eight in 10 Americans. Nearly as many Americans are avoiding public places such as stores and restaurants (78%) out of concern about COVID-19. A smaller majority of U.S. adults (61%) have stocked up on food, medical or cleaning supplies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Majorities of Americans have reported taking each of these actions since Gallup polling conducted March 20-22, and figures for most measures have remained at about their current levels since then.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest results, from a probability-based Gallup Panel survey conducted online April 6-9, reflect Americans’ reported actions they have taken to socially distance themselves since late March.

    Some notable differences by subgroup include:

    • Adults aged 18 to 44 are a bit more likely than older adults to have taken each of these actions.

    • Solid majorities within all major political party groups report having taken these measures — but Democrats are most likely to report having done so. The biggest differences between Democrats and Republicans are seen in the percentages saying they’ve avoided public places (86% among Democrats and 70% among Republicans) and avoided small gatherings (92% among Democrats and 74% among Republicans).

    • Few differences exist across income groups in terms of actions they have taken — except for the percentages saying they’ve stocked up on food, medical or cleaning supplies. While at least six in 10 higher-income households (66%) and middle-income households (61%) report having stocked up, less than half of lower-income households (49%) say the same.

    A majority of working adults (63%) say they have worked from home as a result of concerns about the pandemic — on par with the 59% to 63% recorded since March 23.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, one in five U.S. workers have stayed home and have been unable to work as a result of the outbreak. This figure has ranged from 19% to 25% since March 16.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:45

  • "Black People Not Allowed" – China Denies Reports It Banned African Residents From Guangzhou
    “Black People Not Allowed” – China Denies Reports It Banned African Residents From Guangzhou

    Africans living in the Southern Chinese city of Guangzhou say they have been victims of racism, forced into quarantine, banned from shops, and evicted from rentals, following five Nigerians testing positive for COVID-19, in a district of the city known as “Little Africa.”

    The South China Morning Post (SCMP) reports infections are centered around Kuangquan Street in Yuexiu district, “has raised the alarm in a city that has so far reported only 463 cases of COVID-19.” 

    Guangzhou is a major trading partner with countries in Africa and has a sizeable African population. 

    Local authorities have forced Africans into a 14-day quarantine and submit to random virus testing. There are even reports that some of these folks have been banned from shops and, in extreme cases, evicted from their rental properties. 

    The move by authorities has triggered a backlash by a Nigerian community group in Guangzhou, led by Maximus Ogbonna, who said,

    “People are not happy because they’re being forced out of their apartments and into hotels where they have to pay [$30] a night for 28 days.” 

    Ogbonna is in a 14-day quarantine at his home. Police installed a camera above his front door to detect if he breaches the health order. 

    African diplomats sent a letter to China’s Foreign Minister Wang Yi saying, “The Group of African Ambassadors in Beijing immediately demands the cessation of forceful testing, quarantine and other inhuman treatments meted out to Africans.”

    Beijing rejected allegations of racism in Guangzhou, saying the accusations are nothing more than a Western ploy to undermine its image in this challenging time. 

    Foreign ministry spokesman Zhao Lijian said on Monday that the Chinese government “treats all foreign personnel in China equally, opposes any differential practices targeting specific groups of people, and has zero tolerance for discriminatory words and deeds.”

    He said he stands with its “brothers” in Africa… 

    However, BBC Africa business editor Larry Madowo was upset with China’s response. He tweeted: “Chinese government’s statement on racist treatment of Africans in the country because of coronavirus is objectively terrible. It’s a word salad that says nothing, offers no apologies and provides air cover for racist officials.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Saturday, the US consulate in Guangzhou advised African Americans to halt all travels to the city. It issued a security alert that read “police ordered bars and restaurants not to serve clients who appear to be of African origin,” and police are conducting mandatory testing and self-quarantine for “anyone with ‘African contacts.’

    AP News said local law enforcement in the city recently responded to rumors that “300,000 black people in Guangzhou were setting off a second epidemic,” which caused alarm. Officials later said the rumor was fake news… Or was it? Because as we’ve explained, the second wave of infections could be imminent, and China is likely to blame foreigners this time around instead of bat soup.

    Twitter account Black Livity China posted a video on Saturday that showed a sign at a Guangzhou McDonald’s that read: “We have been informed that from now on black people are not allowed to enter the restaurant”; McDonald’s told Forbes once it heard of the sign, it “immediately removed the communication and temporarily closed the restaurant” as it was “not representative of our inclusive values.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s new virus cases hit a six-week high over the weekend, sparked mainly from travelers arriving from overseas, well that’s at least what Beijing is telling the world. It seems the Communist government is gearing up for the second infection wave and will likely blame foreigners, maybe specifically Africans in Guangzhou. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:25

  • JPM Sees Global Profits "Cratering" 70% In Q2, No Recovery Until 2023
    JPM Sees Global Profits “Cratering” 70% In Q2, No Recovery Until 2023

    Late last week, we showed a chart from Credit Suisse which we described simply as “insanity” because it demonstrated that as the US careened into a depression, with GDP crashing and the unemployment rate soaring, between the latest Fed-driven surge in stocks and the collapse in earnings estimates, the PE multiple on the broader market had eclipsed the previous record of 19.0x set during the market’s February all time high, and had now hit a new all-time high of 19.4x. In other words, the market has never been more overvalued than it is right now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Following today’s market surge, this disconnect got even greater because as earnings estimates fell further…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … stocks rose, and the latest PE multiple (on 2021 earnings mind you) is now a dot com bubble-eseque 24x.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That this it taking place as the global economy careens into the biggest contraction in generations is patently absurd, or would be if the Fed had not directly taken over markets to lift risk prices in a move that has gotten even the world’s largest asset manager openly admitting the only strategy left is to buy what the Fed is buying.

    Meanwhile, with asset prices now completely disconnected from underlying earnings, the global economy can go to hell in a hand basket and none of the billionaires in control will mind – after all the value of their stock holdings is once again fast approaching all time high.

    And speaking of hell in a hand basket, that’s precisely where the global economy is headed despite what the market may be signaling, because while global GDP is now expected to slump 14% in the first half of 2020 according to JPM, resulting in the US losing a “stunning and  unprecedented 25 million workers and pushing the unemployment rate to a level last seen in the Great Depression”, a more important question is what happens to corporate profits, and it is here that the real pain – at least for those tasked to find a connection between profits and stock prices – comes because according to JPM, since global profits are levered to GDP and not to the Fed’s balance sheet, the largest US commercial bank (which itself reported the biggest plunge in its profits since the financial crisis) expects global profits to plunge by 70% in Q2 2020.

    How does JPM get this number? As the bank’s economist Joseph Lipton explains, in the 2001 recession, global GDP growth slowed by 3.7%-pts. Over this same period, global corporate profit growth slumped roughly 62%-pts—a huge decline driven in part by the crash of the tech bubble. Next, in the global financial crisis, global GDP growth slumped 9.8%, while corporate profit growth tumbled nearly 68.5%-pts—a profit to GDP “beta” of seven.

    In the current recession, JPM expects global GDP growth to collapse by the same 9.8%-points in the year through Q2 202 relative to the prior year. Despite the differing nature of the shocks and additional significant hit to the service sector now,
    JPM still assumes a beta of seven—on par with the global financial crisis. This implies a plunge in corporate profits of roughly 70% in the year through 2Q20.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While earnings will get support from fiscal and monetary policy, that support will come at a cost to tax payers according to JPM. Government debt will surge well over 10%-pts of GDP this year and rise further in 2021. Most policy actions are aimed at supporting aggregate demand, thereby indirectly cushioning private sector income loses. Still, some actions will directly boost profits through tax and credit policies. Nevertheless, despite the huge policy supports, JPM concludes that “the global profit loss will likely still be material” and from the bank’s top-down macro perspective, “global corporate profits look set to crater 72% in the year through 2Q20.”

    It gets worse: while many expect a V- or even U shaped recovery, JPM admits that even with the projected strong subsequent rebound, global profits are expected to stand more than 20% below their forecasted pre-pandemic level at the end of 2021!

    In other words, profits won’t recover their pre-pandemic baseline until some time in 2022 if not 2023, which is terrible news for Wall Street strategists as it means they will now have to apply forward multiples from 2023 for their optimistic recos to make any sense.

    Overall, lost profits will cumulate to roughly three-fourths of one-year’s earnings by the end of 2021 (50% in 2020 and another 25% in 2021). The reason for JPM’s dour take: “with corporate debt set to balloon and a significant rise in bankruptcies increasingly likely, the overall deterioration of corporate sector balance sheets will likely be an ongoing legacy of the COVID-19 shock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JPM then admits that even this catastrophic forecast could prove to be optimistic as the projected path of profits is based on the historical response to nominal GDP growth; and while the relationship is fairly robust (Figure 1), such an exercise is rife with uncertainty given the unique nature of the COVID-19 shock as well as the policy response. As a result, the breadth of the shock to sectors that are usually less impacted by the cycle (namely services) suggests profit losses could be amplified. As such, “it remains likely that the path ahead will incorporate both a significant hit to profits and large rise in corporate debt outstanding.

    JPM saves the worst possible scenario for last: according to the bank’s economists, the breadth of this recession could also amplify the breadth of the hit to profits. Unlike the GFC, which began as a financial market shock in the US, the COVID-19 pandemic has spread globally. Consequently, each country is experiencing both a loss of external demand (typical for a global recession) and a unique hit to domestic demand from containment policies.

    The same argument can be applied to the outlook across sectors. Although profits dropped 50-60% in each of the past two global recessions, the composition varied (aside from earnings in the energy sector, which dropped 42% peak to trough in both). The 2001 recession owed to the bursting of the tech bubble. Both IT and Telecom experienced massive declines in earnings: 64% and 40%, respectively. Tech was hit in the GFC but only about one-half as much as in 2001, while Telecom fared well. Rather, the GFC hit the financial sector hard. In contrast to the 2001 recession, when financial earnings were only down 19%, the GFC exacted a 72% toll on the sector. Materials were hit even more, down 80% compared to 29% in the 2001 recession. This discrepancy owes to the fact that the 2001 recession sparked the beginning of the housing bubble, which ended badly in the GFC.

    Long story short, investment banks which have given up on 2020 as a forward PE anchor – because nobody knows what happens this year yet somehow everyone knows what will happen next year – and are instead using 2021 now, will soon have to go forward even more and within the next several months, we expect to see PE valuations models based on 2022 earnings and eventually 2023. At some point the market will realize that such a “valuation” – which is merely an excuse for not admitting the terminal disconnect between fundamentals and prices – is idiotic and absurd, and when that happens, the S&P will not only take out the March 24 lows but sprint right for the March 2009 “generational bottom.”

    And a quick tangent: there is a possibility, if companies rush to make Q2 a kitchen sink quarter, that Q2 earnings will not even be positive. Which, in keeping with the idiocy of these centrally planned markets where the lower the EPS, the exponentially higher the PE, would mean that there is a distinct probability that – with the Fed’s blessing of course – the S&P500 could hit +∞ in the coming weeks.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:01

  • Navy's Mercy Hospital Ship Off L.A. Now Battling Serious COVID-19 Outbreak Among Crew
    Navy’s Mercy Hospital Ship Off L.A. Now Battling Serious COVID-19 Outbreak Among Crew

    It was supposed to help relieve local California hospitals in the fight against coronavirus, but now it may have become a dangerous source of spreading the disease.

    The emergency response ship USNS Mercy, docked since last month in the Port of Los Angeles, has been hit with a significant outbreak on board, with seven total crew members testing positive for COVID-19, the Navy said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The USNS Mercy arrived at the Port of Los Angeles on March 27, 2020. Image via KTLA

    All of the infected have now been removed from the ship and put into isolation in an especially worrisome situation given the ship is geared toward housing and caring for vulnerable non-coronavirus patients to take the strain off of area hospitals. 

    People recently having contact with the newly positive crew members have also been put in isolation off the ship and are being monitored. In total the Mercy has 1,000 military personnel, assisted by a small civilian staff. 

    The Navy says the rise in infections aboard the Mercy will not stop its mission to receive medical patients: “The ship is following protocols and taking every precaution to ensure the health and safety of all crew members and patients on board,” a statement said. “This will not affect the ability for Mercy to receive patients at this time.”

    It must be remembered that an entire nuclear aircraft carrier and its crew of nearly 5,000 was put out of commission off Guam last month amid a growing number of infections. The Theodore Roosevelt now has at least 585 sailors that tested COVID-19 positive, including the death of one sailor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USNS Mercy previously departing from San Diego, via AP.

    Concerning the Mercy, there’s growing concern as to the source of infections which may trace back to major military hospitals in San Diego.

    The SD Union-Tribute reports

    The sailors came aboard after serving at various Navy medical installations, including Naval Medical Center San Diego. The hospital is one of two military medical facilities in San Diego County seeing service members who seek treatment and testing for COVID-19. The other is Naval Hospital Camp Pendleton.

    Because some medical staff rotated through the COVID-19 screening area at Naval Medical Center San Diego prior to deploying on the Mercy, one sailor told the Union-Tribune, there is concern on board that the crew brought the virus with them when they left San Diego.

    The Navy has actually been the most severely impacted by the pandemic, as numbers showed that were made public prior to the Pentagon clamping down on public Covid-19 military infections reporting.

    A similar floating hospital, the USNS comfort in New York, has also witnessed a handful of crew members catch COVID-19, with the Navy reporting at least three at the start of the week. The Comfort was originally intended to house non-coronavirus patients as NYC facilities dealt with rising cases, however, after local hospitals were overwhelmed the ship switched to taking on coronavirus patients.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:45

  • COVID-19 & The War On Cash: What Is Behind The Push For A Cashless Society?
    COVID-19 & The War On Cash: What Is Behind The Push For A Cashless Society?

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    Cash may well become a casualty of the COVID-19 pandemic…

    As these COVID-19 lockdowns drag out, more and more individuals and businesses are going cashless (for convenience and in a so-called effort to avoid spreading coronavirus germs), engaging in online commerce or using digital forms of currency (bank cards, digital wallets, etc.). As a result, physical cash is no longer king.

    Yet there are other, more devious, reasons for this re-engineering of society away from physical cash: a cashless society—easily monitored, controlled, manipulated, weaponized and locked down—would play right into the hands of the government (and its corporate partners).

    To this end, the government and its corporate partners-in-crime have been waging a subtle war on cash for some time now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What is this war on cash?

    It’s a concerted campaign to shift consumers towards a digital mode of commerce that can easily be monitored, tracked, tabulated, mined for data, hacked, hijacked and confiscated when convenient.

    According to economist Steve Forbes,

    “The real reason for this war on cash – start with the big bills and then work your way down – is an ugly power grab by Big Government. People will have less privacy: Electronic commerce makes it easier for Big Brother to see what we’re doing, thereby making it simpler to bar activities it doesn’t like, such as purchasing salt, sugar, big bottles of soda and Big Macs.”

    Much like the war on drugs and the war on terror, this so-called “war on cash” is being sold to the public as a means of fighting terrorists, drug dealers, tax evaders and now COVID-19 germs.

    Digital currency provides the government and its corporate partners with the ultimate method to track, control you and punish you.

    In much the same way that Americans have opted into government surveillance through the convenience of GPS devices and cell phones, digital cash—the means of paying with one’s debit card, credit card or cell phone—is becoming the de facto commerce of the American police state.

    Not too long ago, it was estimated that smart phones would replace cash and credit cards altogether by 2020. Right on schedule, a growing number of businesses are adopting no-cash policies, including certain airlines, hotels, rental car companies, restaurants and retail stores. In Sweden, even the homeless and churches accept digital cash.

    Making the case for “never, ever carrying cash” in lieu of a digital wallet, journalist Lisa Rabasca Roepe argues that cash is inconvenient, ATM access is costly, and it’s now possible to reimburse people using digital apps such as Venmo. Thus, there’s no longer a need for cash.

    “More and more retailers and grocery stores are embracing Apple Pay, Google Wallet, Samsung Pay, and Android Pay,” notes Roepe.

    “PayPal’s app is now accepted at many chain stores including Barnes & Noble, Foot Locker, Home Depot, and Office Depot. Walmart and CVS have both developed their own payment apps while their competitors Target and RiteAid are working on their own apps.”

    So what’s the deal here?

    Despite all of the advantages that go along with living in a digital age—namely, convenience—it’s hard to imagine how a cashless world navigated by way of a digital wallet doesn’t signal the beginning of the end for what little privacy we have left and leave us vulnerable to the likes of government thieves and data hackers.

    • First, when I say privacy, I’m not just referring to the things that you don’t want people to know about, those little things you do behind closed doors that are neither illegal nor harmful but embarrassing or intimate. I am also referring to the things that are deeply personal and which no one need know about, certainly not the government and its constabulary of busybodies, nannies, Peeping Toms, jail wardens and petty bureaucrats.

    • Second, we’re already witnessing how easy it will be for government agents to manipulate digital wallets for their own gain. For example, civil asset forfeiture schemes are becoming even more profitable for police agencies thanks to ERAD (Electronic Recovery and Access to Data) devices supplied by the Department of Homeland Security that allow police to not only determine the balance of any magnetic-stripe card (i.e., debit, credit and gift cards) but also freeze and seize any funds on pre-paid money cards. In fact, the Eighth Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that it does not violate the Fourth Amendment for police to scan or swipe your credit card.

    • Third, the war on cash is about giving the government the ultimate control of the economy and complete access to the citizenry’s pocketbook.

    • Fourth, every technological convenience that has made our lives easier has also become our Achilles’ heel, opening us up to greater vulnerabilities from hackers and government agents alike.

    • Fifth, if there’s one entity that will not stop using cash for its own nefarious purposes, it’s the U.S. government. Cash is the currency used by the government to pay off its foreign “associates.”

    • Sixth, this drive to do away with cash is part of a larger global trend driven by international financial institutions and the United Nations that is transforming nations of all sizes, from the smallest nation to the biggest, most advanced economies.

    • Finally, short of returning to a pre-technological, Luddite age, there’s really no way to pull this horse back now that it’s left the gate. While doing so is near impossible, it would also mean doing without the many conveniences and advantages that are the better angels, if you will, of technology’s totalitarian tendencies: the internet, medical advances, etc.

    To our detriment, we have virtually no control over who accesses our private information, how it is stored, or how it is used. Whether we ever had much control remains up for debate. However, in terms of our bargaining power over digital privacy rights, we have been reduced to a pitiful, unenviable position in which we can only hope and trust that those in power will treat our information with respect.

    Clearly, as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American Peoplewe have come full circle, back to a pre-revolutionary era of taxation without any real representation.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:25

  • Vince McMahon's XFL Has Shuttered And Filed For Bankruptcy…Again
    Vince McMahon’s XFL Has Shuttered And Filed For Bankruptcy…Again

    This time it was supposed to be different.

    But it ended the same: with Vince McMahon signing his name on a bankruptcy declaration for the XFL.

    The league’s “comeback” season has ended in unceremonious fashion as the coronavirus pandemic has forced the league to once again shutter. The Chapter 11 bankruptcy filing was put into process days after the league laid off its employees and revealed that it had no plans for a 2021 season. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    McMahon executed his written consent for bankruptcy as the sole voting member on Sunday, according to Law & Crime. The document, filed for McMahon’s Alpha Entertainment, LLC, reads:

    “The undersigned, being the sole voting Member of Alpha Entertainment LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the ‘Company’), hereby adopts the following resolutions, by written consent, effective as of the date hereof,” the filing began. “WHEREAS, the Company desires and has requested that John Brecker and Vincent K. McMahon each serve as a Liquidating Agent (as defined in the LLC Agreement) of the Company and, in such capacity, to commence a case (the ‘Chapter 11 Case’) under chapter 11 of title 11 of the United States Code (the ‘Bankruptcy Code’) and manage the business and affairs of the Company during the Chapter 11 Case.”

    According to the LA Times, the league’s coaches rounded out the list of its largest creditors. “The creditors include seven of the league’s eight head coaches, led by Bob Stoops of the Dallas Renegades ($1 million) and Marc Trestman of the Tampa Bay Vipers ($777,777). Winston Moss, who served as coach and general manager of the Los Angeles Wildcats, is owed $583,333.”

    “Unfortunately, as a new enterprise, we were not insulated from the harsh economic impacts and uncertainties caused by the COVID-19 crisis,” the XFL said in a statement.

    “It’s done and it’s not coming back,” one person was quoted as saying.

    Here’s a look at the XFL during the fonder days of the 2020 season:


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:05

  • Aussie Cops Use Surveillance Helicopter To Track Down Remote Campers
    Aussie Cops Use Surveillance Helicopter To Track Down Remote Campers

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    Police in Tasmania are using a surveillance helicopter to track down people camping in remote locations in violation of coronavirus lockdown laws.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Tasmania Police officers conducting aerial surveillance around the state, including on the North-West Coast located several campsites where people were directed to leave and return home,” reports The Advocate.

    “When u social distance so well that the cops have to find u by helicopter,” tweeted Twitter user @PetiteNicoco.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    17 people across the state were charged with a lockdown offense in a period of just 24 hours over the Easter weekend.

    The Westpac Rescue Helicopter “landed near campsites which were viewed from the air” to interrogate campers in the region. Where the chopper couldn’t land, officers were dispatched to the area on foot.

    Commander Rob Blackwood called the campers “selfish” for endangering other people during the COVID-19 pandemic despite them literally being around no other people.

    “Covert and marked police vehicles, and the Westpac Rescue Helicopter, will continue to undertake patrols around the state, so if you’re away from your primary residence you can expect police to stop and speak to you about your movements,” Tasmania Police said on their Facebook page.

    The practice was denounced by many as absurd overkill given that the campers are hardly posing a threat to anybody.

    “That seems like a waste of resources,” responded one Twitter user.

    “You will do as commanded, even if you’re already doing it in the woods. Compliance is nonoptional. The state knows what is best, citizen,” commented another.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:45

  • Second Wave Of Coronavirus Layoffs Claiming Workers Who Thought They Were Safe
    Second Wave Of Coronavirus Layoffs Claiming Workers Who Thought They Were Safe

    When the United States went into a virtual lockdown to slow the spread of the coronavirus pandemic, the effects were devastating. Within a three week period, nearly 17 million people have filed for unemployment, while modern day ‘bread lines’ are getting longer each day across the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The initial victims of the lockdown were the most financially vulnerable; restaurant workers, retail employees, and other low-paying jobs in industries which were immediately impacted by a lack of foot traffic.

    Now, a second wave of layoffs is hitting those who thought they were safe, according to the Wall Street Journal. White collar workers working from home are being laid off by companies suffering from dismal sales. Law firms are cutting hours and eliminating positions as court systems and legal actions have ground to a near-standstill. And goverment who assumed their jobs would be safe are being furloughed amid city and state budget shortfalls. Even healthcare workers who aren’t directly fighting the pandemic are finding themselves without work. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And according to the Journal, there’s more pain in the cards.

    The consensus of 57 economists surveyed this month by The Wall Street Journal is that 14.4 million jobs will be lost in the coming months, and the unemployment rate will rise to a record 13% in June, from a 50-year low of 3.5% in February. Already nearly 17 million Americans have sought unemployment benefits in the past three weeks, dwarfing any period of mass layoffs recorded since World War II.

    Gregory Daco, chief U.S. economist of Oxford Economics, projects 27.9 million jobs will be lost, and industries beyond those ordered to close will account for 8 to 10 million, a level of job destruction on a par with the 2007-09 recession.

    Oxford Economics, a U.K.-based forecasting and consulting firm, projects April’s jobs report, which will capture late-March layoffs, will show cuts to 3.4 million business-services workers, including lawyers, architects, consultants and advertising professionals, as well as 1.5 million nonessential health-care workers and 100,000 information workers, including those working in the media and telecommunications.

    The virus shock does not discriminate across sectors as we initially thought,” Mr. Daco said. –WSJ

    And where jobs haven’t been lost, hours have been reduced across many sectors:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tales of economic chaos

    The Journal interviewed a diverse sampling of professionals, who shared what they’re seeing within their industries.

    “Customers who paid like clockwork for 10-plus years are suddenly late,” said Gary Cuozzo – owner of Connecticut-based web host and developer, ISG Software Group, who says he’s received just a few hundred dollars in accounts receivable in recent weeks from customers which include manufacturers, retailers and nonprofits.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gary Cuozzo, owner of ISG Software Group, stopped drawing a salary to keep his business afloat.

    Cuozzo says he stopped drawing a salary several weeks ago and has filed for unemployment – ‘essentially volunteering’ while working from home so his business can remain afloat.

    “We have no software projects,” he said. “Everything is on hold.”

    Those employed in industries where working from home is feasible are facing widespread layoffs, said ZipRecruiter labor economist Julia Pollak. The recruiting site itself laid off more than 400 of its 1,200 full-time employees at the end of March.

    A survey of visitors to the job-search site found 39% employed in business and professional services reported they were laid off, nearly the same rate as respondents in retail and wholesale trade. (Active job seekers are more likely to be laid off than the average American.) Among the respondents who still had jobs, many in white-collar industries said their hours were cut. –WSJ

    “Any company that had been planning to open a second location, that hired an architect, an office designer, and contractor—they’re not opening that location this year and those people now won’t have jobs. Any company planning to go public this year, that hired accountants, consultants, PR professionals—they’re laying off all those teams,” said Pollak, the economist.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hospitals have been cutting elective surgical procedures and routine care across the country in order to free up resources (while many have been filmed virtually empty, and nurses have enough time on their hands to make tiktok videos all day).

    “In a sense we kind of sacrificed that revenue for a public-health interest,” said Manchester, NH cardiologist Daniel Philbin of the New England Heart and Vascular Institute. “The hospital systems really are facing an incredible crunch because of this—the longer the curve gets pushed out, the more they face difficult decisions about employment.”

    Emily Hill thought her job as a dental assistant was safe, being in an in-demand field and employed through the military. She worked as a contractor at a dental clinic on Fort Hood in Texas.

    “I always felt untouchable,” she said. “This really puts you in your place.”WSJ

    Law firms, meanwhile, have been cutting staff and slashing pay due to a stark lack of business, as courts are virtually paused and new deals – which typically require lawyers – just aren’t happening.

    “Law firms are not going to be the top of the priority,” said Timothy Lupinacci – CEO of 700-layer firm Baker Donelson, which has some 20 offices in the Southeast and mid-Atlantic region. They’ve reduced compensation for staff and associates by 20%.

    Meanwhile, New York City-based Cadwalader, Wickersham & Taft LLP, a 400-attorney firm specializing in financial services has slashed salaries by 25% – and partners aren’t currently getting paid at all.

    Economic analysts, meanwhile, are basically all over the place when it comes to predicting when the labor market will bounce back, as it all depends – of course – on when this much-promised vaccine will materialize, and when the economy can ‘open back up’ successfully.

    The biggest wild card in the jobs outlook is how long it will take for jobs to bounce back, which depends heavily on how long the pandemic and social-distancing measures last. The consensus among the economists surveyed by the Journal is for employment to return to its February 2020 level in 27 months, but views varied widely.

    Economist Amy Crews Cutts, of AC Cutts & Associates LLC, expects the labor market to take 5½ years to fully bounce back. The sheer scale of job cuts so far, even if they don’t worsen further, are “an extraordinary number of jobs to reverse and put back into the economy,” she said.

    Still, post-lockdown prospects aren’t great either according to some – as many industries are going to enter their own cyclical recessions (or worse).

    “Industries that are subject to cyclical cycles, like finance, real estate and manufacturing, are likely to have layoffs,” said Moody’s Analytics economis Adam Kamins, who thinks that about half the jobs lost to the pandemic will be regained by the end of the summer.

    “The lockdown may be over, but there’s likely to be a prolonged period of stagnation.”

    Read the rest of the report here.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:25

  • NY Fed Head Trader: "The Scale Of Our Asset Purchases Has Been Unparalleled"
    NY Fed Head Trader: “The Scale Of Our Asset Purchases Has Been Unparalleled”

    In remarks delivered before the Foreign Exchange Committee of the NY Fed, Lorie Logan, who is the head of the Fed’s open markets, i.e., the head trader of the world’s biggest hedge fund, commented on the Fed’s unprecedented intervention, and takeover, of capital markets, saying that “the scale of these purchases has been unparalleled, totaling about $1.6 trillion in the past four weeks“, something we showed last week when laid out the hundreds of billions in weekly purchases in the past 4 weeks, eclipsing the intervention during the financial crisis by orders of magnitude, as follows:

    • April 8: $$272BN
    • April 1: $557BN
    • March 25: $586BN
    • March 17:$356BN

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then again, hearing it from the person who made it all possible is so much more fulfilling.

    Logan than explain why the Fed decided it was in America’s best interest to nationalize the capital markets, saying that “supporting smooth market functioning does not mean restoring every aspect of market functioning to its level before the coronavirus crisis. Some aspects of liquidity—especially aspects related to transactions costs and market depth—are importantly affected by fundamental factors such as how the current extraordinary uncertainty about the economic outlook influences trading behavior. These aspects of market functioning may not return all the way to pre-crisis levels for some time, even as our purchases slow.”

    That’s the spin, the reality is that liquidity is collapsing in the Treasury market because of the Fed’s purchases, which is soaking up so many bonds it now owns up to 50% and in some cases more, of any given Cusip, especially those with longer maturities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lorie Logan, Head of Market Operations

    Logan then had some disappointing words for those who are hoping the Fed will push the VIX back to 10: “supporting smooth market functioning” does not “mean eliminating all volatility. In well-functioning markets, prices will respond rapidly and efficiently to new information.” Except, of course, when the information is negative and the Fed has to buy everything that is being sold as it just did in the past 3 weeks. But then again, this is the same Fed which thinks the US population is too dumb to understand what is going on.

    Some words of advice for Ms. Logan: the people are no longer dumb and they understand precisely what the Fed is doing. Perhaps to preempt the populist anger that will soon target the Fed itself, Logan then elaborated by saying that “during the unprecedented disruption caused by the coronavirus pandemic, a great deal of new information arrives every day about the outlook for specific markets, such as housing, and for the economy as a whole. These changes in the outlook should move the Treasury and agency MBS markets irrespective of the Federal Reserve’s purchases.”

    Right, they “should”, which is probably why the Fed had has been the buyer of first, last and only resort, and why even the $7 trillion BlackRock is no longer even shy to admit that the only trade in this farce of a market (as Howard Marks discussed) is to front- or back-run the Fed: “We’ll Just Buy Whatever Central Banks Are Buying“‘

    Finally, in one desperate attempt to deflect the coming shitstorm that will – we hope – finally end the Fed, Logan tried to deflect blame stating that “today’s crisis is different, having originated outside the financial system, in an enormous challenge to public health.” Which is, of course, also a lie, because had companies not spent $4 trillion on buybacks in the past 4 years and instead had allocated the money to a “fat tail” fund, none of the insanity observed in the past month would have happened.

    As if a whole new level of pandering to the unwashed peasants, the NY Fed head trader then went so far as to lie that the Fed had learned some lesson in all of this:

    Yet the lesson of the previous crisis still applies, and the Federal Reserve has taken it to heart in responding to the recent stresses in funding markets, Treasury and MBS markets, and credit markets.

    Translation: last time we bailed out just the banks and people were angry. This time we “learned our lesson”, and in addition to bailing out the banks and the mega corporations that are now swallowing all of America’s small and medium businesses whole, we will pretend to be bailing out main street by handing out taxpayers a check for $1,200 per month. Enough to pay about a third of the rent thanks to the latest massive housing bubble that the Fed has inflated.

    But in the end none of this matters. What does matter? Why getting stocks to new all time highs of course:

    By acting quickly and forcefully to support all of these markets at once, we have been able to stabilize market conditions.

    Well that’s just wonderful, because who cares about a second depression and the total collapse in cash flow if bonds are trading at par in a complete disconnect with fundamentals, and TSLA is up 100% in the past week because the company can no longer pay its rent.

    Lorie’s conclusion:

    Many challenges surely lie ahead for the economy and financial markets. But the past month demonstrates that the Federal Reserve will use its tools aggressively to keep markets working so that credit can flow to households, businesses, and state and local governments throughout our economy.

    Translation: the Fed will buy as many trillions more as it needs to completely disconnect all prices from fundamentals and create a Potemkin Village economy so vast, the USSR will be spinning in its grave.

    One last point: to keep track of just how “well” the Fed is doing in its true endgame mission – to crush the dollar and hyperinflate away the debt – just keep an eye on gold. It will tell you all you need to know.

    Logan’s full speech can be found here.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:05

  • New Study Exposes More Evidence That Summer Won't Stop The Coronavirus
    New Study Exposes More Evidence That Summer Won’t Stop The Coronavirus

    One of the public’s last great hopes as the number of confirmed coronavirus cases nears the 2 million mark is that the onset of summer in the northern hemisphere will help defeat the virus as warmer temperatures make life for the virus more hostile, hampering the virus’s ability to spread.

    However, it’s looking increasingly likely that the novel coronavirus is stronger than its predecessor, SARS, when it comes to resisting intense heat. One recent study of additional steps that could be taken to protect lab technicians handling samples of the virus found that samples of the virus can survive when exposed to temperatures as high as 60 degrees Celsius (140 degrees Fahrenheit).

    That would seem to preclude the onset of summer as a potential ‘miracle cure’, while also suggesting that the outbreaks in Africa and South America might be worse than they appear, since the theories that high temperatures slow the virus’s spread don’t appear nearly as convincing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to SCMP, the French scientists who conducted the experiment had to heat samples of the sample, strains of the virus mixed with various animal proteins (to mimic real-world conditions in the test tube), to nearly 90 degrees Celsius (210 degrees Fahrenheit) to completely kill the virus.

    Professor Remi Charrel and colleagues at the Aix-Marseille University in southern France heated the virus that causes Covid-19 to 60 degrees Celsius (140 Fahrenheit) for an hour and found that some strains were still able to replicate.

    The scientists had to bring the temperature to almost boiling point to kill the virus completely, according to their non-peer-reviewed paper released on bioRxiv.org on Saturday. The results have implications for the safety of lab technicians working with the virus.

    The team in France infected African green monkey kidney cells, a standard host material for viral activity tests, with a strain isolated from a patient in Berlin, Germany. The cells were loaded into tubes representing two different types of environments, one “clean” and the other “dirty” with animal proteins to simulate biological contamination in real-life samples, such as an oral swab.

    After the heating, the viral strains in the clean environment were thoroughly deactivated. Some strains in the dirty samples, however, survived.

    The French researchers found that using the higher temperature could help solve the problem, heating the samples to 92 degrees Celsius (~210 degrees Fahrenheit) for 15 minutes could render the virus completely inactive. However, using these high temperatures as part of disinfection protocols for lab technicians could severely fragment the virus’ RNA, potentially scrambling the results of more sensitive tests.

    It’s just the latest curve ball that the coronavirus has thrown at researchers since the outbreak began in Wuhan.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 19:45

  • Gold Miners Now Deemed "Essential" In Canada
    Gold Miners Now Deemed “Essential” In Canada

    Authored by Neils Christensen via Kitco.com,

    Mining companies with operations in Quebec are wasting no time jumping back into action after the provincial government announced Monday night that mining is now considered an essential service and operations can restart Wednesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While miners in Quebec will be heading back to work, the government has also put in place new work policies. According to the new provincial guidelines, mining companies will have to reduce the number of fly-ins and fly-outs from their mining sites and they are encouraged to use more local workers.

    Under a new work regime, miners will see their time at work sites extended to 28 days instead of 14.

    To maintain social-distancing guidelines, companies will also have to use more chartered planes and shuttle buses to transport their workers

    It has not taken mining companies long to react to the news. On Tuesday, Yamana Gold Inc. announced that it was going to restart operations at the Canadian Malartic mine in Abitibi, Canada’s largest gold mine. Yamana operates Malartic in a 50/50 joint venture with Agnico Eagle Mines Ltd.

    “The resumption of mining activity will occur over a period of several weeks with full attention to the health and safety of returning employees, contractors and suppliers,” Yamana said.

    Along with Malartic, Agnico Eagle said that it is also restarting operations at its LaRonde Complex and Goldex mine.

    Eldorado Gold Corp. also said in a statement Tuesday that it is preparing to restart operations at its Lamaque mine in northern Quebec.

    “We are pleased to resume operations at Lamaque,” said George Burns, president and chief executive officer of Eldorado.

    “With the safety measures we have put in place at all our sites, we are confident that we can adapt our business and continue to create long-term value for our stakeholders.”

    Some of the new safety protocols Quebec companies will implement include temperature checks, mandatory social distancing, enhanced sanitation and disinfecting.

    Meanwhile, Iamgold Corp. said it will restart its Westwood Gold Mine in Quebec on Wednesday.

    “Ramp-up activities will take approximately one week, with employees being trained on new procedures and sanitary measures, including adjusted work schedules and transport, physical distancing and protective equipment,” Iamgold said.

    “Protecting the health and safety of our workforce is critical for the successful resumption of mining activities at Westwood.”

    Quebec mines were shut down March 23 as the Quebec government closed all non-essential services to try to slow the spread of the COVID-19 pandemic. As of April 13, 360 people have died in Quebec as a result of the coronavirus.

    The government’s decision to allow miners to operate again comes at a good time for the sector, according to some analysts. Gold prices have broken through critical resistance and are trading near fresh seven-year highs. June gold futures at last traded at $1,768.60 an ounce, up 0.41% on the day.

    Meanwhile, mining companies are enjoying lower input costs as energy prices have not seen a sustained recovery after falling to an 18-year low last month. May West Texas Intermediate crude oil prices last traded at $21.46 a barrel down more than 4% on the day.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 19:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 14th April 2020

  • Pot Use Reaches All-Time High In March
    Pot Use Reaches All-Time High In March

    We noted on Thursday, Americans have resorted to “watching porn, drinking beer, smoking pot, and or devouring chocolate” to cope with their fears of a pandemic. In the report, we noted how cannabis sales in California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska jumped 50% during the March 16-22 period, but it was hard for us to quantify overall national trends. 

    Apparently, ripping bongs and eating edibles hit an all-time high in March as lockdowns across the country were only in the beginning stages, according to Bloomberg, citing a consumer report via Cowen & Co.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The survey, conducted in March of 2,500 consumers, found about 33% had tried smoking pot, a record high, and that 12.8% had used cannabis within the past month compared to the 2019 average of 12.5%

    Sales spiked in mid-March as people rushed to stock up ahead of potential dispensary closures, Cowen said, using data from cannabis analytics firm Headset Inc. Weekly sales growth peaked at 64% in the week ended March 16, the highest rate of increase since at least the beginning of 2019.

    However, sales decelerated during the last two weeks of the month to the mid- to the high-single-digit range. This may be linked to a “more pronounced deterioration in job security for past-month cannabis consumers relative to the general population,” according to analysts led by Vivien Azer.

    The survey found that the percentage of cannabis consumers working full time fell by 290 basis points to 42.4% in March from February, a bigger decline than the general population. They also tended to be less comfortable with their financial situation. – Bloomberg 

    America is getting high, melting in their couches as “Netflix and quarantine” become the hottest trend during the pandemic. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 02:35

  • "We Weren't Prepared" For COVID-19: Macron Admits A French Disaster
    “We Weren’t Prepared” For COVID-19: Macron Admits A French Disaster

    Update (0200ET): France will remain locked down until at least May 11, PM Emmanuel Macron has revealed, calling on citizens to continue to respect the rules his government has imposed to slow the spread of coronavirus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Admitting the country had not been prepared for the outbreak, the PM nevertheless praised those in front-line occupations for working overtime to save lives and called on the French to continue to stay home and maintain social distancing.

    *  *  *

    Authored by Guy Milliere via The Gatestone Institute,

    On April 9, in France, one of the three European countries most affected by COVID-19 — the others being Spain and Italy, 1,341 people died from the Chinese Communist Party virus. For Italy, the main European country affected so far, the figure on April 9 was 610 deaths; for Spain 446, and for Germany 266. While the pandemic has been stabilizing in Italy and Spain — and in Germany seems contained — in France it seems still expanding.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Extremely bad decisions taken by the authorities created a situation of contagion more destructive than it should have been.

    The first bad decision was that, in contrast to European Union fantasies, borders apparently do matter. France never closed them; instead it allowed large numbers of potential virus-carriers to enter the country. Even when it became clear that in Italy the pandemic was taking on catastrophic proportions, France’s border with Italy remained open. The Italian government, by contrast, on March 10, prohibited French people coming to its territory or Italians going to France, but to date, France has put no controls on its side of the border.

    The situation is the same on France’s border with Spain, despite the terrifying situation there. Since March 17, it has been virtually impossible to go from France to Spain, but coming to France from Spain is easy: you just show a police officer your ID. The same goes for France’s border with Germany. On March 16, Germany closed its border with France, but France declined to do the same for its border with Germany. When, on February 26, a soccer match between a French team and an Italian team took place in Lyon, the third-largest city in France, 3,000 Italian supporters attended, even though patients were already flocking to Italy’s hospitals.

    France never closed its airports; they are still open to “nationals of EEA Member States, Switzerland, passengers with a British passport, and those with residence permits issued by France” and healthcare professionals. Earlier, until the last days of March, people arriving from China were not even subject to health checks. French people in Wuhan, the city where the pandemic originated, were repatriated by a military plane, and, upon their arrival in France, were placed in quarantine. While Air France interrupted its flights to China on January 30, Chinese and other airlines departing from Shanghai and Beijing continue to land in France.

    French President Emmanuel Macron summarized France’s official position on the practice: “Viruses do not have passports,” he said. Members of the French government repeated the same dogma. A few commentators reminded them that viruses travel with infected people, who can be stopped at borders, and that borders are essential to stop or slow the spread of a disease, but the effort was useless. Macron ended up saying that the borders of the Schengen area (26 European states that have officially abolished all passport and border control with one another) could not be shut down and raged at other European leaders for reintroducing border checks between the Schengen area member countries. “What is at stake,” he said, seemingly more concerned with the “European project” than with the lives of millions of people, “is the survival of the European project.”

    Other bad decisions the disastrous management of the means of fighting the pandemic.

    In early March, when people in large numbers started to arrive ill at hospitals, doctors and caregivers warned that they did not have enough masks and said that working without any protective equipment put them at high risk. Journalists quickly discovered that in 2013, France had possessed a reserve of several million masks, but that the government had decided to destroy them to reduce storage costs. In January 2020, a few hundred thousand masks were still available, but on February 19, President Macron decided to send them to Wuhan, as a “gesture of solidarity with the Chinese people”.

    The French government then announced that masks would be available soon, but by the end of March, most doctors and caregivers still had no masks. Several doctors fell ill. As of April 10, eight have died from COVID-19 and several others are in critical condition. On March 20, the government’s spokeswoman, Sibeth N’Diaye, incorrectly said that “masks are essentially useless”.

    At the end of February, France had almost no tests available, and no means of manufacturing them. The government decided to buy tests from China, but by March 19, the number of tests was still insufficient. While Germany performed 500,000 screening tests per week, France was only able to only perform 50,000.

    Rather than admit that tests were unavailable, or that the government had mismanaged situation, the France’s minister of health, Olivier Veran, announced that large-scale screening was useless, and that France had chosen to “proceed differently”.

    Municipal elections, scheduled for March 15, took place despite the virus and despite the fact that many doctors warned that polling stations were places of contagion. Sure enough, in the days that followed, hundreds of people in charge of polling stations flocked to the hospitals. On March 16, President Macron delivered a speech declaring that “France is at war” and that on the following day, March 17, France would be placed on lockdown.

    Lockdown is still in place and the French government has decided to extend it indefinitely. The rules are strict. The French can only leave home, within a radius of one kilometer, for one hour a day, to buy food, and must have written authorization to present to the police who patrol the streets. Anyone who is on a street without authorization is fined 135 euros ($145) the first time, 1,500 euros ($1,630) the second time, and after three offenses, can be subject to a sentence of six months in prison. Any meeting with a person not sharing the same place of lockdown is prohibited.

    Most of the population has complied, except in the no-go zones. The police have been ordered to turn a blind eye to what happens there. The no-go zone in Seine Saint Denis, for instance, has a fatality rate 63% higher than in the rest of the country.

    It was not exactly a secret that before the pandemic that the French economy had also not been doing that well. Growth was barely above zero and unemployment high. Now, the French economy has effectively stopped. It is hard to imagine what the situation will be after the pandemic.

    Now, almost all the French hospitals are full; patients wait on beds in the halls. On March 18, France had only 5,000 ventilators, so “triage” procedures began: some patients survived, others, for lack of treatment, did not.

    A scandal erupted. Agnes Buzyn — who was Minister of Health until February 16, then a candidate for mayor of Paris; then, on March 15, defeated — said on March 18: “I knew a tsunami [presumably meaning a deadly pandemic] was going to hit France”. She added that she had told everything to President Macron in January. Immediately, Marine Le Pen, President of the National Rally, the main opposition party in France, said that “by staying silent about a worrying situation, Agnes Buzyn behaved in an unconscionable manner”. Le Pen added, “if Agnes Buzyn is speaking the truth, the government and President Macron have seriously failed in their duties, and the case will have to be brought before a Court of Justice”.

    Another scandal, however, even more important, had erupted before that. On February 25, a celebrated French epidemiologist, Professor Didier Raoult, President of the Marseille University Hospital Institute for Infectious Diseases (Méditerranée Infection), one of the main European research centers on epidemics and pandemics, published a video, “Coronavirus: Towards a way out of the crisis”. In it, he said that he had found a treatment to infected people quickly: hydroxychloroquine (a drug used against malaria since 1949) and azithromycin (a commonly used antibiotic), that had already cured 24 patients.

    Immediately, Olivier Veran, the new French minister of health, said that Professor Raoult’s statements were “unacceptable”. A harsh medical and political battle began. Many doctors close to President Macron agreed with Veran and denounced Raoult. Some even claimed he was a “charlatan”, apparently forgetting that, until then, Professor Raoult had been considered by many France’s most prestigious epidemiologist. Other doctors said that Dr. Raoult was right and supported his findings.

    In an attempt to quell the controversy, the French government, by decree, authorized Professor Raoult’s treatment in “military hospitals” for “patients reaching the acute phase of the disease” — but prohibited family doctors from prescribing hydroxychloroquine. Professor Raoult replied that the treatment was only effective if administered “before the disease reaches its acute phase“. [Emphasis added]

    A clinical trial was launched by the government but Professor Raoult said that “the trial is not based on the treatment I use and is destined to fail.”

    On April 10, Professor Raoult published data showing that he had treated and cured 2,401 patients. A recent international poll of thousands of doctors rated hydroxychloroquine the “most effective therapy” for combating COVID 19. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has authorized widespread “compassionate use” of hydroxychloroquine, while awaiting the results of scientific tests, projects to be complete in “a year or a year and a half”.

    Philippe Douste Blazy, Professor in Medicine, former French Minister of Health, said that “the obstructive behavior of Emmanuel Macron and the French government ‘was “criminal'”. He added that “the treatment proposed by Professor Raoult has positive results” and that “France will soon be the last country to refuse the use by doctors of hydroxychloroquine.” He then launched a petition calling on the government to stop obstructing the use of the treatment. The text was signed by thousands of doctors, professors of medicine and other former ministers of health.

    The treatment recommended by Professor Raoult still cannot be prescribed by French family doctors. A decree promulgated by President Macron on March 28 authorized doctors to use Rivotril (clonazepam) to “alleviate the suffering of patient in a state of respiratory distress”. Clonazepam slows breathing and can lead to respiratory arrest. Dr. Christian Coulon, a renowned anesthesiologist, tweeted:

    “Euthanasia of our elders suffering from respiratory failure. Yes, they decided [to do] it. As a doctor, I suffer deeply”.

    Dr. Serge Rader explained on radio on April 3 that many senior citizens living in retirement homes and who get Covid-19 are not sent to a hospital because the hospitals are overwhelmed; instead they receive an injection of Rivotril and die alone in their rooms. Many other doctors expressed their horror on social media, but added that they were powerless.

    The result is that anxiety and anger have increased sharply in the population and add to the distress arising from the pandemic and the strict lockdown.

    A French lawyer, Regis de Castelnau, wrote in Marianne, a center-left magazine:

    “The behavior of our leaders has been marked by unpreparedness, casualness, cynicism, and many of their acts imply the enforcement of the criminal law. Deliberate endangerment of the lives of others and failure to provide assistance to people in danger are obvious… In war, generals who are judged incompetent are sometimes shot. The President and other officials are well aware of this and have to know that they will be held accountable.”

    Economists expect the GDP of France in the second quarter of 2020 to be in free fall. One economist, Emmanuel Lechypre, said, “France will experience a very severe recession…. What is happening has never been seen in the past and the country will never be the same.”

    A recent survey shows that 70% of French people think that the government is not telling the truth, and 79% think that the government and the President do not know where they are going.

    Before the pandemic, France was on the edge of chaos. From the moment President Macron was elected, not a single week in France has passed without demonstrations. The uprising of the “yellow vests” lasted 70 weeks and was accompanied by riots. A strike against a reform of the bankrupt French pension system that began in December 2019 lasted until the appearance of the pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On March 27, Macron said in a threatening tone that those who criticized his handling of the pandemic were “irresponsible” and that he would remember “those who did not live up to his expectations”.

    On April 1, the columnist Ivan Rioufol wrote in Le Figaro:

    “The president is not only wrong, but he lied and let others lie. He and his team are guilty. The official speech was unable to assess the seriousness of the situation. It denied, to the point of absurdity, the usefulness of national borders… It is the government that repeated, before claiming the contrary, that masks and tests are useless. It is the State that maintains an incomprehensible confusion around chloroquine… The law of silence that Macron would like to impose is completely untenable.”

    Those who hold power in France seem more clueless today than before the pandemic. Sadly, a debacle in France seems increasingly closer.

    In the French mainstream media, China is treated extremely politely. No journalist will remind the public that that the pandemic began in Wuhan, China. Reporters say that the United States is in a difficult situation and show New York hospitals, as if showing the suffering of Americans would alleviate the suffering of the French.

    France’s mainstream media would do well to fight harder for physicians to be able supply hydroxychloroquine with azithromycin and zinc sulfate. The French media would also do well to be more aware of the dirty game China is playing. On April 5, reports started coming in that in January, before China had let the world know there was a problem, it had begun deliberately lying about it. On January 14, 2020, in a tweet, the World Health Organization repeated China’s lie:

    “Investigations conducted by the Chinese authorities have found no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission of the novel #coronavirus (2019-nCoV) identified in #Wuhan, #China”

    Meanwhile, Maria Bartiromo disclosed on Fox News, that, before alerting the world about the coronavirus crisis, China had begun cornering the market in medical supplies. It bought $2 billion worth of medical masks — China makes half the world’s supply; why would it buy them? — as well as hundreds of millions of dollars’ worth of other medical gear. Now, reports are stating that China is demanding payment from Italy for donated medical equipment that Italy had donated to China and that China now wants Italy to buy back.

    Finally, it would not hurt the French media to show more compassion, to pay more attention to what they say, to watch with more care their own society, and to think about ways to find remedies to the economic and political dysfunction that unleashed such an unimaginable horror.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 02:00

  • Cops Arrest Couple For Breaking Quarantine As Hawaii Embraces Mass Surveillance
    Cops Arrest Couple For Breaking Quarantine As Hawaii Embraces Mass Surveillance

    The exhausting effort required to contain an outbreak of the novel coronavirus – contact tracing, quarantine enforcement etc. – are giving regimes from the US to China to a handful of European nations an unprecedented opportunity to test technologies designed to infringe on human liberty by dramatically increasing law enforcement’s capacity to actively monitor whole communities.

    Once a population is policed by drones in the sky and hazmat-wearing cops armed with automatic weapons patrolling the ground looking for lockdown violators, and encouraging neighbors to snitch on each other,  can it really be free?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maybe ask mainland Chinese how they feel. While they’ve adjusted to living in a world where facial recognition cameras might catch them violating rules and dock their ‘social credit’ score, Americans are only just getting their first glimpse at the dystopian totalitarian future that awaits, except instead of President Xi monitoring them, it’ll be Mark Zuckerberg.

    While Americans debate the ethics of snitching on quarantine violators, Hawaiians now have their very own quarantine-themed civil liberties fiasco now that the first couple in the state has been arrested for break its 14-day mandatory quarantine.

    Quarantines have been declared in different states at different lengths and with varying levels of enforcement. A few states still haven’t imposed a legally binding lockdown.

    But a couple who apparently arrived on the Hawaiian island of Kaua’i recently after traveling from the island of O’ahu was arrested by local police after they were twice informed of their obligation to self-quarantine for 14 days, but decided to stop for food at a supermarket on the way to their hotel anyway, the Star Advertiser reports.

    The pair were reportedly arrested by Hawaii police just minutes after walking out of the supermarket.

    Both posted bail, but they have an upcoming court date, where they face charges that could lead to a fine of up to $5k and/or up to 1 year in prison.

    While it’s tempting to look at this couple with contempt for traveling during this period and also violating a quarantine, most people have probably violated the orders or guidelines at one point or another. Furthermore, most people don’t expect to be monitored that closely by the police. Perhaps they thought the stop at the grocery store was okay, since they’re an “essential” business that are still open. Who knows? But it definitely seems a bit harsh to arrest them – write them an expensive ticket, maybe.

    But many libertarian or civil liberty defenders probably find this behavior disturbing. And if you’re among them, then keep in mind, this isn’t all that the state of Hawaii is doing to ratchet up the mass surveillance of its citizens. MauiNow reports that a “community-driven” presumably quasi-public “project” has been launched by the state encouraging all Hawaiians to share a massive trove of personal data with the app, so it can use it to help carry out contact tracing. The method reportedly worked well in South Korea. But building a massive database that can trace the movements and interactions of nearly every single individual in the state seems like something that – if it must be done – should be done so with the most extreme oversight possible, with a widely understood agreement to destroy the data after all this is over.

     

     

     

     

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 01:00

  • Whistleblower: COVID-19 Patients Need Oxygen Therapy Not Ventilator
    Whistleblower: COVID-19 Patients Need Oxygen Therapy Not Ventilator

    Via Great Game India,

    Another whistleblower, a doctor treating Coronavirus patients himself has come out with a startling disclosure saying COVID-19 patients need Oxygen therapy not Ventilator and that we may be treating the wrong disease. He says the patients symptoms resemble High Altitude Sickness and not Pneumonia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Cameron Kyle-Sidell is a doctor treating COVID-19 patients in New York City’s Maimonides Medical Center. Nine days ago Dr. Cameron opened an Intensive Care Unit to care for COVID-19 patients in New York City. Here is what he learned in his own words:

    “I am a physician who has been working at the bedside of COVID+ patients in NYC. I believe we are treating the wrong disease and that we must change what we are doing if we want to save as many lives as possible.”

    “In February, South Korean physicians reported that critical Covid-19 patients responded well to oxygen therapy without a ventilator. Patients are getting multiple organ damage from hypoxia. It’s not the pneumonia that’s the killer, it’s the cellular oxygen deprivation. And we are hurting these patients with ventilators.”

    The past 48 hours or so have seen a huge revelation: COVID-19 causes prolonged and progressive hypoxia (starving your body of oxygen) by binding to the heme groups in hemoglobin in your red blood cells. People are simply desaturating (losing o2 in their blood), and that’s what eventually leads to organ failures that kill them, not any form of ARDS or pneumonia. All the damage to the lungs you see in CT scans are from the release of oxidative iron from the hemes, this overwhelms the natural defenses against pulmonary oxidative stress and causes that nice, always-bilateral ground glass opacity in the lungs.

    Patients returning for re-hospitalization days or weeks after recovery suffering from apparent delayed post-hypoxic leukoencephalopathy strengthen the notion COVID-19 patients are suffering from hypoxia despite no signs of respiratory ‘tire out’ or fatigue.

    Earlier, GreatGameIndia reported, a Montana based physician Dr. Annie Bukacek, MD, blowing the whistle on how the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) is exaggerating the COVID-19 death toll by manipulating Coronavirus death certificates.

    The CDC counts both true COVID-19 cases and speculative guesses of COVID-19 the same. They call it death by COVID-19. They automatically overestimate the real death numbers, by their own admission.  Prior to COVID-19, people were more likely to get an accurate cause of death written on their death certificate if they died in the hospital. Why more accurate when a patient dies in the hospital? Because hospital staff has physical examination findings labs, radiologic studies, et cetera, to make a good educated guess. It is estimated that 60 percent of people die in the hospital. But even [with] those in-hospital deaths, the cause of death is not always clear, especially in someone with multiple health conditions, each of which could cause the death.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Similar claims have also been made by Senator Dr. Scott Jensen from Minnesota who said Hospitals are getting paid more to list patients as COVID-19.

    Right now Medicare is determining that if you have a COVID-19 admission to the hospital you get $13,000. If that COVID-19 patient goes on a ventilator you get $39,000, three times as much. Nobody can tell me after 35 years in the world of medicine that sometimes those kinds of things impact on what we do.”

    Dr. Jensen received a 7-page document coaching him to fill out death certificates with a COVID-19 diagnosis without a lab test confirming the diagnosis.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 00:05

  • What To Look For In Bank Earnings: All Eyes On Loan Losses
    What To Look For In Bank Earnings: All Eyes On Loan Losses

    Tomorrow JPMorgan and Wells Fargo will usher in a historic earnings cycle, one which will see S&P500 earnings plunge the most since the (first) financial crisis…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which in turn is a walk in the park compared to the -30% EPS crash expected in Q2…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and unlike prior quarters, nobody will care about bank FICC revenues or Net Interest Income. Instead investors will care about only one thing: how much money will U.S. banks lose on loans because of the coronavirus recession.

    JPMorgan will kick it off tomorrow morning ahead of the bell, and investors will closely watch comments from CEO Jamie Dimon, especially after his recent ominous investor letter in which he warned that what is coming will “at a minimum include a bad recession combined with some kind of financial stress similar to the global financial crisis of 2008”, in his first earnings call since suffering a heart attack. Wells Fargo reports right after and then Bank of America, Goldman Sachs and Citigroup all follow on Wednesday.

    And, as noted above, instead of the income statement – where any Q1 gains are expected to be a wash compared to the massive damage suffered across bank balance sheets – investors will seek answers on just how bad the recession will be, include provisions and net charge-offs, the effects of accounting rule shifts known as CECL, or Current Expected Credit Loss, and banks’ capital return plans, particularly regarding dividends as well as when stock buybacks may return.

    To be sure, Wall Street estimates have changed dramatically from a month ago, when analysts called for big bank earnings per share to rise in the first quarter from a year earlier by an average of 2%. Now they see declines ranging from 14% to 42%.

    That, as Reuters notes, is not just because the impact of the global pandemic is changing and hard to quantify, but also because of a new accounting standard that requires banks to estimate losses for the lifetime of loans and set aside money now to cover them. Those estimates have to be justified to regulators and auditors, and be credible to investors. But they ultimately rely on judgment: a pessimistic management team could decide to take much bigger provisions than optimistic peers at a rival bank, even if they have similar loan books.

    To show the difficulty in guessing how that might play out, UBS analysts created a table showing two outcomes for earnings per share: one with usual loss reserves, and another that was about one-third lower, based on their assumptions about the new rule.

    “And, the truth is we’re probably going to be very wrong,” lead analyst Saul Martinez said in an interview. “The risk is that it is higher.”

    “The first quarter is the history, the second quarter the mystery,” said Bloomberg Intelligence analyst Alison Williams.

    Investors may prioritize setting “some kind of level for provisions versus stress-tested losses,” while assessing how much customers have drawn down commercial and industrial loans, and how much of soaring delinquencies may turn into realized losses, she said. Capital markets may be strong, Williams added, but “much of that is fueled by trends through mid-February.” Dimon’s remarks will be important even as his recent annual letter offered a “bit of a preview,” Williams said.

    Last week, Goldman analysts cut their estimates for big banks for all of 2020 by 40% this week, all due to additional loan-loss provisions. Other issues affecting earnings essentially cancel each other out, they said.

    While the uncertainty about bank results also reflects uncertainty about the coronavirus, the new accounting standard add another layer of mystery for banks. Although they have more insight about the financial stress of their borrowers, and therefore more insight about the economy, they do not have a crystal ball about the coronavirus.

    This puts bank executives in a pedestal reserved traditionally for central bankers: they will have to be mindful that they could send shockwaves through markets if investors believe they are predicting a protracted and horrid recession, or alternatively, are being blaze and not taking the risks seriously enough.

    “It is going to be a tricky balancing act,” said Martinez.

    Analysts will also be eager to ask bank executives about assumptions they used for the new accounting standard, known as CECL, for Current Expected Credit Losses, and pronounced like the name Cecil. It has been in the works for a decade but only recently started being implemented.

    Across the board, investors will probably “look through first-quarter earnings and focus on credit quality, the second true-up of the CECL loan loss reserves and net interest margin compression,” RBC analyst Gerard Cassidy said via email. Bank stocks have “certainly discounted the expected decline in earnings in 2020,” Cassidy said. Now, investors want to be reassured that “this downturn for the banks will only be an earnings issue and not a balance sheet issue similar to the 2008-2009 financial crisis.”

    Addressing the CECL issue, Morgan Stanley analyst Betsy Graseck writes that she is baking in a 6-31% increase in reserves from “day 2” CECL estimates in 1Q20. As a reminder, CECL (Current Expected Credit Loss) is the new accounting standard for loan loss reserves which requires life of loan reserving estimates. CECL kicked off January 1, 2020, and will require management teams to estimate life of loan losses for their loan books as of March 31.

    While Day 1 CECL estimates are known, the biggest question from investors going into the 1Q20 print likely is: how big will Day 2 reserve build be? Given the uncertainty of the virus trajectory and length of “stay-at-home” directives, street estimates for day 2 CECL charges are very wide.

    Morgan Stanley bases its CECL Day 2 estimates on a 10% probability of the most severe stress test that the banks have ever done, the 2018 stress test. This drives a 6-31% increase in reserves across the bank’s coverage, takes up reserve / loan ratios by a median 17bps, and takes down 1Q20 EPS by about ~1/3. That said, banks may well opt for a higher charge, especially if they are looking for a slower economic recovery than we are.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the macro level, analysts will want to know how high bankers expect unemployment to go, how that will affect consumer loan delinquencies, and how much exposure they have to oil companies and sectors that have seen business vanish, like airlines, hotels and restaurants. And they will also inquire about how effective government stimulus programs have been, and why so many banks have been leery of participating in the PPP small business rescue program.

    Spending by the Federal Reserve and Treasury Department could keep loan losses from being as high as in prior recessions, said Wells Fargo bank analyst Mike Mayo. He described the first quarter as the most difficult one to predict since the peak of the global financial crisis in late-2008.

    “You have the biggest accounting change to impact loan loss reserving coming in the quarter that needs the biggest change in loan loss reserves,” he said.

    The three most important things to watch for with bank earnings will be “credit, credit and credit,” Mayo told Bloomberg last week in a phone interview. “Investors want to know about impacts to industries,” including credit draw-downs, losses and provisions. They’ll also want to hear about the degree of relief banks are offering borrowers, particularly regarding small business lending and mortgage forbearance, he said.

    “The only line items bank investors will care about this season are the ones pertaining to credit,” with provisions and net charge-offs determining how bank stocks will trade, Vital Knowledge founder Adam Crisafulli wrote in a note. Commentary about capital return will also be key, he said, as “investors assume buybacks will be resumed in the second half (they’ve been voluntarily suspended until the end of June) while dividends continue.”

    Comparing results with expectations will be particularly challenging this quarter, Cassidy said, as analysts and investors alike will be “in the dark” on first-quarter and full-year earnings estimates, due to the difficulties in assessing the collapse in the U.S. economy from containing Covid-19 and the impacts from CECL.

    “Missing first-quarter EPS estimates by 20%-30% is not likely to be a big deal but posting a meaningful bottom line loss due to a significant increase in the loan loss provision would be a cause for concern,” Cassidy said.

    Going back to the banks reporting tomorrow, JPMorgan is likely to “once again weather the storm better than peers given its diversified franchise and risk management prowess,” Barclays analyst Jason Goldberg wrote in a note.

    Relative to the prior quarter, Goldberg expects a larger balance sheet, driven by draw-downs and deposit growth; lower net interest rate margin, or NIM; seasonally higher fee income from trading; greater costs and a higher loan loss provision, along with more mortgage volume. In credit cards, he sees continued year-over-year growth, but also reserve build. Other key factors Goldberg will watch include Dimon’s health, the outlook for trading and expenses, and strategies for consumer branches and credit cards.

    One final point: heading into earnings, JPMorgan quietly announced it would “temporarily” halt the issuance of new loans and would substantially hike its mortgage lending standards – minimum FICO score of 700, minimum down payment to 20% – for one simple reason: to limit exposure to the coming default wave that will cripple small and medium business and devastate household income for quarters to come. Anything that Dimon says to twist that JPM is hunkering down ahead of what Bloomberg called the “Biggest Wave Of Defaults In History” will be nothing more than self-serving spin.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:45

  • Wealthy Preppers Are Riding This Out In Multimillion-Dollar Bunkers
    Wealthy Preppers Are Riding This Out In Multimillion-Dollar Bunkers

    Authored by Sarah Begley via Medium.com,

    Cold War backyard bunkers are out. Subterranean communes are in…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a sense, all of us are preppers right now: stocking up on toilet paper and nonperishable goods, hunkering down, and avoiding social contact. But then, of course, there are the actual preppers living in high-tech, remote, expensive bunkers to ride out Covid-19.

    They knew a disaster was coming, even if they didn’t know it would be a viral pandemic. And for the last few years, author Bradley Garrett has been getting to know them while writing his book Bunker: Building for the End Times, coming out this summer.

    “The terrible irony is that all of these preppers have been telling me to get ready, talking to me about disasters, and I’ve been incredulous, taking them to task, trying to tease out fact from fiction in their stories,” says Garrett.

    “And now, here I am, totally underprepared.”

    GEN caught up with Garrett to find out what these bunkers look like, how many people fit inside them (a lot!), and the surprising reason some preppers believe their way of life benefits others.

    GEN: Is there a distinction between bunker people and prepper people? Is that a Venn diagram or a circle within a circle?

    Garrett: I don’t think of it so much as a Venn diagram as a spectrum. On the most basic level, most American households have some sort of emergency kit: a first aid kit, a flashlight, a radio. But the other end of the spectrum are these people who are building these often very elaborate, technically sophisticated, expensive bunker spaces, which are built to weather a long period of time. They might be building for three months, five months, a year. The longest I’ve seen is five years.

    It starts to become not a technical problem of how to build the space, but how do you create the social dynamics within that space to be able to weather that amount of time. There’s always going to be a degree of social friction based on what people need. And the inevitable result of that kind of situation is that someone emerges as the tyrant. Somebody says, “We’re not going out. Screw your prescription, you can do without it,” or whatever.

    How many people are we talking about? Are these bunkers for individuals, families, communities?

    Before doing my research for this book, I imagined prepping being like Cold War preparations, where you’re digging up your backyard and creating a bunker. What I actually found is that that is an old model, because everyone realizes that that’s cramped, it’s uncomfortable, it’s unnecessary, that kind of [family-sized] bunker building.

    What people are thinking about now looks much more like a commune. It’s people with similar worldviews coming together to build an intentional community with complementary skills to get each other through a crisis like this. And those communities are not as homogenous as you might expect.

    The best way to think about them is as second houses. So instead of buying an investment property or a vacation home, you buy the bunker. Because these people don’t have faith that the way that we’re living is sustainable and that it will continue. And so the bunker acts as an insurance policy, but also kind of a vacation home — like, often they would go there for Fourth of July. It’s a gathering space. But then if things go wrong, it’s also the space that you retreat to and you have the added bonus of showing up and meeting all the people you already know and love hanging out with.

    I can’t tell you, it’s been amazing watching it happen. All of this stuff was speculative when I started writing about it in 2016, 2017. I watched each one of these communities that were, essentially, temporary communities, just suddenly wink into life. They all went there and sort of shut up the blast doors, and they’ve got their supplies. And while all of us are stressing out, going around trying to find toilet paper or whatever, they’re all partying out there.

    So when you say “out there,” where is that?

    They’re all over the place. I spent a lot of time in South Dakota in a community called the xPoint. There are 575 semi-subterranean concrete igloos that were built during World War II — it used to be munition storage. They basically put the weapons in there so that the weapons couldn’t be bombed, which is kind of a weird irony: Bunkers that were built to protect weapons later protect people from viruses.

    There was another one in Kansas that’s built in a missile silo that used to have a nuclear weapon in it, and now has a 15-story inverted condominium. I’ve been calling it a geoscraper. I don’t know what else to call it. It’s an inverted skyscraper.

    But I’ve also been in communities that are a bit more back-of-the-land in their outlook towards things. There was one in Tennessee where a group of people that called themselves homestead preppers were learning how to craft things, how to grow things, how to can food. Their community was right on the edge of Great Smoky Mountains National Park and they would sneak into the park and plant secret groves of fruit trees and vegetable plots; they can actually just kind of vanish into the park if things get really bad.

    Communities in different places had very different ways of thinking about how to handle the crisis, but shared visions on the inevitability of the crisis.

    What’s the socioeconomic range of these three communities, for instance? Is it mostly wealthier people?

    No, it’s a huge range. The people in Tennessee were running small retail shops, they were working everyday jobs. They were making it work on the budget they had. The condo in Kansas, people were buying in for $1.5 million to $3.5 million.

    Do they have children in there with them?

    I’m going to say most people are in their forties and fifties because you have to have a disposable income to be able to make the decision to do that. There are younger people who have just sort of checked out of their primary life — their life becomes about prepping. There aren’t many kids there, which speaks to the demographic, but I did have a lot of people tell me that they wanted to hand their bunkers down to their [adult] children. So these aren’t doomsday bunkers, these people don’t think the world is ending. They just see it as a space to retreat to and that’s something that they want to pass onto future generations if they can.

    There was one guy in Thailand who is building this amazing ecofortress, this kind of self-sustained giant concrete block just out of Chiang Mai, in the middle of these orchards. He was growing all of his food inside and he had bulletproof windows on the top of the building — the thing was unassailable, and he was super paranoid about social unrest. But he made all of his money working on offshore oil rigs. And when the pandemic hit, he was in Burma on an oil rig, and he’s stuck out there now. His wife and kid, who he basically built this fortress to protect, are waiting for him to come home, inside the fortress, not knowing if he’s going to come home with the virus. As much as you plan, you cannot plan for everything.

    How conspiracy-minded are these preppers?

    Preppers are listening to [traditional news sources like CNN], but they’re, I think, more willing to incorporate a wider range of ideas about what may be causing it and what the solutions might be.

    That being said, I’ve had a lot of people say really crazy shit to me over the past three or four years, and there’s been many times when I’ve ended up in heated arguments with them or just walking away because I’ve realized that we’re pulling from a completely different pool of information and there’s no possible way that we’re ever going to be able to communicate to discuss these things.

    In the book, you mention some of your sources feared a virus being deliberately unleashed by a rogue nation. Is that what they’re thinking with Covid-19, that it’s a Chinese conspiracy?

    They’re definitely willing to call out its origin, to call it “Chinese virus.” That’s a kind of covert racism. But I haven’t heard anyone suggest that it’s a manufactured virus, in any way, shape, or form.

    Different types of disasters call for different features of bunkers. What would make a bunker good for a viral pandemic?

    So normally, when you put an air filtration system in a bunker, you want to have what’s called positive pressure. If you’ve got positive air pressure within the bunker that’s pushing out of it, then air can’t come in. And everything, all the air that you’re having pumped in, you want to go through an NBC filter, a nuclear biological chemical filter. The biological part is what we care about in this instance. So hypothetically, a month ago, if you were to have locked yourself in your bunker and flipped on the biological air filtering, and you’ve just been sitting in there eating freeze-dried food and watching the news since then, there is essentially zero chance that you would contract the virus.

    I think that’s important for two reasons, one is the confidence that that gives you as an individual, right? You are absolutely not infected, there’s no way. But two, it takes pressure off of state resources. So you don’t have these psychosomatic symptoms, you’re not going to get tested, you’re not going to put a strain on the hospital systems.

    This is what preppers argue: That if we take more responsibility for our situation, if we’re more prepared for these sorts of emergencies, then we alleviate pressure on the systems, which allows that system to then help those in greater need.

    It’s a weird kind of logic, right? Because it sounds socialist. It sounds like, “Oh, this is for the greater good.” But then, of course, it accepts that social safety nets should be cut and will be cut. They often refer to Hurricane Katrina. They say, “Look, those people were out there by themselves for three, four, five days before any semblance of help from FEMA began to roll in.” But if you’re a prepper, not only are you prepared for the situation, potentially you can also help out your neighbor.

    To what extent are preppers afraid of looting or unrest as a result of Covid-19?

    There’s this phrase that preppers use, “72 hours to animal.” If the grocery stores were to close down tomorrow, or the trucks stop doing deliveries, then you can imagine how this phrase makes sense because it doesn’t take very long to start thinking, “Okay, I can’t buy food anymore. I know who has food, my neighbors across the street.” The lives that we live are operating on a very fragile consensus and very fragile infrastructure, and once any of that starts breaking down, it doesn’t take long for people to become incredibly selfish.

    We would hope that people would reach for community and that people would assist each other in times of disaster, and I think that will be the case, and has been the case, in the early days of this disaster. But as time goes on, things get more difficult, the situation changes.

    Those people who are hunkered down in their bunkers right now, how long are they planning to be there?

    The date that most people are talking to me about is early summer. But there might be cycles.

    I’ve been thinking about the bunker in terms of cyclical time. Since the Enlightenment, we’ve become accustomed to thinking about things in linear terms and, certainly, capitalism has this expectation of exponential growth in perpetuity.

    I love the idea that we’re actually going back to something closer to indigenous cosmologies, where we start thinking about the world as a kind of spiral — it just kind of cycles around like a virus. It comes and it goes and we have to start thinking about our lives in terms of renewal and rebirth. We go into hiding for three or four months while it passes through and we do a certain kind of work. And then we emerge and do something else.

    This interview has been edited and condensed for clarity.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:25

  • Success During "Hard" Times: Sex Toy Company Sees Sales Rocket 38% Since COVID-19 Lockdown Started
    Success During “Hard” Times: Sex Toy Company Sees Sales Rocket 38% Since COVID-19 Lockdown Started

    Today in “capitalism works” news, a British sex toy company is having its best month since 2017 as a result of the coronavirus lockdown.

    It’s almost as if demand fluctuates for items based on market conditions. Weird. Don’t tell the Central Banks…

    Joe Silver and James Pearson, owners of sex toy company Olivia Ocean, say they’re working harder than ever to deal with increased numbers of deliveries to customers. The company says it continues to keep people safe by social distancing, despite the sales increase, according to The Mirror.

    “Sales went through the roof. I’ve had to say lots of products are out of stock, we just weren’t ready for this,” Silver said. “Everybody is at home and they’ve got a lot of spare time on their hands. We’re only human, everyone is just a bit randy – let’s be honest.”

    In the first week of the lockdown, sales were up 38%. The duo expects sales to rise by 50% by this weekend. Normally, they would be sending out about 1,500 packages a day. That number is now up to about 5,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Silver continued: “Day after day we come in and we’re up on what we were before.”

    Among the most popular items since the lockdown is the “Couples Mystery Box”, which the company describes as a “naughty surprise for intense desire” – whatever the hell that means…

    The company started when Pearson sent Silver a photo of a sex toy with no explanation. Silver said: “I knew him quite well so I knew he was a bit of a joker, but I didn’t know what angle this was.”

    Then, capitalism took over. “When I started looking in to it I realised it was a massive market and there aren’t a lot of people to compete with,” Silver continued. “After some market research, we found people don’t want to spend a lot of cash to buy a sex toy because they might realise it’s not for them, and you can’t return them.”

    Godspeed, lads. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:05

  • "The Illusions Are Exhausted" – What Are You Gonna Do About It?
    “The Illusions Are Exhausted” – What Are You Gonna Do About It?

    Authored by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    “Tucked into the recent recovery bill was a provision granting the Federal Reserve the right to set up a $450 billion bailout plan without following key provisions of the federal open meetings law, including announcing its meetings or keeping most records about them, according to a POLITICO review of the legislation.

    The provision further calls into question the transparency and oversight for the biggest bailout law ever passed by Congress. President Donald Trump has indicated he does not plan to comply with another part of the new law intended to boost Congress’ oversight powers of the bailout funds. And earlier this week, Trump dismissed the government official chosen as the chief watchdog for the stimulus package.

    The changes at the central bank – which appear to have been inserted into the 880-page bill by sympathetic senators during the scramble to get it approved — would address a complaint that the Fed faced during the 2008 financial crisis, when board members couldn’t easily hold group conversations to address the fast-moving economic turmoil.

    The provision dispenses with a longstanding accountability rule that the board has to give at least one day’s notice before holding a meeting. Experts say the change could lead to key information about the $450 billion bailout fund, such as which firms might benefit from the program, remaining inaccessible long after the bailout is over.

    The new law would absolve the board of the requirement to keep minutes to closed-door meetings as it deliberates on how to set up the $450 billion loan program. That would severely limit the amount of information potentially available to the public on what influenced the board’s decision-making. The board would only have to keep a record of its votes, though they wouldn’t have to be made public during the coronavirus crisis.

    A Fed spokesperson did not comment on the changes in the law or whether the Fed would continue keeping records of its meetings.

    – PoliticoRecovery Law Allows Fed to Rope off Public as It Spends Billions

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “An era can be said to end when its basic illusions are exhausted.”

    – Arthur Miller

    Before going any further, I want to share a graphic that accurately summarizes my position on the current pandemic affecting the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, it’s quite common for many to latch on to one of these conclusions and singularly obsess about it to the detriment of the others, when we need to be thinking about all three simultaneously.

    It’s absolutely critical we understand governments throughout the world are rapidly mobilizing to use the crisis as an excuse to extract more wealth from society and condition the public to relinquish more precious civil liberties. The response in my own imperial oligarchy masquerading as a country has been particularly grotesque. A government that told us masks don’t work and couldn’t roll out testing for weeks, is now responding with the worst of both post-9/11 and post-financial crisis responses. The idea of representative government or democracy in America is a complete myth. The interests and desires of the people are irrelevant, and our economic system can be best described as financial feudalism.

    We’ve seen this movie before. The U.S. government and Federal Reserve used major crises to consolidate wealth and power twice before this century, and it’s happening again. They got away with it before — and they’re getting away with it now — because the public accepts it. I hate to write that, but it’s true. People will tell me the public has no way to fight back, but that’s not accurate. The public hasn’t even tried historical methods like mass strikes and boycotts, instead they’ve been successfully neutered by phony red/blue team mainstream politics, through bickering about marginal issues like pronouns and bathrooms, and by endless entertainment and debt-based consumption. This is why the oligarchy keeps winning. Americans aren’t a serious people yet.

    Witnessing the massive theft and power consolidation during the financial crisis a decade ago shook me to my core. I learned so much about how the world really works I simply couldn’t go on in the same way, so I quit my finance job and moved out of NYC. I was convinced such in your face theft would lead to effective popular movements and that the people would discover their power and take direct action, but I was wrong. Rather than economic populism transcending other differences to become ascendant and potent, most Americans were successfully shoved back into convenient political boxes easily managed by oligarchy. The rest is history.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Is the above wishful thinking? It might be. I had similar thoughts a decade ago and nothing truly meaningful happened. That said, I’ve learned some valuable life lessons over the past decade and will share some of them today.

    The title of today’s piece is “what are you gonna do about it?”, but let me start by telling you what I’m not going to do. I am not going to vote in the 2020 presidential election. In previous cycles, I went out and voted third party as a protest, but I won’t even do that this time. I refuse to give such a farcical system the satisfaction of even a protest vote. I’m over it. Done.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Choosing to refrain from participation in a clearly rigged and sham presidential election process may feel like giving up, but it’s the exact opposite. It’s actually quite liberating to give up on the fantasy that voting for one of two sociopaths will materially improve your life or the direction of the country. Once you stop believing in the lazy fairytale version of politics you can get down to real action. If you accept that voting is largely a charade, you can either sit back and take it while playing video games, or you can get motivated. I see two avenues for action that can actually change things.

    The first consists of mass organized movements that unite as many disparate factions as possible to focus on a single issue. This can take the form of a workers strike, a targeted boycott or something similar. The key thing that’s prevented this from happening is Americans have been so successfully divided and conquered. “Activist leaders” often demand those who constitute a movement see eye to eye on virtually everything, yet oligarchy knows to unite whenever their core interests are even slightly threatened. A hopelessly splintered public is one reason the people always lose.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Although I’m confident in the success of such a strategy if implemented by enough people, this doesn’t mean it will materialize. I was hopeful it could happen last decade, but it never did. Americans proved to be as divided, conquered and distracted as ever, and it’s possible things will continue along this path in the years ahead. As such, waiting for mass movements that may never occur to materialize is not a sufficient strategy. You need a primary strategy, and that strategy starts with you. 

    The only thing you truly have control over is your mindset and your actions. Think about what angers you most about the system as it stands and turn that anger into something productive. What can you do as an individual to protest or reject that system? What can you do to become more resilient? Can you repurpose your skillset or profession in a way where you become more of a solution than part of the problem? Some of us can do more than others, but virtually everyone can take some action. If you can’t think of anything, think harder.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Reflecting on the past decade, every moment I spent taking control of my life and improving as an individual was worthwhile and rewarding, while every moment I spent hoping others around me would change was a gigantic disappointment.

    This doesn’t mean we should give up on mass movements, it means you cannot rely on other people to get to the point you’re at as quickly as you’d like. Think about what’s actually in your control and go for it. And good luck.

    *  *  *

    Liberty Blitzkrieg is an ad-free website. If you enjoyed this post and my work in general, visit the Support Page where you can donate and contribute to my efforts.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:45

  • 'You'll See Bodies In The Streets Of Africa' Warns Melinda Gates; Says Vaccine Is 'Ultimate Solution' To COVID-19
    ‘You’ll See Bodies In The Streets Of Africa’ Warns Melinda Gates; Says Vaccine Is ‘Ultimate Solution’ To COVID-19

    Melinda Gates says that COVID-19 is going to “be horrible in the developing world,” and that we’re going to see ‘bodies in the streets of Africa’ like what’s happening in Ecuador.

    “Look at Ecuador,” said Gates, adding “They’re putting bodies out on the street. You’re going to see that in countries in Africa.”

    During a Friday interview with CNN‘s Poppy Harlow, Gates said that when she saw how China had to enact mass quarantines in order to combat the virus, “my first thought was Africa,” adding “how in the world are they going to deal with this?

    Earlier in the interview, Gates said that vaccines will be the ‘ultimate solution’ to solving coronavirus – which she and her husband Bill have been heavily invested in for some time.

    Of course, not everyone is excited about the Gates’ endeavors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:25

  • Coronavirus Socialism: Power To 'Some' People
    Coronavirus Socialism: Power To ‘Some’ People

    Authored by Patrick Watson via MauldinEconomics.com,

    When (hopefully soon) we all get out of coronavirus lockdown and try to resume normal life, we will probably find a different “normal.”

    The best-case outcome: scientists discover a “magic bullet” treatment that quickly restores the most serious cases to health. We could then ease restrictions and get on with business.

    But more likely, any such treatment is months away and a vaccine probably a year away, so many precautions will have to stay in place. We won’t see large gatherings and crowded restaurants anytime soon.

    But we’ll see something else: a radically different economic structure.

    The US has never been truly “capitalist” but at least it had a free market façade. Thanks to the coronavirus, the façade is now crumbling.

    We will come out of this further from capitalism and closer to socialism. We know this because a leading capitalist said so.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Needpix

    Shoved Left

    Back in January, about the time Chinese authorities quarantined Wuhan, the world’s billionaires gathered in Davos, Switzerland, as they do each year.

    CNBC interviewed JPMorgan Chase (JPM) CEO Jamie Dimon on January 22. Asked about the Democratic presidential candidates, Dimon said he preferred a moderate, not a socialist. He went on:

    Capitalism is the greatest thing that ever happened to mankind. I think that people who haven’t read history books about socialism really should… Once you have governments taking control of businesses it ends up in corruption…

    If you’re talking about governments controlling corporations that’s socialism. You can do it in a small way or a big way. The small way is to put a commissar on your board remember the old Russian commissars could sit in the room or do it through regulatory or stuff like that the other way is that they actually own the company. Look at all the other countries and they start to take over the oil companies and the steel companies and utility companies.

    And the banks. The banks start making loans not to good companies not because they are properly allocating capital to its highest and best use but to keep that factory open. The bridge to nowhere to make sure the mayor doesn’t lose jobs in his town and once you do that you will have an eroding society. (full transcript)

    As I wrote at the time (see Socialism Is Coming But Not the Way You Think), Dimon actually loves misallocating capital. His bank routinely makes “bridge to nowhere” loans and does so happily as long as it gets repaid with interest.

    So if those activities define socialism, Jamie Dimon is a very confused billionaire. He professes to love capitalism, but his actions say otherwise.

    My point back then was that the US-China “Phase 1” trade deal was nudging the US toward some kind of socialism. I didn’t expect the coronavirus would soon shove us that same direction. Yet it is.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Flickr

    Collectivized Production

    Two months after Jamie Dimon said socialism doesn’t work because governments can’t properly allocate capital, Congress allocated $2.2 trillion via the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security (CARES) Act.

    Note, left-leaning Democrats didn’t do this alone. The bill was as bipartisan as it gets.

    The CARES Act does some useful things. It will help workers and small businesses who had to close down to stop the virus from spreading.

    But that’s not all. The new law gives the Treasury Department $454 billion to invest in a “special purpose vehicle” jointly with the Federal Reserve. The Fed will then allocate (or perhaps misallocate, to use Dimon’s favorite word) that money in loans to private businesses.

    But in fact, it’s way more than $454 billion. Here’s how two economists described the arrangement in a Wall Street Journal article (my emphasis in bold).

    The expectation is that the central bank will leverage this money 10 to 1, enabling it to lend up to $4.54 trillion to companies.

    That sum is more than all U.S. commercial and industrial loans outstanding at the end of 2019 ($2.35 trillion) plus all the new corporate bonds issued during 2019 ($1.41 trillion).

    Thus, if this capital is all deployed by the Fed, and at rates that will surely crowd out private capital, all capital allocation in the U.S. in 2020 will be done by the Federal Reserve System, not by the capital market. This is the largest step toward a centrally planned economy the U.S. has ever taken.

    Will the Treasury-Fed partnership wisely allocate this money? We don’t know yet, but the plan is exactly what Jamie Dimon says won’t work. Quoting him again:

    …The banks start making loans not to good companies not because they are properly allocating capital to its highest and best use but to keep that factory open. The bridge to nowhere to make sure the mayor doesn’t lose jobs in his town.

    Keeping factories open and avoiding job losses is the CARES Act’s entire point, and government, not private lenders, will decide how to do it.

    Maybe this centrally-planned financing will find the “highest and best use” Dimon thinks it should, but we don’t know that yet. We do know that private companies will get money from taxpayers, and taxpayers will bear the loss if those companies don’t repay it. The government might get equity in those companies, too.

    In other words, we are (for now, at least) collectivizing the means of production. Mao Zedong would be pleased.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Flickr

    Power to Some People

    If, like Jamie Dimon, you fear socialist misallocation, Bernie Sanders should be the least of your worries. It’s already happening on a massive scale and President Trump, not Sanders, signed the bill.

    We were heading that direction anyway; the coronavirus sped up the process. And where it will lead isn’t clear yet. But it won’t be anything you can plausibly call “capitalism.”

    More likely, we will get even more state-enforced corporatism, with socialized losses and privatized profits.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:16

  • Morgan Stanley: "The Bad Actors Of The Last Cycle Are Getting Bailed Out"
    Morgan Stanley: “The Bad Actors Of The Last Cycle Are Getting Bailed Out”

    There is a certain paradox behind the coronavirus crisis.

    On one hand it is a human, social and economic tragedy of unprecedented proportions, with tens of thousands of people dead around the globe, millions infected, tens of millions unemployed, small and medium businesses decimated, countless companies on the verge of bankruptcy and the global economy in a (hopefully brief) depression. On the other hand, it is precisely what all those who benefited from the last round of Fed bailouts – namely Wall Street banks, zombie companies, and overlevered sovereigns so desperately needed. But don’t take our word for it: here is Morgan Stanley’s chief US equity strategist explaining and admitting what so many can only whisper behind closed doors for fear of being branded conspiracy theorists or being suspended from social networks who are now the self-appointed gatekeepers of the First Amendment.

    Last Thursday the Fed surprised us yet again by providing up to $2.3T in loan support while moving further down the quality curve with their secondary market purchases pushing into high yield and CMBS. The program goes well beyond secondary  market purchases of existing credit and will also help originate new primary issuance both directly and via lending institutions–i.e., the banks–which remain in good shape to assist. While most investors have been expecting more out of the Fed, based on our conversations with many clients on Thursday and over the long weekend, this salvo from the Fed far surpassed  expectations in terms of size and scope.

    The bottom line for us is that this latest move is very much in line with our prior view that investors should not have any doubts about the Fed’s resolve to do whatever it takes to make sure this recession doesn’t turn into a depression. In fact, they now appear to be trying to limit the healthy damage we typically get from a garden variety recession.

    As noted in our prior research, we think the nature of this recession–the unprecedented suddenness and trajectory of the contraction centered on a health crisis–has provided absolute cover for policy makers to go well beyond traditional support. As such, the bad actors of the last cycle are getting bailed out, which could ultimately limit the malaise we typically get in a recession. In short, the worst stocks will likely have the biggest recoveries…

    A much more self-serving and less intellectually honest, if similarly apropos take on what is really taking place behind the scenes comes from JPMorgan’s permabullish quant, Marko Kolanovic:

    When it comes to market developments, we believe that the Fed’s action last Thursday represents a pivotal moment in this crisis. Powell’s statement included that “we will continue to use these powers forcefully, proactively, and aggressively until we are confident that we are solidly on the road to recovery” and probably the most important, historic statement, “We  should make them whole. They did not cause this.” This crisis is different from any other in recent history in that it was not caused in any way by businesses or investors. Unhindered by moral hazard, the response of fiscal and monetary authorities is and will continue to be unprecedented, with the goal of essentially making everyone ‘whole.’  We believe the significance of this development is underestimated by markets, and this reinforces our view of a full asset price recovery, and equity markets reaching all-time highs next year, likely by H1.

    Investors with focus on negative upcoming earnings and economic developments are effectively ‘fighting the Fed,’ which was historically a losing proposition

    Got that? Anyone who bothers with such trivial, anachronistic fundamentals as collapsing earnings, economic developments, the terminal disconnect between security prices and underlying cash flow dynamics now that the Fed is buying junk bonds (and soon stocks), or even bothers to look at the yield curve as if it matters anymore now that the Fed is about to unleash Yield Curve COntrol, is fighting the Fed and destined lose. Thanks Marko for not saying that anyone who still dares to think outside of the brrrrox should be arrested.

    So to loosely paraphrase Rahm Emanuel, “Never let a pandemic go to waste.” For the sake of humanity, we can only hope that it wasn’t a plandemic.

    That said, one does wonder what crisis will spontaneously emerge in 5 years when all the bad actors who were bailed out last cycle, and were just re-bailed out again, will need to be bailed out one more time?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:05

  • "It's The Perfect Storm" – SoftBank Reports Staggering $25 Billion Q1 Loss
    “It’s The Perfect Storm” – SoftBank Reports Staggering $25 Billion Q1 Loss

    In an announcement that should surprise absolutely nobody who has been paying attention, SoftBank announced in a corporate filing on Monday that the Japanese telecom conglomerate with a VC arm expected to report the biggest loss in its nearly 40-year history.

    For Q1, SoftBank expects to report a ¥1.8 trillion ($16.7 billion) loss from the company’s stake in its $100 billion ‘Vision Fund’, and another ¥800 billion ($7.4 billion) in losses from its own portfolio of investments. Even considering everything that’s been going on in the world, those are massive numbers.

    As one analyst told Bloomberg, the dire situation the company has found itself in resembles a “perfect storm,” as millions of investors recalibrate the odds of the Japanese corporate titan’s long-term survival. Of course, SoftBank’s collapse would be such a blow to the Japanese economy, that we would expect the Abe government, or even the BoJ, to immediately swoop in and bail it out, since moral hazard (at least for big corporations) no longer seems to apply.

    “This is looking more and more like the perfect storm for SoftBank,” said Justin Tang, head of Asian Research at United First Partners. “The question is whether there is more to come.”

    As WSJ explained in its report, SoftBank’s current predicament is a consequence of Chairman Masayoshi Son’s desire to make a name for himself as a discerning investor in early-stage companies. Without the ‘Vision Fund’ and its own portfolio of investments, SoftBank would still be just a boring old telecoms firm.

    Instead, with his reputation in tatters, Masa Son has now put up more than $40 billion of his personal fortune to guarantee loans to his company, an arrangement that will leave him personally liable if the situation at SoftBank goes south.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the WeWork blow-up, SoftBank has been regularly mocked over the last six months or so amid regular reports of portfolio companies folding, the latest being last week’s “OneWeb”, a startup that aimed to deploy hundreds of satellites and provide global broadband service. But with the coronavirus outbreak driving the global economy into what looks to be a punishing recession, Masa Son is quickly running out of breathing room.

    SoftBank invests in startups both for its own portfolio, as well as its ‘Vision Fund’ portfolio. While the Saudis are by far the biggest investors in the Vision Fund, with a stake of ~$45 billion, SoftBank owns a $33 billion stake in the $100 billion fund. Other investors include corporations like Foxconn and Apple, as well as Oracle Founder Larry Ellison.

    For the last few years, SoftBank has been a practically price-insensitive investor, dropping billions of dollars in Silicon Valley darlings like Uber (SoftBank has lost money on its Uber investment) as well as dozens of other startups. SoftBank and the Vision Fund have been blamed for almost single-handedly inspiring the massive bubble in startup valuations, a bubble that exploded last year after a string of disappointing IPOs – Uber, Lyft, Peloton Etc. – followed by WeWork, a company in which SoftBank had invested at a valuation of nearly $50 billion, deciding to scrap its IPO after a dramatic drop in valuations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WeWork’s board decided to sue SoftBank earlier this month after the company renegged on a $3 billion payoff to company insiders, including CEO Adam Neumann and several VC funds that backed WeWork citing clauses in an agreement that gave it a legal ‘out’.

    Unfortunately for SoftBank’s workers, the Japanese government might be left up to the task of chastising a major national champion in the middle of an unprecedented pandemic, when everything about the investing environment seems dangerously uncertain. With the pressure from Paul Singer and Elliott Management, plus the downgrade from Moody’s deep into speculative grade for its debt  (though Japanese ratings firms still see SoftBank as a low-risk bet), Masa Son apparently sees only one way forward in the near term: Buy back more stock.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:45

  • Caitlin Johnstone Rages "This Absolute Bullshit Would Not Be Possible Without Propaganda"
    Caitlin Johnstone Rages “This Absolute Bullshit Would Not Be Possible Without Propaganda”

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    So as of right now it’s Trump versus Biden. An incompetent plutocrat president selling himself as an anti-establishment people’s champion while simultaneously advancing garden variety Republican sociopathy, versus a warmongering authoritarian who is too demented to string a coherent sentence together and who is looking more and more credibly to be a rapist.

    Needless to say, this is absolute bullshit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How did we get here? How did we get to the point where the electoral contest to run the most powerful government on the planet is between a racist demented right-wing authoritarian warmongering rapist and another racist demented right-wing authoritarian warmongering rapist? How in the hell did this bullshit happen?

    There are a number of factors, including anonymous and unsubstantiated “leaks” from the US intelligence community regarding Russian support for the Bernie Sanders campaign and a shockingly coordinated maneuver by Democratic Party leadership (including former president Obama) to sabotage Sanders in the late hours before Super Tuesday.

    But the primary factor by far was domestic mass media propaganda. Propaganda during the primary season of course, with the billionaire press showing a very clear and undeniable bias against Bernie Sanders from the very beginning of the race. Had the Sanders campaign received a normal quality and quantity of mass media coverage for a candidate of his stature, he would doubtless have received far more support than he did. To deny that biased media messaging has an effect would be the same as denying that advertising, a trillion-dollar industry, has an effect.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But it goes so very much deeper than that. The influence of mass media propaganda upon the Democratic primary race was not limited to the propaganda that was employed during the actual contest; it’s been setting the foundation for it since long before that.

    Without having been raised in a media environment that is saturated with establishment propaganda, it would never occur to anyone in a million years to describe a violent authoritarian extremist like Joe Biden as a “moderate”. It would never occur to anyone to think of this crazy wingnut as “electable”. It would certainly never occur to anyone that he should be running on the platform of what passes for America’s political left wing.

    Joe Biden has been a horrible, evil politician since long before his rape allegations went mainstream and his brain started turning to porridge. If people could gaze with fresh, unmanipulated eyes upon someone who’s dedicated his entire political career to neoliberal exploitation at home and neoconservative mass murder abroad, someone who openly boasts about authoring the foundational documents of the USA PATRIOT Act, someone who promises rich donors that “nothing fundamentally will change” if he’s elected and who they know from experience can be taken at his word, it would never occur to them that this is someone who should be running for any elected office anywhere, let along within spitting distance of the most powerful one in the world.

    It is only by the ability of the mass media to manufacture the illusion of normality that this bullshit has been made possible. The way the plutocratic class controls the mass media has given them the ability to persuade people to believe that freakish extremism is normal and healthy objections to oligarchic malfeasance is freakish extremism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is the case not just with this bullshit US presidential race, but with all bullshit everywhere. A world where powerful governments attack, destroy, starve and undermine weaker governments which refuse to bow to their interests, a world where the wealthy continue to steal more and more wealth from an increasingly impoverished working class and use the leverage that wealth gets them to steal more, a world where governments demand more and more opacity for themselves and more and more transparency from ordinary people, a world where police are becoming increasingly militarized and speech is becoming increasingly restricted, a world where the response to a global pandemic is not to rally together and overcome but to advance pre-existing authoritarian agendas and manufacture support for new cold war escalations against China.

    None of this bullshit would have been possible without all of us having been raised in an atmosphere of mass-scale obfuscation and manipulation. None of us would ever accept such a world without having been manipulated into it, which is why they have done exactly that.

    We will not collectively use the power of our numbers to force a change to this oppressive status quo until we can find some way to break free of our psychic bondage to the establishment propaganda machine, and we will not find a way to do that until we change something deep within ourselves about our relationship as a species to mental narrative. But as things get increasingly weird and unpredictable, gaps will open up in our preexisting patterns. When patterns degrade to the point of unpredictability, anything becomes possible.

    We are at an adapt-or-die point as a species, and we’ll need to break free of the bullshit to make the jump. Hell, we just might make it.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:25

  • Baltimore Streets Flooded With Methadone And Suboxone During Pandemic
    Baltimore Streets Flooded With Methadone And Suboxone During Pandemic

    Methadone clinics across Baltimore City are flooding neighborhoods with “a lot” of addiction-treatment medicines after federal regulators relaxed take-home restrictions amid the COVID-19 pandemic, reported The Baltimore Sun

    In pre-corona times, addiction treatment medicines, such as methadone or Suboxone, were limited by clinics to avoid abuse or resold on the streets. Now because of relaxed federal rules, addicts can receive up to a month’s supply in one visit. 

    The Rev. Milton Emanuel Williams Jr., the pastor of New Life Evangelical Baptist Church, also the operator of Turning Point Clinic, said his facility usually doses out a day’s worth of methadone or Suboxone from his East Baltimore clinic to addicts. Now he’s sending them home with a massive 28-day supply. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rev. Milton Emanuel Williams Jr.

    “We’re putting a lot of methadone and Suboxone on the street right now, which is a huge concern to me,” said Williams. “There are folks who can’t handle all this medication.”

    Williams said a month’s supply of medicine would keep addicts out of the clinic to limit his medical staff’s exposure to a patient that could be a COVID-19 carrier. 

    The Sun notes that the federal government relaxed take-home rules for clinics to decrease the spread of the virus. 

    Williams’ clinic regularly treats 2,000 addicts per day. Now his staff is dressed head to toe in protective gear while “It’s almost impossible, in giving compassionate care, to not get close to people,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Turning Point Clinic Baltimore, Maryland

    Nonprofit Charm City Care Connection, located in East Baltimore and is a clean needle site, said it had reduced hours as well as the city’s health department’s needle-exchange program. 

    “People are having a much harder time getting clean syringes,” said Natanya Robinowitz, director of Charm City Care Connection. “People are just having to reuse multiple times or they’re having to share needles.”

    Robinowitz believes the city limiting hours of specific health programs, such as needle-exchange, could lead to an outbreak of hepatitis C or HIV.

    More than 20,000 opioid addicts live in Baltimore. The virus outbreak has not slowed the drug trade, but with tens of thousands of newly unemployed people in the region, drug usage could surge.  

    Col. Richard Worley, the city’s chief of patrol, told The Sun that drug dealers are now wearing masks and gloves on street corners. 

    Dr. Yngvild Olsen, medical director for the Institutes for Behavior Resources Inc., which runs an addiction treatment center in the city, said heroin pills that generally cost $6 on the streets are going for “$2 to $3 a pill,” she said. “One of the big questions is, what is happening with the drug supply?”

    The main reason for price declines is that subgrade heroin is being pumped into the streets. 

    Olsen said social distancing measures had taken away from group sessions and counseling for addicts. Many drug therapy sessions have now gone online. 

    Williams said a 28-day supply of addiction treatment medicine has a street value of $2,000. Methadone is dangerous and can still cause overdoses. He said some patients are likely to sell their pills. 

    Nora Volkow, the director of the National Institute on Drug Abuse, recently told Politico that the pandemic could derail President Trump’s progress in countering the opioid crisis. 

    “I think we’re going to see deaths climb again,” Volkow said. “We can’t afford to focus solely on Covid. We need to multitask.”

    Since the rule to relax take-home medicine was on a federal level, that now means clinics across the country are flooding methadone or Suboxone into communities at a very high degree. 

    And in California, officials are putting the homeless and addicts in hotels, ignoring social distancing rules. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:05

  • Army's Seattle Field Hospital Closed After 3 Days, Without Seeing A Single Patient
    Army’s Seattle Field Hospital Closed After 3 Days, Without Seeing A Single Patient

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    The panic and fear among the people who cannot be bothered to read the actual statistics about this pandemic is what should concern most preppers.  In fact, this virus has been so overhyped that the Army’s field hospital in Seattle, an “epicenter” of the pandemic has closed after three days without seeing one single COVID-19 patient.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The empty field hospital in Seattle.

    According to a report by Military.com, the hastily built field hospital set up by the Army in Seattle’s pro football stadium is shutting down without ever seeing a patient.

    This is being done “so the service can shift resources where they’re more urgently needed”, Washington state Governor Jay Inslee said.

    Medical equipment at the CenturyLink Field Event Center is being returned to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) for use elsewhere, but the governor cautioned against reading too much into the move. Governor Inslee wants people to remain in a panicked state of emergency and dependent on the government’s salvation.

    Don’t let this decision give you the impression that we are out of the woods,” Inslee said in a statement intended to push the official narrative of fear on Wednesday. 

    “We have to keep our guard up and continue to stay home unless conducting essential activities to keep everyone healthy.” 

    Washington state saw the first coronavirus death in the U.S. on February 29. Stay panicked and remain in fear, Inslee says

    “But we haven’t beat this virus yet and, until we do, it has the potential to spread rapidly if we don’t continue the measures we’ve put in place, he said.

    The state asked FEMA and the Army Corps of Engineers to convert the football stadium “before our physical distancing strategies were fully implemented and we had considerable concerns that our hospitals would be overloaded with COVID-19 cases,” Inslee said. 

    Even though the hospitals have the capacity to handle patients getting sick with the virus.

    The decision to close the Seattle field hospital comes amid early signs that the number of new cases could be hitting a plateau in New York, the epicenter of the coronavirus epidemic in the U.S., and other states.

    At a news conference Friday, New York Governor Andrew Cuomo said, “Overall, New York is flattening the curve.”

    We were never dealing with a pandemic in the general sense. We were always dealing with a tyrannical power grab by every governor in this country and at the head of that, was Dr. Anthony Fauci.  Fauci was so wrong about this virus he should be permanently discredited.  Yet Americans continue to fall in line and obey his orders to their own personal economic detriment.

    The unprecedented government response and mass panic will have lasting negative effects for all Americans. Many more will be destroyed financially and all will lose most of what’s left of our basic human rights.

    The good news is that you can find toilet paper on some online retailers again. I’ll continue to do my best to link items that were bought in a panic over the past month to help those who may need them. Toilet paper still seems to be the hottest commodity of 2020.

    *  *  *

    GOOGLE Is Doing Whatever It Can to De-Monetize SHTFplan.com And Shadow-Ban us. During these TOUGH financial times, we ASPIRE to stay completely independent and pay our full staff, so we can continue to deliver VALUE to you. It is possible for you to HELP us, by supporting our COVID-19 expert survival report HERE!  Thank You, ShtfPlan.com Staff


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:45

  • Here's What The Reopening Of The US Economy Could Look Like
    Here’s What The Reopening Of The US Economy Could Look Like

    With US health data suggesting that the spread of the coronavirus may be nearing a plateau in the U.S., public officials are under growing pressure to chart a path back to normality, something Morgan Stanley did over the weekend when it laid out a projected timeline and milestones for a return to work in the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest data show that conditions are beginning to improve. New York hospitalizations continued to flatten, with total admissions virtually stable at 18,000 and with ICU patients and intubations declining since Sunday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So far, those numbers have been far below the level officials initially braced for, sparking speculation that projection models were tampered with to paint a worst case scenario in pursuit of a total economic shutdown, one which would enable the Fed and Treasury to unleash an unprecedented bailout package targeting mostly Wall Street, America’s corporations and “top 1%”, with a  fraction of the overall fiscal stimulus left over for Main Street America.

    That said, Americans at this point will take any good news, and the NY governor provided some today: “We’ve been talking today about the fact that New York believes we have reached a plateau in the increase in the number of cases,” Cuomo said. “They’re not going down, but they’re not going up at the same rate and we believe it’s a ‘plateau.’ That is relatively good news in a world of bad options. We should start looking to ‘reopening.’”

    The dilemma facing decision-makers is a familiar one: the longer the state-by-state lockdowns last, the more economic hardship there will be. But dropping stay-at-home restrictions too soon might risk a second wave of infections.

    How Will A Reopening Happen?

    There is also a potential political clash emerging, with some of the nation’s most powerful governors saying they would form regional alliances to coordinate reopening schools and businesses after the coronavirus outbreak subsides, setting up a potential showdown with the president, who earlier today that he alone has that authority.

    That tension was on display Monday as two sets of governors – one on each coast – said they would coordinate how and when they might gradually ease their restrictions on travel and business. Shortly before both initiatives were announced, President Donald Trump tweeted that he alone had the authority to decide when states would return to normal.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “We will be driven by facts, we will be driven by evidence, we will be driven by science, we will be driven by our public health advisers, we will be driven by the collaborative spirit that defines the best of us at this important moment,” California Governor Gavin Newsom countered as he announced a partnership with Washington state and Oregon.

    “The optimum is a geographically coordinated plan,” added New York Governor Andrew Cuomo. “This virus doesn’t understand governmental boundaries.” Coordination is critical, Cuomo explained, to avoid unintended consequences – such as having thirsty residents of a state where bars are closed driving to another where they’ve been reopened.

    As Bloomberg reported, the East Coast initiative is in its early stages. Officials from those states – New York, New Jersey, Connecticut,  Pennsylvania, Delaware and Rhode Island – provided few details about what criteria they might use to restart a semblance of normal life. A panel will consist of the governors’ chiefs of staff and health and economic officials from each state. Most residents in those states are nearing the one-month mark of having been told to stay home and keep their distance from others.

    After the announcement, Massachusetts said it would join the alliance.

    For what it’s worth, Cuomo, in his daily briefing, seemed to agree with Trump that the federal government has the authority to overrule the states. But he questioned why Washington would get to direct the reopening after it delegated closures to the states.

    “Let’s see what the federal government’s plan is,” Cuomo said. Trump “left it to the states to close down, and that was a state-by-state decision, without any guidance really,” he said.

    Meanwhile, California’s governor said he would unveil a framework on Tuesday for lifting the state’s stay-home order, including the metrics that would guide that process. Last week, the state’s secretary of Health and Human Services said easing the state’s restrictions would require putting in place a system to test more people for the virus, track new cases as they appear and trace person-to-person contacts that could trigger new outbreaks.

    Further details about how to restart California’s economy will come later in the week, Newsom said, along with preliminary figures about how the virus would affect the state’s budget. Oregon and Washington, he said, will craft their own plans, although the basic principles guiding all three states would similar.

    Asked whether Trump or the nation’s governors have final say on reopening the economy, Newsom would say only that California still had a strong collaborative relationship with the federal government on the virus fight.

    “I have all the confidence in the world, moving forward, that we’ll maintain that collaborative spirit,” he said.

    Trump, for his part, said in a Twitter post Monday that he has the power to overrule governors, “open up” states and relax social-distancing practices. The declaration came after economic advisers pressed concerns within the White House about the economic fallout from the shutdown, and as Trump’s patience appeared to fray after earlier ceding to health advisers’ insistence that his initial target date of Easter was too early.

    He said he would make a decision “soon” on reopening, “in conjunction with the governors and input from others.” But he added that “it is the decision of the president, and for many good reasons.” He didn’t list any.

    What Would A Reopening Look Like?

    On Monday, governor Cuomo was joined on a conference call by the other Northeast governors. The recovery must be careful, incremental and guided by experts rather than politics, Cuomo said, and the pandemic won’t be truly “over” until a vaccine is available, which could take as long as 18 months. Ideally, a plan would also involve widespread testing, he said, to allow those without the virus – and those who have recovered and may now be resistant to it – to return to work first.

    “You only get an economic recovery if it comes on the back of a health recovery,” New Jersey Governor Phil Murphy said. “As painful as the economic reality is right now, it’s not remotely as painful as it would be if we get the sequencing wrong and we get the timing wrong.”

    As Bloomberg adds, the continued spread of the virus, while slowing, raises questions about what kind of infection rate would be considered acceptable under normal conditions — and whether the goal should be to prevent infections entirely or merely contain it enough so that the hospital system can handle the workload.

    Cuomo said the restart has to be carried out slowly while keeping an eye on the virus rates: “You’ll start to open that valve on the economic activity, and you’ll turn that valve very slowly reopening the economy, more essential workers, do it carefully do it slowly and do it intelligently,” he said.

    Meanwhile, financial markets have started to take a more positive view of the outlook. The initial improvement was mostly policy-driven, but the greater optimism of the past week seems to be at least partly related to the virus itself according to Goldman. To be clear,  the health situation remains very bad in absolute terms, especially in the US which is now ahead of Italy and Spain in terms of coronavirus-related fatalities (though still much lower on a per-capita basis). However, the number of new active cases looks to be peaking globally, projections of cumulative fatalities and peak healthcare usage are coming down, and even actual new hospitalizations in hard-hit New York City have fallen sharply.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    In a nutshell, optimists think this will allow us to reopen the economy soon. Pessimists counter that the main reason for the improvement is social distancing, which directly corresponds to reduced economic activity; if so, any economic rebound could result in a large second wave of infections, as well as renewed deterioration in the outlook for the death toll and healthcare overloads. Who is right?

    According to Goldman, much of the improvement is probably a direct consequence of social distancing and the plunge in economic activity, and could reverse quickly if people just went back to work. But even if this means that a return to “business as usual” is off the table until we have a vaccine, it might be possible to bring back at least part of the lost output with a sharp increase in testing as well as more limited changes to business practices that lower the risk of infection. In particular, the manufacturing and construction sectors—which by our estimates account for about half of the total hit to GDP in April—might well be able to increase production from the depressed current levels quite soon. For example, the US auto industry is currently planning to go from production at just 25% of capacity in April to 70% in May, following a thorough cleaning of the plants.

    One key date for global economy watchers is April 17, when China releases Q1 GDP as well as March retail sales and industrial production. Goldman’s economists expect China Q1 GDP to decline 9% year-on-year and 42% annualized. However, they see strong  sequential gains in retail sales and especially industrial production, based on the partial normalization in the high-frequency indicators constructed by our Asia micro and macro teams. Although this would still leave the monthly indicators 8-10% below levels seen a year earlier, it would not only set China up for very strong sequential GDP growth in Q2 but would also increase confidence that the West may start to recover before too long.

    That said, to set the stage for recovery, global economic policymakers still have work to do. At the most basic level, they need to keep the unavoidable “first-round” hit to aggregate supply from triggering a large “second-round” decline in  aggregate demand that could make the ultimate downturn much worse than what’s necessary to control the virus. Some stylized numbers may be useful for illustration. Assume that the direct impact of the virus is to reduce global nominal GDP in 2020 by 5%, or about $5 trillion, because significant parts of the private sector have to be shut down for a few months. Without policy support and abstracting from real-world complications such as automatic stabilizers, this $5trn GDP hit shows up as a $5trn reduction in private-sector income, borne by businesses and workers whose firms have been shuttered. Assuming a marginal propensity to spend out of income of 60%, this $5trn income hit might result in a further $3trn reduction in aggregate demand and therefore GDP, according to Goldman calculations. In turn, this new $3trn GDP hit might show up as another $3trn reduction in private sector income. And so on, until global GDP has contracted by a multiple of the original virus-related impact.

    What should policymakers do to short-circuit this downward spiral? At the broadest level, they will focus on providing all-out support, especially in countries with significant amounts of fiscal and monetary space. Governments need to replace as much as possible of the private-sector income hit, in order to limit the downward pressure on after-tax income and therefore on spending. Meanwhile, central banks will keep credit flowing, on highly attractive terms, so that households and businesses can borrow their way through whatever temporary income hit remains without cutting their spending sharply. (Eventually, concerns about inflation and fiscal deficits will come roaring back.)

    So far, the policy effort has been impressive, and Goldman now estimates that global fiscal policy will deliver a discretionary easing of nearly 5% of GDP in 2020—close to the bank’s stylized estimate of the first-round hit in the example above—plus substantial loan guarantees and automatic stabilizers. Moreover, central banks have been aggressive in countering threats to the flow of credit – and generally bailing out everyone, especially those who took on undue risk and leverage to spend billions on buybacks instead creating a “rainy day” fund – via rate cuts, large amounts of additional QE, and a variety of support programs for the debt of private borrowers or lower levels of government (i.e. state and local governments in the US and periphery member states in the Euro area). That said, the response in Europe needs to be scaled up, via greater fiscal easing. At the same time,  emerging economies will need a lot more help from the rich world—via bilateral loans, IMF and World Bank financing, access to dollar and SDR liquidity, and outright aid—to get through this severe crisis or else suffer catastrophic consequences as Guggenheim’s Scott Minerd wrote today.

    Next steps

    If policymakers can fill in the remaining holes on macro policy and manage to thread the needle between continued virus control and a gradual reopening of the economy, the level of GDP should begin to move higher in May/June, according to Goldman’s chief economist Jan Hatzius. Will the recovery look V-shaped or U-shaped? According to Bank of America, there is no chance of a V-shaped recovery. For Goldman, its forecast for US growth shows -11% in Q2, -8% in Q3, and -5% in Q4, which qualifies as U-shaped. On a quarter-on-quarter annualized basis, however, this same forecast shows -34% in Q2, +19% in Q3, and +12% in Q4, which looks rather V-shaped. Thus, Goldman’s forecast is one in which the economy recovers only gradually from the virus but nevertheless shows sequential growth rates in H2 that are unprecedented in postwar history: this will allow the bank to cover all bases, and to tell its clients it is bearish one day, as it was for much of the past months, and then to U-turn unexpectedly, and declare – as it did today – that it is now bullish and that the bottom of the market is in (even as Goldman itself had a bit of fun at its own absurd report).


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:25

  • Veteran CIA Analyst: What if Ignored COVID-19 Warnings Had Been Leaked To WikiLeaks?
    Veteran CIA Analyst: What if Ignored COVID-19 Warnings Had Been Leaked To WikiLeaks?

    Authored by Ray McGovern via ConsortiumNews.com,

    The British court system continues to mock the Magna Carta. Bowing vassal-like to U.S. pressure it persists with Star Chamber proceedings against WikiLeaks publisher Julian Assange until he is either extradited to the US or winds up dead.

    The judicial pantomime under way in London, under the guise of an extradition hearing, would make the English nobles who wrested precious civil rights from King John eight centuries ago sob in anger and shame. But nary a whimper is heard from the heirs to those rights. One searches in vain for English nobles today.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Julian Assange on balcony of Ecuadorian Embassy, file image, Getty.

    Yet the process stumbles along, as awkward as it is inexorable, toward extradition and life in prison for Assange, if he lasts that long.

    The banal barristers bashing Assange now seem to harbor hope that, unlike the case of Henry II and Thomas More, the swords of royal knights will be unneeded to “deliver the Crown from this troublesome priest” – or publisher.

    Those barristers may be spared the embarrassment of losing what residual self-respect they may still claim. In short, they may not need to bow and scrape much longer to surrender Assange to life in a US prison. He may die first.

    Puppeteers

    For the UK and US barristers and their puppeteers in Washington, salivating to seize the Australian publisher, a deus ex machina has descended backstage. It is called Covid-19 and London’s Belmarsh prison is accurately described as a petri dish for such disease. We already know of one prisoner death there from the virus. God knows how many more there already are – or will be.

    In refusing to allow nonviolent prisoner Julian Assange to leave that crowded prison (with his immunocompromised condition, weakened lungs, and clinical depression), presiding Judge Vanessa Baraitser leaves an open door to deliver Kings Boris and Donald this “troublesome” publisher by “natural” means. The swords of royal knights are not needed for this kind of faux-judicial, royal screw. And, happily for Lady Baraitser, she may not have to keep washing blood off her hands as Lady Macbeth was compelled to do.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    King John of England accepts Magna Carta at Runnymede, near Windsor, on 15 June 1215. (Flickr)

    Meanwhile, as all await Assange’s demise – one way or the other – his lawyers have had no contact with him for three weeks. They cannot visit him in prison; nor can they even talk to him by video chat, according to WikiLeaks editor-in-chief Kristinn Hrafnnson.

    Empire Drives Home an Old Lesson

    However Assange is eventually dispatched – dead or alive – from Star Chamber and prison, the Empire remains hell-bent on demonstrating that it will give no quarter to those endangering it by WikiLeaks-type disclosures.

    The lesson is now abundantly clear to all “troublesome” publishers tempted to follow Assange’s example of publishing documentary truth (a function of what used to be called journalism). They will be cut down – whether by “natural” means, or by endless faux-judicial proceedings resulting in lengthy imprisonment, financial ruin, or both.

    On Tuesday Judge Baraitser announced that the Assange extradition hearing will resume on May 18, as previously scheduled and that it may drag on into July — Covid-19 notwithstanding. The big question is whether Assange, if he is kept confined in Belmarsh prison, will live that long. Meanwhile, thousands of other nonviolent prisoners are being released from other UK prisons in a humane step to reduce the chances of infection.

    As I think of my good friend Julian, what comes to mind are the desperate words of Willy Loman’s wife Linda in “Death of a Salesman”:

    “He’s a human being, and a terrible thing is happening to him. So attention must be paid. He’s not to be allowed to fall in his grave like an old dog. Attention, attention must finally be paid to such a person.”

    (On the chance you are wondering, The New York Times, Washington Post, and Wall Street Journal – as well as National Public Radio – have paid zero attention to the extradition hearing in recent weeks – much less to Judge Baraitser’s Queen of Hearts-style, “off-with-his-head” behavior.)

    Aping Caiaphas

    The pitiable Baraitser, of course, is simply a cog in the imperial machinery, a self-impressed, self-interested, rigid functionary aping the role of Caiaphas, the high priest beholden to an earlier Empire. “It’s better that one man die,” he is said to have explained, when another nonviolent truth-teller dared to expose the cruelties of Empire to the downtrodden of his day – including the despicable accessory role played by the high priests.

    Here is how theologian Eugene Peterson’s renders Caiaphas’s words in John 11: “Can’t you see that it’s to our advantage that one man die… rather than the whole nation be destroyed.” (“Nation” in that context meant the system of privilege enjoyed by collaborators with Rome – like the high priests and the lawyers of the time.)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Assange being arrested a year ago on April 11. 2019.

    The lesson meant to be taken away from Assange’s punishment are as clear – if less bloody – as the crucifixion that followed quickly after Caiaphas explained the rationale. The behavior of today’s empire pretends to be more “civilized” as it manufactures stories of rape, leans on ratty satraps in Sweden, England, and Ecuador, and ostentatiously thumbs its nose at official UN condemnations of “arbitrary detention.” And, if that were not enough, it also practices leave-no-marks torture.

    Cutting Off Nose to Spite Face

    Meanwhile, those who in an ideal world should be natural allies of WikiLeaks, the media, are cowed, and are as pitiable as Baraitser. Many loudly betray Assange outright.

    There is no need now, two millennia later, to erect crosses along the roadside as graphic reminders to intimidate those who would expose Empire’s oppression. Civil rights wrested from King John 800 years ago – habeas corpus, for one – have become “quaint” and “obsolete”, adjectives applied by that distinguished American jurist, and George W. Bush “lawyer,” Alberto Gonzales to the Geneva Convention protections against torture. The successors to the English “nobles” of Runnymede seem to have gone the way of Gonzales.

    This is not only a case of “killing the messenger”, lamentable as that is. It amounts to cutting off our collective nose to spite our face.

    Because most Americans are so impoverished on accurate information, and so misled by the corporate media regarding WikiLeaks – and Assange, in particular – they are blissfully unaware of WikiLeaks’ capability to expose crucial information that can head off disaster.

    What If?

    Several Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS) have written retrospectives, sharing acute personal frustration at our inability to get important warnings through calcified bureaucracies before calamity struck – real calamities like 9/11 and the unprovoked attack on Iraq that has brought chaos and widespread death.

    We have asked ourselves, “What if?” What if WikiLeaks had been up and running before those catastrophes? Would those of us privy to critical – but unheeded – information have turned to WikiLeaks to get the word out? Could those liminal events have been prevented?

    The answer is consistently Yes, those events could have been exposed and prevented.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Former FBI Special Agent Coleen Rowley, whose 9/11 warnings were ignored. (Flickr)

    “WikiLeaks and 9/11: What If?” is the title The Los Angeles Times gave an Oct. 15, 2010 op-ed by former FBI Special Agent/Minneapolis Division Counsel Coleen Rowley and former Air Marshal Bogdan Dzakovic, who led an elite “Red Team” for the Federal Aviation Administration to probe vulnerabilities of airports and aircraft during the years before 9/11.

    After arresting would-be hijacker Zacarias Moussaoui on August 16, 2001, Rowley’s colleagues in Minneapolis ran into unconscionable foot-dragging by FBI headquarters functionaries, who would not permit a search of Moussaoui’s laptop computer or his personal effects.

    In late August, the same Washington functionaries stonewalled an FBI Minneapolis Division supervisor, who emphasized that he was just “trying to keep someone from taking a plane and crashing it into the World Trade Center.” (Yes, those were his exact words.) Special Agent Harry Samit, who helped arrest Moussaoui, later testified that the actions of his FBI superiors in Washington constituted “criminal negligence.”

    This was before WikiLeaks was up and running. Would Samit’s sense of duty and his frustration have prompted him to contact WikiLeaks, were it to have been available then and as technically easy to approach (via anonymous drop box) as it continues to be now? Someone should find Samit and ask that question. (Thus far, we have had no success contacting him.)

    Hijacking Planes? Child’s Play

    No one has to ask Federal Air Marshal Dzakovic whether he would have gone to WikiLeaks in desperation over the foot-dragging he encountered at senior levels of the FAA. His story is as painful to hear as Special Agent Samit’s, in terms of being ignored and stymied in the period leading up to 9/11.

    Dzakovic’s “Red Team” included two Vietnam veterans: Steve Elson, a retired Navy Seal lieutenant commander, and Brian Sullivan, a retired Army lieutenant colonel with experience in intelligence and law enforcement. They both join Dzakovic in a loud “Hell Yes,” when I asked if they would have gone to WikiLeaks before 9/11, if it were in operation at the time.

    That elite Red Team had found weaknesses in airport and airline security nine out of ten times, vulnerabilities that made it possible to smuggle weapons aboard and seize control of airplanes.

    Starting in 1997-98, the Team worked feverishly through its chain of command, and got nowhere with its urgent warnings. It then went to the FAA inspector general and, later, the Government Accountability Office; and got nowhere.

    Team members then contacted and briefed members of Congress in person; and got nowhere. As a last resort, about a year before the 9/11 attacks, Team members desperately tried to get the media interested in the calamity they could see brewing. This resulted in only two small stories, easily ignored in other mainstream media.

    Testifying before the 9/11 Commission, Dzakovic summed up the Team’s experience:

    “In the simulated attacks, the Red Team was extraordinarily successful in killing large numbers of innocent people … [and yet] we were ordered not to write up our reports and not to retest airports where we found particularly egregious vulnerabilities… Finally, the FAA started providing advance notification of when we would be conducting our ‘undercover’ tests and what we would be checking.”

    Dzakovic has expressed “contempt… for the bureaucrats and politicians who could have prevented 9/11 but didn’t.” Adding further bureaucratic insult to injury, the 9/11 Commission did not see fit to include any of his testimony in its report.

    The Unprovoked US/UK Attack on Iraq

    Many – probably hundreds – of US intelligence analysts knew in 2002-03 that there was no reliable evidence that Iraq had weapons of mass destruction or – still less – had significant ties to al-Qaeda.

    They did not have to wait for the conclusions of the five-year Senate Intelligence Committee’s study. Announcing the committee’s bipartisan findings on June 5, 2008, then Chairman Jay Rockefeller (D-WVA) was unusually direct:

    “In making the case for war, the Administration repeatedly presented intelligence as fact when in reality it was unsubstantiated, contradicted, or even nonexistent. As a result, the American people were led to believe that the threat from Iraq was much greater than actually existed.”

    What does “nonexistent” intelligence look like? And who created it out of nothing? We know the names. No one has been held accountable. One of the miscreants, former Acting CIA Director John McLaughlin, unabashedly regaled a large audience at the National Press Club last October with, “Thank God for the Deep State.”

    The question, again: surely there was at least one intelligence officer with courage enough to go to WikiLeaks – had it been operating at the time – to out the lies and liars, “undeceive” the American people, and, not incidentally, possibly head off the war on Iraq. Lt. Col. Karen Kwiatkowski, USAF (ret.), a VIPS member, says she would probably have done so.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As it was, Kwiatkowski, the 2018 recipient of the Sam Adams Award for Integrity in Intelligence, exhibited unusual courage in doing what she could to get the truth out before the attack on Iraq. In a recent posting Karen explains:

    “Almost two decades ago, I challenged the status quo in my workplace, the politicized Pentagon, for creating urgency when there was none, publicizing lies when the truth did not support the political agenda. I spoke directly to investigative reporters with Knight Ridder (as portrayed in the [Rob Reiner] film Shock and Awe).

    Films and popular media coverage of the truth took a decade to percolate. Had WikiLeaks been available in 2001 and 2002, global awareness of government and corporate lies relating to the Iraq war alone would have saved lives, protected the environment, and slowed or stopped the … wars that still invigorate Western foreign policy. The truth is owned by all of us; those willing to step up and risk careers, reputations, and even their own lives to speak truth to power are a small, and sadly, expendable number. Julian Assange and his vision of simple transparency, for the people, with technical protection for witnesses to evil, has saved lives … and elevated the concept of honesty everywhere. …”

    So you say you have not seen the film (in which an actress plays Karen), and you had been wondering how it was that Knight Ridder journalists Warren Strobel and Jonathan Landay were virtually the only newspapermen to see through and report accurately on the widespread lies before the attack on Iraq? Now you know.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The problem, of course, is that – however enterprising, dogged, and professional the behavior of Strobel and Landay, they were largely marginalized as outliers in the mainstream media and were not given much play before the war. Exposure of the lies through WikiLeaks surely would have been more effective.

    Early Warning on COVID-19

    In terms of fatalities in the U.S., the number of those succumbing to the Covid-19 pandemic already dwarf the total killed on 9/11. True, preparations, going back years, to prevent and/or deal with such a tragedy were inadequate, to say the least. Accountability for that, as usual, is zero, and there is abundant crow for recent administrations to eat. Even though this is not the time for a blame game, one is going full speed ahead. Consequently, it is doubly difficult to separate the fake-news chaff from the wheat.

    On Wednesday, ABC News put out a breathless story titled “Intelligence report warned of coronavirus crisis as early as November; analysts concluded it could be a cataclysmic event.” The alleged report was said to have been prepared by the US military’s National Center for Medical Intelligence (NCMI).

    It was alleged to include information from satellite imagery and intercepts, and to have been briefed “multiple times” at the Pentagon and White House, with detailed warnings about the spread of what has become known as Covid-19.

    Colonel Dr. R. Shane Day, director of the Center, wasted no time pouring ice water on the ABC report later on Wednesday. Col. Day stated:

    “… in the interest of transparency during this current public health crisis, we can confirm that media reporting about the existence/release of a National Center for Medical Intelligence Coronavirus-related product/assessment in November of 2019 is not correct. No such NCMI product exists.”

    A hint as to the probable motivation behind the original ABC report rests in its pointed suggestion that the “government could have ramped up mitigation and containment efforts far earlier to prepare for a crisis poised to come home.” The neuralgic question of how much time it took the Trump administration to take the pandemic seriously is, of course, a legitimate line of inquiry – assuming one stays alert for agenda-laden “breaking news.”

    There have, however, been other accurate reports of studies done about preparation for a pandemic that the Trump administration ignored.

    As for WikiLeaks, even US intelligence officials have begrudgingly acknowledged, in backhanded but unmistakable ways, that WikiLeaks’ enjoys an unusually high reputation for accuracy. Documents, including emails and the like, are its stock in trade and considerable pain is taken to verify their authenticity and then let them speak for themselves. So, were WikiLeaks to be given an authentic document with significant information on the reaction of senior officials’ anywhere to Covid-19, it would almost certainly be posted.

    The name of the game is documents. Daniel Ellsberg’s most insistent advice to leakers is: “Always bring documents.” With the help of clever, committed friends and the courageous stand taken by a highly principled senior lawyer at The New York Times, Ellsberg made it virtually impossible for the Times to turn down The Pentagon Papers. (One often overlooked, key factor was that the Times knew Ellsberg had also given the documents to the Times’ competitors.)

    Chelsea Manning and Edward Snowden followed Ellsberg’s advice on documents and, in their case, did not need to spend countless hours at a Xerox machine. It’s far easier now. Any questions as to why Assange is hated by those who have a lot to hide?

    In the coming weeks and months there will be a high premium on the kind of transparency WikiLeaks can provide in publishing information otherwise hidden from the public.

    This is particularly the case on the Covid-19 issue, inasmuch as government deliberations and decisions are being “classified,” thereby thwarting the transparency an educated populace should be able to expect.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:05

  • Wyoming Reports 1st Coronavirus Death As Global COVID-19 Cases Near 2 Million: Live Updates
    Wyoming Reports 1st Coronavirus Death As Global COVID-19 Cases Near 2 Million: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Smithfield foods closes world’s largest pork plant
    • US, Europe see decline in new cases
    • China, Russia report concerning increases in new cases
    • China ends Gilead drug trial hailed as ‘highly successful’ a few days ago
    • Italian death toll passes 20k
    • South America, Africa see acceleration in new cases
    • Cali Gov. says he’ll release plan to reopen economy tomorrow
    • Cuomo sees vaccine in 12-18 months
    • George Stephanopoulos tests positive for COVID-19
    • WHO says it will release new guidelines for countries restarting economies
    • New York deaths pass 10k
    • Cuomo reports another drop in hospitalizations
    • Florida case total passes 20k
    • Macron extends French lockdown until May 11
    • 6 governors detail plan to work together to reopen states
    • Singapore reports record jump in new cases
    • Saudi Arabia reports record jump in daily cases
    • All 9 SCOTUS justices will hear arguments via videolink for first time in history
    • UK’s top scientific advisor warned against lifting lockdown
    • Global cases top 1.9M, deaths near 120k
    • 2 NYPD detectives die from COVID-19
    • Senior Israeli rabbi succumbs to virus
    • EU competition regulator warns about risk of corporate takeovers from China
    • In Ecuador, police move to collect 800 bodies from a hard hit village
    • Trump likely to cut money for WHO
    • Iran reports 1,600+ new cases, 100+ deaths
    • Putin warns outbreak getting worse
    • Australia, New Zealand keep restrictions in place despite drop in new cases

    *     *     *

    Update (2000ET): For anybody else who felt that 2 million number hit just a little too early, BNO News reports that Johns Hopkins is miscounting the total case number for Florida by more than 100k.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (1950ET): Bloomberg just confirmed that by at least one measure, the global total of confirmed coronavirus cases has passed 2 million, more than doubling since April 3.

    What’s more; the state of Wyoming reported its first death linked to COVID-19, making it the 50th state to report a COVID-19-related death. The sparsely populated Wyoming has a population of fewer than 600k people, making it the 2nd most sparsely populated state in the country.

    Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin promised at tonight’s White House press briefing 80 million taxpayers should receive their “stim checks” by Wednesday, and assured small businesses still waiting for a lifeline that the government is definitely working on it. Meanwhile, President Trump said he hoped to reopen the country “ahead of schedule,” despite that whole back-and-forth with the states.

    *     *     *

    Update (1720ET): In another discouraging sign of just how entrenched the virus has become in the Middle East, Saudi Arabia reported its largest jump in new cases on Monday, confirming 472 new cases in the last 24 hours, bringing its total to 4,934 cases.

    The Supreme Court said on Monday that for the first time in history, all nine judges will hear cases argued via teleconference rather than in the courtroom due to the coronavirus pandemic.

    *     *     *

    Update (1550ET): Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot said Monday afternoon that she expects her city to remain closed past the end of April.

    *     *     *

    Update (1520ET): Not content to let Cuomo and his fellow governors on the East Coast have all the fun, California Gov. Gavin Newsom said he’d release a plan on Tuesday outlining how he’ll reopen his state. He said Oregon, Washington and California have developed a cooperative “framework” to get their local economies back on line. Reporters can expect the plan around lunchtime, he added.

    Governors around country (including Texas Gov. Greg Abbott, who expressed impatience in delaying the reopening much longer over the weekend) have now committed to releasing plans for reopening their economies. If a few days pass, and those plans aren’t out, that’s not going to be great for the market’s confidence.

    *     *     *

    Update (1455ET): Cuomo said that the state has acquired roughly 3k ventilators from private companies, many of them in China, before complaining about FEMA’s refusal to buy ventilators and PPE and masks for the states, forcing them to source the items on their own.

    He also complained about other federal rules, and insisted that if the Feds imposed guidelines on the states insisting on mass testing before reopening, he wouldn’t be able to comply because “I can’t purchase enough diagnostic tests.”

    *     *     *

    Update (1415ET): A hastily organized press conference involving the governors from six northeastern states – NY, NJ, CT, RI, DE, RI, PA – is underway, as the group explain to the public how they will work together to cut costs and pool resources to battle the epidemic, and coordinate the difficult decision of reopening the regional economy.

    Earlier, several governors insisted that they and they alone would decide when to reopen their states, and the briefing was apparently called after President Trump insisted he had the sole power to reopen the states – which many immediately rebuffed.

    At the briefing, the governors’ response was delivered by New Hampshire’s Tom Wolfe.

    “Since we had the responsibility of closing the state down…we have the responsibilioty for opening it up…you’ve got to get people healthy first before reopening the economy, or it’s not going to work…we’re almost ready to start moving on to the next sense which is moving back to some semblance of a new normal,” said New Hampshire Gov. Tom Wolfe. “It was our responsibility to steer our way through these uncharted waters and it’s our responsibility to steer our way back.”

    Watch the briefing live below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    RI Gov. Gina Raimondo said the governors are the ones who have “shown great leadership” in navigating this crisis, while the federal government procrastinated and failed to come up with a consistent, coherent plan.

    All six governors pledged to form a regional task force designed to planning the reopening, each to include a public health official, an economic development official and each governors’ chief of staff.

    As far as when the guidelines would be ready, Gov. Cuomo said it would “have to be within weeks.”

    And, in what sounded like a direct rebuke to Mayor de Blasio, who tried to cancel NYC school until the end of the year, only for Cuomo to push back and reverse the order, Cuomo said re-starting business would be impossible without re-starting schools.

    “We have one state…all areas need to reopen at the same time,” Cuomo said.

    French President Macron, meanwhile, said Monday night that he would extend the country’s lockdown until May 11 as new cases and deaths continue to slide.

    Portugal reported 349 new cases of coronavirus and 31 new deaths, for a total of 16,934 cases and 535 deaths. France reported 574 more coronavirus deaths over past 24 hours, raising its toll to 14,967. In Indonesia, which has already admitted to lying about confirmed cases, officials reported 316 new cases, bringing the total to 4,557.

    Below, we noted comments from a WHO press briefing earlier where Dr. Tedros insisted that the organization remained on good terms with the US, even as President Trump prepares to pull funding.

    The number of confirmed COVID-19 cases around the world has just passed 1.9 million, while the global death toll approaches 120k.

    *     *     *

    Update (1255ET):  According to the New York Post, the head of the NYPD’s detective union described the virus as an “invisible bullet” as two more detectives succumbed to the virus. Roughly one-fifth of NYPD officers have called out sick as many have been exposed to the virus, and many have gone on to develop symptoms and test positive.

    The NYPD has lost 22 total employees so far. As of Sunday evening, 2,344 uniformed officers and 489 civilian members of the department had contracted the disease. Civilian employees have taken it the hardest, with 17 dying.

    *    *    *

    Update (1240ET): In keeping with the theme of East Asia experiencing the ‘second wave’ of the novel coronavirus outbreak already, Singapore’s Health Ministry reported 386 new cases on Monday, the city’s biggest daily jump, taking its total confirmed cases to 2,918. The city-state, which is under a partial lockdown, also reported its 9th death.

    Many of the new cases have been linked to dormitory-style housing where migrant workers often stay, giving Singapore cause to follow China’s lead and blame the rebound on foreigners, despite Singapore tightening travel restrictions 2 weeks ago on non-residents.

    Meanwhile, Sky News reports that the UK’s chief scientific adviser said that although the first signs of “flattening” in the UK, lifting lockdown too early would risk a 2nd wave and would be a “complete waste of everything everyone’s done until now.”

    *     *     *

    Update (1153ET): With much of the country on holiday, Italy’s Civil Protection Service reported 566 new deaths on Monday, bringing its total to 20,465. Additionally, it reported another 3,153 cases, bringing its total to 159,516. Though Italy’s death toll has finally passed 20k, the numbers released on Monday suggest that a slight jump in new deaths over the weekend was, in fact, a blip, and that Italy remains right around the peak.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, on Tuesday, Italy will follow Spain by starting to reopen its economy, as the fact finally sets in that governments simply can’t afford to put off reopening longer than absolutely necessary. It’s been almost a month, infections are slowing – it’s time to get back to work.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But while the economic imperative is an unfortunate reality that, for many, represents a hobbsian choice between risking infection vs. risking everything else, the world will be watching closely as Italy, Spain – and now even Iran – start opening ‘non-essential’ businesses again.

    *     *     *

    Update (1153ET): Gov. Cuomo said later in his press conference that he sees a vaccine arriving for distribution among human patients in 12-18 months, a projection that hasn’t changed in 2 months.

    *     *     *

    Update (1140ET): Following reports that President Trump was planning to yank US funding for the WHO, the organization announced on Monday that it would announce a new list of guidelines for the handful of countries – including China – that are beginning the process of reopening their economies.

    The WHO also proposed that it buy goods in demand to fight against price gouging. One WHO doctor added that he expects things to remain things to stay like this for a while until a cure arrives. Dr. Tedros at one pointed added that he hoped US support for the organization would continue (because otherwise, he will become even more beholden to China, never a comfortable place to be in).

    In an update on global research, the organization said that it is tracking more than 70 vaccines in development, with 3 already progressing to human trials.

    Maenwhile, as Cuomo insisted New York was hitting a ‘plateau’, the situation in Florida has continued to worsen, with 1,045 new cases reported over the last 24 hours, bringing the state’s total to 20,601.

    *     *     *

    Update (1120ET): As Andrew Cuomo begins his Monday briefing, New York State reported another slowdown in hospitalizations linked to COVID-19. As expected, he revealed that coronavirus deaths in the state had passed 10k, the highest in the US, and more deaths than many countries in Europe, including tripling Germany’s just over 3k deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Watch the rest of his press conference here:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Cuomo insisted that the curve continued to flatten over the last 24 hours.

    “Here’s the good news, the curve continues to flatten…it appears that we have a plateau…it’s flattening, the flattening of the curve. The increases slow down, and flatten out, over a period of time. If you look at the number of total admissions, that’s definitely a flattening. Still going up a little bit…”

    He also released new data for new patients, as well as patients moved into the ICU.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cuomo added that the concept of dying on Easter – a “high holy day” for Catholics (and, indeed, Christians of all stripes) – made the number from yesterday, which was lower than the day before, bringing the 3-day average to the lowest since NY started publishing data.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After 585 crewmen aboard the USS Theodore Roosevelt were infected with the virus, one of them died Monday of complications related to the disease, according to a statement from the Navy, released just weeks after the ship’s commander was fired for trying to keep his people safe by begging his superiors to take more definitive action in a letter that eventually leaked.The name and other details about the sailor’s identity haven’t been released. He had tested positive on March 30 and was taken off the ship to “isolation housing” along with four other sailors. On April 9 – Thursday – he was found unresponsive during a medical check, and moved to ICU. He died Monday, per the NYT

    *     *     *

    Update (0940ET): ABC News’ George Stephanopoulos revealed during Monday’s episode of “Good Morning America” that he had tested positive for COVID-19 after his wife, Ali Wentworth, contracted the infection. 

    He said he is asymptomatic.

    “I actually feel great,” he said. “I’ve never had a fever, never had cough, never had shortness of breath, never had chills, any of the classic symptoms you’ve been reading about.”

    Stephanopoulos is an anchor at ABC News, and a former press secretary for the Clinton Administration.

    *     *     *

    Update (0940ET): Britain’s Department of Health and Social Care has just released the latest round of figures, showing a slight drop in deaths after UK for two days in a row reported the most deaths for any country outside the US. 717 new deaths and 88,621 new positive tests emerged.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (0830ET): Iran reported 1,617 new COVID-19 cases and 111 new deaths, for a total of 73,303 cases and 4,585 deaths.

    *     *     *

    After reporting another promising slowdown in the rate of COVID-19-linked deaths yesterday, Spain reported only 517 deaths on Sunday, the lowest number since the country’s lockdown began. Now, with much of Western Europe observing a holiday on Monday, the Spanish government is beginning the process of reopening in the economy, despite still being roughly around the ‘peak of the curve’.

    Spain wasn’t the only embattled European country to report some encouraging progress on Sunday: Italy reported its lowest number of new deaths since March 19, as the number of people in intensive care continues to decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yesterday was the first day in weeks that Spaniards were allowed to leave their homes and travel to see family for the Easter holiday. Now, on Monday, construction workers in Spain are returning to work after a two-week pause on their activities, though the government has warned that it could reimpose the lockdown if the spread starts to accelerate once again.

    Globally, the number of confirmed infections rose by 72,523 on Sunday, the lowest number of additional cases in seven days. According to Johns Hopkins, roughly 1,859,011 have been confirmed worldwide as of Monday morning. Additionally, the daily death toll on Sunday also dropped to 5,417, as the rate of growth slowed to just 5%, its slowest rate since March 9. The US also saw a significant slowdown in deaths on Sunday, with just 1,528 Americans losing their lives. This is down sharply from a peak of more than 2,000 just two days earlier, and represents a daily growth rate of just 7%, the slowest since March.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The FT

    But more concerning, as the lockdown drags on in the US, are situations like the closure of the world’s largest pork producing plant, which is owned by Smithfield Foods, and is situation in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Slaughterhouse shutdowns are disrupting the supply of US food, and harshly undermine governors’ assurances that the food supply is safe and consumers shouldn’t hoard supplies. The plant was closed for a few days last week for a deep clean after several employees tested positive for the virus. But worries about the outbreak have prompted management to close the plant ‘indefinitely’. That one plant supplies roughly 5% of America’s pork.

    Europe and the US weren’t the only places to report slowdowns in new cases and deaths. Australia and New Zealand plan to keep coronavirus-inspired restrictions on movement in place despite the two countries reporting roughly 50 new cases combined over the weekend.

    However, outbreaks in certain regions are only just beginning to accelerate.

    As China abruptly ends a Gilead drug trial that had been hailed as ‘extremely promising’ just days ago, the Indian Council for Medical Research is stepping its own race for a cure after announcing plans for a clinical trial using plasma from recovered coronavirus patients to treat those who are still critically ill, as the country’s caseload continues to rise steadily.

    Last night, we reported that China reported its largest number of new cases in weeks, as Beijing’s claimed that practically all of the 108 new cases involve foreigners or traveling Chinese nationals returning home ring particularly hollow when one considers that China has reduced the number of people crossing its borders by 90% as part of its efforts to contain the virus. According to Al Jazeera, Liu Haitao, an official with the National Immigration Administration, said the number of cases was still on the rise in the countries along China’s borders, per Al Jazeera.

    The world’s wariness of China has continued to intensify, as EU competition regulator Margrethe Vestager urged EU member-states to prevent China from taking advantage of low valuations to launch takeovers of critical companies during an interview with the FT.

    The BBC’s Robin Brant had some more thoughts on China’s ‘imported’ case problem.

    Imported cases have been China’s focus for several weeks now. It believes the main threat now to be people bringing the virus back to the country.

    Most of these people are Chinese returning home. The arc of China’s efforts to tackle, contain and end the outbreak went like this: local officials knew about an emerging outbreak but didn’t act; the national government imposed a draconian lockdown of Wuhan; China imposed domestic travel restrictions but insisted that international travel to and from China should not be cut; the virus spread abroad; China believed it had successfully contained the outbreak then switched its focus to people bringing it back here from abroad.

    Something like a cat and mouse chase has emerged – despite drastically reducing international flights into China, barring any direct arrivals into Beijing and insisting that passengers now undergo strict quarantine, people found a weak point.

    The usually obscure land crossing between Russia and China in the northern province of Heilongjiang has seen a persistent cluster of travellers bringing the virus with them. New ‘imported’ cases there are almost all Chinese coming home. And they appear to be spreading it. The latest official figures reveal 10 new domestic cases, seven of which are in Heilongjiang, home to that land crossing.

    After the total number of confirmed coronavirus cases in Russia doubled last week, Russia reported 2,558 new cases of the novel coronavirus on Monday, representing a 16% acceleration over the previous day, a record daily rise, bringing its overall nationwide tally to 18,328. 18 new deaths brought the death toll to 148. In a rare move, Vladimir Putin warned Monday that the outbreak is getting worse.

    A former chief rabbi of Israel has died of COVID-19 – the highest profile death from the disease in Israel. The rabbi, Eliyahu Bakshi-Doron, 79, was chief rabbi of the Sephardi community, which includes Jews or their descendants from the Iberian Peninsula, North Africa and the Middle East, from 1993 to 2003.

    In Ecuador, one of the worst-hit countries in South America, police removed almost 800 bodies in recent weeks from homes in Guayaquil, the epicenter of the country’s coronavirus outbreak, which has completely overwhelmed its meager health system, per Al Jazeera.

    And finally, the Washington Post reports that President Trump is likely to announce restrictions on US funding for the WHO later this week over its handling of the coronavirus pandemic and its persistent kowtowing to Beijing, which Trump argued has jeopardized global health.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 19:56

  • Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Chart
    Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Chart

    Mixing metaphors magnificently, if this ‘picture’ was worth a thousand words, the following chart is worth six trillion dollars as it exposes the ugly reality of America today that CNBC proclaimed so proudly on Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you had any doubt about what (or who) is important to the unelected officials in The Eccles Building (and arguably the elected officials demanding strings be pulled behind the scenes) as they pump asset values ever higher, this chart makes it clear… it’s not you America.

    In a succinct note from Nordea Capital Markets, entitled rather cleverly “The Flipside Of Oprahnomics” Andreas Steno Larsen and Joachim Bernhardsen use the entertainer’s infamous “You get a car, you get a car, everybody gets a car” line as a jumping off point to highlight just how ‘unequal’ The Fed’s “you get a bailout, you get a bailout, everybody gets a bailout” plan really is…

    It looks like the bail-out and QE schemes have provided a better windshield for capital owners than for the hourly paid employees, if we judge it by the most recent trends. Equities are UP again, while initial claims keep skyrocketing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If capital owners grow more comfortable with the outlook, it may also end the job market menace. It is essentially impossible to bail out Main Street without also bailing out Wall Street, even if the Fed’s PR department will keep trying to convince you otherwise.

    The Fed is now both the lender and buyer of last resort… Oprahnomics it is!

    It is a pretty common conclusion that the COVID-19 virus will forever alter the world (Good old Kissinger joined the choir this weekend), why the Fed/US Treasury may risk bail-outing companies or even sectors that are ill-equipped to survive in the post-COVID-19 world.

    For how long can public credit lines remain in place, should a company or a whole sector continuously struggle to restart demand?

    Take the example of the retail sector. If consumption is hypothetically lastingly moved to online platforms, the Fed and the Treasury will probably keep bailing out a sector that will inevitably have to decrease in size.

    It is perhaps politically impossible not to bail out everything, but we simply struggle to fully grasp the potential scope for moral hazard issues growing on the balance sheet of the Fed; that is probably a question for another quarter, though. Right now, capital owners seem happy with the strategy. We have our doubts whether they will be as happy in 2-3 years from now.

    As we previously concluded, it would appear the score is simple: American Middle Class 0 – Federal Reserve 6,083,131,000,000.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 19:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest